HP LaserJet 4000 and 4050 Series Printers Service

Manual Part No.
C4251-91003
Printed on at least
50% Total Recycled Fiber with
at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper
*C4251-91003*
*C4251-91003*
C4251-91003
HP LaserJet 4000 and 4050 Series Printers Service Manual
Copyright© 1999
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Printed in USA
HP LaserJet 4000 and
4050 Series Printers
Service Manual
HP LaserJet 4000 and 4050
Series Printers
Service Manual _____________
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Company 1999
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptation, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except
as allowed under the copyright
laws.
Publication number
C4251-91003
First edition, April 1999
Warranty
Trademark Credits
The information contained in
this document is subject to
change without notice.
PostScript™ is a trademark of
Adobe Systems Incorporated
which may be registered in
certain jurisdictions.
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with
respect to this information.
HEWLETT-PACKARD
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or
other damage alleged in
connection with the furnishing or
use of this information.
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 USA
CompuServe™ is a U.S.
trademark of CompuServe, Inc.
Windows® is a U.S. registered
trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
TrueType™ is a U.S. trademark
of Apple Computer, Inc.
ENERGY STAR® is a U.S.
registered service mark of the
U.S. EPA.
Contents
1 Printer Description
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Printer Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Model and Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Site Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9
Space Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Paper Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
Supported Types of Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Guidelines for Using Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Card Stock and Heavy Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Laser Safety Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Canadian DOC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
FCC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25
Laser Statement for Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26
Toner Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Environmental Product Stewardship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
2 Service Approach
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Service Approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Parts and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Helpful Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Phone Numbers for Ordering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Exchange Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Consumables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
World Wide Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
HP Service Parts Information Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
HP Support Assistant Compact Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
HP FIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Toner Cartridge Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Warranty Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Contents-1
3 Printer Operation
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Using the Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Control Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Control Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Control Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Settings and Defaults. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Control Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Quick Copy Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Private/Stored Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Print Quality Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
Printing Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
EIO Menu (Networked Printers). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29
Resets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32
Service Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Setting the Page Count, Maintenance Count, and
Serial Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Cold Reset Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Clear Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
Testing the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37
Resetting the Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38
System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
MS-DOS System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Parallel DOS Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-39
Serial MS-DOS Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Printer I/O Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Parallel Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Serial Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
4 Printer Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Cleaning the Printer and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Cleaning Spilled Toner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Reset Maintenance Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Expected Life of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Contents-2
5 Functional Information
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Power Supply System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
AC/DC Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Overcurrent Overvoltage Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
High-voltage Power Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Toner Cartridge Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Engine Controller System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Engine Controller Board Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Laser and Scanner Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Paper Motion Monitoring and Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Solenoids, Sensors, Clutches, and Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Engine Test Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Formatter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
PowerSave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
EconoMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Input/Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Printer Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Random Access Memory (RAM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
DIMM Slots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Page Protect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
PJL Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
PML . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Image Formation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Photosensitive Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Writing the Image. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
Developing the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Transferring the Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Image Fusing/Variable Fusing Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Paper Feed System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
Clutches and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
Printing from Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
Printing from Tray 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38
Printing from the Optional 500-sheet
Universal Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
Envelope Feeder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-44
Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-46
Paper Jam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-48
Basic Sequence of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49
Contents-3
6 Removing and Replacing Parts
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Removal and Replacement Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Removing Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Rear Right Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Left Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Front Right Side Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
Tray 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Removing Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Fuser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18
Formatter Cage Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Output Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
Laser Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
Main Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
Transfer Roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
Tray 1 Pickup Roller. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
Registration Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
Paper Feed Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
Formatter Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
Gear Train . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
Delivery Drive Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module . . . 6-42
Engine Controller Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-44
Paper Feed Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Separation Rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-49
Paper Feed Module Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Paper Feed Module Gear Train Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Paper Feed Module Side Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52
Lower Paper Feed Module Plate (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN
and 4050 T/4050 TN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53
PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN and
4050 T/4050 TN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-54
PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N and 4050/4050 N) . . 6-55
PCA Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-56
Contents-4
7 Troubleshooting
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Troubleshooting Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Troubleshooting Flowchart (Continued). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
Troubleshooting the Printing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Preliminary Operating Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
Power On. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Engine Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-12
Event Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Printer Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
General Paper Path Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-45
Information Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-48
Image Quality. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-54
Image System Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-74
Interface Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-77
AUTOEXEC.BAT Standard Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-81
Reference Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Locations of Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-84
Paper Path. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-90
Engine Controller Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-93
Paper Size Detection Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-94
Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-97
PCAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-100
Sensors and Thermistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-102
Solenoids and Clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-105
Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-108
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-110
8 Parts and Diagrams
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
How To Use the Parts Lists and Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Accessories and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Common Screws and Replacement Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Illustrations and Parts Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Alphabetical Parts List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Numerical Parts List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-67
Contents-5
Contents-6
1
Printer Description
Overview
This chapter discusses the following:
●
Printer Features
●
Identification
●
Site Requirements
●
Paper Specifications
●
Safety Information
Overview 1-1
Printer Features
Table 1-1. Printer Features for the HP LaserJet 4000 Series Printer
Speed
17 pages per minute (ppm)
100 MHz RISC microprocessor
First page out = 15 sec.
Resolution
300 dpi with PCL5e/HP’s PostScriptTM Level 2 emulation (PS)
600 dpi with PCL5e/PS
HP FastRes 1200 (PCL6 only)
HP ProRes 1200 at half engine speed (PCL6, PS)
Typefaces
110 Scalable TrueTypeTM (80 built-in, 30 via HP FontSmart, all PS
and PCL accessible)
Memory Options
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 T: 4 MB RAM standard
HP LaserJet 4000 N/4000 TN: 8 MB RAM standard
Optional Memory:
4, 8, 16, and 32 MB EDO DIMMs
4, 8, 16, 32, and 64 MB SDRAM DIMM
Mass Storage Options
2 and 4 MB Flash DIMMs
Greater than 1 GB hard disk
Interface
Bidirectional IEEE 1284 compliant parallel interface
RS-232 9-pin serial
Paper Handling Connector (PHC)
10Base-T and 10Base-2 (HP LaserJet 4000 N/4000 TN)
LocalTalk
Optional Networking
10Base-T and 10Base-2
10/100Base-TX
Token Ring
LocalTalk
Expansion Slots
3 100-pin DIMM slots
2 Enhanced I/O (EIO) slots
1-2 Printer Description
Table 1-1. Printer Features for the HP LaserJet 4000 Series Printer (continued)
Paper Trays
100-sheet Tray 1
Size: 3 by 5 in to legal (76 by 127 mm to 216 by 356 mm)
●
500-sheet Tray 2 (HP LaserJet 4000/ 4000 N)
Size: letter, legal, A4
●
250-sheet Trays 2 and 3 (HP LaserJet 4000 T/ 4000 TN)
Size: letter, A4, executive, legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS), A5
●
Optional Universal 500-sheet Tray
Supports standard and custom sizes from 5.8 by 8.2 in (149
by 210 mm) to 8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm).
●
Paper Path
Straight through from Tray 1 to Rear Output Bin
or to Top Output Bin
Output Capacity
250-sheet Top Output Bin
50-sheet Rear Output Bin
Paper Handling Options
Duplexer, Envelope Feeder, Optional 500-sheet Universal Tray
Assembly
Printer Features 1-3
Table 1-2. Printer Features for the HP LaserJet 4050 Series Printer
Speed
17 pages per minute (ppm)
133 MHz RISC microprocessor
First page out = 15 sec.
“RIP ONCE” capability with 16 MB or hard disk option
Resolution
300 dpi with PCL5e/HP’s PostScriptTM Level 2 emulation (PS)
600 dpi with PCL5e/PS
HP FastRes 1200 (PCL6, PS)
HP ProRes 1200 at engine speed (17 ppm) (PCL6, PS)
Typefaces
110 Scalable TrueTypeTM
(80 built-in, 30 via HP FontSmart, all PS and PCL accessible)
Euro symbol
Memory Options
HP LaserJet 4050/4050 T: 8 MB RAM standard
HP LaserJet 4050 N/4050 TN: 16MB RAM standard
Optional Memory:
4, 8, 16, MB EDO DIMMs
4, 8, 16, 32, 64 MB SDRAM DIMM
Mass Storage Options
2 and 4 MB Flash DIMMs
Greater than 1 GB hard disk
Expansion Slots
3 100-pin DIMM slots
2 enhanced I/O (EIO) slots
Interface
Bidirectional IEEE 1284-compliant parallel
10/100Base-TX (HP LaserJet 4050 N/4050 TN)
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver (FIR)
RS232 9-pin serial
Paper Handling Connector (PHC)
Optional Networking
10Base-T and 10Base-2
10/100Base-TX
Token Ring
LocalTalk
1-4 Printer Description
Table 1-2. Printer Features for the HP LaserJet 4050 Series Printer (continued)
Paper Trays
100-sheet Tray 1
Size: 3 by 5 to legal (76 by 127 mm to 216 by 356 mm)
●
500-sheet Tray 2 (HP LaserJet 4050/ 4050 N)
Size: letter, legal, A4
●
250-sheet Trays 2 and 3 (HP LaserJet 4050 T/ 4050 TN)
Size: letter, A4, executive, legal, B5 (ISO), B5 (JIS), A5
●
Optional 500-sheet Universal Tray
Supports standard and custom sizes from 5.8 by 8.2 in (149
by 210 mm) to 8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 mm).
●
Paper Path
Straight through from Tray 1 to Rear Output Bin
or to Top Output Bin
Output Capacity
250-sheet Top Output Bin
50-sheet Rear Output Bin
Paper Handling Options
Duplexer, Envelope Feeder, Optional 500-sheet Universal Tray
Assembly
Printer Features 1-5
Table 1-3. Comparison of HP LaserJet 4000 Series Printers
HP LaserJet
4000
HP LaserJet
4000 T
HP LaserJet
4000 N
HP LaserJet
4000 TN
optional
optional
standard
standard
3
4
3
4
Standard RAM
4 MB internal
4 MB internal
8 MB internal
8 MB internal
250-Sheet Tray
not available
2 standard
not available
2 standard
500-Sheet Tray
standard
not available
standard
not available
500-Sheet
Universal Tray
optional
optional
optional
optional
> 1 GB EIO Drive
optional
optional
optional
optional
Envelope Feeder
optional
optional
optional
optional
Duplexer
optional
optional
optional
optional
Ethernet 10-T/ 10-2
LocalTalk
Max. # Input Bins
1-6 Printer Description
Table 1-4. Comparison of HP LaserJet 4050 Series Printers
HP LaserJet
4050
HP LaserJet
4050 T
HP LaserJet
4050 N
HP LaserJet
4050 TN
Ethernet 10-T/ 10-2
LocalTalk
optional
optional
optional
optional
10/100 Base TX
optional
optional
standard
standard
Max. # Input Bins
3
4
3
4
Standard RAM
8 MB internal
8 MB internal
16 MB internal
16 MB internal
250-Sheet Tray
not available
2 standard
not available
2 standard
500-Sheet Tray
standard
not available
standard
not available
500-Sheet
Universal Tray
optional
optional
optional
optional
> 1 GB EIO Drive
optional
optional
optional
optional
Envelope Feeder
optional
optional
optional
optional
Duplexer
optional
optional
optional
optional
HP Fast InfraRed
Receiver (FIR)
optional
optional
standard
standard
Printer Features 1-7
Identification
Model and Serial Numbers
The model number and printer serial number are listed on an
identification label located under the top cover on the right side of the
printer.
The model number is alphanumeric, such as C4253A for the
HP LaserJet 4050 N printer.
The serial number contains information about the Country of Origin,
the Revision Level, the Production Code, and Production Number of
the printer. An example of a serial number is USBB123456.
The top label also contains power rating and regulatory information as
shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1
Sample Label
1-8 Printer Description
Site Requirements
The following environmental specifications must be maintained to
ensure the proper operation of the printer. Consider the following
points before installing the printer:
●
Install in a well-ventilated, dust-free area.
●
Install on a hard, flat and continuous surface, with all four printer
feet level. Do not install on carpet or other soft surfaces.
●
Ensure adequate power is supplied. Printer power requirements
are listed in Table 1-5. (Uninterruptable power supplies (UPSs)
are not recommended.)
●
Install where temperature and humidity is stable, away from water
sources, humidifiers, air conditioners, refrigerators, or other major
appliances.
●
Install away from direct sunlight, open flames, or ammonia fumes.
If the printer is placed near a window, make sure the window has
a curtain or blind to block any direct sunlight.
●
Install with enough space around the printer for proper access
and ventilation.
●
Install away from the direct flow of exhaust from air ventilation
systems.
Table 1-5. Electrical Specifications for the HP LaserJet 4000 and 4050 Series
Printers
Volts
Frequency
Amperes
Watts (typical)
100-127 VAC±10%
50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz
8A
printing = 330 W
standby = 22 W
PowerSave On = 20 W
(EPA ENERGY STAR®)
220-240 VAC±10%
50/60 Hz ± 3 Hz
4A
printing = 330 W
standby = 22 W
PowerSave On = 20 W
(EPA ENERGY STAR®)
Site Requirements 1-9
Space Requirements
39.67 in (100.76 cm)
full length, trays and Rear Output Bin open
16.77 in (42.6 cm)
printer only, Rear Output Bin closed
15.4 in
(39.0 cm)
HP LaserJet
4000/4000 N and
4050/4050 N
18.5 in
(46.99 cm)
with cover open
13.3 in
(34.3 cm)
with cover closed
HP LaserJet
4000 T/4000 TN and
4050 T/4050 TN
20.1 in
(51.19 cm)
with cover open
15.5 in
(38.5 cm)
with cover closed
Figure 1-2
Printer Dimensions
Printer Weight (without Toner Cartridge)
●
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N and 4050/4050 N printers:
39.27 lb (17.85 kg)
●
HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN and 4050 T/4050 TN printers:
45.66 lb (20.71 kg)
1-10 Printer Description
Environmental Requirements
Table 1-6. Printer and Toner Cartridge Environmental Conditions
Item
Operating
Storage
Temperature
50-91° F (10-32° C)
32 to 95° F (0 to 35°C)
Relative Humidity
20-80% RH (with no
condensation)
10% to 95% RH
Table 1-7. Acoustic Emissions (Per ISO 9296)
Printer State
Sound Power
Printing, 17 pages per minute
(ppm)
Lwad= 6.6 bels (A)
Printing, 8 ppm
Lwad= 6.2 bels (A)
PowerSave
Lwad= 0 bels (A)
Site Requirements 1-11
Paper Specifications
The following tables show paper specifications for the
HP LaserJet 4000 and 4050 series printer.
Table 1-8. Paper Specifications, Tray 1
Supported
Paper
Dimensions*
Minimum Size
(custom)
3 by 5 in***
(76 by 127 mm)
Maximum Size
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
Transparencies
Labels
Same as minimum
and maximum paper
sizes listed above.
Envelopes
*
**
***
Weight
Capacity**
16 to 53 lb
(60 to 199 g/m2)
100 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) paper
Thickness:
0.0039 in to 0.0045 in
(0.099 to 0.114 mm)
75 transparencies
Thickness:
0.005 in to 0.007 in
(0.127 mm to
0.178 mm)
50 labels
20 to 28 lb
(75 to 105 g/m2)
10 envelopes
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
To print custom-size paper see the user’s guide.
Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Custom media must be fed short edge first (portrait).
Table 1-9. Paper Specifications, Tray 2
(HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N and 4050/4050 N)
Supported
Paper
Dimensions*
Letter
8.5 by 11 in
(216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in
(210 by 297 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
*
**
Weight
Capacity**
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
500 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) paper
50-100 transparencies
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
1-12 Printer Description
Table 1-10. Paper Specifications, Trays 2 and 3
(HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN and 4050 T/4050 TN)
Supported
Paper
Dimensions*
Letter
8.5 by 11 in
(216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in
(210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in
(191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
B5 (ISO)
(custom***)
6.9 by 9.9 in
(176 by 250 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in
(182 by 257 mm)
A5 (custom***)
5.8 by 8.2 in
(148 by 210 mm)
*
**
***
Weight
Capacity**
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
250 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) paper
50-100 transparencies
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
To print custom-size paper see the user’s guide.
Paper Specifications 1-13
Table 1-11. Paper Specifications, Optional 500-Sheet Universal Tray
Supported
Paper
Dimensions*
Letter
8.5 by 11 in
(216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in
(210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in
(191 by 267 mm)
Executive JIS
(custom ***)
8.5 by 13 in
(216 by 330 mm)
16K (custom ***)
7.75 by 10.75 in
(197 by 273 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
B5 (ISO)
(custom***)
6.9 by 9.9 in
(176 by 250 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in
(182 by 257 mm)
A5 (custom***)
5.8 by 8.2 in
(148 by 210 mm)
Custom***
5.8 by 8.2 in
to 8.5 by 14 in
(149 by 210 mm
to 216 by 356 mm)
*
**
***
Weight
Capacity**
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
500 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) paper
50-100 transparencies
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
To print custom-size paper see the user’s guide.
1-14 Printer Description
Table 1-12. Paper Specifications, Optional Envelope Feeder
Supported
Paper
Dimensions*
Minimum Size
3.5 by 6.3 in
(90 by 160 mm)
Maximum Size
7 by 10 in
(178 by 254 mm)
*
**
Weight
Capacity**
20 to 28 lb
(75 to 105 g/m2)
75 envelopes
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Table 1-13. Paper Specifications, Optional Duplex Printing Accessory
(Duplexer)
Dimensions
Letter
8.5 by 11 in
(216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in
(210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in
(191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in
(182 by 257 mm)
Weight
Capacity
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
not applicable
Supported Types of Paper
The printer supports the following types of paper:
●
plain
●
preprinted
●
letterhead
●
transparency
●
prepunched
●
labels
●
bond
●
recycled
●
color
●
card stock
●
rough
●
user-defined (5 types)
Paper Specifications 1-15
Guidelines for Using Paper
For best results, use conventional 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper. Make sure
the paper is of good quality and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots, loose
particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or bent edges.
If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading (such as bond or
recycled), check the label on the package of paper.
Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to
the printer.
Table 1-14. Guidelines for Using Paper
Symptom
Problem with Paper
Solution
Poor print quality or Toner
adhesion.
Problems with feeding.
Too moist, too rough, too
smooth, or embossed; faulty
paper lot.
Try another kind of paper,
between 100-250 Sheffield,
4-6% moisture content.
Dropouts, jamming, curl.
Stored improperly.
Store paper flat in its
moisture-proof wrapping.
Increased gray background
shading.
Too heavy.
Use lighter paper.
Open the Rear Output Bin.
Excessive curl.
Problems with feeding.
Too moist, wrong grain
direction or short-grain
construction.
Open the Rear Output Bin.
Use long-grain paper.
Jamming, damage to printer.
Cutouts or perforations.
Do not use paper with cutouts
or perforations.
Problems with feeding.
Ragged edges.
Use quality paper.
1-16 Printer Description
Note
Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low-temperature inks,
such as those used in some types of thermography.
Do not use raised letterhead.
The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse Toner to the paper. Make
sure that any colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are
compatible with the printer’s temperature (400° F or 205° C).
Avoid using paper that has already been used in a printer or copier.
Do not print on both sides of envelopes, transparencies, or labels.
Paper Specifications 1-17
Paper Weight Equivalence Table
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight
specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine
the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight,
locate the bond weight (in the third row, first column) and scan across
the row to the cover weight (in the third column). The equivalent is
28 lb.
Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade.
Table 1-15. Paper Weight Equivalence
Bond wt. Text/book Cover wt. Bristol wt. Index wt.
(17x22)
wt.
(20x26)
(22.5x
(25.5x
(25x38)
28.5)
30.5)
Metric wt. Bond wt. Text/book Cover wt.
(17x22)
wt.
(20x26)
(25x38)
16#
41#
22#
27#
33#
37#
60 g/m2
16#
41#
22#
17#
43#
24#
29#
35#
39#
64 g/m2
17#
43#
24#
20#
50# *
28#
34#
42#
46#
75 g/m2
20#
50# *
28#
21#
54#
30#
36#
44#
49#
80 g/m2
21#
54#
30#
55#
90 g/m2
24#
60# *
33#
61#
100 g/m2
27#
68#
37#
24#
27#
60# *
68#
33#
37#
41#
45#
50#
55#
28#
70# *
39#
49#
58#
65#
105 g/m2
28#
70# *
39#
29#
74#
41#
50#
61#
68#
110 g/m2
29#
74#
41#
32#
80#*
44#
55#
67#
74#
120 g/m2
32#
80# *
44#
36#
90#
50#
62#
75#
83#
135 g/m2
36#
90#
50#
91#
148 g/m2
39#
100#
55#
39#
100#
55#
67#
82#
40#
101#
55#
68#
83#
92#
150 g/m2
40#
101#
55#
43#
110#
60#
74#
90#
100#
163 g/m2
43#
110#
60#
45#
115#
63#
77#
94#
104#
170 g/m2
45#
115#
63#
47#
119#
65#
80#
97#
108#
176 g/m2
47#
119#
65#
117#
190 g/m2
51#
128#
70#
51#
*
Tag wt.
(24x36)
128#
70#
86#
105#
U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
1-18 Printer Description
Labels
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels recommended for use
in laser printers.
If you have problems printing labels, use Tray 1 and open the Rear
Output Bin.
Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once.
Label Construction
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
●
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 400° F
(205° C), the printer’s maximum temperature.
●
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing between
them. Labels can peel off of sheets that have spaces between the
labels, causing serious jams.
●
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than 0.5 in
(13 mm) of curl in any direction.
●
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
Transparencies
Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 400° F
(205° C), the printer’s maximum temperature. For best results, close
the Rear Output Bin to print transparencies to the Top Output Bin.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging the printer, use only transparencies recommended
for use in laser printers.
If you have problems printing transparencies, use Tray 1.
Paper Specifications 1-19
Envelopes
Envelope Construction
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary
considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box
from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes
depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting
envelopes, consider the following components:
●
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed
28 lb (105 g/m2), or jamming may result.
●
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with less
than 0.25 in (6 mm) curl, and should not contain air. (Envelopes
that trap air may cause problems.)
●
Condition: Make sure envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or
otherwise damaged.
●
Sizes in Tray 1: From 3 by 5 in (76 by 127 mm) to 8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm).
●
Sizes in the optional envelope feeder: From 3.5 by 6.3 in
(90 by 160 mm) to 7 by 10 in (178 by 254 mm).
If you do not have an optional envelope feeder, always print
envelopes from Tray 1. If envelopes wrinkle, try opening the Rear
Output Bin.
1-20 Printer Description
Envelopes with Double Side Seams
Some envelopes have vertical seams at both ends of the envelope,
rather than diagonal seams. This style of envelope may be more likely
to wrinkle. When using envelopes with double side seams, be sure
the seam extends all the way to the corner of the envelope as
illustrated below.
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Figure 1-3
Envelopes with Double-Side-Seams
Envelopes with Adhesive Strips or Flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap
that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat
(400° F (205° C)) and pressure in the printer. The extra flaps and
strips might cause wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
Paper Specifications 1-21
Envelope Margins
The following table gives typical address margins for a Commercial
#10 or DL envelope.
Table 1-16. Envelope Margins
Note
Type of Address
Top Margin
Left Margin
Return Address
0.6 in (15 mm)
0.6 in (15 mm)
Delivery Address
2 in (51 mm)
3.5 in (89 mm)
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 0.6 in (15 mm)
from the edges of the envelope.
Envelope Storage
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to good print quality.
Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope,
creating an air bubble, then the envelope may wrinkle during printing.
1-22 Printer Description
Card Stock and Heavy Paper
Many types of card stock can be printed from Tray 1, including index
cards and postcards. Some types of card stock perform better than
others because the construction is better suited for feeding through a
laser printer.
For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than 53 lb
(199 g/m2) in Tray 1 or 28 lb (105 g/m2) in other trays. Paper that is
too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper jams, poor
Toner fusing, poor print quality, or excessive mechanical wear.
Note
Printing on paper heavier than 53 lb may be possible if the tray is not
filled to capacity, and paper with a smoothness rating of 100-180
Sheffield is used.
Card Stock Construction
●
Smoothness: 36-53 lb (135-199 g/m2) card stock should have a
smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield. 16-36 lb (60-135 g/m2)
card stock should have a smoothness rating of 100-250 Sheffield.
●
Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 0.2 in
(5 mm) of curl.
●
Condition: Make sure card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or
otherwise damaged.
●
Sizes: Use only card stock within the following size ranges:
• minimum: 3 by 5 in (76 by 127 mm)
• maximum: 8.5 by 14 in (216 by 356 cm)
Note
Before loading card stock in Tray 1, make sure it is regular in shape
and not damaged. Also, make sure the cards are not stuck together.
Card Stock Guidelines
●
If cards curl or jam, try printing from Tray 1 and opening the Rear
Output Bin.
●
Set margins at least 0.08 in (2 mm) away from the edges of the
paper.
Paper Specifications 1-23
Safety Information
Laser Safety Statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser
products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is
certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance
Standard according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act
of 1968. Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely
confined within protective housings and external covers, the laser
beam cannot escape during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures other
than those specified in this service manual may result in exposure to
hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC Regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
«Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité
électromagnétiques. «CEM».»
1-24 Printer Description
FCC Regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this
equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
Note
●
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
●
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
●
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is located.
●
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly
approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the Class B
limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
Safety Information 1-25
Laser Statement for Finland
LASERTURVALLISUUS
LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE
KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 T/4000 N/4000 TN and
4050/4050 T/4050 N/4050 TN -laserkirjoitin on käyttäjän kannalta
turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa käytössä kirjoittimen
suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen ulkopuolelle.
Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN 60825-1
(1993) mukaisesti.
VAROITUS !
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla
saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle
näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
VARNING !
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning
specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som
överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 T/4000 N/4000 TN and
4050/4050 T/4050 N/4050 TN -kirjoittimen sisällä ei ole käyttäjän
huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja huoltaa
ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö. Tällaiseksi
huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin vaihtamista,
paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän käsikirjassa lueteltuja,
käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan
suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
VARO !
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle
lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
VARNING !
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion,
utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 770-795 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
1-26 Printer Description
Toner Safety
Note
Toner may stain clothing. Skin and clothing are best cleaned by
removing as much Toner as possible with a dry tissue, then washing
with cold water. Hot water causes Toner to melt and permanently fuse
into clothing.
The Toner Cartridge/Drum Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) can
be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet website at:
http://www.ljsupplies.com/planetpartners/datasheets.html.
If you do not have access to the Internet, call the U.S. HP FIRST
fax-on-demand service at (800) 231-9300. Use index number 7 for a
listing of the Toner Cartridge/Drum Material/Chemical Safety Data
Sheets.
Note
To get documents from HP FIRST by fax, you must use a Group 3 fax
machine.
Safety Information 1-27
Environmental Product Stewardship
Protecting the Environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality products
in an environmentally-sound manner. The printer has been designed
to minimize impacts on the environment.
The printer design eliminates:
Ozone
Production
The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic process and
therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas (03).
CFC Usage
Class I U.S. Clean Air Act stratospheric ozone-depleting chemicals
(chlorofluorocarbons [CFCs], for example) have been eliminated from the
manufacturing of the printer and packaging.
The printer design reduces:
Energy
Consumption
Energy usage drops from 330 watts (W) during printing to as little as 20W
while in low-power (PowerSave) mode. This saves energy without affecting
the high performance of the printer. This product qualifies for the
ENERGY STAR® Program (U.S. and Japan). ENERGY STAR is a voluntary
program established to encourage the development of energy-efficient
office products. The ENERGY STAR name is a registered service mark of the
U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
As an ENERGY STAR partner, Hewlett-Packard
Company has determined that this product meets
ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy efficiency.
1-28 Printer Description
2
Service Approach
Overview
This chapter discusses the following:
●
Service Approach
●
Parts and Supplies
●
Warranty Statement
Overview 2-1
Service Approach
Repair of the printer normally begins with use of the printer’s internal
diagnostics in conjunction with the troubleshooting procedures in
Chapter 7. Once a faulty part is located, repair is generally
accomplished by assembly level replacement of Field Replaceable
Units (FRUs). Some mechanical assemblies may be repaired at the
subassembly level. PCA component replacement is not supported by
Hewlett-Packard.
2-2 Service Approach
Parts and Supplies
Ordering Information
Field replaceable and accessory part numbers are found in Chapter 8
of this manual. Replacement parts may be ordered from HP’s Service
Materials Organization (SMO) or Support Materials Europe (SME),
divisions of Product Support Division (PSD).
Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer.
Accessories can be ordered from an authorized service or support
provider. See page 2-6 and page 8-4 for ordering information.
Parts and Supplies 2-3
Helpful Documentation
Table 2-1 lists part numbers to order documentation.
Table 2-1. Helpful Documentation
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
HP LaserJet Printer Family
Paper Specification Guide
A guide to using paper and other
print media with HP LaserJet
printers.
5040-9072
PCL 5/PJL Technical Reference
Documentation Package
A guide to using printer
commands with HP LaserJet
printers.
5021-0330
HP LaserJet Basics
CD-ROM
A guide to using HP LaserJet
printer hardware
5081-9469
User’s Documentation Bundle,
HP LaserJet 4000 and 4000 N
Printers
An additional copy of the user’s
guide, the getting started guide,
and the quick reference guide.
C4118-99051
(English)
User’s Documentation Bundle,
HP LaserJet 4000 T and
4000 TN Printers
An additional copy of the user’s
guide, the getting started guide,
and the quick reference guide.
C4119-99047
(English)
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 T,
4050 N, and 4050 TN User’s
Documentation CD-ROM
An additional copy of the user’s
documentation CD-ROM
C4251-60104
User’s Documentation Bundle,
HP LaserJet 4050 and 4050 N
Printers
An additional copy of the getting
started guide, and the quick
reference guide.
C4251-99001
(English)
User’s Documentation Bundle,
HP LaserJet 4050 T and
4050 TN
An additional copy of the getting
started guide, and the quick
reference guide.
C4252-99001
(English)
2-4 Service Approach
Table 2-1. Helpful Documentation (continued)
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
Service and Support CD-ROM
for the
HP LaserJet 4050 Printers
An interactive training CD-ROM
for printer service
representatives and customer
care specialists.
C4251-60106
HP LaserJet 4000 and 4050
Series Printers Service Manual
A combined service manual for
both series of printers.
C4251-91003
Parts and Supplies 2-5
Phone Numbers for Ordering
●
SMO (Service Materials Organization)
1-800-227-8164 (U.S. only)
●
SME (Support Materials Europe)
(49 7031) 142253
Exchange Program
HP offers remanufactured assemblies for some parts. These are
identified in Chapter 8 and can be ordered through Service Materials
Organization (SMO) or Support Materials Europe (SME), divisions of
Product Support Division (PSD).
Consumables
Paper and Toner Cartridges can be ordered directly from
Hewlett-Packard. See Chapter 8 for ordering information.
World Wide Web
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, and product and support
information may be obtained from the following URL:
in the U.S.http://www.hp.com/go/support
Printer drivers may be obtained from the following sites:
in China
in Japan
in Korea
in Taiwan
ftp://www.hp.com.cn/go/support
ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/go/support
http://www.hp.co.kr/go/support
http://www.hp.com.tw/go/support
or the local driver website http://www.dds.com.tw
HP Service Parts Information Compact Disc
This powerful, CD-ROM-based parts information tool is designed to
give users fast, easy access to parts information such as pricing and
recommended stocking lists for a wide range of HP products. To
subscribe to this quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada, call
(800) 336-5987. In Asia Pacific, call (65) 740-4484. Parts
identification and pricing information can also be accessed via the
World Wide Web at http://www.hp.com/go/partsinfo.
2-6 Service Approach
HP Support Assistant Compact Disc
This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system
designed to provide technical and product information on HP
products. To subscribe to the quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada,
call (800) 457-1762. In Hong Kong, Indonesia, Malaysia, or
Singapore, call Mentor Media at (65) 740-4477.
HP FIRST
HP FIRST fax-on-demand service will deliver detailed troubleshooting
information on common software and troubleshooting tips for your HP
product. Call from any touch tone phone and request up to three
documents per call. These documents will be sent to the fax of your
choice. Many of these numbers are local numbers and will not work
internationally.
North and Latin America
Outside the U.S. and Canada:
In the U.S and Canada:
(404) 329-2009
(800) 333-1917
Asia/Pacific
Australia
China
Hong Kong
India
Indonesia
Japan
Korea
Malaysia
New Zealand
Philippines
Singapore
Thailand
Vietnam
(03) 9272 2627
(10) 6505 5280
2506 2422
(11) 682 6031
(21) 352 2044
(03) 3335 8622
(02) 769 0543
(03) 298 2478
(09) 356 6648
(02) 848 9880
275 7251
(02) 661 3511
(08) 823 4161
Parts and Supplies 2-7
Europe, Middle East, and Africa
Austria
Belgium
Dutch
French
Denmark
European International
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italy
Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
French
German
United Kingdom
0660-8218
0800 1 1906
0800 1 7043
800-10453
+31 20 681 5792
9800-13134
0800-9050900
0130-810061
36 1 461-8222
1678-59020
0800-0222420
800-11319
05 05 313342
900-993123
020-795743
0800-551526
0800-551527
0800-960271
Customer Care Reseller Sales and Service Support
Center
The Customer Care Reseller Sales and Service Support Center is
available to assist resellers and service technicians. You can reach
this support center at 1-800-544-9976.
Other Areas
Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales
office for assistance in obtaining technical support for resellers and
service technicians.
2-8 Service Approach
Toner Cartridge Information
The Toner Cartridge is designed to simplify replacement of the major
“consumable” parts. The Toner Cartridge contains the printing
mechanism and a supply of Toner.
At 5% page coverage, a Toner Cartridge will print approximately
6,000 or 10,000 pages (depending on the model installed). However,
a Toner Cartridge should print more pages if regularly printing pages
with less coverage, such as short memos. If EconoMode is used
full-time, it is possible that the Toner supply will outlast the mechanical
parts in the Toner Cartridge. The cartridge may print fewer pages if
routinely printing dense print.
Note
For best results, always use a Toner Cartridge before the expiration
date stamped on the Toner Cartridge’s box.
Refilled Toner Cartridges
While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the use of refilled Toner
Cartridges during the warranty period or while the printer is under a
maintenance contract, it is not recommended for the following
reasons:
●
Repairs resulting from the use of refilled Toner Cartridges are not
covered under Hewlett-Packard warranty or maintenance
contracts.
●
Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a
refilled Toner Cartridge functions at the high level of reliability of a
new HP LaserJet Toner cartridge. Hewlett-Packard also cannot
predict what the long term reliability effect on the printer is from
using different Toner formulations found in refilled cartridges.
●
The print quality of HP LaserJet Toner Cartridges influences the
customer’s perception of the printer. Hewlett-Packard has no
control over the actual print quality of a refilled Toner Cartridge.
Recycling Toner Cartridges
In order to reduce waste, Hewlett-Packard offers a recycling program
for used Toner Cartridges. Cartridge components that do not wear out
are recycled. Plastics and other materials are recycled. HP pays the
shipping costs from the user to the recycling plant. For each cartridge
returned, HP donates one U.S. dollar to be shared by the Nature
Conservancy and the National Wildlife Federation. To join this
recycling effort, follow the instructions inside the Toner Cartridge’s
box.
Parts and Supplies 2-9
Warranty Statement
The warranty for this product gives you specific legal rights. There
may also be other rights that vary from area to area. Refer to the
user’s documentation for the full warranty and supporting warranty
information.
2-10 Service Approach
3
Printer Operation
Overview
This chapter discusses the following:
●
Using the Control Panel
●
Control Panel Menus
●
Service Mode
●
Testing the Printer
●
Resetting the Printer
●
System Configuration
●
Printer I/O Configuration
Overview 3-1
Using the Control Panel
Control Panel Layout
The printer’s Control Panel consists of the following:
READY
2-line
display
Ready
Go
Data
Item
Attention
– Value +
Cancel
Job
Figure 3-1
Menu
Select
Control Panel Layout
Control Panel Lights
Table 3-1. Control Panel Lights
Light
Indication
Ready
The printer is ready to print.
Data
The printer is processing information.
Attention
Action is required. See the Control Panel display.
3-2 Printer Operation
4050
only
Control Panel Keys
Table 3-2. Control Panel Keys
Key
Function
[Go]
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Places the printer either online or offline.
Prints any data residing in the printer’s buffer.
Allows the printer to resume printing after being offline. Clears
most printer messages and places the printer online.
Allows the printer to continue printing with an error message
such as TRAY X LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE] or UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE.
Confirms a manual feed request if Tray 1 is loaded and
TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE has been set from the Paper
Handling Menu in the printer’s Control Panel.
Overrides a manual feed request from Tray 1 by selecting
paper from the next available tray.
Exits the Control Panel menus. (To save a selected Control
Panel setting, first press [Select].)
[Cancel Job]
Cancels the print job that the printer is processing. The time it
takes to cancel depends on the size of the print job. (Press it only
once.)
[Menu]
Cycles through the Control Panel menus. Press the right end of
the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move
backward.
[Item]
Cycles through the selected menu’s items. Press the right end of
the button to move forward or the left end of the button to move
backward.
[– Value +]
Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press [+] to
move forward or [–] to move backward.
[Select]
●
●
[?]
Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears
next to the selection, indicating that it is the new default.
Default settings remain when the printer is switched off or
reset (unless you reset all factory defaults from the Resets
Menu).
Prints one of the printer information pages from the Control
Panel.
Provides instructions for resolving most printer errors. Certain
Control Panel error messages alternate with instructions on
accessing the online help system. This on-board help system is a
feature of the 4050 series printer only.
Using the Control Panel 3-3
Settings and Defaults
The printer makes most printing decisions based on either temporary
settings or permanent defaults.
Note
Settings sent from software applications override printer defaults.
Table 3-3. Settings and Defaults
Setting or Default
Explanation
Temporary Setting
A value set for the current print job by the software application. For
example, a request from the software to print three copies instead
of the Control Panel default value of one copy is a temporary
setting. The printer continues to use the temporary setting until it
receives another software request or until it is reset.
Control Panel Default
A value set at the Control Panel when you select a menu item. An
asterisk appears, indicating the default setting. The printer retains
this default when it is turned off.
Factory Default
The value set for each menu item at the factory. Factory defaults
are listed in the item column in the menu tables starting on
page 3-8.
Setting the display language
1
Press and hold [Select] while turning on the printer. Hold
[Select] until SELECT LANGUAGE appears.
2
Release [Select]. INITIALIZING appears briefly. Wait for
LANGUAGE=ENGLISH to appear.
3
Press [– Value +] repeatedly until the desired language appears.
4
Press [Select] to save your choice. An asterisk (*) will appear
beside the selected language.
5
Press [Go] to exit the menu.
3-4 Printer Operation
Control Panel Menus
Press [Menu] for access to all Control Panel menus. When additional
trays or other accessories are installed in the printer, new menu items
automatically appear.
To change a Control Panel setting:
Note
1
Press [Menu] until the desired menu appears.
2
Press [Item] until the desired item appears.
3
Press [– Value +] until the desired setting appears.
4
Press [Select] to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears next
to the selection in the display, indicating that it is now the default.
5
Press [Go] to exit the menu.
Settings in the printer driver and software application override Control
Panel settings. (Software application settings override printer driver
settings.)
If you cannot access a menu or item, it is either not an option for the
printer, or the customer’s network administrator has locked the function.
(The Control Panel reads ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED.) See the
customer’s network administrator.
To print a Control Panel menu map:
To see the current settings for all of the menus and menu items
available on the Control Panel, print a Control Panel menu map.
1
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2
Press [Item] until PRINT MENU MAP appears.
3
Press [Select] to print the menu map.
Control Panel Menus 3-5
Quick Copy Jobs Menu
This menu provides a list of the quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s
hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the Control
Panel.
Note
If there are no quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk, this
menu is not displayed on the Control Panel.
Table 3-4. Quick Copy Jobs Menu
Item
Value
[JOBNAME]
COPIES=1
3-6 Printer Operation
Explanation
The name of the person who owns the quick copy
job.
1 to 999
DELETE
The number of additional copies the user wants
to print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of
the job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard
disk.
Private/Stored Jobs Menu
This menu provides a list of the private and stored jobs on the
printer’s hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the
Control Panel.
Note
If there are no private or stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk, this menu
is not displayed on the Control Panel.
Table 3-5. Private/Stored Jobs Menu
Item
Value
Explanation
[JOBNAME]
The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard
disk.
PIN:0000
To print the job, the user must enter the Personal
Identification Number (PIN) assigned to the job
in the driver.
COPIES=1
1 to 999
DELETE
The number of copies the user wants to print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies of
the job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard
disk.
Control Panel Menus 3-7
Information Menu
This menu contains printer information pages that give details about
the printer and its configuration. To print an information page, scroll to
the desired page and press [Select].
Table 3-6. Information Menu
Item
Explanation
PRINT
MENU MAP
The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the
Control Panel menu items.
PRINT
CONFIGURATION
The Configuration Page shows the printer’s current configuration.
If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet
4000 N/4000 TN and 4050 N/4050 TN printers), a JetDirect
Configuration Page will print out as well.
PRINT
PCL FONT LIST
The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the
printer.
PRINT
PS FONT LIST
The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the
printer.
PRINT
FILE DIRECTORY
This item appears only when a mass storage device (such as an
optional flash DIMM or hard disk) containing a recognized file
system is installed in the printer. The file directory shows
information for all installed mass storage devices.
PRINT
EVENT LOG
The event log lists printer events or errors.
SHOW
EVENT LOG
This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the
Control Panel display. Press [– Value +] to scroll through the
event log entries.
PRINT
PAPER PATH TEST
The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is
working properly, or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper.
Choose the input tray, output bin, duplexer (if available), and
number of copies.
PRINT
USAGE PAGE
The usage page shows the quantity of pages printed, as well as
the paper size used. It also reflects the number of one-sided
versus two-sided pages (HP LaserJet 4050 only, with hard disk
installed).
3-8 Printer Operation
Paper Handling Menu
When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the
Control Panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper
from the printer driver or software application.
Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be
accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if the
appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software application
settings override Control Panel settings.
Table 3-7. Paper Handling Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
ENVELOPE FEEDER
SIZE=COM10
For supported paper sizes
see page 1-12.
This item appears only when the
optional envelope feeder is installed.
Set the value to correspond with the
envelope size currently loaded in the
envelope feeder.
ENVELOPE FEEDER
TYPE=PLAIN
For supported paper types
see page 1-12.
This item appears only when the
optional envelope feeder is installed.
Set the value to correspond with the
envelope type currently loaded in the
envelope feeder.
TRAY 1 MODE=
FIRST
FIRST
CASSETTE
Determine how the printer will use
Tray 1.
FIRST: If paper is loaded in Tray 1,
the printer will pull paper from that
tray first.
CASSETTE: A paper size must be
assigned to Tray 1 using the
TRAY 1 SIZE option (the next item
in this menu when TRAY 1
MODE=CASSETTE). This allows Tray 1
to be used as a reserved tray.
TRAY 1 SIZE=
LETTER
For supported paper sizes
see page 1-12.
This item appears only when TRAY 1
MODE= CASSETTE. Set the value to
correspond with the paper size
currently loaded in Tray 1.
Control Panel Menus 3-9
Table 3-7. Paper Handling Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 1 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported paper types
see page 1-12.
This item appears only when TRAY 1
MODE= CASSETTE. Set the value to
TRAY 2 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported paper types
see page 1-12.
Set the value to correspond with the
paper type currently loaded in Tray 2.
TRAY 3 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported paper types
see page 1-12.
This item appears only when a third
paper tray is installed. Set the value
to correspond with the paper type
currently loaded in Tray 3.
TRAY 4 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported paper types
see page 1-12.
This item appears only when a fourth
paper tray is installed (available only
on the HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN
and 4050 T/4050 TN printers). Set
the value to correspond with the
paper type currently loaded in Tray 4.
MANUAL FEED=OFF
OFF
ON
Feed the paper manually from Tray 1,
rather than automatically from a tray.
When MANUAL FEED=ON and Tray 1
is empty, the printer goes offline when
it receives a print job and displays
MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE].
DUPLEX=OFF
OFF
ON
This item appears only when an
optional duplexer is installed. Set the
value to ON to print on both sides
(duplex) or OFF to print on one side
(simplex) of a sheet of paper.
BINDING=
LONG EDGE
LONG EDGE
SHORT EDGE
This item appears only when an
optional duplexer is installed and the
duplex option is on. Choose the
binding edge when duplexing
(printing on both sides of paper).
3-10 Printer Operation
correspond with the paper type
currently loaded in Tray 1.
Table 3-7. Paper Handling Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
OVERRIDE A4/
LETTER=NO
NO
YES
Choose YES to print on letter size
paper when an A4 job is sent, but no
A4 size paper is loaded in the printer
(or to print on A4 size paper when a
letter job is sent, but no letter paper is
loaded in the printer).
CONFIGURE FUSER
MODE MENU=NO
NO
YES
Configure the Fuser mode associated
with each paper type. (This is only
necessary if you are experiencing
problems printing on certain paper
types.)
NO: The Fuser mode menu items are
not accessible.
YES: Additional items appear (see
below).
Note
To see the default Fuser mode for
each paper type, select YES, scroll
back to the Information Menu, and
print a menu map (page 3-8).
[TYPE]=
NORMAL
NORMAL
LOW
HIGH
This item appears only when
CONFIGURE FUSER MODE
MENU=YES. Most paper types are set
to NORMAL by default.
The exception is as follows:
ROUGH=HIGH
(The ROUGH=HIGH setting is only
available with A4, letter, and legal
sizes.)
For a complete list of supported paper
types, see page 1-12.
Control Panel Menus 3-11
Print Quality Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software
application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is
installed). Printer driver and software application settings override
Control Panel settings.
Table 3-8. Print Quality Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
RESOLUTION=
FASTRES 1200
300
600
FASTRES 1200
PRORES 1200
Select the resolution from the
following values:
300: Produces draft print quality at
the printer’s maximum speed (17
ppm). 300 dpi (dots per inch) is
recommended for some
bitmapped fonts and graphics, and
for compatibility with the HP
LaserJet III family of printers.
600: Produces high print quality at
the printer’s maximum speed
(17 ppm).
FASTRES 1200: Produces
optimum print quality (comparable
to 1200 dpi) at the printer’s
maximum speed (17 ppm).
PRORES 1200: Produces optimum
print quality (true 1200 dpi) at half
the printer’s maximum speed (8
ppm for the HP LaserJet 4000
printer, or at highest print quality at
engine speed for the HP LaserJet
4050 printer).
When the resolution is changed,
any downloaded resources (such
as fonts or macros) will need to be
downloaded again, unless they are
stored on an optional hard disk or
flash DIMM.
Note
It is best to change the resolution
from the printer driver or software
application. (Driver and software
settings override Control Panel
settings.)
3-12 Printer Operation
Table 3-8. Print Quality Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
RET=MEDIUM
OFF
LIGHT
MEDIUM
DARK
Use the printer’s Resolution
Enhancement technology (REt)
setting to produce print with
smooth angles, curves, and
edges.
REt does not affect print quality
when the print resolution is set to
ProRes 1200. All other print
resolutions, including
FastRes 1200, benefit from REt.
Note
It is best to change the REt setting
from the printer driver or software
application. (Driver and software
settings override Control Panel
settings.)
ECONOMODE=OFF
OFF
ON
Turn EconoMode on (to save
Toner) or off (for high quality).
EconoMode creates draft-quality
printing by reducing the amount of
Toner on the printed page by up
to 50%.
Caution
HP does not recommend full-time
use of EconoMode. (If
EconoMode is used full-time, it is
possible that the Toner supply will
outlast the mechanical parts in the
Toner cartridge.)
Note
It is best to turn EconoMode on or
off from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver and
software settings override Control
Panel settings.)
Control Panel Menus 3-13
Table 3-8. Print Quality Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
TONER DENSITY=3
1
2
3
4
5
Lighten or darken the print on the
page by changing the Toner
density setting. The settings range
from 1 (light) to 5 (dark), but the
default setting of 3 usually
produces the best results.
Use a lower Toner density setting
to save Toner.
Note
It is best to change the Toner
density from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver and
software settings override Control
Panel settings.)
CREATE
CLEANING PAGE
No value to select.
Press [Select] to print a cleaning
page (for cleaning excess Toner
from the Fuser assembly).
In order for the cleaning page to
work properly, print the page on
copier grade paper (not bond or
rough paper). Follow the
instructions on the cleaning page.
PROCESS
CLEANING PAGE
No value to select.
This item appears only after a
cleaning page has been
generated (as described above).
Press [Select] to process the
cleaning page.
3-14 Printer Operation
Printing Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software
application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is
installed). Printer driver and software application settings override
Control Panel settings.
Table 3-9. Printing Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES=1
1 TO 999
Set the default number of
copies by selecting any
number from 1 to 999. Press
[– Value +] once to change the
setting by increments of 1, or
hold down [– Value +] to scroll
by increments of 10.
Note
It is best to set the number of
copies from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver
and software settings override
Control Panel settings.)
PAPER=
LETTER
(110V printers)
or
PAPER=
A4
For supported paper sizes see Set the default image size for
page 1-12.
paper and envelopes. (The
item name will change from
paper to envelope as you scroll
through the available sizes.)
(220V printers)
and
ENVELOPE=
COM10
(110V printers)
or
ENVELOPE=
DL
(220V printers)
CONFIGURE CUSTOM
PAPER=NO
NO
YES
NO: The custom paper menu
items are not accessible.
YES: The custom paper menu
items appear (see the next
item).
Control Panel Menus 3-15
Table 3-9. Printing Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
UNIT OF MEASURE=
INCHES
INCHES
MILLIMETERS
This item appears only when
(110V printers)
or
CONFIGURE CUSTOM
PAPER=YES. Select the unit of
measurement for the custom
paper size.
MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
X DIMENSION=
8.5 INCHES
(110V printers)
or
216 MILLIMETERS
3.00 TO 8.5 INCHES
This item appears only when
(110V printers)
or
76 to 216 MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
CONFIGURE CUSTOM
PAPER=YES. Select the
dimension to be fed into the
printer (short edge).
5.00 TO 14.0 INCHES
This item appears only when
(220V printers)
Y DIMENSION=
14.0 INCHES
(110V printers)
or
356 MILLIMETERS
(110V printers)
or
127 to 356 MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
CONFIGURE CUSTOM
PAPER=YES. Select the other
5 to 128
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to
128 lines for default paper size.
Press [– Value +] once to
change the setting by
increments of 1, or hold down
[– Value +] to scroll by
increments of 10.
PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Determine the default
orientation of print on the page.
dimension (long edge).
(220V printers)
FORM=
60 LINES
(110V printers)
or
64 LINES
(220V printers)
ORIENTATION=
PORTRAIT
Note
It is best to set the page
orientation from the printer
driver or software application.
(Driver and software settings
override Control Panel
settings.)
3-16 Printer Operation
Table 3-9. Printing Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
PCL FONT
SOURCE=INTERNAL
INTERNAL
SOFT
SLOT 1, 2, OR 3
INTERNAL: Internal fonts.
SOFT: Permanent soft fonts.
SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored
in one of the three DIMM slots.
Note
It is best to set the font source
from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver
and software settings override
Control Panel settings.)
PCL FONT
NUMBER=0
0 TO 999
The printer assigns a number
to each font and lists them on
the PCL Font List. The font
number appears in the Font #
column of the printout.
Note
It is best to set the font number
from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver
and software settings override
Control Panel settings.)
PCL FONT
PITCH= 12.00
0.44 TO 99.99
This item might not appear,
depending on the font
selected. Press [– Value +]
once to change setting by
increments of.01 for pitch, or
hold down [– Value +] to scroll
by increments of 1.
Note
It is best to set the font pitch
from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver
and software settings override
Control Panel settings.)
Control Panel Menus 3-17
Table 3-9. Printing Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
PCL SYMBOL
SET=PC-8
PC-8
Select any one of several
available symbol sets from the
printer’s Control Panel. A
symbol set is a unique
grouping of all the characters in
a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is
recommended for line draw
characters.
many others
Note
It is best to set the symbol set
from the printer driver or
software application. (Driver
and software settings override
Control Panel settings.)
COURIER=REGULAR
REGULAR
DARK
Select the version of Courier
font to use:
REGULAR: The internal
Courier font available on the
HP LaserJet 4 series printers.
DARK: The internal Courier font
available on the HP LaserJet III
series printers.
Both fonts are not available at
the same time.
WIDE A4=NO
NO
YES
The Wide A4 setting changes
the number of characters that
can be printed on a single line
of A4 paper.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch
characters can be printed on
one line.
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch
characters can be printed on
one line.
3-18 Printer Operation
Table 3-9. Printing Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
APPEND CR TO LF=
NO
NO
YES
Select YES to append a
carriage return to each line
feed encountered in
backward-compatible PCL
jobs (pure text, no job control).
Some environments, such as
UNIX, indicate a new line using
only the line feed control code.
This option allows the user to
append the required carriage
return to each line feed.
PRINT PS ERRORS=OFF
OFF
ON
Select ON to print the PS error
page when PS errors occur.
Control Panel Menus 3-19
Configuration Menu
Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer
according to your printing needs.
Table 3-10. Configuration Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
POWERSAVE=
30 MINUTES
OFF
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
2 HOURS
3 HOURS
Set the printer to enter PowerSave after it
has been idle for a specified amount of time.
Turning PowerSave off is not
recommended. The PowerSave feature
does the following:
1. Minimizes the amount of power
consumed by the printer when it is idle.
2. Reduces wear on the printer’s electronic
components. (Turns off the display’s
backlight.)
When you send a print job, press a Control
Panel key, open a paper tray, or open the
top cover, the printer automatically comes
out of PowerSave mode.
Note
PowerSave turns off the backlight on the
display, but the display is still readable.
PERSONALITY=
AUTO
AUTO
PCL
PS
3-20 Printer Operation
Select the default printer language
(personality). Possible values are
determined by which valid languages are
installed in the printer.
Normally you should not change the printer
language (the default is AUTO). If you
change it to a specific printer language, the
printer will not automatically switch from one
language to another unless specific
software commands are sent to the printer.
Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
RESOURCE SAVE=
OFF
OFF
ON
AUTO
Dedicate printer memory to save each
language’s permanent resources. (You
might need to add memory to the printer in
order for this item to appear.) The amount of
memory set aside can be different for each
installed language. Some languages might
have memory set aside for resource saving
without requiring all languages to do so. Any
time the amount of memory dedicated to a
specific language is changed, all languages
will lose all saved resources, including any
unprocessed print jobs.
OFF: No language resource saving is
performed, and language-dependent
resources, such as fonts and macros, are
lost when language or resolution changes.
ON: An item will appear for each installed
language that allows the user to allocate a
particular amount of memory to that
language’s resource saving area. (See the
items below.)
AUTO: The printer automatically determines
the amount of memory to use for each
installed language’s resource saving area.
PCL MEMORY=
400K
0K and up
PS MEMORY=
400K
0K and up
This item appears only when RESOURCE
(This value depends on SAVE=ON. Select the amount of memory
the amount of installed used for saving PCL resources. Printer
memory.)
default is the minimum amount of memory
needed to perform resource saving for PCL.
Press [– Value +] to change settings by
increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by
increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
This item appears only when RESOURCE
(This value depends on SAVE=ON. Select the amount of memory
the amount of installed used for saving PS resources. Printer
memory.)
default is the minimum amount of memory
needed to perform resource saving for PS.
Press [– Value +] to change settings by
increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by
increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
Control Panel Menus 3-21
Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
PAGE PROTECT=
AUTO
AUTO
ON
This item appears only after a 21
TOO COMPLEX, PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE message displays.
PAGE
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)
attempts to guarantee that all pages will
print. If the page does not print, turn PAGE
PROTECT to ON. This might increase
chances of a 20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY, PRESS GO TO CONTINUE
message. If this occurs, simplify the print
job or install additional memory.
CLEARABLE
WARNINGS=JOB
JOB
ON
Set the amount of time that a clearable
warning is displayed on the printer’s Control
Panel.
JOB: Warning messages display on the
Control Panel until the end of the job from
which they were generated.
ON: Warning messages display on the
Control Panel until [Go] is pressed.
AUTO CONTINUE=
ON
ON
OFF
Determine how the printer reacts to errors.
ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing,
the message will display, and the printer will
go offline for 10 seconds before returning
online.
OFF: If an error occurs that prevents
printing, the message will remain on the
display and the printer will remain offline
until [Go] is pressed.
If the printer is on a network, you will
probably want to turn AUTO CONTINUE to
ON.
3-22 Printer Operation
Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
TONER
LOW=CONTINUE
CONTINUE
STOP
Determine how the printer behaves when
Toner is low. The TONER LOW message will
first appear when the Toner Cartridge is
almost out of Toner. (About 100 to 300
sheets can still be printed.)
CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print
while the TONER LOW message is
displayed.
STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for
further action.
RAM DISK=OFF
OFF
ON
AUTO
Determine how the RAM disk is configured.
This item appears only if there is no optional
hard disk installed and the printer has at
least 8 MB of memory.
OFF: The RAM disk is disabled.
ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the
amount of memory to be used through the
following item: RAM DISK SIZE.
Note
If the setting is changed from OFF to ON or
from OFF to AUTO, the printer will
automatically reinitialize when it becomes
idle.
RAM DISK
SIZE=XXXK
0K and up
Determine the size of the RAM disk. This
(This value depends on item appears if RAM DISK=ON or AUTO.
the amount of installed Press [– Value +] to change settings by
memory.)
increments of 100.
Note
This setting cannot be changed if RAM
DISK=AUTO. Changing this value will cause
the printer to reinitialize when it becomes
idle.
Control Panel Menus 3-23
Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
JAM RECOVERY=
AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
Determine how the printer behaves when a
paper jam occurs.
AUTO: The printer automatically selects the
best mode for printer jam recovery (usually
AUTO). This is the default setting.
ON: The printer automatically reprints pages
after a paper jam is cleared.
OFF: The printer does not reprint pages
following a paper jam. Printing performance
might be increased with this setting.
MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE=OFF
OFF
This item appears only after the PERFORM
PRINTER MAINTENANCE message
displays.
OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE message will be cleared and
will not be displayed again until the next
maintenance is due.
The message should not be turned off
unless the printer maintenance has been
performed. If the required maintenance is
not performed, the printer’s performance will
degrade.
SMALL PAPER
SPEED=NORMAL
NORMAL
SLOW
TONER LOW=CONTINUE CONTINUE
STOP
3-24 Printer Operation
Select SLOW when alternately printing
envelopes or small paper and standard
paper sizes.
Be sure to return the speed to NORMAL
when finished.
Determine how the printer behaves when
Toner is low. The TONER LOW message
will first appear when the Toner Cartridge is
almost out of Toner. (About 100 to 300
sheets can still be printed)
CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print
while the TONER LOW message is
displayed.
STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for
further action.
Table 3-10. Configuration Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
QUICK COPY
JOBS = 32
1 to 50
Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that
can be stored on the printer’s hard disk.
(HP LaserJet 4050
series printer with hard
disk installed only)
HELD JOB
TIMEOUT = OFF
1
4
1
(HP LaserJet 4050
series printer with hard 1
HOUR
HOURS
DAY
WEEK
This setting allows the user to set the
timeout value for how long a job will be
stored before it is automatically deleted
from the held job queue.
disk installed only)
CONFIGURE
PRORES 1200=NO*
(HP LaserJet 4050
series printer only)
YES
NO
This item allows the user to tell the printer
whether or not to use ProRes, which
provides 1200 dpi. If YES is selected,
another menu entry appears giving the user
the option of NORMAL or HALF speed.
Control Panel Menus 3-25
I/O Menu
Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication
between the printer and the computer.
Table 3-11. I/O Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT=15
5 to 300
Select the I/O timeout period in seconds. (I/O
timeout refers to the time, measured in seconds,
that the printer waits before ending a print job.)
This setting allows you to adjust timeout for best
performance. If data from other ports appear in
the middle of your print job, increase the timeout
value.
Press [– Value +] once to change settings by
increments of 1, or hold down [– Value +] to
scroll by increments of 10.
I/O BUFFER=AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
Allocate memory for I/O buffering.
AUTO: The printer automatically reserves
memory for I/O buffering. Additional
configurations are not required and the
I/O BUFFER SIZE menu item does not
appear.
ON: The I/O BUFFER SIZE item appears (see
below). Specify the amount of memory to be
used for I/O buffering.
OFF: I/O buffering is not performed and the
I/O BUFFER SIZE item does not appear.
When the I/O buffer setting is changed, any
downloaded resources (such as fonts or
macros) will need to be downloaded again,
unless they are stored on an optional hard disk
or flash DIMM.
I/O BUFFER SIZE=
100K
10K and up
This item appears only when I/O BUFFER=ON.
Specify the amount of memory for I/O buffering.
The maximum amount of memory available for
I/O buffering is determined by the amount of
memory installed in the printer, the languages
installed in the printer, and by other memory
allocations that must be made.
Press [–Value +] to change settings by
increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by
increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
3-26 Printer Operation
Table 3-11. I/O Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
PARALLEL HIGH
SPEED=YES
YES
NO
Select the speed at which data is transmitted to
the printer.
YES: The printer accepts faster parallel
communications used for connections with
newer computers.
NO: The printer accepts slower parallel
communications used for connections with older
computers.
PARALLEL ADV
FUNCTIONS=ON
ON
OFF
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication on
or off. The default is set for a bidirectional
parallel port (IEEE-1284).
This setting allows the printer to send status
readback messages to the computer. (Turning
on the parallel advanced functions might slow
language switching.)
SERIAL
PACING=DTR/DSR
DTR/DSR
XON/XOFF
Select the type of pacing used. Pacing, or
“handshaking” allows the printer to tell the
computer when to send information. The printer
uses XON/XOFF and DTR/DSR signal protocols
rather than ETX/ACK protocol.
DTR/DSR: Select this value if your computer
requires hardware flow control (most personal
computers do).
XON/XOFF: Select this value if your computer
requires software flow control (a UNIX
workstation, for example). The SERIAL
ROBUST XON item appears (see below).
Control Panel Menus 3-27
Table 3-11. I/O Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
SERIAL ROBUST
XON=ON
ON
OFF
This item appears only when SERIAL
PACING=XON/XOFF. Select the method for
generating XONs.
ON: The printer sends an XON when the printer
is online and when sufficient buffer space is
available. If the host does not receive data within
approximately one second, the printer will
transmit additional XONs at one second
intervals until the host receives data.
OFF: The printer sends one XON when it can
accept more data or when it is online. The
printer does not send XONs every second while
the printer is online and ready for more data.
SERIAL BAUD
RATE=9600
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Select the printer’s baud rate (speed at which
information is transferred) for communicating
from the computer to the printer.
SERIAL DTR
POLARITY=HIGH
HIGH
LOW
Determine whether pin #8 is high or low when
the printer is ready.
HIGH: Pin number 8 is held high when the
printer is ready.
LOW: Pin number 8 is held low when the printer
is ready.
3-28 Printer Operation
EIO Menu (Networked Printers)
EIO (enhanced input/output) Menus depend on the particular
accessory product installed in an EIO slot of the printer. If the printer
contains an HP JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure
basic networking parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other
parameters can also be configured through HP JetAdmin.
Table 3-12. EIO Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
CFG NETWORK=NO
NO
YES
NO: The JetDirect Menu is not accessible.
YES: The JetDirect Menu appears.
NOVELL=ON
ON
OFF
Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol stack
(in Novell NetWare networks, for example) is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
DLC/LLC=ON
ON
OFF
Select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
TCP/IP=ON
ON
OFF
Select whether the TCP/IP protocol stack is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
ETALK=ON
ON
OFF
Select whether the Apple EtherTalk protocol
stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
CFG NOVELL=NO
NO
YES
NO: The IPX/SPX Menu is not accessible.
YES: The IPX/SPX Menu appears. In the
IPX/SPX Menu, you can specify the frame
type parameter used on your network. The
default is AUTO, to automatically set and limit
the frame type to the one detected.
For Ethernet cards, frame type selections
include EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022,
EN_SNAP.
For Token Ring cards, frame type selections
include TR_8022, TR_SNAP.
In the IPX/SPX Menu for Token Ring cards,
you can also specify NetWare Source
Routing parameters, which include SRC
RT=AUTO (default), OFF, SINGLE R, or
ALL RT.
Control Panel Menus 3-29
Table 3-12. EIO Menu (continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
CFG TCP/IP=NO
NO
YES
NO: The TCP/IP Menu is not accessible.
YES: The TCP/IP Menu appears. In the
TCP/IP Menu, you can specify BOOTP=YES
for TCP/IP parameters to be automatically
loaded from a bootp or DHCP server when
the printer is turned on. If you specify
BOOTP=NO, you can manually set selected
TCP/IP parameters from the Control Panel.
You can manually set each byte of the IP
address (IP), Subnet Mask (SM), Syslog
Server (LG), and Default Gateway (GW).
Also, you can manually set the Timeout time
period.
Note
If no IP address is assigned within the first 5
minutes, the HP JetDirect print server card
will assume a default IP address of
192.0.0.192.
CFG ETALK=NO
3-30 Printer Operation
NO
YES
NO: The EtherTalk Menu is not accessible.
YES: The EtherTalk Menu appears. In the
EtherTalk Menu you can set the AppleTalk
phase parameter (ETALK PHASE=1 OR 2)
for your network.
Resets Menu
Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or
printer configuration settings when you select these items. Only reset
the printer under the following circumstances:
●
You want to restore the printer’s default settings.
●
Communication between the printer and computer has been
interrupted.
●
You are using both the serial and parallel I/O ports, and one of the
ports is having problems.
The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer,
while [Cancel Job] clears only the current job.
Note
Job retention features will be deleted if you do not have the hard disk
accessory. (HP LaserJet 4050 series printer only.)
Table 3-13. Resets Menu
Item
Explanation
RESET MEMORY
This item clears the printer buffer and the active
I/O input buffer, and makes the Control Panel
defaults current.
Resetting memory during a print job can result in
data loss.
RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS
This item performs a simple reset and restores
most of the factory (default) settings. This item
also clears the input buffer for the active I/O.
RESET ACTIVE I/O CHANNEL
This item performs a simple reset and clears the
input and output buffers (for the active I/Os only).
RESET ALL I/O CHANNELS
This item performs a simple reset and clears the
input and output buffers for all I/Os.
Control Panel Menus 3-31
Service Mode
Service Mode should be used only by authorized service personnel.
While in Service Mode, you can:
●
Verify and set the page count and serial number. These are
displayed on the Configuration Page.
●
Set the Cold Reset Default. (This sets the factory default paper
size to either Letter or A4).
●
Turn the diagnostic functions on or off (for software developers
only).
●
Clear the Event Log.
●
Set the interval at which the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE
message appears on the Control Panel.
To enter Service Mode:
1
Hold down [Select] and [Cancel Job] while turning on the printer
until all of the lights on the Control Panel are lit. (If the Control
Panel reads INITIALIZING, the keys were released too soon.)
2
Press the right side of the [Menu] key, then press [Select]. The
message SERVICE MODE is displayed. To exit the Service Mode
press [Go].
3-32 Printer Operation
Service Menu
Figure 3-2
Service Menu
Setting the Page Count, Maintenance Count,
and Serial Number
The page count and printer serial number are stored in non-volatile
memory. If it is necessary to replace the Formatter PCA, the page
count should be set to the current value to reflect the age of the Print
Engine. The procedure for setting the serial number is similar to
setting the page count.
Note
Before replacing the Formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to
verify the current page count and serial number of the printer, if
possible. Use the information on the Configuration Page to reset the
page count and printer serial number for the new Formatter PCA.
Service Mode 3-33
Page Count
The page count stored in NVRAM and displayed on the Configuration
Page printout represents the number of pages which the printer has
printed (excluding engine test prints). If it becomes necessary to
repair a printer by installing a new Formatter, the page count must be
reset so that it represents the age of the printer’s engine rather than
the age of the Formatter.
The page count value is changed using a different method than is
used for other Control Panel values. Instead of increasing the entire
value by increments, each digit can be selected and modified
individually. The following Control Panel keys are used to modify the
page count value:
[Select]
[Value +]
[– Value]
Enters any changes to the current digit and advances the
cursor one digit to the right. If the last digit is currently
selected, pressing the [Select] key wraps the cursor
around to the first digit.
Increases the value of the currently selected digit by one.
Pressing [Value +] when 9 is the value of the currently
selected digit will change the value of the digit to 0.
Decreases the value of the currently selected digit by one.
Pressing [– Value] when 0 is the value of the currently
selected digit will change the value of the digit to 9.
Table 3-14 shows the sequence of keystrokes used to change the
page count from a value of 000000 to a value of 0010480.
Table 3-14. Changing the Page Count
Key Press
Display
Description
SERVICE MODE
[Menu+]
SERVICE MENU
Enter the SERVICE
[Item+]
PAGES=0000000 *
Advance to the first item in the SERVICE
MENU.
[Select]
PAGES=0000000 *
Advance the cursor one digit to the right.
3-34 Printer Operation
MENU.
Table 3-14. Changing the Page Count (continued)
Key Press
Display
Description
[Select]
PAGES=0000000 *
Advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[Value +]
PAGES=0010000 *
Increase the value of the third digit by one.
[Select]
PAGES=0010000 *
Enter the change to the third digit and
advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[Select]
PAGES=0010000 *
Advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[Value +]
(4 presses)
PAGES=0010400 *
Increase the value of the fifth digit by four.
[Select]
PAGES=0010400 *
Enter the change to the fifth digit and
advance the cursor one digit to the right.
[– Value]
(2 presses)
PAGES=0010480 *
Decrease the value of the sixth digit by two.
[Select]
(2 presses)
PAGES=0010480 *
Enter the change to the sixth digit and
advance the cursor one digit to the right
causing the cursor to wrap around to the first
digit.
[Go]
To exit.
Maintenance Page Count
The maintenance page count should be reset only after a
maintenance kit has been installed.
This will reset the maintenance counter so that the message PERFORM
PRINTER MAINTENANCE will display another 200,000 pages later
(default).
●
Hold down the [– Item] and [– Value] keys.
●
Turn the printer on.
●
Wait for RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT to be displayed and then
release both keys.
Service Mode 3-35
MAINTENANCE COUNT in the Service Mode Menu sets the page count
interval at which the next service is due for the printer. This is set
initially at the factory to 200,000 pages. (For example, the message
displays at 200,000 pages. If the Printer Maintenance Kit is installed
at 200,114 pages, the message displays 200,000 pages later, at
400,114 pages.) Editing this number is similar to editing the PAGES
item above.
Serial Number
If a Formatter is replaced, then the printer serial number must be
reentered. Editing this number is similar to editing the PAGES item
above.
Cold Reset Paper
The default paper size is stored in NVRAM and when the printer is
cold reset, the default paper size is set to the factory setting. Possible
values are COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER and COLD RESET PAPER=A4.
When replacing the Formatter in countries that use A4 rather than
letter size paper, set the cold reset paper size to A4.
Diagnostics
This menu item enables or disables the use of the firmware diagnostic
features. Possible values are DIAGNOSTICS=OFF* and
DIAGNOSTICS=ON. When enabled, the diagnostic features are
accessible when the printer is in the online READY state by pressing
the [Select] key.
Note
This feature is for developers only.
Clear Event Log
This item allows the internal Event Log to be cleared.
3-36 Printer Operation
Testing the Printer
When you print a Configuration Page, the printer checks its internal
controller and I/O interface, and then prints a test page. You can
review the Configuration Page printout to verify proper installation of
such options as paper trays or printer languages. For more
information, see page 7-52.
Engine Test
The engine test print can be used to verify that the Print Engine is
functioning correctly. For more information, see page 7-11.
Testing the Printer 3-37
Resetting the Printer
Cold Reset
Cold reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all the
defaults back to the factory settings.
CAUTION
Performing a Cold Reset resets the HP JetDirect configuration. To avoid
making changes to your configuration, remove the HP JetDirect card
before performing a cold reset.
If possible, print a Configuration Page prior to performing a Cold Reset.
This will document current settings for later reference.
To perform a Cold Reset:
1
Turn off the printer.
2
While pressing [Go], turn the printer on. COLD RESET appears
briefly on the display, then INITIALIZING appears. After a few
seconds, RESTORING FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the display,
followed by OFFLINE. The cold reset is complete.
3
Press [Go] to return the printer online. READY appears on the
display.
Clearing NVRAM
This procedure will clean up the NVRAM by removing old areas that
are not being used.
1
Turn off the printer.
2
While pressing [Cancel Job] turn the printer on. CLEANUP NVRAM
appears briefly on the display, followed by INITIALIZING. After a
few seconds READY appears.
3-38 Printer Operation
System Configuration
MS-DOS System Configuration
To communicate properly with the printer, the MS-DOS environment
requires the addition or modification of MODE commands in the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file. Add or modify the MODE command(s),
depending on the interface configuration, as follows:
Parallel DOS Commands
Most IBM and AT compatible computers default to a parallel printer
port. To ensure that information is sent to your parallel printer port,
type the following MS-DOS command at your MS-DOS prompt or
include it in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file:
MODE LPT1: , , P
For MS-DOS version 4.0 and above, enter:
MODE LPT1: , , B
Note
This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1. If
you are using LPT2 or LPT3, replace LPT1 in the example with the
printer port that you are using.
Since the MODE command is an external MS-DOS command (a
program named MODE.COM is run when the MODE command is
invoked), the program file must be contained in the root directory, or in
a directory specified in a preceding PATH command in the
AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
After changing the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, reboot the computer to
initiate the changes.
System Configuration 3-39
Serial MS-DOS Commands
Most IBM compatible computers default to a parallel printer port. To
ensure that information is sent to the serial printer port, type the
following MS-DOS commands at the MS-DOS prompt, or include
them in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
MODE COM1: 9600, N, 8, 1, P
MODE LPT1: =COM1
For MS-DOS version 4.0 or above, enter:
MODE COM1: 9600, N, 8, 1, B
MODE LPT1: =COM1
Note
These examples assume that you are using serial printer port COM1.
If you are using COM2 or COM3, replace COM1 with the printer port
that you are using.
Since the MODE command is an external MS-DOS command (a
program named MODE.COM is run when the MODE command is
invoked), the program file must be contained either in the root
directory or in a directory specified in a preceding PATH command in
the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
After changing the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, reboot the computer to
initiate the changes.
3-40 Printer Operation
Printer I/O Configuration
Parallel Menu
The default setting for the HIGH SPEED PARALLEL I/O is YES. If it is
set to NO, the interface runs at a slower speed that is compatible with
older computers. When the default is set to YES, the parallel interface
runs at a higher rate supported by newer computers.
Advanced Functions
The ADVANCED FUNCTIONS feature of the printer enables bidirectional
communications between the printer and the host. The default setting
is ON. This default setting (ON) must be active in order to use
HP LaserJet Explorer, the Windows® Printing System, and other
software applications and drivers.
Serial Configuration
Use RS-232C serial configuration when the printer is located 11 to 50
feet (3.35 to 15.24 meters) from the computer. If you need to locate
the printer between 51 and 2000 feet (15.54 and 610 meters) from the
computer, use an RS-422A serial configuration.
Serial I/O settings must be configured correctly for proper serial
communication.
Serial Protocol
When printing with a serial configuration, the same protocol must be
set on both the printer and the computer. Protocol on the printer is set
by changing the Control Panel settings. Protocol on the computer is
set by using DOS commands. The default protocol settings are
described below.
BAUD Rate
The BAUD RATE setting tells the printer how fast information is
transferred to and from the computer. The default setting is
BAUD RATE=9600*.
Printer I/O Configuration 3-41
Pacing (Handshaking)
Pacing (or “handshaking”) is a type of communication between the
printer and the computer. This is an important setting in the printer
because it allows the printer to tell the computer when to send
information. If the printer is unable to receive information, for
example, when the print buffer is full or when the printer is out of
paper, a signal is sent to the computer to stop sending information.
When the printer is able to resume receiving information, it sends
another signal to the computer to send more data.
Pacing is set through the Control Panel’s I/O Menu. Two types of
handshaking are supported by the printer:
●
Select DTR/DSR through the I/O Menu’s PACING item if the
computer requires hardware flow control (most personal
computers do). Through the I/O Menu’s DTR POLARITY item, the
DTR polarity can be set to High or Low. The default is DTR
POLARITY=HI.
●
Select XON/XOFF through the I/O Menu’s PACING item if the
computer requires software flow control (for example, if you are
using a UNIX workstation). Note that status readback messages
are not paced when XON/XOFF is selected. Through the I/O
Menu’s ROBUST XON item, Robust Xon can be set to ON (the
default) or OFF. Note that the ROBUST XON item only appears
under the I/O Menu if XON/XOFF is selected.
3-42 Printer Operation
4
Printer Maintenance
Overview
This chapter discusses the following:
●
Cleaning the Printer and Accessories
●
Preventative Maintenance
Overview 4-1
Cleaning the Printer and Accessories
To maintain high print quality and performance, thoroughly clean the
printer and the paper handling accessories:
●
Every time you change the Toner Cartridge (run a cleaning page).
●
After printing approximately 10,000 pages.
●
Whenever print quality problems occur.
Clean the outside surfaces with a lightly water-dampened cloth. Clean
the inside parts as indicated in Table 4-1. Observe the warning and
caution below.
WARNING!
Before you begin these steps, turn the printer off and unplug all power
cords to avoid shock hazard.
Be careful when cleaning around the Fusing Assembly area. It may be
hot.
CAUTION
To avoid permanent damage to the Toner Cartridge, do not use
ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer.
Do not touch the Transfer Roller. Skin oils on the roller can reduce print
quality. If Toner gets on your clothes, wipe it off with a dry cloth and
wash your clothes in cold water. Hot water sets Toner into fabric.
Figure 4-1
Location of the Transfer Roller – Do Not Touch!
4-2 Printer Maintenance
Table 4-1. Cleaning the Printer
Component
Cleaning Method / Notes
Outside Covers
Use a water-dampened cloth. Do not use solvents or
ammonia-based cleaners.
Inside General
With a dry lint-free cloth, wipe any dust, spilled Toner, and paper
particles from the paper path area, the Registration Roller, and the
Toner Cartridge cavity.
Paper Pickup, Feed, and
Separation Rollers
Use a water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
Separation Pad
Use a dry, lint-free cloth.
Registration Roller
Use a dry, lint-free cloth.
Transfer Roller
Use a dry, lint-free cloth. DO NOT TOUCH with your fingers.
Fuser
Use a water-dampened, lint-free cloth.
Cleaning the Printer and Accessories 4-3
Using the Printer Cleaning Page
If Toner specks appear on the front or back side of your print jobs,
follow the procedure below.
From the printer’s Control Panel, do the following:
Note
1
Press [Menu] until PRINT QUALITY MENU appears.
2
Press [Item] until CREATE CLEANING PAGE appears.
3
Press [Select] to create the cleaning page.
4
Follow the instructions on the cleaning page to complete the
cleaning process.
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on copier
grade paper (not bond or rough paper).
You might need to create a cleaning page more than once. When
Toner has been cleaned from the Fuser Assembly, shiny black spots
will appear on the page’s black strip.
To ensure good print quality with certain types of paper, use the
cleaning page every time the Toner Cartridge is replaced. If the
cleaning page is frequently needed, try a different type of paper.
Cleaning Spilled Toner
Defective Toner Cartridges can develop leaks. Also, after a paper jam
has occurred, there may be some Toner remaining on the rollers and
guides inside the printer. The pages that print immediately after the
jam may pick up this Toner.
Clean spilled Toner with a cloth dampened with cold water. Do not
touch the Transfer Roller with the damp cloth or with your fingers.
Do not use a vacuum cleaner unless it is equipped with a micro-fine
particle filter.
4-4 Printer Maintenance
Preventative Maintenance
The preventative maintenance cycle for this printer is every 200,000
pages. To order the maintenance kit see page 8-2. The kit contains
the following replacement parts:
●
One Fuser
●
One Transfer Roller
●
One Tray 1 Roller
●
Three Feed Rollers
●
Three Separation Rollers
Refer to the instructions included in the kit for detailed replacement
procedures.
Reset Maintenance Count
After the PM kit has been installed, reset the maintenance count.
1
Turn the printer off.
2
While pressing [– Item] and [– Value] turn the printer on.
RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT appears, followed by INITIALIZING.
After a few seconds READY appears.
Preventative Maintenance 4-5
Expected Life of Components
The following table shows the expected life of certain components in
the printer. To order parts, see Chapter 8.
Table 4-2. Life of Components for the HP LaserJet 4000 and 4050 Series Printer
No.
Part name
Part No.
1
Tray 1 Pickup Roller
RG5-3718-000CN
1
100,000 pages
2
Tray Feed Roller
RF5-2490-000CN
1
200,000 pages
3
Tray Separation Roller
RF5-2490-000CN
1
200,000 pages
4
Tray 1 Separation Pad
RG5-2655-000CN
(Tray 1 Pickup
Assembly)
1
200,000 pages
5
Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
RH7-5172-000CN
1
200,000 pages
6
Fuser
100-127V
220-240V
C4118-69003
C4118-69004
1
1
200,000 pages
200,000 pages
7
Transfer Charging Roller
RG5-4283-000CN
1
200,000 pages
8
Cooling Fan
RH7-1335-000CN
1
25,000 hours
9
Duplexer Exhaust Fan
RH7-1361-000CN
1
25,000 hours
4-6 Printer Maintenance
Quantity
Expected Life
5
Functional Information
Overview
This chapter presents a generalized functional overview of the printer
and the printing processes. This chapter discusses the following
printer systems:
●
Power Supply System
●
Engine Controller System
●
Formatter System
●
Image Formation System
●
Paper Feed System
●
Basic Sequence of Operation
Overview 5-1
Power Supply System
AC/DC Power Distribution
AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit in the
Engine Controller Board when the power switch (SW1) is turned on.
The low-voltage power supply circuit supplies +24 VDC and +3.3
VDC required for the printer.
+24 VDC is supplied to drive the main motor, scanner motor and fan,
and to the high-voltage power supply. +3.3 VDC is used for sensors
and ICs on the engine controller board. +24 VDC is divided into +24
VA which is normally supplied from the low-voltage power circuit, and
+24VB which is interrupted when the door switch (SW101) turns off
by opening the upper cover.
Figure 5-1
Low-voltage Power Supply Circuit
If a short-circuit or other problems on the load side cause an
excessive current flow from the +24VDC, or +3.3 VDC power supplies
or generate abnormal voltage, the excess-current protection system
and excess-voltage protection system automatically shut off the
output voltage to protect the power supplies.
If the protection systems are activated and the power supply circuit
does not output DC voltage, it is necessary to turn the printer off,
correct the problem in the faulty load, then turn the printer on again.
The circuit has two fuses which break the circuit and cut off the output
voltage if excess current flows through the AC line.
5-2 Functional Information
Overcurrent Overvoltage Protection
The Fusing Heater Safety Circuit is located on the Engine Controller
Board, and constantly monitors the fusing temperature.
In case of abnormality, the output from this circuit turns off the relay
(RL101) and interrupts the power to the fusing heater.
If an increase in the temperature of the Fusing Heater causes the
Thermistor Output voltage to exceed about 1.2V (240° C), the output
of pin #13 of the comparator (IC301) becomes “L”.
When the output of pin #14 becomes “L” and Q302 is turned off, the
relay (RL101) is turned off.
To protect the Fuser from excessive voltages, the printer has the
following three protective functions:
●
The CPU monitors the voltage of TH901. If it is abnormal, the
CPU assesses fusing heater failure and turns off the relay
(RL101). At the same time, it reports the fusing heater failure to
the Formatter.
●
If the temperature of the fusing heater rises abnormally and the
voltage of TH901 falls below about 1.2V (240° C), the fusing
heater’s safety circuit interrupts the power to the fusing heater,
regardless of CPU outputs.
●
If the temperature of the fusing heater rises abnormally and the
temperature of the Thermal Fuse exceeds about 230° C, the
temperature fuse melts, which interrupts the power to the fusing
heater.
Power Supply System 5-3
High-voltage Power Distribution
Figure 5-2
Engine Controller Board
In response to the instructions from the microprocessor (CPU:IC 501)
on the Engine Controller Board, this circuit applies the superimposed
voltage of DC voltage and AC voltage to the primary charging roller
and Developing Cylinder, and a positive or negative DC voltage to the
transfer charging roller.
According to the image density information sent from the Formatter,
this circuit varies the primary DC bias and developing DC bias to
adjust the image density.
5-4 Functional Information
Toner Cartridge Detection
The Toner Cartridge has a Toner sensor. The circuit compares the
output value of the developing AC bias and the output value from the
antenna inside the Cartridge, and outputs the Toner detection signal.
The CPU detects the remaining Toner level and the presence of the
Cartridge when the developing bias is applied to the Developing
Cylinder. The remaining Toner level is always detected when the
developing bias is applied. The presence of the Cartridge is detected
only when the developing bias is applied during the initial rotation.
Power Supply System 5-5
Engine Controller System
The following systems and functions are controlled by the engine
controller board:
●
DC power distribution (+3.3V DC, +5V DC, +24VA)
●
Laser and scanner drive
●
Paper motion monitoring and control (photosensors and flags)
●
Clutches (tray pickup and Tray 1 feed)
●
Engine Test
●
Motors (main drive, scanner, and fans)
The operation sequences of this printer are controlled by the CPU of
this circuit. When the power switch of the printer is turned on and the
printer enters the standby mode, the CPU outputs the signals to drive
the loads such as Laser Diode, motors, and solenoids, based on the
print commands and the image data input from the external device.
5-6 Functional Information
Figure 5-3
Engine Controller Board
Engine Controller System 5-7
Engine Controller Board Inputs and Outputs
Figure 5-4
Engine Controller Board I/O (1 of 4)
5-8 Functional Information
Figure 5-5
Engine Controller Board I/O (2 of 4)
Engine Controller System 5-9
Figure 5-6
Engine Controller Board I/O (3 of 4)
5-10 Functional Information
Figure 5-7
Engine Controller Board I/O (4 of 4)
Engine Controller System 5-11
Laser and Scanner Drive
Based on information received from the Formatter, the Engine
Controller Board sends signals to the Laser Scanner Assembly to
modulate the Laser Diode on and off and to drive the Laser Scanner
motor. See “Image Formation System” on page 5-22 for more
information.
Paper Motion Monitoring and Control
The Engine Controller Board controls paper motion by continuously
monitoring the various Paper Sensors and coordinating paper
movement with the other print processes. For more information, see
“Paper Feed System” on page 5-33.
Solenoids, Sensors, Clutches, and Switches
See “Engine Controller Board Inputs and Outputs” on page 5-8.
Engine Test Print
See “Engine Test” on page 7-11.
5-12 Functional Information
Motors
See “Timing Diagram” on page 5-50 for specific timing details for the
printer motors.
The Main Motor, MT1, is controlled by the Engine Controller Board.
The Main Motor drives the Main Gear Assembly and rotates during
the initial rotation period (following power-on), the print period, the last
rotation period, or whenever the printer’s Top Cover is opened and
closed.
Figure 5-8
Main Motor Control
The Main Motor is a DC brushless motor and is unified with the motor
drive circuit.
The CPU (IC501) sets the Main Motor Drive signal (/MON) to “L” and
rotates the Main Motor. When the HP LaserJet 4000 series printer is
printing at 1200 dpi, the CPU sets the main motor rotation switching
signal (/HALF) to “L” and decreases the rotation speed of the Main
Motor to half. The HP LaserJet 4050 prints 1200 dpi at engine speed.
Engine Controller System 5-13
The Scanner Motor is controlled and monitored by the Engine
Controller Board. It rotates the Scanner Mirror during the initial
rotation period and the print period.
The Fan Motor is controlled and monitored by the Engine Controller
Board. The fan operates at full speed during the printing modes. The
Fan turns off in PowerSave mode after the Fuser cools down.
5-14 Functional Information
Formatter System
The Formatter PCA is responsible for the following:
●
Controlling the PowerSave mode
●
Receiving and processing print data from the various printer
interfaces
●
Monitoring Control Panel inputs and relaying printer status
information (through the Control Panel and the bidirectional I/O)
●
Developing and coordinating data placement and timing with the
print engine
●
Storing font information
●
Communicating with the host computer through the Bidirectional
Interface
The Formatter PCA receives a print job from the Bidirectional
Interface and separates it into image information and instructions
which control the printing process. The Engine Controller Board
synchronizes the Image Formation System with the Paper Input and
Output systems, and then signals the Formatter to send the print
image data.
The Formatter PCA also provides the electrical interface and
mounting locations for two EIO cards, additional memory DIMMs, and
the Hard Disk accessory, and the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver
(HP LaserJet 4050 series printer only).
PowerSave
This feature (accessed from the Configuration Menu) conserves
power by shutting down the Fuser and Exhaust Fans after the printer
has been idle for an adjustable period of time. The printer retains all
printer settings, downloaded fonts, and macros while in PowerSave
mode. The default setting is POWERSAVE ON, with a 30 minute idle
time. (PowerSave can also be turned OFF from the Control Panel.)
The printer exits PowerSave mode and enters the warm-up cycle
when any of the following occurs:
●
A print job, valid data, or a PML or PJL command is received at
the parallel port, serial port, FIR port, and EIO card
●
A Control Panel key is pressed
●
The Top Cover is opened and then closed
●
A paper tray is opened and then closed
●
The Engine Test button is pressed
Formatter System 5-15
Note
Printer error messages override the PowerSave message. The printer
will enter PowerSave mode at the appropriate time, but the error
message will continue to be displayed.
Resolution Enhancement technology (REt)
The Formatter PCA contains circuitry for Resolution Enhancement
technology (REt), which modifies the standard video dot data on its
way to the Engine Controller Board to produce “smoothed”
black-to-white boundaries. REt can be turned on or off from the
Control Panel, or from some software applications. The default setting
is medium.
Note
REt settings sent from software applications or printer drivers override
the Control Panel settings.
EconoMode
The EconoMode setting uses up to 50% less Toner than standard
mode printing by reducing the dot density. However, EconoMode
does not extend Toner Cartridge component life. EconoMode, which
can be thought of as “draft mode” can be selected from the Control
Panel (Print Quality Menu) and through some software applications
and printer drivers. The default setting is off.
Note
EconoMode does not affect print speed, memory usage, nor extend
the Toner Cartridge’s life.
5-16 Functional Information
Input/Output
Parallel Interface
The Formatter PCA receives incoming data through its Bidirectional
Interface (IEEE 1284). The I/O provides high speed and two way
communication between the printer and the host, allowing the user to
change printer settings and monitor printer status from the host
computer. The user may configure the HIGH SPEED item in the Control
Panel Menu. The default setting, YES, allows the I/O to run at the
higher speeds supported by most newer computers. When set to NO,
the parallel interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible for
older computers. The user may also configure the ADVANCED
FUNCTIONS item. The default setting, ON, allows for two way parallel
communications. The OFF mode disables the advanced functionality.
The I/O is compatible with the Bidirectional Parallel Interface
standard.
Expanded I/O
The optional Expanded I/O card can be installed in the slots provided
on the Formatter PCA. It provides automatic I/O switching between
multiple computers or networks connected to the printer. The network
versions for the HP LaserJet 4000 series printers include LocalTalk
and the HP JetDirect Multi-protocol Network Card with
Ethernet/10Base-T and 10Base-2. The network versions for the
HP LaserJet 4050 series printers include the HP JetDirect Print Server
with 10/100 Base TX.
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver
The HP Fast InfraRed Receiver enables wireless printing from any
iRDA-compliant portable device (such as a laptop computer) to the
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 N, 4050 T, or 4050 TN printer.
The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending
infrared port within operating range. Note that the connection can be
blocked by objects such as a hand, paper, direct sunlight, or any
bright light shining into either infrared port.
Flash
Flash is provided in optional 2 MB and 4 MB flash memory DIMMs for
storing forms, fonts, and signatures.
Formatter System 5-17
Disk
The disk accessory is mounted on the rear of the Formatter PCA. The
optional greater than 1 GB EIO-based hard drive is used for creating
multiple original prints (mopies) and storing forms, fonts, and
signatures.
Local Talk I/O
The printer implements AppleTalk networking protocol through
LocalTalk hardware. The LocalTalk network cable (HP P/N 92215N) is
connected through the EIO card. The LocalTalk hardware is an
optional feature for the HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 T, and 4050 series
printers. The LocalTalk hardware is bundled with the HP LaserJet
4000 N/TN printers.
CPU
The HP LaserJet 4000 series printer’s Formatter PCA incorporates a
100MHz RISC processor. The HP LaserJet 4050 series printer’s
Formatter PCA incorporates a 133MHz RISC processor.
Printer Memory
Note
If the printer encounters difficulty managing available memory, a
clearable warning message will be displayed on the Control Panel.
Some printer messages are affected by the Auto Continue and
Clearable Warning settings from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s
Control Panel. If CLEARABLE WARNING=JOB is set on the Control Panel,
warning messages display on the Control Panel until the end of the job
from which they were generated. If CLEARABLE WARNING=ON is set,
warning messages display on the Control Panel until [Go] is pressed.
If an error occurs that prevents printing and AUTO CONTINUE=ON is set,
the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before it returns online. If AUTO
CONTINUE=OFF is set, the message displays until [Go] is pressed.
Read Only Memory (ROM)
Besides storing microprocessor control programs, the ROM stores
dot patterns of internal character sets (fonts).
5-18 Functional Information
Random Access Memory (RAM)
The RAM contains the page and I/O buffers and the font storage area.
It stores printing and font information received from the host system,
and can also serve to temporarily store a full page of print image data
before the data is sent to the print engine (see “Page Protect” below).
RAM memory capacities for each printer are shown in “Printer
Features” on page 1-2. Memory capacity can be increased by adding
DIMMs to the Formatter PCA. Note that adding memory (DIMMs)
may also increase the print speed of complex graphics.
DIMM Slots
The DIMM slots may be used to add memory, fonts, or firmware
upgrades. Note that DIMMs and SIMMS are not compatible.
Non-Volatile Memory (NVRAM)
The printer uses NVRAM to store I/O and information on the print
environment’s configuration. The contents of NVRAM are retained
when the printer is turned off or disconnected.
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)
The Hewlett-Packard Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)
effectively doubles the standard memory through a variety of font and
data compression methods.
Note
MEt is only available in PCL mode; it is not functional when printing in
PS mode.
Formatter System 5-19
Page Protect
Page complexity (rules, complex graphics, or dense text) may exceed
the printer’s ability to create the page image fast enough to keep pace
with the image formation process. If Page Protect is disabled, and a
page is too complex, it may print in parts (for example, the top half on
one page and the bottom half on the next page). Some print data loss
is likely in these instances, and the printer will display the 21 PAGE
TOO COMPLEX error message, alternating with PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE.
Page Protect allows the Formatter to create the entire page image in
page buffer memory before physically moving the paper through the
printer. This process ensures that the entire page will be printed.
Page Protect applies only to PCL printing. The default setting is Auto.
PJL Overview
Printer Job Language (PJL) is an integral part of configuration, in
addition to the standard Printer Command Language (PCL). With
standard cabling, PJL allows the printer to perform functions such as:
●
Two-way communication with the host computer through a
Bidirectional Parallel Connection. The printer can tell the host
such things as the Control Panel settings, and it allows the
Control Panel settings to be changed from the host.
●
Dynamic I/O switching allows the printer to be configured with a
host on each I/O. The printer can receive data from more than
one I/O simultaneously, until the I/O buffer is full. This can occur
even when the printer is offline.
●
Context-sensitive switching allows the printer to automatically
recognize the personalities (PS or PCL) of each job and configure
itself to serve that personality.
●
Isolation of print environment settings from one print job to the
next. For example, if a print job is sent to the printer in landscape
mode, the subsequent print jobs print in landscape only if they are
formatted for landscape printing.
5-20 Functional Information
PML
PML is a Printer Management Language that allows remote
configuration and status readback through the I/O ports.
Control Panel
The Formatter PCA sends and receives printer status and command
data via a Control Panel PCA. See “Using the Control Panel” on page
3-2, and “Printer Messages” on page 7-17 for more information.
Formatter System 5-21
Image Formation System
The image formation system is the main system in the printer. It
consists of six stages:
1. Cleaning
2. Conditioning
3. Writing
4. Developing
5. Transferring
6. Fusing
When the Formatter Board sends the print signal to the Engine
Controller Board, it drives the Main Motor to rotate the Photosensitive
Drum, the Developing Cylinder, the Primary Charging Roller, and the
Transfer Charging Roller.
The Primary Charging Roller places a uniform negative charge on the
surface of the Photosensitive Drum. The laser beam modulated by
the video signal is illuminated on the Photosensitive Drum surface to
form the latent image on the Drum with the Laser Diode.
The latent image formed on the Photosensitive Drum is changed to a
visual image by the Toner on the Developing Cylinder, then
transferred to the paper by the Transfer Charging Roller. The residual
Toner on the Photosensitive Drum surface is scraped down with the
cleaning blade. The potential on the Drum is uniformed by the
Primary Charging Roller to prepare for a new latent image.
The Cartridge has a Toner sensor that detects the remaining Toner
level and the presence of the Cartridge.
If the Toner in the Cartridge becomes lower than the specified level or
if there is no Cartridge in the printer, it is reported to the Formatter.
5-22 Functional Information
Figure 5-9
Image Formation System
After the image has been transferred to the paper, it is then fused
onto the paper by heat and pressure at the Fuser.
Image Formation System 5-23
Toner Cartridge
Figure 5-10
Toner Cartridge
A major portion of the Image Formation System is contained in the
Cartridge as shown in the figure above.
The Toner Cartridge is the “heart” of the Image Formation System. It
houses the cleaning, conditioning, and developing steps of the
process. The Toner Cartridge contains the photosensitive Drum,
primary charging roller, developing station, Toner cavity, and cleaning
station. Including these components that wear, degrade, or are
consumed in the replaceable Toner Cartridge eliminates the need for
a service call when replacement is required.
The printer also has a new Cartridge drive system that minimizes
banding, with more constant paper speed.
5-24 Functional Information
Photosensitive Drum
The special properties of the Photosensitive Drum allow an image to
be formed on the Drum surface and then transferred to paper. The
Drum is an aluminum cylinder. The outside of the cylinder is coated
with a layer of organic-photoconductive material (OPC) which is
non-toxic. The OPC material has properties similar to a
photo-resistor. It becomes electrically conductive when exposed to
light. (The negative charges deposited on the Drum are conducted to
the ground potential of the Drum base.) Areas not exposed to light
remain non-conductive and maintain their negative charge. The
aluminum base of the photosensitive Drum is electrically connected
to ground potential.
Figure 5-11
Photosensitive Drum
Image Formation System 5-25
Cleaning the Drum
The cleaning blade is in contact with the surface of the Drum at all
times. As the Drum rotates during printing, excess Toner is stored in
the waste Toner receptacle.
Figure 5-12
Cleaning the Drum
5-26 Functional Information
Conditioning the Drum
After the Drum is cleaned, it must be conditioned. This process
consists of applying a uniform negative charge on the surface of the
Drum with the Primary Charging Roller. The Primary Charging Roller
is coated with conductive rubber with an AC bias applied to erase any
residual charges and maintain a constant Drum surface to create a
uniform negative potential on the Drum surface. The amount of DC
voltage is modified by the print density setting.
Figure 5-13
Primary Charging Roller
Image Formation System 5-27
Writing the Image
During the writing process, a modulated Laser Diode projects the
beam onto the rotating six-sided Scanning Mirror. As the mirror
rotates, the beam reflects off the mirror, through a set of focusing
lenses, through a slot in the rear of the Toner Cartridge, and onto the
Photosensitive Drum. The beam sweeps the Drum from left to right,
discharging the negative potential wherever the beam strikes the
surface. This creates a latent electrostatic image, which later is
developed into a visible image.
Figure 5-14
Writing the Image
Because the beam is sweeping the entire length of the Drum and the
Drum is rotating, the entire surface area of the Drum can be covered.
The speed of the Scanner Motor (which turns the Scanning Mirror)
and the speed of the Main Motor (which turns the Drum) are
synchronized, and each successive sweep of the beam is offset by
1/1200th of an inch. The beam can be turned on and off to place a dot
of light every 1/1200th of an inch. This is how the printer achieves its
1200x1200 dpi resolution. After the writing process, the Drum surface
has an invisible (latent) electrostatic image.
At the end of each sweep, the beam strikes the Beam Detect Lens,
generating the Beam Detect Signal (BD). The BD signal is sent to the
Engine Controller Board, where it is converted to an electrical signal
used to synchronize the output of data (/VDO) for one sweep (scan
line) and to diagnose problems with the Laser Diode or Scanner
Motor.
5-28 Functional Information
Developing the Image
The developing process develops the latent electrostatic image into a
visible image on the Drum. The Developing Unit consists of a metallic
cylinder that rotates around a fixed magnetic core inside the Toner
cavity. Toner is a powdery substance made of black plastic resin
bound to iron particles, which is uniformly attracted to the magnetic
core of the cylinder.
The Toner particles obtain a negative surface charge by rubbing
against the Developing Cylinder which is connected to a negative DC
supply. The negatively charged Toner is attached to the discharged
(exposed, grounded) areas. An AC potential is applied to the
Developing Cylinder to decrease the attraction between the Toner
and the magnetic core of the cylinder, and to increase the repelling
action of the Toner against the areas of the Drum not exposed to laser
light. This AC potential improves density and contrast.
Figure 5-15
Developing the Image
The Print Density Control in the Control Panel Menu adjusts the DC
bias of the Developing Cylinder by changing the force of attraction
between the Toner and Drum. A change in the DC bias causes either
more or less Toner to be attracted to the Drum, which in turn either
increases or decreases the print density. Both the primary and
Developer DC bias voltages are changed in response to the density
setting.
Image Formation System 5-29
Transferring the Image
During the transferring process the Toner image on the Drum surface
is transferred to the paper. A positive charge applied to the back of
the paper by the transfer roller causes the negatively charged Toner
on the Drum surface to be attracted to the page.
The small diameter of the Drum, combined with the stiffness of the
paper, causes the paper to peel away from the Drum. The static
eliminator teeth also help separate the paper from the Drum. The
static eliminator teeth weaken the attractive forces between the
negatively charged Drum surface. After separation, the Drum is
cleaned and conditioned for the next image.
Figure 5-16
Transferring the Image
5-30 Functional Information
Image Fusing/Variable Fusing Temperature
During the fusing process, the Toner is fused into the paper by heat
and pressure to produce a permanent image. The paper passes
between a heated Fusing Roller and a soft Pressure Roller. This
melts the Toner and presses it into the paper.
The Fusing Roller contains a ceramic heating element that provides
heat for the fusing process. Fusing temperature is monitored by the
Engine Controller Board, via the Thermistor TH901. The Engine
Controller Board maintains a temperature of about 383° F (195° C)
during print mode. If the Fusing System overheats (about
428° F/220° C), a relay opens, interrupting power to the Fusing
Heater, causing a Fuser error message (50.X FUSER ERROR). If the
Fusing System exceeds 464° F (240° C), the thermal fuse will open,
cutting off power to the Fuser.
Figure 5-17
Image Fusing
Image Formation System 5-31
Variable Fusing Temperature
Figure 5-18
Fusing Temperature Control
Variable fusing temperature is a feature that gives the user or service
technician the ability to adjust the fusing temperature based on the
media being used in the printer. The default mode is normal and
should be optimal for most users. There is an optional low and high
Fuser mode selection. If very heavy or rough media is being used,
then high Fuser mode is beneficial. If transparencies or light media
are being used, then low Fuser mode might be appropriate.
CONFIGURE FUSER MODE is in the Paper Handling Menu and when set
to the default of NO, paper types are not displayed in the menu. When
CONFIGURE FUSER MODE is set to YES, the different paper types are
then displayed in the menu.
Note
Fusing modes only operate for A4-, letter-, and legal-sized paper.
5-32 Functional Information
Paper Feed System
Figure 5-19
Paper Feed Subsystem
Paper Feed System 5-33
Figure 5-20
Paper Path
The presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 Paper
Sensor (PS105). Presence of paper in Tray 2 is detected by the Tray 2
Paper Sensor (PS101) for the HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 N, 4050 and
4050 N; and by the Upper Tray Paper Sensor (PS101) or the Lower
Tray Paper Sensor (PS102) for the HP LaserJet 4000 T, 4000 TN,
4050 T, and 4050 TN.
Both the size of the paper in the tray and the presence of a tray are
detected by the three switches (SW600, 601, 602) on the Paper Size
Detection PCA for the HP LaserJet 4000, 4000 N, 4050, and 4050 N,
5-34 Functional Information
and by the six switches (SW600, 601, 602, 603, 604, 605) on the
Paper Size Detection PCA for the HP LaserJet 4000 T, 4000 TN,
4050 T, and 4050 TN.
While the Main Motor rotates, the Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid (SL102) is
turned on, the Tray 1 Pickup Roller rotates, and a sheet of paper is fed
into the printer.
The paper passes the pre-feed roller, which compensates for the
skew of the paper.
After the top of page sensor (PS103) detects the leading edge of the
paper, the horizontal synchronization signal (/TOP) is sent from the
Engine Controller Board to the Formatter.
After the Formatter receives the /TOP signal, the /VDO signal is sent;
this synchronizes the leading edge of the image on the Drum with the
leading edge of the paper. The paper goes through transfer,
separation, and fusing stages, passes through the delivery unit, and
is delivered to the Top Output Bin or Rear Output Bin.
There are four photo-interrupters (PS102, PS103, PS106, PS501) in
the paper path that detect the presence of paper. If the paper does
not reach or pass these sensors within a prescribed time interval, the
microprocessor on the Engine Controller Board notifies the Formatter
of a paper jam.
Clutches and Sensors
See “Reference Diagrams” starting on page 7-84 for locations of
switches, sensors, and clutches.
Paper Feed System 5-35
Printing from Tray 1
The presence of paper in Tray 1 is detected by the Tray 1 Paper
Sensor (PS105).
When the Engine Controller Board receives the /PRNT signal from
the Formatter, the printer starts the initial rotation phase. (This
consists of Main Motor warm-up, Scanner Motor warm-up,
high-voltage control sequence and Fuser warm-up.) When the initial
rotation phase ends, the Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid (SL102) is turned on.
The cam rotates, the paper tray lifter rises, and the paper comes in
contact with the Tray 1 Pickup Roller. At the same time, the Tray 1
Pickup Roller rotates once and a sheet of paper in Tray 1 is picked up.
The Separation Pad removes the unnecessary sheets, and the paper
is at the Top-of-Page Sensor (PS103) when SL102 is turned back on
again.
The paper then reaches the Registration Arm, where its skew is
corrected. Then it goes through transfer, separation, and fusing
stages, passes through the delivery unit, and is delivered to the tray.
Figure 5-21
Tray 1 Pickup Timing
5-36 Functional Information
Figure 5-22
Tray 1 Pickup
Paper Feed System 5-37
Printing from Tray 2
When the Formatter inputs the /PRNT signal to the printer, the Main
Motor (M1) starts rotation. When the Main Motor reaches its
prescribed speed, the Feed Roller Clutch (CL101) and Tray 2 Pickup
Solenoid (SL 101 or SL 103) are turned on. (The Tray 2 Pickup Roller,
Tray 2 Feed Roller, Separation Roller, and Feed Rollers are driven by
the Main Motor rotation.)
The Tray 2 Pickup Roller, driven by the Pickup Solenoid, rotates once
and picks up the paper in the tray. The unnecessary sheets are
removed by the Separation Roller and the paper is fed to the pre-feed
sensor (PS102).
The CPU monitors the condition of the PS102 for a prescribed period
of time. If PS102 does not detect paper within that time, the CPU
resumes feeding the paper, maintaining the appropriate
between-page distance for continuous printing.
The paper then reaches the Registration Arm, where its skew is
corrected. Then it goes through transfer, separation, and fusing
stages, passes through the delivery unit, and is delivered to the tray.
Figure 5-23
Tray 2 Pickup Timing
5-38 Functional Information
Figure 5-24
Tray 2 Pickup
Paper Feed System 5-39
Multi-Feed Prevention Mechanism
When feeding paper from Tray 2, the printer uses the Separation
Roller to prevent multi-feeding. Normally, the Separation Roller is
imparted with a rotational force in the same direction as the Feed
Roller. However, since the Separation Roller is equipped with a
Torque Limiter, it rotates with Feed Roller 1 by transmission of its
rotational force via the transported paper. On the other hand, if
multiple sheets of paper are picked up, the low friction force between
the sheets of paper results in a weak rotational force being
transmitted to the Separation Roller from Feed Roller 1.
Consequently, the Separation Roller’s own rotational force separates
the extra sheet.
Figure 5-25
Multi-Feed Prevention Mechanism
5-40 Functional Information
Printing from the Optional 500-sheet
Universal Tray
The operation sequences of the Paper Feeder are controlled by the
Paper Feeder Driver. A 4-bit microprocessor is used in the Paper
Feeder Driver, which controls the sequences of the Paper Feeder and
the serial communication with the Engine Controller Board.
The Engine Controller Board outputs the pickup command to the
Paper Feeder Driver with the necessary timing.
The Paper Feeder Driver drives the solenoid in response to the
pickup command. The Paper Feeder Driver also returns the status of
the Paper Feeder to the Engine Controller Board.
+24VDC is supplied to the Paper Feeder from the printer, and +3.3V
for the integrated circuits is generated from +24VDC inside the Paper
Feeder Driver.
Figure 5-26
Paper Feeder Driver I/O
Paper Feed System 5-41
Pickup and Feeding
The Paper Feeder picks up the paper from the installed trays and
feeds the paper to the printer. The flow of the paper is shown below.
Figure 5-27
Paper Feed from Trays
The paper size and the presence of the 500-sheet Tray are detected
by three switches (SW801, 802, 803) on the Paper Feeder Driver
PCA. The relationship between the switch combinations and the
paper sizes is the same as for the printer.
The Paper Feeder is driven by the Main Motor (M101) of the printer.
When the /PRNT signal is sent to the Paper Feeder from the
Formatter, the Main Motor (M101) of the printer starts rotation. When
the Main Motor reaches its prescribed speed, the Paper Feeder
Driver PCA receives the pickup command from the Engine Controller
Board, and the Paper Feeder Pickup Solenoid (SL801) is turned on.
(The Pickup Roller, Feed Roller, and Separation Roller are driven by
the Main Motor’s rotation.)
The Pickup Roller, driven by the Solenoid, rotates once, picking up
the paper inside the 500-sheet tray. Any unnecessary sheets are
removed by the Separation Roller and the paper is fed to the pre-feed
sensor (PS102) of the printer.
5-42 Functional Information
The CPU on the Engine Controller Board monitors the conditions of
the PS102 for a prescribed period of time after the pickup starts. If the
PS102 does not detect paper within that time interval, the CPU turns
off the Feed Roller clutch (CL101) to stop the paper after the top of
page sensor (PS103) detects the presence of the preceding page.
The paper then reaches the Registration Arm, where its skew is
corrected. Then it goes through transfer, separation, and fusing
stages, passes through the delivery unit, and is delivered to the
output bin.
Figure 5-28
Paper Feed Pickup
Paper Feed System 5-43
Envelope Feeder
The operation sequences of the Envelope Feeder are controlled by
the Envelope Feeder Driver. A 4-bit microprocessor is used in the
Envelope Feeder Driver, which controls the sequences of the
Envelope Feeder and the serial communication with the Engine
Controller Board of the printer.
The Engine Controller Board outputs the pickup command to the
Paper Feeder Driver with the necessary timing.
The Envelope Feeder Driver drives the solenoid in response to the
command. The Envelope Feeder Driver also returns the Envelope
Feeder status to the Engine Controller Board.
+24VDC is supplied to the Envelope Feeder from the printer, and
+3.3V for the ICs is generated from the +24VDC inside the Paper
Feeder Driver.
Pickup and Feeding
The Envelope Feeder picks up the envelope from the Envelope
Feeder and feeds it to the printer. The envelope path is shown below.
Figure 5-29
Envelope Feed
The Envelope Feeder is driven by the Main Motor (M101) of the
printer.
When the /PRNT signal is sent to the printer from the Formatter, the
printer starts the initial rotation phase. (This phase consists of Main
Motor start-up, Scanner Motor start-up, High-voltage Control
Sequence, and Fusing unit start-up.) When the initial rotation phase
5-44 Functional Information
is completed, the Envelope Feeder Driver PCA receives the pickup
command from the Engine Controller Board and turns on the
envelope pickup solenoid (SL901).
The Pickup Roller, Feed Roller and Separation Roller are rotated
sequentially by the Main Motor rotation, and an envelope is picked up.
Then, any unnecessary envelopes are removed by the Separation
Roller, and the envelope is fed to the printer.
Figure 5-30
Envelope Feed Pickup
Paper Feed System 5-45
Duplexer
The operation sequences of the Duplexer are controlled by the
Duplexer Driver. A 4-bit microprocessor is used in the Duplexer
Driver, which controls the sequences of the Duplexer and the serial
communication with the Engine Controller Board.
The Duplexer Driver drives the Solenoid, Motors, and Fan according
to commands sent from the Engine Controller Board to the Duplexer
and Duplex Pickup command via serial communication. The Duplexer
also returns its status to the Engine Controller Board.
+24VDC is supplied to the Duplexer from the printer, and +5V for the
ICs is generated from the +24VDC inside the Duplexer Driver.
Reversing and Duplexer Pickup
The paper is fed to the Duplexer by the Top Output Bin Deflector. This
Top Output Bin Deflector moves in conjunction with the Top Output
Bin. However, the Top Output Bin Deflector is controlled by the
Duplexer Solenoid (SL701) when the Top Output Bin is closed.
The feed direction of the paper in the Duplexer is controlled by the
Reversing Roller. The paper is then transported by the Oblique Roller
and Feed Roller so that its edge contacts with the left panel to correct
its skew.
The Duplexer has two stepping motors, the Reversing Motor (M701)
and the Duplex Feed Motor (M702). Normal and reverse rotations are
controlled by the Duplexer Driver.
5-46 Functional Information
Figure 5-31
Paper Path for the Duplexer
Paper Feed System 5-47
Figure 5-32
Paper Feed for the Duplexer
Paper Jam
There are four photointerrupters (PS102, PS103, PS106, PS501) in
the paper path for detecting the presence of the paper.
If the paper does not reach or pass three sensors within the
prescribed time, the microprocessor in the Engine Controller Board
notifies the Formatter of a paper jam.
5-48 Functional Information
Basic Sequence of Operation
The Formatter PCA and the Engine Controller Board share
information during printer operation. The Interface PCA forms a link
which operates as a serial data bus. This allows printer status,
command, and dot-image data to be passed between the two PCAs.
Table 5-1 shows the general timing of the printer events. The following
events take place during normal printer operation:
Table 5-1. Printer Timing
Period
Timing
Purpose
WAIT
From power on to the end of Main
Motor initial rotation.
Clears the Drum surface potential
and cleans the Transfer Roller.
STBY (standby)
From the end of the WAIT or the
Maintains the printer in ready state.
LSTR period until the input of the
PRNT signal from the Formatter.
Or from the end of the LSTR period
until power off.
INTR (initial rotation) From the input of the PRNT signal Stabilizes the photosensitive Drum
from the Formatter until the Engine sensitivity in preparation for
Controller outputs the TOP signal. printing. Also cleans the Transfer
Roller.
PRNT
After the end of initial rotation until Forms images on the
the top of the page sensor detects photosensitive Drum based on the
the trailing edge of the paper.
/VDO signal from the Formatter
and transfers the image to paper.
LSTR (last rotation)
From the primary voltage (DC) off
until the main motor stops.
Delivers the last sheet of paper and
cleans the Transfer Roller.
If another PRNT signal is sent from
the Formatter, the printer returns to
the INTR period. If not, it returns to
the STBY period.
Basic Sequence of Operation 5-49
Figure 5-33
Timing Diagram
5-50 Functional Information
6
Removing and
Replacing Parts
Overview
This chapter discusses the following:
●
Removal and Replacement Strategy
●
Removing Covers
●
Removing Assemblies
●
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module
Overview 6-1
Removal and Replacement Strategy
This chapter describes the complete disassembly of the printer. In
every instance, tasks that must be performed before beginning the
procedure are listed first. Remove the assemblies in the order listed
to prevent damage during re-assembly.
To ensure optimum print quality, the printer will prompt to have routine
maintenance performed every 200,000 pages. When the message
PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE appears on the Control Panel, the
Printer Maintenance Kit must be installed. See page 4-5.
Servicing the printer involves replacing printed circuit and
electro-mechanical assemblies. Do not repair component failures
within these assemblies. In all instances, replace the failed assembly.
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure,
except where specific instructions are provided.
WARNING!
Some sheet metal edges, particularly around the formatter cage, are
sharp. Be careful when working in these areas to avoid cutting yourself.
CAUTION
The printer contains parts that are sensitive to
Electrostatic-Static Discharge (ESD). Always observe
proper ESD procedures when servicing the printer. The
ESD symbol appears in this chapter when the parts
being serviced are especially susceptible to ESD
damage.
It is usually best to remove and replace the covers in the order shown.
Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord and any cables.
6-2 Removing and Replacing Parts
Tools
●
Phillips #2 magnetized screwdriver with 6-inch shaft
●
Flat-blade screwdriver with 6-inch shaft
●
Needle-nose pliers
●
Penlight
Screws Used in the Printer
All screws used in the printer are Phillips head, which require a
Phillips screwdriver. The following figure shows the difference
between a Phillips and a Posidriv screwdriver. Note that the Phillips
tip has more beveled surfaces.
CAUTION
Using a Posidriv screwdriver will damage the screw heads. Use Phillips
only.
Phillips
Figure 6-1
Posidriv
Comparing Phillips and Posidriv Screwdrivers
Table 6-1 on page 6-4 describes the screws used in the printer and
provides guidelines to help determine where each type of screw is
used. The screws can vary in length depending on the thickness of
the material being fastened.
Always note where each type of screw is located and replace each
one into its original location.
Removal and Replacement Strategy 6-3
Table 6-1. Screws Used in the Printer
Drawing and Description
Purpose
Used to fasten metal to metal
when good electrical contact is
needed.
Threaded Phillips with captive star washer
Used to fasten metal or plastic to
plastic mainframes.
Silver Self-tapping Phillips screw
Used to fasten metal or plastic to
plastic mainframes.
Black Self-tapping Phillips screw
Used to fasten metal or plastic to
threaded plastic or metal.
Threaded Phillips screw with lock and flat washer
6-4 Removing and Replacing Parts
Table 6-1. Screws Used in the Printer (continued)
Drawing and Description
Purpose
Used to anchor Tray 1 Pickup
Assembly
Long screw (4.8 in/116 mm)
Hint
To insert self-tapping screws, turn the screw to the left
(counter-clockwise) until it clicks, then turn it to the right (clockwise)
until it is seated. If a self-tapping screw-hole strips, you must repair the
screw-hole or replace the affected assembly.
Removal and Replacement Strategy 6-5
Removing Covers
It is usually best to remove and replace the covers in the order shown.
Turn the printer off and unplug the power cord and any cables.
Hint
Left and right are indicated as you face the front of the printer unless
otherwise noted.
Rear Right Side Cover
Figure 6-2
Removing the Rear Right Side Cover
The Formatter and Dual In-line Memory Modules (DIMMs) are
located underneath the Right Side Cover.
1
Grasp the cover by its rear lip and pull it firmly toward the rear of
the printer until it stops.
2
Remove the cover from the printer.
6-6 Removing and Replacing Parts
Top Cover
Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the Toner Cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
To remove the Top Cover, you must remove the Rear Right Side
Cover (page 6-6), the Toner Cartridge Drive Arm (page 6-9), the
Control Panel Overlay (below) and the Control Panel (page 6-8).
Control Panel Overlay
Figure 6-3
Removing the Control Panel Overlay
1
Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gently pry upward on the right side
of the Control Panel Overlay to loosen it.
2
Remove the Control Panel Overlay from the tabs on the left and
lift it upward, off of the printer.
Removing Covers 6-7
Control Panel
Tab
Figure 6-4
Removing the Control Panel
1
Using a flat-blade screwdriver, pry each side of the Control Panel
upward.
2
Remove the top of the Control Panel from the tab.
3
Disconnect the ribbon cable from the Control Panel.
6-8 Removing and Replacing Parts
Toner Cartridge Drive Arm
Figure 6-5
Removing the Toner Cartridge Drive Arm
1
Note
Remove the Toner Cartridge Drive Arm by using needle-nose
pliers to pinch the pin from its hinge on the Top Cover.
Be sure to reconnect the Toner Cartridge Drive Arm when you replace
the Top Cover, or the Toner Cartridge will not seat properly.
Removing Covers 6-9
Toner cartridge
drive arm
Rear screws
Top screws
Figure 6-6
Removing the Top Cover
2
Remove the four screws holding the Top Cover (two are behind
the Rear Output Bin, near the top, and two are on top of the
printer under the Top Cover).
6-10 Removing and Replacing Parts
Release tab if
necessary
Figure 6-7
Releasing tabs to lift the Top Cover
3
Squeeze the right front side of the Top Cover to remove it. It may
be necessary to use a small flat-blade screwdriver to release the
tab inside the small hole.
4
Holding the output assembly in place (located toward the rear of
the printer), remove the Top Cover.
Removing Covers 6-11
Left Side Cover
Latch (inside)
Figure 6-8
Catches
Removing the Left Side Cover
1
Open Tray 1.
2
Release the latch on the left side cover from the inside of the
printer. Release the catches on the front side of the cover.
3
Lift the cover upward to release the front top side of the cover,
then pull the cover away from the printer.
6-12 Removing and Replacing Parts
Front Right Side Cover
Latch
Figure 6-9
Hint
Removing the Front Right Side Cover
1
Release the latch at the top center of the cover.
2
Lift the cover straight up until it is free of the tabs at the bottom
and the power switch rod, then pull it away from the printer.
When you reinstall the Front Right Side Cover, be sure to reconnect
the power switch rod.
Removing Covers 6-13
Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin
Step 2
Step 1
Figure 6-10
Removing the Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin
1
Facing the rear of the printer, pinch the right side of the Rear
Output Bin and release the hinge from the slot.
2
Rotate the bin upward and slide it to the right to release the left
hinge.
6-14 Removing and Replacing Parts
Tray 1
Figure 6-11
Removing Tray 1 from the Front Cover
1
Open Tray 1.
2
Push outward on the two slot hinges to release the pins on Tray 1.
3
Slide the Front Cover to the right and remove it from the three
hinges on the bottom.
Removing Covers 6-15
Figure 6-12
Removing the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover
4
Firmly pull both sides of the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover toward you
until it releases from the shaft. See Figure 6-13, “Detail of the
Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover,” on page 6-17.
5
Rotate Tray 1 downward and remove it from the two hinges.
6-16 Removing and Replacing Parts
Figure 6-13
Detail of the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover
Hint
When you reinstall the Tray 1 Sensor Arm Cover be sure the Sensor
Arms move freely.
Removing Covers 6-17
Removing Assemblies
The order in which you replace the following assemblies depends on
the part needing to be replaced. It is not necessary to remove every
assembly.
Fuser
WARNING!
Let the Fuser Assembly cool before disassembly.
1
Figure 6-14
Remove the Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin (page 6-14).
Removing the Left and Right Duplex Connector Covers
2
If a Duplexer is installed, remove it. If a Duplexer is not installed,
remove the Left and Right Duplex Access Covers from the rear of
the printer by pulling each from the bottom.
6-18 Removing and Replacing Parts
Figure 6-15
Loosening the captive screws in the Fuser Assembly
3
Loosen the two captive screws on the Fuser Assembly.
4
Pull the Fuser Assembly straight out of the printer.
Removing Assemblies 6-19
Formatter Cage Assembly
For accessing DIMMs
EIO
accessory
Figure 6-16
Note
Removing the Formatter Cage Assembly
1
Print a Configuration Page. The information is necessary to
reconfigure the printer after you replace the Formatter.
2
Remove the rear right side cover (page 6-6). The Formatter Cage
Assembly is directly underneath.
3
Remove the captive screw and open the DIMM access door to
see if any DIMMs are installed. Remove and transfer any DIMMs
or EIO accessories if you replace the Formatter.
4
Remove the 5 screws around the Formatter cage.
5
Slide the Formatter toward the rear of the printer and remove it.
Using the Configuration Page you printed in step 1 above, reconfigure
the printer after replacing the Formatter. Be sure to reset the printer’s
page count (page 3-33).
6-20 Removing and Replacing Parts
Output Assembly
Brass arm
Figure 6-17
White tab
Removing the Output Assembly
1
Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7). The Output Assembly is on
the top, rear of the printer.
Removing Assemblies 6-21
2
Figure 6-18
Facing the rear of the printer, release the 2 latches as follows:
Left end of Output Assembly (brass arm)
a On the left end of the assembly, rotate the brass arm up 90°.
Figure 6-19
Right end of Output Assembly (white tab)
b On the right end of the assembly, release the white tab.
3
CAUTION
Lift the assembly up and out of the printer.
Lift the assembly carefully to avoid damaging the Top Output Bin full
sensor flag. When the assembly is replaced, the flag must be able to
rotate freely.
6-22 Removing and Replacing Parts
Laser Scanner
Shutter interlock and plate
Figure 6-20
Hint
Removing the Laser Scanner
1
Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7). The Laser Scanner is on the
top of the printer, tilted toward the rear, and has a yellow label on
it.
2
Unplug the 3 connectors as shown.
3
Remove the 4 black screws around the edges of the Laser
Scanner. Do not remove the two screws on the cover of the Laser
Scanner.
4
Lift the Laser Scanner straight up.
When you replace the Laser Scanner be sure the black shutter interlock
is resting on top of the silver shutter plate.
Removing Assemblies 6-23
Fan
Figure 6-21
Hint
Removing the Fan
1
Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7) and the Left Side Cover (page
6-12). The Fan is on the left side of the printer.
2
Unplug the Fan’s connector to the Engine Controller Board.
3
Squeeze the latches on the left and right sides of the Fan cover.
4
Pull the Fan straight out.
The cover attaches to the Fan at the top right and bottom left corners.
Retain the cover; it is separate from the Replacement Fan.
6-24 Removing and Replacing Parts
Main Motor
Figure 6-22
Removing the Main Motor
1
Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7) and the Front Right Side Cover
(page 6-13). The Main Motor is on the right front side of the
printer.
2
Unplug the connector.
3
Remove the 4 silver screws around the corners of the metal plate.
4
Remove the Main Motor from the printer.
Removing Assemblies 6-25
Transfer Roller
DO NOT TOUCH!
(See Hint)
Figure 6-23
Removing the Transfer Roller
1
CAUTION
Do not touch the black rubber part of the roller. Skin oils on the roller
can cause problems with print quality.
2
Hint
Open the Top Cover and remove the Toner Cartridge. The
Transfer Roller is underneath the Toner Cartridge.
Using a flat-blade screwdriver, pry the right end of the metal shaft
out of place, then the left end.
When you replace the Transfer Roller, make sure the black collar is
oriented properly, with the open end down.
6-26 Removing and Replacing Parts
Tray 1 Pickup Roller
Figure 6-24
Hint
Removing the Pickup Roller (shown with Envelope Entrance Cover
removed)
1
Open Tray 1. The Tray 1 Pickup Roller is in the center of the
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly.
2
Grasp the Envelope Entrance Cover and pull it straight away from
the printer.
3
Pry open the blue latch on the roller.
4
Lift the roller out.
To replace the roller, make sure the pin in the roller lines up with the
hole in the shaft.
Removing Assemblies 6-27
Figure 6-25
Detail of the Tray 1 Pickup Roller
6-28 Removing and Replacing Parts
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
1
Remove the covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover, Left Side
Cover, Front Right Side Cover, and Tray 1. The Tray 1 Pickup
Assembly is on the front of the printer.
Envelope
feeder gear
cover
Step 4b
Step 4a
Figure 6-26
Envelope
feeder
connector
cover
Removing the Envelope Feeder Gear Cover
2
Flip down or remove the Envelope Feeder Connector Cover.
3
Remove the Envelope Entrance Cover.
4
Remove the Envelope Feeder Gear Cover as follows:
a Remove the black self-tapping screw at the bottom of the
Envelope Feeder Gear Cover.
b Remove the long screw (4.8 in/116 mm) on the right side of the
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly.
Removing Assemblies 6-29
Figure 6-27
Removing the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly – Right Side
5
Disconnect the solenoid cable on the right side of the Tray 1
Pickup Assembly. (Note the way the cables are routed for
replacement.)
6-30 Removing and Replacing Parts
Step 7
Step 8
Step 6
Figure 6-28
Removing the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly – Left Side
6
Unplug the connector to the Engine Controller Board on the left
side of the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly.
7
Remove the long screw (4.8 in/116 mm) from the left side of the
assembly.
8
Remove the self-tapping screw shown.
Removing Assemblies 6-31
Toner
cartridge
guide
Figure 6-29
Removing the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly – Front Side
9
Remove the 3 screws shown.
10 Lift the black Toner Cartridge Guide on the right side of the
assembly and pull the assembly straight out of the printer. See
page 6-33 for the procedure.
6-32 Removing and Replacing Parts
Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide
You can lift aside the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide (instead of
removing it) to access the Registration Assembly. It is not necessary
to unplug the connectors.
Remove the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide to access the Gear
Train. Follow the steps below:
1
Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7), Front Right Side Cover (page
6-13), and Tray 1 (page 6-15). The Right Side Toner Cartridge
Guide is on the right front side of the printer.
Step 3
Step 4
Step 2
Figure 6-30
Removing the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide
2
Remove the black self-tapping screw.
3
Unplug the 3 connectors if necessary.
4
Remove the small silver screw to disconnect the ground wire.
5
Lift the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide off the printer.
Removing Assemblies 6-33
Registration Assembly
Figure 6-31
Removing the Registration Assembly
1
Remove the following covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover,
Left Side Cover, Front Right Side Cover, and Tray 1. Remove the
Tray 1 pickup assembly (page 6-29). The Right Side Toner
Cartridge Guide can be lifted without removal (page 6-33). The
Registration Assembly is under the Toner Cartridge.
2
Remove the 3 black self-tapping screws shown. (Lift the green
handle on the right end of the Registration Assembly to access
the black screw on the left rear side.)
6-34 Removing and Replacing Parts
DO NOT REMOVE!
Figure 6-32
Detail of screws for the Registration Assembly
CAUTION
Do not remove the silver screw closest to the Registration Assembly!
It holds the spring in place. Take out the silver screw farther from the
registration assembly, the one that is under the green handle.
3
Hint
Lift the green handle. Remove the 2 black self-tapping screws
and the rearmost silver screw shown. See the caution above.
If the Anti-static Bar becomes displaced, reinstall it with the left end in
the slot, or paper may jam in this area.
Removing Assemblies 6-35
Paper Feed Assembly
1
Remove the following covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover,
Left Side Cover, Front Right Side Cover, and Tray 1. Remove the
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (page 6-29). The Paper Feed Assembly
is on the front of the printer.
Note
routing
Figure 6-33
Unplugging the connector to the Paper Feed Assembly
2
CAUTION
Unplug and unroute the 2-pin connector from the right side.
For replacement of the Paper Feed Assembly, note the way the wires
are routed to the connector. If a wire is routed improperly, it can be
damaged.
6-36 Removing and Replacing Parts
Figure 6-34
Removing the upper screws from the Paper Feed Assembly
3
Hint
Remove the 2 black upper screws.
After replacing the Paper Feed Assembly, make sure to insert the 2
upper screws only. The 2 lower screws are for holding the Tray 1 Pickup
Assembly in place.
Removing Assemblies 6-37
Hint
For replacement of the Paper Feed Assembly, orient the clutch properly
by inserting it into the slot, as shown.
Figure 6-35
Detail of the Paper Feed Clutch
6-38 Removing and Replacing Parts
Formatter Pan
Figure 6-36
Removing the Formatter Pan
1
Remove the Top Cover (page 6-7) and the Front Right Side Cover
(page 6-13). Remove the Formatter Cage Assembly (page 6-20).
The Formatter Pan is on the right rear side. Remove the
Formatter Pan in order to split the engine from the tray assembly
or to access the Gear Train.
2
Remove the 4 black self-tapping screws.
3
Remove the 3 silver M-3 screws.
4
Pull the Formatter Pan straight out, away from the printer.
Removing Assemblies 6-39
Gear Train
Toner Cartridge Drive Arm
Step 4
Figure 6-37
Note
Removing the Gear Train
1
Remove the following covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover,
Front Right Side Cover, Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin, and Tray 1.
Remove the Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide (page 6-33), the
Registration Assembly (page 6-34), the Formatter Cage
Assembly (page 6-20), and the Formatter Pan (page 6-39). The
Gear Train is on the right side of the printer.
2
If the Registration Assembly has not already been removed, take
out the rearmost silver screw under the green handle (page
6-35).
3
Remove the 8 black self-tapping screws.
4
Pull the Ribbon Cable Assembly outward (off the pin), then down,
out of the way.
5
Remove any remaining wires from the white plastic guide.
6
Slide out the Gear Train.
When you reinstall the Gear Train, slide the top in first and then push
the bottom in.
6-40 Removing and Replacing Parts
Delivery Drive Assembly
Figure 6-38
Removing the Delivery Drive Assembly
1
Remove the covers (starting on page 6-6): Top Cover, Left Side
Cover, Front Right Side Cover, Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin, and
Tray 1. Remove the Output Assembly (page 6-21), Formatter
Cage Assembly (page 6-20), Formatter Pan (page 6-39), and
Fuser Assembly (page 6-18). The Delivery Drive Assembly is on
the right rear side of the printer.
2
Remove the single screw.
3
Unplug the 3-pin connector shown.
4
Lift the Delivery Drive assembly upward, away from the printer.
Removing Assemblies 6-41
Separating the Engine Module from the
Paper Feed Module
This procedure is the same for printers with a single 500-sheet Tray or
two 250-sheet Trays.
1
Figure 6-39
Remove the Rear Right Side cover (page 6-6). Remove the
Formatter Cage Assembly (page 6-20), Formatter Pan (page
6-39), and 2 long screws from the Tray 1 Pickup Assembly (See
Figure 6-26 on page 6-29 and Figure 6-28 on page 6-31).
Unplugging the connector to the Paper Feed Module
2
Unplug the connector to the Paper Feed Module on the right rear
side of the printer (under the formatter pan). Remove the cable
from its bracket.
6-42 Removing and Replacing Parts
Figure 6-40
Separating the Engine from the Paper Feed Module
3
CAUTION
Remove the single black, self-tapping screw from the left side of
the printer, below the Fan.
Lift the Engine carefully, being sure that all cables are disconnected.
4
Lift the Engine away from the Paper Feed Module.
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-43
Engine Controller Board
Note
After you replace the Engine Controller Board, do not forget to readjust
the top margin as described on page 6-46.
1
Separate the Engine from the Paper Feed Module (page 6-42).
The Engine Controller Board is on the underside of the Engine
and contains the following:
• DC controller
• High-voltage power supply
• AC power supply
• DC power supply
• Timing controls
(In the back, not on the board)
Spring
Power
switch
rod
Figure 6-41
Removing the Engine Controller Board
2
Remove the Fuser Assembly (page 6-18).
6-44 Removing and Replacing Parts
Facing the front of the Engine Module:
3
Remove 7 screws (shown in Figure 6-41 on page 6-44):
• 4 black, self-tapping M4 screws (3 in front and 1 in the right
rear)
• From the left rear, 3 M3 screws (1 recessed)
Figure 6-42
4
Disconnect the spring on the right side from the notch.
5
Disconnect the Power Switch Rod.
Removing the Engine Controller Board
6
Hint
Lifting from the printer’s left side (the side the Fan is on), tip the
board up, then unplug all connectors.
The black cable router in the middle of the Engine Controller Board can
be folded aside with the cables intact. When you replace the board,
reconnect and route all cables before reconnecting the power switch
rod.
Be sure to reconnect the spring on the right side to the Ground Plate.
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-45
Adjusting the Top Margin
When you replace the Engine Controller Board, you must readjust the
top margin as follows:
Figure 6-43
Location of VR501
1
After setting the VR501 on the Engine Controller Board to the
center position (0), load letter or A4 paper in the tray. Press the
Engine Test Print Button (located on the left side of the printer,
below the vent) to make several test prints.
6-46 Removing and Replacing Parts
Measure this distance
Figure 6-44
Adjusting the top margin
2
Measure the distance between the edge of the paper and the
print pattern. Measure all the test prints and calculate the
average.
3
Adjust VR501 so that the margin becomes .08 in (2 mm). Turn
VR501 clockwise to decrease the margin or counter-clockwise to
increase the margin.
4
Make several test prints again and perform step 2 above. If the
top margin is still incorrect, repeat the procedure.
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-47
Paper Feed Rollers
The following procedure is the same for all HP LaserJet 4000 and
4050 series printers; there are 2 Feed Rollers for the HP LaserJet
4000 T/4000 TN and 4050 T/4050 TN and one Feed Roller for the
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N and 4050/4050 N printers.
Figure 6-45
Removing the Paper Feed Rollers (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN and
4050 T/4050 TN shown)
1
Remove the tray(s) from the Feeder. The Paper Feed Rollers are
inside the Feeder.
2
Pinch the release at the left side of the Roller and slide it off the
shaft.
6-48 Removing and Replacing Parts
Separation Rollers
Figure 6-46
Removing the Separation Rollers
The Separation Rollers are inside the paper trays.
1
Release the latch and lift the cover inside the tray.
2
Pinch the release at the left side of the Roller and slide it off the
shaft.
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-49
Paper Feed Module Plate
Remove the Paper Feed Module Plate to access the Controller PCA.
This procedure is the same for one 500-sheet Tray or two 250-sheet
Trays.
(Small)
Figure 6-47
Removing the Paper Feed Module Plate
1
Remove the 7 black self-tapping screws (one of them is recessed
in front).
2
Remove 2 small metal-to-metal screws.
3
Lift up the Paper Feed Module Plate to remove it.
6-50 Removing and Replacing Parts
Paper Feed Module Gear Train Assembly
This procedure is the same for one 500-sheet Tray or two 250-sheet
Trays.
Unplug
connector
Figure 6-48
Removing the Gear Train
1
Remove the long recessed screw shown.
2
Unplug the connector (note routing).
3
Lift the gear train upward, away from the Paper Feed Module.
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-51
Paper Feed Module Side Rails
Remove the Paper Feed Module side rails to access the PCA
Controller. This procedure is the same for one 500-sheet Tray or two
250-sheet Trays.
(Long
screw)
Figure 6-49
Unplug
connector
Removing the Paper Feed Module side rails (HP LaserJet
4000 T/4000 TN and 4050 T/4050 TN shown)
1
To remove the side rails, remove the 4 recessed screws (1 is
long).
2
Unplug the connector.
3
Lift the side rails off of the Paper Feed Module.
6-52 Removing and Replacing Parts
Lower Paper Feed Module Plate (HP LaserJet
4000 T/4000 TN and 4050 T/4050 TN)
Figure 6-50
Removing the lower Paper Feed Module Plate
1
Remove 9 black self-tapping screws.
2
Remove 2 small black M3 screws.
3
Lift up the lower Paper Feed Module Plate to remove it.
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-53
PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN and
4050 T/4050 TN)
Figure 6-51
Removing the PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN and
4050 T/4050 TN)
1
Pinch the left and right sides of the PCA Cover to release it from
the side latches.
2
Rotate the PCA Cover downward and toward you to remove it.
6-54 Removing and Replacing Parts
PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N and
4050/4050 N)
Figure 6-52
Removing the PCA Cover (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N and
4050/4050 N)
1
Release the latches shown.
2
Remove the PCA Cover.
Separating the Engine Module from the Paper Feed Module 6-55
PCA Controller
This procedure is the same for one 500-sheet Tray or two 250-sheet
Trays.
Figure 6-53
Removing the PCA Controller
1
Unplug 3 connectors to the PCA Controller.
2
Unclip the left side of the PCA Controller and remove it.
6-56 Removing and Replacing Parts
7
Troubleshooting
Overview
This chapter discusses the following:
●
Troubleshooting Process
●
Troubleshooting the Printing System
●
Reference Diagrams
Overview 7-1
Troubleshooting Process
The troubleshooting process is a systematic approach that addresses
the major problems first, and then other problems as you identify the
causes for printer malfunctions and errors. The “Troubleshooting
Flowchart” on page 7-4 illustrates the major steps for troubleshooting
the printing system. Each heading depicts a major troubleshooting
step.
A “yes” answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next
major step.
A “no” answer indicates that additional testing is needed. Proceed to
the referenced location and follow the directions for that area. After
completing the additional testing, proceed to the next major step.
The following list describes the basic questions for the customer and
the corresponding troubleshooting step to help you quickly define the
problem(s).
Table 7-1. Major Steps for Troubleshooting
Power On
(page 7-7)
Does the printer perform the initialization and power-on steps?
This section gives the procedures for correcting power supply
problems.
Display
(page 7-12)
Does the Control Panel indicate READY, OFFLINE, or
POWERSAVE ON?
This section gives the procedures for clearing Control Panel error
messages and displaying and correcting Event Log codes.
Event Log
(page 7-13)
Are there recurring problems in the Event Log?
This section gives information about printing the Event Log and
evaluating the error history.
Printer Messages
(page 7-17)
Does the printer’s Control Panel display an error message?
This section provides an alphabetical and numerical listing of the
printer’s Control Panel messages, and gives the recommended
actions to resolve the problem.
7-2 Troubleshooting
Table 7-1. Major Steps for Troubleshooting (continued)
General Paper Path
Troubleshooting
(page 7-45)
Is there a paper jam in the printer?
Information Pages
(page 7-48)
Will the printer print information pages successfully?
This section gives information about solving problems in the
paper path.
This section gives the procedures for printing the information
pages and evaluating and correcting the printer’s configuration.
Image Quality
(page 7-54)
Does the print quality meet the customer’s expectations?
This section gives Toner Cartridge checks, information on
EconoMode, image defect examples, and the Repetitive Defect
Ruler.
Interface Troubleshooting
(page 7-77)
Can the customer print from the host system successfully?
This section describes how to determine if the printer is
communicating properly with the host system.
Troubleshooting Process 7-3
Troubleshooting Flowchart
Figure 7-1
Troubleshooting Flowchart (1 of 2)
7-4 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting Flowchart (Continued)
Troubleshooting Flowchart, continued
Troubleshooting Process 7-5
Troubleshooting the Printing System
Preliminary Operating Checks
Prior to troubleshooting a specific printer problem, you should ensure
that:
Note
●
The printer is being maintained on a regular basis as described in
Chapter 4.
●
The customer is using acceptable paper as specified in the
HP Printer Family Paper Specification Guide.
●
The printer is positioned on a solid, level surface.
●
The line voltage does not vary more than 10% from the nominal
rated value as specified on the Power Rating Label.
●
The operating environment for the printer and paper is within the
temperature and humidity specifications listed in Chapter 1 of this
manual.
●
The printer is never exposed to ammonia fumes such as those
produced by diazo copiers or office cleaning materials.
●
The printer is not exposed to direct sunlight.
●
Non-HP components (such as refilled Toner Cartridges, font
cartridges, and memory boards) are removed from the printer.
When moving the printer into a warm room from a cold location such
as a warehouse, various problems can occur due to condensation in
the printer. For example, if the Photosensitive Drum is cold, the
resistance of the photoconductive layer will be high. This will lead to
incorrect contrast. Leave the printer running for 10 to 20 minutes.
7-6 Troubleshooting
Power On
Note
It is important to have the printer’s Control Panel functional as soon as
possible in the troubleshooting process so that the printer’s diagnostics
can assist in locating printing errors.
Table 7-2. Power On Defect or Blank Display
Problem
Action
Is the power cord plugged
into the wall and the
printer? Is AC and DC
power available?
Verify. See Table 7-3, “No AC Power,” on page 7-9 and Table 7-4,
“No DC Power,” on page 7-10.
Is the power switch set to
on?
Set the switch to the on position. You should hear the switch
toggle. If the Front Right Side Cover has been removed recently,
be sure that the rod leading to the power supply moves as the
rocker switch is toggled.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-7
Table 7-2. Power On Defect or Blank Display (continued)
Problem
Action
Does the Fan turn on for
Note: Fan operation is significant since the Fan is controlled by
about 4 seconds when you the printer’s Engine Controller Board. An operational Fan
first turn the printer on?
indicates the following:
1. AC power is present in the printer.
2. DC power supply is functional (both 24VDC and 3.5VDC are
being generated).
3. The Engine Controller Board’s micro-processor is functional.
If the Fan is not working:
1. Turn the printer off and remove the printer’s Formatter PCA.
Disconnect all the printer’s Paper Handling Options.
2. Turn the printer on and check the Fan again.
If the Fan is still not working, perform the following steps:
1. Verify that the fan is connected to the Engine Controller Board.
2. Replace the Fan.
3. Replace the Engine Controller Board.
If the Fan is working but the printer’s Control Panel is blank:
1. Print an Engine Test. See “Engine Test” on page 7-11.
If the Engine Test is successful, perform the following steps:
a. Reseat the Control Panel and Formatter Connector.
b. Replace the Control Panel Assembly.
c. Replace the Formatter.
d. Replace the cable from the Control Panel.
2. If the Engine Test is not successful, replace the Engine
Controller Board.
Note
The Fan only operates during initial power on and while printing, unless
the temperature inside the printer is too high. If the temperature is too
high, the Fan turns on to cool the inside of the printer.
7-8 Troubleshooting
Table 7-3. No AC Power
Cause
Action
No correct voltage present at the outlet.
Plug the power cord into another AC circuit
outlet.
Inform the customer that the correct line
voltage is not available at the outlet.
The power cord is not firmly plugged into the
printer and the outlet.
Insert the power plug firmly.
Blown fuse.
1. Check the fuses (FU1 and FU2) on the
Engine Controller Board.
2. Replace the fuses if necessary.
Defective power switch.
Remove the Engine Controller Board.
Measure the resistance between the two
terminals of the power switch (SW1) by
applying the tester probes to the terminals.
The resistance must be low (under 1KΩ) when
the power is turned ON, and high (over 6MΩ)
when the Switch is turned OFF. Otherwise,
replace the Engine Controller Board.
Defective AC receptacle or AC power line.
Check the printer’s AC receptacle and wiring
for the AC power line. If no problem is found,
replace the Engine Controller Board.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-9
Table 7-4. No DC Power
Cause
Action
No AC power is supplied.
Check the AC power supply. See Table 7-3,
“No AC Power,” on page 7-9
The overcurrent/overvoltage detection circuit
activated.
If the problem is not rectified after the power
switch is turned off and on again, find the
cause of activation of the
overcurrent/overvoltage detection circuit in the
power supply. Wait for more than two minutes
before turning the printer back on.
Blown fuse.
1. Check the fuses (FU1 and FU2) on the
Engine Controller Board.
2. Replace the fuses if necessary.
7-10 Troubleshooting
Engine Test
The printer has one test pattern (vertical lines). When an image
defect appears, a test print can be made to identify the problem. The
test print can be made by pressing the test print switch located on the
left side of the printer (see Figure 7-2 on page 7-12). A test pattern
can be printed by pressing the test print switch once after the
Photosensitive Drum has stopped and the printer has entered the
standby mode. If the switch is held down, the test pattern is printed
continuously. The switch can be used when paper is loaded in any
tray other than Tray 1.
The Engine Test does the following:
Note
●
Verifies that the Print Engine is functioning correctly (the
Formatter PCA is completely bypassed during an Engine Test)
●
Is used for isolating printer problems
●
Is used for checking and adjusting registration
●
Prints from Tray 2, 3, or 4 only, not from Tray 1
●
Can be activated with the Formatter PCA removed
For the printer to perform an Engine Test, Tray 2, 3, or 4 must be
installed and loaded with paper, and the Toner Cartridge must be
installed in the printer.
Location of Engine Test Button
The Engine Test button is located on the left side of the printer, below
the Fan vent, as shown in Figure 7-2 on page 7-12.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-11
Figure 7-2
Location of the Engine Test Button
Printing an Engine Test
To print an engine test, use a non-metallic object (such as a pencil) to
press the engine test button. A single test page with vertical lines
prints. To print multiple test pages, hold down the engine test button.
Display
The Control Panel should display READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON.
For information about errors displayed, access the Event Log (see
page 7-13). If the display is blank, see page 7-7.
7-12 Troubleshooting
Event Log
Use the Event Log to diagnose and troubleshoot printer errors and
intermittent failures. You can either display or print the Event Log.
Access the Event Log from the Control Panel’s Information Menu.
(Select PRINT EVENT LOG or SHOW EVENT LOG.) The Event Log
retains the printer’s last 30 error messages.
See the tables starting on page 7-18 for more information about
correcting Event Log messages in the printer.
Note
LJ4000 Only: The Event Log codes and the error on the Control Panel
do not always correspond exactly. The numbers in the Control Panel
message may not be the same in the Event Log; the decimal numbers
may be shifted by one digit. For example, 13.1 on the Control Panel
reads 13.01 in the Event Log. Refer to the correct number in the tables
starting on page 7-18.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-13
Most recent error
(up to 30)
Figure 7-3
Sample Event Log
7-14 Troubleshooting
Display the Event Log
If the printer cannot print or move any paper, follow these steps to
display the Event Log. Otherwise, print the event log.
1
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2
Press [Item] until SHOW EVENT LOG appears.
3
Press [Select] to show the Event Log.
4
Press [+] to scroll through the Event Log.
5
Write down the error messages.
6
Check the Event Log for specific error trends in the last 10,000
printed pages.
7
Ask the customer for any observed error trends. (For example, do
paper jams tend to occur in a specific area of the printer?)
8
Record any specific error trends.
9
See Table 7-5, “Alphabetical Printer Messages,” on page 7-18 or
Table 7-6, “Numerical Printer Messages,” on page 7-29 and follow
the recommended action.
10 If the Control Panel displays READY, OFFLINE, or POWERSAVE ON,
go to the next section. If it displays any other message, repeat
this procedure starting from step 1.
Print the Event Log
The printer’s internal Event Log stores the last 30 errors and can be
printed at any time. To print the Event Log:
1
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2
Press [Item] until PRINT EVENT LOG appears.
3
Press [Select] to print the Event Log.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-15
Interpret the Event Log
The Event Log is the key tool in troubleshooting printer problems.
Figure 7-3 shows a typical Event Log. The Event Log shows the
current page count at the top left of the page with the printer’s serial
number directly to the right of the page count. The left column is the
error sequence number, with the error listed at the top (the highest
sequence number is the most recent error logged). The next column
is the page count at the time of the error, and the last column is the
Personality (PCL or PostScript) column or the cause of the jam at the
time of the error.
The event log for early versions of the HP LaserJet 4000 series
printer may record errors in a different format than the Control Panel
display. For example, if 13.20 PAPER JAM is displayed on the Control
Panel, the Event Log records error number 13.32.48 or 13.20.48.
Hint
Whenever a 13.XX appears on the Control Panel, a good practice is to
clear the jammed paper from the printer and print the Event Log. If you
cannot print the Event Log, you can still display it on the Control Panel.
Write the error next to the last error logged. The last error is the error
at the top of the Event Log printout with the highest number in the
left-most column.
To interpret the Event Log:
●
Each individual entry in the log is called an “error,” while all errors
occurring at the same page count are called an “event.” Read the
Recommended Action for each error comprising an event to gain
a clear picture of what took place during that event. Events
usually conclude with a time-out, or no response from device
(error 66.XX in the Event Log) which requires a power cycle of the
print engine.
●
Use the Event Log table in this section to associate errors in the
Event Log with the Control Panel error message. Follow the
recommended action listed in the table for each error or event.
7-16 Troubleshooting
Printer Messages
The following tables explain messages that might display on the
printer’s Control Panel. Alphabetical printer messages and their
meanings are listed in Table 7-5, and numerical printer messages are
listed in Table 7-6.
Hint
If a message persists requesting that you load a tray, or if a message
indicates that a previous print job is still in the printer’s memory, press
[Go] to print or press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the printer’s
memory.
Note
Not all messages are described (many are self-explanatory).
Some printer messages are affected by the Auto Continue and
Clearable Warning settings from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s
Control Panel. If CLEARABLE WARNING=JOB is set on the Control Panel,
warning messages display on the Control Panel until the end of the job
from which they were generated. If CLEARABLE WARNING=ON is set,
warning messages display on the Control Panel until [Go] is pressed.
If an error occurs that prevents printing and AUTO CONTINUE=ON is set,
the printer goes offline for 10 seconds before it returns online. If AUTO
CONTINUE=OFF is set, the message displays until [Go] is pressed.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-17
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
ACCESS DENIED
MENUS LOCKED
The Control Panel
function you are trying to
access has been locked
by the network
administrator to prevent
unauthorized access.
Ask the network
administrator to unlock the
function.
BAD DUPLEXER
CONNECTION
The Duplexer is not
connected properly.
1. Re-install the Duplexer.
2. If the message persists
make sure the Duplexer
is connected and the
connector is not
damaged.
3. Replace the Duplexer.
BAD OPT TRAY
CONNECTION
The optional tray is not
connected properly.
1. Re-install the optional
tray.
2. Make sure the optional
tray is connected and the
connector is not
damaged.
3. Replace the optional
tray.
CANNOT DUPLEX
REAR BIN OPEN
The printer cannot duplex Close the Rear Output
because the Rear Output Bin.
Bin is open.
CHECK INPUT DEVICE
The optional input tray
cannot feed paper to the
printer because a door or
tray is open.
alternates with
PAPER PATH OPEN
PLEASE CLOSE IT
7-18 Troubleshooting
1. Check the doors and
trays.
2. If doors and trays are
closed, check tabs and
sensor levers in the tray
for proper operation.
Replace any defective
tabs or sensors.
3. Replace the PCA
Controller in the feeder.
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
CHOSEN LANGUAGE
NOT AVAILABLE
A print job requested a
printer language that does
not exist in the printer. The
job will not print and will
be cleared from memory.
1. Print the job using a
driver for a different printer
language, or add the
requested language to the
printer (if available).
2. Press [Go] to continue.
CLOSE TOP COVER
This message may persist
when the Top Cover is
closed because of a
damaged or improperly
connected switch.
1. Check SW101
(Figure 7-33 on
page 7-108) for proper
operation. Make sure
wires are connected.
2. Replace SW101.
3. If the new switch does
not solve the error, the
wiring or the Engine
Controller Board may be
defective.
DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
The EIO disk had a critical Reseat the EIO disk or
failure and can no longer replace it with a new one.
be used.
DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation
could not be performed.
You might have
attempted an illegal
operation, such as trying
to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
1. Check the file name
and directory name.
2. Reattempt the
operation.
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
The disk is full.
1. Delete files from the
EIO disk and then try
again, or add a flash
DIMM.
2. Download or delete
files from HP JetAdmin,
and download or delete
fonts from HP FontSmart.
(See the software help for
more information.)
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-19
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
The EIO disk is protected, Disable the write
and no new files can be
protection through
written to it.
HP JetAdmin.
EIO n DISK
INITIALIZING
The disk accessory card
takes a long time to
initialize. The first
parameter is the
accessory slot number for
this disk accessory card.
EIO n DISK
NOT FUNCTIONAL
The EIO disk is not
working correctly.
Remove the EIO disk from
the slot indicated.
Replace it with a new EIO
disk.
EIO n
INITIALIZING
Wait for the message to
disappear (approximately
5 minutes). If the printer
EIO card is operating
correctly and
communicating with the
network, this message
disappears after
approximately one minute
and no action is required.
If the EIO card is unable to
communicate with the
network, this message
remains for five minutes
and then disappears. In
this case the printer is not
communicating with the
network (even though the
message is no longer
present). The problem may
be a bad EIO card, a bad
cable or connection on the
network, or a network
problem. Contact your
network administrator.
alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
EIO n DISK
SPINNING UP
7-20 Troubleshooting
The disk accessory is
initializing. The first
parameter is the
accessory slot number for
this accessory card.
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
ENV FEEDER LOAD
[TYPE] [SIZE]
There is no envelope in
the feeder, the wrong size
is loaded in the feeder, or
the type and size is set
incorrectly in the Control
Panel.
1. Load the requested
envelope type and size
into the Envelope Feeder.
2. Make sure the envelope
size and type are set
correctly from the Paper
Handling Menu in the
printer’s Control Panel.
3. Press [Go] if the
desired envelope is
already loaded in the
feeder.
4. Press [-Value+] to
scroll through the
available types and sizes.
5. Press [Select] to
accept the alternate type
or size.
FLASH DEVICE
FAILURE
The flash DIMM had a
critical failure and no
longer can be used.
Remove the flash DIMM
and replace it with a new
one.
FLASH FILE
OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation
could not be performed.
You might have
attempted an illegal
operation, such as trying
to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
1. Check the file name
and directory name.
2. Reattempt the
operation.
FLASH FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
The flash DIMM is full.
1. Delete files from the
flash DIMM or add
another DIMM.
2. Download or delete
files from HP JetAdmin,
and download or delete
fonts from HP FontSmart.
(See the software help for
more information.)
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-21
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
FLASH IS
WRITE PROTECTED
The flash DIMM is
protected, and no new
files can be written to it.
Disable the write
protection through
HP JetAdmin.
INITIALIZING
If the message displays
continually, a DIMM may
not be inserted
completely.
Reseat DIMM(s).
INPUT DEVICE
CONDITION XX.YY
An input paper handling
device has a condition
that needs attention
before printing can
resume.
1st X = Device number in
chain
2nd X= Device type
(3 types):
1 = Input
2 = Output
3 = Stapler/stacker unit
YY = Device specific error
See the documentation
that came with the paper
handling device for
assistance.
INSTALL TRAY X
The printer is unable to
print the current job
because the specified tray
(X) is open or not inserted
correctly.
1. Re-insert the specified
tray.
2. Check for damaged
tabs in the tray.
3. Check for damaged
switches in the printer.
4. Replace the PCA
Controller in the feeder.
7-22 Troubleshooting
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
LOADING
PROGRAM <NUMBER>
alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
Wait for the program to
Programs and fonts can
be stored on the printer’s load.
file system. At bootup time
these entities are loaded
into RAM. (These entities
can take a long time to
load into RAM depending
on the size and number of
entities being loaded.)
The <NUMBER> specifies
a sequence number
indicating the current
program being loaded.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
One of the following
occurred:
A manual feed was
requested.
There is no paper in
Tray 1.
The wrong size of paper is
loaded.
The Control Panel is not
set for the kind of paper
loaded.
1. Load the requested
paper into Tray 1.
2. Press [Go] if the
desired paper is already
loaded in Tray 1.
3. Press [-Value+] to
scroll through the
available types and sizes.
4. Press [Select] to
accept the alternate type
or size.
MEMORY FULL
STORED DATA LOST
There is no available
memory in the printer. The
current job might not print
correctly and some
resources (such as
downloaded fonts or
macros) might have been
deleted.
The customer might want
to add more memory to
the printer or simplify the
print job.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-23
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
MEMORY SETTINGS
CHANGED
The printer changed its
memory settings because
it did not have enough
memory to use the
previous settings for I/O
Buffering and Resource
Saving. This usually
occurs after removing
memory from the printer,
adding a Duplexer, or
adding a printer language.
You might want to change
memory settings for I/O
Buffering and Resource
Saving (although default
settings are usually best)
or add more memory to
the printer.
MEMORY SHORTAGE
JOB CLEARED
The printer did not have
enough free memory to
print the entire job. The
remainder of the job will
not print and will be
cleared from memory.
1. Press [Go] to continue.
2. Change the Resource
Saving setting from the
printer’s Control Panel or
add more memory to the
printer.
MEMORY SHORTAGE
PAGE SIMPLIFIED
The printer had to
compress the job in order
to fit it in available
memory. Some data loss
might have occurred.
Press [Go] to continue.
The customer might want
to add more memory to
the printer.
OFFLINE
The printer is offline.
Press [Go] to place the
printer online.
PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE
To ensure optimum print
quality, the printer
prompts the customer to
have routine
maintenance performed
every 200,000 pages.
Install the Printer
Maintenance Kit. You
must reset the
maintenance page count
after performing
maintenance by pressing
[Item-] and [Value-] while
turning the printer on.
7-24 Troubleshooting
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
RAM DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
The RAM disk had a
critical failure and can no
longer be used.
1. Turn the printer off, and
then turn the printer on to
clear the message.
2. If the message persists,
install a new RAM disk.
RAM DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation
could not be performed.
You might have
attempted an illegal
operation, such as trying
to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
1. Check the file name
and directory name.
2. Reattempt the
operation.
RAM DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
The RAM disk is full.
1. Delete files and then try
again, or turn the printer
off, and then turn the
printer on to delete all files
on the device. (Delete files
using HP JetAdmin,
HP FontSmart, or another
software utility. See the
software help for more
information.)
2. If the message persists,
increase the size of the
RAM disk. Change the
RAM disk size from the
Configuration Menu in the
printer’s Control Panel.
RAM DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
The RAM disk is
protected, and no new
files can be written to it.
Disable the write
protection through
HP JetAdmin.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-25
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
TRAY X EMPTY
7-26 Troubleshooting
Event Log Explanation
Message
The specified tray is
empty, but the current job
does not need this tray in
order to print correctly.
If this message appears
and the tray contains
paper, a sensor could be
damaged.
PS101 detects paper in
Tray 2.
PS105 detects paper in
Tray 1.
PS107 detects paper in
Tray 3 (HP LaserJet
4050 T/4050 TN).
PS801 detects paper in
the optional 500-sheet
feeder.
PS901 detects envelopes
in the Envelope Feeder.
See Figure 7-29 on
page 7-102 for sensor
locations.
Recommended
Action
1. Load the empty tray (x)
to clear the message.
If you do not load the
specified tray, the printer
will continue printing from
the next available tray, and
the message will continue
to display.
2. Inspect the tray for
damaged tabs.
3. Check Sensor Arm
Flags for damage and be
sure they move freely.
4. Replace any defective
sensors.
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
TRAY X LOAD
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Event Log Explanation
Message
One of the following
occurred:
There is no paper loaded
in the specified tray, or the
paper is not the size
requested, or the Control
Panel is not set for the
size of paper loaded.
The tray is not properly
adjusted for size.
The default paper size is
set incorrectly.
If this message appears
and the tray contains the
correct size of paper, a
sensor could be
damaged or a paper
sensor lever could be
stuck.
Recommended
Action
1. Load the requested
paper into the specified
tray (X).
Ensure that the trays are
correctly adjusted for
size. The tray type
settings (and size for Tray
1) must be set from the
printer’s Control Panel.
If you are trying to print
from the optional
Universal 500-sheet Tray,
be sure to set the paper
size dial.
If you are trying to print A4
or letter size paper, and
this message appears,
make sure the default
paper size is set correctly
from the Printing Menu in
the printer’s Control
Panel.
2. Press [Go] to print from
the next available tray.
3. Press [-Value+] to
scroll through the
available types and sizes.
4. Press [Select] to
accept the alternate type
or size.
5. Inspect the switches in
the tray.
6. Turn the printer on with
the tray removed and
push the switches by hand
to see if they register.
See “Paper Size Detection
Switches” on page 7-94.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-27
Table 7-5. Alphabetical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
UNABLE TO
MOPY JOB
Memory or file system
failures would not allow a
mopy job to occur. Only
one copy will be produced.
UNSUPPORTED SIZE
IN TRAY [YY]
An external paper
Load a supported paper
handling device detected size in the tray.
an unsupported paper
size. The printer will go
offline until the condition is
corrected.
USE [TYPE]
[SIZE] INSTEAD?
If the requested paper
size or type is not loaded,
the printer asks if it should
use another paper size or
type instead.
WAIT FOR PRINTER
TO REINITIALIZE
The RAM disk setting has Wait for the printer to
been changed from the
reinitialize.
printer’s Control Panel.
This change will not take
effect until the printer
reinitializes.
WRONG ENVELOPE
FEEDER INSTALLED
The Envelope Feeder you Install the correct
are trying to install will not Envelope Feeder instead.
work for this printer.
7-28 Troubleshooting
1. Press [-Value+] to
scroll through the
available types and sizes.
2. Press [Select] to
accept the alternate type
or size.
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
13.XX PAPER JAM
[LOCATION]
Recommended
Action
Paper is jammed at the
specified location (and
possibly at other
locations).
If the message persists
after all jams have been
cleared, a sensor or
sensor lever might be
stuck or broken.
See page 7-45.
For all paper jam
messages, do the
following:
1. Remove jammed paper
from the specified
location. Check the entire
paper path for other
pieces of paper in the
path.
2. Open and close the Top
Cover to clear the
message.
3. If the jam reoccurs see
“General Paper Path
Troubleshooting” on page
7-45.
4. Check sensors and
flags in the paper path for
proper operation. For the
locations of the sensors,
see page 7-92.
For 13.1 and 13.2:
1. Ensure that paper trays
are loaded properly so
paper can feed from the
tray.
2. Check the input area for
obstructions such as
paper in the path. Also
check to see if the
Registration Assembly is
damaged or if the Transfer
Roller is out of place.
3. Check PS102 and
PS103 for proper
operation. Replace any
defective sensors or
flags. For locations of
sensors, see page 7-92.
13.1 PAPER JAM
13.1
Paper delay jam at paper
feed area.
13.2 PAPER JAM
13.2
Paper stopped jam at
paper feed area.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-29
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
13.5 PAPER JAM
13.5
13.6 PAPER JAM
13.6
13.10 PAPER JAM
13.10 or
13.22
(LJ 4000
printer only)
Paper delay jam at paper
reversing area
Paper jam at Duplexer.
1. Check the Duplexer and
the rear area of the printer
for obstructions or
damage.
2. Check PS701 and
PS703 in the Duplexer for
proper operation.
Replace the Duplexer if a
sensor is defective.
13.20 PAPER JAM
13.20 or
13.32
(LJ 4000
printer only)
Paper stopped jam in the
paper path.
13.21 PAPER JAM
13.21 or
13.33
(LJ 4000
printer only)
Top open jam.
For 13.20 and 13.21:
1. Check the entire paper
path for obstructions such
as paper in the path,
Registration Area,
Transfer Area, Paper
Feed, and Fuser.
2. Check that all
assemblies are seated
and doors are closed.
3. Check all sensors and
flags in the paper path
(see page 7-92).
7-30 Troubleshooting
Recommended
Action
Paper delay jam at Fuser. For 13.5 and 13.6:
1. Check the Transfer
Roller and Small Media
Paper stopped jam at
Belt to ensure they are
Fuser.
operating and can feed
paper.
2. Check the paper path
for obstructions at the
Transfer Roller, Toner
Cartridge, Paper Feed
Guide, and Fuser.
3. Check PS501 and
PS106 for proper
operation. Replace any
defective sensors or
flags. For locations of
sensors, see page 7-92.
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
21 PAGE TOO
COMPLEX
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
22 EIO X
BUFFER OVERFLOW
alternates with
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
The printer received more
data than can fit in its
available memory. You
might have tried to
transfer too many
macros, soft fonts, or
complex graphics.
Press [Go] to print the
transferred data (some
data might be lost), then
simplify the print job or
install additional memory.
The data (dense text,
rules, raster or vector
graphics) sent to the
printer was too complex.
Press [Go] to print the
transferred data. (Some
data might be lost.)
To print the job without
losing data, from the
Configuration Menu in the
printer’s Control Panel, set
PAGE PROTECT=ON,
print the job, and then
return PAGE
PROTECT=AUTO. Do not
leave PAGE
PROTECT=ON; it might
degrade performance.
If this message appears
often, simplify the print
job.
Too much data was sent
to the EIO card in the
specified slot (X).
Press [Go] to clear the
message. (Data will be
lost.)
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-31
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Too much data was sent
to the parallel port.
This error can occur if the
driver you are using is not
IEEE-1284 compliant. For
best results, use an HP
driver that came with the
printer.
Check for a loose cable
connection and be sure to
use a high-quality cable.
(Some non-HP parallel
cables might be missing
pin connections, or might
otherwise not conform to
the IEEE-1284
specification.)
Press [Go] to clear the
error message. (Data will
be lost.)
22 SERIAL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
Too much data was sent
to the serial port.
1. Make sure the correct
serial pacing option is
selected from the I/O
Menu in the printer’s
Control Panel.
2. Print a Menu Map and
verify that the serial
pacing item (from the I/O
Menu in the printer’s
Control Panel) matches
the setting on the
computer.
3. Press [Go] to clear the
error message. (Data will
be lost.)
alternates with
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
7-32 Troubleshooting
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
40 BAD SERIAL
TRANSMISSION
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
40 EIO X BAD
TRANSMISSION
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
The printer encountered
an error while transferring
data from the computer.
The error might have
occurred for several
reasons:
The computer was turned
on or off while the printer
was online.
The printer’s serial
configuration was not the
same as the computer’s.
1. Verify cable
connections. Make sure
the printer’s serial
configuration is set the
same as the computer
from the I/O Menu in the
printer’s Control Panel.
2. The serial baud rate
setting can be accessed
from the I/O Menu in the
printer’s Control Panel.
3. Press [Go] to clear the
error message and
continue printing.
4. Turn the printer off.
5. Reseat the EIO card
and turn the printer on.
The connection has been
broken between the
printer and the EIO card in
the specified slot.
X Description:
1 = EIO Slot 1
2 = EIO Slot 2
1. Turn the printer off and
reseat the card.
2. Press [Go] to clear the
error message and
continue printing.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-33
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
41.3 UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE
The paper size you are
trying to print is not the
same as the settings for
the tray.
1. Make sure that all trays
are correctly adjusted for
size. (The printer will
continue trying to print
the job until size settings
are correct.)
If you are trying to print
from Tray 1, make sure
the printer’s Control Panel
setting for paper size is
correctly configured.
If you are trying to print
from the optional
Universal 500-sheet Tray,
be sure to set the paper
size dial to match the
paper size loaded in the
tray.
2. After performing the
actions above, press [Go].
The page containing the
error will automatically be
reprinted. (Or, you might
want to press
[Cancel Job] to clear the
job from the printer’s
memory.)
41.X
PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error
occurred.
X Description:
1 = Unknown misprint
error
2 = Beam detect misprint
error
3 = See error 41.3 above
4 = No VSYNC error
5 = Media feed error
9 = Noise VSREQ error
Press [Go]. The page
containing the error will
automatically be
reprinted.
If the error persists:
1. Reseat the
connections to the Laser
Scanner and the Engine
Controller Board.
2. Replace the Laser
Scanner.
3. Replace the Engine
Controller Board.
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
7-34 Troubleshooting
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
50.X FUSER ERROR
Recommended
Action
A Fuser error has
occurred.
X Description:
1 = Low Fuser
temperature
2 = Fuser warm up
service
3 = High Fuser
temperature
4 = Low/Bad line voltage.
(Printer hooked up to UPS
uninterruptible power
supply)
5 = Inconsistent Fuser
Turn the printer off, wait
20 minutes, and then turn
the printer on.
If the message persists,
reseat the Fuser. If that
does not work, replace the
Fuser.
To check the Fuser, turn
the printer off and remove
the Fuser. Measure the
resistance between the
Fuser connectors J132-1
and J132-2. See Figure
7-4. If it is not within the
range of 200kΩ to 500kΩ,
replace the Fuser.
If there is no continuity
between the Fuser
connectors J143F
(neutral) and J142F (hot)
with the Fuser removed,
replace the Fuser.
If the problem is not
related to the Fuser,
replace the Engine
Controller Board.
J141F
J142F J143F
J132-5
J132-4
J132-3
Figure 7-4
J132-2
J132-1
Fuser connectors
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-35
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
51.X PRINTER ERROR
A loss of beam detect
occurred.
X Description:
1 = Beam detect error
2 = Laser error
1. Press [Go]. The page
containing the error will
automatically be
reprinted.
2. Turn the printer off and
then on.
3. Reseat cables. See the
wiring diagrams at the
back of this manual.
4. Replace the Laser
Scanner.
52.X PRINTER ERROR
The Laser Scanner speed
is incorrect.
X Description:
1 = Scanner startup error
2 = Scanner rotation error
1. Press [Go]. The page
containing the error will
automatically be
reprinted.
2. Turn the printer off and
then on.
3. Reseat cables. See the
wiring diagrams at the
back of this manual.
4. Replace the Laser
Scanner.
7-36 Troubleshooting
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
53.XY.ZZ
PRINTER ERROR
Event Log Explanation
Message
There is a memory error
with an accessory. The
DIMM that caused the
error will not be used.
Values of X, Y, and ZZ are
as follows:
X = DIMM type
0 = ROM
1 = RAM
Recommended
Action
1. Turn the printer off, and
reseat or replace the
specified DIMM.
2. Try the DIMM in
another slot.
3. Replace the DIMM that
caused the error.
Y = Device location
0 = internal memory
(ROM or RAM)
1 to 4 = DIMM slots
1, 2, 3, or 4
ZZ= Error number
0 = Unsupported memory
1 = Unrecognized
memory
2 = Unsupported memory
size
3 = Failed RAM test
4 = Exceeded maximum
RAM size
5 = Exceeded maximum
ROM size
6 = Invalid DIMM speed
7 = DIMM reporting
information incorrectly
8 = DIMM RAM parity
error
9 = ROM needs to be
mapped to an
unsupported address
10 = DIMM address
conflict
11 = PDC XROM out of
bounds
12 = Unable to make a
temporary mapping
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-37
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
55 PRINTER ERROR
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
An internal
communications error
occurred.
1. Press [Go]. The page
containing the error will
automatically be
reprinted.
2. Check the power at the
customer’s location.
3. Replace the Formatter
PCA.
4. Replace the Engine
Controller Board.
56.X PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error
occurred.
X Description:
1 = Illegal input or bad
accessory connector
2 = Illegal output
1. Press [Go]. The page
containing the error will
automatically be
reprinted.
2. Turn the printer off, and
then turn the printer on.
3. Check the printer’s
configuration.
4. Verify accessory
connection.
57.X PRINTER ERROR
An error occurred with the
Fan’s motor.
X Description:
4 = Printer fan
7 = Duplex fan
8 = Thermistor
1. Check the Fan’s
connector and make sure
the Fan is not blocked.
2. Replace the Fan.
3. Replace the Engine
Controller Board (for 57.8
error message only).
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
7-38 Troubleshooting
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
59.X PRINTER ERROR
A printing error occurred.
X Description:
0 = Motor error
1 = Motor startup error
2 = Motor rotation error
62.X
PRINTER ERROR
There is a problem with
Reseat or replace the
the printer’s memory. The specified DIMM.
X value refers to the
location of the problem:
0 = Internal memory
1 to 4= DIMM slots 1, 2, 3,
or 4
64.X
PRINTER ERROR
A scan buffer error
occurred.
1. Turn the printer off, and
then turn the printer on.
2.Cold reset.
3. If the message persists,
replace the Formatter.
66.XX.YY
FINISHER/STAPLER
STACKER FAILURE
or 66.XX.YY INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
or 66.XX.YY OUTPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
An error occurred in an
external paper handling
device.
1st X = Device number in
chain
2nd X = Device type
(3 types):
1 Input
2 Output
3 Stapler/stacker unit
YY= Device specific error
1. Press [Go] to clear the
message. If the message
will not clear:
2. Turn the printer off, and
then turn the printer on.
3. Check all cables.
4. Reseat the external
paper handling device.
alternates with
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
1. Turn the printer off, and
then turn the printer on.
2. Check and reseat the
Fuser and Toner Cartridge
to make sure they are not
hindering gear movement
in the drive train.
3. Check the Main Motor’s
cable to ensure that it is
seated properly.
4. If the error persists,
replace the Motor.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-39
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
Event Log Explanation
Message
Recommended
Action
68 NVRAM ERROR
CHECK SETTINGS
An error occurred in the
printer’s nonvolatile
memory (NVRAM) and
one or more printer
settings has been reset to
its factory default.
1. Print a Configuration
Page and check the
printer settings to
determine which values
have changed.
2. Hold down [Cancel
Job] while turning the
printer on. This will clean
up the NVRAM by
removing old areas that
are not being used.
68 NVRAM FULL
CHECK SETTINGS
An error occurred in the
printer’s nonvolatile
memory (NVRAM) and
one or more printer
settings has been reset to
its factory default.
1. Print a Configuration
Page and check the
printer settings to
determine which values
have changed.
2. Hold down [Cancel
Job] while turning the
printer on. This will clean
up the NVRAM by
removing old areas that
are not being used.
69.X
PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error 1. Turn the printer off, and
occurred.
then turn the printer on.
X Description:
2. Reseat the Duplexer.
0 = The Duplex
mechanism has failed
7-40 Troubleshooting
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
79.XXXX
PRINTER ERROR
Event Log Explanation
Message
The printer detected an
error. The numbers
(XXXX) indicate the
specific type of error.
Recommended
Action
1. Turn the printer off, and
then turn the printer on.
2. Try printing a job from a
different software
application. If the job
prints, go back to the first
application and try printing
a different file. (If the
message only appears
with a certain software
application or print job,
have the customer contact
the software vendor for
assistance.)
If the message persists,
try the following:
1. Cycle power.
2. Reseat or replace the
interface cable and cycle
power.
3. Remove the DIMMs
one at a time and cycle
power.
4. Try using the parallel
interface, if possible.
5. With the EIO cards
removed from the printer,
perform a cold reset.
6. If the error persists,
replace the Formatter.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-41
Table 7-6. Numerical Printer Messages (continued)
Control Panel
Message
8X.YYYY
7-42 Troubleshooting
Event Log Explanation
Message
The EIO accessory in slot
X has encountered a
critical error as specified
by YYYY.
X Description:
1 = EIO slot 1 – The
printer detected an error
with the EIO card.
2 = EIO slot 2 – The
printer detected an error
with the EIO card.
6 = EIO slot 1 – The EIO
card detected an error.
The EIO card may be
defective.
7 = EIO slot 2 – The EIO
card detected an error.
The EIO card may be
defective.
Recommended
Action
1. Turn the printer off, and
then turn the printer on.
2. Reseat or replace the
EIO board.
The following table lists the disk error numbers reported on either
the Printer Collation or Job Storage Disk Error page, which is
printed when an error exists.
Table 7-7. Mopy Disk Error Messages
Disk
Error
Number
Error Description
Solution
1
Disk volume not present – it
may be uninitialized.
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk. If the
problem persists, replace the hard drive.
• RAM disk: Power cycle the printer.
3
A file or directory asked for
could not be found.
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
5
Invalid # of bytes given in a
read/write request.
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
6
Attempt to create a file or
directory that already exists.
• The user has sent a username that is the
same as an existing directory. Change the
username in the driver and resend the job.
15
Bad Disk
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk. If the
problem persists, replace the hard drive.
16
No volume label
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk. If the
problem persists, replace the hard drive.
23
Bad seek request – the
resulting offset would be
negative.
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
24
Unexpected internal error
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
• Disk media problem – initialize the hard disk
or reboot to reinitialize the RAM disk.
• If the problem persists on a hard drive,
replace the hard drive.
55
Bad file system
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
• Disk media problem – initialize the hard disk
or reboot to reinitialize the RAM disk.
• If the problem persists on a hard drive,
replace the hard drive.
56
Hardware failure
• Replace the hard drive.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-43
Disk
Error
Number
Error Description
Solution
59
The maximum number of
directories has been reached
There is a maximum number of directories that
can be put on a disk. Stored jobs are stored in
directories created for each user. To solve this
problem:
• Delete all jobs stored for a user. The
firmware will automatically delete the
directory for a user with no stored jobs.
• Delete other directories on the disk.
70
Disk Error
• Contact your HP Service and Support
Representative.
7-44 Troubleshooting
General Paper Path Troubleshooting
Paper jams occur in the printer when paper does not either reach or
clear a photosensor along the printer’s paper path in a specific
amount of time. If a paper jam occurs, a 13.XX PAPER JAM message
is displayed on the printer’s Control Panel. The following table
contains general questions you might ask and topics to explore prior
to troubleshooting. See the 13.xx section in the Event Log for specific
error codes.
Table 7-8. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions
Troubleshooting Check
Action
What is the frequency of the paper jams (for
Verify with the customer. Print the Event Log to
example: continuous, one jam per 100 pages, determine the paper jam history. See “Display”
one jam per 1000 pages)?
(page 7-12) and the “Sample Event Log”
(page 7-13) and evaluate the Event Log.
Do paper jams only occur when the paper is
Use the Paper Path Test to isolate the problem
fed from a particular paper input source (such (page 7-47).
as Tray 1 or Tray 2)?
Do jams only occur when paper is output to a
specific output bin (either the Top Output Bin
or Rear Output Bin)?
Use the Paper Path Test to isolate the problem
(page 7-47).
Do paper jams occur with a specific type of
paper?
Try different media. See the HP LaserJet
Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. The
guide is bundled with this service manual.
Where does the leading edge of the first sheet
of paper in the printer’s paper path stop when
a jam occurs? Are any sheets of paper
damaged or torn?
Attempt to duplicate. Use the Paper Path Test
to isolate the problem. Inspect the paper path
and all paper path mechanical assemblies up
to the location where the paper jams.
Is the customer loading the paper trays
correctly?
Observe the customer loading paper. Do not
fan paper. See proper paper handling
procedures in the HP LaserJet Printer Family
Paper Specification Guide.
Is the customer overfilling the paper trays?
Ensure that paper is NOT over the maximum
fill marks in the paper trays. Observe the
customer loading paper in the trays.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-45
Table 7-8. General Paper Path Troubleshooting Questions (continued)
Troubleshooting Check
Action
Are the paper tray guides set correctly?
Ensure that the left-side paper guides for Trays
2 and 3 are set correctly at both the front and
rear of the trays, and that the front guide is
locked into the correct position. For Tray 4
ensure that all adjustments are set correctly:
front, back, and side, at the top and bottom of
the tray.
Does the printer need to be cleaned?
Inspect the paper path and paper path rollers.
See the cleaning procedures in Chapter 4.
When was maintenance last performed on the Determine from the Configuration Page the
printer?
number of pages since the last maintenance
(see Figure 7-7 on page 7-52). The Printer
Maintenance Kit should be installed every
200,000 images.
There are four photosensors (PS102, PS103, PS106, PS501) in the
paper path for detecting arrival or passing of the paper.
If the paper does not reach or pass these sensors within the
prescribed time, the microprocessor on the Engine Controller Board
assesses a paper jam and notifies the Formatter of the jam. See page
7-92 for the location and function of sensors.
7-46 Troubleshooting
Paper Path Test
To perform a Paper Path Test:
1
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2
Press [Item] until PRINT PAPER PATH TEST appears.
3
Press [Select].
4
Press [+] to cycle selections until the desired paper tray appears.
5
Press [Select].
6
Press [+] until the desired output bin appears (open the Rear
Output Bin to print to it).
7
Press [Select].
8
Press [+] until the desired duplex mode (on or off) appears.
9
Press [Select].
10 Press [+] to cycle selections until the desired number of copies
appears. Choose 1, 10, 50, 100, or 500 copies.
11 Press [Select] to perform the Paper Path Test.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-47
Information Pages
From the printer’s Control Panel you can print pages that give details
about the printer and its current configuration. The following
information pages are described here:
●
Menu Map
●
Configuration Page
●
PCL or PS font list
For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, print a Menu
Map and see the Information Menu.
Menu Map
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the
Control Panel, print a Control Panel Menu Map:
1
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2
Press [Item] until PRINT MENU MAP appears.
3
Press [Select] to print the Menu Map.
The content of the Menu Map varies, depending on the options
currently installed in the printer. The printer driver or software
application can override many of these values.
7-48 Troubleshooting
Figure 7-5
Sample Menu Map (4000 series printer)
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-49
Figure 7-6
Sample Menu Map (4050 series printer)
7-50 Troubleshooting
Configuration Page
Use the Configuration Page to view current printer settings, to help
troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional
accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer
languages.
Note
If an HP JetDirect print server EIO card is installed, a JetDirect
Configuration Page will print out as well.
To print a Configuration Page:
1
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2
Press [Item] until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears.
3
Press [Select] to print the Configuration Page.
Figure 7-7 on page 7-52 is a sample Configuration Page. The content
of the Configuration Page varies, depending on the options currently
installed in the printer.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-51
Printer Information
Lists the serial number, HP JetSend
IP addresses, page counts, and other
information for the printer.
Memory
Lists printer memory, PCL Driver work space
(DWS), and I/O buffering and resource saving
information.
Installed
Personalities
and Options
Lists all printer
languages that
are installed
(such as PCL
and PS) and
lists options
that are
installed in
each DIMM
slot and EIO
slot.
Security
Lists the
status of
the
printer’s
Control
Panel
Lock,
Control
Panel
Password,
and disk
drive.
Event Log
Lists the
number of
entries in the
log, the
maximum
number of
entries
viewable, and
the last three
entries.
Paper
Trays and
Options
Lists the
size
settings for
all trays
and lists
optional
paper
handling
accessories
that are
installed.
Figure 7-7
Sample Configuration Page (4000 series printer)
7-52 Troubleshooting
Printer Information
Lists the serial number, HP JetSend IP
addresses, page counts, and other
information for the printer.
addresses, page counts, and other
information for the printer.
Memory
Lists printer memory, PCL Driver work
space (DWS), and I/O buffering and
resource saving information.
Event Log
Lists the
number of
entries in the
log, the
maximum
number of
entries
viewable,
and the last
three entries.
Security
Lists the
status of
the printer’s
Control
Panel Lock,
Control
Panel
Password,
and disk
drive.
Installed
Personalities
and Options
Lists all
printer
languages
that are
installed
(such as PCL
and PS) and
lists options
that are
installed in
each DIMM
slot and EIO
slot.
Paper
Trays and
Options
Lists the
size
settings for
all trays
and lists
optional
paper
handling
accessorie
s that are
installed.
Toner Gauge
A graphic representation of amount
of Toner remaining in the Toner
Cartridge.
Figure 7-8
Sample Configuration Page (4050 series printer)
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-53
Verify Installed Options
Under “Installed Personality” on the Configuration Page, look for
options such as hard disk or DIMM types and sizes.
Verify that the options which are installed in the printer are reflected
on the Configuration Page. If an installed device is not shown, reseat
the device and print a new Configuration Page.
Image Quality
When you are working with customers, obtain a print sample before
you begin troubleshooting the printer. Ask the customer to explain the
quality they expect from the printer. The print sample will also help
clarify the customer’s explanation.
Table 7-9. Image Quality Checks
Image Quality Checks
Action
Does the problem repeat on Use the Repetitive Defect Ruler on page 7-73.
the page?
Is the Toner Cartridge full
and is it manufactured by
HP?
Check the Toner Cartridge using the checklist on page 7-55.
Is the customer using print
media that meets all HP
paper specification
standards?
For more information about HP’s paper specification standards,
see Chapter 1 of this manual and the HP LaserJet Family Paper
Specification Guide.
Is the print sample similar to Compare and perform the actions recommended in the Print
those in the Print Quality
Quality Tables.
Tables on page 7-58?
Is the problem on the Toner Perform the Half Self Test Functional Check (page 7-74) to
Cartridge Drum or the
determine where the defect is.
Transfer Roller?
If a dark and distinct Toner image is preset on the Drum’s surface,
assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic
process are functioning (cleaning, conditioning, writing, and
developing – see Chapter 5), and troubleshoot the failure as a
Transfer or Fusing problem.
7-54 Troubleshooting
Check the Toner Cartridge
Image formation defects are often the result of problems with the
Toner Cartridge. If there is any doubt, always replace the Toner
Cartridge before troubleshooting image defects.
Use the following checklist to ensure that the Toner Cartridge is still
operable.
●
Ensure that the Toner Cartridge has Toner.
Table 7-10. Weights of Toner Cartridges
Toner Cartridge
Capacity
Full Weight
Empty Weight
6,000 pages
45.7 ounces
1295 grams
36 ounces
1020 grams
10,000 pages
51 ounces
1445 grams
35.3 ounces
1000 grams
●
Check the expiration date of the Toner Cartridge (stamped on the
box).
●
Check the Toner Cartridge to see if it has been disassembled or
refilled.
●
Ensure that the Toner Cartridge is seated properly in the printer.
●
Inspect the cartridge for leaking Toner through worn seals. (If the
Drum has been manually rotated, it may have caused internal
damage and Toner may spill.)
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-55
Note
Toner Cartridges are rated for 6,000 or 10,000 images at 5% coverage
(depending on the model). It is possible to wear out the gears and the
cartridge seals before TONER LOW is displayed if the number of images
exceeds 6,000 or 10,000 (depending on the model). See “EconoMode”
below.
●
Check the surface of the Photosensitive Drum in the cartridge to
see if it has been damaged or scratched. Touching the Drum will
contaminate the photosensitive surface and may cause spotting
and defects during printing.
●
White areas on the page may indicate that the Drum has been
exposed to light for too long. If white areas appear, stop the
printer and wait a few minutes This should eliminate most
defective images. If not, place the Toner Cartridge in a dark
environment for several days. This can restore some life to the
Drum.
EconoMode
EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by reducing the amount of
Toner on the printed page by up to 50%. Advise the customer to turn
EconoMode on or off from the printer driver or software application,
since those settings override the Control Panel settings. EconoMode
settings can also be accessed from the Print Quality Menu.
CAUTION
HP does not recommend full-time use of EconoMode. If EconoMode
is used full-time, it is possible that the Toner supply will outlast the
mechanical parts in the Toner Cartridge.
7-56 Troubleshooting
Image Defects
The quality of the printer’s output is subject to the judgment of the
user. This section of the manual helps you define print quality defects
and understand what factors affect print quality.
The print samples shown in the following tables illustrate some print
quality defects. Keep copies of print quality defects encountered in
the field with an explanation of their causes for future reference.
The image defects listed below are covered in the following tables.
●
Black Page (page 7-58)
●
Blank Page (page 7-59)
●
Blank Spots (page 7-60)
●
Creases (page 7-61)
●
Curl (page 7-62)
●
Contamination on Back (page 7-63)
●
Distorted Image (page 7-64)
●
Dropouts (page 7-65)
●
Faded Print/Bubbles (page 7-65)
●
Gray Background (page 7-66)
●
Horizontal Black Lines (page 7-67)
●
Horizontal Smudges (page 7-67)
●
Horizontal White Lines (page 7-67)
●
Light Print, Dark Print, or Fade (page 7-68)
●
Loose Toner (page 7-69)
●
Repetitive Defects (page 7-69)
●
Skew (page 7-70)
●
Toner Smear (page 7-70)
●
Toner Specks (page 7-71)
●
Vertical Black Lines (page 7-71)
●
Vertical Dots (page 7-72)
●
Vertical White Lines (page 7-72)
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-57
Hint
If you find a defect that is not depicted, record the probable cause along
with the conditions in the printing environment and save a copy of the
defect for future reference.
Table 7-11. Black Page
Possible Cause
Action
The high-voltage
power supply
connections are
contaminated.
Clean the high-voltage power supply terminals. See
Figure 7-20, “Engine Controller Board Layout,” on
page 7-93. Also clean the high-voltage springs
where they contact the Toner Cartridge.
The high-voltage
power supply is
installed improperly.
If the high voltage
power supply has
been removed and
replaced, it may not
be seated properly.
Remove the Engine Controller Board and check the
connectors for damage. Reseat the Engine
Controller Board, being certain to fully seat the
connectors.
Defective Primary
Charging Roller.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
The Laser Drive
circuitry is damaged
on the Engine
Controller Board so
that the laser is
always on.
Replace the Engine Controller Board, followed by the
Formatter PCA if necessary.
7-58 Troubleshooting
Table 7-12. Blank Page
Possible Cause
Action
No Toner is available
for print.
Remove sealing tape or replace the Toner
Cartridge.
Defective laser
shutter.
Check the laser shutter for free operation when
inserting the Toner Cartridge.
Toner Cartridge Guide Make sure the guide is installed properly above the
damaged, improperly Toner Cartridge.
positioned, or missing.
No Transfer Roller
voltage.
Without Transfer Roller voltage, Toner cannot be
attracted from the surface of the Drum to the
paper. Perform the Half Self Test Functional Check
(page 7-74) to check all other electrophotographic
processes. Replace the Transfer Roller if
necessary.
No developing bias.
1. Clean the High-voltage Power Supply Contacts.
With no developing bias charge, Toner is not
attracted to the Drum.
2. Replace the Engine Controller Board.
No Drum Ground
Path.
With no ground path the Drum cannot discharge.
The negative charge on the Drum repels Toner,
and leaves a white page with bubble print.
1. Check the Drum Ground Spring and connect it
as shown on page 6-44.
2. Replace the Engine Controller Board.
Defective laser
Scanner Cable
Assembly.
Low-level signals exchanged between the Laser
Scanner Assembly and the Engine Controller
Board may be affecting laser output. Replace the
Laser Scanner Cable Assembly.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-59
Table 7-13. Blank Spots
Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Contaminated or
deformed Transfer
Roller.
Replace the Transfer Roller.
Defective Toner
Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
See also “Dropouts” on page 7-65.
7-60 Troubleshooting
Table 7-14. Creases
Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Printer’s operating
Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets
environment does not specifications.
meet specifications.
Paper is loaded
incorrectly.
Make sure paper is loaded correctly and that the
guides fit properly against the paper stack.
Wrong tray.
Print from a different tray (such as Tray 1).
Wrong output bin for
paper type.
Print to a different output bin (top or Rear Output
Bin).
Obstruction in paper
path.
1. Check the paper path for paper or label debris.
2. Check for damaged components that could be
creasing the paper.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-61
Table 7-15. Curl
Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Printer’s operating
Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets
environment does not specifications.
meet specifications.
Wrong output bin.
Print to a different output bin (top or Rear Output
Bin).
Wrong Fuser setting
for paper type.
From the Paper Handling Menu on the Control
Panel, change the Fuser mode setting or choose
another paper type from the printer driver.
See also “Dropouts” on page 7-65.
7-62 Troubleshooting
Table 7-16. Contamination on Back
Possible Cause
Action
Contamination inside
printer (Tray
Separation Roller,
Feed Roller, Transfer
Roller, Fuser, Toner
Cartridge).
1. Print at least 10 pages to see if the problem goes
away.
2. Print a cleaning page (page 4-4).
Identify and clean the contaminated part according
to the “Repetitive Defect Ruler” on page 7-73. If
contamination cannot be removed, replace the
contaminated part.
3. Check for Toner leaks.
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-63
Table 7-17. Distorted Image
Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Printer’s operating
Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets
environment does not specifications.
meet specifications.
Wrong output bin for
paper type.
Print to a different output bin.
Poor connection of
cables to the Laser
Scanner.
Reseat the cables connected to the Laser Scanner.
Poor connection of
cables to the Engine
Controller Board.
Reseat the cables connected to the Engine
Controller Board.
Defective Laser
Scanner.
Replace the Laser Scanner.
Defective Engine
Controller Board.
Replace the Engine Controller Board.
7-64 Troubleshooting
Table 7-18. Dropouts
Possible Cause
Action
Paper might be too
smooth.
Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality.
Printer’s operating
Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets
environment does not specifications.
meet specifications.
Wrong Toner density
setting.
From the print quality menu on the Control Panel,
adjust the Toner density setting. Make sure
EconoMode is off.
Wrong Fuser setting
for paper type.
From the Paper Handling Menu on the Control
Panel, change the Fuser Mode setting or choose
another paper type from the printer driver.
See also “Blank Spots” on page 7-60.
Table 7-19. Faded Print/Bubbles
Possible Cause
Action
No Drum ground path. With no ground path the Drum cannot discharge.
The negative charge on the Drum repels Toner, and
leaves a white page with bubble print.
1. Check the Drum ground spring and connect it as
shown on page 6-44.
2. Replace the Engine Controller Board.
Engine Controller
Board.
Replace the Engine Controller Board.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-65
Table 7-20. Gray Background
Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Printer’s operating
Make sure the printer’s operating environment meets
environment does not specifications.
meet specifications.
Wrong Toner density
setting.
From the Print Quality Menu on the Control Panel,
adjust the Toner density setting. Make sure
EconoMode is off.
Faulty Toner
Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
See also “Light Print, Dark Print, or Fade” on page
7-68.
7-66 Troubleshooting
Table 7-21. Horizontal Black Lines
Possible Cause
Action
Defective Laser
Scanner Assembly or
Engine Controller
Board.
1. See the “Repetitive Defect Ruler” on page 7-73.
2. Reseat connectors on the Laser Scanner and
Engine Controller Board.
3. Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly followed by
the Engine Controller Board, if necessary.
Table 7-22. Horizontal Smudges
Possible Cause
Action
Paper path
contamination or
damage.
1. See the “Repetitive Defect Ruler” on page 7-73.
2. Check the Toner Cartridge and replace it if
necessary.
3. Check the Fuser and replace it if necessary.
Table 7-23. Horizontal White Lines
Possible Cause
Action
1. Check the Toner Cartridge and replace it if
necessary.
2. Check the Fuser and replace it if necessary.
3. Replace the Laser Scanner Assembly, followed by
the Engine Controller Board, if necessary.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-67
Table 7-24. Light Print, Dark Print, or Fade
Possible Cause
Action
Wrong Toner density
setting.
From the print quality menu on the Control Panel,
adjust the Toner density setting. Make sure
EconoMode is off.
Toner Cartridge is low. Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Transfer Roller is
defective.
Replace the Transfer Roller.
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Poor contact to the
Engine Controller
Board.
1. Ensure that the Drum Ground Spring is connected
to the Engine Controller Board correctly.
2. Clean the contacts if they are contaminated. If the
problem remains after cleaning, or parts are
damaged or deformed, replace them.
3. Replace the Engine Controller Board if necessary.
Defective Laser
Scanner.
Replace the Laser Scanner.
Defective Engine
Controller Board.
Replace the Engine Controller Board.
See also “Faded Print/Bubbles” on page 7-65.
7-68 Troubleshooting
Table 7-25. Loose Toner
Possible Cause
Action
Contamination in the
printer.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Clean the inside of the printer (page 4-2) or use
the printer’s cleaning page (page 4-4).
Toner Cartridge is
defective.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Paper might be too
smooth.
Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality.
Wrong Fuser setting
for paper type.
From the Paper Handling Menu on the Control
Panel, change the Fuser Mode setting or choose
another paper type from the printer driver.
Defective Fuser.
Replace the Fuser.
Table 7-26. Repetitive Defects
Possible Cause
Action
Contamination or
defect on a roller.
See “Repetitive Defect Ruler” on page 7-73.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-69
Table 7-27. Skew
Possible Cause
Action
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Paper is not loaded
Make sure paper is loaded correctly and that the
correctly or trays are guides fit properly against the paper stack.
not adjusted properly.
Registration Assembly Be sure that the Registration Assembly is installed
is improperly installed. correctly.
Table 7-28. Toner Smear
Possible Cause
Action
Contamination in the
printer.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Clean the inside of the printer (page 4-2) or use
the printer’s cleaning page (page 4-4).
Paper might be too
smooth.
Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality.
Defective Toner
Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge. (See instructions with
the Toner Cartridge.)
Wrong Fuser setting
for paper type.
From the Paper Handling Menu on the Control
Panel, change the Fuser Mode setting or choose
another paper type from the printer driver.
7-70 Troubleshooting
Table 7-29. Toner Specks
Possible Cause
Action
Contamination in
printer.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Clean the inside of the printer (page 4-2) or use
the printer’s cleaning page (page 4-4).
Paper does not meet
printer specifications
or is stored
improperly.
1. Print a few more pages to see if the problem
corrects itself.
2. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try
rotating the paper 180°.
3. Check the paper (or other print media) type and
quality. Replace the paper, and advise the customer
to use the recommended paper and store it properly.
Alternating small and To alternate small and standard paper, from the
standard paper (such Configuration Menu on the Control Panel, set SMALL
PAPER SPEED=SLOW.
as envelopes and
letterhead).
Table 7-30. Vertical Black Lines
Possible Cause
Action
Defective Toner
Cartridge.
Replace the Toner Cartridge.
Contaminated Fuser
Entrance Guide.
Clean the Guide.
Scratches on the
Fuser.
Replace the Fuser.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-71
Table 7-31. Vertical Dots
Possible Cause
Action
Contaminated Static
Eliminator teeth.
Clean the Static Eliminator.
Poor contact between Clean the contacts, if contaminated. If the problem
the Static Eliminator remains after cleaning, or parts are damaged or
and the Engine
deformed, replace them.
Controller Board.
Deformed or
deteriorated Transfer
Roller.
Replace the Transfer Roller.
Defective Engine
Controller Board.
Replace the Engine Controller Board.
Table 7-32. Vertical White Lines
Possible Cause
Action
Lack of Toner or
Redistribute the Toner in the Toner Cartridge. If the
faulty Toner Cartridge. problem continues, replace the Toner Cartridge.
Contamination in the
Laser Path.
Clean the Laser Path. (Remove the Laser Scanner
Assembly and clean the lens.)
Defective Fuser.
Replace the Fuser Assembly.
Dirty mirror in the
Laser Scanner.
Replace the Laser Scanner.
7-72 Troubleshooting
Repetitive Defect Ruler
Repetitive print defects are usually associated with a specific roller
within the printer or the Toner Cartridge. Use Figure 7-9 to isolate the
cause of repetitive print defects. Align the first occurrence of the
defect with the top of the “ruler” and measure to the next occurrence
of the defect to determine the roller in question. When you are certain
that your defect pattern matches the pattern of the ruler, replace the
indicated roller.
Figure 7-9
Repetitive Defect Ruler
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-73
Image System Troubleshooting
Half Self Test Functional Check
The electrophotographic process can be subdivided into the following
stages:
●
Cleaning (removes excess Toner from Drum surface)
●
Conditioning (places a uniform electrical charge on Drum)
●
Writing (laser strikes surface of Drum and creates latent image)
●
Developing (forms the Toner image on Drum)
●
Transferring (charge transfers the image to paper)
●
Fusing (heat and pressure produces a permanent image)
The purpose of the Half Self Test Check is to determine which stage
is malfunctioning. Perform the test as follows:
1
Print a Configuration Page from the Control Panel Information
Menu.
2
Open the Top Cover after the paper advances half-way through
the printer (about five seconds after the main motor begins
rotation). The leading edge of the paper should have advanced
past the Toner Cartridge.
3
Remove the Toner Cartridge.
4
Open the Toner Cartridge’s Drum shield to view the Drum’s
surface.
If a dark and distinct Toner image is present on the Drum’s surface,
assume that the first four functions of the electrophotographic process
are functioning (cleaning, conditioning, writing, and developing – see
Chapter 5), and troubleshoot the failure as a transfer or fusing
problem.
If no image is present on the Photosensitive Drum, perform all the
following functional checks.
7-74 Troubleshooting
Drum Rotation Functional Check
The Photosensitive Drum, located in the Toner Cartridge, must rotate
for the print process to work. The Photosensitive Drum receives its
drive from the Main Drive Assembly. To verify whether the Drum is
rotating:
Note
1
Open the Top Cover.
2
Remove the Toner Cartridge.
3
Mark the cartridge’s drive gear with a felt-tipped marker. Note the
position of the mark.
4
Install the Toner Cartridge and close the Top Cover. The start-up
sequence should rotate the Drum enough to move the marked
gear.
5
Open the printer and inspect the marked gear. Verify that the
mark moved. If the gear did not move, inspect the main drive
assembly to ensure that it is meshing with the Toner Cartridge
gears. If the Drive Gears function and the Drum does not move,
replace the Toner Cartridge.
This test is especially important if refilled Toner Cartridges are in use.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-75
High-voltage Power Supply Functional Check
The High-voltage Power Supply Assembly provides the necessary
voltages for the printer’s electrophotographic processes. The +24B
VDC supply is used to power the High-voltage Power Supply
Assembly. A summary of the major components of the High-voltage
System is given in Table 7-33.
Table 7-33. High Voltage System Checks
Checks
Action
Are the connectors for the Primary Charge
Roller, Drum Ground, Developing Bias, and
Toner Level Sensor damaged, corroded,
contaminated, or missing?
1. Inspect and correct each item.
2. Check the Toner Cartridge.
3. Check all wire connections.
4. Replace the Engine Controller Board if the
connection cannot be repaired.
Are the High-voltage Power Supply
connections contaminated, bent, or broken?
1. Clean the terminals with alcohol only.
2. Check all wire connections.
3. Replace the Engine Controller Board if the
connection cannot be repaired.
7-76 Troubleshooting
Interface Troubleshooting
This section provides an overview of the printer’s interface
requirements.
Communications Check
Note
Communication problems are normally the customer’s responsibility.
Time spent attempting to resolve these problems may not be covered
by the product’s Hewlett-Packard warranty.
Refer the customer to the network administrator for assistance in
troubleshooting network problems.
If the printer is not connected to an MS-DOS-based host, proceed to
Table 7-34, “Communications Checks,” on page 7-82.
Test Message
After the printer is installed, verify communications between the
printer and the IBM-compatible computer. Enter the following at the
DOS prompt:
C: \ DIR > LPT1 Enter (for printing to the parallel port)
The printer should print a directory listing of the C: \ directory.
EIO Troubleshooting
The JetDirect Configuration Page shown in Figure 7-10 contains
valuable information regarding the current status of the EIO
accessories. Before attempting to troubleshoot a network problem or
notifying your network consultant of a problem, always print a
Configuration Page.
See the HP JetDirect Network Interface Configuration Guide for
detailed explanations of network issues.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-77
Network statistics
I/O card status
IP address
Novell status
Node name
Figure 7-10
Sample JetDirect Configuration Page (4000 series printer)
7-78 Troubleshooting
Sample JetDirect Configuration Page (4050 series printer)
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-79
HP JetDirect Configuration
●
If the HP EIO JetDirect Card has successfully powered up and
completed its internal diagnostics, the I/O CARD READY message
appears. If communication is lost, an I/O NOT READY message
appears followed by a two-digit error code. See the HP JetDirect
Network Interface Configuration Guide for further details and
recommended action.
●
The “Network Statistics” column indicates that network activity
has been occurring. Bad packets, framing errors, un-sendable
packets and collisions should be minimal. If a high percentage
(greater than one percent) of these occur, contact the network
administrator. All of the statistics are set to zero when the printer
is powered-off.
●
The “Novell Status” block should state the Novell printer server
name to which the printer is connected. If the node name reads
“NPIxxxxxx” (xxxxxx=last six digits of the EIO’s LAN address), the
EIO card has not been configured for a Novell server. This could
indicate that the card is operating under an IPX protocol other
than Novell. Consult with the network administrator if the Node
Name is not present.
●
In the TCP/IP protocol block, the default IP address is
“192.0.0.192.” It is acceptable to operate the printer with this
default address. The error message ARP DUPLICATE ADDRESS
may appear in this block. This is also an acceptable error code if
the TCP/IP protocol is not being used. Check with the network
administrator to determine the correct IP Address for the printer.
7-80 Troubleshooting
AUTOEXEC.BAT Standard Configurations
Parallel DOS Commands
If the previous check did not produce the desired result, ensure that
the AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains the following statements for parallel
interface communications:
MODE LPT1: , , P
For MS-DOS version 4.0 and above:
MODE LPT1: , , B
Note
This example assumes that you are using parallel printer port LPT1. If
you are using LPT2 or LPT3, replace LPT1 in the example with the
appropriate printer port.
If the problem persists, see Table 7-34, “Communications Checks,” on
page 7-82.
Serial DOS Commands
Most IBM-compatible computers default to a parallel printer port. To
ensure that information is sent to the serial printer port, type the
following MS-DOS commands at the MS-DOS prompt, or include
them in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
MODE COM1: 9600, N, 8, 1, P
MODE LPT1: =COM1
For MS-DOS version 4.0, or above, enter:
MODE COM1: 9600, N, 8, 1, B
MODE LPT1: =COM1
Note
These examples assume that you are using serial printer port COM1.
If you are using COM2 or COM3, replace COM1 with the appropriate
printer port.
If the problem persists, see Table 7-34, “Communications Checks,” on
page 7-82.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-81
Communications Checks
Table 7-34. Communications Checks
Checks
Action
Is your computer configured These parameters are required to communicate with the printer.
to the parameters described Verify that the configuration of the computer's communications
in the configuration
port matches these parameters.
instructions?
Note: If these parameters are not set properly, an error may
display on the Control Panel.
For Serial Communications Only
Does the printer's baud
Print a Configuration Page to verify the baud rate setting. At the
rate match that of the
computer, verify that the baud rate is set correctly in any
computer's communications configuration files.
port?
Note: A baud rate problem may cause an error.
Are you using the correct
Hint: On an RS-232 cable, pins 2 and 3 may need to be reversed
cable for communications
at the printer-end of the cable.
between the computer and
the printer?
Are you using the correct
RS-232-C protocol?
During the communications “handshake,” the printer transmits
both the XON/XOFF signal and the Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
signal. The DTR signal may be either negative going, or positive
going.
DTR polarity is set at the printer's Control Panel. The XON may
be set to normal (only transmitted when data is needed), or
Robust XON (transmitted every second). This feature is
configurable from the Control Panel. DTR is available at pin 20,
and XOFF is transmitted from pin 2 of the printer.
If using a serial interface,
is the cable longer than
50 feet (15 meters)?
7-82 Troubleshooting
The maximum recommended cable length for RS-232 serial
communications is 50 feet (15 meters). Use the correct cable or
move the printer closer to the host.
Table 7-34. Communications Checks (continued)
Checks
Action
If using a bidirectional
parallel cable, is it longer
than 10 feet (3 meters)
long?
The maximum recommended cable length for the printer is 10
feet (3 meters). Use a serial interface connection or move the
printer closer to the host.
Do all the current Control
Panel Configuration Menu
items match the host
system's parameters?
Make appropriate changes. If host system changes are made, be
sure to reboot the system, or otherwise ensure the changes are in
effect.
Does the printer have a bad If possible, try a different printer interface than the one with the
interface port?
problem. Reconfigure the printer and host appropriately.
Does the host have a bad
interface port?
If possible, try a different host system port. Reconfigure both the
host and printer appropriately.
If the host system and printer still are not communicating and you
have addressed the issues in Table 7-34, replace the Formatter PCA
and the EIO card and reconfigure the printer. If the problem persists,
a protocol analyzer may be needed to find the source of the problem.
CAUTION
HP LaserJet printers are not designed to work with mechanical
switch-box products without proper surge protection. These devices
generate high transient voltages that cause permanent damage to the
Formatter PCA. This circumstance is not covered by the
Hewlett-Packard warranty.
Troubleshooting the Printing System 7-83
Reference Diagrams
Locations of Components
Figure 7-11
Components of the Paper Pickup and Feed System (HP LaserJet
4000/4000 N and 4050/4050 N)
7-84 Troubleshooting
Table 7-35. Components in Figure 7-11
PS101
Tray 2 Paper Out Sensor
PS102
Pre-Feed Sensor
PS103
Top of Page Sensor
PS104
Top Output Bin Full Sensor
PS105
Tray 1 Paper Out Sensor
PS106
Fuser Delivery Sensor 2
PS501
Fuser Delivery Sensor 1
SL101
Tray Pickup Solenoid
SL102
Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
CL101
Feed Roller Clutch
Reference Diagrams 7-85
Figure 7-12
Components of the Paper Feed System (HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N
and 4050/4050 N with Optional 500-sheet Universal Tray Assembly)
7-86 Troubleshooting
Figure 7-13
Components of the Duplexer
Reference Diagrams 7-87
Figure 7-14
Components of the Fusing and Delivery Unit
7-88 Troubleshooting
Figure 7-15
Components of the Envelope Feeder
Reference Diagrams 7-89
Paper Path
Figure 7-16
Paper Path (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN and 4050 T/4050 TN
Shown)
Figure 7-17
Paper Path with the Duplexer
7-90 Troubleshooting
Figure 7-18
Paper Path with the Envelope Feeder
Reference Diagrams 7-91
Figure 7-19
Paper Sensors and the Paper Path
Table 7-36. Paper Sensors in Figure 7-19
PS102
Pre-Feed Sensor
Sensor and flag located on
Registration/Feed Sensor Assembly.
PS103
Top of Page Sensor
Sensor and flag located on
Registration/Feed Sensor Assembly.
PS106
Fuser Paper Delivery Sensor 2
Sensor and flag located on Fuser
Assembly.
PS501
Fuser Paper Delivery Sensor 1
Sensor located on Engine Controller
flags on Engine Controller Board and
Fusing Assembly.
PS701
Duplex Pickup Paper Sensor
(Duplexer)
Sensor and flag located in Duplexer.
PS703
Reversed Paper Sensor (Duplexer)
Sensor and flag located in Duplexer.
PS902
Envelope Multiple Feed Sensor
(Envelope Feeder)
Sensor and flag located in Envelope
Feeder.
7-92 Troubleshooting
Engine Controller Board
Figure 7-20
Engine Controller Board Layout
Table 7-37. Engine Controller Board Layout
SW1
Power switch
SW501
Test print switch
VR201
Adjusted at factory
VR501
Top of page adjustment
VR601
Adjusted at factory
Reference Diagrams 7-93
Paper Size Detection Switches
Figure 7-21
Paper Size Detection Switches (1 of 3), Tray 2 (HP LaserJet
4000/4000 N and 4050/4050 N)
Figure 7-22
Tray 2
Switches
Top
Tray 3
Switches
Paper Size Detection Switches (2 of 3), Trays 2 and 3 (HP LaserJet
4000 T/4000 TN and 4050 T/4050 TN)
7-94 Troubleshooting
Figure 7-23
Paper Size Detection Switches (3 of 3), Optional 500-sheet Universal
Tray Assembly
Table 7-38. Paper Size Detection Switches in Figure 7-21 to Figure 7-23
Paper Size
Paper Size Detection Switch
SW600/603/801
SW601/604/802
SW602/605/803
No tray
OFF
OFF
OFF
Legal
OFF
OFF
ON
Executive
OFF
ON
OFF
Letter
OFF
ON
ON
Other
ON
OFF
OFF
Other
ON
OFF
ON
B5
ON
ON
OFF
A4
ON
ON
ON
Reference Diagrams 7-95
Motors
Figure 7-24
Location of Motors
Table 7-39. Motors in Figure 7-24
M101
Main Motor
M701
Reversing Motor (Duplexer)
M702
Duplex Feed Motor (Duplexer)
FM101
Cooling Fan
FM701
Duplexer Exhaust Fan (Duplexer)
H901
Fusing Heater
7-96 Troubleshooting
Connectors
Figure 7-25
Connectors (1 of 3)
Reference Diagrams 7-97
Figure 7-26
Connectors (2 of 3)
7-98 Troubleshooting
Figure 7-27
Connectors (3 of 3)
For locations of connectors see the wiring diagrams at the back of this
manual.
Reference Diagrams 7-99
PCAs
Figure 7-28
Location of PCAs
7-100 Troubleshooting
Table 7-40. Location of PCAs
1
Engine Controller Board
Sequence control, High-voltage output, DC output, and
Heater Drive.
2
Paper Size Detection
PCA
Relay between Sensors/Solenoids and Engine Controller
Board, and Paper Size Detection.
3
Paper Feeder Driver PCA Control and detection of solenoids in the Paper Feeder.
4
Envelope Feeder Driver
PCA
Control and detection of solenoids in the Envelope Feeder.
5
Duplexer Driver PCA
Controls paper in the Duplexer.
Reference Diagrams 7-101
Sensors and Thermistor
Figure 7-29
Location of Sensors and Thermistor (1 of 2)
7-102 Troubleshooting
Figure 7-30
Location of Sensors and Thermistor (2 of 2)
Table 7-41. Sensors and Thermistor in Figure 7-29 and Figure 7-30
PS101
Tray 2 Paper Out Sensor
PS102
Pre-feed Sensor
PS103
Top of Page Sensor
PS104
Top Output Bin Full Sensor
PS105
Tray 1 Paper Out Sensor
PS106
Fuser Paper Delivery Sensor 2
PS107
Tray 3 Paper Out Sensor (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN and
4050 T/TN)
PS501
Fuser Paper Delivery Sensor 1
PS701
Duplex Pickup Paper Sensor (Duplexer)
PS702
Face up Sensor (Duplexer)
Reference Diagrams 7-103
Table 7-41. Sensors and Thermistor in Figure 7-29 and Figure 7-30 (continued)
PS703
Reversed Paper Sensor (Duplexer)
PS801
Paper Feeder Paper Sensor (Paper Feeder)
PS901
Envelope Sensor (Envelope Feeder)
PS902
Envelope Multiple Feed Sensor (Envelope Feeder)
TH901
Fusing Surface Temperature Sensor
7-104 Troubleshooting
Solenoids and Clutch
Figure 7-31
Location of Solenoids and Clutch (1 of 2)
Reference Diagrams 7-105
Figure 7-32
Location of Solenoids and Clutch (2 of 2)
7-106 Troubleshooting
Table 7-42. Solenoids and Clutch in Figure 7-31 and Figure 7-32
CL102
Feed Roller Clutch
SL101
Tray 2 Pickup Solenoid
SL102
Tray 1 Pickup Solenoid
SL103
Tray 3 Pickup Solenoid (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN and 4050 T/TN)
SL701
Duplexer Solenoid (Duplexer)
SL801
Paper Feeder Pickup Solenoid (Paper Feeder)
SL901
Envelope Pickup Solenoid (Envelope Feeder)
Reference Diagrams 7-107
Switches
Figure 7-33
Location of Switches
7-108 Troubleshooting
Table 7-43. Switches in Figure 7-33
SW101
Door open detection switch
SW600
Tray 2 Paper size switch
SW601
Tray 2 Paper size switch
SW602
Tray 2 Paper size switch
SW603
Tray 3 paper size switch (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN and 4050 T/TN)
SW604
Tray 3 paper size switch (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN and 4050 T/TN)
SW605
Tray 3 paper size switch (HP LaserJet 4000 T/TN and 4050 T/TN)
SW801
Paper Feeder paper size switch
SW802
Paper Feeder paper size switch
SW803
Paper Feeder paper size switch
Reference Diagrams 7-109
Timing
Figure 7-34
Pickup Timing for Tray 2 (and lower trays)
Figure 7-35
Pickup Timing for Tray 1
7-110 Troubleshooting
8
Parts and
Diagrams
Overview
This chapter discusses the following:
●
How To Use the Parts Lists and Diagrams
●
Accessories and Supplies
●
Illustrations and Parts Lists
Overview 8-1
How To Use the Parts Lists and Diagrams
The figures in this chapter illustrate the major subassemblies in the
printer and their component parts. A table accompanies each
exploded view diagram. Each table lists the item number for the
replaceable part, the associated part number for the item, the
quantity, and a description of the part.
CAUTION
While looking for an electrical part number, pay careful attention to the
voltage listed in the description column to ensure that the part number
selected is for the correct model of the printer.
Ordering Parts
All standard part numbers listed are stocked and may be ordered
from HP’s Support Materials Organization (SMO), or Support
Materials Europe (SME).
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Support Materials Organization
8050 Foothills Blvd.
Roseville, CA 95678
Parts Direct Ordering: (800) 227-8164 (U.S. Only)
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Support Materials, Europe
Wolf-Hirth Strasse 33
D-7030
Boblingen, Germany
(49 7031) 14-2253
Ordering Consumables
Consumables and accessories such as those listed in Table 8-1 can
be ordered from Hewlett-Packard.
The phone numbers are:
U.S.: (800) 538-8787
Canada: 1-800-387-3154
(Toronto) 516-671-8383
United Kingdom: 0734-441212
Germany: 0130-3322
Contact your local HP Parts Coordinator for other phone numbers.
8-2 Parts and Diagrams
Note
Parts that have no item number or part number listed are not field
replacement parts and cannot be ordered.
How To Use the Parts Lists and Diagrams 8-3
Accessories and Supplies
The following items are available through your local authorized HP
dealer. To find a dealer near you, call the HP Customer Information
Center (800) 752-0900.
Note
See page 2-4 for documentation product numbers.
Table 8-1. Accessories and Supplies
Description
Part No.
Exchange No.
500-Sheet Paper Feeder and Tray
Product No.
C4124A
Envelope Feeder
C4122-69001
C4122A
Duplexer
C4123-69001
C4123A
Standard 500-Sheet Tray
C3122A
250-sheet Universal Replacement
Tray
C4126-67901
C4126A
500-sheet Universal Replacement
Tray
C4125-67901
C4125A
HP Multi-Purpose Paper
HPM1120
HP LaserJet Paper
HPJ1124
Toner Cartridge (6,000 pages)
C4127A
Toner Cartridge (10,000 pages)
C4127X
EDO DIMM
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
SDRAM DIMM
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
Flash DIMM
2 MB
4 MB
8-4 Parts and Diagrams
C4135-67901
C4136-67901
C4137-67901
C4135A
C4136A
C4137A
C4140-67901
C4141-67901
C4142-67901
C4143-67901
C4140A
C4141A
C4142A
C4143A
C3913A
C4286A
C4287A
Table 8-1. Accessories and Supplies (continued)
Description
Part No.
Exchange No.
Font DIMM (8 MB Asian MROM)
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
Euro
FIR Receiver (4050 only)
Product No.
C4292A
C4293A
C4103-67901
C4103A
Hard Disk
C2985A
Parallel Cables
2 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
C2950A
C2951A
Serial Cables
9-9 pin serial cable (male/female)
9-25 pin serial cable (male/female)
C2932A
C2933A
Serial Adapter
25-9 pin adapter (male/female)
C2809A
Macintosh Computer Serial Cable
92215S
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
92215N
Enhanced I/O Cards
Ethernet RJ-45 only
Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC, Local Talk J3111-61003
Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9
10/100Base-TX networks
J3110A
J3111A
J3112A
J3113A
Maintenance Kit*
110V
220V
C4118-67902
C4118-67903
Assy: Dust Cover, 1 x 500
Assy: Dust Cover, 2 x 250
Assy: Dust Cover, opt 500
C4232-60101
C4233-60101
C4234-60101
*
C4118-69001
C4118-69002
C4232A
C4233A
C4234A
The maintenance kits can be ordered from Support Materials Organization
(U.S.) or Support Materials Europe. See page 8-2 for ordering information.
Accessories and Supplies 8-5
Common Screws and Replacement Cables
Table 8-2. Screws Used in the Printer
Description
Part No.
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping (black)
XA9-0870-000CN
Screw, M3x4, washer head
XA9-0434-000CN
Screw, M3x6, with star washer
FA9-1449-000CN
Screw, M3x6, washer head
XA9-0267-000CN
Screw, M4x12, self-tapping
XA9-0773-000CN
Screw, M4x116, long, module
RB1-8703-000CN
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping (silver)
XA9-0606-000CN
Screw, M4, captive, Fuser
RB1-8819-000CN
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules
XA9-0917-000CN
8-6 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-3. Replaceable Cables
Description
Part No.
Table No.
Item No.
Cable and Power Receptacle
RG5-3696-000CN
Table 8-7 on
page 8-15
15
Cable, Tray 1 Sensor
RG5-3700-000CN
Table 8-7 on
page 8-15
14
Cable, Laser Scanner, and Output
Bin Sensor
RG5-3876-000CN
Table 8-8 on
page 8-17
20
Cable, Paper Feed/Tray 1 Pickup
Solenoid
RG5-3703-000CN
Table 8-7 on
page 8-15
8
Cable, Envelope Feeder Connect
RG5-3704-000CN
Table 8-7 on
page 8-15
11
Cable, Top Cover Switch
RG5-3705-000CN
Table 8-7 on
page 8-15
10
Cable, Feed/Registration Sensors
RG5-3706-000CN
Table 8-8 on
page 8-17
7
Cable, Formatter/Control Panel
RG5-3708-000CN
Table 8-7 on
page 8-15
2
Cable, Main Motor
RG5-3709-000CN
Table 8-7 on
page 8-15
5
Cable, Feeder Module
RG5-3710-000CN
Table 8-8 on
page 8-17
8
Accessories and Supplies 8-7
Illustrations and Parts Lists
Laser Scanner
Assembly
Top Cover Assembly
Tray 1 Pickup
Assembly
Paper
Delivery
Assembly
Fusing
Assembly
Tray 1 Assembly
Delivery Drive
Assembly
Paper Feed
Guide Assembly
Formatter
Assembly
Printer Drive
Assembly
Registration
Assembly
Engine Controller
Board Assembly
Figure 8-1
Assembly Location Diagram
8-8 Parts and Diagrams
Paper Feed
Assembly
Table 8-4. Assemblies (Listed Alphabetically) and Their Part Numbers
Description
Part No.
Exchange No.
Exploded View
in Figure
Delivery Drive
Assembly
RG5-3721-000CN
EIO Cover
5021-0349
Engine Controller
Board
RG5-3693-000CN (110V)
RG5-3694-000CN (220V)
C4118-69006 (110V) Figure 8-7 on page
C4118-69007 (220V) 8-22
Formatter
C4251-69001 (4050 only)
C4118-69008
(4000 only)
Fuser
RG5-2661-000CN (110V)
RG5-2662-000CN (220V)
C4118-69003 (110V) Figure 8-16 on
C4118-69004 (220V) page 8-34 and
Figure 8-17 on
page 8-35
Laser Scanner
Assembly
RG5-2641-000CN
C4118-69005
Tray 1 Assembly
RG5-2656-000CN
Figure 8-11 on
page 8-28
Tray 1 Pickup
Assembly
RG5-2655-100CN
Figure 8-10 on
page 8-26
Paper Delivery
RG5-2648-000CN
Figure 8-15 on
page 8-32
Paper Feed
RG5-2651-000CN
Figure 8-12 on
page 8-29
Paper Feed Guide
RG5-2643-000CN
Figure 8-14 on
page 8-31
Registration
RG5-2652-070CN
Figure 8-13 on
page 8-30
Top Cover
RG5-2663-000CN
Figure 8-3 on page
8-12
Figure 8-8 on page
8-24
Figure 8-5 on page
8-16
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-9
1
2
9
8
3
4
6
7
5
Figure 8-2
External Covers and Panels
8-10 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-5. External Covers and Panels
Item No. Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RB1-8858-000CN
1
Panel, Formatter Cover
2
RG5-2664-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Right Front
3
RB1-8860-000CN
1
Clip, Right Side Panel
4
RB1-8849-000CN
1
Power Switch Button
5
RG5-2667-000CN
1
Tray 1 Door Assembly
6
RB1-8848-000CN
1
Clip, Left Side Panel
7
RG5-2665-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Left
8
RB1-8843-000CN
1
Tray, Rear
9
RB1-8844-000CN
1
Tray, Rear Extension
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-11
5
4
1
3
2
Figure 8-3
Top Cover Assembly
8-12 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-6. Top Cover Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2663-000CN
1
Top Cover Assembly
2
RB1-8841-000CN
1
Panel, Toner Cartridge access
3
RB1-8846-000CN
1
Latch, Rear Tray
4
RB1-8847-000CN
1
Spring, Rear Tray Latch
5
RB1-8710-000CN
Plate Cover
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-13
1
16
18
4
2
19
3
5
6
7
8
9
10
14
11
12
15
20
21
22
17
13
Figure 8-4
Internal Components (1 of 3)
8-14 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-7. Internal Components (1 of 3)
Item No. Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RB1-8862-000CN
1
Guide, Formatter/CP Cable
2
RG5-3708-000CN
1
Cable Formatter/Control Panel
3
RB1-8703-000CN
2
Screw, Module Attachment
4
RH7-1331-000CN
1
Main Motor Assembly
5
RG5-3709-000CN
1
Cable, Main Motor
6
RG5-2645-000CN
1
Support, Top Cover, Right
7
RB1-8694-000CN
1
Strap, Interlock Support Ground
8
RG5-3703-000CN
1
Cable, Paper Feed/Tray 1 Pickup
Solenoid
9
WC4-5139-000CN
1
Switch, Top Cover Interlock access
10
RG5-3705-000CN
1
Cable, Top Cover Switch
11
RG5-3704-000CN
1
Cable, Envelope Feeder Connect
12
RB1-8704-000CN
1
Guide, Bottom Cable
13
RB1-8851-000CN
1
Power Switch Activator
14
RG5-3700-000CN
1
Cable, Tray 1 Sensor
15
RG5-3696-000CN
1
AC, Power Receptacle
16
C4118-69003
C4118-69004
1
Fusing Assembly (110V)
Fusing Assembly (220V)
17
C4118-69006
C4118-69007
1
Engine Controller Board (110V)
Engine Controller Board (220V)
18
RG5-2648-000CN
1
Delivery Assembly
19
RG5-2653-000CN
1
Printer Drive Assembly
20
RG5-2643-000CN
1
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
21
RG5-2655-100CN
1
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
22
RG5-2656-000CN
1
Tray 1 Assembly
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-15
23
21
20
1
19
18
17
2
3
16
15
4
5
6
13
14
12
11
10
9
8
22
Figure 8-5
Internal Components (2 of 3)
8-16 Parts and Diagrams
7
Table 8-8. Internal Components (2 of 3)
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RB2-2405-000CN
1
Plate, Control Panel Ground
2
RB1-8671-000CN
1
Support, Top Cover, Left
3
RB1-8827-000CN
1
Leaf Spring
4
RB1-8689-000CN
1
Cable Holder
5
RB1-8708-000CN
1
Plate, Gear Plate Ground
6
RG5-2642-000CN
1
Registration/Feed Sensor Assembly
7
RG5-3706-000CN
1
Cable, Feed/Registration Sensors
8
RG5-3710-000CN
1
Cable, Feeder Module
9
RB1-8690-000CN
1
Retainer, Toner Sensing Spring
10
RB1-8695-000CN
1
Spring, Toner Sensing
11
RB1-8693-000CN
1
Spring, Toner Cartridge Drum Ground
12
RB1-8688-000CN
1
Button, Engine Test
13
RH7-1335-000CN
1
Fan, Main Cooling
14
RB1-8706-000CN
1
Fan Cover
15
RB2-2400-000CN
1
Panel, Left Duplex access
16
RB2-2401-000CN
1
Panel, Right Duplex access
17
RB1-8700-000CN
1
Laser Shutter Arm
18
RB1-8702-000CN
1
Spring, Shutter
19
RG5-2641-000CN/
C4118-69005
1
Laser Scanner Assembly
20
RG5-3876-000CN
1
Cable, Laser Scanner and Output Bin
Sensor
21
RG5-2666-000CN
1
Control Panel
22
C4118-69006
C4118-69007
1
1
Engine Controller Board (110V)
Engine Controller Board (220V)
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-17
Table 8-8. Internal Components (2 of 3) (continued)
Item No.
Part No.
23
C4118-40002
C4118-40007
C4118-40020
C4118-40008
C4118-40009
C4118-40010
C4118-40011
C4118-40012
C4118-40013
C4118-40015
C4118-40017
C4118-40018
C4118-40019
C4118-40021
C4118-40022
C4118-40023
C4118-40025
C4118-40026
C4118-40029
C4118-40014
C4118-40024
C4118-40027
C4118-40028
C4118-40030
C4251-40001
C4251-40002
C4251-40014
C4251-40003
C4251-40004
C4251-40005
C4251-40006
C4251-40007
C4251-40008
C4251-40010
C4251-40011
C4251-40012
C4251-40013
C4251-40015
C4251-40016
C4251-40017
C4251-40019
C4251-40020
C4251-40023
C4251-40009
C4251-40018
C4251-40021
C4251-40022
C4251-40024
8-18 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Description
LJ4000 Overlay (English)
LJ4000 Overlay (French)
LJ4000 Overlay (German)
LJ4000 Overlay (Italian)
LJ4000 Overlay (Portugal)
LJ4000 Overlay (Norway)
LJ4000 Overlay (Hungarian)
LJ4000 Overlay (Swedish)
LJ4000 Overlay (Polish)
LJ4000 Overlay (Czech)
LJ4000 Overlay (Korean)
LJ4000 Overlay (Chinese, Simplified)
LJ4000 Overlay (Chinese, Traditional)
LJ4000 Overlay (Spanish)
LJ4000 Overlay (Danish)
LJ4000 Overlay (Dutch)
LJ4000 Overlay (Finland)
LJ4000 Overlay (Turkish)
LJ4000 Overlay (Japanese)
LJ4000 Overlay (Russian)
LJ4000 Overlay (Greek)
LJ4000 Overlay (Hebrew)
LJ4000 Overlay (Arabic)
LJ4000 Overlay (Thai)
LJ4050 Overlay (English)
LJ4050 Overlay (French)
LJ4050 Overlay (German)
LJ4050 Overlay (Italian)
LJ4050 Overlay (Portugal)
LJ4050 Overlay (Norway)
LJ4050 Overlay (Hungarian)
LJ4050 Overlay (Swedish)
LJ4050 Overlay (Polish)
LJ4050 Overlay (Czech)
LJ4050 Overlay (Korean)
LJ4050 Overlay (Chinese, Simplified)
LJ4050 Overlay (Chinese, Traditional)
LJ4050 Overlay (Spanish)
LJ4050 Overlay (Danish)
LJ4050 Overlay (Dutch)
LJ4050 Overlay (Finland)
LJ4050 Overlay (Turkish)
LJ4050 Overlay (Japanese)
LJ4050 Overlay (Russian)
LJ4050 Overlay (Greek)
LJ4050 Overlay (Hebrew)
LJ4050 Overlay (Arabic)
LJ4050 Overlay (Thai)
Notes:
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-19
1
5
2
4
3
Figure 8-6
Internal Components (3 of 3)
8-20 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-9. Internal Components (3 of 3)
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RF5-1867-000CN
1
Pre-Transfer Ground Plate Assembly
2
RG5-4283-000CN
1
Transfer Roller Assembly
3
RS5-0911-000CN
1
Gear, Coupler
4
RF5-2496-000CN
1
Plate, Gear
5
RB1-8747-000CN
1
Plate, Registration Ground
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-21
1
Figure 8-7
Engine Controller Board Assembly
8-22 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-10. Engine Controller Board Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Exchange No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-3693-000CN
C4118-69006
1
Engine Controller
Board (110V)
1
RG5-3694-000CN
C4118-69007
1
Engine Controller
Board (220V)
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-23
2
Figure 8-8
1
Delivery Drive Assembly
Table 8-11. Delivery Drive Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-3721-000CN
1
Delivery Drive Assembly
2
WG8-5362-000CN
1
Sensor, Optical
8-24 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
Description
1
2
3
Figure 8-9
Printer Drive Assembly
Table 8-12. Printer Drive Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2653-000CN
1
Printer Drive Assembly
2
RB1-8757-000CN
1
Guide, Cable, Gear Assembly Plate
3
RB1-8756-000CN
1
Rod, Toner Drive
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-25
1
7
2
6
3
5
Figure 8-10
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
8-26 Parts and Diagrams
4
Table 8-13. Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2655-100CN
1
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
2
RB2-2386-000CN
1
Cover Envelope Feeder Drive
3
RG5-3718-000CN
1
Tray 1 Pickup Roller Assembly
4
RB1-8787-000CN
1
Arm, Tray 1 Paper Sensing
5
RB2-2387-000CN
1
Arm, Tray 1 Retaining
6
RB1-8788-000CN
1
Cover, Tray 1 Sensor Arm
7
RH7-5172-000CN
1
Solenoid, Tray 1 Drive
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-27
1
Figure 8-11
Tray 1 Assembly
Table 8-14. Tray 1 Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2656-000CN
8-28 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
1
Description
Tray 1 Assembly
1
Figure 8-12
Paper Feed Assembly
Table 8-15. Paper Feed Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2651-000CN
Quantity
1
Description
Paper Feed Assembly
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-29
1
Figure 8-13
Registration Assembly
Table 8-16. Registration Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
1
RG5-2652-070CN
8-30 Parts and Diagrams
Quantity
1
Description
Registration Assembly
1
4
2
3
Figure 8-14
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
Table 8-17. Paper Feed Guide Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2643-000CN
1
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
2
RF5-2495-000CN
1
Shaft, Belt Idler Assembly
3
RB1-8668-000CN
1
Belt, Feed Guide
4
RB1-8674-000CN
1
Shaft, Belt Drive
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-31
1
2
3
4
Figure 8-15
Delivery Assembly
8-32 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-18. Delivery Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2648-000CN
1
Delivery Assembly
2
RG5-2650-000CN
1
Delivery Sensor Arm Assembly
3
RB2-2408-000CN
1
Arm, Output Kicker, Right
4
RB2-2409-000CN
1
Arm, Output Kicker, Left
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-33
1
2
Figure 8-16
Fuser Assembly (1 of 2)
Table 8-19. Fuser Assembly (1 of 2)
Item No. Part No.
Exchange No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2661-000CN C4118-69003
RG5-2662-000CN C4118-69004
1
1
Fuser (110 V)
Fuser (220 V)
2
RB1-8805-000CN
1
Panel, Fuser Cover
8-34 Parts and Diagrams
1
2
3
Figure 8-17
Fuser Assembly (2 of 2)
Table 8-20. Fuser Assembly (2 of 2)
Item No. Part No.
Exchange No. Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2661-000CN C4118-60003
RG5-2662-000CN C4118-60004
1
1
Fuser (110V)
Fuser (220V)
2
RG5-4269-000CN
RG5-4291-000CN
1
Fuser Film Assembly (110V)
Fuser Film Assembly (220V)
3
RB1-8794-000CN
1
Roller, Fuser Pressure
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-35
13
1
2
4
3
5
12
6
14
7
8
10
11
9
Figure 8-18
Internal Components of 500-Sheet Feeder
8-36 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-21. Internal Components of 500-sheet Feeder
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RB1-8890-000CN
1
Guide, Paper
2
RB1-8873-000CN
1
Support, Paper Guide
3
RG5-2668-000CN
1
Cover Feeder Right Assembly
4
RG5-3711-000CN
1
Cable, Sensor
5
RG5-2673-000CN
1
Feeder Controller PCA
6
RB1-8887-000CN
1
Levers, Tray Sensing
7
RB1-8886-000CN
1
Cover, Feeder PCA
8
RG5-3712-000CN
1
Connector, Lower Tray (with cable)
9
RB1-8107-000CN
4
Foot
10
RG5-2669-000CN
1
Cover, Feeder, Left
11
RS5-2652-000CN
1
Spring, Tray Lock
12
RG5-2672-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
(500-sheet)
13
XA9-0917-000CN
1
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules
14
VS1-6176-000CN
1
Connector (250- and 500-sheet Feeder)
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-37
1
8
2
3
6
5
7
Figure 8-19
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
8-38 Parts and Diagrams
4
Table 8-22. Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2672-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
(500-sheet)
2
RS5-2632-000CN
1
Spring, Pickup
3
RB1-8877-000CN
1
Coupler, Pickup
4
RF5-2484-000CN
1
Pickup Roller Assembly
5
RB1-2190-000CN
1
Clip, Pickup Spring
6
RB1-8865-000CN
4
Roller, Pickup
7
RF5-2490-000CN
1
Feed, Roller
8
RB1-8879-000CN
1
Arm, Tray Sensing
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-39
7
12
1
11
3
4
5
2
6
9
8
10
Figure 8-20
500-sheet Tray
8-40 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-23. 500-sheet Tray
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RB1-8947-000CN
1
Panel, Roller Access
2
RF5-2489-000CN
1
Mounting Assembly Separation Roller
3
RB1-8948-000CN
1
Gear, Separation Roller Drive
4
RB1-8946-000CN
1
Bushing, Separation Roller
5
RB1-8945-000CN
1
Coupler, Separation Roller
6
RS5-2622-000CN
1
Spring, Separation Roller Tension
7
RF5-2670-000CN
1
Paper Stop, 500-sheet Tray
8
RF5-2490-000CN
1
Roller
9
RB1-8974-000CN
1
Clutch, Separation Roller
10
RB1-9009-000CN
1
Paper Level Indicator
11
RB1-8961-000CN
1
Left Arm Lifter
12
RB1-8962-000CN
1
Right Arm Lifter
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-41
1
12
11
13
3
2
4
5
3
10
6
8
7
6
9
Figure 8-21
Internal Components of 250-sheet Module (1 of 2)
8-42 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-24. Internal Components of 250-sheet Module (1 of 2)
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
XA9-0870-000CN
1
Screw, M4x10, Feed Modules
2
RG5-2677-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Upper Right
3
RS5-1309-000CN
2
Bearing, Transport Roller
4
XD9-0135-000CN
1
E-Clip
5
RB1-8923-000CN
1
Roller, Transport
6
RB1-8922-000CN
2
Roller, Transport Pressure
7
RS5-2653-000CN
1
Spring, Transport Roller
8
RB1-8926-000CN
1
Mount, Transport Pressure
9
RB1-8913-000CN
1
Support, Paper Guide Lower
10
RB1-8914-000CN
1
Guide, Paper, Lower
11
RG5-2678-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left Upper
12
RG5-2683-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, Upper
(250-sheet)
13
RS5-0946-000CN
1
Gear, Transport Roller
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-43
6
7
4
5A
1
5B
3
8
2
Figure 8-22
Internal Components of 250-sheet Feeder (2 of 2)
8-44 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-25. Internal Components of 250-sheet Feeder (2 of 2)
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2679-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Right Lower
2
RG5-2680-000CN
1
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left Lower
3
RB1-8907-000CN
1
Cover, Feeder PCA
4
RG5-2685-000CN
1
Feeder, Control PCA
5A
RB1-9033-000CN
1
Levers, Tray Sensing Upper
5B
RB1-9034-000CN
1
Levers, Tray Sensing Lower
6
XA9-0917-000CN
1
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules
7
RG5-2684-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, Lower
(250-sheet)
8
VS1-6176-000CN
1
Connector (250- and 500-sheet Feeder)
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-45
1
2
Figure 8-23
Upper Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
Table 8-26. Upper Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
Item No. Part No.
Quantity Description
1
RG5-2683-000CN
1
Upper Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
(250-sheet)
2
RB1-8910-000CN
1
Arm, Tray Sensing
8-46 Parts and Diagrams
2
1
Figure 8-24
Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
Table 8-27. Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RG5-2684-000CN
1
Lower Paper Pickup Drive Assembly
(250-sheet)
2
RB1-8910-000CN
1
Arm, Tray Sensing
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-47
6
5
1
4
3
2
Figure 8-25
250-sheet Tray
8-48 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-28. 250-sheet Tray
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RF5-2505-000CN
1 each
Mounting Assembly Separation Roller
2
RB1-9001-000CN
1 each
Panel Roller Access
3
RF5-2490-000CN
1 each
Roller
4
RB1-9009-000CN
1 each
Paper Level Indicator
5
RB1-9012-010CN
1 each
Left Arm Lifter
6
RB1-9013-010CN
1 each
Right Arm Lifter
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-49
13
11
13
1
11
2
3
4
10
5
6
9
12
7
8
Figure 8-26
Internal Components of Optional 500-sheet Universal Tray Assembly
8-50 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-29. Internal Components of Optional 500-sheet Universal Tray
Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
XD2-1100-502CN
1
Ring, E
2
RG5-2690-000CN
1
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, Optional
(500-sheet)
3
RB1-8865-000CN
4
Roller
4
VS1-6174-000CN
1
Connector
5
RB1-8928-000CN
1
Tray Identifier Plunger
6
RS5-2967-000CN
1
Spring, Compression
7
RB1-8915-000CN
1
Frame, Right
8
RG5-2688-000CN
1
Left Frame Assembly
9
RB1-8927-000CN
1
Spring, Leaf
10
RG5-3822-000CN
1
Paper Feeder Cable
11
RB1-8924-000CN
2
Guide, Lower Tray
12
RG5-3821-000CN
1
Lower Tray Logic PCA
13
RS5-1179-000CN
2
Bearing, Transport Roller
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-51
2
3
4
8
7
1
5
Figure 8-27
Optional 500-sheet Universal Tray Assembly
8-52 Parts and Diagrams
6
Table 8-30. Optional 500-sheet Universal Tray Assembly
Item No.
Part No.
Quantity
Description
1
RF5-2489-000CN
1
Separation Roller Mounting Assembly
2
RB1-9374-000CN
1
Stopper
3
RS5-2981-000CN
1
Spring
4
RB1-9371-000CN
1
Plate
5
RF5-2490-000CN
1
Feed Roller
6
RB1-9009-000CN
1
Paper Level Indicator
7
RB1-8961-000CN
1
Left Arm Lifter
8
RB1-8962-000CN
1
Right Arm Lifter
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-53
4
3
2
1
Figure 8-28
Envelope Feeder
8-54 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-31. Envelope Feeder
Item No.
Part No.
Exchange No. Quantity
Description
1
C4122A
C4122-69001
1
Envelope Feeder
2
RB1-9088-000CN
1
Tray, Envelope Feeder
3
RF5-2511-000CN
1
Weight, Envelope
4
RB1-9095-000N
1
Mount, Envelope Weight
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-55
1
2
6
3
5
4
Figure 8-29
Internal Components of Duplexer
8-56 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-32. Internal Components of Duplexer
Item No.
Part No.
Exchange No.
1
C4123A
C4123-69001
2
Quantity
Description
1
Duplexer
RB1-9044-000CN
1
Cover, Top
3
RB1-9047-000CN
1
Cover, Right Duplexer
4
RF5-1876-000CN
1
Cover, Left with
Connector
5
RB1-9045-000CN
1
Panel, Rear
6
RH7-1361-000CN
1
Fan
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-57
Alphabetical Parts List
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
250-sheet Universal
Replacement Tray
C4126A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
500-sheet Paper Feeder and
Tray
C4124A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
500-sheet Universal
Replacement Tray
C4125A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
AC, Power Receptacle
RG5-3696-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Arm, Output Kicker, Left
RB2-2409-000CN
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
Arm, Output Kicker, Right
RB2-2408-000CN
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
Arm, Tray 1 Paper Sensing
RB1-8787-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
Arm, Tray 1 Tray Retaining
RB2-2387-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
Arm, Tray Sensing
RB1-8910-000CN
Table 8-26 on page 8-46
Arm, Tray Sensing
RB1-8879-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
Bearing, Transport Roller
RS5-1179-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Bearing, Transport Roller
RS5-1309-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Belt, Feed Guide
RB1-8668-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-31
Bushing, Separation Roller
RB1-8946-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
Button, Engine Test
RB1-8688-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable Formatter/Control Panel RG5-3708-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Cable Holder
RB1-8689-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable, Envelope Feeder
Connect
RG5-3704-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Cable, Feed/Registration
Sensors
RG5-3706-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable, Feeder Module
RG5-3710-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable Formatter Control Panel RG5-3708-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Cable, Laser Scanner and
Output Bin Sensor
RG5-3876-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Cable, Main Motor
RG5-3709-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
8-58 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued)
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Cable, Paper Feed/Tray 1
Pickup Solenoid
RG5-3703-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Cable, Sensor
RG5-3711-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Cable, Top Cover Switch
RG5-3705-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Cable, Tray 1 Sensor
RG5-3700-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Clip, Left Side Panel
RB1-8848-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Clip, Pickup Spring
RB1-2190-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
Clip, Right Side Panel
RB1-8860-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Clutch, Separation Roller
RB1-8974-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
Connector
VS1-6174-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Connector (250- and
500-sheet Feeder)
VS1-6176-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37 and
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Connector, Lower Tray (with
Cable)
RG5-3712-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Control Panel
RG5-2666-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Coupler, Pickup
RB1-8877-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
Coupler, Separation Roller
RB1-8945-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left
Lower
RG5-2680-000CN
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left
Upper
RG5-2678-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Right RG5-2679-000CN
Lower
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Cover Assembly, Feeder,
Upper Right
RG5-2677-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Cover Assembly, Left
RG5-2665-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Cover Assembly, Right Front
RG5-2664-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Cover Envelope Feeder Drive RB2-2386-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
Cover, Feeder PCA, 250-sheet RB1-8907-000CN
Tray
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Cover, Feeder PCA, 500-sheet RB1-8886-000CN
Tray
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Cover, Feeder, Left
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RG5-2669-000CN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-59
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued)
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Cover Feeder Right Assembly RG5-2668-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Cover, Left with Connector
RF5-1876-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
Cover, Right Duplexer
RB1-9047-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
Cover, Top
RB1-9044-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
Cover, Tray 1 Sensor Arm
RB1-8788-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
Delivery Assembly
RG5-2648-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15 and
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
Delivery Drive Assembly
RG5-3721-000CN
Table 8-11 on page 8-24
Delivery Sensor Arm
Assembly
RG5-2650-000CN
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
Duplex Printing Accessory
(Duplexer)
C4123A
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
E-Clip
XD9-0135-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
EDO DIMM
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
C4135-67901
C4136-67901
C4137-67901
Engine Controller Board
Enhanced I/O Cards
Ethernet RJ-45 only
Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC,
Local Talk
Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9
10/100Base-TX networks
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
RG5-3693-000CN (110V)
RG5-3694-000CN (220V)
Table 8-10 on page 8-23
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
J3111-61003
Envelope Feeder
C4122A
Table 8-31 on page 8-55
Fan, Duplexer
RH7-1361-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
Fan Cover
RB1-8706-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Fan, Main Cooling
RH7-1335-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Feed Roller
RF5-2490-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
Feeder Controller PCA
RG5-2673-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Feeder, Control PCA
RG5-2685-000CN
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Flash DIMM
2 MB
4 MB
C4286A
C4287A
8-60 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued)
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Font DIMM (8 MB Asian
MROM)
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
Euro
C4292A
C4293A
C4210A
Foot
RB1-8107-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Formatter
C4118-69008 (LJ 4000)
C4251-69001 (LJ 4050)
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
Frame, Right
RB1-8915-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Fuser
C4118-69003 (110V)
C4118-69004 (220V)
Table 8-19 on page 8-34 and
Table 8-20 on page 8-35
Fuser Film Assembly (110V)
Fuser Film Assembly (220V)
RG5-4269-000CN (110V)
RG5-4291-000CN (220V)
Table 8-20 on page 8-35
Gear, Coupler
RS5-0911-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Gear, Separation Roller Drive RB1-8948-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
Gear, Transport Roller
RS5-0946-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Guide, Bottom Cable
RB1-8704-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Guide, Cable, Gear Assembly RB1-8757-000CN
Plate
Table 8-12 on page 8-25
Guide, Formatter/CP Cable
RB1-8862-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Guide, Lower Tray
RB1-8924-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Guide, Paper
RB1-8890-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Guide, Paper, Lower
RB1-8914-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Hard Disk
C2985A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
HP LaserJet Paper
HPJ1124
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
HP Multi-purpose Paper
HPM1120
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Laser Shutter Arm
RB1-8700-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Laser Scanner Assembly
RG5-2641-000CN/
C4118-69005
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
Latch, Rear Tray
RB1-8846-000CN
Table 8-6 on page 8-13
Left Frame Assembly
RG5-2688-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Leaf Spring
RB1-8827-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Levers, Tray Sensing
RB1-8887-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-61
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued)
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Levers, Tray Sensing Lower
RB1-9034-000CN
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Levers, Tray Sensing Upper
RB1-9033-000CN
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Lower Paper Pickup Drive
Assembly (250-sheet)
RG5-2684-000CN
Table 8-27 on page 8-47
Lower Tray Logic PCA
RG5-3821-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Macintosh Computer Serial
Cable
92215S
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
92215N
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Main Motor Assembly
RH7-1331-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Maintenance Kit
110V
220V
C4118-67902
C4118-67903
Mount, Envelope Weight
RB1-9095-000CN
Table 8-31 on page 8-55
Mount, Transport Pressure
RB1-8926-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Mounting Assembly
Separation Roller, 250-sheet
Tray
RF5-2505-000CN
Table 8-28 on page 8-49
Mounting Assembly
Separation Roller, 500-sheet
Tray
RF5-2489-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
Overlay (English)
C4118-40002 (LJ 4000)
RBI-8861-000CN (LJ 4000)
C4251-40001 (LJ 4050)
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Panel Roller Access
RB1-9001-000CN
Table 8-28 on page 8-49
Panel, Formatter Cover
RB1-8858-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Panel, Fuser Cover
RB1-8805-000CN
Table 8-19 on page 8-34
Panel, Left Duplex Access
RB2-2400-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Panel, Rear
RB1-9045-000CN
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
Panel, Right Duplex Access
RB2-2401-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Panel, Roller Access
RB1-8947-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Panel, Toner Cartridge Access RB1-8841-000CN
Table 8-6 on page 8-13
Paper Delivery
RG5-2648-000CN
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
Paper Feed Assembly
RG5-2651-000CN
Table 8-15 on page 8-29
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
RG5-2643-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-31
8-62 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued)
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Paper Feeder Cable
RG5-3822-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, RG5-2690-000CN
Optional 500-sheet Tray
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly RG5-2672-000CN
(500-sheet)
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
Paper Stop, 500-sheet Tray
RF5-2670-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
Parallel Cables
2 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
C2950A
C2951A
Pickup Roller Assembly
RF5-2484-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
Plate
RB1-9371-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
Plate Cover
RB1-8710-000CN
Table 8-6 on page 8-13
Plate, Control Panel Ground
RB2-2405-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Plate, Gear
RF5-2496-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
Plate, Gear Plate Ground
RB1-8708-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Plate, Registration Ground
RB1-8747-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
Power Receptacle
RG5-3696-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Power Switch Activator
RB1-8851-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Power Switch Button
RB1-8849-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Pre-transfer Ground Plate
Assembly
RF5-1867-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
Printer Drive Assembly
RG5-2653-000CN
Table 8-12 on page 8-25
Registration Assembly
RG5-2652-070CN
Table 8-16 on page 8-30
Registration/Feed Sensor
Assembly
RG5-2642-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Retainer, Toner Sensing
Spring
RB1-8690-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Ring, E
XD2-1100-502CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Rod, Toner Drive
RB1-8756-000CN
Table 8-12 on page 8-25
Roller, 250-sheet Tray
RF5-2490-000CN
Table 8-28 on page 8-49
Roller, Fuser Pressure
RB1-8794-000CN
Table 8-20 on page 8-35
Roller, Pickup, 500-sheet Tray RB1-8865-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
Roller, Transport
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
RB1-8923-000CN
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-63
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued)
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Roller, Transport Pressure
RB1-8922-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules XA9-0917-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37,
Table 8-24 on page 8-43, and
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Screw, M3x4, washer head
XA9-0434-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M3x6, washer head
XA9-0267-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M3x6, with star washer FA9-1449-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4, Captive, Fuser
RB1-8819-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping
(black)
XA9-0870-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping
(silver)
XA9-0606-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x116, long, module RB1-8703-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, M4x12, self-tapping
XA9-0773-000CN
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
Screw, Module Attachment
RB1-8703-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
SDRAM DIMM
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
C4140-67901
C4141-67901
C4142-67901
C4143-67901
Sensor, Optical
WG8-5362-000CN
Table 8-11 on page 8-24
Separation Roller Mounting
Assembly
RF5-2489-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
Serial Adapter
25-9 Pin Adapter
(male/female)
C2809A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Serial cables
9-9 pin serial cable
(male/female)
9-25 pin serial cable
(male/female)
C2932A
C2933A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Shaft, Belt Drive
RB1-8674-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-31
Shaft, Belt Idler Assembly
RF5-2495-000CN
Table 8-17 on page 8-31
Solenoid, Tray 1 Drive
RH7-5172-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
Spring
RS5-2981-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
Spring, Compression
RS5-2967-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
8-64 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued)
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Spring, Leaf
RB1-8927-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Spring, Pickup
RS5-2632-000CN
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
Spring, Rear Tray Latch
RB1-8847-000CN
Table 8-6 on page 8-13
Spring, Separation Roller
Tension
RS5-2622-000CN
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
Spring, Shutter
RB1-8702-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Spring, Toner Cartridge Drum RB1-8693-000CN
Ground
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Spring, Toner Sensing
RB1-8695-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Spring, Transport Roller
RS5-2653-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Spring, Tray Lock
RS5-2652-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Standard 500-sheet Tray
C3122A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Stopper
RB1-9374-000CN
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
Strap, Interlock Support
Ground
RB1-8694-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Support, Paper Guide
RB1-8873-000CN
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Support, Paper Guide Lower
RB1-8913-000CN
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
Support, Top Cover, Left
RB1-8671-000CN
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Support, Top Cover, Right
RG5-2645-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Switch, Top Cover Access
WC4-5139-000CN
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Toner Cartridge (10,000
Pages)
C4127X
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Toner Cartridge (6,000 Pages) C4127A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Top Cover Assembly
RG5-2663-000CN
Figure 8-3 on page 8-12
Transfer Roller Assembly
RG5-4283-000CN
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
Tray 1 Assembly
RG5-2656-100CN
Table 8-14 on page 8-28
Tray 1 Door Assembly
RG5-2667-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
RG5-2655-100CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
Tray 1 Pickup Roller Assembly RG5-3718-000CN
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
Tray Identifier Plunger
RB1-8928-000CN
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Tray, Envelope Feeder
RB1-9088-000CN
Table 8-31 on page 8-55
Tray, Rear
RB1-8843-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-65
Table 8-33. Alphabetical Parts List (continued)
Description
Part Number
Table Number and Page
Tray, Rear Extension
RB1-8844-000CN
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
Upper Paper Pickup Drive
Assembly (250-sheet)
RG5-2683-000CN
Table 8-26 on page 8-46
Weight, Envelope
RF5-2511-000CN
Table 8-31 on page 8-55
8-66 Parts and Diagrams
Numerical Parts List
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List
Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
92215N
Macintosh Network Cable Kit
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
92215S
Macintosh Computer Serial
Cable
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C2809A
Serial adapter
25-9 Pin Adapter
(male/female)
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Serial cables
9-9 pin serial cable
(male/female)
9-25 pin serial cable
(male/female)
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Parallel cables
2 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C2950A
C2951A
C2985A
Hard Disk
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C3122A
Standard 500-sheet Tray
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4103A
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver
(LJ 4050 only)
C4118-40002
RBI-8861-000CN
Overlay (English)
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Maintenance Kit
110V
220V
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4118-69003 (110V)
C4118-69004 (220V)
Fuser
Table 8-19 on page 8-34 and
Table 8-20 on page 8-35
C4118-69008
Formatter (LJ 4000 only)
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
C4122A
Envelope Feeder
C4123A
Duplexer
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
C4124A
500-sheet Paper Feeder and
Tray
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4125A
500-sheet Universal
Replacement Tray
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4126A
250-sheet Universal
Replacement Tray
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C2932A
C2933A
C4118-67902
C4118-67903
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-67
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued)
Part Number
Description
C4127A
Toner Cartridge (6,000 Pages) Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4127X
Toner Cartridge (10,000
pages)
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
EDO DIMM
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4135-67901
C4136-67901
C4137-67901
SDRAM DIMM
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4140-67901
C4141-67901
C4142-67901
C4143-67901
C4251-69001
Formatter (LJ 4050 only)
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
Flash DIMM
2 MB
4 MB
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4286A
C4287A
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
C4292A
C4293A
Font DIMM (8 MB Asian
MROM)
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
FA9-1449-000CN
Screw, M3x6, with star washer Table 8-2 on page 8-6
HPJ1124
HP LaserJet Paper
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
HPM1120
HP Multi-Purpose Paper
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
Enhanced I/O Cards
Ethernet RJ-45 only
Ethernet RJ-45 and BNC,
Local Talk
Token Ring RJ-45 and DB-9
10/100Base-TX networks
Table 8-1 on page 8-4
RB1-2190-000CN
Clip, Pickup Spring
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
RB1-8107-000CN
Foot
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RB1-8668-000CN
Belt, Feed Guide
Table 8-17 on page 8-31
RB1-8671-000CN
Support, Top Cover, Left
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8674-000CN
Shaft, Belt Drive
Table 8-17 on page 8-31
RB1-8688-000CN
Button, Engine Test
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8689-000CN
Cable Holder
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
J3111-61003
8-68 Parts and Diagrams
Table Number and Page
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued)
Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RB1-8690-000CN
Retainer, Toner Sensing
Spring
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8693-000CN
Spring, Toner Cartridge Drum Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Ground
RB1-8694-000CN
Strap, Interlock Support
Ground
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RB1-8695-000CN
Spring, Toner Sensing
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8700-000CN
Laser Shutter Arm
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8702-000CN
Spring, Shutter
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8703-000CN
Screw, M4x116, Long, Module Table 8-2 on page 8-6
RB1-8704-000CN
Guide, Bottom Cable
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RB1-8706-000CN
Fan Cover
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8708-000CN
Plate, Gear Plate Ground
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB1-8710-000CN
Plate Cover
Table 8-6 on page 8-13
RB1-8747-000CN
Plate, Registration Ground
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
RB1-8756-000CN
Rod, Toner Drive
Table 8-12 on page 8-25
RB1-8757-000CN
Guide, Cable, Gear Assembly Table 8-12 on page 8-25
Plate
RB1-8787-000CN
Arm, Tray 1 Paper Sensing
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
RB1-8788-000CN
Cover, Tray 1 Sensor Arm
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
RB1-8794-000CN
Roller, Fuser Pressure
Table 8-20 on page 8-35
RB1-8805-000CN
Panel, Fuser Cover
Table 8-19 on page 8-34
RB1-8819-000CN
Screw, M4, Captive, Fuser
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
RB1-8827-000CN
Leaf Spring
RB1-8841-000CN
Panel, Toner Cartridge Access Table 8-6 on page 8-13
RB1-8843-000CN
Tray, Rear
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RB1-8844-000CN
Tray, Rear Extension
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RB1-8846-000CN
Latch, Rear Tray
Table 8-6 on page 8-13
RB1-8847-000CN
Spring, Rear Tray Latch
Table 8-6 on page 8-13
RB1-8848-000CN
Clip, Left Side Panel
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RB1-8849-000CN
Power Switch Button
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RB1-8851-000CN
Power Switch Activator
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-69
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued)
Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RB1-8858-000CN
Panel, Formatter Cover
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RB1-8860-000CN
Clip, Right Side Panel
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RB1-8862-000CN
Guide, Formatter/cp Cable
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RB1-8865-000CN
Roller, Pickup
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
RB1-8873-000CN
Support, Paper Guide
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RB1-8877-000CN
Coupler, Pickup
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
RB1-8879-000CN
Arm, Tray Sensing
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
RB1-8886-000CN
Cover, Feeder PCA, 500-sheet Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Tray
RB1-8887-000CN
Levers, Tray Sensing
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RB1-8890-000CN
Guide, Paper
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RB1-8907-000CN
Cover, Feeder PCA, 250-sheet Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Tray
RB1-8910-000CN
Arm, Tray Sensing
Table 8-26 on page 8-46
RB1-8913-000CN
Support, Paper Guide Lower
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RB1-8914-000CN
Guide, Paper, Lower
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RB1-8915-000CN
Frame, Right
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RB1-8922-000CN
Roller, Transport Pressure
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RB1-8923-000CN
Roller, Transport
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RB1-8924-000CN
Guide, Lower Tray
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RB1-8926-000CN
Mount, Transport Pressure
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RB1-8927-000CN
Spring, Leaf
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RB1-8928-000CN
Tray Identifier Plunger
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RB1-8945-000CN
Coupler, Separation Roller
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
RB1-8946-000CN
Bushing, Separation Roller
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
RB1-8947-000CN
Panel, Roller Access
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
RB1-8948-000CN
Gear, Separation Roller Drive Table 8-23 on page 8-41
RB1-8974-000CN
Clutch, Separation Roller
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
RB1-9001-000CN
Panel Roller Access
Table 8-28 on page 8-49
RB1-9033-000CN
Levers, Tray Sensing Upper
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
RB1-9034-000CN
Levers, Tray Sensing Lower
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
8-70 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued)
Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RB1-9044-000CN
Cover, Top
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
RB1-9045-000CN
Panel, Rear
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
RB1-9047-000CN
Cover, Right Duplexer
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
RB1-9088-000CN
Tray, Envelope Feeder
Table 8-31 on page 8-55
RB1-9095-000CN
Mount, Envelope Weight
Table 8-31 on page 8-55
RB1-9371-000CN
Plate
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
RB1-9374-000CN
Stopper
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
RB2-2386-000CN
Cover Envelope Feeder Drive Table 8-13 on page 8-27
RB2-2387-000CN
Arm, Tray 1 Tray Retaining
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
RB2-2400-000CN
Panel, Left Duplex Access
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB2-2401-000CN
Panel, Right Duplex Access
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB2-2405-000CN
Plate, Control Panel Ground
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RB2-2408-000CN
Arm, Output Kicker, Right
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
RB2-2409-000CN
Arm, Output Kicker, Left
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
RF5-1867-000CN
Pre-transfer Ground Plate
Assembly
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
RF5-1876-000CN
Cover, Left With Connector
Table 8-32 on page 8-57
RF5-2484-000CN
Pickup Roller Assembly
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
RF5-2489-000CN
Separation Roller Mounting
Assembly
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
RF5-2490-000CN
Feed Roller
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
RF5-2495-000CN
Shaft, Belt Idler Assembly
Table 8-17 on page 8-31
RF5-2496-000CN
Plate, Gear
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
RF5-2505-000CN
Mounting Assembly Separation Table 8-28 on page 8-49
Roller, 250-sheet Tray
RF5-2511-000CN
Weight, Envelope
Table 8-31 on page 8-55
RF5-2670-000CN
Paper Stop, 500-sheet Tray
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
RG5-2641-000CN/
C4118-69005
Laser Scanner Assembly
Table 8-4 on page 8-9
RG5-2642-000CN
Registration/Feed Sensor
Assembly
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-2643-000CN
Paper Feed Guide Assembly
Figure 8-14 on page 8-31
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-71
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued)
Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RG5-2645-000CN
Support, Top Cover, Right
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RG5-2648-000CN
Delivery Assembly
Table 8-7 on page 8-15 and
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
RG5-2650-000CN
Delivery Sensor Arm
Assembly
Table 8-18 on page 8-33
RG5-2651-000CN
Paper Feed Assembly
Table 8-12 on page 8-25
RG5-2652-070CN
Registration Assembly
Table 8-16 on page 8-30
RG5-2653-000CN
Printer Drive Assembly
Table 8-12 on page 8-25
RG5-2655-000CN
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
Figure 8-10 on page 8-26
RG5-2656-100CN
Tray 1 Assembly
Table 8-14 on page 8-28
RG5-2661-000CN
RG5-2662-000CN
Fuser (110V)
Fuser (220V)
Table 8-19 on page 8-34
RG5-2663-000CN
Top Cover Assembly
Table 8-6 on page 8-13
RG5-2664-000CN
Cover Assembly, Right Front
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RG5-2665-000CN
Cover Assembly, Left
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RG5-2666-000CN
Control Panel
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-2667-000CN
Tray 1 Door Assembly
Table 8-5 on page 8-11
RG5-2668-000CN
Cover Feeder Right Assembly Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RG5-2669-000CN
Cover, Feeder, Left
RG5-2672-000CN
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly Table 8-22 on page 8-39
(500-sheet)
RG5-2673-000CN
Feeder Controller PCA
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RG5-2677-000CN
Cover Assembly, Feeder,
Upper Right
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RG5-2678-000CN
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left
Upper
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RG5-2679-000CN
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Right Table 8-25 on page 8-45
Lower
RG5-2680-000CN
Cover Assembly, Feeder, Left
Lower
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
RG5-2683-000CN
Upper Paper Pickup Drive
Assembly (250-sheet)
Table 8-26 on page 8-46
RG5-2684-000CN
Lower Paper Pickup Drive
Assembly (250-sheet)
Table 8-27 on page 8-47
8-72 Parts and Diagrams
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued)
Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RG5-2685-000CN
Feeder, Control PCA
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
RG5-2688-000CN
Left Frame Assembly
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RG5-2690-000CN
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly, Table 8-29 on page 8-51
Optional 500-sheet Tray
RG5-3693-000CN (110V)
RG5-3694-000CN (220V)
Engine Controller Board
Table 8-10 on page 8-23
RG5-3696-000CN
AC, Power Receptacle
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RG5-3700-000CN
Cable, Tray 1 Sensor
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RG5-3703-000CN
Cable, Paper Feed Tray 1
Pickup Solenoid
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RG5-3704-000CN
Cable, Envelope Feeder
Connect
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RG5-3705-000CN
Cable, Top Cover Switch
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RG5-3706-000CN
Cable, Feed/Registration
Sensors
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-3708-000CN
Cable, Formatter/Control
Panel
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RG5-3709-000CN
Cable, Main Motor
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RG5-3710-000CN
Cable, Feeder Module
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-3711-000CN
Cable, Sensor
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RG5-3712-000CN
Connector, Lower Tray (With
Cable)
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RG5-3718-000CN
Tray 1 Pickup Roller Assembly Table 8-13 on page 8-27
RG5-3721-000CN
Delivery Drive Assembly
Table 8-11 on page 8-24
RG5-3821-000CN
Lower Tray Logic PCA
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RG5-3822-000CN
Paper Feeder Cable
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RG5-3876-000CN
Cable, Laser Scanner &
Output Bin Sensor
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
RG5-4269-000CN
Fuser Film Assembly (110V)
Table 8-20 on page 8-35
RG5-4283-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
RG5-4291-000CN
Fuser Film Assembly (220V)
Table 8-20 on page 8-35
RH7-1331-000CN
Main Motor Assembly
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
RH7-1335-000CN
Fan, Main Cooling
Table 8-8 on page 8-17
Illustrations and Parts Lists 8-73
Table 8-34. Numerical Parts List (continued)
Part Number
Description
Table Number and Page
RH7-5172-000CN
Solenoid, Tray 1 Drive
Table 8-13 on page 8-27
RS5-0911-000CN
Gear, Coupler
Table 8-9 on page 8-21
RS5-0946-000CN
Gear, Transport Roller
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RS5-1179-000CN
Bearing, Transport Roller
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RS5-1309-000CN
Bearing, Transport Roller
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RS5-2622-000CN
Spring, Separation Roller
Tension
Table 8-23 on page 8-41
RS5-2632-000CN
Spring, Pickup
Table 8-22 on page 8-39
RS5-2652-000CN
Spring, Tray Lock
Table 8-21 on page 8-37
RS5-2653-000CN
Spring, Transport Roller
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
RS5-2967-000CN
Spring, Compression
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
RS5-2981-000CN
Spring
Table 8-30 on page 8-53
VS1-6174-000CN
Connector
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
VS1-6176-000CN
Connector (250- and
500-sheet Feeder)
Table 8-21 on page 8-37 and
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
WC4-5139-000CN
Switch, Top Cover Access
Table 8-7 on page 8-15
WG8-5362-000CN
Sensor, Optical
Table 8-11 on page 8-24
XA9-0267-000CN
Screw, M3x6, washer head
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0434-000CN
Screw, M3x4, washer head
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0606-000CN
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping
(silver)
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0773-000CN
Screw, M4x12, self-tapping
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0870-000CN
Screw, M4x10, self-tapping
(black)
Table 8-2 on page 8-6
XA9-0917-000CN
Screw, M3x16, Feed Modules Table 8-21 on page 8-37,
Table 8-24 on page 8-43, and
Table 8-25 on page 8-45
XD2-1100-502CN
Ring, E
Table 8-29 on page 8-51
XD9-0135-000CN
E-Clip
Table 8-24 on page 8-43
8-74 Parts and Diagrams
Index
Numerics
250-sheet tray, paper specifications 1-13
500-sheet tray, paper specifications 1-12
A
AC/DC power distribution 5-2
accessories 8-4
assemblies
Delivery 8-32
Delivery Drive 6-41, 8-24
Engine Controller Board 8-22
Fan 6-24
Formatter Cage 6-20
Fuser 6-18, 8-34
Gear Train 6-40
Laser Scanner 6-23
locations of 8-8
Main Motor 6-25
Output 6-21
Paper Feed 6-36, 8-29
Paper Feed Guide 8-31
Paper Pickup Drive 8-38
Paper Pickup Drive, lower 8-47
Paper Pickup Drive, upper 8-46
Printer Drive 8-25
Registration 6-34, 8-30
removing and replacing 6-18
Top Cover 8-12
Tray 1 8-28
Tray 1 Pickup 6-29, 8-26
C
cables, replacement 8-6
capacity, paper
250-sheet tray 1-13
500-sheet tray 1-12
card stock 1-23
CFC usage 1-28
cleaning
accessories 4-2
paper path 4-4
printer 4-2
spilled toner 4-4
using cleaning page 4-4
clutches 5-12, 5-35, 7-105
component locations 7-84
Configuration menu 3-20
Configuration Page 7-51
connectors 7-97
Control Panel
removing and replacing 6-8
control panel 3-2, 5-21
changing settings 3-5
defaults 3-4
keys 3-2, 3-3
layout 3-2
lights 3-2
printing Menu Map 3-5
settings 3-4
control panel menus
private/stored jobs menu 3-7
quick copy jobs menu 3-6
Control Panel Overlay, removing and replacing 6-7
covers, removing and replacing 6-6
CPU 5-18
Create Cleaning Page message 4-4
D
defect ruler 7-73
Delivery Assembly 8-32
Delivery Drive Assembly 8-24
removing and replacing 6-41
diagrams
how to use 8-2
paper size detection switches 7-94
reference 7-84
dimensions, paper
250-sheet tray 1-13
500-sheet tray 1-12, 1-14
DIMM slots 5-19
documentation 2-4
drives
laser 5-12
scanner 5-12
drum
cleaning 5-26
conditioning 5-27
Duplexer 5-46
E
EconoMode 5-16
EIO menu 3-29
electrical specifications 1-9
Energy Star 1-28
Engine Controller Board 7-93
inputs and outputs 5-8
Index-1
Engine Controller Board Assembly 8-22
removing and replacing 6-44
engine controller subsystem 5-6
Engine Module 6-42
engine test 7-11
Envelope Feeder 5-44
envelopes 1-20
environmental product stewardship 1-28
error messages 7-17
Event Log 7-13
F
Fan, removing and replacing 6-24
500-sheet tray, paper specifications 1-12
Formatter Cage Assembly, removing and replacing
6-20
Formatter Pan, removing and replacing 6-39
Formatter system 5-15
Front Right Side Cover, removing and replacing
6-13
Fuser Assembly 8-34
Fuser Mode setting 5-32
Fuser, removing and replacing 6-18
fusing temperature, variable 5-32
G
Gear Train, removing and replacing 6-40
H
heavy paper 1-23
I
I/O menu 3-26
image
developing 5-29
transferring 5-30
writing 5-28
Image Formation System 5-22
photosensitive drum 5-25
Information menu 3-8
input/output 5-17
L
labels 1-19
laser drive 5-12
Laser Scanner, removing and replacing 6-23
Left Side Cover, removing and replacing 6-12
Lower Paper Feed Module Plate (HP LaserJet 4000
T/4000 TN), removing and replacing 6-53
Index-2
M
media specifications
See paper specifications
Main Motor
locating 7-96
removing and replacing 6-25
maintenance 4-1
maintenance count 3-33
memory
printer 5-18
Random Access Memory (RAM) 5-19
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt) 5-19
model numbers 1-8
motors 5-13, 7-96
N
NVRAM, clearing 3-38
O
Optional 500-sheet Tray 5-41
ordering information 2-3
phone numbers 2-6
Output Assembly, removing and replacing 6-21
overcurrent overvoltage protection 5-3
ozone production 1-28
P
page count 3-33
page protect 5-20
paper
heavy 1-23
motion control 5-12
size detection switches 7-94
specifications 1-12
Paper Feed Assembly 8-29
removing and replacing 6-36
Paper Feed Guide Assembly 8-31
Paper Feed Module 6-42
Paper Feed Module Gear Train Assembly,
removing and replacing 6-51
Paper Feed Module Plate, removing and replacing
6-50
Paper Feed Module Side Rails, removing and
replacing 6-52
Paper Feed Rollers, removing and replacing 6-48
Paper Feed System 5-33
Paper Handling menu 3-9
paper jam 5-48
paper path 7-90
cleaning 4-4
troubleshooting 7-45
Paper Pickup Drive Assembly 8-38
Paper Pickup Drive assembly
lower 8-47
upper 8-46
paper specifications
card stock 1-23
envelopes 1-20
guidelines for using paper 1-16
heavy paper 1-23
labels 1-19
supported types 1-15
transparencies 1-19
weight equivalence 1-18
parts 2-3
parts lists
alphabetical 8-58
how to use 8-2
numerical 8-67
PCA Controller, removing and replacing 6-56
PCA Cover, removing and replacing
HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000 TN 6-54
HP LaserJet 4000/4000 N 6-55
PCAs 7-100
Phillips screwdriver 6-3
photosensitive drum 5-24
Posidrive screwdriver 6-3
power distribution, high voltage 5-4
power on troubleshooting 7-7
power supply system
AC/DC distribution 5-2
PowerSave mode 1-28
preventative maintenance 4-5
Print Quality menu 3-12
printer
display 7-12
features 1-2
messages 7-17
model numbers 1-8
serial numbers 1-8
testing 3-37
weight 1-10
Printer Drive Assembly 8-25
printing
Configuration Page 7-51
engine test 3-37, 7-11
Event Log 7-13
images 7-74
interface 7-77
operating checks 7-6
Optional 500-sheet Tray 5-41
Tray 1 5-36
Tray 2 5-38
troubleshooting 7-6
Printing menu 3-15
private/stored jobs menu 3-7
Product Stewardship, power consumption 1-28
Q
quick copy jobs menu 3-6
R
Random Access Memory (RAM) 5-19
Rear Cover/Rear Output Bin, removing and
replacing 6-14
Rear Right Side Cover, removing and replacing 6-6
recycling toner cartridges 2-9
Registration Assembly 8-30
removing and replacing 6-34
regulatory information 1-24– 1-26
removal/replacement strategy 6-2
repetitive defect ruler 7-73
reset
maintenance count 3-33
page count 3-33
serial number 3-33
Resets menu 3-31
resetting printer 3-38
clearing NVRAM 3-38
cold reset 3-38
Right Side Toner Cartridge Guide, removing and
replacing 6-33
S
safety statements 1-24– 1-26
scanner drive 5-12
screwdrivers 6-3
screws 6-3, 8-6
sensors 5-12, 5-35, 7-102
Separation Rollers, removing and replacing 6-49
sequence of operation 5-49
serial number 3-33
locating 1-8
service mode 3-32
maintenance count 3-33
page count 3-33
serial number 3-33
site requirements 1-9
electrical specifications 1-9
printer weight 1-10
space requirements 1-10
solenoids 5-12, 7-105
space requirements 1-10
specifications
electrical 1-9
paper 1-12
supplies 2-3, 8-4
cables, replacement 8-6
screws 8-6
switches 5-12, 7-108
Index-3
T
V
testing, engine 7-11
thermistor 7-102
timing diagrams 7-110
toner
cleaning spilled 4-4
consumption 1-28
toner cartridge 2-9, 5-22, 5-24
detection 5-5
recycling 2-9
refilled 2-9
Toner Cartridge Drive Arm, removing and replacing
6-9
tools 6-3
Top Cover
Assembly 8-12
removing and replacing 6-7
top margin adjustment 6-46
training media 2-4
Transfer Roller, removing and replacing 6-26
transparencies 1-19
Tray 1
Assembly 8-28
paper sensor 5-36
Pickup Assembly 8-26
printing from 5-36
removing and replacing 6-15
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly, removing and replacing
6-29
Tray 1 Pickup Roller, removing and replacing 6-27
Tray 2 5-38
troubleshooting
Configuration Page 7-51
display 7-12
engine test 7-11
Event Log 7-13
flowchart 7-4
image system 7-74
information pages 7-48
interface 7-77
paper path troubleshooting 7-45
power on 7-7
preliminary operating checks 7-6
printer messages 7-17
printing system 7-6
troubleshooting process 7-2
250-sheet tray, paper specifications 1-13
variable fusing temperature 5-32
Index-4
W
warranty statement 2-10
weight, paper
250-sheet tray 1-13
500-sheet tray 1-12, 1-14
6
5
J715
Duplex pickup Duplexing unit
paper sensor solenoid
PS701
SL701
Duplex feed motor Reversing motor
M702
M701
4
J716
J717
PS703
Reversed paper
sensor
J713
J702
J701
J706
J703
J133
PS702
Rear Output Bin
sensor
PS 106
Fuser
paper delivery
sensor 2
J714
J705
3
J704
J134
J137
FM701 J719
Laser/scanner unit
D
Scanning
motor
FG
J135
J132
J707
J718
J711
Duplexing unit
exhaust fan
J712
BD PCA
Laser driver
J551
J401
J501
J131
Duplexing unit
J114
J102
J154
J58
J103
J31
J71
TB11
TB12
FG
LINE
INPUT
FG
PS501
HOT
TB10
NEUTRAL
J53
J61M
TR
J55F
TB64 TB61 TB62 TB63
Test print switch
Fuser paper delivery sensor 1
J1
J60
J75
Control Panel
J113
PS104
Top Output Bin paper full sensor
J56
J72
J52
J50
J125
J126
SL102
J51
Tray 1
pickup solenoid
J301
J127
J128 CL101
Feed roller clutch
J200
J301
C
SW501
Printer controller PCA
NEUTRAL
HOT
J101
Toner cartridge
FU901
TB13
Tray 1
paper sensor
PS105
1
Fuser
TH901
Duplexing unit driver PCA
Cooling fan
FM101
2
J202
J201
J57
J57
B
J73
Envelope feeder
J106
M101
Main motor
J603
J901
J601
J104
J811
J801
Paper feeder driver PCA
Paper size detection PCA
SW600
SW601
SW602
paper size switches
J602
J803
J604
J105
J802
J812
SW801
SW802
SW803
Paper feeder
paper size
switches
J813
J110
PS101
Tray paper
sensor
SL101
Tray pickup
solenoid
Wiring Diagram (HP LaserJet 4000/4000N)
Envelope feeder
driver PCA
J911
Video controller
Paper feeder
PS801
SL801
Paper feeder Paper feeder
paper sensor pickup solenoid
PS901
Envelope sensor
TB101
J111
J112
J129F
J107
TB102
PS102
Pre-feed
sensor
PS103
Top of
page
sensor
SW101
Door
open
detection
switch
J912
TB902
J902
TB901
J903
J913
SL 901
Envelope
pickup solenoid
PS902
Envelope mulitplefeed sensor
A
6
5
J715
Duplex pickup Duplexing unit
paper sensor solenoid
PS701
SL701
Duplex feed motor Reversing motor
M702
M701
4
J716
J717
PS703
Reversed paper
sensor
J713
J702
J701
J706
J703
J133
PS702
Rear Output Bin
sensor
PS 106
Fuser
paper delivery
sensor 2
J714
J705
3
J704
J134
J137
FM701 J719
J718
Laser/scanner unit
D
Scanning
motor
FG
J135
J132
J707
J711
Duplexing unit
exhaust fan
J712
BD PCA
Laser driver
J551
J401
J501
J131
Duplexing unit
J114
J102
J154
J58
J103
J31
J71
TB11
TB12
FG
LINE
INPUT
FG
PS501
HOT
TB10
NEUTRAL
J53
J61M
TR
J55F
TB64 TB61 TB62 TB63
Test print switch
Fuser paper delivery sensor 1
J1
J60
J75
Control Panel
J113
PS104
Top Output Bin paper full sensor
J56
J72
J52
J50
J125
J126
SL102
J51
Tray 1
pickup solenoid
J301
J127
J128 CL101
Feed roller clutch
J200
J301
C
SW501
Printer controller PCA
NEUTRAL
HOT
J101
Toner cartridge
FU901
TB13
Tray 1
paper sensor
PS105
1
Fuser
TH901
Duplexing unit driver PCA
Cooling fan
FM101
2
J202
J201
J57
J57
B
J73
Envelope feeder
J106
M101
Main motor
J603
J901
J601
SW603
SW600
SW604
SW601
SW602
SW605
Lower tray
Upper tray
paper size
paper size
switches J602
switches
J110
J104
J811
J801
Paper feeder driver PCA
Paper size detection PCA
J604
J606
J605
J803
J105
Wiring Diagram (HP LaserJet 4000 T/4000TN)
J802
J812
SW801
SW802
SW803
Paper feeder
paper size
switches
J813
J115
PS101
SL103
SL101
PS107
Upper tray
Lower tray
Upper tray
Lower tray
paper sensor pickup solenoid pickup solenoid paper sensor
Envelope feeder
driver PCA
J911
Video controller
Paper feeder
PS801
SL801
Paper feeder Paper feeder
paper sensor pickup solenoid
PS901
Envelope sensor
TB101
J111
J112
J129F
J107
TB102
PS102
Pre-feed
sensor
PS103
Top of
page
sensor
SW101
Door
open
detection
switch
J912
TB902
J902
TB901
J903
J913
SL 901
Envelope
pickup solenoid
PS902
Envelope mulitplefeed sensor
A
Manual Part No.
C4251-91003
Printed on at least
50% Total Recycled Fiber with
at least 10% Post-Consumer Paper
*C4251-91003*
*C4251-91003*
C4251-91003
HP LaserJet 4000 and 4050 Series Printers Service Manual
Copyright© 1999
Hewlett-Packard Co.
Printed in USA
HP LaserJet 4000 and
4050 Series Printers
Service Manual
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 T,
4050 N, and 4050 TN Printers
User’s Guide
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Company 1999
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptation, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the
copyright laws.
First Edition, February 1999
Warranty
The information contained in
this document is subject to
change without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with
respect to this information.
HEWLETT-PACKARD
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or
other damage alleged in
connection with the furnishing
or use of this information.
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 USA
Trademark Credits
Adobe and PostScript are
trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated which may be
registered in certain
jurisdictions.
Arial and Times New Roman
are U.S. registered trademarks
of the Monotype Corporation.
Microsoft, MS Windows,
Windows, and Windows NT
are U.S. registered trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation.
TrueType is a U.S. trademark of
Apple Computer, Inc.
ENERGY STAR is a U.S.
registered service mark of the
U.S. EPA.
How to Use This Online User’s Guide
This user’s guide is provided in an Adobe™ Acrobat portable
document format (PDF file). This section will help familiarize you
with using PDF documents.
Navigational Features in This Guide
Click the Table of Contents icon to go to the table of
contents for the online user’s guide. The entries are
linked to their related locations in the user’s guide.
Click the Introduction icon to return to this section for
tips on using this online user’s guide.
Click the Index icon to go to the index for the online
user’s guide. The index entries are linked to their related
topics.
Click the Up Arrow icon to go to the previous page.
Click the Down Arrow icon to go to the next page.
Features of Acrobat Reader
Finding Information in PDF Documents
To find specific information in a PDF document, click Contents or
Index in the upper-left corner of the Acrobat Reader window, and
then click the topic you want.
Viewing PDF Documents
For complete instructions on how to view PDF documents, see the
online help included with Acrobat Reader.
EN
iii
Magnifying the Page View
You can use the zoom-in tool, the magnification box in the status
bar, or the toolbar buttons to change the screen magnification.
When you zoom in on a document, you can use the hand tool to
move the page around.
Acrobat Reader also offers magnification level choices that control
how the page fits on-screen:
Fit Page scales the page to fit within the main window.
Fit Width scales the page to fit the width of the main window.
Fit Visible fills the window with the page’s content area only.
To increase magnification: Select the zoom-in tool and click
on the document page to double the current magnification.
To decrease magnification: Select the zoom-in tool while
holding down Ctrl (Windows and UNIX) or Option (Macintosh),
and click the center of the area you want to reduce.
Paging Through a Document
The following options are available for paging through a document.
To go to the next page: Click the Next Page button in the toolbar,
or press the Right Arrow or Down Arrow.
To return to the previous page: Click the Previous Page button
in the toolbar, or press the Left Arrow or Up Arrow.
To go to the first page: Click the First Page button in the toolbar.
To go to the last page: Click the Last Page button in the toolbar.
To jump to a specific numbered page: Click the page number
box in the status bar at the bottom of the main window, type the
page number, and click OK.
iv
EN
Browsing with Thumbnails
A thumbnail is a miniature view of each document page. You can
display thumbnails in the overview area. Use a thumbnail to jump
quickly to a page and to adjust the view of the current page.
Click on a thumbnail to move to the page it represents.
Finding Words
Use the Find command to find part of a word, a complete word, or
multiple words in the active document.
Click on the Find button, or choose Find from the Tools menu.
Printing the document
To print selected pages: From the File menu, choose Print.
Choose Pages. In the From and To boxes type the range of pages
you wish to print. Then click OK.
To print the whole document: From the File menu, choose Print.
Choose All n pages (n represents the total number of pages in the
document), then click OK.
Note
EN
Go to http://www.adobe.com/ for the lastest versions and additional
languages of Adobe™ Acrobat Reader.
v
Where to Look for More Information . . .
Several references are available for use with this printer. For additional
copies of the guides below, contact HP Direct at (800) 538-8787 (U.S.)
or contact your HP-authorized dealer. Additional information is
available at http://www.hp.com.
Setting Up the Printer
Getting Started Guide
Step-by-step instructions for
installing and setting up
the printer.
HP JetDirect Print Server
Software Installation Guide*
Step-by-step instructions for configuring
the HP JetDirect print server.
*Accompanies printers that include an HP JetDirect print server (network
card).
vi
EN
Using the Printer
Online User’s Guide
Detailed information on using and
troubleshooting the printer.
Quick Reference Guide
Tips and quick information in a booklet
to keep by the printer. See your network
administrator for the copy that came
with the printer.
Online Help
Information on printer options that are
available from within printer drivers. To
view a help file, access the online help
through the printer driver.
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver
User Guide
Detailed information on using and
troubleshooting the HP Fast InfraRed
Receiver.
EN
vii
HP Customer Care Service and Support
Online Services
For 24-hour access to information over your modem, we suggest
these services:
World Wide Web
Printer drivers, updated HP printer software, plus product and support information
may be obtained from the following URLs:
in the U.S.
http://www.hp.com/go/support
Printer drivers may be obtained from the following sites:
in China
ftp://www.hp.com.cn/go/support
in Japan
ftp://www.jpn.hp.com/go/support
in Korea
http://www.hp.co.kr/go/support
in Taiwan
http://www.hp.com.tw/go/support
or the local driver website http://www.dds.com.tw
Obtaining Software Utilities and
Electronic Information for U.S.:
Monday - Friday: 6:00 am - 10:00 pm MST
Saturday: 9:00 am - 4:00 pm MST
Phone: (805) 257-5565
Fax: (805) 257-6995
HP website: http://www.hp.com/
Mail:
Hewlett-Packard Co.
P.O. Box 907
Santa Clarita, CA 91380-9007
U.S.A.
For Canada:
Phone: (905) 206-4663
viii
EN
For Europe:
HP Distribution Europe
The languages supported are also listed above beside the
telephone numbers.
Hours of operation are 7:30 am GMT (8:30 am CET) to 17:00 GMT
(18:00 CET).
English speaking line
French speaking line
German speaking line
Italian speaking line
Spanish speaking line
Portuguese speaking line
Within UK
01429 865511
Internationally
+44 1429 865511
+44 1429 863343
+44 1429 863353
+44 1429 520013
+44 1429 520012
+44 1429 890466
For Asia Pacific Region:
Australia
P.R. China ( Beijing )
Hong Kong
India
Indonesia
Japan
Korea
Malaysia
New Zealand
Philippines
Singapore
Taiwan
Thailand
+61 3 9272 8000
+86 10 65053888
+65 740-4477
+91 (011) 682 6035
+65 740-4477
+81 3 53461891
+82 2 3270 0805
+65 740-4477
0800-445-543 (toll free) or (09) 356 6640
+65 740-4477
+65 740-4477
+886 (02) 717 0055
+66 (02) 661-3900 ext 3224
For Latin America:
Argentina
8:30 to19:30 hrs.
Buenos Aires:
787-8080
Brazil
8:00 to19:00 hrs.
São Paulo:
011-829-6612
Chile
8:30 to18:30 hrs.
Chile:
800-360999
Colombia
* Local dealers provide technical assistance
EN
ix
Mexico “HP Contigo”
8:00 to18:00 hrs.
Mexico:
01-800-4726684
Mexico:
01 800-4720684
Venezuela
8:00 to18:00 hrs.
800-47-888
Caracas:
207-8488
* Technical Assistance for Other Latin American countries are provided by local
dealers.
HP Direct Ordering for Accessories or Supplies:
Call (800) 538-8787 (U.S.) or (800) 387-3154 (Canada).
HP Direct Ordering for Genuine HP Parts:
In the U.S., call (800) 227-8164
HP Service Parts Information Compact Disc:
This powerful, CD-ROM-based parts information tool is designed
to give users fast, easy access to parts information such as pricing
and recommended stocking lists for a wide range of HP products.
To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U.S. or Canada, call
(800) 336-5987. In Asia Pacific, call (65) 740-4484. Parts
identification and pricing information worldwide can also be
accessed via the World Wide Web at www.hp.com/go/partsinfo.
HP Support Assistant Compact Disc:
This support tool offers a comprehensive online information system
designed to provide technical and product information on HP
products. To subscribe to this quarterly service in the U.S. or
Canada, call (800) 457-1762. In Hong Kong, Indonesia, Malaysia,
or Singapore, call Mentor Media at (65) 740-4477.
HP Service Information:
To locate authorized HP resellers, call (800) 243-9816 (U.S.) or
(800) 387-3867 (Canada).
HP Service Agreements:
Call (800) 835-4747 (U.S.) or (800) 268-1221 (Canada).
Extended Service (800) 446-0522
x
EN
HP FIRST
HP FIRST fax-on-demand service will deliver detailed
troubleshooting information on common software and
troubleshooting tips for your HP product. Call from any touch tone
phone and request up to three documents per call. These
documents will be sent to the fax of your choice. Many of these
numbers are local numbers and will not work internationally.
North and Latin America
Outside the U.S. and Canada (404) 329-2009
In the U.S. and Canada (800) 333-1917
Asia/Pacific
Australia
China
Hong Kong
India
Indonesia
Japan
Korea
Malaysia
New Zealand
Philippines
Singapore
Thailand
Vietnam
(03) 9272 2627
(10) 6505 5280
2506 2422
(11) 682 6031
(21) 352 2044
(03) 3335 8622
(02) 769 0543
(03) 298 2478
(09) 356 6642
(02) 848 9880
275 7251
(02) 661 3511
(08) 823 4161
Europe, Middle East and Africa
Austria
Belgium
Dutch
French
Denmark
European International
Finland
France
Germany
Hungary
Italy
Netherlands
Norway
Portugal
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
French
German
United Kingdom
EN
0660-8218
0800 1 1906
0800 1 7043
800-10453
+31 20 681 5792
9800-13134
0800-905900
0130-810061
36 1 461-8222
1678-59020
0800-0222420
800-11319
05 05 313342
900-993123
020-795743
0800-551526
0800-551527
0800-960271
xi
Customer Support Options Worldwide
The service and support chapter of this user’s guide contains
worldwide sales and service addresses and phone numbers for
countries not listed here.
HP Customer Care and Product Repair
Assistance for the U.S. and Canada
Refer to the service and support chapter of this user’s guide for
additional product repair information.
Call (208) 323-2551 Monday through Friday from 6 am to 6 pm
(Mountain Time) free of charge during the warranty period.
However, your standard long-distance phone charges still apply.
Have your system nearby and your serial number ready when
calling.
If you know your printer needs repair, call (800) 243-9816 to locate
your nearest authorized HP service provider.
Post-warranty telephone assistance is available to answer your
product questions. Call (900) 555-1500 ($2.50* per minute, U.S.
only) or call (800) 999-1148 ($25* per call, Visa or MasterCard, U.S.
and Canada) Monday through Friday from 7am to 6 pm (Mountain
Time). Charges begin only when you connect with a support
technician. *Prices subject to change.
xii
EN
European HP Customer Care Center
Language and In-country Options Available
Open Monday through Friday 8:30 - 18:00 Central European Time
(CET)
HP provides a free telephone support service during the warranty
period. By calling a telephone number listed below, you will be
connected to a responsive team waiting to help you. If you require
support after your warranty has expired, you can receive support
for a fee through the same telephone number. The fee is charged
on a per-incident basis. When calling HP, have the following
information ready: product name and serial number, date of
purchase, and description of the problem.
English
Dutch
French
German
Norwegian
Danish
Finnish
Swedish
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese
EN
Ireland: (353) (1) 662-5525
U.K.: (44) (171) 512-5202
International: (44) (171) 512-5202
Belgium: (32) (2) 626-8806
Netherlands: (31) (20) 606-8751
France: (33) (01) 43-62-3434
Belgium: (32) (2) 626-8807
Switzerland: (41) (84) 880-1111
Germany: (49) (180) 525-8143
Austria: (43) (1) 0660-6386
Norway: (47) 2211-6299
Denmark: (45) 3929-4099
Finland: (358) (9) 0203-47288
Sweden: (46) (8) 619-2170
Italy: (39) (2) 0-264-10350
Spain: (34) (90) 232-1123
Portugal: (351) (1) 441-7199
xiii
In-country Support Numbers
If you require support after your warranty has expired, additional
product repair services, or if your country is not listed below, see
“Worldwide Sales and Service Offices” on page 145.
Argentina
Australia
Brazil
Canada
China
Chile
Czech Republic
Greece
Hong Kong
Hungary
India
Indonesia
Korea (Seoul)
Korea outside Seoul
Japan
Malaysia
Mexico (Mexico City)
Mexico (outside Mexico City)
New Zealand
Philippines
Poland
Portugal
Russia
Singapore
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
Turkey
Vietnam
xiv
787-8080
(61) (0) 3 8877 8000
011-829-6612
(208) 323-2551
(86) (0) 10 6564 5959
800-360999
(420) (2) 613 07310
(30) (1) 689-6411
800 96 7729
(36) (1) 461-8110
(91) (0) 11 682 6035
62 (0) 21 350 3408
(82) (0) 2 3270 0700
080 999 0700
(81) (3) 3335-8333
(60) (0) 3 295 2566
01 800 4726684
01 800 4720684
01 800-90529
(64) (0) 9 356 6640
(63) (0) 2 867 3551
(48) (22) 608-7700
(351) (1) 301-7330
(7) (95) 923-5001
+65 272 5300
(41) (1) 0800-55-5353
886 (0) 2 717 0055
+66 (0) 2 661 4000
(90) (1) 224-5925
+848 823 4530
EN
Contents
How to Use This Online User’s Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Navigational Features in This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Features of Acrobat Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii
Where to Look for More Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vi
Setting Up the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .vi
Using the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vii
HP Customer Care Service and Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
Online Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . viii
HP FIRST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .xi
Customer Support Options Worldwide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
HP Customer Care and Product Repair Assistance
for the U.S. and Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
European HP Customer Care Center Language and
In-country Options Available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiii
In-country Support Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv
1 Printer Basics
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Printer Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Printer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Printer Parts and Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Accessories and Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Suggested Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Control Panel Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Control Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Control Panel Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Using the Printer Online Help System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Control Panel Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Printer Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Printer Drivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Macintosh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Software for Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Software for Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Software for Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
EN
Contents
xv
2 Printing Tasks
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Selecting the Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printing to the Top Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Printing to the Rear Output Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Loading Tray 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Loading Tray 2 (4050/4050 N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Loading Trays 2 and 3 (4050 T/4050 TN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Loading the Optional 500-Sheet Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Printing Both Sides of Paper (Optional Duplexer) . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Guidelines for Printing Both Sides of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Printing Special Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Printing Letterhead, Prepunched, or Preprinted Paper . . . . 45
Paper Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Printing Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Printing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Printing Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Printing Cards, Custom-Size, and Heavy Paper . . . . . . . . . 56
Advanced Printing Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Using Features in the Printer Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Customizing Tray 1 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Printing by Type and Size of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Supported Types of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Job Retention Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Quick Copying a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Printing Additional Copies of a Quick Copy Job . . . . . . . . . 67
Deleting a Stored Quick Copy Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Proofing and Holding a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Printing the Remaining Copies of a Held Job . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Deleting a Held Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Printing a Private Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Specifying a Private Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Releasing a Private Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Deleting a Private Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Storing a Print Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Printing a Stored Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Deleting a Stored Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Printing with the Optional HP Fast InfraRed Receiver . . . . . . . . 75
Setting Up to Print with Windows 9x . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Printing a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Interrupting and Resuming Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
xvi
Contents
EN
3 Printer Maintenance
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Managing the Toner Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
HP Policy on Non-HP Toner Cartridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Toner Cartridge Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Toner Cartridge Life Expectancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Checking the Toner Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Resetting the HP TonerGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Cleaning the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Performing Routine Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4 Problem Solving
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Clearing Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Clearing Jams from the Input Tray Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Clearing Jams from the Optional Envelope Feeder . . . . . . 94
Clearing Jams from the Top Cover Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Clearing Jams from the Toner Cartridge Area . . . . . . . . . . 98
Clearing Jams from the Output Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Clearing Jams from the Optional Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Solving Repeated Paper Jams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Understanding Printer Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Mopy Disk Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Correcting Output Quality Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Determining Printer Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Troubleshooting Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Troubleshooting Flowchart for Macintosh Users . . . . . . . . 124
Troubleshooting the Printer Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
PS Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Troubleshooting HP Fast InfraRed Receiver Problems . . . . . . 129
Communicating with an Optional HP JetDirect Print Server . . 131
HP JetDirect 10/100TX print server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Checking the Printer’s Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Menu Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Configuration Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
PCL or PS Font List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
5 Service and Support
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Service During and After the Warranty Period . . . . . . . . . 137
Guidelines for Repacking the Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
EN
Contents
xvii
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Limited Warranty for Toner Cartridge Life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Service Information Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
HP Software License Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
A Specifications
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Paper Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-2
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-3
Supported Types of Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-7
Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Transparencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-10
Envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-11
Card Stock and Heavy Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-13
Printer Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Physical Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-15
Environmental Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-16
Serial Cable Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-18
B Control Panel Menus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Quick Copy Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-2
Private/Stored Jobs Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-3
Information Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-4
Paper Handling Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5
Print Quality Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-8
Printing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-10
Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-14
I/O Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-19
EIO Menu (4050 N/4050 TN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21
Resets Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-23
C Printer Memory and Expansion
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
Installing Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-3
Checking Memory Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-5
Adjusting Memory Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-6
Installing EIO Cards/Mass Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-8
xviii
Contents
EN
D Printer Commands
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Understanding PCL 5e Printer Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . D-2
Combining Escape Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-3
Entering Escape Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-4
Selecting PCL 5e Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-5
Common PCL 5e Printer Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-6
E Regulatory Information
FCC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Environmental Product Stewardship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Protecting the Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Material Safety Data Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser Safety Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Canadian DOC Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VCCI Statement (Japan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Laser Statement for Finland . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E-1
E-2
E-2
E-5
E-6
E-7
E-7
E-7
E-7
E-8
Glossary
Index
EN
Contents
xix
xx
Contents
EN
1
Printer Basics
Overview
Congratulations on your purchase of an HP LaserJet 4050 series
printer. If you have not done so, see the getting started guide
provided with the printer for setup instructions.
Now that the printer is set up and ready to use, take a few moments
to get to know the printer. This chapter introduces the following:
•
•
•
•
•
EN
Features and benefits of the printer.
Important printer parts and locations.
Accessories and supplies available for the printer.
The layout and basic operation of the printer’s control panel.
Helpful printer software for increased printing flexibility.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
1
Printer Features and Benefits
Speed and Throughput
•
•
•
Instant-on fuser prints the first page in 15 seconds
Prints letter-size paper 17 pages per minute (ppm) or A4-size
paper 16 ppm
“RIP ONCE” capability with 16 MB or hard disk option
Resolution
•
•
•
•
FastRes 1200 for faster printing
ProRes 1200 for better graphics
Up to 220 levels of gray for smooth, photo-like images
HP precision toner for clear, sharp output
Paper Handling
•
•
Handles up to 600 sheets of paper (base) and expandable to
handle up to 1100 sheets of paper with accessories
Prints a wide range of sizes and weights
Language and Fonts
•
•
HP PCL 6, PCL 5e, and PostScript Level 2 emulation
110 fonts for Microsoft Windows, plus HP FontSmart
Expandable Design
•
•
•
•
2
500-sheet universal paper tray, 75-envelope power feeder, and
duplex printing accessory available
Flash storage for forms, fonts, and signatures
Memory can be expanded up to 200 MB
Two EIO slots for connecting to networks or additional devices
• HP JetSend enabled
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Printer Information
Configurations
This printer is available in four configurations, as described below.
HP LaserJet 4050
The HP LaserJet 4050 comes standard with 8 MB RAM and one
500-sheet tray.
HP LaserJet 4050 N
The HP LaserJet 4050 N comes standard with 16 MB RAM,
a HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server card for connecting to
a network, an HP Fast InfraRed (FIR Receiver), and one 500-sheet
tray.
HP LaserJet 4050 T
The HP LaserJet 4050 T comes standard with 8 MB RAM and two
250-sheet trays.
HP LaserJet 4050 TN
The HP LaserJet 4050 TN comes standard with 16 MB RAM,
a HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server card for connecting to
a network, an HP Fast InfraRed (FIR Receiver), and two 250-sheet
trays.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
3
Printer Parts and Locations
Top output bin
Top cover
Control
panel
Additional
memory can be
installed here.
Tray 1
(100-sheet)
Power switch
Tray numbers
Paper level
indicator
Tray 2
(500-sheet, closed)
Figure 1
4
Printer Parts (front view, HP LaserJet 4050/4050 N printer)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
11
10
1
9
8
2
7
3
6
Figure 2
4
Printer Parts (rear view, HP LaserJet 4050/4050 N printer)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
EN
5
Rear output bin (straight-through paper path)
Power connector
Dust cover
FIR receiver port
Parallel interface port
Network, I/O slot
10/100Base-TX (RJ-45) port
Memory (More than one DIMM can be installed.)
Serial port
Accessory interface port
Serial and model numbers (inside cover)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
5
Accessories and Supplies
You can increase the capabilities of the printer with optional
accessories and supplies.
Note
Use accessories and supplies specifically designed for the printer
to ensure optimum performance.
The printer supports two enhanced input/output (EIO) cards. One
of these is used in the HP LaserJet 4050 N and 4050 TN for the
HP JetDirect 10/100Base-TX print server card. Other accessories
and options are available. For ordering information, see page 8.
6
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Suggested Accessories
Use the following accessories to optimize the printer.
1
2
5
3
6
5
4
6
7
HP LaserJet 4050/4050 N Printers
Figure 3
Optional Accessories
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
EN
HP LaserJet 4050 T/4050 TN Printers
HP JetDirect Print Server (EIO card)
Hard Disk (EIO card)
Memory or Flash DIMM
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver
Envelope Feeder
Duplex Printing Accessory (or duplexer, for 2-sided printing)
Optional 500-Sheet Tray
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
7
Ordering Information
Use only accessories specifically designed for this printer. To order
an accessory, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages
at the front of this user’s guide.)
Printing Supplies
Paper Handling
Ordering Information
8
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
500-Sheet Paper Feeder
and Tray
Paper feeder and one 500-sheet
tray.
C4124A
Envelope Feeder
Automatically feeds up to
75 envelopes.
C4122A
Duplex Printing Accessory
(duplexer)
Allows automatic printing on both
sides of paper.
C4123A
250-Sheet Replacement
Tray
Replacement paper tray for the
HP LaserJet 4050 T/4050 TN
printers (Trays 2 and 3).
C4126A
Universal Optional
500-Sheet Replacement
Tray
Replacement paper tray is a
500-sheet tray. (Supports nine paper
sizes)
C4125A
500-Sheet Replacement
Tray
Replacement paper tray for the
HP LaserJet 4050/4050 N printers
(Tray 2). (Supports letter, A4, and
legal paper sizes)
C3122A
HP Multi-purpose Paper
HP brand paper for a variety of uses
(1 box of 10 reams, 500 sheets each,
weighing 20 lb). To order a sample,
in the U.S. call 1-800-471-4701.
HPM1120
HP LaserJet Paper
Premium HP brand paper for use
with HP LaserJet printers (1 box of
10 reams, 500 sheets each,
weighing 24 lb). To order a sample,
in the U.S. call 1-800-471-4701.
HPJ1124
Toner Cartridge
(6,000 pages)
Replacement HP precision toner
cartridge.
C4127A
Toner Cartridge
(10,000 pages)
Replacement HP precision toner
cartridge.
C4127X
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Memory, Fonts, and Mass Storage
Ordering Information (Continued)
EN
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
Dual In-line Memory
Module (DIMM)
Boosts the ability of the printer to
handle large print jobs (maximum
200 MB with HP brand DIMMs):
EDO DIMMs
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
C4135A
C4136A
C4137A
SDRAM DIMMs
4 MB
8 MB
16 MB
32 MB
64 MB
C4140A
C4141A
C4142A
C4143A
C3913A
Flash DIMM
Font DIMM
Permanent storage for fonts and
forms:
2 MB
4 MB
C4286A
C4287A
8 MB Asian MROM:
traditional Chinese
simplified Chinese
C4292A
C4293A
Hard Disk
Permanent storage for fonts and
forms. Also used for making multiple
original prints and Job Retention
features.
C2985A
Dust Cover
Dust cover, Tray 1x500
Dust cover, Tray 2x250
Dust cover, optional 500
C4232A
C4233A
C4234A
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
9
Cable and Interface Accessories
Ordering Information (Continued)
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
Parallel Cables
2 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
3 Meter IEEE-1284 cable
C2950A
C2951A
Serial Cables
9-9 pin serial cable
(male/female)
9-25 pin serial cable
(male/female)
Serial Adapter
C2933A
C2809A
Macintosh Computer
Serial Cable
For connecting to a Macintosh
computer.
92215S
Macintosh Network
Cable Kit
For PhoneNET or LocalTalk
connection.
92215N
Enhanced I/O Cards
HP JetDirect 600N EIO internal print
servers:
10Base-T Ethernet, single RJ-45
port
Ethernet 10Base-T and 10Base2,
LocalTalk networks
Token Ring networks
Fast Ethernet 10/100Base-TX
FIR Receiver
10
25-9 pin adapter
(male/female)
C2932A
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
Fast InfraRed Receiver
J3110A
J3111A
J3112A
J3113A
C4103A
EN
Maintenance
Documentation
Ordering Information (Continued)
EN
Item
Description or Use
Part Number
HP LaserJet Printer Family
Paper Specification Guide
(English only)
A guide to using paper and other
print media with HP LaserJet
printers.
5040-9072
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 T,
4050 N, and 4050 TN User
Documentation CD-ROM
An additional copy of the user
documentation CD-ROM.
C4251-60104
User’s Documentation
Bundle, HP LaserJet 4050
and 4050 N Printers
Getting started guide, and the
quick reference guide.
C4251-99001
(English)
User’s Documentation
Bundle, HP LaserJet
4050 T and 4050 TN
Printers
Getting started guide, and the
quick reference guide.
C4252-99001
(English)
Printer Maintenance Kit
Contains user-replaceable parts
and instructions for routine printer
maintenance.
110 V printer:
new
exchange
C4118-67902
C4118-69001
220 V printer:
new
exchange
C4118-67903
C4118-69002
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
11
Control Panel Layout
The printer’s control panel consists of the following:
READY
Two-line
display
Ready
Go
Data
Item
Attention
– Value +
Cancel
Job
Figure 4
Menu
Printer
online
help
Select
Control Panel Layout
Control Panel Lights
12
Light
Indication when lit
Ready
The printer is ready to print.
Data
The printer is processing information.
Attention
Action is required. See the control panel display.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Control Panel Keys
Key
Function
[Go]
• Places the printer either online or offline.
• Prints any data residing in the printer’s buffer.
• Allows the printer to resume printing after being offline. Clears most
printer messages and places the printer online.
• Allows the printer to continue printing with an error message such as TRAY
x LOAD [TYPE] [SIZE] or UNEXPECTED PAPER SIZE.
• Confirms a manual feed request if Tray 1 is loaded and TRAY 1
MODE=CASSETTE has been set from the Paper Handling Menu in the
printer’s control panel.
• Overrides a manual feed request from Tray 1 by selecting paper from the
next available tray.
• Exits the control panel menus. (To save a selected control panel setting,
first press [Select].)
[Cancel Job]
Cancels the print job that the printer is processing. (Press [Cancel Job]
only once.) The time it takes to cancel depends on the size of the print job.
[Menu]
Cycles through the control panel menus. Press the right end of the key to
move forward or the left end of the key to move backward.
[Item]
Cycles through the selected menu’s items. Press the right end of the key to
move forward or the left end of the key to move backward.
[- Value +]
Cycles through the selected menu item’s values. Press [+] to move forward
or [-] to move backward.
[Select]
• Saves the selected value for that item. An asterisk (*) appears next to the
selection, indicating that it is the new default. Default settings remain
when the printer is switched off or reset (unless you reset all factory
defaults from the Resets Menu).
• Prints one of the printer information pages from the control panel.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
13
Using the Printer Online Help System
This printer features an online help system on the control panel that
provides instructions for resolving most printer errors. Certain
control panel error messages alternate with instructions on
accessing the online help system.
Whenever a [?] appears in an error message, or a message
alternates with FOR HELP PRESS THE ? KEY, press the [Item] key
to navigate through a sequence of instructions.
Note
14
To exit the online help system, press [Go].
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Control Panel Menus
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see
page B-1.
Press [Menu] for access to all control panel menus. When
additional trays or other accessories are installed in the printer, new
menu items automatically appear.
To Change a Control Panel Setting:
1
2
3
4
5
Note
Press [Menu] repeatedly until the desired menu appears.
Press [Item] repeatedly until the desired item appears.
Press [- Value +] repeatedly until the desired setting appears.
Press [Select] to save the selection. An asterisk (*) appears
next to the selection in the display, indicating that it is now the
default.
Press [Go] to exit the menu.
Settings in the printer driver and software application override
control panel settings. (Software application settings override
printer driver settings.)
If you cannot access a menu or item, it is either not an option for
the printer, or you have not enabled the associated higher level
option, or your network administrator has locked the function. (The
control panel reads ACCESS DENIED MENUS LOCKED.) See your
network administrator.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
15
To Print a Control Panel Menu Map:
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the
control panel, print a control panel menu map:
1 Press [Menu] repeatedly until INFORMATION MENU appears.
2 Press [Item] repeatedly until PRINT MENU MAP appears.
3 Press [Select] to print the menu map.
You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options
currently installed in the printer. (Many of these values can be
overridden from the printer driver or software application.)
16
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Printer Software
The printer comes with helpful software on a compact disc. See the
getting started guide for installation instructions.
Note
Windows
Client
Macintosh
Client
Check the ReadMe.txt file provided on the compact disc for
late-breaking information.
Windows Software
Drivers
HP FontSmart*
Macintosh Software
Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver***
PPDs
HP LaserJet Utility*
Network
Administrator
Windows Software
HP JetAdmin
Drivers
HP FontSmart*
HP Resource Manager**
Macintosh Software
Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver***
PPDs
HP LaserJet Utility*
Fonts*
Desktop Printer Utility***
Guide files***
*These products are not supported in Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean,
and Japanese.
**HP Resource Manager is supported only in English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, Dutch,
Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
***These products are supported by English only.
Figure 5
Printer Software
Note
The online user’s guide and a copy of Adobe Acrobat Reader
(English version) are on the second of the two compact discs.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
17
The printer drivers provided on the compact disc must be installed
to take full advantage of the printer’s features. The other software
programs are recommended, but are not required for operation. See
the ReadMe.wri file for more information.
Note
Network Administrators: HP JetAdmin and HP Resource Manager
should be installed only on the network administrator’s computer.
Load all other applicable software on the server and all client
computers.
The most recent drivers, additional drivers, and other software are
available from the Internet (see the HP Customer Care Service and
Support pages at the front of this user’s guide). Depending on the
configuration of Windows-driven computers, the installation
program for the printer software automatically checks the computer
for Internet access and can obtain the latest software. If you do not
have access to the Internet, see the HP Customer Care Service
and Support pages at the front of this user’s guide for information
on obtaining the most recent software.
Included with the printer is a compact disc containing the
HP LaserJet Printing System. On the compact disc are software
components and drivers that benefit end users and network
administrators. See the ReadMe.wri file for the most current
information.
The Printing System includes software designed for end users
operating in the following environments:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows 3.1x
Microsoft Windows 9x
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
IBM OS/2 version 2.0 or greater
Apple Mac OS 7 or greater
AutoCad versions 12–15
Additional drivers for Windows NT 3.51 are available on the Internet.
18
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
The Printing System also includes software for network
administrators using the following network operating systems:
•
•
•
Novell NetWare 3.x or 4.x
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
AppleTalk (LocalTalk or EtherTalk)
Network administration software for UNIX, IBM OS/2, and other
network operating systems is available from the web or through your
HP distributor. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support
pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
The drivers and software components for end users and
administrators using the environments listed above are described
in the following sections.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
19
Printer Drivers
Printer drivers access the printer features and allow the computer
to communicate with the printer (via a printer language).
Note
Check the ReadMe.wri file provided on the compact disc for
additional software included and supported languages.
Certain printer features are available only from the PCL 6 drivers.
See the printer software help for availability of features.
Drivers Included with the Printer
The following printer drivers are included with the printer. The most
recent drivers are available on the Internet. Depending on the
configuration of Windows computers, the installation program for
the printer software automatically checks the computer for Internet
access to obtain the latest drivers.
PCL 5e
PCL 6
PS1
Windows 3.1x
✓
✓
✓2
Windows 9x
✓
✓
✓
Windows NT 4.0
✓
✓
✓
Macintosh computer
✓
1. PostScript Level 2 emulation is referred to as PS throughout this user’s
guide.
2. Level 1 emulation only.
20
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Windows
Within the computer installation program, select Typical Install to
install the PCL 5e/6, and PS drivers and HP FontSmart. Select
Custom Install to install only the software you prefer, or if you are
a network administrator. Select Minimum Install to install only the
PCL 6 driver for basic printing.
Macintosh
Click Install to install the LaserWriter 8 driver (English only),
PostScript Printer Description files (PPDs), PDF files (PDFs), online
help, HP LaserJet utility, and Desktop Printer utility. Click Custom
to only install the software you prefer.
Additional Drivers
You can obtain the following printer drivers by downloading them
from the Internet, or by requesting them from an HP-authorized
service or support provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service
and Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
•
•
•
OS/2 PCL 5e/6 printer driver1
OS/2 PS printer driver1
NT 3.51 PCL 5e, NT 3.51 PS2
1
The OS/2 drivers are available from IBM and are packaged with OS/2. They are
not available for Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
2
Note
EN
The NT 3.51 PS driver is available for English only.
If the desired printer driver is not on the compact disc or is not listed
here, check the software application’s installation disks or ReadMe
files to see if they include support for the printer. If not, contact the
software manufacturer or distributor and request a driver for the
printer.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
21
Software for Windows
Use the Typical Install or Custom Install option (if you are a
network administrator) to install the HP software. (This includes
several printer drivers. For more information, see page 20.)
Network Administrators: If the printer is attached to a network
through an HP JetDirect EIO card, before you can print, the printer
must be configured for that network. To configure the printer for your
network, you can select Custom Install from the printer installation
program or use HP JetAdmin software. (See the HP JetDirect Print
Server Software Installation Guide or the getting started guide that
came with your printer.)
Note
You should use the Custom Install option because it allows you to
install administration software such as HP JetAdmin and
HP Resource Manager.
Use the Disk Images option to create a set of disks with the exact
software you want the end users to use. This allows you to distribute
drivers without distributing administration software to end users.
22
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Access the Windows Printer Driver
To configure the driver, access it in one of the following ways:
Temporarily Change Settings
(from a software application)
Change Default Settings
(across all applications)
Windows 9x
From the File menu, click Print,
and then click Properties. (The
actual steps can vary; this is the
most common method.)
Click the Start button, point to
Settings, and then click Printers.
Right-click the printer icon, and
choose Properties.
Windows NT 4.0
From the File menu, click Print,
and then click Properties. (The
actual steps can vary; this is the
most common method.)
Click the Start button, point to
Settings, and then click Printers.
Right-click and choose
Document Defaults or
Properties.
Windows 3.1x and
Windows NT 3.51
From the File menu, click Print,
click Printers, and then click
Options. (The actual steps can
vary; this is the most common
method.)
From the Windows control panel,
double-click Printers, highlight
the printer, and click Setup.
Operating System
Note
EN
Settings in the printer driver and software application override
control panel settings. (Software application settings override
printer driver settings.)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
23
Choose the Right Printer Driver for Your Needs
Choose a printer driver based on the way you use the printer.
•
Use the PCL 6 driver to take full advantage of the printer’s
features. Unless backward compatibility with previous PCL
drivers or older printers is necessary, the PCL 6 driver is
recommended.
• Use the PCL 5e driver if you want print results to look
comparable to those from older printers.
• Use the PS driver for compatibility with PostScript Level 2
needs. Certain features are not available in this driver.
• The printer automatically switches between PS and PCL printer
languages.
For the Macintosh, use the Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver, which is a
PS driver.
Printer Driver Help
Each printer driver has help screens that can be activated either
from the Help button, the F1 key, or a question mark symbol in the
upper right corner in the printer driver (depending on the Windows
operating system used). These help screens give detailed
information about the specific driver. Printer driver help is separate
from the software application help.
24
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
HP FontSmart
Note
HP FontSmart is not supported for Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
Access HP FontSmart from the HP LaserJet folder. HP FontSmart
is a font management utility (for Windows only) which does the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
installs, uninstalls, and deletes fonts
manages fonts inside a single window by allowing you to
drag-and-drop
provides 145 TrueType™ fonts
provides an on-screen preview of all the fonts and prints
samples of them
provides web connectivity to HP FontSmart, an online resource
for free fonts and HP-specific font information (not available for
Windows 3.x)
provides HP LaserJet printer matching screen fonts
HP Resource Manager
The HP Resource Manager should be installed only on the network
administrator’s computer. The HP Resource Manager allows you to
control hard disk and flash memory features not found in the drivers.
Bidirectional communication is required.
Note
HP Resource Manager is not available for the Macintosh.
Use the HP Resource Manager to do the following:
•
•
initialize disk and flash memory
download, delete, and manage fonts and macros to disk and
flash memory across networks
• PostScript Type 1, PostScript Type 42 (True Type fonts
converted to PostScript format), TrueType, and PCL bitmap
fonts
Note
To download Type 1 fonts, Adobe Type Manager must be loaded
and turned on.
Note
HP Resource Manager is only supported in English, French, Italian,
German, Spanish, Dutch, Traditional Chinese, Simplified Chinese,
Korean, and Japanese.
EN
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
25
HP JetSend Communications Technology
HP JetSend is a technology from
Hewlett-Packard that allows devices to
communicate with each other simply and
directly. HP JetSend is built into your printer,
allowing it to receive information from any
HP JetSend-enabled sending device
anywhere on your network, whether it is in
the same office or at a remote location.
When you use the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver accessory, your
printer can also receive information from any HP JetSend-enabled
infrared device. Examples of HP JetSend sending devices include
computers or laptops running HP JetSend software or scanners
with HP JetSend built in. HP JetSend uses simple IP addressing
between networked devices and cableless communication between
infrared devices.
Note
HP JetSend software is not supported for Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
To HP JetSend enable your computer or laptop, visit the
HP JetSend website (www.jetsend.hp.com/products) for
information on HP JetSend software. With the software, you will be
able to exchange intra-company documents directly between two
or more computers and between any HP JetSend enabled printers,
without the problems of incompatible software applications or
versions. HP JetSend software will allow your colleagues to create
documents on their computers and send copies directly to this
printer without any device-specific drivers or configuration
difficulties.
You can visit the HP JetSend website to learn which other devices
are available to communicate easily and directly with your
HP JetSend-enabled printer.
26
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
How the JetSend Communications Technology Works
Networked Devices
To use the HP JetSend capability between networked devices, print
a configuration page (see page 134) to find your HP JetSend IP
address, and give your address to anyone who wants to send
information to your printer via HP JetSend.
From a HP JetSend sending device, a person only needs to enter
the printer’s IP address and press “send.”
Infrared Devices
To use HP JetSend infrared capability, line up the infrared sensors
between the sending and receiving devices, and choose the “send”
option on the sending device.
The devices will automatically negotiate the best possible outcome
because they have HP JetSend in them.
Note
EN
HP JetSend software is not available for the Macintosh computer.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
27
Software for Macintosh Computers
Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver
The driver for the Apple LaserWriter 8 comes on the compact disc
shipped with the printer.
Note
Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver applies to English only.
PostScript Printer Description Files (PPDs)
PPDs, in combination with the Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver, access
the printer features and allow the computer to communicate with
the printer. An installation program for the PPDs and other software
is provided on the compact disc. Use the Apple LaserWriter 8 Driver
that comes with the computer or is installed with the HP printer
software compact disc.
HP LaserJet Utility
Note
The HP LaserJet Utility is not supported for Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese, Korean, and Japanese.
HP LaserJet Utility allows control of features that are not available
in the driver. The illustrated screens make selecting printer features
from the Macintosh computer easier than ever. Use the HP LaserJet
Utility to do the following:
•
•
•
•
•
28
Customize the printer’s control panel messages.
Name the printer, assign it to a zone on the network, download
files and fonts, and change most of the printer settings.
Set a password for the printer.
From the computer, lock out functions on the printer’s control
panel to prevent unauthorized access. (See the printer software
help.)
Configure and set the printer for IP printing.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
Software for Networks
HP JetAdmin
HP JetAdmin software is primarily for users who cannot use
HP Web JetAdmin due to the lack of browser access or because
none of the supported server platforms exist on their network.
HP JetAdmin should be installed only on the network
administrator’s computer. HP JetAdmin can be accessed by clicking
the Start button (point to Settings, click Control Panel, and then
click the HP JetAdmin icon) in Windows 9x and Windows NT 4.0;
or from the HP LaserJet program group folder. Use HP JetAdmin
software to do the following:
•
•
Install, configure, and manage printers that are connected to a
network with an HP JetDirect print server.
Manage and troubleshoot network HP printers and print
servers.
HP JetAdmin software works on the following network systems:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0
Microsoft Windows 9x
Microsoft Windows NT 3.51*
Novell NetWare
HP-UX*
Solaris*
SunOS*
IBM OS/2*
Mac OS (via the HP LaserJet Utility)
*The software for these systems is not included on the compact disc
with the printer, but is available from the Internet. If you do not have
access to the Internet, see the HP Customer Care Service and
Support pages at the front of this user’s guide to obtain this software.
Note
EN
Network Administrators: If the printer is attached to a network,
before you can print, the printer must be configured for that network
using HP JetAdmin or similar network software. (See the getting
started guide.)
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
29
HP Web JetAdmin
HP Web JetAdmin is a browser-based management tool. It can be
installed and run on the following systems:
•
•
•
Microsoft Windows NT
HP-UX*
Sun Solaris*
*HP Web JetAdmin is not included on the CD-ROM with the printer,
but is available from the Internet at http://www.hp.com/support/
net_printing. If you do not have access to the Internet, see the
HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at the front of this
user’s guide to obtain this software.
When installed on a host server, HP Web JetAdmin can be
accessed by any client through a supported web browser (such as
Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.x and 4.x or Netscape Navigator 3.x
and 4.x) by browsing to the HP Web Jet Admin host.
Use HP Web JetAdmin to do the following:
•
•
Note
30
Install and configure printers that are connected to a network
with an HP JetDirect print server. If you install HP Web
JetAdmin 5.0 or greater, it will configure Novell NetWare
parameters on the HP JetDirect print server and NetWare
server.
Manage and troubleshoot network printers from any location.
See the HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide on
your printer documentation CD-ROM or your networking software
to configure the printer for your needs.
Chapter 1: Printer Basics
EN
2
Printing Tasks
Overview
This chapter presents basic printing tasks, such as:
•
•
•
•
Selecting the output bin.
Loading the trays.
Printing on both sides of paper with the optional duplexer.
Printing on special paper, such as letterhead and envelopes,
(including automatically feeding envelopes with the optional
envelope feeder).
This chapter also introduces some advanced printing tasks, to
help you take full advantage of the printer’s features. These tasks
are “advanced” because they require you to change settings from
a software application, the printer driver, or the printer’s control
panel.
•
The printer driver allows you to:
• Create Quick Sets to save the printer’s setup information for
different kinds of print jobs.
• Print pages with a watermark in the background.
• Print the first page of a document on a different kind of paper
than the rest of the pages.
• Print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
(See “Using Features in the Printer Driver” on page 59.)
•
•
EN
Tray 1 can be used in several different ways. See “Customizing
Tray 1 Operation” on page 63.
If you frequently use several kinds of paper or share the printer
with others, print by type and size to ensure that print jobs
always print on the desired paper. See “Printing by Type and
Size of Paper” on page 65.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
31
Selecting the Output Bin
The printer has two output locations: the rear output bin and the top
output bin. To use the top output bin, be sure the rear output bin is
closed. To use the rear output bin, open it.
•
•
If paper coming out of the top output bin has problems, such as
excessive curl, try printing to the rear output bin.
To avoid paper jams, do not open or close the rear output bin
while the printer is printing.
Printing to the Top Output Bin
The top output bin collects paper face-down, in correct order. The
top output bin should be used for most print jobs and is
recommended for printing the following:
•
•
Figure 6
32
over 50 sheets of paper, continuously
transparencies
Top Output Bin
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing to the Rear Output Bin
The printer always prints to the rear output bin if it is open. Paper
comes out of the printer face-up, with the last page on top.
To open the rear output bin, grasp the handle at the top of the bin.
Pull the bin down, and slide out the extension.
Printing from Tray 1 to the rear output bin provides the straightest
paper path. Opening the rear output bin might improve output quality
with the following:
•
•
•
•
•
envelopes
labels
small custom-size paper
postcards
paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2)
Note
Opening the rear output bin disables the optional duplexer (if
installed) and the top output bin.
Figure 7
Rear Output Bin
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
33
Loading Tray 1
Note
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays
while the printer is printing.
Tray 1 is a multi-purpose tray that holds
a variety of paper, including up to
100 sheets of paper, 10 envelopes, or
20 index cards. The printer might pull
paper from Tray 1 first. To change this,
see page 63. For supported sizes of
paper, see page A-3.
1 Open Tray 1.
2 Pull out the tray extension.
3 Set the side guides to the desired
width.
4 Load Tray 1.
5 Paper should fit, without bending,
under the tabs on the guides, and
below the line as indicated. For
correct orientation, see page 46.
34
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Loading Tray 2 (4050/4050 N)
Tray 2 is a 500-sheet tray. The optional
500-sheet tray is adjusted differently
(page 39). (Tray 2 and the optional
500-sheet tray can be interchanged in
the printer.) Tray 2 adjusts for letter, A4,
and legal sizes; these adjustments
affect printer performance.
Lock
Note
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays
while the printer is printing.
1 Pull the tray completely out of the
printer.
2 If the tray is not already set to the
desired paper size, snap the left and
right guides into place to match the
width of the paper. For A4 size paper,
slide the lock down to secure the
guide.
3 Lift the back of the rear paper guide
and slide it to the desired paper size
until it clicks into place. If the tray is
not properly adjusted, the printer
might display an error message or
paper might jam.
Continued on the next page.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
35
4 Load paper into the tray. For correct
orientation, see page 46.
5 Make sure the paper is flat in the tray
at all four corners and below the tabs
on the guides. Slide the tray back into
the printer.
The printer automatically senses the
size of paper loaded if the tray is
adjusted correctly. To print by type and
size of paper, see page 65.
36
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Loading Trays 2 and 3 (4050 T/4050 TN)
Trays 2 and 3 are 250-sheet trays. For
supported sizes of paper, see
page A-3. Choose A5 and B5 ISO as
custom sizes in the printer driver for
these trays (page 56).
Note
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays
while the printer is printing.
1 Pull the tray completely out of the
printer.
2 If the tray is not already set to the
desired paper size, snap the left and
right guides into place to match the
width of the paper.
3 Locate the release tabs (indicated by
the two arrows).
Squeeze the blue tabs to release
them from the slots while sliding the
back section of the tray to the desired
paper size. Make sure the tabs lock
into the correct slots.
Continued on the next page.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
37
4 Load paper into the tray.
5 Make sure the paper is flat in the tray
at all four corners and below the tabs
on the guides. Gently slide the tray
back into the printer.
The printer senses the size of paper
loaded if the tray is adjusted correctly.
To print by type and size of paper, see
page 65.
38
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Loading the Optional 500-Sheet Tray
The optional 500-sheet tray is Tray 3 for
the HP LaserJet 4050/4050 N printers,
or Tray 4 for the HP LaserJet 4050 T/
4050 TN printers. This tray is adjusted
differently than Tray 2 (page 35). Tray 2
and the optional 500-sheet tray can be
interchanged in the printer. For
supported sizes of paper, see
page A-5.
Note
To avoid paper jams, do not load trays
while the printer is printing.
1 Pull the tray completely out of the
printer.
2 If the tray is not set to the desired
paper size, squeeze the release on
the left guide and adjust the left and
right guides to match the width of the
paper.
3 Squeeze the release on the back of
the rear paper guide and slide it to
the desired paper size.
4 Load paper into the tray.
Continued on the next page.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
39
5 Make sure the paper is flat at all four
corners and below the tabs on the
guides.
6 Set the dial on the right side of the
tray to match the paper size.
Note
Setting the dial adjusts the printer’s
sensors. It does not adjust the guides
inside the tray.
7 Gently slide the tray into the printer.
To print by type and size of paper, see
page 65.
40
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Both Sides of Paper
(Optional Duplexer)
The printer can automatically print on both sides of paper with an
optional duplex printing accessory (duplexer). This is called
duplexing.
Note
See the documentation included with the duplexer for complete
installation and setup instructions. Duplexing might require
additional memory (page C-1).
The duplexer supports standard sizes from B5 JIS (7.2 by 10 inches
or 182 by 257 mm) to legal (8.5 by 14 inches or 216 by 356 mm).
Note
The accessory dust cover cannot be used when the optional
duplexer is installed.
Installed
Figure 8
EN
Removed
Printer with the Optional Duplexer
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
41
Guidelines for Printing Both Sides of Paper
Caution
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes, or
paper heavier than 28 lb (105 g/m2). Damage to the printer and
paper jamming might result.
WARNING!
To avoid personal injury and damage to the printer, do not lift the
printer with the duplexer installed. Before relocating the printer,
separate the duplexer and optional trays from the printer.
•
•
•
•
42
You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the
duplexer. (See the printer software help for details.)
To print on both sides of paper, make the selection from the
software or printer driver. (See the printer software help.)
If the printer driver does not have this option, change the Duplex
setting from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control
panel to DUPLEX=ON . Also in the Paper Handling Menu, set
Binding to long edge or short edge. (For more information, see
page 44.)
Close the rear output bin to use the duplexer (page 32).
Opening the rear output bin disables the duplexer.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Paper Orientation for Printing Both Sides of Paper
The duplexer prints the second side of paper first, so paper such as
letterhead and preprinted paper needs to be oriented as shown in
Figure 9.
Figure 9
Paper Orientation for Printing Both Sides of Paper
For Tray 1, load the first side facing down and the top toward you.
For all other trays, load the first side facing up and the top toward
the printer.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
43
Layout Options for Printing Both Sides of Paper
The four print orientation options are shown below. These options
can be selected from the printer driver or from the printer’s control
panel (set BINDING from the Paper Handling Menu and
ORIENTATION from the Printing Menu).
1. Long-edge
portrait
2. Long-edge
landscape*
3. Short-edge
portrait*
4. Short-edge
landscape
Figure 10
Layout Options for Printing Both Sides of Paper
1. Long-edge portrait
2. Long-edge landscape
3. Short-edge portrait
4. Short-edge landscape
Note
44
This is the default printer setting, and the most common layout
used, with every printed image oriented right side up. Facing
pages are read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top
to bottom on the right page.
This layout is often used in accounting, data processing, and
spreadsheet applications. Every other printed image is oriented
upside-down. Facing pages are read continuously from top to
bottom.
This layout is often used with clipboards. Every other printed
image is oriented upside-down. Facing pages are read
continuously from top to bottom.
Each printed image is oriented right side up. Facing pages are
read from top to bottom on the left page, then from top to bottom
on the right page.
When using Windows drivers, select “Flip Pages Up” to get the
binding options designated with (*) above.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Special Paper
Special paper includes letterhead, prepunched (including 3-hole
punched), envelopes, labels, transparencies, and custom-size
paper.
Printing Letterhead, Prepunched, or
Preprinted Paper
When printing letterhead, prepunched, or preprinted paper, it is
important to correctly orient the paper. See the “Paper Orientation”
section for instructions.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
45
Paper Orientation
For Tray 1, load paper with the side-to-be-printed facing up, and the
top, short edge toward the printer.
Figure 11
Paper Orientation for Tray 1
For all other trays, load paper with the side-to-be-printed facing
down, and the top edge toward you.
Figure 12
46
Paper Orientation for All Other Trays
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Envelopes
With the optional envelope feeder, the printer will automatically feed
up to 75 envelopes. To order an envelope feeder, see page 8. To
print with the envelope feeder, see page 49.
Many types of envelopes can be printed from Tray 1. (Up to 10 can
be stacked in the tray.) Printing performance depends on the
construction of the envelope. Always test a few sample envelopes
before purchasing a large quantity.
•
•
Set margins at least 0.6 inch (15 mm) from the edge of the
envelope.
If you have problems printing envelopes, try opening the rear
output bin.
When you print large numbers of envelopes and standard paper,
for best printing performance print paper first, then envelopes. To
alternate paper and envelopes, from the Configuration Menu in the
printer’s control panel select SMALL PAPER SPEED=SLOW.
WARNING!
Never use envelopes with coated linings, exposed self-stick
adhesives, or other synthetic materials. These items can emit
noxious fumes.
Caution
Envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows, coated linings, exposed
self-stick adhesives, or other synthetic materials can severely
damage the printer.
To avoid jamming and possible printer damage, never try to print on
both sides of an envelope.
Before you load envelopes, make sure they are flat and not
damaged or stuck together. Do not use envelopes with
pressure-sensitive adhesive. (For envelope specifications, see
page A-11.)
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
47
Loading Envelopes in Tray 1
1 Open Tray 1, but do not pull out the
extension. (Envelopes feed best
without the extension.)
2 Open the rear output bin and pull out
the tray extension. (This reduces
envelope curl and wrinkling.)
3 Load up to 10 envelopes in the center
of Tray 1 with the side-to-be-printed
facing up, and the postage-end
toward the printer. Slide the
envelopes into the printer as far as
they will go without forcing them.
4 Adjust the guides to touch the
envelope stack without bending the
envelopes. Make sure the envelopes
fit under the tabs on the guides.
48
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Feeding Envelopes Automatically (Optional
Envelope Feeder)
With the optional envelope feeder, the printer will automatically feed
up to 75 envelopes. To print envelopes without an envelope feeder,
see page 47.
Note
See the documentation included with the envelope feeder for
complete installation and setup instructions.
You might need to configure the printer driver to recognize the
envelope feeder. See the printer software help for details.
Release lever
Guides
Envelope
weight
Tray extension
Figure 13
Envelope Feeder Details
Envelope Sizes
•
•
EN
The envelope feeder supports standard sizes from 3.5 by 6.3
inches (90 by 160 mm) to 7 by 10 inches (178 by 254 mm).
Other sizes of envelopes should be printed from Tray 1.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
49
Inserting and Removing the Envelope Feeder
1 Open Tray 1.
2 Open the access door on the right,
front corner of the printer, inside Tray
1.
3 Remove the plastic cover from the
printer. (Replace the cover when the
envelope feeder is not attached.)
4 Insert the envelope feeder into the
printer as far as it will go. (The
connector on the top right side of the
envelope feeder fits into the plug in
the printer.) Pull gently on the
envelope feeder to be sure that it is
securely in place.
5 To remove the envelope feeder,
press the release button on the left
and pull the envelope feeder away
from the printer.
50
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Loading Envelopes in the Envelope Feeder
Note
Print only on envelopes approved for
use in the printer (page 47 and
page A-11).
1 Fold down the tray extension. Lift the
envelope weight.
2 Squeeze the release lever on the left
envelope guide and slide the guides
apart.
3 Load envelopes into the envelope
feeder with the side-to-be-printed
facing up, and the postage end
toward the printer. Push the
envelopes into the envelope feeder
as far as they will go without forcing
them. Push the bottom envelope in
slightly farther than the top
envelopes. (Stack them as shown.)
Continued on the next page.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
51
4 Adjust the guides to touch the
envelopes without bending them.
Make sure the envelope feeder is not
overfilled.
5 Lower the envelope weight onto the
envelopes.
Note
Select the envelope size from the
software application (if the setting is
available), the printer driver, and the
Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s
control panel (page B-5). To print by
type and size of paper, see page 65.
52
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Labels
Use only labels recommended for use in laser printers. Make sure
that labels meet the correct specifications (page A-3).
Do:
•
•
•
Figure 14
EN
Print a stack of 50 labels from Tray 1 or a stack of 50 to 100
labels from other trays.
Load labels in Tray 1 with the side-to-be-printed facing up, and
the top, short edge toward the printer. For orientation in other
trays, see Figure 12 on page 46.
Try opening the rear output bin (page 33) to prevent curl and
other problems.
Printing Labels
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
53
Do not:
Caution
Failure to follow these instructions can damage the printer.
•
•
•
•
•
54
Do not load the trays to capacity because labels are heavier
than paper.
Do not use labels that are separating from the backing sheet,
wrinkled, or damaged in any way.
Do not use labels that have the backing sheet exposed. (Labels
must cover the entire backing sheet with no exposed spaces.)
Do not feed a sheet of labels through the printer more than once.
The adhesive backing is designed for only one pass through
the printer.
Do not print on both sides of labels.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing Transparencies
Use only transparencies recommended for use in laser printers. For
transparency specifications, see page A-10.
•
•
•
•
Figure 15
EN
Load transparencies face up in Tray 1 with the top toward the
printer.
A stack of 50 to 100 transparencies can be printed from other
trays. Because transparencies are heavier than paper, do not
load the other trays to capacity. For orientation in other trays,
see Figure 12 on page 46.
To prevent transparencies from becoming too hot or sticking
together, use the top output bin. Before using the top output bin,
be sure the rear output bin is closed (page 32). Remove each
transparency from the output bin before printing another.
Place transparencies on a flat surface to cool after removing
them from the printer.
Printing Transparencies
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
55
Printing Cards, Custom-Size, and
Heavy Paper
Custom-size paper can be printed from Tray 1 or the optional
500-sheet tray. For paper specifications, see page A-2.
Note
Choose A5 and B5 (ISO) as custom sizes in the printer driver for
Tray 2 and Tray 3 (HP LaserJet 4050 T/4050 TN printers) and the
optional 500-sheet tray. Settings for these sizes are marked in the
tray, but custom settings must be selected in the software and from
the printer’s control panel.
Tray
Minimum Size
Maximum Size
Tray 1
3 by 5 inches
(76 by 127 mm)
8.5 by 14 inches
(216 by 356 mm)
Optional 500-Sheet Tray
5.8 by 8.2 inches
(148 by 210 mm)
8.5 by 14 inches
(216 by 356 mm)
The maximum paper weight is 53 lb (199 g/m2) from Tray 1 and
28 lb (105 g/m2) from the 500-sheet tray.
Note
To prevent curl and other problems, heavy paper and very small
custom-size paper should be printed from Tray 1 to the rear output
bin. Open the rear output bin to use it (page 33).
The printer’s control panel can be set for one custom size at a time.
Do not load more than one size of custom paper into the printer.
For paper sizes less than 5 inches (127 mm) feed page in a portrait
orientation (short edge first).
56
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Guidelines for Printing Custom-Size Paper
•
•
•
Do not attempt to print on paper smaller than 3 inches (76 mm)
wide or 5 inches (127 mm) long.
Set page margins at least .17 inch (4.23 mm) away from the
edges.
Feed short-edge first.
Setting Custom Paper Sizes
When custom paper is loaded, size settings need to be selected
from the software application (the preferred method), the printer
driver, or from the printer’s control panel.
Note
Settings in the printer driver and software application override
control panel settings. (Software application settings override
printer driver settings.)
X (front edge)
Feed short-edge
first
Y (side edge)
Figure 16
EN
Printing Custom-Size Paper
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
57
If the settings are not available from the software, set the custom
paper size from the control panel:
1
2
3
4
5
From the Printing Menu set CONFIGURE CUSTOM PAPER=YES.
From the Printing Menu, select inches or millimeters as the unit
of measurement.
From the Printing Menu, set the X dimension (the front edge of
the paper) as shown in Figure 16. X can be 3 to 8.5 inches (76 to
216 mm).
Set the Y dimension (the side edge of the paper) as shown in
Figure 16. Y can be 5 to 14 inches (127 to 356 mm).
If custom paper is loaded into Tray 1 and TRAY 1
MODE=CASSETTE, then set TRAY 1 SIZE=CUSTOM from the Paper
Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. See “Customizing
Tray 1 Operation” on page 63.
If custom paper is loaded in the optional 500-sheet tray, be sure
the paper size dial is set to Custom (page 39).
6 In the software, select Custom as the paper size.
For example, if the custom paper is 8 by 10 inches (203 by 254 mm),
set X=8 inches and Y=10 inches (X=203 millimeters and Y=254
millimeters).
58
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Advanced Printing Tasks
This section will help you take full advantage of the printer’s features.
These tasks are “advanced” because they require you to change
settings from the printer’s control panel or the printer driver.
Using Features in the Printer Driver
When you print from a software application, many of the printer’s
features are available from the printer driver. To access Windows
printer drivers, see page 23.
Note
HP PCL 5e, PCL 6, PS, OS/2, UNIX and Macintosh drivers are
slightly different. Check the drivers for available options. The PCL6
driver takes full advantage of the printer’s features.
Settings in the printer driver and software application override
control panel settings. (Software application settings override
printer driver settings.)
Printer Collation
The Printer Collation feature, only available with 16 MB of RAM or
a hard disk, allows multiple original prints (mopying) that provides
you the following advantages:
•
•
•
Note
EN
Reduces network traffic
Faster return to application
All documents are original
See the application or printer driver help for specific steps.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
59
RIP ONCE
RIP ONCE allows the print job to be processed one time at the
printer. The RIP ONCE capability creates an image of the page then
saves a compressed image of the page into memory. RIP ONCE is
enabled when a minimum of 16 MB of RAM or a hard disk is installed
in the printer. Pages are printed by decompressing page images
without pausing to process the print job again. The print job will print
exactly the same every time because the compressed image is not
dependent on any other printer data.
Saving Printer Setup Information
Printer drivers allow you to save the printer settings you use most
often as the default settings. For example, the driver might be set
to print on letter size paper, portrait orientation, with automatic tray
selection (from the first available tray).
Some PCL 5e/ PCL 6 printer drivers will allow you to save printer
settings for multiple kinds of print jobs. For example, you might want
to create a Quick Set for envelopes, or for printing the first page of
a document on letterhead.
Look for the Quick Sets option in the Windows PCL 5e/PCL 6
printer driver. See the printer driver help for more information on
these features.
Printer Driver Features
Look for Quick Sets, ZoomSmart (any page size to any page size),
and Booklet Printing options in the Windows PCL 5e/PCL 6 printer
driver, or see the printer driver help for more information.
Printing with a Watermark
A watermark is a notice, such as “Top Secret,” printed in the
background of each page in a document. Check the driver for
available options.
60
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Different First Page
Follow these instructions for printing a first page that is different from
other pages in the print job.
1
For Windows, select “Use different paper for first page” in your
printer driver. Choose Tray 1 (or Manual Feed) for the first page
and one of the other trays for the remaining pages. Place the
paper for the first page in Tray 1. (For manual feed, place paper
in Tray 1 after the job is sent to the printer and the printer
requests paper.) Place the paper with the side-to-be-printed up,
the top of the page facing the rear of the printer, and the long
edge leading into the printer.
For Macintosh computers, select “First from” and “Remaining
from” in the print dialog box.
Note
Where and how you make selections depends on your software
application or associated printer driver. (Some options may only be
available through the printer driver.)
2
EN
Load the paper for the remaining pages of the document into
another tray. You may select the first and remaining pages by
type of paper. For more information, see “Printing by Type and
Size of Paper” on page 65
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
61
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This
feature is available in some printer drivers, and provides a
cost-effective way to print draft pages.
To print more than one page on a sheet of paper, look for a Layout
or Pages Per Sheet option in the printer driver. (This is sometimes
called 2-up, 4-up, or n-up printing.)
Figure 17
62
Sample Layout Options (1-up, 2-up, and 4-up)
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Customizing Tray 1 Operation
Customize Tray 1 to fit your printing needs.
The printer can be set to print from Tray 1 as long as it is loaded, or
to print only from Tray 1 if the type of paper loaded is specifically
requested. Set TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST or TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE
from the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel. (Print
speed might be slightly slower when printing from Tray 1 when TRAY
1 MODE=FIRST .)
Tray 1 Mode=First
If you do not keep paper in Tray 1 all the time, or you use Tray 1 only
for manually feeding paper, keep the default setting, TRAY 1
MODE=FIRST in the Paper Handling Menu.
•
•
TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST means that the printer usually pulls paper
from Tray 1 first unless it is empty or closed.
You can still choose paper from other trays by specifically
choosing another tray in the printer driver.
Tray 1 Mode=Cassette
TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE means the printer treats Tray 1 like the
internal trays. Instead of looking for paper in Tray 1 first, the printer
pulls paper either starting from the bottom tray upward (from the
tray with the highest capacity to the tray with the least capacity), or
the tray that matches type or size settings selected from the
software.
•
•
EN
When TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE is set, an option appears in the
Paper Handling Menu to configure size as well as type settings
for Tray 1.
Through the printer driver, you can select paper from any tray
(including Tray 1) by type, size, or source. To print by type and
size of paper, see page 65.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
63
Manually Feeding Paper from Tray 1
The Manual Feed feature allows you to print on special paper from
Tray 1, such as envelopes or letterhead. If Manual Feed is selected,
the printer will print only from Tray 1.
Select Manual Feed through the software or printer driver. Manual
Feed can also be enabled from the Paper Handling Menu in the
printer’s control panel.
Note
64
When Manual Feed is selected, if TRAY 1 MODE=FIRST the printer
automatically prints (if paper is in the tray). If TRAY 1
MODE=CASSETTE the printer prompts to load Tray 1 whether or not
Tray 1 is loaded. This enables you to load different paper if
necessary. Press [Go] to print from Tray 1.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing by Type and Size of Paper
You can configure the printer to select paper by type (such as plain
or letterhead) and size (such as letter or A4), as opposed to source
(a paper tray).
Benefits of Printing by Type and Size of Paper
If you frequently use several different kinds of paper, once trays are
set up correctly, you do not have to check which paper is loaded in
each tray before you print. This is especially helpful when the printer
is shared, and more than one person loads or removes paper.
Printing by type and size of paper is a way to be sure that print jobs
always print on the desired paper. (Some printers have a feature
which “locks out” trays, to prevent printing on the wrong paper.
Printing by type and size of paper eliminates the need to lock out
trays.)
To print by type and size of paper, do the following:
1
2
3
EN
Be sure to adjust and load the trays correctly. (See the sections
on loading paper, starting on page 34.)
From the Paper Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel,
select the paper type for each tray. If you are unsure what type
you are loading (such as bond or recycled), check the label on
the package of paper.
Select the paper size settings from the control panel.
• Tray 1: If the printer has been set to TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE
from the Paper Handling Menu, also set the paper size from
the Paper Handling Menu. If custom paper is loaded, set the
size of custom paper from the Printing Menu to match the
paper loaded in Tray 1. To print custom-size paper, see
page 57.
• Optional envelope feeder: Set the paper size from the
Paper Handling Menu.
• Optional 500-sheet tray: Paper size settings are adjusted
when paper is properly loaded into the printer and the paper
size dial is set to match the paper size. If custom paper is
loaded, set the size of custom paper from the Printing Menu
to match the paper loaded in the tray. Set the paper size dial
in the tray to Custom. To print custom-size paper, see
page 57.
• Other trays: Paper size settings are adjusted when paper is
properly loaded into the printer. (See the sections on loading
paper, starting on page 35.)
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
65
4
Note
From the software or printer driver, select the desired type and
size of paper.
The type and size settings can also be configured from HP Web
JetAdmin and HP JetAdmin software for networked printers. See
the printer driver help.
To print by type and size, it might be necessary to unload or close
Tray 1, or set TRAY 1 MODE=CASSETTE from the Paper Handling
Menu in the printer’s control panel. For more information, see
page 63.
Settings in the printer driver and software application override
control panel settings. (Software application settings override
printer driver settings.)
Supported Types of Paper
The printer supports the following types of paper:
• plain
• letterhead
• prepunched
• bond
• color
• rough
66
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
• preprinted
• transparency
• labels
• recycled
• card stock
• user-defined (5 types)
EN
Job Retention Features
To use the job retention features listed below, you must install a hard
disk in the printer and properly configure the drivers.
Caution
Make sure to identify your jobs in the printer driver before printing.
Using default names may override previous jobs with the same
default name or cause the job to be deleted.
Quick Copying a Job
The quick copy feature prints the requested number of copies of a
job and stores a copy on the printer’s hard disk. Additional copies
of the job can be printed later. This feature can be turned off from
the driver.
For more information about specifying the number of quick copy
jobs that can be stored, see the QUICK COPY JOBS control panel
item described on page B-18.
Printing Additional Copies of a Quick Copy
Job
To print additional copies of a job stored on the printer’s hard disk
from the control panel:
1
2
Note
If you are using a Macintosh computer, the user name appears on
the first line of the display and the job name appears on the second
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name
using [Item], press [Value] until the desired job name appears.
3
4
5
EN
Press [Menu] repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENU appears.
Press [Item] until the desired user or job name appears.
Press [Select] to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
Press [- Value +] until the desired number of copies appears.
Press [Select] to print the job.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
67
Deleting a Stored Quick Copy Job
When a user sends a quick copy job, the printer overwrites any
previous jobs with the same user and job name. If there is not a
quick copy job already stored under the same user and job name
and the printer needs additional space, the printer may delete other
stored quick copy jobs starting with the oldest job. The default
number of quick copy jobs that can be stored is 32. The number of
quick copy jobs that can be stored is set from the control panel (see
page B-18).
Note
If you turn the printer off and then back on, all quick copy, proof and
hold, and private jobs are deleted.
A stored quick copy job can also be deleted from the control panel
or from HP Web JetAdmin and HP JetAdmin software.
1
2
Note
If you are using a Macintosh computer, the user name appears on
the first line of the display and the job name appears on the second
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name
using [Item], press [Value] until the desired job name appears.
3
4
5
68
Press [Menu] repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENU appears.
Press [Item] until the desired user name appears.
Press [Select] to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
Press [- Value] until DELETE appears.
Press [Select] to delete the job.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Proofing and Holding a Job
The proof and hold feature provides a quick and easy way to print
and proof one copy of a job and then print the additional copies.
To permanently store the job and prevent the printer from deleting
it when space is needed for something else, select the Stored Job
option in the driver.
Printing the Remaining Copies of a Held Job
The user can print the remaining copies of a job held on the printer’s
hard disk from the control panel.
1
2
Note
If you are using a Macintosh computer, the user name appears on
the first line of the display and the job name appears on the second
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name
using [Item], press [Value] until the desired job name appears.
3
4
5
EN
Press [Menu] repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENU appears.
Press [Item] until the desired user name appears.
Press [Select] to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
Press [- Value +] until the desired number of copies appears.
Press [Select] to print the job.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
69
Deleting a Held Job
When a user sends a proof and hold job, the printer automatically
deletes that user’s previous stored proof and hold job. If there is not
a proof and hold job already stored for that job name and the printer
needs additional space, the printer may delete other stored proof
and hold jobs starting with the oldest one.
Note
If you turn the printer off and then back on, all quick copy, proof and
hold, and private jobs are deleted. A stored proof and hold job can
also be deleted from the control panel.
1
2
Note
If you are using a Macintosh computer, the user name appears on
the first line of the display and the job name appears on the second
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name
using [Item], press [Value] until the desired job name appears.
3
4
5
70
Press [Menu] repeatedly until QUICK COPY JOBS MENU appears.
Press [Item] until the desired user name appears.
Press [Select] to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
Press [- Value] until DELETE appears.
Press [Select] to delete the job.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing a Private Job
The private printing feature lets a user specify that a job is not
printed until that user releases it using a 4-digit personal
identification number (PIN) through the printer’s control panel. The
user specifies the PIN in the driver and it is sent to the printer as
part of the print job.
Specifying a Private Job
To specify that a job is private from the driver, select the Private Job
option and type a 4-digit PIN.
Releasing a Private Job
The user can print a private job from the control panel.
1
2
Note
If you are using a Macintosh computer, the user name appears on
the first line of the display and the job name appears on the second
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name
using [Item], press [Value] until the desired job name appears.
3
4
5
6
EN
Press [Menu] repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENU
appears.
Press [Item] until the desired user name appears.
Press [Select] PIN:0000 appears.
Press [- Value +] to change the first number of the PIN, and
then press [Select]. An * appears in place of the number.
Repeat these steps to change the remaining three numbers of
the PIN. COPIES=1 appears.
Press [- Value +] until the desired number of copies appears.
Press [Select] to print the job.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
71
Deleting a Private Job
A private job is automatically deleted from the printer’s hard disk
after the user releases it for printing, unless the user selects the
Stored Job option in the driver.
Note
If you turn the printer off and then back on, all quick copy, proof and
hold, and private jobs are deleted.
A private job can also be deleted from the printer’s control panel
before it is ever printed.
1
2
Note
If you are using a Macintosh computer, the user name appears on
the first line of the display and the job name appears on the second
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name
using [Item], press [Value] until the desired job name appears.
3
4
5
6
72
Press [Menu] repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENU
appears.
Press [Item] until the desired user name appears.
Press [Select] to select the job. PIN:0000 appears.
Press [- Value +] to change the first number of the PIN, and
then press [Select]. An * appears in place of the number.
Repeat these steps to change the remaining three numbers of
the PIN. COPIES=1 appears.
Press [- Value] until DELETE appears.
Press [Select] to delete the job.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Storing a Print Job
The user can download a print job to the printer’s hard disk without
printing it. The user can then print the job at any time through the
printer’s control panel. For example, a user may want to download
a personnel form, calendar, time sheet, or accounting form that
other users can access and print.
To store a print job permanently on the hard disk, select the Stored
Job option in the driver when printing the job.
Printing a Stored Job
The user can print a job stored on the printer’s hard disk from the
control panel.
1
2
Note
If you are using a Macintosh computer, the user name appears on
the first line of the display and the job name appears on the second
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name
using [Item], press [Value] until the desired job name appears.
3
4
5
EN
Press [Menu] repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENU
appears.
Press [Item] until the desired user name appears.
Press [Select] to select the job name. COPIES=1 appears.
Press [- Value +] until the desired number of copies appears.
Press [Select] to print the job.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
73
Deleting a Stored Job
Jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk can be deleted from the control
panel.
1
2
Note
If you are using a Macintosh computer, the user name appears on
the first line of the display and the job name appears on the second
line of the display. After you have selected the desired user name
using [Item], press [Value] until the desired job name appears.
3
4
5
74
Press [Menu] repeatedly until PRIVATE/STORED JOBS MENU
appears.
Press [Item] until the desired user name appears.
Press [Select] to select the job. COPIES=1 appears.
Press [- Value] until DELETE appears.
Press [Select] to delete the job.
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
Printing with the Optional HP Fast
InfraRed Receiver
The HP Fast InfraRed Receiver enables wireless printing from any
IRDA-compliant portable device (such as a laptop computer) to the
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 N, 4050 T, or 4050 TN printer.
The printing connection is maintained by positioning the sending
infrared (FIR) port within operating range. Note that the connection
can be blocked by objects such as a hand, paper, direct sunlight, or
any bright light shining into either FIR port.
Note
For more information, see the user guide that came with the HP Fast
InfraRed Receiver.
Setting Up to Print with Windows 9x
Before launching the InfraRed Driver, complete the following steps:
1
2
3
From the Printers folder, select the HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 N,
4050 T, or 4050 TN as your default printer.
While in the same Printers folder, choose Properties/Details,
and make sure that Virtual Infrared LPT Port is selected.
Select the file to print.
Printing a Job
1
Align your laptop computer (or other portable device equipped
with an IRDA-compliant FIR window) within 2 to 3 feet (1 meter)
maximum of the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver. The FIR window
must be at an angle of +/- 15 degrees to ensure an effective
connection for printing.
2 Print the job. The status indicator on the HP Fast InfraRed
Receiver lights up, and, after a short delay, the printer status
panel displays PROCESSING JOB.
If the status indicator does not light up, realign the HP Fast InfraRed
Receiver with the FIR port on the sending device, resend the print
job, and maintain the alignment of all devices. If you have to move
the equipment (for example, to add paper), make sure that all
devices remain within the range of operation to maintain the
connection.
EN
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
75
If the connection is interrupted before your print job is complete, the
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver status indicator turns off. You have up
to 40 seconds to correct the interruption and continue the job. If the
connection is resumed within this time, the status indicator lights up
again.
Note
The connection is permanently broken if the sending port is moved
out of operating range or if anything passing between the ports
blocks transmission for more than 40 seconds. (This block could be
a hand, paper, or even direct sunlight.) Depending on the size of
the job, printing with the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver may be slower
than printing with a cable connected directly to the parallel port.
Interrupting and Resuming Printing
The job interrupt and resume feature lets a user temporarily stop
the job that is currently printing in order to print another job. When
the new job is finished printing, the interrupted job resumes printing.
A user can only interrupt jobs that are printing and collating multiple
copies by connecting to the infrared (FIR) port on the printer and
sending a job to the printer. The printer stops printing the current
job when it reaches the end of the copy it is printing. The printer
then prints the job sent over the FIR connection. When the printer
is done printing that job, it resumes printing the original job with
multiple copies where it left off.
76
Chapter 2: Printing Tasks
EN
3
Printer Maintenance
Overview
This chapter explains basic printer maintenance.
EN
•
Managing the toner cartridge.
•
Cleaning the printer.
•
Performing routine maintenance.
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
77
Managing the Toner Cartridge
HP Policy on Non-HP Toner Cartridges
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend use of non-HP toner
cartridges, either new or remanufactured. Because they are not
HP products, HP cannot influence their design or control their
quality.
To install a new HP toner cartridge and recycle the used cartridge,
follow the instructions included in the toner cartridge box.
Toner Cartridge Storage
Do not remove the toner cartridge from its package until you are
ready to use it. (The shelf life of a cartridge in an unopened package
is approximately 2.5 years.)
Caution
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, do not expose it to light
for more than a few minutes.
Toner Cartridge Life Expectancy
The life of the toner cartridge depends on the amount of toner that
print jobs require. When printing text at 5% coverage, an HP toner
cartridge lasts an average of 10,000 or 6,000 pages, depending on
which toner cartridge is installed. (A typical business letter is about
5% coverage.) This assumes that print density is set to 3 and
EconoMode is off. (These are the default settings.)
78
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
Checking the Toner Level
The user can find out how much toner is left in the toner cartridge
by printing a configuration page (see page 134). The toner level is
represented by the HP TonerGauge graphic on the configuration
page. It shows approximately how much toner is left in the toner
cartridge.
Note
After replacing a toner cartridge this value might become inaccurate
if a user fails to select YES when the NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NO
message is displayed on the control panel.
Resetting the HP TonerGauge
After a new toner cartridge is installed, the user must reset the
HP TonerGauge from the control panel. When the top cover is
closed after installing the new toner cartridge, the NEW TONER
CARTRIDGE=NO message is displayed on the control panel for
approximately 30 seconds. To reset the HP TonerGauge:
1
2
3
Note
EN
Press [- Value +] until YES appears.
Press [Select] to save the selection.
Press [Go] to exit the menu.
If the NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NO message is no longer displayed
on the control panel when you replace an empty or low toner
cartridge, press [Menu] repeatedly until CONFIGURATION MENU
appears. Press [Item] repeatedly until NEW TONER CARTRIDGE=NO
appears, then complete steps 1 through 3 above.
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
79
Continue Printing When Toner Is Low
When toner is low, the printer’s control panel displays the TONER
LOW message.
By default the printer will continue to print when the toner is low.
The printer will continue to display TONER LOW until you replace the
toner cartridge.
If the you want to stop the printer when toner is low, change TONER
LOW from the default of CONTINUE to STOP (see page B-16). When
the toner is low, the printer will stop printing and STOP will be
displayed. To resume printing, press [Go].
80
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
Redistributing the Toner
When toner is low, faded or light areas
might appear on a printed page. You
might be able to temporarily improve
print quality by redistributing the toner.
The following procedure might allow
you to finish the current print job before
replacing the toner cartridge.
1 Open the top cover.
2 Remove the toner cartridge from the
printer.
WARNING!
Avoid reaching too far into the printer.
The adjacent fusing area might be hot!
Caution
To prevent damage to the toner
cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
Continued on the next page.
EN
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
81
3 Rotate the toner cartridge and gently
shake it from side to side to
redistribute the toner.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off
with a dry cloth and wash clothing in
cold water. (Hot water sets toner into
fabric.)
4 Reinsert the toner cartridge into the
printer and close the top cover.
If the print remains light, install a new
toner cartridge. (Follow the instructions
provided with the new toner cartridge.)
Note
If the message NEW TONER CARTRIDGE
= NO appears, ignore the message
when removing the toner cartridge to
redistribute toner.
82
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
Cleaning the Printer
To maintain print quality, follow the cleaning procedure (on the
following page) every time the toner cartridge is changed, or
whenever print quality problems occur. As much as possible, keep
the printer free from dust and debris.
•
•
Caution
Clean the outside of the printer with a slightly water-dampened
cloth.
Clean the inside with a dry, lint-free cloth.
Do not use ammonia-based cleaners on or around the printer.
While cleaning the printer, be careful not to touch the transfer roller
(the black, rubber roller, located underneath the toner cartridge).
Skin oils on the roller can cause print quality problems.
Figure 18
EN
Location of the Transfer Roller—Do Not Touch!
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
83
Cleaning the Printer
Before beginning these steps, turn the
printer off and unplug the power cord.
1 Open the top cover and remove the
toner cartridge.
WARNING!
Avoid reaching too far into the printer.
The adjacent fusing area might be hot!
Caution
To prevent damage to the toner
cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
2 Wipe any dust or dirt off the paper
feed guides (shaded areas) with a
dry, lint-free cloth.
Note
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off
with a dry cloth and wash clothing in
cold water. (Hot water sets toner into
fabric.)
3 Using the green handle, lift the paper
access plate and wipe off any residue
with a dry, lint-free cloth.
Continued on the next page.
84
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
4 Replace the toner cartridge, close
the top cover, plug in the power cord,
and turn the printer on.
Note
If the message NEW TONER CARTRIDGE
= NO appears, ignore the message
when removing the toner cartridge to
clean the printer.
EN
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
85
Using the Printer Cleaning Page
If toner specks appear on the front or back side of your print jobs,
follow the procedure below.
From the printer’s control panel, do the following:
1
2
3
4
Note
Press [Menu] until PRINT QUALITY MENU appears.
Press [Item] until CREATE CLEANING PAGE appears.
Press [Select] to create the cleaning page.
Follow the instructions on the cleaning page to complete the
cleaning process.
In order for the cleaning page to work properly, print the page on
copier grade paper (not bond or rough paper).
You might need to create a cleaning page more than once. When
toner has been cleaned from inside the printer, shiny black spots
will appear on the page’s black strip.
To ensure good print quality with certain types of paper, use the
cleaning page every time the toner cartridge is replaced.
86
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
Performing Routine Maintenance
Hewlett-Packard recommends that only HP-authorized service
technicians service the printer. However, you should replace certain
parts when the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE message appears
on the printer’s control panel display.
The maintenance message will appear every 200,000 pages. To
check the number of pages the printer has printed, print a
configuration page (see page 134).
To order the printer maintenance kit, see page 9. The kit includes:
•
•
•
•
Note
EN
fuser assembly
transfer roller
feed rollers
necessary instructions
The printer maintenance kit is a consumable and is not covered
under warranty.
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
87
88
Chapter 3: Printer Maintenance
EN
4
Problem Solving
Overview
This chapter will help you to troubleshoot and solve printer
problems.
Clear paper
jams:
Occasionally, paper can jam during printing. This section will
help you to locate paper jams, properly clear them from the
printer, and solve repeated paper jams.
Understand
printer
messages:
Many different messages can appear on the printer’s control
panel display. Some messages tell the printer’s current status,
such as INITIALIZING. Other messages require an action,
such as CLOSE TOP COVER. Many of these messages are
self-explanatory. However, some messages indicate a problem
with the printer, or require further action or description. This
section lists these types of messages, and tells what to do if a
message persists.
Correct output
quality
problems:
The printer should produce print jobs of the highest quality. If
print jobs do not look sharp and clear, defects such as lines,
specks, or smears appear on the page, or paper is wrinkled or
curled, use this section to troubleshoot and solve the output
quality problem.
Determine
printer
problems:
Before you can fix a printer problem, you must understand
where the problem lies. Use the flowchart in this section to
determine the printer problem, and then follow the
corresponding troubleshooting suggestions.
Check printer
configuration:
From the printer, you can print information pages, which give
details about the printer and its configuration.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
89
Clearing Paper Jams
If the printer’s control panel displays a paper jam message, look for
paper in the locations indicated in Figure 19, then see the procedure
for clearing the paper jam. You might need to look for paper in other
locations than indicated in the paper jam message. If the location
of the paper jam is not obvious, look first in the top cover area
underneath the toner cartridge.
When clearing paper jams, be very careful not to tear the paper. If
a small piece of paper is left in the printer, it could cause additional
jams. If paper jams are a recurring problem, see page 102.
Note
90
The top cover of the printer must be opened and then closed to clear
a paper jam message.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Paper jams can occur at the following locations:
2
1
3
4
6
5
Figure 19
Paper Jam Locations
1
2
3
4
5
6
Note
EN
Output areas (top and rear). Go to page 99.
Top cover area. Go to page 96.
Toner cartridge area. Go to page 98.
Input tray area (optional envelope feeder). Go to page 94.
Input tray areas. Go to page 92.
Optional duplexer. Go to page 100.
Loose toner might remain in the printer after a paper jam, but the
toner should clear after a few sheets are printed.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
91
Clearing Jams from the Input Tray Areas
Note
To remove paper from the Tray 1 area,
slowly pull the paper out of the printer.
For all other trays, follow the steps
below. (See the next page for clearing
envelope feeder jams.)
1 Slide the tray out of the printer, and
remove any damaged paper from the
tray.
2 If the edge of the paper is visible in
the feed area, slowly pull the paper
down and out of the printer. (Do not
pull the paper straight out, or it will
tear.) If the paper is not visible, look
in the top cover area (page 96).
Note
Do not force the paper if it will not move
easily. If the paper is stuck in a tray, try
removing it through the tray above (if
applicable) or through the top cover
area (page 96).
Continued on the next page.
92
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
3 Before replacing the tray, make sure
the paper is flat in the tray at all four
corners and below the tabs on the
guides.
4 Open and close the top cover to clear
the paper jam message.
If a paper jam message persists, there
is still paper in the printer. Look for
paper in another location (page 90).
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
93
Clearing Jams from the Optional Envelope
Feeder
1 Remove any envelopes loaded in the
envelope feeder. Lower the envelope
weight and lift the tray extension up
to close.
2 Press and hold the release button on
the left side of the envelope feeder.
Grasp both sides of the envelope
feeder and carefully pull it out of the
printer.
3 Slowly pull any envelopes out of the
envelope feeder and the printer.
4 Insert the envelope feeder into the
printer as far as it will go. (There is a
hook on the bottom right side of the
envelope feeder that fits through the
small access door, and a connector
on the top right side that fits into the
plug.)
Continued on the next page.
94
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
5 Open and close the top cover to clear
the paper jam message.
If a paper jam message persists, there
is still paper in the printer. Look for
paper in another location (page 90).
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
95
Clearing Jams from the Top Cover Area
1 Open the top cover and remove the
toner cartridge.
Caution
To prevent damage to the toner
cartridge, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
2 Use the green handle to lift the paper
access plate.
3 Slowly pull the paper out of the
printer. Do not tear the paper!
Note
Avoid spilling loose toner. Using a dry,
lint-free cloth, clean any loose toner that
might have fallen into the printer
(page 83).
If loose toner falls into the printer, it
might cause temporary problems with
print quality. Loose toner should clear
from the paper path after a few pages
are printed.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off
with a dry cloth and wash clothing in
cold water. (Hot water sets toner into
fabric.)
Continued on the next page.
96
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
4 Replace the toner cartridge, and
close the top cover.
If a paper jam message persists, there
is still paper in the printer. Look for
paper in another location (page 90).
Note
If the message NEW TONER CARTRIDGE
= NO appears, ignore the message
when removing the toner cartridge to
clear jams from the printer.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
97
Clearing Jams from the Toner Cartridge Area
1 If you receive a paper jam message
after using all paper jam removal
procedures in the user’s guide, open
the top cover and remove the toner
cartridge.
2 Open Tray 1.
3 Use the green handle to lift the paper
access plate and remove any
jammed paper.
4 Remove the entrance cover to check
for additional jammed paper. If paper
is present, remove it.
5 Rotate the multipurpose paper guide
to check for additional jammed
paper. If paper is present, remove it.
Replace the entrance cover and toner
cartridge. Close Tray 1 and the top
cover.
98
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Clearing Jams from the Output Areas
Note
If most of the paper is still inside the
printer, it is best to remove it through the
top cover area. Go to page 96.
1 Open the rear output bin.
2 Grasp both sides of the paper, and
slowly pull the paper out of the
printer. (There might be loose toner
on the paper. Be careful not to spill it
on yourself or into the printer.)
Note
If paper is difficult to remove, try
opening the top cover all the way to
release pressure on the paper.
3 Close the rear output bin. Open and
close the top cover to clear the paper
jam message.
If a paper jam message persists, there
is still paper in the printer. Look for
paper in another location (page 90).
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
99
Clearing Jams from the Optional Duplexer
1 Open the duplexer’s rear door.
2 Slowly pull any paper out of the
duplexer.
3 Open and close the top cover to clear
the paper jam message.
4 If the paper jam message persists,
remove the duplexer by lifting it
slightly and pulling it out of the printer.
5 From the rear of the printer, remove
any paper on top of Tray 2. (You might
need to reach inside the printer.)
Continued on the next page.
100
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
6 Slowly pull any paper out of the
duplexer.
7 Turn the duplexer over and remove
any paper.
8 Insert the duplexer into the printer.
9 Open and close the top cover to clear
the paper jam message.
If a paper jam message persists, there
is still paper in the printer. Look for
paper in another location (page 90).
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
101
Solving Repeated Paper Jams
If paper jams occur frequently, try the following:
• Check all the paper jam locations. A piece of paper might be stuck
somewhere in the printer. (See page 91.)
• Check that paper is correctly loaded in the trays, that the trays are
correctly adjusted for the loaded paper size, and that the trays are not
overfilled. Make sure paper is under front and back tabs. (See the sections
on loading paper, starting on page 34.)
• Check that all trays and paper handling accessories are completely
inserted into the printer. (If a tray is opened during a print job, this might
cause a paper jam.)
• Check that all covers and doors are closed. (If a cover or door is opened
during a print job, this might cause a paper jam.)
• Try printing to a different output bin (page 32).
• The sheets might be sticking together. Try bending the stack to separate
each sheet. Do not fan the stack.
• If you are printing from Tray 1, try feeding fewer sheets of paper or fewer
envelopes at a time.
• If printing from the envelope feeder, make sure it is loaded correctly,
pushing the bottom envelope in slightly farther than the top envelopes
(page 51).
• If you are printing small sizes (such as index cards), make sure the paper
is oriented correctly in the tray (page 57). Make sure to feed the short
edge first when loading narrow paper.
• Turn over the stack of paper in the tray. Also try rotating the paper 180°.
• Check the quality of the paper being printed. Damaged or irregular paper
should not be used.
• Use only paper that meets HP specifications (pages A-2 through A-14).
• Avoid using paper that has already been used in a printer or copier.
(Do not print on both sides of envelopes, transparencies, or labels.)
• Check that the power supplied to the printer is steady, and meets printer
specifications (page A-16).
• Clean the printer (page 83).
• Perform routine printer maintenance (page 87).
102
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Understanding Printer Messages
The following table explains messages that might display on the
printer’s control panel. Printer messages and their meanings are
listed in alphabetical order, with numbered messages following.
If a message persists:
•
•
Note
If a message persists requesting that you load a tray, or if a
message indicates that a previous print job is still in the printer’s
memory, press [Go] to print or press [Cancel Job] to clear the
job from the printer’s memory.
If a message persists after performing all of the recommended
actions, contact an HP-authorized service or support provider.
(See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at the
front of this user’s guide.)
Not all messages are described in this user’s guide (many are
self-explanatory).
Some printer messages are affected by the Auto Continue and
Clearable Warning settings from the Configuration Menu in the
printer’s control panel (page B-16).
Using the Printer Online Help System
This printer features an online help system on the control panel that
provides instructions for resolving most printer errors. Certain
control panel messages alternate with instructions on accessing he
online help system.
Whenever a [?] appears in an error message, or the message
alternates with FOR HELP PRESS THE ? KEY, press the [Item] key
to navigate through a sequence of instructions.
Note
EN
To exit the online help system, press [Go].
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
103
Printer Messages
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
ACCESS DENIED
MENUS LOCKED
The printer control panel function you are trying to access has been
locked to prevent unauthorized access.
See your network administrator.
BAD DUPLEXER
CONNECTION
The duplexer is not connected properly.
Re-install the duplexer.
CHECK INPUT
DEVICE
The optional input tray cannot feed paper to the printer because a
door or paper guide is open.
Check the doors and paper guides.
alternates with
PAPER PATH OPEN
PLEASE CLOSE IT
CHECK OUTPUT
DEVICE
The optional output device is not properly connected to the printer. A
proper connection must be made for printing to continue.
alternates with
CLOSE OUTPUT
DELIVERY PATH
CHECKING PAPER
PATH
The engine is rolling its rollers to check for possible paper jams.
CHOSEN LANGUAGE
NOT AVAILABLE
A print job requested a printer language that does not exist in the
printer. The job will not print and will be cleared from memory.
Print the job using a driver for a different printer language, or add the
requested language to the printer (if available).
Press [Go] to continue.
CLOSE TOP COVER
The top cover is open and must be closed for printing to continue.
DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
The EIO disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used.
Remove the EIO disk and replace it with a new one.
DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
Delete files from the EIO disk and then try again. Use HP Resource
Manager to download or delete files and fonts. (See the software help
for more information.)
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
The EIO disk is protected, and no new files can be written to it.
Disable the write protection through HP Resource Manager.
104
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
EIO n DISK
INITIALIZING
The disk accessory card takes a long time to initialize. The first
parameter is the accessory slot number for this disk accessory card.
EIO n DISK
NOT FUNCTIONAL
The EIO disk is not working correctly.
Remove the EIO disk from the slot indicated.
Replace it with a new EIO disk.
EIO n
INITIALIZING
Wait for the message to disappear (approximately 5 minutes). If the
printer EIO card is operating correctly and communicating with the
network, this message disappears after approximately one minute
and no action is required.
If the EIO card is unable to communicate with the network, this
message remains for five minutes and then disappears. In this case
the printer is not communicating with the network (even though the
message is no longer present). The problem may be a bad EIO card,
a bad cable or connection on the network, or a network problem.
Contact your network administrator.
alternates with
DO NOT POWER OFF
EIO n DISK
SPINNING UP
The disk accessory is initializing. The first parameter is the accessory
slot number for this accessory card.
ENV FEEDER LOAD
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested envelope type and size into the envelope feeder.
Make sure the envelope size and type are set correctly from the Paper
Handling Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-5).
Press [Go] if the desired envelope is already loaded in the feeder.
Press [- Value +] to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press
[Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
EXTERNAL DEVICE
INITIALIZING
When an external paper handling device is connected to the printer,
it must initialize after the computer boots or after coming out of
PowerSave mode.
FLASH DEVICE
FAILURE
The flash DIMM had a critical failure and no longer can be used.
Remove the flash DIMM and replace it with a new one.
FLASH FILE
OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
FLASH FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
Delete files from the flash DIMM. Use HP Resource Manager to
download or delete files and fonts. (See the software help for more
information.)
FLASH IS
WRITE PROTECTED
The flash DIMM is protected and no new files can be written to it.
Disable the write protection through HP Resource Manager.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
105
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
INPUT DEVICE
CONDITION xx.yy
An input paper handling device has a condition that needs attention
before printing can resume.
See the documentation that came with the paper handling device for
assistance.
INSTALL TONER
CARTRIDGE
The toner cartridge has been removed and must be replaced for
printing to continue.
INSTALL TRAY X
The specified tray is not installed and must be inserted and closed
for printing to continue.
LOADING
PROGRAM <number>
DO NOT POWER OFF
Programs and fonts can be stored on the printer’s file system. At
bootup time these entities are loaded into RAM. (These entities can
take a long time to load into RAM depending on the size and number
of entities being loaded.) The <number> specifies a sequence
number indicating the current program being loaded.
MANUALLY FEED
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested paper into Tray 1.
Press [Go] if the desired paper is already loaded in Tray 1.
MEMORY FULL
STORED DATA LOST
There is no available memory in the printer. The current job might not
print correctly and some resources (such as downloaded fonts or
macros) might have been deleted.
You might want to add more memory to the printer (page C-1).
MEMORY SETTINGS
CHANGED
The printer changed its memory settings because it did not have
enough memory to use the previous settings for I/O Buffering and
Resource Saving. This usually occurs after removing memory from
the printer, adding a duplexer, or adding a printer language.
You might want to change memory settings for I/O Buffering and
Resource Saving (although default settings are usually best) or add
more memory to the printer (page C-1).
MEMORY SHORTAGE
JOB CLEARED
The printer did not have enough free memory to print the entire job.
The remainder of the job will not print and will be cleared from
memory.
Press [Go] to continue.
Change the Resource Save setting from the printer’s control panel
(page B-14) or add more memory to the printer (page C-1).
MEMORY SHORTAGE
PAGE SIMPLIFIED
The printer had to compress the job in order to fit it in available
memory. Some data loss might have occurred.
Press [Go] to continue.
The print quality of these pages may not be acceptable. Reduce the
complexity of these pages and reprint them.
You might want to add more memory to the printer (page C-1).
OFFLINE
Press [Go] to place the printer online.
alternates with
106
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
OUTPUT BIN FULL
CLEAR (BIN nnn)
The output bin is full and needs to be emptied.
nnn = (bin name)
PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE
To ensure optimum print quality, the printer prompts you to perform
routine maintenance every 200,000 pages. To order a Printer
Maintenance Kit, see page (page 11). (For more information see
page 87.)
RAM DISK DEVICE
FAILURE
The RAM disk had a critical failure and can no longer be used.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on to clear the message.
RAM DISK FILE
OPERATION FAILED
The requested operation could not be performed. You might have
attempted an illegal operation, such as trying to download a file to a
non-existent directory.
RAM DISK FILE
SYSTEM IS FULL
Delete files and then try again, or turn the printer off, and then turn
the printer on to delete all files on the device. (Delete files using HP
Resource Manager or another software utility. See the software help
for more information.)
If the message persists, increase the size of the RAM disk. Change
the RAM disk size from the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control
panel (page B-14). HP Resource manager can also be used to
increase/decrease the RAM disk size.
TONER LOW
See page 80.
TRAY x EMPTY
Load the empty tray (x) to clear the message.
If you do not load the specified tray, the printer will continue printing
from the next available tray, and the message will continue to display.
TRAY x LOAD
[TYPE] [SIZE]
Load the requested paper into the specified tray (x). (See the sections
on loading paper, starting on page 34)
Make sure that the trays are correctly adjusted for size.The tray type
settings (and size for Tray 1) must be set from the printer’s control
panel (page 65).
Load the requested paper into an indicated tray, or press [Select] to
override the message and to print on a loaded paper size.
If printing does not continue, press [Go].
If you are trying to print A4 or letter size paper and this message
appears, make sure the default paper size is set correctly from the
Printing Menu in the printer’s control panel.
Press [Go] to print from the next available tray.
Press [- Value +] to scroll through the available types and sizes.
Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
(or similar messages
requesting that you
load paper)
UNABLE TO
MOPY JOB
EN
Memory or file system failures would not allow a mopy job to occur.
Only one copy will be produced.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
107
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
UNSUPPORTED SIZE
IN TRAY [YY]
An external paper handling device detected an unsupported paper
size. The printer will go offline until the condition is corrected.
USE [TYPE]
[SIZE] INSTEAD?
If the requested paper size or type is not available, the printer asks if
it should use another paper size or type instead.
Press [- Value +] to scroll through the available types and sizes. Press
[Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
WAIT FOR PRINTER
TO REINITIALIZE
The RAM disk setting has been changed from the printer’s control
panel. This change will not take effect until the printer reinitializes.
If you change the mode of the external device, turn the printer off,
turn the printer on and wait for the printer to reinitialize.
WRONG ENVELOPE
FEEDER INSTALLED
The envelope feeder you are trying to install will not work for this
printer.
To order an envelope feeder for the printer, see page 8.
Make sure the envelope feeder is installed correctly (page 50).
XX.YY
PRINTER ERROR
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
A printer error has occurred that can be cleared by pressing [Go] in
the printer’s control panel.
13.x PAPER JAM
[LOCATION]
Remove jammed paper from the specified location (page 90).
Open and close the top cover to clear the message.
Open the top cover.
Remove toner cartridge and clear all paper from underneath the toner
cartridge area.
Caution
Ensure all jammed paper is removed before opening and closing the
top cover.
Open and close the top cover to clear the message.
If the message persists after all jams have been cleared, a sensor
might be stuck or broken. Contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support
pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
20 INSUFFICIENT
MEMORY
The printer received more data than can fit in its available memory.
You might have tried to transfer too many macros, soft fonts, or
complex graphics.
Press [Go] to print the transferred data (some data might be lost),
then simplify the print job or install additional memory (page C-1).
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
108
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
21 PAGE TOO
COMPLEX
The data (dense text, rules, raster or vector graphics) sent to the
printer was too complex.
Press [Go] to print the transferred data. (Some data might be lost.)
To print the job without losing data, from the Configuration Menu in
the printer control panel, set PAGE PROTECT=ON, print the job, and
then return PAGE PROTECT=AUTO. (See page B-14.) Do not leave
PAGE PROTECT=ON; it might degrade performance.
If this message appears often, simplify the print job.
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
22 EIO x
BUFFER OVERFLOW
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
22 PARALLEL I/O
BUFFER OVERFLOW
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
40 EIO x BAD
TRANSMISSION
alternates with
Too much data was sent to the EIO card in the specified slot (x). An
improper communications protocol may be in use.
Press [Go] to clear the message. (Data will be lost.)
Check the host configuration. If this message persists, contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Customer
Care Service and Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
Too much data was sent to the parallel port.
Check for a loose cable connection and be sure to use a high-quality
cable (page 10). (Some non-HP parallel cables might be missing pin
connections or might otherwise not conform to the IEEE-1284
specification.)
This error can occur if the driver you are using is not IEEE-1284
compliant. For best results, use an HP driver that came with the printer
(page 20).
Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
The connection has been broken between the printer and the EIO
card in the specified slot. (Data loss might occur in this situation.)
Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
109
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
41.3 UNEXPECTED
PAPER SIZE
The paper size you are trying to print is not the same as the control
panel setting.
Reload the tray with the correct paper size.
Make sure that the control panel setting is correctly adjusted for size.
(The printer will continue trying to print the job until size settings are
correct.)
If you are printing from the optional 500-sheet paper tray, check the
paper size indication knob located on the right front side of the tray
and set it to the correct paper size.
Ensure all multiple paper feeds are cleared from paper tray areas.
After performing the actions above, press [Go]. The page containing
the error will automatically be reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.
(Or, you might want to press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the
printer’s memory.) See pages 34-40 for information on loading paper.
alternates with
EXPECTED
[TYPE]
41.x
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
A temporary printing error occurred.
Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be
reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.
If the error does not clear, turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
50.x FUSER ERROR
An internal error has occurred. Turn the printer off, and then turn the
printer on.
The message might clear and then reappear when the next print job
is sent. If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or
support provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support
pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
51.x or 52.x
PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
alternates with
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
110
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
53.xy.zz
PRINTER ERROR
There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The DIMM that caused
the error will not be used. Values of x, y, and zz are as follows:
x = DIMM type
0 = ROM
1 = RAM
y = Device location
0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM)
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
zz = Error number
You might need to replace the specified DIMM.
Turn the printer off, and then replace the DIMM that caused the error.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
55.xx PRINTER
ERROR
alternates with
PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE
56.x
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
57.x
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
58.x
PRINTER ERROR
alternates with
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
EN
A temporary printing error occurred.
Press [Go]. The page containing the error will automatically be
reprinted if jam recovery is enabled.
If the error does not clear, turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
111
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
59.x
PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the printer off, then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
alternates with
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
62.x
PRINTER ERROR
There is a problem with the printer’s memory. The x value refers to
the location of the problem:
0 = Internal memory
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
You might need to replace the specified DIMM.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
64
PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
66.xy.zz INPUT
DEVICE FAILURE
An error occurred in an external paper handling device.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
alternates with
CHECK CABLES
AND CYCLE POWER
66.00.xx
Service ERROR
alternates with
CHECK CABLES AND
CYCLE POWER
68 NVRAM ERROR
CHECK SETTINGS
112
An error occurred in an external paper handling device.
Turn the printer off.
Disconnect the cables to all external paper handling devices, and then
reconnect them.
Turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
An error occurred in the printer’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) and
one or more printer settings has been reset to its factory default.
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to determine
which values have changed (page 134).
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Printer Messages (Continued)
Message
Explanation or Recommended Action
68 NVRAM FULL
CHECK SETTINGS
The printer’s nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) is full. Some settings
might have been reset to the factory defaults.
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to determine
which values have changed (page 134).
Hold down [Cancel Job] while turning the printer on. This will clean
up the NVRAM by removing old areas that are not being used.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
69.x
PRINTER ERROR
A temporary printing error occurred.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
If this message persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at
the front of this user’s guide.)
alternates with
CYCLE POWER TO
CONTINUE
79.xxxx
PRINTER ERROR
The printer detected an error. The numbers (xxxx) indicate the
specific type of error.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on. Try printing a job from
a different software application. If the job prints, go back to the first
application and try printing a different file. (If the message only
appears with a certain software application or print job, contact the
software vendor for assistance.)
If the message persists with different software applications and print
jobs, record the numbers that appear (xxxx) and contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the HP Customer
Care Service and Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
8x.yyyy
The EIO accessory in slot x has encountered a critical error as
specified by yyyy.
X Description
1 EIO slot 1 - The printer detected an error with the EIO accessory.
2 EIO slot 2 - The printer detected an error with the EIO accessory.
6 EIO slot 1 - The EIO accessory detected an error. The EIO
accessory may be defective.
7 EIO slot 2 - The EIO accessory detected an error. The EIO
accessory may be defective.
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
Reseat the EIO accessory.
If the error persists, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider or replace the EIO accessory.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
113
Mopy Disk Error Messages
The following table lists the disk error numbers reported on either
the Printer Collation or Job Storage Disk Error page, which is printed
when an error exists. Use the HP Resource Manager for
management of the disk (see page 25).
Mopy Disk Error Messages
Disk
Error
Number
Error Description
Solution
1
Disk volume not present – it
may be uninitialized.
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk. If problem
persists, replace the hard drive.
• RAM disk: Power cycle the printer.
3
A file or directory asked for
could not be found.
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
5
Invalid # of bytes given in a
read/write request.
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
6
Attempt to create a file or
directory that already exists.
• The user has sent a username that is the
same as an existing directory. Change the
username in the driver and resend the job.
15
Bad Disk
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk. If problem
persists, replace the hard drive.
16
No volume label
• Hard disk: Initialize the hard disk. If problem
persists, replace the hard drive.
23
Bad seek request – the
resulting offset would be
negative.
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
24
Unexpected internal error
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
• Disk media problem – initialize the hard disk
or reboot to reinit the RAM disk.
• If the problem persists on a hard drive,
replace the hard drive.
55
Bad file system
• Possible data corruption, delete the job the
error occurred with.
• Disk media problem – initialize the hard disk
or reboot to reinit the RAM disk.
• If the problem persists on a hard drive,
replace the hard drive.
56
Hardware failure
• Replace the hard drive.
114
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Mopy Disk Error Messages (Continued)
Disk
Error
Number
Error Description
Solution
59
The maximum number of
directories has been reached
There is a maximum number of directories that
can be put on a disk. Stored jobs are stored in
directories created for each user. To solve this
problem:
• Delete all jobs stored for a user. The
firmware will automatically delete the
directory for a user with no stored jobs.
• Delete other directories on the disk.
70
Disk Error
• Contact your HP Service and Support
Representative.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
115
Correcting Output Quality Problems
Use the examples below to determine which output quality problem
you are experiencing, then see the following table to troubleshoot
the problem.
Note
The examples below depict letter-size paper that has passed
through the printer short-edge first.
Light Print or Fade
Toner Specks
(front or back)
Gray Background
Toner Smear
Misformed
Characters
Page Skew
Figure 20
116
Dropouts
Lines
Loose Toner
Repeating
Defects
Curl or Wave
Wrinkles or
Creases
Examples of Output Quality Problems
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
✓
Wrinkles or
Creases
✓
✓
Curl or Wave
✓
Page Skew
✓
Misformed
Characters
✓
Repeating
Defects
Loose Toner
✓
Toner Smear
Gray Background
Lines
Dropouts
Toner Specks
Light Print or Fade
✓
✓
1. Print a few more pages to see if the
problem will correct itself.
2. Clean the inside of the printer (page 83)
or use the printer’s cleaning page
(page 86).
✓
3. Make sure EconoMode is off in the
software and in the control panel
(page B-9).
✓ ✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓ ✓
4. Turn over the stack of paper in the tray.
Also try rotating the paper 180°.
✓ ✓ ✓
5. Check the paper (or other print media)
type and quality (pages A-2
through A-14).
✓ ✓
✓
✓
✓
6. Check the printer’s environment
(page A-16).
✓
7. Make sure paper is loaded correctly and
that the guides fit properly against the
paper stack. (See the sections on
loading paper, starting on page 34.)
✓ ✓
8. Print to a different output bin (page 32).
✓
9. Adjust the toner density setting
(page B-9).
✓
✓
10. Change the fuser mode setting to High
(page B-6) or choose rough paper type
from the printer driver (page 65).
✓
11. Redistribute the toner in the toner
cartridge (page 81).
✓
✓
✓ ✓
✓
✓
✓
✓ ✓
✓
✓ ✓
✓ ✓
✓
✓ ✓
EN
Troubleshooting Steps
(Follow the steps in the
order they are listed.)
✓
✓
✓
12. Install a new HP toner cartridge. (See
instructions with the toner cartridge.)
✓
13. To alternate small and standard paper,
from the Configuration Menu set SMALL
PAPER SPEED=SLOW.
✓
14. Order and install the Printer
Maintenance Kit (page 11 and
page 87).
✓
✓
✓ ✓ ✓
15. After trying all the steps suggested
above, contact an HP-authorized
service or support provider. (See the
HP Customer Care Service and
Support pages at the front of this user’s
guide.)
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
117
Determining Printer Problems
Troubleshooting Flowchart
If the printer is not responding properly, use the flowchart to
determine the problem. If the printer does not pass a step, follow
the corresponding troubleshooting suggestions.
If you cannot resolve the problem after following the suggestions in
this user’s guide, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support pages
at the front of this user’s guide.)
Note
1
Macintosh users: For more troubleshooting information, see
page 124.
Does the control panel display READY?
YES
Go to step
2.
NO
The display is
blank and the
printer’s fan is
off.
The display is
blank but the
printer’s fan is
on.
Press any control
panel key to see if
the printer
responds. Turn
the printer off,
and then turn the
Plug the printer
printer on. If this
into a different
does not work,
outlet.
contact an
HP-authorized
Check that the
power supplied to service or
support provider.
the printer is
(See the HP
steady, and
Support pages at
meets printer
the front of this
specifications
user’s guide.)
(page A-16).
Check the power
cord connections
and the power
switch.
118
The display is
in the wrong
language.
Turn the printer
off. Hold down
[Select] while
turning the printer
on. Press
[-Value+] to scroll
through the
available
languages. Press
[Select] to save
the desired
language as the
new default.
Press [Go] to
return to READY.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
The display
shows garbled
or unfamiliar
characters.
A message
other than
READY is
displayed.
Go to page 103.
Make sure the
desired language
is selected from
the control panel.
Turn the printer
off, and then turn
the printer on.
EN
2
Can you print a configuration page?
NO
YES
Go to step
3.
Print a configuration page to
verify that the printer is feeding
paper correctly (page 134).
A
configuration
page does not
print.
Check that all trays are properly
loaded, adjusted, and installed in the
printer. (See the sections on loading
paper, starting on page 34.)
A message other
than READY or
A blank
page prints.
PRINTING
CONFIGURATION
is displayed.
Check that the sealing tape is not still Go to page 103.
in the toner cartridge. (See the getting
started guide or the instructions that
came with the toner cartridge.)
From the computer, check the print The toner cartridge might be empty.
queue or print spooler to see if the Install a new toner cartridge.
printer has been paused. If there are
problems with the current print job,
or if the printer is paused, a
configuration page will not print.
(Press [Cancel Job] and try Step 2
again.)
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
119
3 Can you print from a software application?
NO
YES
Go to step
4
Print a short document from a software
application.
The job will
not print.
If the job will not print, and a message is displayed on the control panel, see
page 103
From the computer, check to see if the printer has been paused.
If the printer is on a network, check that you are printing to the correct printer. To verify
that it is not a network problem, connect the computer directly to the printer with a
parallel cable, change the port to LPT1, and try to print.
Check the interface cable connections. Disconnect and reconnect the cable at the
computer and the printer.
Test the cable by trying it on another computer (if possible).
A PS error
page or list of
commands prints.
The printer might
have received a
nonstandard PS
code. From the
Configuration Menu
in the printer’s
control panel, set
PERSONALITY to
PS for this print job
only. After the job
has printed, return
the setting to AUTO
(page B-14).
If you are using a parallel connection, make sure the cable is IEEE-1284 compliant.
If the printer is on a network, print a configuration page (page 134) and verify in the
Protocol Information that the server name and the node name match the names in the
printer driver.
To verify that it is not a computer problem, print from another computer (if possible).
Make sure the print job is being sent to the correct port (LPT1, or network printer port,
for example).
Check that you are using the proper printer driver (page 24).
Reinstall the printer driver. (See the getting started guide.)
Make sure the print
job is a PS job, and
that you are using
the PS driver.
The printer might
have received PS
code when it is set
to PCL. From the
Configuration
Menu, set
PERSONALITY to
AUTO (page B-14).
Check that the port is configured and working properly. (One way to check this is to
connect another printer to that port and print.)
If printing with the PS driver, from the Printing Menu in the printer’s control panel, set
PRINT PS ERRORS=ON, then print the job again. If an error page prints, see the
instructions in the next column.
From the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel, make sure that
PERSONALITY=AUTO (page B-14).
You might be missing a printer message that could help you solve the problem. From
the Configuration Menu in the printer’s control panel, temporarily turn the Clearable
Warnings and Auto Continue settings off (page B-16) and then print the job again.
120
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
4 Does the job print as expected? (Continued on the following page.)
NO
Print is garbled
or only a
portion of the
page prints.
Check that you are using the proper
printer driver (page 24).
The data file sent to the printer might
be corrupt. To test, try printing it on
another printer (if possible), or try a
different file.
Check the interface cable
connections. Test the cable by trying
it on another computer (if possible).
Printing
stops in the
middle of
the job.
[Cancel Job]
might have been
pressed.
Check that the
power supplied to
the printer is
steady, and
meets printer
specifications
(page A-16).
Print speed is
slower than
expected.
A control panel
setting is not
taking effect.
Simplify the print
job.
Check settings in
the printer driver
or software
application.
(Printer driver
and software
commands
override control
panel settings.)
Add more
memory to the
printer
(page C-1).
Turn banner
pages off. (See
your network
administrator.)
Replace the printer cable with a
high-quality cable (page 10).
Reduce the job’s complexity, print at
a lower resolution (page B-8), or
install more printer memory
(page C-1).
You might be missing a printer
message that could help you solve
the problem. From the Configuration
Menu in the printer’s control panel,
temporarily turn the Clearable
Warnings and Auto Continue settings
off (page B-16) and then print the job
again.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
121
Does the job print as expected? (continued)
YES
Go to step 5.
NO
The print
job is not
formatted
correctly.
Pages are
not fed
correctly or are
damaged.
Check that you are using the proper
printer driver (page 24).
Make sure paper is loaded correctly
and that the guides are not too tight
or too loose against the paper stack.
Check the software settings. (See the (See the sections on loading paper,
software help.)
starting on page 34.)
Try a different font.
Downloaded resources might have
been lost. You might need to
download them again.
There are
print quality
problems.
Adjust the print
resolution
(page B-8).
Check that REt is
on (page B-8).
If you are trying to print A4 paper, the
side guides in the tray might have
Go to page 116.
slipped out of place. (Make sure the
side guides are locked into position.)
If you are having problems printing
custom-size paper, see page 57.
If pages are wrinkled or curled, or if
the image is skewed on the page, see
page 116.
122
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
YES
5 Does the printer select the proper trays,
For other
problems,
check the
Contents, the
Index, or
the printer
software help.
output locations, and paper handling
accessories?
NO
The printer
pulls from the
wrong tray.
Make sure paper trays are correctly
configured for paper size and type
(page 65). Print a configuration
page to see current tray settings
(page 134).
Make sure the tray selection (or
paper type) in the printer driver or
software application is set correctly.
(The printer driver and software
application settings override the
printer’s control panel settings.)
If you do not want to print from
Tray 1, remove any paper loaded in
the tray or change the TRAY 1 MODE
setting to CASSETTE (page 63). By
default, paper loaded in Tray 1 will be
printed first.
If you want to print from Tray 1, but
cannot select the tray from a
software application, see page 63.
EN
An optional
accessory is not
working
properly.
A message other
than READY is
displayed.
Go to page 103.
Print a configuration page to verify
that the accessory is installed
properly and is functional (page 134).
Configure the printer driver for the
installed accessories (see the
software help).
Turn the printer off, and then turn the
printer on.
Verify that you are using the correct
optional accessory for the printer.
If the optional duplexer will not
duplex, check that the rear output bin
is closed.
If the optional duplexer will not
duplex, you might need to install more
memory (page C-1).
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
123
Troubleshooting Flowchart for
Macintosh Users
1
Can you print from a software application?
NO
YES
Go to step 2.
Print a short document from a
software application.
The Macintosh
computer is not
communicating
with the printer.
Make sure the printer’s control panel displays READY
(page 118).
Make sure the correct printer driver is selected in the
left half of the Chooser. Then make sure that the desired
printer name is selected (highlighted) on the right half
of the Chooser. There will be an icon next to the printer
name after the driver has been set up and configured
with the PPD.
Auto Setup
did not
automatically
set up the
printer.
Set up the printer
manually by
selecting
Configure.
Reinstall the
printer software.
(See the getting
started guide.)
If the printer resides on a network with multiple zones,
make sure the correct zone is selected in the AppleTalk
Zones box in the Chooser.
Select an
alternate PPD
(page 126).
Make sure the correct printer has been chosen in the
Chooser by printing a configuration page (page 134).
Make sure the name of the printer displayed on the
configuration page matches the printer in the Chooser.
The PPD might
have been
renamed. If so,
select the
renamed PPD
(page 126).
Make sure AppleTalk is active. (Select this in the
Chooser or in the AppleTalk control panel, whichever is
applicable for your OS version.)
The printer
driver icon
does not
appear in the
Chooser.
Make sure the
Apple
LaserWriter 8
Chooser
extension
resides in the
Extensions
folder.
LaserWriter 8
available in
English only.
If it is not present
anywhere on
your system,
reinstall the HP
printer software
or call HP
Customer Care.
A network queue
might be present.
Make sure the computer and printer are on the same
network. From Control Panels in the Apple menu, select
the Network (or the AppleTalk) control panel and then
choose the correct network (for example, LocalTalk or
EtherTalk).
124
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
2 Does the job print as expected?
YES
For other
problems,
check the
Contents, the
Index, the printer
software help, or
page 118.
NO
The print job is
not sent to the
desired printer.
Another printer with the same or
similar name might have received
the print job. Verify that the printer
name matches the name selected in
the Chooser (page 126).
The computer
cannot be used
while the printer
is printing.
The print job
has incorrect
fonts.
If you are printing an. EPS file, try
downloading the fonts contained in
the .EPS file to the printer before
printing. Use the HP LaserJet Utility
(page 28).
If the document is not printing with
New York, Geneva, or Monaco fonts,
go into the Page Setup dialog box,
and select Options to deselect
substituted fonts.
EN
Turn Background
Printing on in the
Chooser. Status
messages will be
redirected to the
Print Monitor,
allowing the
computer to
continue working
while the printer is
printing.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
125
Selecting an Alternate PPD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note
Open the Chooser from the Apple menu.
Click the LaserWriter 8 icon.
If you are on a network with multiple zones, select the zone in
the AppleTalk Zones box where the printer is located.
Click the printer name you want to use in the Select a
PostScript Printer box. (Double-clicking will immediately
generate the next few steps.)
Click Setup... (This button might read Create for first-time
setup.)
Click Select PPD....
Find the desired PPD in the list and click Select. If the desired
PPD is not listed, choose one of the following options:
• Select a PPD for a printer with similar features.
• Select a PPD from another folder.
• Select the generic PPD by clicking Use Generic. The generic
PPD allows you to print, but limits your access to printer
features.
In the Setup dialog box, click Select, and then click OK to return
to the Chooser.
If you manually select a PPD, an icon might not appear next to the
selected printer in the Select a PostScript Printer box. In the
Chooser, click Setup, click Printer Info, and then click Update Info
to bring up the icon.
9
Close the Chooser.
Renaming the Printer
If you are going to rename the printer, do this before selecting the
printer in the Chooser. If you rename the printer after selecting it in
the Chooser, you will have to go back into the Chooser and
reselect it.
Use the Set Printer Name feature in the HP LaserJet Utility to
rename the printer.
126
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Troubleshooting the Printer Hard Disk
Troubleshooting the Printer Hard Disk
Item
Explanation
Printer does not
recognize the hard disk.
Turn the printer off and verify that the hard disk is inserted correctly
and is securely fastened. Print a configuration page to confirm that
the hard disk has been recognized.
Disk is not initialized.
Use the Windows-based HP Resource Manager or the
Macintosh-based HP LaserJet Utility to initialize the disk.
Disk failure.
Turn the printer off and make sure that the EIO disk is inserted
correctly and securely fastened. If the control panel message
continues to be displayed, the disk drive needs to be replaced.
Disk is write protected.
Fonts and forms cannot be stored on the disk when the disk is write
protected. Use the Windows-based HP LaserJet Resource
Manager or the Macintosh-based HP LaserJet Utility to remove the
write protection from the disk.
Attempted to use a
disk-resident font, but
the printer substituted a
different font.
If you are using PCL, print the PCL Font Page, and verify that the
font is on the disk. If you are using PS, print the PS Font Page and
make sure that the font is on the disk. If the font is not on the disk,
use the HP Resource Manager or the Macintosh-based
HP LaserJet Utility to download the font.
DISK x NOT
INITIALIZED
EIO x DISK
NOT FUNCTIONAL
DISK IS
WRITE PROTECTED
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
127
PS Troubleshooting
PS Troubleshooting
Item
Explanation
A text listing of PS
commands prints
instead of your PS
printing job.
The control panel PERSONALITY=AUTO setting may have been
confused by a nonstandard PS code. Check the PERSONALITY
setting to see if it is set to PS or PCL. If it is set to PCL, set it to
PERSONALITY=AUTO. If it is set to AUTO, set it to PS for this print job
only. When the job has printed, return the setting to AUTO.
The job prints in Courier
(the printer’s default
font) instead of the font
you requested.
The requested typeface is not available in the printer or is not
present on the disk. Use a font download utility to download the
desired font.
Fonts downloaded to memory are lost when the printer is turned
off. They are also lost if Resource Saving is not used and a
personality switch is performed to print a PCL job. Disk fonts are
not affected by PCL jobs or by turning the printer off.
Print a PS Font Page to verify that the font is available. If a disk font
appears to be missing, it may be because a software utility was
used to delete the font, because the disk was re-initialized, or
because the disk drive is not installed correctly. Print a configuration
page to verify that the disk drive is installed and functioning
correctly.
Print a Disk Directory to help identify available fonts.
A page prints with
clipped margins.
If the page margins are clipped, you may have to print the page at
300-dpi resolution or install more memory. Also try turning off
Resource Saving and I/O Buffering.
A page fails to print.
Set PRINT PS ERRORS=ON, and then send the job again to print a
PS error page. If this does not identify the problem, try turning off
Resource Saving and I/O Buffering or installing more memory. (See
page 136 for more information about PS printing.)
A PS error page prints.
Make sure the print job is a PS job.
Check to see whether your software expected you to send a setup
or PS header file to the printer.
Check the printer setup in your software application to make sure
that the printer is selected.
Check cable connections to ensure that they are secure.
Reduce the complexity of the graphic.
Add available memory by turning on Resource Saving.
128
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Troubleshooting HP Fast InfraRed
Receiver Problems
Troubleshooting HP Fast InfraRed Receiver Problems
Item
Explanation
FIR port status
indicator does not
light up.
Make sure that the printer is in READY mode and that the FIR port
you are printing from is IRDA-compliant and within the range of
operation described in the user guide for the HP Fast InfraRed
Receiver.
Make sure that the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver is properly connected
to the printer.
Print a configuration page (see page 134). Make sure that “FIR POD
(IRDA Compliant)” is printed under Installed Personalities and
Options.
Connection cannot be
established or seems to
take longer than usual.
Use a device that is IRDA-compliant; look for an IRDA symbol on
the device or see the computer’s user guide for IRDA specifications.
Make sure that the operating system on your computer includes an
FIR driver and your application uses an HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 N,
4050 T, 4050 TN, or compatible driver. (Note that complex pages
take longer to print.)
Position the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver within the range of operation
described in the user guide for the HP Fast InfraRed Receiver. Make
sure that no object is blocking the connection. (This object could be
a hand, paper, books, or even bright light.)
Make sure that the two IR ports are clean (free from dirt and grease).
Bright light of any kind (sunlight, incandescent light, fluorescent
light, or light from an infrared remote control, such as those used
for TVs and VCRs) shining directly into one of the IR ports might
cause interference. Make sure that no bright light is shining directly
into either IR port.
Position the portable device closer to the FIR port on the printer.
The printer prints only
part of a page or
document.
The connection has been broken during transmission. If you move
the portable device during transmission, the connection can be
broken. IRDA-compliant devices are designed to recover from
temporary connection interruptions. You have up to 40 seconds to
re-establish the connection (depending on the portable device
being used).
The print job has been
properly sent, but the
printer will not print.
If the connection is broken before the entire print job has been
transmitted to the printer (printing has not yet started), the printer
may not print any of the job. Press [Cancel Job] to clear the printer’s
memory. Then, reposition the portable device within the range of
operation described in the user guide for the HP Fast InfraRed
Receiver, and print the job again.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
129
Troubleshooting HP Fast InfraRed Receiver Problems (Continued)
Item
Explanation
The FIR status
indicator turns off
during transmission.
The connection might have been broken. Press [Cancel Job] to
clear the printer’s memory. Then, reposition the portable device
within the range of operation described in the user guide for the
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver, and print the job again.
PS print job will not
print.
Check the configuration in the PostScript Tab of Windows: check
that Protocol is set to AppleTalk and Binary Data is not selected.
130
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Communicating with an Optional
HP JetDirect Print Server
If the printer contains an optional HP JetDirect print server, and you
cannot communicate with the printer over the network, verify the
operation of the print server. Check the HP JetDirect configuration
page. (To print a configuration page, see page 134.) If the message,
“I/O CARD READY” does not appear on the HP JetDirect
configuration page, see the troubleshooting section of the
HP JetDirect Print Server Software Installation Guide.
HP JetDirect 10/100TX print server
If the printer contains an optional HP JetDirect 10/100TX print
server, check to see that the print server was able to link to the
network:
Check the link-speed indicators (10 or 100) on the print server. If
both are off, the print server failed to link to the network.
Check the HP JetDirect configuration page. The message “LOSS
OF CARRIER ERROR” indicates that the print server failed to link
to the network.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
131
If the print server failed to link, verify that all cables are correctly
connected. If all cables are correctly connected and the print server
still fails to link, follow the steps below to reconfigure the print server:
1
2
3
4
5
132
Turn off the printer and remove the HP JetDirect 10/100TX print
server.
Use jumpers P1, P2, and P3 to manually configure the print
server for either 10 or 100 Mbps (megabits per second) link
speed, and Full- or Half-duplex operation according to the table
below:
Print Server Operation
Jumper P1
Jumper P2
Jumper P3
Autonegotiation Enabled
AUTO
—
—
100 Half-duplex
(not AUTO)
100
H
100 Full-duplex
(not AUTO)
100
(not H)
10 Half-duplex
(not AUTO)
(not 100)
H
10 Full-duplex
(not AUTO)
(not 100)
(not H)
Reinstall the print server.
Verify that the configuration of the connecting network device
(such as a 10/100TX network switch) matches. For example, to
set the print server for 100TX Full-duplex operation, the port on
the network switch must also be set for 100TX Full-duplex
operation.
Turn the printer off and back on and check the print server
operation. If the print server fails to link, contact a local
HP-authorized dealer or service representative.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Checking the Printer’s Configuration
From the printer’s control panel, you can print pages that give details
about the printer and its current configuration. The following
information pages are described here:
•
•
•
Menu Map
Configuration Page
PCL or PS Font List
For a complete list of the printer’s information pages, see the
Information Menu in the printer’s control panel (page B-4).
Menu Map
To see the current settings for the menus and items available in the
control panel, print a control panel menu map:
1
2
3
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
Press [Item] until PRINT MENU MAP appears.
Press [Select] to print the menu map.
You might want to store the menu map near the printer for reference.
The content of the menu map varies, depending on the options
currently installed in the printer. (Many of these values can be
overridden from the printer driver or software application.)
For a complete list of control panel items and possible values, see
page B-1. To change a control panel setting, see page 15.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
133
Configuration Page
Use the configuration page to view current printer settings, to help
troubleshoot printer problems, or to verify installation of optional
accessories, such as memory (DIMMs), paper trays, and printer
languages.
Note
If an HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet
4050 N/4050 TN printers), an HP JetDirect configuration page will
print out as well.
To print a configuration page:
1
2
3
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
Press [Item] until PRINT CONFIGURATION appears.
Press [Select] to print the configuration page.
Figure 21 is a sample configuration page. Numbers in the sample
printout match the numbers in the table. The content of the
configuration page varies, depending on the options currently
installed in the printer.
134
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
Figure 21
Sample Configuration Page
1 Printer Information
Lists the serial number, HP JetSend IP addresses, page
counts, and other information for the printer.
2 Event Log
Lists the number of entries in the log, the maximum number
of entries viewable, and the last three entries.
3 Installed Personalities and
Options
Lists all printer languages that are installed (such as PCL and
PS) and lists options that are installed in each DIMM slot and
EIO slot.
4 Memory
Lists printer memory, PCL Driver Work Space (DWS), and I/O
buffering and resource saving information.
5 Security
Lists the status of the printer’s control panel lock, control panel
password, and disk drive.
6 Paper Trays and Options
Lists the size settings for all trays and lists optional paper
handling accessories that are installed.
7 HP TonerGauge
Shows the amount of toner available in the toner cartridge.
EN
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
135
PCL or PS Font List
Use the font lists to see which fonts are currently installed in the
printer. (The font lists also show which fonts are resident on an
optional hard disk or flash DIMM.)
To print a PCL or PS font list:
1
2
3
Press [Menu] until INFORMATION MENU appears.
Press [Item] until PRINT PCL FONT LIST or PRINT PS FONT
LIST appears.
Press [Select] to print the font list.
The PS font list shows the PS fonts installed, and gives a sample
of those fonts. The following describes the information that can be
found on the PCL font list:
•
•
•
Note
For step-by-step instructions on using printer commands to select
a font with DOS applications, see page D-5.
•
•
136
Font gives the font names and samples.
Pitch/Point indicates the pitch and point size of the font.
Escape Sequence (a PCL 5e programming command) is used
to select the designated font. (See the legend at the bottom of
the font list page.)
Font # is the number used to select fonts from the printer’s
control panel (not the software application). Do not confuse the
font # with the font ID, described below. The number indicates
the DIMM slot where the font is stored.
• SOFT: Downloaded fonts, which stay resident in the printer
until other fonts are downloaded to replace them, or until the
printer is turned off.
• INTERNAL: Fonts that permanently reside in the printer.
Font ID is the number you assign to soft fonts when you
download them through software.
Chapter 4: Problem Solving
EN
5
Service and Support
Warranty Information
For warranty information, see page 139. You can also locate the
printer’s warranty on the World Wide Web. (See the HP Customer
Care Service and Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
Service During and After the Warranty Period
•
•
•
If printer hardware fails during the warranty period, contact an
HP-authorized service or support provider. (See the
HP Customer Care Service and Support pages at the front of
this user’s guide.)
If printer hardware fails after the warranty period, and you have
an HP Maintenance Agreement or HP Support Pack, request
service as specified in the agreement.
If you do not have an HP Maintenance Agreement or
HP Support Pack, contact an HP-authorized service or support
provider. (See the HP Customer Care Service and Support
pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
If you are shipping equipment to be serviced, use the repacking
guidelines on the following page.
Note
EN
See the front of this user’s guide for HP Customer Care Service and
Support offerings.
Chapter 5: Service and Support
137
Guidelines for Repacking the Printer
•
•
•
Caution
To prevent damage to the toner cartridge, store the cartridge in its
original packing material, or store it so that it is not exposed to light.
•
•
•
•
138
Remove and retain any DIMMs (dual in-line memory modules)
installed in the printer (page C-3).
Remove and retain any optional accessories installed in the
printer (such as the duplexer or hard disk).
Remove and retain the toner cartridge.
Use the original shipping container and packing material, if
possible. (Shipping damage as a result of inadequate packing
is the customer’s responsibility.) If you have already disposed
of the printer’s packing material, contact a local mailing service
for information on repacking the printer.
If possible, include print samples and 50-100 sheets of paper
or any other media that is not printing correctly.
Include a completed copy of the Service Information Form
(page 142).
HP recommends insuring the equipment for shipment.
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Hewlett-Packard Limited Warranty
Statement
HP PRODUCT
DURATION OF WARRANTY
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 N,
4050 T, 4050 TN
1 year, return to HP or
Authorized Dealer
1. HP warrants to you, the end-user customer, that HP hardware, accessories and
supplies will be free from defects in materials and workmanship after the date of
purchase, for the period specified above. If HP receives notice of such defects
during the warranty period, HP will, at its option, either repair or replace products
which prove to be defective. Replacement products may be either new or
equivalent in performance to new.
2. HP warrants to you that HP software will not fail to execute its programming
instructions after the date of purchase, for the period specified above, due to
defects in material and workmanship when properly installed and used. If HP
receives notice of such defects during the warranty period, HP will replace
software which does not execute its programming instructions due to such
defects.
3. HP does not warrant that the operation of HP products will be uninterrupted or
error free. If HP is unable, within a reasonable time, to repair or replace any
product to a condition as warranted, you will be entitled to a refund of the
purchase price upon prompt return of the product.
4. HP products may contain remanufactured parts equivalent to new in performance
or may have been subject to incidental use.
5. Warranty does not apply to defects resulting from (a) improper or inadequate
maintenance or calibration, (b) software, interfacing, parts or supplies not supplied
by HP, (c) unauthorized modification or misuse, (d) operation outside of the
published environmental specifications for the product, or (e) improper site
preparation or maintenance.
6. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE ABOVE WARRANTIES ARE
EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR CONDITION, WHETHER
WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND HP SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. Some countries, states or provinces do not allow
limitations on the duration of an implied warranty, so the above limitation or
exclusion might not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and
you might also have other rights that vary from country to country, state to state, or
province to province.
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
139
7. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LOCAL LAW, THE REMEDIES IN THIS
WARRANTY STATEMENT ARE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
EXCEPT AS INDICATED ABOVE, IN NO EVENT WILL HP OR ITS SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF DATA OR FOR DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING LOST PROFIT OR DATA), OR OTHER
DAMAGE, WHETHER BASED IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE. Some
countries, states or provinces do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental
or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to
you.
THE WARRANTY TERMS CONTAINED IN THIS STATEMENT, EXCEPT TO THE
EXTENT LAWFULLY PERMITTED, DO NOT EXCLUDE, RESTRICT OR MODIFY
AND ARE IN ADDITION TO THE MANDATORY STATUTORY RIGHTS APPLICABLE
TO THE SALE OF THIS PRODUCT TO YOU.
140
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Limited Warranty for Toner Cartridge Life
Note
The warranty below applies to the toner cartridge that came with
this printer.
This warranty supersedes all previous warranties (7/19/96).
HP toner cartridges are warranted to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship until the HP toner is depleted. The
warranty covers any defects or malfunctions in a new
Hewlett-Packard toner cartridge.
How long does the coverage The coverage lasts until the HP toner is depleted, at which time
the warranty expires.
last?
How do I know when the HP The TONER LOW message on the printer’s control panel display
provides the first indication that toner is low. (Toner will likely run
toner is running out?
out in the next 100-300 sheets of paper.)
What will HP do?
HP will, at HP’s option, either replace products which prove to be
defective or refund the purchase price. If possible, please attach
a print-out sample illustrating what the defective cartridge is
printing.
What does this warranty not The warranty does not cover cartridges which have been refilled,
are emptied, are abused, are misused, or are tampered with in
cover?
any way.
How do I return the faulty
cartridge?
In the event the cartridge proves to be defective, complete the
Service Information Form (page 142) and attach a print sample
illustrating the defect. Return the form and cartridge to the place
of purchase, where the cartridge will be replaced.
How does State, Province or This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
also have other rights which vary from state to state, province to
Country Law apply?
province, or country to country. This limited warranty is the sole
warranty on the HP toner cartridge and supersedes any other
warranty relating to this product.
IN NO EVENT SHALL HEWLETT-PACKARD COMPANY BE
LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL,
INDIRECT, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OR LOST
PROFITS FROM ANY BREACH OF THIS WARRANTY OR
OTHERWISE.
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
141
Service Information Form
WHO IS RETURNING THE EQUIPMENT?
Date:
Person to contact:
Phone: (
)
Alternate contact:
Phone: (
)
Return shipping address:
Special shipping instructions:
WHAT IS BEING SENT?
Model name:
Model number:
Serial number:
Please attach any relevant print-outs when returning equipment. DO NOT ship accessories that are not required to
complete the repair (manuals, cleaning supplies, etc.).
WHAT NEEDS TO BE DONE? (Attach a separate sheet if necessary.)
1. Describe the conditions of the failure. (What was the failure? What were you doing when
the failure occurred? What software were you running? Is the failure repeatable?)
2. If the failure is intermittent, how much time elapses between failures?
3. Is the unit connected to any of the following? (Give manufacturer and model number.)
Personal computer:
Modem:
Network:
4. Additional comments:
HOW WILL YOU PAY FOR THE REPAIR?
❏ Under warranty
Purchase/received date: ______________________
(Enclose proof of purchase or receiving document with original received date.)
❏ Maintenance contract number: ______________________
❏ Purchase order number: ______________________
Except for contract and warranty service, a purchase order number and/or authorized
signature must accompany any request for service. If standard repair prices do not apply,
a minimum purchase order is required. Standard repair prices may be obtained by contacting
an HP-authorized Repair Center.
Authorized signature: ______________________________
Billing address:
142
Phone: ________________
Special billing instructions:
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
HP Software License Terms
ATTENTION: USE OF THE SOFTWARE IS SUBJECT TO THE HP SOFTWARE LICENSE
TERMS SET FORTH BELOW. USING THE SOFTWARE INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF
THESE LICENSE TERMS. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE LICENSE TERMS, AND THE
SOFTWARE IS BUNDLED WITH ANOTHER PRODUCT, YOU MAY RETURN THE ENTIRE
UNUSED PRODUCT FOR A FULL REFUND.
The following License Terms govern your use of the accompanying Software unless you have a
separate signed agreement with HP.
License Grant
HP grants you a license to Use one copy of the Software. “Use” means storing, loading, installing,
executing, or displaying the Software. You may not modify the Software or disable any licensing
or control features of the Software. If the Software is licensed for “concurrent use”, you may not
allow more than the maximum number of authorized users to Use the Software concurrently.
Ownership
The Software is owned and copyrighted by HP or its third party suppliers. Your license confers
no title to, or ownership in, the Software and is not a sale of any rights in the Software. HP’s third
party suppliers may protect their rights in the event of any violation of these License Terms.
Copies and Adaptations
You may only make copies or adaptations of the Software for archival purposes or when copying
or adaptation is an essential step in the authorized Use of the Software. You must reproduce all
copyright notices in the original Software on all copies or adaptations. You may not copy the
Software onto any public network.
No Disassembly or Decryption
You may not disassemble or decompile the Software unless HP’s prior written consent is obtained.
In some jurisdictions, HP’s consent may not be required for limited disassembly or decompilation.
Upon request, you will provide HP with reasonably detailed information regarding any disassembly
or decompilation. You may not decrypt the Software unless decryption is a necessary part of the
operation of the Software.
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
143
Transfer
Your license will automatically terminate upon any transfer of the Software. Upon transfer, you
must deliver the Software, including any copies and related documentation, to the transferee. The
transferee must accept these License Terms as a condition to the transfer.
Termination
HP may terminate your license upon notice for failure to comply with any of these License Terms.
Upon termination, you must immediately destroy the Software, together with all copies,
adaptations, and merged portions in any form.
Export Requirements
You may not export or reexport the Software or any copy or adaptation in violation of any applicable
laws or regulations.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
The Software and any accompanying documentation have been developed entirely at private
expense. They are delivered and licensed as “commercial computer software” as defined in
DFARS 252.227-7013 (Oct 1988), DFARS 252.211-7015 (May 1991), or DFARS 252.227-7014
(Jun 1995), as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101 (a), or as “Restricted computer
software” as defined in FAR 52.227-19 (Jun 1987) (or any equivalent agency regulation or contract
clause), whichever is applicable. You have only those rights provided for such Software and any
accompanying documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the HP standard
software agreement for the product involved.
144
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Worldwide Sales and Service Offices
Note
Before calling an HP Sales and Service office, be sure to contact the
appropriate Customer Care Center number listed in the “HP Customer
Care Service and Support” section. Products should not be returned
to these offices. Product return information is also available through
the appropriate HP Customer Care Center in “HP Customer Care
Service and Support” on page viii.
Europe
Albania
Gener-Al sh.p.k.
Hewlett-Packard Distributor
Tirana Trade Centre
Rr. 'Durresit'
Tirana
Phone Number: +355-42-23519
Fax: +355-42-27966
Austria
Wien
Hewlett-Packard Ges.m.b.H
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Lieblgasse1
1222 Vienna
Phone Number: 01/25000-7006
Fax: 01/25000-6558
Belarus
Belhard
709, 2 Melnicayte Street
Minsk 220600
Phone Number: 375-172-238985
Fax: 375-172-268426
Belgium
Bulgaria
S&T Bulgaria Ltd.
Hewlett-Packard Distributor
2, "Iatashka" St.
Sofia 1618
Phone Number: +359-2-955 9573
Fax: +359-2-955 9290
Croatia (local name: Hrvatska)
Hermes-Plus
Hewlett-Packard Distributor
Slandrove 2
SE 1231 Crnuce
Phone Number: 38-512 331061
Fax: 38-512 331930
Cyprus
Handled by G-Systems, Greece
Czech Republic
Hewlett-Packard
Ceskoslovenski sro
Novodvorska 82
14200 Praha 414
Phone Number: +420-2-613-07310
Fax: +420-2-474 3293
Denmark
Hewlett-Packard Belgium S.A./N.V.
Boulevard de la Woluwe 100-102
B 1200 Brussels
Phone Number: (32/2) 778-34-17
Fax: (32/2) 778-34-14
Hewlett-Packard A/S
Kongevejen 25
DK-3460 Birkerød
Phone Number: (45) 45 99-10-00
Fax: (45) 45-82-06-30
E-Mail Address: test_measurement@hp.dk
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
145
Finland
Hannover
Hewlett-Packard Oy
Street Address:
Piispankalliontie 17
02200 ESPOO
Finland
P.O.Box Address:
P.O. Box 68
02201 ESPOO
Phone Number: 358-9-8872 2100
Fax: 358-9-8872 2923
E-Mail Address: tmodirect@finland.hp.com
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Baumschulenallee 20-22
30625 Hannover
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
France
Hewlett-Packard France
Test et Mesure
Z.A. de Courtaboeuf
1 Avenue du Canada
91947 Les Ulis
Phone Number: 01 69 29 41 14
Fax: 01 69 29 65 09
Germany
Böblingen
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Postfach 14 30
71004 Böblingen
Phone Number: 0180/524-63 30
Fax: 0180/524-63 31
Bad Homburg
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Hewlett-Packard Straße 1
61352 Bad Homburg
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
Berlin
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Lützowplatz 15
10785 Berlin
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
Hamburg
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Überseering 16
22297 Hamburg
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
146
Chapter 5: Service and Support
Leipzig
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Wehlitzer Strasse 2
04435 Schkeuditz
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
München
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Eschenstraße 5
82024 Taufkirchen
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
Nürnberg
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Emmericher Straße 13
90411 Nürnberg
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
Ratingen
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Pempelfurt Straße 1
40882 Ratingen
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
Waldbronn (Karlsruhe)
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Hewlett-Packard-Str. 8
76337 Waldbronn
Phone Number: 0180/524-6330
Fax: 0180/524-6331
Hewlett-Packard GmbH
Herrenberger Straße 130
7030 Böblingen
Phone Number: (49) 7031/14-0
Fax: (49) 7031/14-2999
EN
Greece
Milan
G-Systems
Hewlett-Packard Distributor
76, Ymittou Street
11634 Athens
Phone Number: (30/1) 7264045
Fax: (30/1) 7264020
Phone Number: (39/2) 92-122-241
Fax: (39/2) 92-104 069
Kazakhstan
Scan East
Karasat-Batyr street 82
Almaty 480012
Phone Number: 7-3272-622020
Fax: 7-3272-621843
Hungary
Hewlett-Packard Magyarorszag
KFT. Erzsébet
királyne útja 1/c
1146 Budapest
Phone Number: (36) 1 4618110
Fax: (36) 1 4618222
Ireland
Hewlett-Packard Ireland Limited
Hewlett-Packard House
Stradbrook Road
Blackrock, Co.
Dublin Ireland
Phone Number: 01 615 8222
Fax: 01 284 5134
Italy
Macedonia, The Former
Yugoslav Republic of
Hermes-Plus
Hewlett-Packard Distributor
Celovska 73
61000 Ljubljana
Slovenia
Phone Number: 61/193322
Fax: 61/55597
Netherlands
Hewlett-Packard Nederland B.V.
Postbox 667
1180 AR Amstelveen
Netherlands
Phone Number: (31/20) 547-6669
Fax: (31/20) 547-7765
Napoli
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via Emanuele Gianturco, 92/G
80146 Napoli (Na)
Phone Number: (39/81) 0-73-40-100
Fax: (39/81) 0-73-40-216
Roma Eur
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Viale del Tintoretto, 200
00142 Roma Eur
Phone Number: (39/6) 54-831
Fax: (39/6) 54-01-661
Torino
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via Praglia 15
10044 Pianezza (To)
Phone Number: (39/11) - 9685.1
Fax: (30/11) - 968.5899
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
For information on any products or services call:
02 92 122 241
Hewlett-Packard Italiana S.p.A.
Via G. di Vittorio 9
20063 Cernudsco s/N
EN
Norway
Hewlett-Packard Norge AS
Drammensveien 169
Postboks 60 Skøyen
N-0212 OSLO
Phone Number: +47 22 73 57 59
Fax: +47 22 73 56 19
E-Mail Address:
test_measurement@norway.hp.com
Poland
Hewlett-Packard Polska
Ochota Park Office
Aleje Jerozolimskie 181 02-222 Warszawa
Phone Number: +48 (22) 6087700
Fax: +48 (022) 6087600
Portugal
Hewlett-Packard Portugal S.A.
Av. Marginal, Ed. Parque Oceano
Piso 5°-G-St° Amaro de Oeiras
2780 Oeiras
Phone Number: (353/1) 482 8500
Fax: (353/1) 441-7071
Chapter 5: Service and Support
147
Romania
Madrid
S&T Romania SRL
Hewlett-Packard Distributor
Centrul Sitraco-Plata Unirii
Bd. Dimitries Cantemir 1
Etaj II-210 Sector 4
Phone Number: +40 1 250 6175
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.
Crta N-VI km 16,500
28230 Las Rozas, Madrid
Phone Number: (34/91) 6311323
Fax: (34/91) 6311469
Bucuresti
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.
Avda. Luis de Morales, 32
Edifico Forum, planta 3&supa;, mòdulo1
41018 Sevilla
Phone Number: 34-95-455 2600
Fax: 34-95-455 2626
Phone Number: (40/1) 3307320
Additional phone number(s): (40/1) 3307217,
(40/1) 3307218
Fax: (40/1) 3307310
Service Hot Line: (40/1) 3307300
Sevilla
Valencia
Russian Federation
Hewlett-Packard Company
Representative Office
Kosmodamianskaya naberezhnaya 52, Bldg. 1
113054 Moscow
Phone Number: +7 (095) 9169811
Fax: +7 (095) 916848
Slovakia (Slovak Republic)
S&T Slovakia
Hewlett-Packard Distributor
Polianky 5
SK 844 J4 Bratislava
Phone Number: (+4217) 82 20 26 or 82 20 98
Fax: (421) 7 763408
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.
Plaza de América, 2 2 B
Edificio Zurich
46004 Valencia
Phone Number: 34-96-398 2200
Fax: 34-96-398 2230
Vizcaya
Avda de Sugaazarte
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.
Avda de Zugazarte, 8
Edif El Abra, 4
48930 Las Arenas, Guecho
Phone Number: 34-94-481 80 00
Fax: 34-94-481 80 40
Sweden
Slovenia
Kista
Hermes-Plus
Hewlett-Packard Distributor
Slandraa 2
1231 Ljubljana-Crnuce
Phone Number: (386) 61-1895 200
Fax: (386) 61 1895 201
Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB
Skalholtsgatan 9
164 97 Kista
Phone Number: (46/8) 444 22 77
Fax: (46/8) 444 25 25
E-Mail Address:
test-measurement@sweden.hp.com
Spain
Göteborg
Barcelona
Hewlett-Packard Española, S.A.
Avda. Diagonal, 605
08028 Barcelona
Phone Number: 34 93 401 91 00
Fax: 34 93 430 84 68
148
Chapter 5: Service and Support
Hewlett-Packard Sverige AB
Vädursgatan 6
Box 5328
S-402 27 GÖTEBORG
Sweden
Phone Number: (46/31) 35 18 00
Fax: (46/31) 35 18 99
EN
Switzerland
Berne
Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG
Elektronische Meßtechnik
Meriedweg 11
3172 Niederwangen/Bern
Phone Number: (01) 735 72 36
Fax: (01) 735 77 03
Geneva
Hewlett-Packard (Suisse) SA
Elektronische Meßtechnik 39, rue de Veyrot
1217 Meyrin 1
Phone Number: (01) 735 72 36
Fax: (01) 735 77 03
Zürich
Hewlett-Packard (Schweiz) AG
Elektronische Meßtechnik
In der Luberzen 29
8902 Urdorf/Zürich
Phone Number: (01) 735 72 36
Fax: (01) 735 77 03
Turkey
Ankara
Hewlett-Packard
Bilgisayar ve Ölçüm Sistemleri A.Þ.
Karum Ýþ Merkezi No:461 (B-Asansörü)
Ýran Cad.No.21
06680, Kavaklýdere - Ankara
Phone Number: (90/312) 468 87 70
Fax: (90/312) 468 87 78
Ukraine
S&T Ukraine Ltd.
50, Popudrenko Street
243660 Kiev
Phone Number: 380-44-559 4763
Fax: 380-44-559 5033
United Kingdom
Hewlett-Packard Limited (T4)
Cain Road
Bracknell
Berkshire
RG12 1HN
Phone Number: 01344 366666
Fax: 01344 362852
Contact HP
E-Mail Address: uktmo_sales@hp.com
Uzbekistan
ABM Worldwide Technologies
15, Movaraunnakhr Street
Tashkent 700060
Phone Number: 7-3712-1333689
Fax: 7-3712-406485
Yugoslavia
IBIS Instruments
Pariske Komune 22
11070 N. Beograd
Phone Number: 381-11-609650
Fax: 381-11-699627
Ýstanbul
Hewlett-Packard
Bilgisayar ve Ölçüm Sistemleri A.Þ.
19 Mayýs caddesi
Nova/Baran Plaza K.12
Þiþli 80220
Ýstanbul
Phone Number: (90/212) 224 59 25 (12 lines)
Fax: (90/212) 224 59 39
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
149
Latin America and
South America
Argentina
Hewlett-Packard Argentina
Montañeses 2140
1428 Buenos Aires
Phone Number: (54 1) 787-7115
Fax: (54 1) 787-7287
Belize
Atendido por El Salvador
Bolivia
Chile
ASC. S.A. (Multi-Industry)
Los Alerces 2363
Santiago, Chile
Phone Number: (56-2) 237-0707
Fax: (56-2) 239-7179
COASIN Chile Ltda. (Telecom)
Holanda 1292
Santiago, Chile
Phone Number: (562) 225-0643
Fax: (562) 274-4588
Rimpex Chile (Datacom)
Avda. Pedro de Valdivia 1646
Santiago, Chile
Phone Number: 562-340-7701/7702
Fax: 562-274-4107
Atendido por Uruguay
Colombia
Brazil
São Paulo
Hewlett-Packard Brazil
Alameda Rio Negro, 750
06454-000 Alphaville, Barueri
São Paulo, Brazil
Phone Number: (55-11) 7296-8155/8160
Additional phone number(s):
HP DIRECT: 0 800 130-266
Fax: (55-11) 7296-8171
Instrumentación Ltda.
Calle 115 No. 11-A-10
Bogotá, Colombia
Phone Number: (57-1) 612-1313
Fax: (57-1) 612-0805
Sycom, S.A. (Datacom)
Avenida El Dorado 9010
Bogotá, Colombia
Phone Number: (57-1) 410-1303
Fax: (57-1) 410-1196
Costa Rica
Rio de Janeiro
Hewlett-Packard Brasil
Rua Lauro Mueller, 116
Grupo 803 Edifício Torre Rio Sul
22290-160 Botafogo
Rio de Janeiro
Phone Number: (55-21) 541-4404
Fax: (55-21) 295-2195
COASIN COSTA RICA, S.A.
Del Centro Cultural en San Pedro
200 Mts Norte, 25 Mts Oeste
Casa # 3552
San José, Costa Rica
Phone Number: (506) 283-8325
Fax: (506) 225-6349
Dominican Republic
Esacomp, S.A.
Calle Seminario No. 55
Ens. Piantini
Santo Domingo, República Dominicana
Phone Number: (809) 563-6350
Fax: (809) 565-0332
150
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Ecuador
Paraguay
Complementos Electrónicos S.A.
Av. General Enriquez 1800
San Rafael, Ecuador
Phone Number: (593-2) 334257
Fax: (593-2) 331595
Atendido por Uruguay
El Salvador
SETISA
Col. Roma
Pje. Carbonell, No. 28
San Salvador, El Salvador
Phone Number: (503) 223-0993
Fax: (503) 279-2077
Guatemala
EPTEL
12 Ave. 17-35 Zona 10
Guatemala
Phone Number: (502) 363-0423
Fax: (502) 363-0443
Honduras
Atendido por Setisa, El Salvador
Mexico
Hewlett-Packard de México SA de CV
Dr. Atl No. 1, Desp. 102
Edif. Tepeyac
Zona Rio
22320 Tijuana, B.C. México
Phone Number: (66) 34-38-01
Fax: (66) 34-38-04
Hewlett-Packard de México, S.A. de C.V.
Prolongación Reforma 700
Col. Lomas de Santa Fé
01210 Mexico, D.F.
Phone Number: (52-5) 258-4389/258-4392
Fax: (52-5)258-4301
HP DIRECT: 01-800-506-4800
Hewlett-Packard de Mexico S.A. de C.V.
Rio Nilo 4049-12
Cd. Juarez, Chih. 32310
Mexico
Phone Number: (52-16) 11-0777
Fax: (52-16) 13-7622
Peru
COASIN Peru S.A. (Redes Privadas)
Calle 1 - No. 891 CORPAC
Lima 27, Peru
Phone Number: (511) 224-3380
Fax: (511) 224-1509
SATEL S.A. (Gobierno y redes publicas)
Enrique Palacios No. 155
Lima 18 - Peru
Phone Number: (511) 446-2253/241-8085/
446-0281
Fax: (511) 444-0305
Trinidad and Tobago
Borde Communications
1 Valsayn Road
Curepe, P.O. Box 897
Port-of-Spain, Trinidad
Phone Number: (809) 663-2087
Fax: (809) 645-3352
United States
Hewlett-Packard Company
5200 Blue Lagoon Dr., #950
Miami, FL 33126
Phone Number: 305-265-5561
Fax: 305-267-4288
E-Mail Address: britton_bentley@hp.com
Uruguay
Conatel S.A.
Ejido 1690
Montevideo, Uruguay
Phone Number: (598) 2-920314
Fax: (598) 2-920660
Venezuela
Hewlett-Packard de Venezuela
3ra. Transversal Los Ruices Nrte
Edf. Segre, Piso 1,2 y 3
Caracas, Venezula
Phone Number: (58-2) 207-8357
Fax: (58-2) 207-8361
Nicaragua
Atendido por El Salvador
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
151
Asia and the Pacific
China
Beijing
Australia
Melbourne
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
31-41 Joseph Street
Blackburn, VIC 3130
Phone Number: 1 800 629 485 (toll free)
Additional phone number(s): (61 3) 9210 5408
Fax: (61 3) 9210-5489
China Hewlett-Packard Co. Ltd.
5-6/F West Wing Office
China World Trade Center
No. 1 Jian Guo Men Wei Avenue
Beijing 100004 PRC
Phone Number: (86-10) 6505-3888
Fax: (86-10) 6505-1033
Telex: 085-22601 CTSHP CN Cable: 1920 Beijing
Chengdu
Perth
Measurement Innovation (WA) Pty. Ltd.
Kishorn Court
Suite 3, 58 Kishorn Road
Mount Pleasant, WA 6153
Phone Number: (61/9) 316-2757
Fax: (61/9) 316-1392
Mobile: 61-18-33-6434
China Hewlett-Packard Co. Ltd.
22/F Daye Road
No. 39 Daye Road
Chengdu 610016 PRC
Phone Number: (86/28) 666-3888
Fax: (86/28) 666-5377
Guangzhou
Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.
17-23 Talavera Road
North Ryde, N.S.W. 2113
Phone Number: (61/2) 9950-7444
Fax: (61/2) 9888-9072
China Hewlett-Packard Co. Ltd.
7/F T.P.Plaza
9/109, Liu Hua Road
Guangzhou 510010 PRC
Phone Number: (86/20) 8669-3888
Fax: (86/20) 8669-5074
Telex: 44556 GPHGZ CN
Bangladesh
Shanghai
Sydney
Jiu International Ltd
60 East Tejturi Bazar, 2nd Floor
Farmgate Dhaka
Bangladesh
Phone Number: 880-2-913-0480
Fax: 880-2-871-034
E-Mail Address: jiu@bangla.net
Brunei Darussalam
Kompouter Wisman Sdn Bhd
Block A, Unit 1, Ground Floor
Abdul Razak Complex
Jalan Gadong 3180
Negara Brunei Darussalem
Phone Number: 673-2-423918/425603
Fax: 673-2-441492
Telex: 0809-2447
China Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.
10-12/F Novel Building
No. 887 Huai Hai Zhong Lu
Shanghai, 200020
Phone Number: (86/21) 6474-3888
Fax: (86/21) 6267-8523
Telex: 086-33577 CHPSB CN
Shenyang
China Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.
12/F Shenyang Sankei Torch
Building No. 262 Shifu Road, Shenhe District
Shenyang 110013 PRC
Phone Number: (86/24) 2790170, 2790171
Fax: (86/24) 2790232
Xi'an Branch Office
3/F East New Technology
Trade Center A16
Yanta Lu Zhong Duan
Xi'an 710054 PRC
Phone Number: (86/29) 552 9379
Fax: (86/29) 552 9243
152
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
Hewlett-Packard Co., Ltd.
Mumbai
17-21/F Shell Tower, Times Square
1 Matheson Street
Causeway Bay
Hong Kong, PRC
Phone Number: (852) 2599-7777
Fax: (852) 2506-9256
Hong Kong
Hewlett-Packard India Pvt. Ltd.
Unit-3, B-Wing
Ground Floor, Neelam Center
Hind Cycle Road
Worli, Mumbai 400 025
Phone Number: (91/22) 493-4722 or 493-4723
Additional phone number(s): 91-22-493-9978-79
or 91-22-493
Fax: (91/22) 493-7823
Telex: 11-76812 HPIB IN
Hewlett-Packard (HK) Ltd.
17-21/F Shell Tower, Times Square
1 Matheson Street
Causeway Bay
Hong Kong, PRC
Phone Number: (852) 2599-7889
Fax: (852) 2506-9233
India
New Delhi
Hewlett-Packard India Ltd.
Chandiwalla Estate
Ma Anandmai Ashram Marg, Kalkaji
New Delhi 110 019
Phone Number: (91-11) 682-6000
Fax: (91-11) 682-6030
Bangalore
Hewlett-Packard India Pvt. Ltd.
Embassy Point
150 Infantry Road
Bangalore 560001
Phone Number: (91/80) 225-3024 or 209-1808
Fax: (91/80) 225-6186
Telex: 845-2773 HP IN
Indonesia
Bandung
P.T. Berca Hardayaperkasa
Jalan Tengku Angkasa No. 33
Bandung 40132
Phone Number: (62-22) 250-8100
Fax: (62-22) 250-6757
Calcutta
Hewlett-Packard India Pvt. Ltd.
708 Central Plaza
2/6 Sarat Bose Road
Calcutta 700 020
Phone Number: (91/33) 745 4755
Additional phone number(s): 91-33-475-4755
Fax: (91/33) 748 571
Hyderabad
Hewlett-Packard India Pvt. Ltd.
5-9-13 Taramandal Complex
9th Floor, Saifabad
Hyderabad 500 004
Phone Number: (91/40) 232-679
Fax: (91/40) 220.012 or 231.756
Telex: 425-2422 HPIL IN
Jakarta
P.T. Berca Hardayaperkasa
Jalan Abdul Muis No. 62
Jakarta 10160-Indonesia
Phone Number: (62/21) 380 0902
Fax: (62/21) 381 2044
Korea, Republic of
Seoul
Hewlett-Packard Korea Ltd.
HP Korea House
25-12 Yoido-dong
Youngdeung po-ku
Seoul 150-010
Phone Number: (82/2)-769-0114
Fax: (82/2) 784-7084
Taegu
Hewlett-Packard Korea Ltd.
18/F, Young Nam Tower B/D 111
Shin Cheon-dong, Dong-Gu
Taegu
Phone Number: (82/53) 754-2666
Fax: (82/53) 752-4696
EN
Chapter 5: Service and Support
153
Taejeon
Philippines
Samsung
Hewlett-Packard Korea Ltd.
8/F Hyundai Bldg,
1298 Doonsan-dong, Seo-gu
Taejeon
Phone Number: 82-42-480-2800
Fax: 82-42-480-2828
Hewlett-Packard Philippines Corporation
9th Floor, Rufino Pacific Tower
6784 Ayala Avenue
Makati City 1229
Phone Number: (63-2) 894-1451
Fax: (63-2) 811-1080, 811-0635
Online Sales: (63-2) 893-9959
Malaysia
Singapore
Kuala Lumpur
Hewlett-Packard Singapore (Sales) Pte Ltd
450 Alexandra Road
Singapore 119960
Phone Number: 65 275 3888
Additional phone number(s):
HP Direct: 1 800 292-8100
Application Support: 65-374-4242
Hardware Service Hotline: 65-375-8350
Fax: 65 274 7887
Hewlett-Packard Sales (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd
Ground Floor, Wisma Cyclecarri
288 Jalan Raja Laut
50350 Kuala Lumpur
Phone Number: 1-800-88-8848 Toll Free
Fax: (60/3) 298-9157
Penang
Hewlett-Packard Sales (Malaysia) Sdn Bhd
Bayan Lepas Free Trade Zone
11900 Bayan Lepas
Penang
Phone Number: (60/4) 642-3502
Fax: (60/4) 642-3511
New Zealand
Hewlett-Packard New Zealand Ltd.
186-190 Willis Street
Wellington
Phone Number: 0800-738-378
(international 64-4-802-6800)
Fax: (64-4) 802-6881
Pakistan
Islamabad
Mushko Electronics (Pvt) Ltd.
68-W Sama Plaza, Blue Area, G-7
Islamabad 44000
Pakistan
Phone Number: 92-51-828-459/810-950
Fax: 92-51-816-190
Telex: 54001 Muski Pk
Sri Lanka
Precision Technical Services (PVT) Ltd.
No. 2, R.A. De Mel Mawatha
Colombo 00500
Phone Number: (941) 597-860
Fax: (941) 597-863
Taiwan
Chungli
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.
No. 20 Kao-Shuang Road
Ping-Chen, 32404
Taoyuan Hsieh
Phone Number: (886/3) 492-9666
Fax: (886/3) 492-9669
Kaohsiung
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.
12th Floor, 10 Syh-Wei 4th Road
Kaohsiung
Phone Number: (886/7) 330-1199
Fax: (886/7) 330-8568
Taichung
Karachi
Mushko Electronics (Pvt) Ltd.
Oosman Chambers
Abdullah Haroon Road
Karachi 74400
Phone Number: 92-21-566-0490
Fax: 92-21-566-0801
Telex: 29094 MUSKO PK
154
Chapter 5: Service and Support
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.
10F, 540, Sec. 1
Wen-Hsin Road
Taichung
Phone Number: (886/4) 327-0153
Fax: (886/4) 326-5274
EN
Taiwan, ROC
Fukuoka
Hewlett-Packard Taiwan Ltd.
Hewlett-Packard Building
8/F No. 337, Fu-Hsing North Road
Taipei 10483 Taiwan
Phone Number: (886-2) 712-0404
Fax: (886-2) 718-2928
HP DIRECT Basic Tools free tel: 080-212-535
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Daisan Hakata-Kaisei Bldg.
1-3-6 Hakataekiminami Hakata-ku, Fukuoka-shi
Fukuoka 812
Thailand
Hewlett-Packard (Thailand) Ltd.
23rd-25th floor Vibulthani Tower 2
3199 Rama IV Road
Klong Toey, Bangkok 10110
Phone Number: (66-2) 661-3900-34
Fax: (66-2) 661-3946
Vietnam
System Interlace
39 Mai Hac De Street
Hai Ba Trung District
Hanoi
Vietnam
Phone Number: 844-229-808/9
Fax: 844-229-553
Japan
Aichi
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Nagoya Kokusai Center Bldg.
1-47-1 Nakono Nakamura-ku, Nagoya-shi
Aichi 450
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Nakane-Nissei Bldg.
4-25-18 Nishi-machi, Toyota-shi
Aichi 471
Akita
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Nihonseimei Akita Chuodori Bldg.
4-2-7 Nakadori, Akita-shi
Akita 010
Chiba
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
WBG Malibu East Bldg. 19F
2-6 Nakase Mihama-ku, Chiba-shi
Chiba 261-71
EN
Hiroshima
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Nissei-Heiwakoen Bldg.
3-25 Nakajima-cho Naka-ku, Hiroshima-shi
Hiroshima 730
Hokkaido
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Sumitomo-seimei
Sapporo Chuo Bldg.
1-1-14 Minaminijo-higashi Chuo-ku, Sapporo-shi
Hokkaido 060
Hyogo
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
1-3-2 Muroya Nishi-ku, Kobe-shi
Hyogo 651-22
Ibaraki
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Mito Yomiuri-Kaikan Bldg.
2-4-2 Minami-machi, Mito-shi
Ibaraki 310
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Tsukuba-Mitsui Bldg.
1-6-1 Takezono, Tsukuba-shi
Ibaraki 305
Ishikawa
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Kanazawa MK Bldg.
98-8 Sainen-machi, Kanazawa-shi
Ishikawa 920
Kanagawa
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
3-2-2 Sakado
Takatsu-ku, Kawasaki-shi
Kanagawa 213
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
9-32 Tamuracho, Atsugi-shi
Kanagawa 243
Kyoto
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Maeda SN Bldg.
518 Akinono-cho Nijyo-Kudaru
Karasuma, Nakagyo-ku
Kyoto 604
Chapter 5: Service and Support
155
Miyagi
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Yamaguchi Bldg.
1-1-31 Ichibancho Aoba-ku, Sendai-shi
Miyagi 980
Nagano
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Forum Honjo Bldg.
2-4-1 Honjo, Matsumoto-shi
Nagano 390
Middle East and Africa
Algeria
RTI Algeria
26, Bis rue Mohammed Hadj-Ahmed
(ex. Rue Jean Pierre Dinet)
16035 Hydra
Alger
Algerie
Phone Number: 213-2-606450
Osaka
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Chuo Bldg.
5-4-20 Nishinakajima
Yodogawa-ku, Osaka-shi
Osaka 532
Saitama
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Mitsui-seimei Omiya
Miyamachi Bldg. 2-96-1
Miyamachi, Omiya-shi
Saitama 330
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Nissei-Kumagaya Bldg.
2-42 Miya-machi, Kumagaya-shi
Saitama 360
Angola
Handled by HP South Africa
Bahrain
BAMTEC
P.O. Box 10373
Capital centre
Shop 116
Road 1405
Area 314
Manama
Phone Number: 9-73-275678
Fax: 9-73-276669
Telex: 8550 WAEL BN
Shizuoka
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Kawasei-Rinkyo Bldg.
6-6 Hosojima-cho Hamamatsu-shi
Shizuoka 435
Tochigi
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
Chiyodaseimei-Utsunomiya Bldg.
2-3-1 Odori, Utsunomiya-shi
Tochigi 320
Tokyo
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
9-1 Takakura-cho, Hachioji-shi
Tokyo 192-8510
Hewlett-Packard Japan Ltd.
NAF Bldg.
3-8-20 Takaido-higashi, Suginami-ku
Tokyo 168
156
Chapter 5: Service and Support
Egypt
ORASCOM
Onsi Sawiris & Co
P.O. Box 1191
160, 26th July Street
Aguza/Cairo
Phone Number: (202) 3015287
Fax: (202) 3442615
Telex: 92768 orscm un
Iran (Islamic Republic of)
Evertech
11 bis, rue Toepffer
1206 Geneve
Phone Number: +41-22-346 92 92
Fax: +41-22-346 86 91
Telex: 421 787
EN
Israel
Mozambique
Computation and Measurement Systems (CMS)
Ltd.
11, Hashlosha Street
Tel-Aviv 67060
Phone Number: 972 (03) 538-03-80
Fax: 972 (03) 537-50-55
Telex: 371234 HPCMS
Handled by
HP South Africa
Jordan
Nigeria
Scientific & Medical Supplies Co.
P.O. Box 1387
Amman
Phone Number: (962/6) 62-49-07
Fax: (962/6) 62-82-58
Telex: 21456 sabco jo
Management Information Systems Co. Ltd.
3 Gerrard Road
P.O. Box 53386
Ikoyi, Lagos
Phone Number: 234-1-2691307
Fax: 234-1-2692755
Telex: 23582 DATEC NG
Kuwait
Al-Khaldiya Electronics & Electricals Equipment
Co.
P.O. Box 830
Safat 13009
Phone Number: (965) 48 13 049
Fax: (965) 48 12 983
Lebanon
Computer Information Systems C.I.S.
Lebanon Street
Chammas Bldg.
P.O. Box 11-6274
Dora-Beirut
Phone Number: (961/1) 405-413
Fax: (961/1) 601.906
Tel/fax: (3579) 514-256 (Cyprus Based Line)
Telex: 42309 chacis le
Namibia
Handled by
HP South Africa
Oman
IMTAC LLC
P.O. Box 51196
Al Hayek Street
Mina al Fahal
Muscat
Phone Number: (968) 707-727, (968) 707-723
Fax: (968) 796-639, (968) 797-709
Qatar
Qatar Datamations Systems
Al Ahed Building, 5th floor
Al Muthof Street
Doha
Phone Number: 974/43.99.00
Fax: 974/43.21.54
Telex: 4833
Malawi
Saudi Arabia
Handled by HP South Africa
Modern Electronics Establishment
P.O. Box 22015
Prince Musad Ibn Abdulaziz St.
Riyadh 11495
Phone Number: (966/1) 476-3030
Fax: (966/1) 476-2570
Additional Fax: (966/1) 476-7649
cable ROUFKO
Mauritius
Handled by HP South Africa
Morocco
SICOTEL
Complexe des Habous
Tour C, avenue des Far
Casablanca 01
Phone Number: +212 (02) 31-22-70
Fax: +212 (02) 31-65-45
Telex: 27604
EN
Modern Electronics Establishment
P.O. Box 22015
al Nimer Building
Riyadh 11495
Phone Number: (01) 4624266
Fax: (01) 4624404
Additional Fax: (966/1) 476-7649
Chapter 5: Service and Support
157
South Africa
Hewlett-Packard South Africa (Pty.) Ltd.
P.O. Box 120, Howard Place
7450 Cape Town
Phone Number: 27 21 658-6100
Fax: 27 21 685-3785
Hewlett-Packard South Africa (Pty.) Ltd.
Private Bag
Wendywood 2148
Phone Number: 27-11-806 1173
Fax: 27-11-806 1213
Tunisia
Precision Electronique
5, rue de Chypre-Mutuelle Ville
1002 Tunis Belvedere
Phone Number: (216/1) 785-037
Additional phone number(s): (216/1) 890-672
Fax: (216/1) 780-241
Telex: (0409) 18238 TELEC TN
United Arab Emirates
Emitac Ltd.
Block RBS Arenco Bldg.
Zabel Road
P.O. Box 8391
Dubai
Phone Number: (971/4) 37-75-91
Fax: (971/4) 37-08-99
Emitac Ltd.
P.O. Box 2711
Abu Dhabi
Phone Number: (971/2) 77-04-19
Fax: (971/2) 72-30-58
Zambia
Handled by HP South Africa
Zimbabwe
Handled by HP South Africa
158
Chapter 5: Service and Support
EN
A
Specifications
E
Overview
This appendix includes:
EN
•
Paper specifications
•
Printer specifications
•
Cable specifications
Specifications
A-1
Paper Specifications
HP LaserJet printers produce excellent print quality. This printer
accepts a variety of media, such as cut-sheet paper (including
recycled paper), envelopes, labels, transparencies, and
custom-size paper. Properties such as weight, grain, and moisture
content are important factors affecting printer performance and
output quality.
The printer can use a variety of paper and other print media in
accordance with the guidelines in this manual. Paper that does not
meet these guidelines may cause the following problems:
•
•
•
Note
poor print quality
increased paper jams
premature wear on the printer, requiring repair
For best results, use only HP brand paper and print media.
Hewlett-Packard Company cannot recommend the use of other
brands. Because they are not HP products, HP cannot influence or
control their quality.
It is possible for paper to meet all of the guidelines in this manual
and still not produce satisfactory results. This might be the result of
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,
or other variables over which Hewlett-Packard has no control.
Before purchasing a large quantity of paper, make sure it meets the
requirements specified in this user’s guide and in the HP LaserJet
Printer Family Paper Specification Guide. (To order the guide, see
page 11.) Always test paper before purchasing a large quantity.
Caution
A-2
Using paper outside HP specifications may cause problems for the
printer, requiring repair. This repair is not covered by the
Hewlett-Packard warranty or service agreements.
Specifications
EN
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper, Tray 1
Tray 1
Dimensions*
Minimum Size
(custom)
3 by 5 in***
(76 by 127 mm)
Maximum Size
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
Transparencies
Labels
Envelopes
Same as minimum
and maximum paper
sizes listed above.
Weight
Capacity**
16 to 53 lb
(60 to 199 g/m2)
100 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) paper
Thickness:
0.0039 in to 0.0045 in
(0.099 to 0.114 mm)
75 transparencies
Thickness:
0.005 in to 0.007 in
(0.127 mm to
0.178 mm)
50 labels
20 to 28 lb
(75 to 105 g/m2)
10 envelopes
*
The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes. To print
custom-size paper, see page 56.
** Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions
*** Sizes smaller than 5 inches (127 mm) should be fed short edge first (portrait).
EN
Specifications
A-3
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper, Tray 2 (HP LaserJet 4050 T/4050 TN)
Trays 2 and 3
(HP LaserJet
4050 T/
4050 TN)
Dimensions*
Letter
8.5 by 11 in
(216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in
(210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in
(191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
B5 (ISO)
(custom***)
6.9 by 9.9 in
(176 by 250 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in
(182 by 257 mm)
A5 (custom***)
5.8 by 8.2 in
(148 by 210 mm)
Weight
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity**
250 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) paper
50-100
transparencies
* The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
** Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
*** To print custom-size paper, see page 56.
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper, Tray 2 (HP LaserJet 4050 /4050 N)
Tray 2
(HP LaserJet
4050/4050 N)
Dimensions*
Letter
8.5 by 11 in
(216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in
(210 by 297 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
Weight
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity**
500 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) paper
50-100
transparencies
* The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
** Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
A-4
Specifications
EN
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper, Optional 500-Sheet Tray
Optional
500-Sheet Tray
Dimensions*
Letter
8.5 by 11 in
(216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in
(210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in
(191 by 267 mm)
Executive (JIS)
(custom***)
8.5 by 13 in
(216 by 330 mm)
16K (custom***)
7.75 by 10.75 in
(197 by 273 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
B5 (ISO)
(custom***)
6.9 by 9.9 in
(176 by 250 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in
(182 by 257 mm)
A5 (custom***)
5.8 by 8.2 in
(148 by 210 mm)
Custom***
5.8 by 8.2 in
to 8.5 by 14 in
(148 by 210 mm
to 216 by 356 mm)
Weight
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity**
500 sheets of 20 lb
(75 g/m2) paper
50-100
transparencies
* The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
** Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
*** To print custom-size paper, see page 56.
EN
Specifications
A-5
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper, Optional Envelope Feeder
Optional
Envelope
Feeder
Dimensions*
Minimum Size
3.5 by 6.3 in
(90 by 160 mm)
Maximum Size
7 by 10 in
(178 by 254 mm)
Weight
20 to 28 lb
(75 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity**
75 envelopes
* The printer supports a wide range of paper sizes. Check the printer software for supported sizes.
** Capacity may vary depending on paper weight and thickness, and environmental conditions.
Supported Sizes and Weights of Paper, Optional Duplex Printing Accessory (duplexer)
Optional Duplex
Printing
Accessory
(duplexer)
Dimensions
Letter
8.5 by 11 in
(216 by 279 mm)
A4
8.3 by 11.7 in
(210 by 297 mm)
Executive
7.3 by 10.5 in
(191 by 267 mm)
Legal
8.5 by 14 in
(216 by 356 mm)
B5 (JIS)
7.2 by 10 in
(182 by 257 mm)
A-6
Specifications
Weight
16 to 28 lb
(60 to 105 g/m2)
Capacity
not applicable
EN
Supported Types of Paper
The printer supports the following types of paper:
• plain
• letterhead
• prepunched
• bond
• color
• rough
• preprinted
• transparency
• labels
• recycled
• card stock
• user-defined (5 types)
Guidelines for Using Paper
For best results, use conventional 20 lb (75 g/m2) paper. Make sure
the paper is of good quality, and free of cuts, nicks, tears, spots,
loose particles, dust, wrinkles, voids, and curled or bent edges.
If you are unsure what type of paper you are loading (such as bond
or recycled), check the label on the package of paper.
Some paper causes print quality problems, jamming, or damage to
the printer.
Symptom
Problem with Paper
Solution
Poor print quality or toner
adhesion.
Problems with feeding.
Too moist, too rough, too
smooth, or embossed; faulty
paper lot.
Try another kind of paper,
between 100-250 Sheffield,
4-6% moisture content.
Dropouts, jamming, curl.
Stored improperly.
Store paper flat in its
moisture-proof wrapping.
Increased gray background
shading.
Too heavy.
Use lighter paper.
Open the rear output bin.
Excessive curl.
Problems with feeding.
Too moist, wrong grain
direction or short-grain
construction.
Open the rear output bin.
Use long-grain paper.
Jamming, damage to printer.
Cutouts or perforations.
Do not use paper with cutouts
or perforations.
Problems with feeding.
Ragged edges.
Use good quality paper.
EN
Specifications
A-7
Note
Do not use letterhead paper that is printed with low-temperature
inks, such as those used in some types of thermography.
Do not use raised letterhead.
The printer uses heat and pressure to fuse toner to the paper. Make
sure that any colored paper or preprinted forms use inks that are
compatible with the printer’s temperature (400° F or 205° C for
0.1 second).
Avoid using paper that has already been used in a printer or copier.
(Do not print on both sides of envelopes, transparencies, or labels.)
A-8
Specifications
EN
Paper Weight Equivalence Table
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight
specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to
determine the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S.
cover weight, locate the bond weight (in row 3, second column) and
scan across the row to the cover weight (in the fourth column). The
equivalent is 28 lb.
Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade.
U.S.
Post
Card*
thickness
(mm)
U.S.
Bond
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Text/
Book
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Cover
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Bristol
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Index
Weight
(lb)
U.S.
Tag
Weight
(lb)
Europe
Metric
Weight
(g/m2)
Japan
Metric
Weight
(g/m2)
1
16
41
22
27
33
37
60
60
2
17
43
24
29
35
39
64
64
3
20
50
28
34
42
46
75
75
4
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
80
5
22
56
31
38
46
51
81
81
6
24
60
33
41
50
55
90
90
7
27
68
37
45
55
61
100
100
8
28
70
39
49
58
65
105
105
9
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
120
10
34
86
47
58
71
79
128
128
11
36
90
50
62
75
83
135
135
12
.18
39
100
55
67
82
91
148
148
13
.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
157
157
14
.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
163
163
15
.23
47
119
65
80
97
108
176
176
53
134
74
90
110
122
199
199
16
*
EN
U.S. Post Card measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
Specifications
A-9
Labels
Caution
To avoid damaging the printer, use only labels recommended for
use in laser printers.
If you have problems printing labels, use Tray 1 and open the rear
output bin.
Never print on the same sheet of labels more than once.
Label Construction
When selecting labels, consider the quality of each component:
•
•
•
•
Adhesives: The adhesive material should be stable at 400° F
(205° C), the printer’s maximum temperature.
Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed backing
between them. Labels can peel off sheets with spaces between
the labels, causing serious jams.
Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no more than
0.5 inch (13 millimeters) of curl in any direction.
Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bubbles, or other
indications of separation.
To print sheets of labels, see page 53.
Transparencies
Transparencies used in the printer must be able to withstand 400° F
(205° C), the printer’s maximum temperature. Close the rear output
bin to print transparencies to the top output bin.
Caution
To avoid damaging the printer, use only transparencies
recommended for use in laser printers.
If you have problems printing transparencies, use Tray 1.
To print transparencies, see page 55.
A-10
Specifications
EN
Envelopes
Envelope Construction
Envelope construction is critical. Envelope fold lines can vary
considerably, not only between manufacturers, but also within a box
from the same manufacturer. Successful printing on envelopes
depends upon the quality of the envelopes. When selecting
envelopes, consider the following components:
•
•
•
•
•
Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should not exceed
28 lb (105 g/m2), or jamming may result.
Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should lie flat with
less than 0.25 inch (6 mm) curl, and should not contain air.
(Envelopes that trap air may cause problems.)
Condition: Make sure envelopes are not wrinkled, nicked, or
otherwise damaged.
Sizes in Tray 1: From 3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm) to 8.5 by
14 inches (216 by 356 mm).
Sizes in the optional envelope feeder: From 3.5 by 6.3 inches
(90 by 160 millimeters) to 7 by 10 inches (178 by 254
millimeters).
If you do not have an optional envelope feeder, always print
envelopes from Tray 1 (page 47). To print envelopes with the
optional envelope feeder, see page 49. If envelopes wrinkle, try
opening the rear output bin.
EN
Specifications
A-11
Envelopes with Double-Side-Seams
Double-side-seam construction has vertical seams at both ends of
the envelope rather than diagonal seams. This style may be more
likely to wrinkle. Be sure the seam extends all the way to the corner
of the envelope as illustrated below.
Acceptable
Unacceptable
Figure A-1
Envelopes with Double-Side-Seams
Envelopes with Adhesive Strips or Flaps
Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with more than one flap
that folds over to seal must use adhesives compatible with the heat
and pressure in the printer. The extra flaps and strips might cause
wrinkling, creasing, or jams.
A-12
Specifications
EN
Envelope Margins
The following table gives typical address margins for a Commercial
#10 or DL envelope.
Note
Type of Address
Top Margin
Left Margin
Return Address
0.6 in (15 mm)
0.6 in (15 mm)
Delivery Address
2 in (51 mm)
3.5 in (89 mm)
For the best print quality, position margins no closer than 0.6 inch
(15 millimeters) from the edges of the envelope.
Envelope Storage
Proper storage of envelopes helps contribute to good print quality.
Envelopes should be stored flat. If air is trapped in an envelope,
creating an air bubble, then the envelope may wrinkle during
printing.
Card Stock and Heavy Paper
Many types of card stock can be printed from Tray 1, including index
cards and postcards. Some card stock performs better than others
because its construction is better suited for feeding through a laser
printer.
For optimum printer performance, do not use paper heavier than
53 lb (199 g/m2) in Tray 1 or 28 lb (105 g/m2) in other trays. Paper
that is too heavy might cause misfeeds, stacking problems, paper
jams, poor toner fusing, poor print quality, or excessive mechanical
wear.
Note
EN
Printing on heavier paper may be possible if the tray is not filled to
capacity, and paper with a smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield
is used.
Specifications
A-13
Card Stock Construction
•
•
•
•
Note
Smoothness: 36-53 lb (135-199 g/m2) card stock should have
a smoothness rating of 100-180 Sheffield. 16-36 lb
(60-135 g/m2) card stock should have a smoothness rating of
100-250 Sheffield.
Construction: Card stock should lie flat with less than 0.2 inch
(5 millimeters) of curl.
Condition: Make sure card stock is not wrinkled, nicked, or
otherwise damaged.
Sizes: Use only card stock within the following size ranges:
• minimum: 3 by 5 inches (76 by 127 mm)
• maximum: 8.5 by 14 inches (216 by 356 millimeters)
Before loading card stock in Tray 1, make sure it is regular in shape
and not damaged. Also, make sure the cards are not stuck together.
Card Stock Guidelines
•
•
A-14
If cards curl or jam, try printing from Tray 1 and opening the rear
output bin.
Set margins at least 0.08 inch (2 mm) away from the edges of
the paper.
Specifications
EN
Printer Specifications
Physical Dimensions
39.67 inches (100.76 cm)
full length, trays and rear output bin open
24.27 inches (61.64 cm)
printer only, rear output bin closed
15.4 inches
(39.0 cm)
HP LaserJet
4050/4050 N
18.5 inches
(46.99 cm)
with cover open
13.3 inches
(34.3 cm)
with cover closed
HP LaserJet
4050 T/4050 TN
20.1 inches
(51.19 cm)
with cover open
15.5 inches
(38.5 cm)
with cover closed
Figure A-2
Printer Dimensions
Printer Weight (without toner cartridge)
•
•
EN
HP LaserJet 4050/4050 N printers: 39.27 lb (17.85 kg)
HP LaserJet 4050 T/4050 TN printers: 45.66 lb (20.71 kg)
Specifications
A-15
Environmental Specifications
Electrical Specifications
Printer State
Power Consumption
(average, in watts)
Printing
330
Standby
22
PowerSave
(default activation time 30 minutes)
20
Off
0
Minimum Recommended Circuit Capacity
100-127 Volt
8 amps
220-240 Volt
4 amps
Power Requirements (Acceptable Line Voltage)
A-16
100-127 Volt
50-60 Hz
220-240 Volt
50-60 Hz
Specifications
EN
Acoustic Emissions (Per ISO 9296)
Printer State
Sound Power*
Printing, 17 pages per minute (ppm)
Lwad= 6.6 bels (A)
Printing, 8 ppm
Lwad= 6.2 bels (A)
PowerSave
Lwad= 0 bels (A)
*
You might want to install printers with sound power Lwad>=6.3 bels (A) or more in a
separate room or cubicle.
General Specifications
Operating temperature
50-91° F (10-32° C)
Relative Humidity
20-80%
Speed, in pages per minute (ppm)
Up to 17 ppm, letter size paper.
Up to 16 ppm, A4 size paper.
Expandable Memory
EN
Up to 200 MB total, combining
standard and accessory memory
DIMMs.
Specifications
A-17
Serial Cable Specifications
Serial communication is simply the transmission of data one bit at
a time. With just one bit to transmit at a time, data can be transferred
with a simple electrical circuit consisting of only two wires. In this
fashion, an eight-bit byte is transmitted one bit at a time and the
individual bits are reassembled into the original byte on the
receiving end. Bit transmission occurs from the least significant bit
to the most significant bit.
Serial Cable Specifications
Specification
Description
Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE)
Transmit on pin 2 and receive on pin 3. A printer is typically a DTE
device.
Data
Communications
Equipment (DCE)
Transmit on pin 3 and receive on pin 2. A modem is typically a DCE
device.
Asynchronous
Communication
Asynchronous communication or start/stop transmission is the concept
of enclosing a character with a start and stop bit. The RS-232
specification defines the standards for asynchronous serial
communication.
Parity
Parity is a method of error checking at the bit level.
HP LaserJet Serial
Data Format
Transmission is asynchronous, with one start bit, eight data bits and
one stop bit. Parity is not used. HP LaserJet printers are DTE devices.
Serial Interface
Protocol
(handshaking)
Handshaking is the method by which the flow of data between two
devices is controlled. The two methods of flow control that are used by
HP LaserJet printers are software flow control, in which one device
controls another by the content of the data, and hardware flow control,
in which one device can control another by changing the voltage on a
wire.
Software Flow
Control (software
handshaking)
Xon/Xoff is a data stream handshake protocol that sends Xon (DC1;
11 Hex) to the computer from the printer’s transmit data pin when the
printer is able to accept data and sends Xoff (DC3; 13 Hex) when the
printer is not ready for data.
A-18
Specifications
EN
Serial Cable Specifications (Continued)
Specification
Description
Hardware Flow
Control (hardware
handshaking)
By definition, hardware handshaking is performed when two programs
manipulate RS-232 control pins-DTR, DSR, RTS, and CTS to achieve
a hardware-based form of flow control. In DTR/DSR handshaking, the
sender asserts DTR (Data Terminal Ready) before sending the first
character in a stream of data and waits for DSR (Data Set Ready) to
be asserted in return. RTS/CTS handshaking is similar, but uses the
Request To Send and Clear To Send pins rather than Data Terminal
Ready. In either case, the sender delays transmitting data until the
receiver is ready.
Hewlett-Packard offers the following serial cables and adapter for
use with the printer:
HP Part Number
Description
C2932A
9 to 9-pin M/F RS-232 Serial Cable, 3m
C2933A
9 to 25-pin M/F RS-232 Serial Cable, 3m
C2809A
9 to 25-pin M/F Serial Cable Adapter
With the C2809A serial cable adapter installed on the printer, you
can connect a 25-pin cable connector to the printer. The adapter
pin connections are shown below.
25 to 9 Pin Adapter (C2809A)
EN
Standard DB-25
(female adapter end)
Printer DB-9
(male adapter end)
2- Transmit Data
2- Transmit Data
3- Receive Data
3- Receive Data
6- Data Set Ready
4- Data Set Ready
7- Signal Ground
5- Signal Ground
20- Data Terminal Ready
6- Data Terminal Ready
Specifications
A-19
DB-9 Serial Cable Pin Outs (C2932A)
Computer DB-9
Printer DB-9 (male cable end)
2- Receive Data
2- Transmit Data
3- Transmit Data
3- Receive Data
4- Data Terminal Ready
4- Data Set Ready
5- Ground
5- Ground
6- Data Set Ready
6- Data Terminal Ready
8- Clear to Send
8- Data Terminal Ready
DB-25 Serial Cable Pin Outs (C2933A)
Note
Computer DB-25
Printer DB-9 (male cable end)
3- Receive Data
2- Transmit Data
2- Transmit Data
3- Receive Data
20- Data Terminal Ready
4- Data Set Ready
7- Ground
5- Ground
6- Data Set Ready
6- Data Terminal Ready
5- Clear to Send
8- Data Terminal Ready
The pin outs for the computer end are typical pin numbers. The
actual pin numbers for your computer may be different. Check the
documentation for your computer to verify the proper pin outs.
Pins not shown are not used by the printer.
A-20
Specifications
EN
B
Control Panel Menus
Overview
You can perform most routine printing tasks from the computer
through the printer driver or software application. This is the most
convenient way to control the printer, and will override the printer’s
control panel settings. See the help files associated with the
software, or for more information on accessing the printer driver,
see page 23.
You can also control the printer by changing settings in the printer’s
control panel. Use the control panel to access printer features not
supported by the printer driver or software application.
Note
Printer driver and software commands override the printer’s control
panel settings.
You can print a menu map from the control panel that shows the
current printer configuration (page 16). This appendix lists all the
items and possible values for the printer. (Default values are listed
in the “Item” column.)
Additional menu items can appear in the control panel, depending
on the options currently installed in the printer.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-1
Quick Copy Jobs Menu
This menu provides a list of the quick copy jobs stored on the
printer’s hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the
control panel. See “Job Retention Features” on page 67 and
“Proofing and Holding a Job” on page 69 for more information about
using this menu.
Note
If there are no quick copy jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk, this
menu is not displayed on the control panel.
Quick Copy Jobs Menu
Item
Value
[JOBNAME]
COPIES=1
B-2
Explanation
The name of the person who owns the quick
copy job.
1 to 999
DELETE
Control Panel Menus
The number of additional copies the user wants
to print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies
of the job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard
disk.
EN
Private/Stored Jobs Menu
This menu provides a list of the private and stored jobs on the
printer’s hard disk. The user can print or delete these jobs from the
control panel. See “Printing a Private Job” on page 71 and “Storing
a Print Job” on page 73 for more information about using this menu.
Note
If there are no private or stored jobs on the printer’s hard disk, this
menu is not displayed on the control panel.
Private/Stored Jobs Menu
Item
Value
Explanation
[JOBNAME]
The name of the job stored on the printer’s hard
disk.
PIN:0000
To print the job, the user must enter the
Personal Identification Number (PIN) assigned
to the job in the driver.
COPIES=1
EN
1 to 999
DELETE
The number of copies the user wants to print.
1-999: Prints the requested number of copies
of the job.
DELETE: Deletes the job from the printer’s hard
disk.
Control Panel Menus
B-3
Information Menu
This menu contains printer information pages that give details about
the printer and its configuration. To print an information page, scroll
to the desired page and press [Select].
Information Menu
Item
Explanation
PRINT
MENU MAP
The menu map shows the layout and current settings of the control
panel menu items. For more information, see page 133.
PRINT
CONFIGURATION
The configuration page shows the printer’s current configuration. If
an HP JetDirect print server card is installed (HP LaserJet
4050 N/4050 TN printers), a JetDirect configuration page will print
out as well. For more information, see page 134.
PRINT
PCL FONT LIST
The PCL font list shows all the PCL fonts currently available to the
printer. For more information, see page 136.
PRINT
PS FONT LIST
The PS font list shows all the PS fonts currently available to the
printer. For more information, see page 136.
PRINT
FILE DIRECTORY
This item appears only when a mass storage device (such as an
optional flash DIMM or hard disk) containing a recognized file
system is installed in the printer. The file directory shows information
for all installed mass storage devices. For more information, see
page C-1.
PRINT
EVENT LOG
The event log lists printer events or errors.
SHOW
EVENT LOG
This item allows you to view the most recent printer events on the
control panel display. Press [-Value+] to scroll through the event log
entries.
PRINT
PAPER PATH TEST
The paper path test can be used to verify that the paper path is
working properly, or to troubleshoot problems with a type of paper.
Choose the input tray, output bin, duplexer (if available), and number
of copies.
PRINT
USAGE PAGE
The usage page shows the quantity of pages printed, as well as the
paper source used. It also reflects the number of one-sided versus
two-sided pages.
Note
This item will only show in the information menu if the hard disk is
installed in the printer. This item will generate a page containing
information that can be used for accounting purposes.
B-4
Control Panel Menus
EN
Paper Handling Menu
When paper handling settings are correctly configured through the
control panel, you can print by choosing the type and size of paper
from the printer driver or software application. For more information,
see page 65.
Some items in this menu (such as duplex and manual feed) can be
accessed from a software application, or from the printer driver (if
the appropriate driver is installed). Printer driver and software
application settings override control panel settings. For more
information, see page 59.
Paper Handling Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
ENVELOPE FEEDER
SIZE=COM10
For supported
paper sizes, see
page A-3.
This item appears only when the optional
envelope feeder is installed. Set the value to
correspond with the envelope size currently
loaded in the envelope feeder.
ENVELOPE FEEDER
TYPE=PLAIN
For supported
paper types, see
page 66.
This item appears only when the optional
envelope feeder is installed. Set the value to
correspond with the envelope type currently
loaded in the envelope feeder.
TRAY 1 MODE=
FIRST
FIRST
CASSETTE
Determine how the printer will use Tray 1.
FIRST: If paper is loaded in Tray 1, the printer
will pull paper from that tray first.
CASSETTE: A paper size must be assigned to
Tray 1 using the TRAY 1 SIZE option (the next
item in this menu when TRAY 1 MODE=
CASSETTE). This allows Tray 1 to be used as a
reserved tray.
For more information, see page 63.
TRAY 1 SIZE=
LETTER
For supported
paper sizes, see
page A-3.
This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE=
CASSETTE. Set the value to correspond with
the paper size currently loaded in Tray 1.
TRAY 1 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported
paper types, see
page 66.
This item appears only when TRAY 1 MODE=
CASSETTE. Set the value to correspond with
the paper type currently loaded in Tray 1.
TRAY 2 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported
paper types, see
page 66.
Set the value to correspond with the paper type
currently loaded in Tray 2.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-5
Paper Handling Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
TRAY 3 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported
paper types, see
page 66.
Set the value to correspond with the paper type
currently loaded in Tray 3.
.
TRAY 4 TYPE=
PLAIN
For supported
paper types, see
page 66.
This item appears only when a fourth paper tray
is installed (available only on the HP LaserJet
4050 T/4050 TN printers). Set the value to
correspond with the paper type currently
loaded in Tray 4.
MANUAL FEED=OFF
OFF
ON
Feed the paper manually from Tray 1, rather
than automatically from a tray. When
MANUAL FEED=ON and Tray 1 is empty, the
printer goes offline when it receives a print job
and displays MANUALLY FEED [PAPER SIZE].
For more information, see page 64.
DUPLEX=OFF
OFF
ON
This item appears only when an optional
duplexer is installed. Set the value to ON to print
on both sides (duplex) or OFF to print on one
side (simplex) of a sheet of paper.
For more information, see page 41.
BINDING=
LONG EDGE
LONG EDGE
SHORT EDGE
This item appears only when an optional
duplexer is installed and the duplex option is
on. Choose the binding edge when duplexing
(printing on both sides of paper).
For more information, see page 41.
OVERRIDE
A4/LETTER=NO
NO
YES
Choose YES to print on letter size paper when
an A4 job is sent, but no A4 size paper is loaded
in the printer (or to print on A4 size paper when
a letter job is sent, but no letter paper is loaded
in the printer).
CONFIGURE FUSER
MODE MENU=NO
NO
YES
Configure the fuser mode associated with each
paper type. (This is only necessary if you are
experiencing problems printing on certain
paper types.)
NO: The fuser mode menu items are not
accessible.
YES: Additional items appear (see below).
Note
To see the default fuser mode for each paper
type, select YES, scroll back to the Information
Menu, and print a menu map (page B-4).
B-6
Control Panel Menus
EN
Paper Handling Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
[TYPE]=
NORMAL
NORMAL
LOW
HIGH
This item appears only when CONFIGURE
FUSER MODE MENU=YES. Most paper types are
set to NORMAL by default.
The exception is as follows:
ROUGH=HIGH
TRANSPARENCY=LOW
(HIGH and LOW settings are only available with
A4, letter, and legal sizes.)
For a complete list of supported paper types,
see page 66.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-7
Print Quality Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software
application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is
installed). Printer driver and software application settings override
control panel settings. For more information, see page 59.
Print Quality Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
RESOLUTION=
FASTRES 1200
300
600
FASTRES 1200
PRORES 1200
Select the resolution from the following values:
300: Produces draft print quality at the printer’s
full speed (17 ppm). 300 dpi (dots per inch) is
recommended for some bitmapped fonts and
graphics, and for compatibility with the
HP LaserJet III family of printers.
600: Produces high print quality at the printer’s
full speed (17 ppm).
FASTRES 1200: Produces optimum print
quality (comparable to 1200 dpi) at the printer’s
maximum speed (17 ppm, letter/16 ppm, A4).
PRORES 1200: Produces optimum print quality
(true 1200 dpi) at half the printer’s maximum
speed.
Note
It is best to change the resolution from the
printer driver or software application. (Driver
and software settings override control panel
settings.)
RET=MEDIUM
OFF
LIGHT
MEDIUM
DARK
Use the printer’s Resolution Enhancement
technology (REt) setting to produce print with
smooth angles, curves, and edges.
REt does not affect print quality when the print
resolution is set to ProRes 1200. All other print
resolutions, including FastRes 1200, benefit
from REt.
Note
It is best to change the REt setting from the
printer driver or software application. (Driver
and software settings override control panel
settings.)
B-8
Control Panel Menus
EN
Print Quality Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
ECONOMODE=OFF
OFF
ON
Turn EconoMode on (to save toner) or off (for
high quality).
EconoMode creates draft-quality printing by
reducing the amount of toner on the printed
page by up to 50%.
Caution
HP does not recommend full-time use of
EconoMode. (If EconoMode is used full-time, it
is possible that the toner supply will outlast the
mechanical parts in the toner cartridge.)
Note
It is best to turn EconoMode on or off from the
printer driver or software application. (Driver
and software settings override control panel
settings.)
TONER DENSITY=3
1
2
3
4
5
Lighten or darken the print on the page by
changing the toner density setting. The settings
range from 1 (light) to 5 (dark), but the default
setting of 3 usually produces the best results.
Use a lower toner density setting to save toner.
Note
It is best to change the toner density from the
printer driver or software application. (Driver
and software settings override control panel
settings.)
CREATE CLEANING
PAGE
No value to
select.
Press [Select] to print a cleaning page (for
cleaning excess toner from the fuser
assembly).
In order for the cleaning page to work properly,
print the page on copier grade paper (not bond
or rough paper). Follow the instructions on the
cleaning page.
For more information, see page 86.
PROCESS CLEANING
PAGE
No value to
select.
This item appears only after a cleaning page
has been generated (as described above).
Press [Select] to process the cleaning page.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-9
Printing Menu
Some items in this menu can be accessed from a software
application, or from the printer driver (if the appropriate driver is
installed). Printer driver and software application settings override
control panel settings. For more information, see page 59.
Printing Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
COPIES=1
1 to 999
Set the default number of copies by
selecting any number from 1 to 999. Press
[-Value+] once to change the setting by
increments of 1, or hold down [-Value+] to
scroll by increments of 10.
Note
It is best to set the number of copies from
the printer driver or software application.
(Driver and software settings override
control panel settings.)
PAPER=
LETTER
For supported paper
sizes, see page A-3.
Set the default image size for paper and
envelopes. (The item name will change
from paper to envelope as you scroll
through the available sizes.)
NO
YES
NO: The custom paper menu items are not
accessible.
YES : The custom paper menu items appear
(see below).
(110V printers)
or
PAPER=
A4
(220V printers)
and
ENVELOPE=
COM10
(110V printers)
or
ENVELOPE=
DL
(220V printers)
CONFIGURE CUSTOM
PAPER=NO
B-10
Control Panel Menus
EN
Printing Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
UNIT OF MEASURE=
INCHES
INCHES
MILLIMETERS
This item appears only when CONFIGURE
CUSTOM PAPER=YES . Select the unit of
For supported paper
sizes, see page A-3
This item appears only when CONFIGURE
CUSTOM PAPER=YES . Select the dimension
(110V printers)
measurement for the custom paper size.
or
MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
X DIMENSION=
8.50INCHES
to be fed into the printer (short edge).
(110V printers)
or
216 MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
Y DIMENSION=
14.00 INCHES
For supported paper
sizes, see page A-3
This item appears only when CONFIGURE
CUSTOM PAPER=YES . Select the other
dimension (long edge).
(110V printers)
or
356 MILLIMETERS
(220V printers)
FORM=60 LINES
5 to 128
Sets vertical spacing from 5 to 128 lines for
default paper size. Press [- Value +] once
to change the setting by increments of 1, or
hold down [- Value +] to scroll by
increments of 10.
PORTRAIT
LANDSCAPE
Determine the default orientation of print on
the page.
(110V printers)
or
64 LINES
(220V printers)
ORIENTATION=
PORTRAIT
Note
It is best to set the page orientation from the
printer driver or software application.
(Driver and software settings override
control panel settings.)
PCL FONT SOURCE=
INTERNAL
INTERNAL
SOFT
SLOT 1, 2, or 3
INTERNAL : Internal fonts.
SOFT : Permanent soft fonts.
SLOT 1, 2, or 3: Fonts stored in one of
the three DIMM slots.
Note
It is best to set the font source from the
printer driver or software application.
(Driver and software settings override
control panel settings.)
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-11
Printing Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
PCL FONT NUMBER=
0
0 to 999
The printer assigns a number to each font
and lists them on the PCL Font List
(page 136). The font number appears in the
Font # column of the printout.
Note
It is best to set the font nnumber from the
printer driver or software application.
(Driver and software settings override
control panel settings.)
PCL FONT PITCH=
10.00
0.44 to 99.99
This item might not appear, depending on
the font selected. Press [-Value+] once to
change setting by increments of .01 for
pitch, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll by
increments of 1.
Note
It is best to set the font pitch from the printer
driver or software application. (Driver and
software settings override control panel
settings.)
PCL FONT POINT
SIZE=12.00
4.00 to 999.75
This item might not appear, depending on
the font selected. Press [-Value+] once to
change setting by increments of .25 for
point size, or hold down [-Value+] to scroll
by increments of 1.
Note
It is best to set the font point from the printer
driver or software application. (Driver and
software settings override control panel
settings.)
PCL SYMBOL SET=
PC-8
PC-8
many others
Select any one of several available symbol
sets from the printer’s control panel. A
symbol set is a unique grouping of all the
characters in a font. PC-8 or PC-850 is
recommended for line draw characters.
Note
It is best to set the symbol set from the
printer driver or software application.
(Driver and software settings override
control panel settings.)
B-12
Control Panel Menus
EN
Printing Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
COURIER=REGULAR
REGULAR
DARK
Select the version of Courier font to use:
REGULAR: The internal Courier font
available on the HP LaserJet 4 series
printers.
DARK: The internal Courier font available on
the HP LaserJet III series printers.
Both fonts are not available at the same
time.
WIDE A4=NO
NO
YES
The Wide A4 setting changes the number
of characters that can be printed on a single
line of A4 paper.
NO: Up to 78 10-pitch characters can be
printed on one line.
YES: Up to 80 10-pitch characters can be
printed on one line.
APPEND CR TO LF=
NO
NO
YES
Select YES to append a carriage return to
each line feed encountered in
backward-compatible PCL jobs (pure text,
no job control). Some environments, such
as UNIX, indicate a new line using only the
line feed control code. This option allows
the user to append the required carriage
return to each line feed.
PRINT PS ERRORS=
OFF
OFF
ON
Select ON to print the PS error page when
PS errors occur.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-13
Configuration Menu
Items in this menu affect the printer’s behavior. Configure the printer
according to your printing needs.
Configuration Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
POWERSAVE=
30 MINUTES
OFF
15 MINUTES
30 MINUTES
1 HOUR
2 HOURS
3 HOURS
Set the printer to enter PowerSave after it has
been idle for a specified amount of time.
Turning PowerSave off is not recommended.
The PowerSave feature does the following:
• Minimizes the amount of power consumed
by the printer when it is idle.
• Reduces wear on the printer’s electronic
components. (Turns off the display’s
backlight.)
When you send a print job, press a control
panel key, open a paper tray, or open the top
cover, the printer automatically comes out of
PowerSave mode.
Note
PowerSave turns off the backlight on the
display, but the display is still readable.
PERSONALITY=
AUTO
B-14
AUTO
PCL
PS
Control Panel Menus
Select the default printer language
(personality). Possible values are determined
by which valid languages are installed in the
printer.
Normally you should not change the printer
language (the default is AUTO). If you change it
to a specific printer language, the printer will
not automatically switch from one language to
another unless specific software commands
are sent to the printer.
EN
Configuration Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
RESOURCE SAVE=
OFF
OFF
ON
AUTO
Dedicate printer memory to save each
language’s permanent resources. (You might
need to add memory to the printer in order for
this item to appear.) The amount of memory set
aside can be different for each installed
language. Some languages might have
memory set aside for resource saving without
requiring all languages to do so. Any time the
amount of memory dedicated to a specific
language is changed, all languages will lose all
saved resources, including any unprocessed
print jobs.
OFF: No language resource saving is
performed, and language-dependent
resources, such as fonts and macros, are lost
when language or resolution changes.
ON: An item will appear for each installed
language that allows the user to allocate a
particular amount of memory to that language’s
resource saving area. (See the items below.)
AUTO: The printer automatically determines the
amount of memory to use for each installed
language’s resource saving area.
For more information, see page C-6.
PCL MEMORY=
400K
0K and up
(This value
depends on the
amount of
installed
memory.)
This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=
ON. Select the amount of memory used for
saving PCL resources. Printer default is the
minimum amount of memory needed to
perform resource saving for PCL. Press
[-Value+] to change settings by increments of
10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100
(above 100 KB).
For more information, see page C-6.
PS MEMORY=
400K
0K and up
(This value
depends on the
amount of
installed
memory.)
This item appears only when RESOURCE SAVE=
ON. Select the amount of memory used for
saving PS resources. Printer default is the
minimum amount of memory needed to
perform resource saving for PS. Press
[-Value+] to change settings by increments of
10 (up to 100 KB) or by increments of 100
(above 100 KB).
For more information, see page C-6.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-15
Configuration Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
PAGE PROTECT=
AUTO
AUTO
ON
This item appears only after a 21 PAGE TOO
COMPLEX, PRESS GO TO CONTINUE message
displays (page 108).
Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)
attempts to guarantee that all pages will print.
If the page does not print, turn PAGE PROTECT
to ON. This might increase chances of a 20
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY, PRESS GO TO
CONTINUE message. If this occurs, simplify the
print job or install additional memory
(page C-1).
CLEARABLE
WARNINGS=JOB
JOB
ON
Set the amount of time that a clearable warning
is displayed on the printer’s control panel.
JOB: Warning messages display on the control
panel until the end of the job from which they
were generated.
ON: Warning messages display on the control
panel until [Go] is pressed.
AUTO CONTINUE=
ON
ON
OFF
Determine how the printer reacts to errors.
ON: If an error occurs that prevents printing, the
message will display, and the printer will go
offline for 10 seconds before returning online.
OFF: If an error occurs that prevents printing,
the message will remain on the display and the
printer will remain offline until [Go] is pressed.
If the printer is on a network, you will probably
want to turn AUTO CONTINUE to ON.
TONER LOW=CONTINUE
CONTINUE
STOP
Determine how the printer behaves when toner
is low. The TONER LOW message will first
appear when the toner cartridge is almost out
of toner. (About 100 to 300 sheets can still be
printed.)
CONTINUE: The printer will continue to print
while the TONER LOW message is displayed.
STOP: The printer will go offline and wait for
further action.
For more information, see page 78.
B-16
Control Panel Menus
EN
Configuration Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
RAM DISK=OFF
OFF
ON
AUTO
Determine how the RAM disk is configured.
This item appears only if there is no optional
hard disk installed and the printer has at least
16MB of memory.
OFF: The RAM disk is disabled.
ON: The RAM disk is enabled. Configure the
amount of memory to be used through the
following item: RAM DISK SIZE.
Note
If the setting is changed from OFF to ON or from
OFF to AUTO, the printer will automatically
reinitialize when it becomes idle.
RAM DISK SIZE=xxxK
0K and up
(This value
depends on the
amount of
installed
memory.)
Determine the size of the RAM disk. This item
appears if RAM DISK=ON or AUTO.
Press [-Value+] to change settings by
increments of 100.
Note
This setting cannot be changed if RAM DISK=
AUTO. Changing this value will cause the printer
to reinitialize when it becomes idle.
JAM RECOVERY=
AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
Determine how the printer behaves when a
paper jam occurs.
AUTO: The printer automatically selects the
best mode for printer jam recovery (usually ON).
This is the default setting.
ON: The printer automatically reprints pages
after a paper jam is cleared.
OFF: The printer does not reprint pages
following a paper jam. Printing performance
might be increased with this setting.
MAINTENANCE
MESSAGE=OFF
OFF
This item appears only after the PERFORM
PRINTER MAINTENANCE message displays.
OFF: The PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE
message will be cleared and will not be
displayed again until the next maintenance is
due.
The message should not be turned off unless
the printer maintenance has been performed.
If the required maintenance is not performed,
the printer’s performance will degrade.
For more information, see page 87. To order
the Printer Maintenance Kit, see page 11.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-17
Configuration Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
SMALL PAPER
SPEED=NORMAL
NORMAL
SLOW
Select SLOW when alternately printing
envelopes or small paper and standard paper
sizes.
Be sure to return the speed to NORMAL when
finished.
NEW TONER
CARTRIDGE=NO
YES
NO
This item allows the user to tell the printer that
a new toner cartridge has been installed.
Setting this item to YES will reset the HP
TonerGauge to full.
QUICK COPY
JOBS=32
1 to 50
Specifies the number of quick copy jobs that
can be stored on the printer’s hard disk.
JOB HELD
TIMEOUT=OFF
OFF
1 HOUR
4 HOURS
1 DAY
1 WEEK
Sets the amount of time that held jobs are kept
before being automatically deleted from the
queue.
CONFIGURE
PRORES 1200=NO*
YES
NO
This item allows the user to tell the printer
whether or not to use Pro Res, which provides
1200 dpi. If YES is selected, another menu
entry appears giving the user the option of
NORMAL or HALF speed.
B-18
Control Panel Menus
EN
I/O Menu
Items in the I/O (input/output) Menu affect the communication
between the printer and the computer.
I/O Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
I/O TIMEOUT=15
5 to 300
Select the I/O timeout period in seconds. (I/O
timeout refers to the time, measured in
seconds, that the printer waits before ending a
print job.)
This setting allows you to adjust timeout for
best performance. If data from other ports
appear in the middle of your print job, increase
the timeout value.
Press [- Value +] once to change settings by
increments of 1, or hold down [- Value +] to
scroll by increments of 10.
I/O BUFFER=AUTO
AUTO
ON
OFF
Allocate memory for I/O buffering.
AUTO: The printer automatically reserves
memory for I/O buffering. Additional
configurations are not required and the
I/O BUFFER SIZE menu item does not
appear.
ON: The I/O BUFFER SIZE item appears (see
below). Specify the amount of memory to be
used for I/O buffering.
OFF: I/O buffering is not performed and the
I/O BUFFER SIZE item does not appear.
When the I/O buffer setting is changed, any
downloaded resources (such as fonts or
macros) will need to be downloaded again,
unless they are stored on an optional hard disk
or flash DIMM.
For more information, see page C-7.
I/O BUFFER SIZE=
100K
10K and up
This item appears only when I/O BUFFER=ON.
Specify the amount of memory for I/O buffering.
The maximum amount of memory available for
I/O buffering is determined by the amount of
memory installed in the printer, the languages
installed in the printer, and by other memory
allocations that must be made.
Press [-Value +] to change settings by
increments of 10 (up to 100 KB) or by
increments of 100 (above 100 KB).
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-19
I/O Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
PARALLEL HIGH
SPEED=YES
YES
NO
Select the speed at which data is transmitted
to the printer.
YES: The printer accepts faster parallel
communications used for connections with
newer computers.
NO: The printer accepts slower parallel
communications used for connections with
older computers.
PARALLEL ADV
FUNCTIONS=ON
ON
OFF
Turn the bidirectional parallel communication
on or off. The default is set for a bidirectional
parallel port (IEEE-1284).
This setting allows the printer to send status
readback messages to the computer. (Turning
the parallel advanced functions on might slow
language switching.)
B-20
Control Panel Menus
EN
EIO Menu (4050 N/4050 TN)
EIO (enhanced input/output) Menus depend on the particular
accessory product installed in an EIO slot of the printer. If the printer
contains an HP JetDirect print server EIO card, you can configure
basic networking parameters using the EIO Menu. These and other
parameters can also be configured through HP JetAdmin and HP
Web JetAdmin.
EIO Menu
Item
Values
Explanation
CFG NETWORK=NO
NO
NO: The JetDirect Menu is not accessible.
YES : The JetDirect Menu appears.
IPX/SPX=ON
ON
OFF
Select whether the IPX/SPX protocol stack (in
Novell NetWare networks, for example) is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
DLC/LLC=ON
ON
OFF
Select whether the DLC/LLC protocol stack is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
TCP/IP=ON
ON
OFF
Select whether the TCP/IP protocol stack is
enabled (on) or disabled (off).
ETALK=ON
ON
OFF
Select whether the Apple EtherTalk protocol
stack is enabled (on) or disabled (off).
CFG IPX/SPX=NO
NO
YES
NO: The IPX/SPX Menu is not accessible.
YES : The IPX/SPX Menu appears. In the
YES
IPX/SPX Menu, you can specify the frame type
parameter used on your network. The default
is AUTO, to automatically set and limit the frame
type to the one detected.
For Ethernet cards, frame type selections
include EN_8023, EN_II, EN_8022, EN_SNAP.
For Token Ring cards, frame type selections
include TR_8022, TR_SNAP.
In the IPX/SPX Menu for Token Ring cards, you
can also specify NetWare Source Routing
parameters, which include SRC RT=AUTO
(default), OFF, SINGLE R, or ALL RT.
EN
Control Panel Menus
B-21
EIO Menu (Continued)
Item
Values
Explanation
CFG TCP/IP=NO
NO
YES
NO: The TCP/IP Menu is not accessible.
YES: The TCP/IP Menu appears. In the TCP/IP
Menu, you can specify BOOTP=YES for TCP/IP
parameters to be automatically loaded from a
bootp or DHCP server when the printer is
turned on. If you specify BOOTP=NO, you can
manually set selected TCP/IP parameters from
the control panel. You can manually set each
byte of the IP address (IP), Subnet Mask (SM),
Syslog Server (LG), and Default Gateway
(GW).
If the Syslog Server IP address is left blank, the
printer will still work. Also, you can manually set
the Timeout time period.
CFG ETALK=NO
NO
YES
NO: The EtherTalk Menu is not accessible.
YES: The EtherTalk Menu appears. In the
EtherTalk Menu you can set the AppleTalk
phase parameter (ETALK PHASE=1 or 2) for
your network.
B-22
Control Panel Menus
EN
Resets Menu
Use this menu with caution. You can lose buffered page data or
printer configuration settings when you select these items. Only
reset the printer under the following circumstances:
• You want to restore the printer’s default settings.
• Communication between the printer and computer has been
interrupted.
• You are using both the serial and parallel I/O ports, and one of
the ports is having problems.
The items in the Resets Menu will clear all memory in the printer,
while [Cancel Job] clears only the current job.
Note
EN
Job Retention features will be deleted if you do not have the hard
disk accessory.
Control Panel Menus
B-23
Resets Menu
Item
Explanation
RESET MEMORY
This item clears the printer buffer and the active I/O input buffer, and
makes the control panel defaults current.
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESTORE FACTORY
SETTINGS
This item performs a simple reset and restores most of the factory
(default) settings. This item also clears the input buffer for the active
I/O.
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
RESET ACTIVE I/O
CHANNEL
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output
buffers (for the active I/Os only).
Resetting memory during a print job can result in data loss.
.
RESET ALL I/O
CHANNELS
This item performs a simple reset and clears the input and output
buffers for all I/Os.
B-24
Control Panel Menus
EN
C
Printer Memory and Expansion
Overview
The printer has three dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slots
for upgrading with:
• More printer memory. DIMMs are available in 4, 8, 16, 32, and 64
•
•
•
Note
MB, for a maximum of 200 MB.
Flash memory DIMMs, available in 2 and 4 MB. Unlike standard
printer memory, flash DIMMs can be used to permanently store
downloaded items in the printer, even when the printer is off.
DIMM-based accessory fonts, macros, and patterns.
Other DIMM-based printer languages and printer options.
Single in-line memory modules (SIMMs) used on previous
HP LaserJet printers are not compatible with the printer.
You might want to add more memory to the printer if you often print
complex graphics or PS documents, print with the optional duplexer,
use many downloaded fonts, or print at ProRes 1200.
EN
Printer Memory and Expansion
C-1
The printer has two enhanced input/output (EIO) slots for
expanding the printer’s capabilities with:
• A network card.
• A mass storage device, such as a hard disk.
For ordering information, see page 9.
To find out how much memory is installed in the printer, or to find
out what is installed in the EIO slots, print a configuration page
(page 134).
C-2
Printer Memory and Expansion
EN
Installing Memory
Caution
Static electricity can damage dual
in-line memory modules (DIMMs).
When handling DIMMs, either wear an
antistatic wrist strap or frequently touch
the surface of the DIMM’s antistatic
package, then touch bare metal on the
printer.
If you have not already done so, print a
configuration page to find out how
much memory is installed in the printer
before adding more memory
(page 134).
1 Turn the printer off. Rotate the printer
for access to its right side. Unplug the
power cord and disconnect any
cables.
2 Grasp the cover (as illustrated) and
pull it firmly toward the rear of the
printer until it stops.
3 Remove the cover from the printer.
4 Loosen the captive screw holding the
DIMM access door with a Phillips #2
screwdriver. Open the door.
EN
Printer Memory and Expansion
C-3
5 Remove the DIMM from the antistatic
package. Hold the DIMM with fingers
against the side edges and thumbs
against the back edge. Align the
notches on the DIMM with the DIMM
slot. (Check that the locks on each
side of the DIMM slot are open, or
outward.)
6 Press the DIMM straight into the slot
(press firmly). Make sure the locks on
each side of the DIMM snap inward
into place. (To remove a DIMM, the
locks must be released.)
7 Close the DIMM access door and
tighten the screw.
8 Set the bottom of the cover onto the
printer. Make sure the bottom tabs on
the cover fit into the corresponding
slots in the printer. Rotate the cover
up towards the printer.
9 Slide the cover toward the front of the
printer until it clicks into place.
Reattach any interface cables and
the power cord, then turn the printer
on and test the DIMM. (Go to
page C-5.)
C-4
Printer Memory and Expansion
EN
Checking Memory Installation
Follow this procedure to verify that DIMMs are installed correctly:
1 Check that the printer’s control panel displays READY when the
printer is turned on. If an error message appears, a DIMM might
have been incorrectly installed. Check the printer messages
(page 103).
2 Print a new configuration page (page 134).
3 Check the memory section on the configuration page and
compare it to the configuration page printed before the DIMM
installation. If the amount of memory has not increased, the DIMM
might not be installed correctly (repeat the installation procedure)
or the DIMM might be defective (try a new DIMM).
Note
EN
If you installed a printer language (personality), check the Installed
Personalities and Options section on the configuration page. This
area should list the new printer language.
Printer Memory and Expansion
C-5
Adjusting Memory Settings
Resource Saving
Resource Saving allows the printer to keep downloaded resources
(permanent downloaded fonts, macros, or patterns) in memory
when the printer language or resolution is changed.
If you do not have an optional hard disk or flash DIMM for storing
downloaded resources, you might want to change the amount of
memory allocated to each language when downloading an
unusually large number of fonts, or if the printer is in a shared
environment.
The minimum amount of memory that can be allocated to Resource
Saving is 400 KB each for PCL and PS.
To determine how much memory to allocate to a language:
1 From the Configuration Menu, set RESOURCE SAVE=ON
(page B-15). You might need to add memory to the printer in order
for this option to appear in the printer’s control panel.
2 Also from the Configuration Menu, choose either PCL MEMORY or
PS MEMORY and change the setting to the highest value displayed.
This amount will vary depending upon how much memory is
installed in the printer.
3 Using a software application, download all the fonts you want to
use in the selected language.
4 Print a configuration page (page 134). The amount of memory
used by the fonts is listed next to the language. Round this figure
up to the nearest 100 KB. (For example, if 475 KB are shown,
500 KB should be reserved.)
5 From the Configuration Menu, set PCL MEMORY or PS MEMORY to
the value determined in step 4.
6 Repeat step 3. (You must download all fonts again. See the note
below.)
Note
C-6
When you change the Resource Saving setting, all downloaded
resources (such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded
again, unless they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash
DIMM.
Printer Memory and Expansion
EN
I/O Buffering
To allow the computer to continue working without waiting for the
print job to finish queuing, the printer uses a portion of its memory
(an I/O buffer) to hold jobs in progress. (If I/O buffering is off, no
memory is reserved for this function.)
In most cases, it is best to let the printer automatically reserve
memory for I/O buffering. (For each megabyte of memory added to
the printer, 100 kilobytes are reserved.)
To speed network printing, you might want to increase the amount
of memory reserved for I/O buffering.
To change the I/O Buffer setting:
1 From the I/O Menu, set I/O BUFFER=ON (page B-19).
2 Also from the I/O Menu, set I/O SIZE to the desired value.
Note
EN
When you change the I/O Buffer setting, all downloaded resources
(such as fonts or macros) will need to be downloaded again, unless
they are stored on an optional hard disk or flash DIMM.
Printer Memory and Expansion
C-7
Installing EIO Cards/Mass Storage
Turn off the printer before installing the EIO card or mass storage
device.
See Figure C-1 for orientation and location of the EIO card or
optional mass storage device, such as a hard disk.
Use HP Resource Manager to manage fonts on a mass storage
device (page 25). For more information, see the printer software
help.
HP is constantly introducing new software tools for use with your
printer and accessories. These tools are available from the Internet
free of charge. See page viii for how to visit the HP website for more
information.
After you have installed a new device, print a configuration page.
Figure C-1
C-8
Installing EIO Cards or Mass Storage Devices
Printer Memory and Expansion
EN
D
Printer Commands
F
Overview
Most software applications do not require you to enter printer
commands. See your computer and software documentation to find
the method for entering printer commands, if needed.
PCL 5e
PCL 5e printer commands tell the printer which tasks to perform
or which fonts to use. This appendix provides a quick reference for
users who are already familiar with PCL 5e command structure.
HP-GL/2
The printer has the ability to print vector graphics using the HP-GL/
2 graphics language. Printing in the HP-GL/2 language requires
that the printer leave PCL 5e language and enter HP-GL/2 mode,
which can be done by sending the printer PCL 5e code. Some
software applications switch languages through their drivers.
PJL
HP’s Printer Job Language (PJL) provides control above PCL 5e
and other printer languages. The four major functions provided by
PJL are: printer language switching, job separation, printer
configuration, and status readback from the printer. PJL
commands may be used to change printer default settings.
Note
The table at the end of this appendix contains commonly used
PCL 5e commands (page D-6). For a complete listing and
explanation of how to use PCL 5e, HP-GL/2, and PJL commands,
download the PCL 5e /PJL Technical Reference Documentation
Package (page 11).
To receive more information about printer commands via fax, call
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Service Technology) and
request an index for HP LaserJet printers. (See the HP Customer
Care Service and Support pages at the front of this user’s guide.)
EN
Printer Commands
D-1
Understanding PCL 5e Printer
Command Syntax
Before using printer commands, compare these characters:
Lowercase l:
l
Uppercase O:
O
Number one:
1
Number 0:
0
Many printer commands use the lowercase letter l (l) and the
number one (1), or the uppercase letter O (O) and the number zero
(0). These characters may not appear on your screen as shown
here. You must use the exact character and case specified for PCL
5e printer commands.
Figure D-1 displays the elements of a typical printer command (in
this instance, a command for page orientation).
Escape character
Parameterized
character
Figure D-1
D-2
Value field (contains both
Group
character
Terminination character
(uppercase)
Printer Command Elements
Printer Commands
EN
Combining Escape Sequences
Escape sequences may be combined into one escape sequence
string. There are three important rules to follow when combining
code:
1
2
3
The first two characters after the ? character (the
parameterized and group characters, see Figure D-1) must be
the same in all of the commands to be combined.
When combining escape sequences, change the uppercase
(termination) character in each individual escape sequence to
lower case.
The final character of the combined escape sequence must be
uppercase.
The following is an example of an escape sequence string that
would be sent to the printer to select legal paper, landscape
orientation, and 8 lines per inch:
?&l3A?&l1O?&l8D
The following escape sequence sends the same printer commands
by combining them into a shorter sequence:
?&l3a1o8D
EN
Printer Commands
D-3
Entering Escape Characters
Printer commands always begin with the escape character (?).
The following table shows how the escape character can be entered
from various DOS software applications.
DOS Software Application
Entry
What Appears
Lotus 1-2-3 and Symphony
Type \027
027
Microsoft Word for DOS
Hold down Alt and type 027 on the
numeric keypad
←
WordPerfect for DOS
Type <27>
<27>
MS-DOS Edit
Hold down Ctrl-P, and press Esc
←
MS-DOS Edlin
Hold down Ctrl-V, and press [
^[
dBase
?? CHR(27)+"command"
?? CHR(27)+" "
D-4
Printer Commands
EN
Selecting PCL 5e Fonts
PCL 5e printer commands for selecting fonts can be found on the
PCL 5e Font List (page 136). A sample section is shown below.
Notice the two variable boxes for symbol set and point size.
These variables must be filled in or the printer will use defaults. For
example, if you want a symbol set that contains line-draw
characters, select the 10U (PC-8) or 12U (PC-850) symbol set.
Other common symbol set codes are listed in the table on page D-8.
Note
Fonts are either “fixed” or “proportional” in spacing. The printer
contains both fixed fonts (Courier, Letter Gothic, and Lineprinter)
and proportional fonts (CG Times, Arial, Times New Roman, and
others).
Fixed-spaced fonts are generally used in applications such as
spreadsheets and databases, where it is important for columns to
line up vertically. Proportional-spaced fonts are generally used in
text and word processing applications.
EN
Printer Commands
D-5
Common PCL 5e Printer Commands
Page Control Commands
Job Control Commands
Common PCL 5e Printer Commands
D-6
Function
Command
Options (#)
Reset
?E
n/a
Number of Copies
?&l#X
1 to 999
2-sided/1-sided printing
?&l#S
0 = Simplex (1-sided) printing
1 = Duplex (2-sided) with long edge binding
2 = Duplex (2-sided) with short edge binding
Paper Source
?&l#H
0 = prints or ejects current page
1 = Tray 2
2 = manual feed, paper
3 = manual feed, envelope
4 = Tray 1
5 = Tray 3
6 = Envelope Feeder
7 = auto select
8 = Tray 4
20-69 = external trays.
Paper size
?&l#A
1 = Executive
2 = Letter
3 = Legal
25 = A5
26 = A4
45 = B5-JIS
80 = Monarch
81 = Commercial 10
90 = DL
91 = International C5
100 = B5
101 = Custom
Paper Type
?&n#
5WdBond = Bond
6WdPlain = Plain
6WdColor = Color
7WdLabels = Labels
9WdRecycled = Recycled
11WdLetterhead = Letterhead
10WdCardstock = Cardstock
11WdPrepunched = Prepunched
11WdPreprinted = Preprinted
13WdTransparency = Transparency
#WdCustompapertype = Custom1
Orientation
?&l#O
0 = Portrait
1 = Landscape
2 = Reverse Portrait
3 = Reverse Landscape
Printer Commands
EN
Language Selection
Programming Hints
Cursor Positioning
Page Control Commands (Continued)
Common PCL 5e Printer Commands (Continued)
EN
Function
Command
Options (#)
Top Margin
?&l#E
# = number of lines
Text Length (bottom margin)
?&l#F
# = number of lines from top margin
Left Margin
?&a#L
# = column number
Right Margin
?&a#M
# = column number from left margin
Horizontal Motion Index
?&k#H
1/120-inch increments (compresses print horizontally)
Vertical Motion Index
?&l#C
1/48-inch increments (compresses print vertically)
Line Spacing
?&l#D
# = lines per inch (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12, 16, 24, 48)
Perforation Skip
?&l#L
0 = disable
1 = enable
Vertical Position (Rows)
?&a#R
# = row number
Vertical Position (Dots)
?*p#Y
# = dot number (300 dots = 1 inch)
Vertical Position (Decipoints)
?&a#V
# = decipoint number (720 decipoints = 1 inch)
Horizontal Position (Columns)
?&a#C
# = column number
Horizontal Position (Dots)
?*p#X
# = dot number (300 dots = 1 inch)
Horizontal Position (Decipoints)
?&a#H
# = decipoint number (720 decipoints = 1 inch)
End of Line Wrap
?&s#C
0 = Enable
1 = Disable
Display Functions On
?Y
n/a
Display Functions Off
?Z
n/a
Enter PCL 5e Mode
?%#A
0 = Use previous PCL 5e cursor position
1 = Use current HP-GL/2 pen position
Enter HP-GL/2 Mode
?%#B
0 = Use previous HP-GL/2 pen position
1 = Use current PCL 5e cursor position
Printer Commands
D-7
Font Selection
Common PCL 5e Printer Commands (Continued)
Function
Command
Options (#)
Symbol Sets
?(#
8U = HP Roman-8 Symbol Set
10U = IBM Layout (PC-8) (code page 437) Default Symbol Set
12U = IBM Layout for Europe (PC-850) (code page 850)
8M = Math-8
19U = Windows 3.1 Latin 1
9E = Windows 3.1 Latin 2 (commonly used in Eastern Europe)
5T = Windows 3.1 Latin 5 (commonly used in Turkey)
579L = Wingdings Font
Primary Spacing
?(s#P
0 = fixed
1 = proportional
Primary Pitch
?(s#H
# = characters/inch
Set Pitch Mode2
?&k#S
0 = 10
4 = 12 (elite)
2 = 16.5 - 16.7 (compressed)
Primary Height
?(s#V
# = points
Primary Style
?(s#S
0 = upright (solid)
1 = italic
4 = condensed
5 = condensed italic
Primary Stroke Wt.
?(s#B
0 = medium (book or text)
1 = semi bold
3 = bold
4 = extra bold
Typeface
?(s#T
Print a PCL 5e font list to view the command for each internal
font (page 136).
1
For custom paper, replace “Custompapertype” with the name of the paper, and replace the “#” with the number of
characters in the name, plus 1.
2
The preferred method is to use the primary pitch command.
D-8
Printer Commands
EN
E
Regulatory Information
G
FCC Regulations
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. If this
equipment is not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference
will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does
cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
•
•
•
•
Note
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase separation between equipment and receiver.
Connect equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that
to which the receiver is located.
Consult your dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician.
Any changes or modifications to the printer that are not expressly
approved by HP could void the user’s authority to operate this
equipment.
Use of a shielded interface cable is required to comply with the
Class B limits of Part 15 of FCC rules.
EN
Regulatory Information
E-1
Environmental Product Stewardship
Protecting the Environment
Hewlett-Packard Company is committed to providing quality
products in an environmentally-sound manner. The HP LaserJet
printer has been designed with several attributes to minimize
impacts on the environment.
This HP LaserJet printer eliminates:
•
Ozone production
The printer uses charging rollers in the electrophotographic
process and therefore generates no appreciable ozone gas
(O3).
This HP LaserJet printer design reduces:
•
Energy consumption
Energy usage drops significantly while in low-power
(PowerSave) mode. Not only does this save natural resources,
but it also saves money without affecting the high performance
of this printer. This product qualifies for ENERGY STAR.
ENERGY STAR is a voluntary program established to encourage
the development of energy-efficient office products.
ENERGY STAR is a U.S. registered service
mark of the U.S. EPA. As an ENERGY STAR
partner, Hewlett-Packard Company has
determined that this product meets
ENERGY STAR Guidelines for energy
efficiency.
E-2
Regulatory Information
EN
•
Toner consumption
EconoMode uses significantly less toner, which might extend
the life of the toner cartridge.
•
Paper use
Depending on the type of software program in use, you can
request that a number of pages of your document be printed
on one sheet of paper. This N-up printing practice and the
printer’s automatic duplexing feature, which provides
two-sided printing, can reduce paper usage and the resulting
demands on natural resources.
The design of this HP LaserJet printer facilitates the recycling of:
•
Plastics
Plastic housing parts have markings according to international
standards that enhance the ability to identify plastics for
recycling purposes at the end of the printer’s life.
•
HP LaserJet printing supplies
In many countries, this product’s printing supplies (e.g., toner
cartridge, drum, fuser) can be returned to HP through the
HP Planet Partners Printing Supplies Environmental Program.
An easy-to-use and free takeback program is available in over
20 countries. Multi-lingual program information and
instructions are included in every new HP LaserJet Toner
Cartridge and Consumables package.
•
HP Planet Partners Printing Supplies Environmental
Program Information
Since 1990, the HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge Recycling
Program has collected more than 25 million used LaserJet
toner cartridges that otherwise may have been discarded in
the world’s landfills. The HP LaserJet toner cartridges and
consumables are collected and bulk-shipped to our
resource recovery partners who disassemble the cartridge.
After a thorough quality inspection, minor, nonprinting
process critical parts such as nuts, screws and clips are
reclaimed for use in new cartridges. Remaining materials
are separated and converted into raw materials for use by
other industries to make a variety of useful products.
EN
Regulatory Information
E-3
US Returns
For a more environmentally responsible return of used
cartridges and consumables, HP encourages the use of
bulk returns. Simply bundle two or more cartridges together
and use single, pre-paid, and pre-addressed UPS label that
is supplied in the package. For more information in the U.S.,
call 1-800-340-2445 or visit the HP LaserJet Supplies
website at http://www.ljsupplies.com/planetpartners
Non-U.S. customers should call the local HP Sales and
Service Office or visit the following websites for further
information regarding availability of the HP Planet Partners
LaserJet Toner Cartridge and Consumables Recycling
Program.
Asia/Pacific Region
http://www.asiapacific.hp.com/planp1
Europe
http://www.hp.com/pays/eur_supplies/english/
planetpartners
•
Paper
This printer is suited for the use of recycled papers when the
paper meets the guidelines outlined in the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Paper Specification Guide. See page 11 for
HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification Guide
ordering information. This printer is suitable for the use of
recycled paper according to DIN 19309.
E-4
Regulatory Information
EN
To ensure longevity of your HP LaserJet printer, HP provides the
following:
•
Extended warranty
HP SupportPack provides coverage for the HP hardware
product and all HP-supplied internal components. The
hardware maintenance covers a three-year period from date
of the HP product purchase. The customer must purchase
HP SupportPack within 90 days of the HP product purchase.
Information on HP SupportPack is available in a fax format by
calling HP FIRST (fax-on-demand service). The document
number is 9036. See the HP Customer Care Service and
Support pages at the front of this user’s guide for appropriate
HP FIRST phone numbers and information.
•
Spare parts and consumables availability
Spare parts and consumable supplies for this product will be made
available for at least 5 years after production has stopped.
Material Safety Data Sheets
The Toner Cartridge/Drum material safety data sheet (MSDS) can
be obtained by contacting the HP LaserJet website at: http://
www.ljsupplies.com/planetpartners/datasheets.html.
If you do not have access to the Internet, call the U.S. HP FIRST
(fax-on-demand service) at (800) 231-9300. Use Index number 7
for a listing of the Toner Cartridge/Drum Material/Chemical Safety
Data Sheets. Non-U.S. customers should refer to the front of this
manual for appropriate HP FIRST phone numbers and information.
EN
Regulatory Information
E-5
Declaration of Conformity
according to ISO/IEC Guide 22 and EN45014
Manufacturer’s Name:
Hewlett-Packard Company
Manufacturer’s Address:
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714-1021, USA
declares that the product
Product Name:
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 T, 4050 N, 4050 TN
Model Numbers:
C4251A, C4252A, C4253A, C4254A
Product Options:
ALL
conforms to the following Product Specifications:
Safety:
IEC 950:1991+A1+A2+A3+A4 / EN 60950:1992+A1+A2+A3+A4+A11
EMC:
IEC 825-1:1993 / EN 60825-1:1994 Class 1 (Laser/LED)
1
CISPR 22:1993+A1 / EN 55022:1994 Class B )
EN 50082-1:1992
IEC 801-2:1991 / prEN 55024-2:1992 -
4 kV CD, 8 kV AD
IEC 801-3:1984 / prEN 55024-3:1991 -
4 V/m
IEC 801-4:1988 / prEN 55024-4:1992 -
0.5 kV Signal Lines
1.0 kV Power Lines
IEC 1000-3-2:1995 / EN61000-3-2:1995
IEC 1000-3-3:1994 / EN61000-3.3:1995
2
1
FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15 Class B ) / ICES-003, Issue 2 / VCCI-2 )
1
AS / NZS 3548:1992 / CISPR 22:1993 Class B )
Supplementary Information:
The product herewith complies with the requirements of the following Directives and carries the
CE-marking accordingly:
• the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC
• the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
1. The product was tested in a typical configuration with Hewlett-Packard Personal Computer Systems.
2. This Device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
January 15, 1997
For Compliance Information ONLY, contact:
Australia Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd.,
31-41 Joseph Street, Blackburn, Victoria 3130, Australia
European Contact:
Your Local Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office or
Hewlett-Packard Gmbh, Department HQ-TRE / Standards
Europe, Herrenberger Straße 130, D-71034 Böblingen (FAX:
+49-7031-14-3143)
USA Contact:
Product Regulations Manager, Hewlett-Packard Company, PO
Box 15 Mail Stop 160, Boise, ID 83707-0015 (Phone:
208-396-6000)
E-6
Regulatory Information
EN
Safety Statements
Laser Safety Statement
The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S.
Food and Drug Administration has implemented regulations for laser
products manufactured since August 1, 1976. Compliance is
mandatory for products marketed in the United States. The printer is
certified as a “Class 1” laser product under the U.S. Department of
Health and Human Services (DHHS) Radiation Performance Standard
according to the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968.
Since radiation emitted inside the printer is completely confined within
protective housings and external covers, the laser beam cannot escape
during any phase of normal user operation.
WARNING!
Using controls, making adjustments, or performing procedures
other than those specified in this user’s guide may result in exposure
to hazardous radiation.
Canadian DOC Regulations
Complies with Canadian EMC Class B requirements.
«Conforme á la classe B des normes canadiennes de compatibilité
électromagnétiques. «CEM».»
VCCI Statement (Japan)
EN
Regulatory Information
E-7
Laser Statement for Finland
Luokan 1 laserlaite
Klass 1 Laser Apparat
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 T, 4050 N, 4050 TN laserkirjoitin on
käyttäjän kannalta turvallinen luokan 1 laserlaite. Normaalissa
käytössä kirjoittimen suojakotelointi estää lasersäteen pääsyn laitteen
ulkopuolelle. Laitteen turvallisuusluokka on määritetty standardin EN
60825-1 (1994) mukaisesti.
Varoitus!
Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla
saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle
näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle.
Varning!
Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i bruksanvisning
specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning,
som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1.
HUOLTO
HP LaserJet 4050, 4050 T, 4050 N, 4050 TN -kirjoittimen sisällä ei
ole käyttäjän huollettavissa olevia kohteita. Laitteen saa avata ja
huoltaa ainoastaan sen huoltamiseen koulutettu henkilö.
Tällaiseksi huoltotoimenpiteeksi ei katsota väriainekasetin
vaihtamista, paperiradan puhdistusta tai muita käyttäjän
käsikirjassa lueteltuja, käyttäjän tehtäväksi tarkoitettuja
ylläpitotoimia, jotka voidaan suorittaa ilman erikoistyökaluja.
Varo!
Mikäli kirjoittimen suojakotelo avataan, olet alttiina näkymättömälle
lasersäteilylle laitteen ollessa toiminnassa. Älä katso säteeseen.
Varning!
Om laserprinterns skyddshölje öppnas då apparaten är i funktion,
utsättas användaren för osynlig laserstrålning. Betrakta ej strålen.
Tiedot laitteessa käytettävän laserdiodin säteilyominaisuuksista:
Aallonpituus 775-795 nm
Teho 5 mW
Luokan 3B laser
E-8
Regulatory Information
EN
Glossary
adjustable tray
A paper tray that is able to adapt to more than one size
of media. All trays used in the printer are adjustable.
bidirectional
communication
Bidirectional communication enables the printer to
respond to data inquiries from your computer and report
back information such as what accessories are
connected to the printer.
DIMM
(dual in-line memory
module)
A circuit board that holds extra memory chips for the
printer.
drag-and-drop
The ability to execute a function graphically without
typing a command. For example, in the Windows 95
Explorer, you can copy or move a file by “dragging” it
from one folder and “dropping” it into another.
duplex printing
accessory
(also called “duplexer”)
An optional accessory used for automatically printing
on both sides of a sheet of paper.
enhanced input/output
(EIO)
Printer accessory slots used for transferring data
between the computer and printer. Modular I/O (MIO)
accessories for older printers and the newer EIO
technology are not compatible.
media
Any material to be printed, including envelopes, labels,
transparencies, and all types of paper. (Paper types
include letterhead, prepunched, recycled, bond, color
stock, card stock, and preprinted.)
Mopier
An HP LaserJet printer equipped to deliver multiple
original prints (or generate copies of a print job).
PCL 5e/6
HP’s printer control language.
PostScript Emulation
See PS.
preprinted
Having pre-designed forms already printed on the
paper.
printer driver
Program files that allow a software application to
communicate with the printer and use its features.
EN
Glossary
1
printer driver help
On-screen instructions regarding the use of the printer
driver.
printer software
Any or all of the software shipped with the printer. The
printer is packaged with a compact disc containing the
software needed to access all of the printer’s features.
If the printer has been correctly set up, the appropriate
software is already installed.
printer software help
On-screen instructions regarding the use of the printer
software. Help screens which can be activated from the
Help button (or a question mark symbol) in the printer
software.
PS
PostScript Level 2 Emulation (or Level 1 Emulation for
Windows 3.1x). A printer language provided with the
printer.
RIP ONCE
The ability to create an image of a page and then save
the compressed image in memory.
size
In this user’s guide, paper size refers to the dimensions
of a sheet of paper or other print media.
software application
A computer program or package developed for sale to
the general public.
source
In this user’s guide, paper source refers to the paper
tray where paper or other print media is loaded.
type
In this user’s guide, paper type refers to the unique
properties of paper or other print media, such as rough,
transparency, labels, etc.
universal tray
A paper tray that can be adjusted for many paper sizes.
watermark
Text printed on the background of a page.
2
Glossary
EN
Index
Numerics
B
1200 dpi B-8
250-sheet tray
loading 37
ordering 8
paper orientation 46
paper specifications A-4
2-sided printing, see duplex
printing accessory
2-up printing 62
300 dpi B-8
3-hole punched paper
duplexing 43
orientation 45–46
500-sheet tray (4050/4050 N)
loading 35
ordering 8
paper orientation 46
paper specifications A-4
500-sheet tray (optional)
loading 39–40
ordering 8
paper orientation 46
paper specifications A-5
600 dpi B-8
Background Printing
(Macintosh) 125
backlight, turning off B-14
Bad Duplexer Connection
message 104
basic printing tasks 31–58
benefits, printer 2
bidirectional parallel
communication setting B-20
Binding setting 44, B-6
bit transmission A-18
blank configuration page,
troubleshooting 119
blank display, troubleshooting
118
both sides, printing with duplex
accessory, see duplex
printing accessory
buffer, changing size C-7
A
Access Denied Menus Locked
message 15, 104
accessories
ordering 8–11
types of 6
verifying installation 134–
135
warranty 137
acoustic emissions A-17
adapters
ordering 10
pin connections A-19
additional drivers, obtaining 17
adhesive on envelopes,
printing with A-12
adjusting memory settings C-6
advanced printing tasks 31,
60–66
allocating memory to printer
language B-15, C-6
Append CR To LF setting B-13
Attention light 12
authorized dealers, locating,
see front pages viii
Auto Continue setting 103,
B-16
EN
C
cables, serial
ordering 10
pin outs A-20
specifications A-18–A-20
troubleshooting 120, 123
types of A-19
Canadian DOC regulations
E-7
Cancel Job key 13, B-23
capacity, paper tray A-3–A-6
card stock A-13–A-14
see also custom-size paper
cartridge
see toner cartridge
CFG EtherTalk setting B-22
CFG Network setting B-21
CFG Novell setting B-21
CFG TCP/IP setting B-22
characters
escape D-3
misformed 116–117
CFC usage E-2
Chooser, troubleshooting 124
choosing driver 24
cleaning
paper path 86
printer 83–84
cleaning page
setting B-9
using 86
Clearable Warnings setting
103, B-16
clearing
paper jams 90–102
persistent messages 103
collation (mopying) 59
combining escape sequences
D-3
commands, printer D-1–D-8
PCL D-6–D-8
selecting PCL fonts D-5
syntax D-2–D-3
compact disc 17
Configuration Menu 103,
B-14–B-17
configuration page
printing 134–135, B-4
sample 135
troubleshooting 119
configurations
checking printer’s 133–136
printer 3
printer’s current B-1
Configure Custom Paper
setting B-10
Configure Fuser Mode Menu
setting B-6
configure ProRes 1200 B-18
consumables, see supplies
consumption, power A-16
continue printing with low
toner 80–81
control panel
keys 13
language 118
layout 12
lights 12, B-14
locating 4
locking 28
menus B-1–B-23
messages 103–113
overriding settings 16
printing menu map 16, 133
troubleshooting 118
control panel menus
private/stored jobs menu
B-3
quick copy jobs menu B-2
converting paper weights A-9
copies
printing additional 67
Copies setting B-10
Courier setting B-13
Index
1
creases, troubleshooting 116–
117
Create Cleaning Page setting
B-9
curling paper, troubleshooting
116–117, A-7
current printer settings 16,
133–136
Custom Install option 21, 22
customizing Tray 1 operation
63–64
custom-size paper
guidelines for printing 57
margins 57
orientation 46
printing 33, 56–58
setting paper size 57–58
specifications A-3, A-5
D
dark printing, setting toner
density B-9
Data light 12
data, transmitting speed B-20
dealers, locating HP
authorized, see front pages
viii
Declaration of Conformity E-6
default settings B-1
restoring B-23
deleting fonts 25
diagnostics, printer 29
dial, paper size 40
dimensions, paper A-3–A-6
dimensions, printer’s A-15
DIMMs
accessories 6
installing C-1–C-5
ordering 9
printing font list 136
display, see control panel
DLC/LLC setting B-21
documentation, ordering 11
DOS, entering escape
characters D-3
double-side-seam envelopes,
printing with A-12
draft-quality printing B-9
drivers, printer 17–24
additional 21
help software 24
included with printer 20
Macintosh 28
selecting 24
troubleshooting 120
Macintosh 124
Windows 22
dropouts, troubleshooting
116–117, A-7
duplex printing accessory
clearing paper jams 91,
100–102
2
Index
dust cover 41
guidelines 42
ordering 8
paper orientation 43
paper specifications A-6
print layout options 44
printing with 41–44
troubleshooting 102, 123
Duplex setting 42, B-6
duplexer, see duplex printing
accessory
dust cover
duplex printing accessory
41
E
EconoMode setting B-9
EDO DIMMs, ordering 9
see also DIMMs
EIO cards
installing C-8
ordering 10
EIO Menu B-21–B-22
electrical specifications A-16
emissions, acoustic A-17
energy consumption, see
power consumption
Energy Star E-2
envelope feeder
envelope specifications 47,
49, A-6, A-11–A-13
inserting and removing 50
ordering 8
paper jams, clearing 94
printing with 49–51
Envelope Feeder Size setting
B-5
Envelope Feeder Type setting
B-5
envelopes
adhesive strips or flaps A-12
double-side-seams A-12
guidelines 47
margins 47, A-13
printing 33, 47–51
printing from Tray 1 48
printing with envelope
feeder 49–51
solving repeated jams 102
specifications 47, 49, A-11–
A-13
storing A-13
wrinkled 47, A-11
environmental product
stewardship E-2–E-5
environmental specifications
A-16–A-17
equivalent weights to US
paper A-9
error log, see event log
error messages 103–113
clearing repeated
messages 103
escape characters
entering in DOS D-3
examples D-2
escape sequences 136, D-3
EtherTalk setting B-21
event log 135, B-4
expanding memory C-1–C-8
F
face-down output bin 32
face-up output bin 33
faded print, troubleshooting
116–117
FastRes 1200 B-8
FCC regulations E-1
features, printer 2
feeding paper, problems with
122, A-7
file directory B-4
Finland laser statement E-8
Finland’s laser statement E-8
500-sheet tray (4050/4050 N)
loading 35
ordering 8
paper orientation 46
paper specifications A-4
500-sheet tray (optional)
loading 39–40
ordering 8
paper orientation 46
paper specifications A-5
fixed-spaced fonts D-5
flaps on envelopes, printing
with A-12
flash DIMMs, ordering 9
see also DIMMs
flowchart, troubleshooting
for Macintosh 124–125
printer errors 118–125
fonts
control panel settings B-11–
B-13
fixed-spaced D-5
information about 136
installing and deleting 25
internal 136
ordering DIMMs 9
printing list of 136
proportional-spaced D-5
selecting PCL D-5
soft 136
troubleshooting (Macintosh)
125
FontSmart, see HP FontSmart
form, Service Information 142
format problems,
troubleshooting 121–122
frequent paper jams, solving
102
EN
G
garbled print, troubleshooting
121, 122
Go key 13
graphics, vector D-1
gray background,
troubleshooting 116–117,
A-7
guidelines
card stock 56, A-13–A-14
custom-size paper 56–57
duplexing 42
envelopes 47, A-11–A-13
labels 53–54, A-10
paper A-2, A-7
printing both sides 42
repacking printer 138
transparencies 55, A-10
H
hard disk
installing C-8
ordering 9
printing font list 136
hardware warranty 137
heavy paper
printing 33, 56
specifications A-13–A-14
held job
deleting 70
printing 69
Help button, in printer driver 24
help screens 24
holding a job 69
HP Customer Care, see front
pages viii–x
HP Fast InfraRed Receiver
about 75
HP FIRST, see front pages xi
HP FontSmart 25, C-8
HP JetAdmin 17, 29, 66
installing 29
HP JetDirect print server card
configuring network
parameters B-21
installing C-8
ordering 10
HP JetSend 26
HP LaserJet 4050 series
printer configurations 3
HP LaserJet Paper, ordering 8
HP LaserJet Toner Cartridge
ordering 8
recycling program E-3
HP LaserJet Utility 28
HP Maintenance Agreement
137
HP Resource Manager 25,
104
HP Software License Terms
143
HP SupportPack 137
EN
HP TonerGauge 79, 135
HP Worldwide Sales and
Service Offices 145–158
HP-GL/2 commands D-1
HP-UX 29
humidity specifications A-17
I
I/O Buffer setting B-19
I/O buffer, changing size C-7
I/O cards
installing C-8
ordering 10
I/O Menu B-19–B-20
I/O Timeout setting B-19
incorrect fonts 121, 122, 125
index cards A-13–A-14
see also custom-size paper
Information Menu B-4
information pages, for
troubleshooting 133–136
infrared
printing with 75
input tray areas
envelope feeder jams 94
paper jams 92–94
troubleshooting 123
inserting envelope feeder 50
installed personalities and
options, displayed on
configuration page 135
installing
drivers 20
EIO cards C-8
fonts 25
HP FontSmart 25
HP JetAdmin 18, 29
HP JetSend 26
mass storage devices C-8
memory C-3–C-5
software 17
toner cartridges 78
interface accessories
ordering 10
troubleshooting 120
internal fonts 136, B-12
IP addresses, current 135
Item key 13
J
Jam Recovery setting B-17
JetAdmin, see HP JetAdmin
JetSend, see HP JetSend
Job Cancel key, see Cancel
Job key
job management 67
job retention 67, 69–72
Job Storage Disk Error page
114
K
keys, control panel 13
L
labels
printing 33, 53–54
solving repeated jams 102
specifications A-10
landscape, orientation B-11
language, on control panel
118
languages, printer
(personality)
allocating memory to B-15,
C-6
drivers 24
selecting default B-14
laser
safety statement for Finland
E-8
laser safety statement E-7
laser statement for Finland E-8
LaserJet paper, see HP
LaserJet Paper
LaserJet Utility, see HP
LaserJet Utility
LaserWriter printer driver 28
latest drivers, obtaining 17
layout options
duplexing 44
printing multiple pages on
one sheet 62
letterhead paper
duplexing 43
orientation 45–46
license for software 143
light printing
setting toner density B-9
troubleshooting 116–117
lights
control panel 12
turning off (PowerSave)
B-14
lines, troubleshooting 116–
117
loading
envelope feeder 51
envelopes in Tray 1 48
paper trays 34–40
locating paper jams 91
locking control panel 28
locking out paper trays 65
loose toner, troubleshooting
116–117, A-7
M
Macintosh
LaserWriter 8 driver 28
network cable kit, ordering
10
PPDs 20, 28, 126
printer drivers 20, 28
selecting alternate PPD 126
serial cable, ordering 10
software for 28
Index
3
troubleshooting flowchart
124–125
maintaining the printer 77–87
maintenance kit 11, 87
maintenance message 87
Maintenance Message setting
B-17
Manual Feed setting B-6
manually feeding paper 64
manuals, ordering 11
margins
custom-size paper 57
envelopes 47, A-13
mass storage devices
installing C-8
ordering 10
maximum paper size 56, A-3–
A-6
media, see paper
memory
allocated to printer
languages B-15, C-6
changing I/O buffer size C-7
changing resource saving
C-6
checking installation C-5
expansion C-1–C-8
information on configuration
page 135
installation location 4
installing DIMMs C-3–C-5
installing mass storage
device C-8
ordering 9
Menu key 13
menu map B-4
printing 16, 133
menu tree, see menu map
menus, control panel B-1–
B-23
messages, printer 103–113
MEt B-16
Minimum Install option 21
minimum paper size 56, A-3–
A-6
misformed characters,
troubleshooting 116–117
model number, locating 5
mopying
See also printer collation 59
MS Windows 3.1, 9x, or NT
help 24
network software 29
printer drivers 20
software 17–26, 29–30
multi-purpose paper, ordering
8
multi-purpose tray, see Tray 1
4
Index
N
networks
HP JetAdmin 17, 29
ordering I/O cards 10
software for 17, 29
troubleshooting 120–125
Macintosh 124
new toner cartridge 78, 117,
119, B-18
no jobs print, troubleshooting
120
noise emissions, see acoustic
emissions
Novell NetWare 29
Novell setting B-21
n-up printing 62
O
online help 24
online services, see front
pages viii
operating temperature A-17
optional 500-sheet tray, see
500-sheet tray (optional)
optional accessories
ordering 6–11
troubleshooting 123
verifying installation 134–
135
warranty 137
optional duplex printing
accessory, see duplex
printing accessory
optional envelope feeder, see
envelope feeder
orientation
paper 45–46
portrait or landscape B-11
printing both sides of paper
43
Orientation setting B-11
OS/2 printer driver 21
output areas
clearing paper jams 99
troubleshooting 123
output bin 32–33
Override A4 With Letter setting
B-6
overriding printer settings 22
ozone production E-2
P
page count, printer 135
Page Protect setting B-16
page skew, troubleshooting
116–117
paper
card stock A-13–A-14
changing type and size 65–
66
clearing jams 90–102
converting paper weights
A-9
creases, troubleshooting
116–117
curl, troubleshooting 116–
117, A-7
custom-size 33, 56–58
different first page 61
guidelines A-7
heavy A-13–A-14
HP brand 8
jams, correcting 90–102,
A-7
manually feeding 64
ordering 8
orientation 45–46
printing by type and size
65–66
problems with 116–117, A-7
sizes supported A-3–A-6
special types 45–58
specifications A-2–A-14
types supported 66, A-7
weight equivalence table
A-9
weight specifications A-3–
A-6
Paper Handling Menu B-5–B-6
paper jams 90–102
duplexer 100–101
envelope feeder 94
input tray areas 92–94
locating 91
output areas 99
repeated jams 102
top cover area 96
Tray 1 92
paper level indicator, locating
4
paper path test B-4
paper path, cleaning 86
Paper setting B-10
paper size dial 40
paper trays
clearing paper jams 90–102
current size settings 135
customizing Tray 1 63–64
extension 34
loading 34–40
locking out 65
multi-purpose 34
ordering 8
solving repeated jams 102
troubleshooting 123
Parallel Adv Function setting
B-20
parallel cables, ordering 10
Parallel High Speed setting
B-20
EN
parts, locating 4
PCL
allocating memory to C-6
commands D-1–D-8
printing font list 136, B-4
selecting fonts D-5
syntax D-2–D-3
PCL 5e drivers 20
function 24
PCL 6 drivers 20
function 24
PCL Font Number setting B-12
PCL Font Pitch setting B-12
PCL Font Point Size setting
B-12
PCL Font Source setting B-11
PCL Memory setting B-15
PCL Symbol Set setting B-12
permanent fonts 136, B-12
Personality setting B-14
personality, see languages,
printer (personality)
physical dimensions, printer’s
A-15
pin connections A-19
pin outs
serial cables A-20
pitch/point information 136
PJL commands D-1
portrait, orientation B-11
ports
troubleshooting 120
postcards A-13–A-14
see also custom-size paper
PostScript emulation, see PS
PostScript Printer Description
Files, see PPDs
power consumption A-16
power switch, locating 4
PowerSave mode E-2
PowerSave setting B-14
PPDs
Macintosh 28
selecting alternate 126
preprinted/prepunched paper
duplexing 43
orientation 45–46
print job
storing 73
Print PS Errors setting 120,
B-13
Print Quality Menu B-8–B-9
print quality problems 116–
117, A-7
print resolution B-8
print speed A-17, B-8
printer
adapters A-19
cleaning 83–86
commands D-1–D-8
configuration 133–136
EN
control panel layout 12–15
diagnostics 29
dimensions A-15
drivers 17–24
drivers, Macintosh 28
errors, troubleshooting 89–
136
features 2
help software 24
information pages 133–136
maintenance 77–87
kit 11, 87
managing through network
29
memory C-1–C-8
menu map 16
messages 89, 103–113
operating temperature A-17
ordering supplies 8–11
output bins 32–33
overriding control panel
settings 22
parts and location 4
PCL commands D-1–D-8
physical dimensions A-15
relative humidity A-17
renaming 126
repacking 138
saving setup 60
settings, current 133–136
shipping 138
software 17–30
specifications A-15–A-17
status, accessing
see also messages
printer collation (mopying) 59
Printer Collation page 114
printer driver
different first page 61
RIP ONCE 60
printer drivers 17–24
additional 21
help software 24
included with printer 20
Macintosh 28
selecting 24
troubleshooting 120
Macintosh 124
Windows 22
printer languages (personality)
allocating memory to B-15,
C-6
drivers 24
selecting default B-14
printing 31–66
advanced tasks 60–66
basic tasks 31–58
configuration page 134–135
custom-size paper 56–58
duplexing 41–44
envelopes 47–51, A-11–
A-13
from Tray 1 48, A-11
with feeder 49–51
first page on different paper
62
font list 136
heavy paper 56
labels 53–54
manually feeding paper 64
menu map 16, 133
multiple pages on one sheet
62
output bins 32–33
special paper 45–58
speed A-17, B-8
stored job 73
supplies, ordering 8
transparencies 55
watermark 60
with low toner 80–81
Printing Menu B-10–B-13
private job
deleting 72
printing 71
releasing 71
specifying 71
private/stored jobs menu B-3
problem solving, printer errors
89–136
Process Cleaning Page
setting B-9
product return 137–138, 142
Product Stewardship
acoustic emissions A-17
consumables, see supplies
energy consumption, see
power consumption
memory expansion C-1–
C-8
noise emissions, see
acoustic emissions
paper
specifications A-2–A-14
parts supply 8–11
power consumption A-16,
E-2
product return 137–138,
142
product take back, see
product return
return 137–138, 142
supplies
availability 6–11
paper 8
toner cartridge 8, 78–81,
141, E-2–E-4
warranty
standard 137
product take back, see product
return
proof and hold feature 69
proofing a job 69
proportional-spaced fonts D-5
Index
5
ProRes 1200 B-8
configure B-18
PS
allocating memory to C-6
drivers
function 24
included with printer 20
printing font list 136, B-4
troubleshooting error page
120
PS Memory setting B-15
Q
quality, print
problems 89, 116–117, A-7
with low toner 80–81
quick copy
additional copies 67
configuration menu B-18
deleting 68
feature 67
printing 67
storing 67
quick copy jobs menu B-2
Quick Sets 60
R
Ram Disk setting B-17
Ram Disk Size setting B-17
Ready light 12
rear output bin
clearing paper jams 99
locating 4
using 33
recycling used toner cartridges
78, E-3
redistributing toner 80–81
regulatory information E-1–
E-8
relative humidity A-17
removing envelope feeder 50
renaming the printer 126
repacking the printer 138
repeated paper jams, solving
102
repeating defects,
troubleshooting 116–117
Reset Active I/O Channel
setting B-24
Reset All I/O Channels setting
B-24
Reset Memory setting B-24
Resets Menu B-23
Resolution Enhancement
technology (REt) setting B-8
Resolution setting B-8
Resource Save setting B-15
resource saving, allocating
memory C-6
restore default settings B-23
Restore Factory Settings B-24
REt setting B-8
6
Index
return 137–138, 142
RIP ONCE
about 60
S
safety
statement for laser products
in Finland E-8
safety statements E-7–E-8
sales and service offices 145–
158
samples
configuration page 135
print quality problems 116
saving
paper E-2
power B-14, E-2
printer setup 60
toner B-9, E-2
SDRAM DIMMs, ordering 9
see also DIMMs
security, information 135
Select key 13
serial adapter, ordering 10
serial cables
ordering 10
pin outs A-20
troubleshooting 120
types of A-19
serial interface connector,
locating 5
serial number, locating 5, 135
service agreements 137
see also front pages x
Service Information form 142
service information, see front
pages viii
setting
custom paper sizes 57–58
paper type and size 65–66
settings
affecting printer messages
103
control panel 16, B-1–B-23
verifying current 133–136
shipping the printer 138
show event log B-4
600 dpi B-8
size settings 35–40, 51, 56–
58, 65–66
size, paper A-3–A-6
slides, see transparencies
small paper speed B-18
small paper, printing 33
see also custom-size paper
soft fonts 136, B-12
software
Apple LaserWriter 8 driver
28
drivers 17–24, 28
help for drivers 24
HP FontSmart 25
HP JetAdmin 17, 29
HP JetSend 26
HP LaserJet Utility for
Macintosh 28
included with printer 17
license 143
Macintosh 28
networks 17, 29
troubleshooting print
problems 120
Windows 17–26, 29–30
Solaris 29
special paper
manually feeding 64
printing with 45–58
specifications
acoustic emissions A-17
card stock A-13–A-14
electrical A-16
envelope feeder A-11
envelopes A-11–A-13
general A-17
heavy paper A-13–A-14
labels A-10
paper A-2–A-14
printer A-15–A-17
serial cable A-18–A-20
transparencies A-10
speed
printing A-17, B-8
transmitting data B-20
status, see printer messages
stored job 73
deleting 74
printing 73
storing
envelopes A-13
print job 73
toner cartridges 78
straight-through paper path 33
Sun OS 29
supplies
availability 6–11
ordering 8–11
paper 8
support agreements 137
see also front pages x
switching printer languages
24, B-14
syntax for printer commands
D-2–D-3
T
TCP/IP protocol, setting B-22
TCP/IP setting B-21
3-hole punched paper
duplexing 43
orientation 45–46
300 dpi B-8
EN
toner
consumption E-2
density B-9
low, continue printing 80–81
spilling 96
troubleshooting 116–117,
A-7
toner cartridge
checking toner level 79
new 78, 117, 119, B-18
resetting HP TonerGauge
79
toner cartridges 78–81
life expectancy 78
limited warranty 141
ordering 8
recycling 78, E-3
Toner Density setting B-9
Toner Low message 80
Toner Low setting B-16
TonerGauge, HP 135
top cover area, clearing paper
jams 96
top cover, locating 4
top output bin
clearing paper jams 99
locating 4
using 32
transmitting data, speed B-20
transparencies
printing 32, 55
solving repeated jams 102
specifications A-10
Tray 1
customizing operation 63–
64
deselecting 123
envelope specifications
A-11–A-13
locating 4
mode settings 63–64
paper jams, clearing 92
paper orientation 46
paper specifications A-3
printing envelopes 47–48
printing paper 34
printing special paper 45–
48, 53–54
Tray 1 Mode setting B-5
Tray 1 Mode=Cassette 63
Tray 1 Mode=First 63
Tray 1 Size setting B-5
Tray 1 Type setting B-5
Tray 2 (4050/4050 N)
loading 35
paper jams, clearing 92
paper orientation 46
paper specifications A-4
Tray 2 Type setting B-5
Tray 3 Type setting B-6
Tray 4 Type setting B-6
tray extension 34
EN
Trays 2 and 3 (4050 T/4050
TN)
loading 37
ordering 8
paper jams, clearing 92
paper orientation 46
paper specifications A-4
troubleshooting 89–136
flowchart 118–125
Macintosh 124–126
paper jams 90–102
print quality problems 116–
117, A-7
printer messages 103–113
repeated paper jams 102
using information pages
133–136
TrueType fonts 25
1200 dpi B-8
250-sheet tray
loading 37
paper orientation 46
ordering 8
paper specifications A-4
2-sided printing, see duplex
printing accessory
2-up printing 62
type settings 65–66, B-5–B-6
Typical Install option 21, 22
World Wide Web addresses,
see front pages viii
wrinkled paper,
troubleshooting 116–117,
A-13
wrong printer selected,
troubleshooting (Macintosh)
125
wrong tray, troubleshooting
123
U
uninstalling fonts 25
Unit of Measure setting B-11
UNIX, see HP-UX
usage page B-4
user’s guide, ordering 11
V
Value key 13
VCCI statement, Japan E-7
vector graphics D-1
W
warranty
standard 137
toner cartridge, limited 141
watermark, printing 60
wavy paper, troubleshooting
116–117
weight of printer A-15
weight, paper A-3–A-6
weight, paper equivalence
table A-9
Wide A4 setting B-13
Windows
help 24
network software 17, 29
printer drivers 20
software 17–26, 29–30
Windows NT 3.51 PCL 5e/6
printer driver 21
Index
7
8
Index
EN
May 1998 Edition
HP LaserJet Family
Quick Reference
Service Guide
Volume I
HP LaserJet Family
Quick Reference
Service Guide
Volume I
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Company 1998
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptation, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except
as allowed under the copyright
laws.
Publication number
5021-8943
First edition, May 1998
Warranty
The information contained in this
document is subject to change
without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with respect
to this information.
HEWLETT-PACKARD
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
THE IMPLIED WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or other
damage alleged in connection
with the furnishing or use of this
information.
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
Trademark credits
Adobe and PostScript are registered
trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc.,
which may be registered in certain
jurisdictions.
Microsoft® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
MS-DOS® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the
United States and other countries,
licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company Limited.
Contents
1
Control panel messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2
Service mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4
Input/Output (I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6
Toner cartridge information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
7
Printer options and user replaceable parts . . . . . . 131
8
Service parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
9
Summary of service notes and technical tips . . . . 197
10 Image defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
11 Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
12 Services, support, and training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
13 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion . . . . . . . . . . 343
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
EN
iii
Ordering Other Manuals
This HP LaserJet Family Quick Reference Service Guide was created
to help the LaserJet Service Engineer quickly troubleshoot common
printer problems. While this reference is intended to provide all of the
information the Service Engineer will need for on-site repair of
HP LaserJet products, it is not intended to replace the service manual
for any HP LaserJet product. For detailed information about the
HP LaserJet products described in this guide, see the user guide or
service manual for that product.
Service manuals for HP LaserJet products are available from the
HP Support Materials Organization (SMO). The Service Parts Order
Desk number is:
(800) 227-8164 (U.S. Only)
If you are located outside of the U.S., contact your local HP Sales and
Service office.
iv
EN
Supported Products
This service guide supports the following printers:
Printer Name
HP LaserJet Companion
(minimal support only)
HP LaserJet 6L
HP LaserJet 5Si Mopier
HP LaserJet 5Si/5Si MX
HPLaserJet 5L
HP LaserJet 6P/6MP
HP LaserJet 5P/5MP
HP LaserJet 5/5M/5N
HP LaserJet 4V/4MV
HP LaserJet 4P/4MP
HP LaserJet 4L/4ML
HP LaserJet 4+/4M+
HP LaserJet 4/4M
HP LaserJet 4Si/4Si MX
HP LaserJet IIISi
HP LaserJet IIIP
HP LaserJet IIP+
HP LaserJet IIP
HP LaserJet IIID
HP LaserJet III
HP LaserJet IID
HP LaserJet II
HP Classic LaserJet (2686D)
HP Classic LaserJet (2686A)
Printer Abbreviation
LJ Companion
LJ 6L
LJ 5Si Mopier
LJ 5Si LJ 5Si MX
LJ 5L
LJ 6P LJ 6MP
LJ 5P LJ 5MP
LJ 5 LJ 5M LJ 5N
LJ 4V LJ 4MV
LJ 4P LJ 4MP
LJ 4L LJ 4ML
LJ 4+ LJ 4M+
LJ 4 LJ 4M
LJ 4Si LJ 4Si MX
LJ IIISi
LJ IIIP
LJ IIP+
LJ IIP
LJ IIID
LJ III
LJ IID
LJ II
LJ 2686D
LJ 2686A
Note
The abbreviation for each printer name is used in the text.
.
EN
v
Reference
Name Used
in this Guide
Model Number
Maximum
Pages per
Month
Service Manual
Part Number
LJ 6L
5Si Mopier,
LJ5Si MX/5Si*
LJ 5L
C3990A
C3166A/C3167A
C4076A/C4077A
C3941A
6K
100K
C3990-99001
C4077-99015
4K
C3990-99001
LJ 6P/6MP*
5P/5MP*
LJ 5/5M*/5N
C3150A/C3155A/
C3980A/C3982A
C3916A/C3917A/
C3952A
12K
C3980-99001
35K
C3916-90984
LJ 4V/4MV
C3141A/C3142A
50K
C3141-90929
LJ 4P/4MP*
C2005A/C2040A
8K
C3980-90956
LJ 4L/4ML*
C2003A/C2015A
8K
C3980-90956
LJ 4+/4M+*
C2037A/C2039A
20K
C3916-90984
LJ 4/4M*
LJ 4Si/4SiMX*
C2001A/C2021A
C2010A/C2011A
20K
75K
C3916-90984
C2010-90939
LJ IIISi
LJ IIIP
33491
33481
50K
8K
C2010-90939
33481-90951
LJ IIP+
LJ IIP
C2007A
33471
8K
6K
33481-90951
33481-90951
LJ IIID
33459
20K
33459-90906
LJ III
33449
16K
33449-90906
LJ IID
LJ II
33447
33440
16K
12K
33459-90906
33449-90906
Classic LJ
2686D
Classic LJ
2686A
2686D
15K
02686-90920
2686A - 2686A+
12K
02686-90920
*Macintosh-compatible
vi
EN
1
Control panel
messages
Overview
This chapter provides information on the display lights on the
HP LaserJet 6L, 5L, 6P, 5P, and 4L printers and includes illustrations
and detailed error codes for all printers. Error codes are listed as they
appear on the printer display. Not all codes are included as many are
self-explanatory.
Note
Displays shaded in color represent primary lights. Displays that are
not shaded represent secondary lights. To view the secondary lights
on the printer, press [Go] and [Reset/Job]Cancel] simultaneously.
EN
Overview – 7
LJ 6L, 5L Printer Light-Emitting Diode
(LED) Displays
See the legend that follows for a description of the error and the action
to remedy it.
STATUS MESSAGES
1. Error LED is on.
(*Unclearable error)
2. Error LED is
blinking.
3. All LEDs are
blinking.
4. Data LED is
blinking.
Error
Data
Ready
5. All LEDs are off.
When all the lights are on, there is a Service error. Press and hold the
front panel button to display the LED error code pattern. The code will
be shown only while the button is pressed. The following pictures
show the possible LED error patterns.
1. Error LED is on.
(*Unclearable error)
2. Ready LED is on.
3. Error and Ready
LEDs are on.
4. Error and Data
LEDs are on.
5. Data LED is on.
6. All LEDs are on.
7. Data and Ready
LEDs are blinking.
8. Formatter error.
* An unclearable error is not strictly a service message. It will appear
without all three lights being displayed first. See item 1 in the following
table.
8 – Control panel messages
EN
Legend (6L, 5L Display Lights)
Status Messages
Item
Description
Recommended Action
1
Paper out
Door open
No Electro-photographic (EP)
cartridge
Paper jam
See page 21
See page 18
2
Memory error
See page 34
3
Incompatible memory card
See page 49
4
Manual feed
See page 70
5
Sleep mode
See page 69
See page 32
See page 26
Error and Service Messages
Item
Description
Recommended Action
1
Unclearable error
Engine error
See item 1, above
See page 39
2
ROM/RAM error
See page 50
3
Fuser error
See page 44
4
Beam error
See page 45
5
Scanner error
See page 47
6
Formatter PCA error
See page 57
7
Firmware error
See page 61
8
Formatter PCA error
See page 57
Note
Before troubleshooting any service error, power cycle the printer to
see if the error persists.
EN
LJ 6L, 5L Printer Light-Emitting Diode (LED) Displays – 9
1
LJ 6P Printer LED Displays
See the legend that follows for a description of the error and the action
to remedy it. If both the error and data lights are lit, simultaneously
press [Go] and [Reset/Job[Cancel] to display the Data Error pattern.
LJ 6P Printer LED Displays
STATUS
Error
Data
Ready
Tray 1
Tray 1
LED Blinking
Tray 2
CONTINUABLE ERRORS
SIMM ERRORS
FATAL ERRORS
Primary
* To view secondary lights press the [Go] and
buttons simultaneously.
10 – Control panel messages
* = Any other combination
Secondary
[Reset/Job[Cancel]
EN
Legend (6P Display Lights)
Status Messages
Item
Description
Recommended Action
1
Paper out (Tray 1)
See page 21
2
Paper out (Tray 2)
See page 21
3
Printer open
No toner cartridge
Paper jam
See page 18
See page 32
See page 20
4
Manual feed
See page 70
Continuable Errors
When the ERROR and DATA LEDs are on, press [Go] and [Reset]
simultaneously. Follow the instructions for the secondary light patterns
shown.
Item
Description
Recommended Action
5
Primary light pattern
See note on primary and
secondary lights, page 13
5-1
Error 20 (memory overflow)
See page 34
5-2
Error 21 (print overrun)
See page 35
5-3
Error 22 (I/O error)
See page 36
5-4
Error 40
See page 38
5-5
Error 41.1, 41.2, 41.3
See page 40
5-6
Error 68, 68.1
See page 64
5-7
Error 51 (beam detect)
See page 45
5-8
Error 52 (scanner malfunction)
See page 47
5-9
Error 55
See page 53
EN
LJ 6P Printer LED Displays – 11
1
SIMM Errors
Remove all SIMMs and power cycle the printer. Retry the operation.
Replace the SIMMs one at a time to locate the defective module. Refer
to the Service Manual for details.
Item
Description
Recommended Action
6
Error 53-0 ROM error
See note below
7
Error 53-1 RAM error
See note below
Fatal Errors
When the DATA, TRAY 2, TRAY 1, and ERROR LEDs are on, press [Go]
and [Reset] simultaneously and follow the instructions for the secondary
light patterns shown.
Item
Description
Recommended Action
8
Primary light pattern
See note on primary and
secondary lights, page 13
8-1
Error 50 fuser
See page 44
8-2
Error 57/58 (main motor)
See page 54
8-3
Error 61.x (x=1, 2, 3 SIMM)
See page 58
8-4
Error 62.x (x=1, 2, 3 SIMM)
See page 59
8-5
Error 62.0
See page 58
8-6
Error 63, 64, 64, 65
See pages 59–60
8-7
All other errors
See pages 61–72
12 – Control panel messages
EN
LJ 5P Printer LED Displays
See the legend that follows for a description of the error and the action
to remedy it. If both the error and data lights are lit, simultaneously
press [Go] and [Reset] to display the Data Error pattern.
LJ 5P Printer LED Displays
STATUS
Error
Tray 1 (MP Tray)
Tray 2 (Paper Cassette)
Data
Ready
CONTINUABLE ERRORS
SIMM ERRORS
FATAL ERRORS
Any Combination
Primary
* To view secondary lights press [Go] and
EN
Secondary
[Reset.
LJ 5P Printer LED Displays – 13
1
Legend (5P Display Lights)
Status Messages
Item
Description
Recommended Action
1
Paper out (Tray 1)
See page 21
2
Paper out (Tray 2)
See page 21
3
Printer open
No toner cartridge
Paper jam
See page 18
See page 32
See page 20
Continuable Errors
When the ERROR and DATA LEDs are on, press [Go] and [Reset]
simultaneously. Follow the instructions for the secondary light patterns
shown.
Item
Description
Recommended Action
4
Primary light pattern
See note on primary and
secondary lights, page 13
4-1
Error 20 (memory overflow)
See page 34
4-2
Error 21 (print overrun)
See page 35
4-3
Error 22 (I/O error)
See page 36
4-4
Error 40
See page 38
4-5
Error 41.1, 41.2, 41.3
See page 40
4-6
Error 68, 68.1
See page 64
4-7
Error 51 (beam detect)
See page 45
4-8
Error 52 (scanner malfunction)
See page 47
4-9
Error 55
See page 53
14 – Control panel messages
EN
SIMM Errors
Item
Description
Recommended Action
5
Error 53-0 ROM error
See note below
6
Error 53-1 RAM error
See note below
Note
Remove all SIMMs and power cycle the printer. Retry the operation.
Replace the SIMMs one at a time to locate the defective module. Refer
to the Service Manual for details.
Fatal Errors
When the DATA, TRAY 2, TRAY 1, and ERROR LEDs are on, press [Go]
and [Reset] simultaneously. Follow the instructions for the secondary
light patterns shown.
Item
Description
Recommended Action
7
Primary light pattern
See note on primary and
secondary lights, page 13
7-1
Error 50 fuser
See page 44
7-2
Error 57/58 (main motor)
See page 54
7-3
Error 61.1/62.1
See page 58
7-4
All other errors
See 79 Error, pages 61-71
8
Error 63 service error
See page 59
EN
LJ 5P Printer LED Displays – 15
1
LJ 4L Printer LED Displays
Recoverable Errors
For more details, see the page number provided.
Error
Paper
Data
Ready
LED Legend
RECOVERABLE ERRORS (Displayed on single lights)
Paper Out
(See page 23)
Printer Open
(See page 24)
Paper Jam
(See page 26)
21 Print Overrun
(See page 35)
Paper LED on
steady.
Error LED on steady.
Paper LED is
blinking.
Error LED is blinking.
SERVICE ERRORS (Displayed while pressing front panel button)
Service Error
All 4 LEDs are on.
50 Error/Service
(See page 42)
When all four lights are on, a service error is indicated. Press and
hold the front panel button to display the error code. The code will be
shown only while the button is pressed. The following pictures show
the possible error codes.
NOTE: If all four lights remain on, yet no error code is displayed
when pressing the button, power cycle the printer. If the condition
persists, replace the formatter PCA.
51 Loss of Beam
52 Incorrect Scanner 53 Accessory
Detect
Speed
Memory Error
(See page 45)
(See page 47)
(See page 49)
Ready and Error
LEDs are on.
55 Engine
(See page 53)
Data and Error LEDs
are on.
58 Fan
(See page 56
Paper and error
LEDs are on.
61.x Formatter
(See page 58)
Error LED is on.
Ready, Data, and
Error LEDs are on.
Error LED is off;
other LEDs display a
pattern.
16 – Control panel messages
Data LED is on.
Blank Display
(See page 68
All LEDs are off.
EN
4L-Specific Error Configurations
Priority of Errors
1
Each error has a priority in relation to the others. If more than one error
condition occurs at the same time, the highest priority error will be
displayed. The priority of errors is as follows:
Service Errors
1 Formatter PCA
2 RAM
3 Engine
4 Scanner
5 Beam
6 Fan
Recoverable Errors
1 Door Open/No Toner Cartridge
2 Paper Jam
3 Paper Out
4 Memory Error
5 Manual Feed
Note
Before troubleshooting any Service error, power cycle the printer to
see if the error persists.
EN
LJ 4L Printer LED Displays – 17
Error Codes
Clear Staple Jam
5Si Mopier
•
Clear the jam.
•
Check the staple cartridge.
•
Check the stapler and cabling.
•
Check the stapling unit control’s printed-circuit assembly (PCA).
•
Replace the entire stapling unit as required.
Close Printer Cover/Printer Open
All Printers
•
The printer door is open.
•
Check that the toner cartridge is fully seated and that the covers are
firmly closed.
•
The direct current (DC) power supply is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The actuator or tab is missing or broken.
•
The paper control printed-circuit assembly (PCA) is defective.
18 – Control panel messages
EN
Install Toner Cartridge/No Cartridge
All Printers
•
Reseat or install a new toner cartridge.
•
The high voltage contacts are dirty or defective.
•
The high voltage power supply is defective.
1
LJ 5
•
The DC Controller is defective.
Install Tray 2
LJ 5
•
The lower cassette (Tray 3) is selected and the printer has detected
that the paper cassette (Tray 2) is not installed.
– Install or reseat the paper cassette (Tray 2), which is the paper
guide for the lower cassette (Tray 3).
•
The paper cassette (PC) is improperly fitted.
– Firmly reseat the PC.
Out of Staples Optional Output X
5Si Mopier
•
Replace the staple cartridge.
– If the message continues after the cartridge has been replaced,
check the stapler, top cover assembly, and cabling.
•
Check the stapling unit control PCA.
•
Replace the entire stapling unit if required.
EN
Error Codes – 19
Output Operation Condition x.yy
5Si Mopier
x=output device number
yy=condition code
For the multibin mailbox:
01 = face-up tray not installed
Note
See also the section on troubleshooting the 2,000-sheet input unit
and multibin mailbox/mailbox with stapler.
Remove Paper Jam
LJ 5
•
See 13 Paper Jam—all printers
•
The rear door is open.
•
The cassette paper out sensor flag is broken or missing.
•
The 500-sheet lower cassette is not properly adjusted (see service
note C2001A-04).
– Adjust the tray, using the instructions in the service note.
•
Check the transfer roller to ensure that it is properly seated.
•
The input sensor (PS1) or fuser exit sensor (PS3) is bad; or with
jams from the MP tray (Tray 1), the paper end sensor (PS5) is bad.
Staple Limit Reached
5Si Mopier
•
Send print jobs of only 20 pages or fewer to the stapler.
20 – Control panel messages
EN
Stapler Align Error
5Si Mopier
•
Remove the paper from the stapler and re-send the job.
Stapler Malfunction
5Si Mopier
•
Clear the stapler jam and re-send the job.
Stapler Supply Out
5Si Mopier
•
Load a new staple cartridge.
Toner Low
5Si, 5
•
The toner is uneven in the cartridge.
•
The toner cartridge contact points are malfunctioning.
•
The high-voltage power supply (HVPS) is defective.
Tray x Empty/x Load/Paper Out
All Printers
•
The paper tray is empty or is seated incorrectly.
•
The sensor arm is stuck or broken.
•
The tray-size sensor is defective or configured incorrectly.
– Verify the tray tabs and switches at the right rear (or right front) of
the tray slot, or configure the tray from the control panel.
– The paper control/sensor PCA is defective.
EN
Error Codes – 21
1
Warming Up
5Si, 5
•
Separate all accessories.
•
Power cycle the printer.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The power supply is defective.
02 Warming Up (if 3 Minutes)—See also
50 Error
4V
•
The Input/Output (I/O) cable is hooked up incorrectly or there is bad
I/O in the computer.
– Remove the I/O cables and power cycle the printer.
•
There are defective component(s).
– Replace the fusing assembly if it is not warming up the DC
controller, PCA power supply, or formatter PCA.
4Si/IIISi
•
The display cable or formatter PCA is defective.
IID, II
•
The I/O cable is hooked up incorrectly or there is bad I/O in the
computer.
– Remove the I/O cables. Replace the formatter PCA.
2686A/D
•
The DC power supply/main motor drive is defective.
22 – Control panel messages
EN
11 Paper Out (MP/PC/UC/LC/EC/LE LOAD)
All Printers
1
•
The paper tray is empty or is seated incorrectly.
•
The sensor arm is stuck or broken.
•
The tray-size sensing or configuration is defective.
– Verify the tray tabs and switches are at the right rear (or right
front) of the tray slot, or configure the tray from the control panel.
•
The paper control/sensor PCA is defective.
4L
•
The paper cassette is empty or missing.
•
The paper cassette is seated incorrectly.
•
The paper out flag PS2 is broken or stuck.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
Tray 1 (the MP tray) is empty.
– Add paper to Tray 1; then press [Go] to continue.
•
Tray 2 (the paper cassette) is empty.
– Add paper to the tray if it is on continuously; verify that the
sensor flag movement is not hindered.
EN
Error Codes – 23
12 Printer Open
All Printers (Exceptions: 4P, IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP)
•
The printer door is open.
– Check that the toner cartridge is fully seated and that the cover is
firmly closed.
•
A DC power supply malfunction or DC controller malfunction
occurred.
•
Tab is missing on the top cover; replace the tab.
4V
•
Check the front Door Open sensor flag sensor; it could be broken or
stuck.
– PS402 is located on the small Front Door Unit Terminal PCA, on
the front door under the transfer roller.
•
A toner cartridge microswitch malfunction has occurred.
– Check the toner cartridge microswitch (SW501) on the high
voltage PCA.
•
A DC controller PCA malfunction has occurred.
4 Plus, 4
•
The plunger is missing on the top cover.
•
A paper control PCA malfunction has occurred.
4Si, IIISi
•
A PS1 malfunction has occurred.
– Check that the PS1 is blocked by the latch flag. Replace the PS1
if it is defective.
•
The fuser bulb has burned out.
– Check to see if the fuser bulb turns on. If the fuser bulb does not
turn on, reset SW101 on the AC power supply.
•
A DC controller PCA malfunction has occurred.
24 – Control panel messages
EN
12 Open or No EP
4P
•
The top cover is open.
•
The toner cartridge is not installed.
•
There is a defective interlock switch assembly.
1
4L
•
Part of the top door that pushes the plunger down is broken.
•
The top door switch (plunger assembly) is broken.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP
•
The paper path door or top cover is open.
– Close the paper path door or top cover.
•
A toner cartridge is not installed or it is not seated.
– Replace or reseat the toner cartridge.
•
There is a defective fan, PS4, or PS5.
•
The external fuser access door is not closed.
EN
Error Codes – 25
13 Paper Jam/Remove Paper Jam
All Printers
•
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The paper path is dirty or obstructed.
– Clean the paper path components; ensure that the transfer roller
is seated properly.
•
The pickup (or other) rollers and/or the separation pad is worn.
•
The paper is the wrong length or the paper size is selected
incorrectly in the software.
•
The exit sensor or flag is defective.
•
A defective input (paper-out) sensor does not sense that the printer
is out of paper.
•
The paper cassettes are not correctly loaded.
•
The solenoid operation is bad.
– Verify proper solenoid operation and replace if necessary.
•
The gear(s) is bad or not meshing in the drive train.
– Replace the bad gear(s) or check the toner cartridge gears for
damage.
•
The main motor or drive circuit is bad.
•
The delivery mechanism or the coupler gear to the main drive is
bad.
•
The main motor drive circuitry is bad.
•
The DC controller is defective.
26 – Control panel messages
EN
5L, 6P, 5P
•
If all of the flags move properly and the connectors are seated, but
the error persists, replace the DC controller.
6P, 5P
•
There are paper fragments under the oblique rollers (top or front).
– Remove the rollers and the paper fragments.
4V
•
The toner cartridge gears are worn or damaged.
•
The paper path gears are worn or damaged.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The registration guide is defective.
4P, 4L
•
The rear door of the printer is open.
•
The flags/sensors are stuck or broken.
•
There are paper fragments under the oblique rollers (top or front).
– Remove the rollers and clear out the paper.
•
The transfer roller guide is not seated.
4 Plus, 4
•
The rear door is open.
•
The cassette paper-out sensor flag is broken or missing.
•
The 500-sheet lower cassette is improperly adjusted (see service
note C2001A-01A).
– Adjust the tray according to the service note instructions.
•
The transfer roller is seated improperly.
•
There is a bad input sensor (PS1) or fuser exit sensor (PS3); or with
jams from the MP tray (Tray 1), a bad paper-end sensor (PS5).
•
The output rollers (service note C2001A-03A) are defective.
EN
Error Codes – 27
1
IIID, III, IID, II
•
The registration assembly is defective.
•
The fuser is defective.
IIID, IID
•
The duplex paper path is obstructed or contains worn components.
•
The switchback assembly is misadjusted or bent.
III, II
•
The sensor cable is defective.
– Replace the fuser to the DC controller cable (RG1-0907-000CN).
2686D/A
•
The separation belt is broken.
•
The transfer guide assembly is defective.
•
The paper pickup clutch is turning more than once.
– Disassemble the clutch and re-grease. NOTE: If one clutch
needs re-greasing, it is likely that they all do.
•
The registration shutter is stuck.
•
The rear paper guide door is worn.
– Replace the worn paper rollers or readjust the rear door.
•
The front paper guide door is worn or misadjusted, preventing paper
from getting to the registration assembly on time.
– Readjust the front paper guide door.
28 – Control panel messages
EN
13.1 Internal, 13.2 Input, 13.3 Duplex,
13.4 Output
4Si, IIISi
•
Media is not picked up, or media is jammed in the printer.
–
•
Check and clean the entire paper path.
Media is in the duplex unit.
– Check the paper input path and paper re-feed from the sensor
PS2 duplex unit.
•
A sensor malfunction has occurred.
– Check the PS4 or PS5 in the duplex or switchback, respectively.
•
An output sensor malfunction has occurred.
– Check the PS7 in the output area Optional Power Stacker.
•
Check the registration area: fuser-exit sensor flag and sensor.
– Install a user maintenance kit (110 V - C2062A,
220 V - C2087A).
EN
Error Codes – 29
1
13.x Paper Jam
5Si
Note
When troubleshooting the LJ 5Si, always troubleshoot the error log
message. See the LJ 5Si service manual for detailed error log
information.
X=Location of jam
0=Non-specific jam
1=Paper feed/paper late jam—paper late arriving at PS 2, which is
located in the paper pickup unit. Inspect the paper path. Verify flag
movement.
2=Paper feed/paper late jam—paper late arriving at PS 2, which is the
registration photo sensor. Remove the toner cartridge and lift up the
green lever to access the sensor flag. Verify flag movement.
3=Fuser output paper late jam—paper late arriving at PS 1403, which is
in the fusing assembly. Verify flag movement.
4=Fuser output, paper jam.
5, 6=Duplex module paper jam. PS 1402 face-down delivery photo
sensor is located in the face-down delivery assembly. Inspect the
diverter drive assembly. Verify that the paper path from the fuser to the
top of the face-down bin is clear and that the flag moves freely.
7-10=Duplex module paper jam. The paper is diverted to the duplex
module after leaving the fusing assembly. The paper is turned around in
the duplexer and re-fed into the printer's paper path. Reset the duplex
module. If the problems persist, replace the complete duplex assembly.
30 – Control panel messages
EN
11=External input device paper jam
If the control panel displays a 13.11 paper jam message, the printer will
list additional error codes in the error log. These can be printed or
viewed.
A 2000-Sheet Input Tray Paper Jam error is related to the first device in
the C-Link daisy chain. In the supported configuration, this device
should be the 2000-sheet high-capacity tray. Verify that Tray 4 lifts to its
feed position. Inspect the flags in the vertical transfer door.
12=External output device paper jam
If the control panel displays a 13.12 Paper Jam message, the printer will
list additional error codes in the error log. These can be printed or
viewed.
Multibin Mailbox/Stapler paper jam. The error is related to the second or
third device on the C-Link daisy chain. In the supported configuration,
the second device should be the Multibin Mailbox. Verify that all bins are
in position and that the “scan bar” is complete. Verify that the Multibin
Mailbox completes its power-up sequence. In the supported
configuration, the stapler is the third device in the C-Link daisy chain.
Verify that the stapler completes its power-up sequence.
13=Fuser accordion jam. Inspect the paper path before and after the
fuser.
14=Printer could not auto-eject the paper. Inspect the entire paper path
for paper or debris.
EN
Error Codes – 31
1
14 No EP Cartridge or No Toner Cartridge
All Printers
•
A toner cartridge is not installed or the cartridge is not fully seated.
•
The sensitivity tabs are missing (except 4 Plus, LJ 4, and 2686).
Replace the toner cartridge.
4V
•
The toner cartridge microswitch (SW501) on the high-voltage PCA
is defective.
•
The front-door-open sensor flag sensor is malfunctioning. PS402 is
located on the small Front Door Unit Terminal PCA, on the front door
under the transfer roller.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
4 Plus, 4
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The HVPS is defective or there are dirty or misaligned contacts.
4Si, IIISi
•
Check the tabs on the right side of the toner cartridge. At least one
of the two tabs must be present.
•
The support tab of the switch actuator, which is located on the
upper-right corner of the DC controller, is bent or installed
incorrectly.
•
The HVPS is defective.
IIID, III, IID, II
•
The paper control PCA is defective.
2686A/D
•
The cassette microswitch is defective.
32 – Control panel messages
EN
16 Toner Low
All Printers
1
•
The toner in the toner cartridge is uneven.
•
The toner cartridge contact points are malfunctioning.
•
The HV power supply is defective.
4Si, IIISi
•
The door-open sensor flag is defective.
– Replace the PS1.
•
The toner level sensor connector is damaged.
– Replace the toner level sensor.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
III, II
•
The cable is defective.
– Replace the DC controller to the HV power supply cable
(part number RG1-0906-000CN).
18 MIO Not Ready
All Printers
•
The printer is not connected to an active LAN.
– Connect the printer to a LAN or terminate the connection, using
a BNC T-connector with two 50-ohm resistors.
•
The MIO card is misaligned or defective.
–
EN
Reseat or replace the MIO card.
Error Codes – 33
18 MIO Initialization
All Printers
•
The error message remains on after 5 minutes.
– Check the network card or host.
20 Error/Memory Overflow
All Printers
•
A large print job exceeds memory capacity.
– Verify that the SIMMs are seated. Add memory, remove soft
fonts, decrease resolution, or simplify the print job. Adjust the
settings for Image Adapt and Page Protect, if available.
6L/5L
•
Set the enhanced input/output (I/O) to auto mode (printer command
language [PCL] mode).
– Re-send the print job. If the auto-continue variable is on within
the printer job language (PJL), the printer will continue to print
after 10 seconds. If it is off, press the front panel button to
continue printing.
LJ 5
•
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– Turn Image Adapt and Page Protect to On or Auto. (This can be
set within the remote control panel.) Press [Go] to resume
printing.
34 – Control panel messages
EN
21 Error/Print Overrun
All Printers
•
1
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– Simplify the print job or add memory.
6L, 5L, 6P, 5P
•
Use the remote control panel to turn Page Protect to Auto or On.
5Si
•
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– Enable Page Protect from the control panel and from the
software. (This may require additional memory.)
LJ 5
•
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– Turn Image Adapt and Page Protect to On or Auto. (This can be
set within the remote control panel.) Press [Go] to resume
printing.
4L
•
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– Reduce the complexity of the print job.
•
The print job is too complex.
– Turn Image Adapt and Page Protect to On or Auto. (This can be
set within the HP Explorer remote control panel.)
•
There is not enough memory.
– Add the optional memory module.
4M Plus, 4 Plus, 4M, 4
•
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– Enable Page Protect from the control panel and from the
software. (This may require additional memory.)
EN
Error Codes – 35
III, IIID, IIIP
•
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– With 1 MB extra memory, enable Page Protect.
22 Error/ I/O Configuration Error/Par I/O
Error/MIO Error
All Printers
•
The I/O configuration for the computer or printer is incorrect.
– Refer to the service manual for the proper configuration.
•
The I/O Cable is wrong or damaged.
– Replace the I/O cable with the specified (IEEE-1284) cable.
•
The computer is turned off.
– Turn the computer on.
•
The printer I/O port is damaged.
– Replace the I/O PCA or formatter PCA.
5Si
•
A non-HP modular input/output (MIO) device is being used.
– Replace with an HP MIO device.
6P, 5P, 5, 4 Plus
•
The computer and printer are not communicating because of
improper signal protocols. This indicates a loose cable connection or
a bad or poor-quality cable.
– Reseat the cable and make sure you are using a high-quality
cable (IEEE-1284).
36 – Control panel messages
EN
23 I/O Not Ready
All Printers
•
1
The I/O card is unable to accept data or it is not connected to the
network.
– Check the I/O card seating and replace if necessary.
24 Job Memory Full
All Printers
•
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– Add memory or simplify the print job.
25 XXX Memory Full
All Printers
•
There is too much data or the data is too complex.
– Add memory or simplify the print job.
30 PS Error 16
All Printers
•
An I/O timeout or prompt for user interaction (for example, manual
feed) has been exceeded.
– Check the I/O connections; check if media requests are being
made.
EN
Error Codes – 37
30 PS Error 22 or 25
All Printers
•
An unexpected PostScript firmware error has occurred.
– Replace the PostScript SIMM.
30 PS Error XX (all others)
All Printers
•
A PCL file is being sent to the printer while it is in PostScript mode,
or a PostScript file or application error has occurred.
– Check the configuration, application, and print files.
30.1.1 Disk Failure
5 Si
•
The optional disk failed a self-test.
– Press [Select] to continue.
40 Error (data transfer error)
All Printers
•
The computer and printer may be set to different baud rates.
– Refer to the service manual to reset the baud rates.
•
The computer is turned off.
•
– Turn the computer on.
The MIO card is unseated or defective.
•
– Remove, reseat, or replace the MIO card.
An abnormal connection break occurred while transferring data from
the computer.
– Press [Continue] or [Go] on the printer to clear the error
message.
38 – Control panel messages
EN
40.x MIO Error
5Si
•
1
An abnormal connection break in the specified MIO card occurred.
If x=1; HP MIO port 1 (upper slot)
If x=2; HP MIO port 2 (lower slot)
– Press [Select] to continue, or power cycle the printer. If the error
persists, replace the MIO card.
41 Error (temporary print engine failure)
All Printers
•
A momentary error has occurred.
– Press [Continue] or [Go] to reset the printer.
6L, 5L
•
Temporary Error
– Power cycle the printer. If the error persists, reseat the formatter
PCA to the DC controller PCA.
•
Engine Error
– Replace the formatter PCA. If the error persists, replace the DC
controller PCA.
6P, 5P
•
A temporary error occurred while printing.
– This error most commonly occurs when the printer picks two
sheets of paper at once. The page containing the error is
reprinted automatically. Remove the page from the output tray
and press [Go] on the printer.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP
•
Paper feed problems have occurred.
– Check the paper feed, especially the operation of the PS1.
EN
Error Codes – 39
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIID, III, IID, II
•
The fiber optic cable is bent or broken.
IIP
•
For service notes between 2925J00000 and 3047J99999:
– Replace the fusing assembly.
IIID, III, IID, II
•
There is a bad laser scanner or a bad laser scanner cable.
– Replace the cable assembly from the DC controller to the laser
scanner.
2686D/A
•
The laser power is misadjusted.
– Refer to the service manual to adjust the laser power.
41.1 or 2 Error, 41.3 Error
All Printers
•
There are defective connections.
– Reseat J205, J206, J207, and laser scanner connections.
•
There is a paper multifeed or the wrong size of paper is being used.
– See service notes C2001A-01 and -02 (for LJ4 and 4+).
•
The paper size selection does not match the installed paper.
•
One of the cassettes is overfilled or improperly adjusted.
– Remove the paper from the cassette. Readjust the cassette.
•
The paper does not meet HP specifications.
40 – Control panel messages
EN
41.4 or 5 Error
All Printers
•
1
The DC controller or formatter PCA is defective.
IIISi/4Si
•
The tab on the toner cartridge is broken.
41.x Error
5Si, 5
•
If x=1: Defective connections:
– Reseat J205, J206, J207, and the laser scanner connections.
•
If x=2: Beam detect malfunction:
– Reseat the connectors, including the laser scanning assembly.
•
If x=3: Paper size selection does not match installed paper or paper
multifeed:
– Check for paper jams, multifeeds, or misfeeds.
Insert paper that is the correct size.
One of the cassettes is overfull or improperly adjusted.
•
If x=4: Sync error:
– Reseat the DC controller and the formatter PCA connections.
•
If x=5: Video sync or undetermined error:
– Reseat the DC controller and the formatter PCA connections.
EN
Error Codes – 41
50 Error/50 Service (fuser malfunction)
All Printers
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Turn the printer off for 20 minutes to clear the temporary 50
Error.
•
The power is low or unstable (for example, in a brownout).
– Locate and verify a stable power source.
6L, 5L
•
Check the resistance between pins 1 and 2 from connector J102 of
the DC controller and the thermistor.
– If there is no resistance, replace the heating element. If the
resistance is correct, replace the DC controller.
6P, 5P
•
The fuser is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
LJ 5, 4 Plus, 4
•
The fuser or power supply is defective.
– if the problem persists, replace the fuser and then replace the
power supply.
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Short the C202 (LJ 4) or C205 (LJ 4 Plus) on the DC controller to
bypass the Error 50 time delay.
4V, 4L, 4P
•
The fuser is improperly seated.
•
The fuser is defective.
42 – Control panel messages
EN
4Si, IIISi
•
The fuser is improperly seated.
•
The connector J201 is improperly connected.
– Reseat the connector J201 on the sensor PCA.
•
The SW 101 is disengaged.
– Check the SW101 to make sure it is engaged with the top cover
closed.
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Turn the printer off. Short the DC controller CP005 to bypass the
Error 50 time delay.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP
•
The fuser assembly is defective.
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Turn the printer off. Short the C212 on the DC Controller to
bypass the Error 50 time delay.
•
The power supply is defective.
IIID, III, IID, II
•
The fuser is defective.
•
The AC power module is defective.
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Turn the printer off. LJ II only: Short the C211 on the DC
controller to bypass the Error 50 time delay. LJ IID only: Short the
C216 on the DC controller to bypass the Error 50 time delay.
EN
Error Codes – 43
1
III, II
•
There is a defective fuser to the DC controller cable (hot fuser or
blown thermoswitch).
– Replace the cable fuser to the DC controller (part number
RG1-0907-000CN).
•
Check the fuser to the AC power module cable (cold fuser).
– Replace the cable DC controller to the AC power module
(part number RG1-0912-000CN).
•
The +24VA is missing.
– Check the voltage and replace the DC power supply as
necessary.
2686A/D
•
There is a blown 47 Ohm resistor.
– Replace the plug-in resistor on the fuser safety PCA
(part number FF1-3872-000CN).
•
The fuser bulb is defective.
•
The fuser safety PCA is defective.
50.x Fuser Error
5Si
•
Fuser malfunction.
If x=1: Fuser low temperature failure.
If x=2: Warm up failure.
If x=3: Over temperature failure.
If x=4: Bad fuser.
– Turn the printer off for 20 minutes, and then turn it back on.
Verify that the fuser is installed correctly and fully seated.
Reseat or replace the fuser cable assembly.
44 – Control panel messages
EN
51 Error (loss of beam detect)
6L, 5L, 6P, 5P, 4P, 4L
•
1
A temporary error has occurred.
– Power cycle the printer.
•
The laser scanner assembly is not seated.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
– Replace the laser scanner assembly (or cable on the 5L only).
•
The DC controller PCA is defective (5L, 5Si only).
LJ 5, 4Plus, 4
•
The laser scanner cable connectors are faulty.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
4V
•
There is a problem with the fiber optic cable.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
4Si, IIISi
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
There is a problem with the fiber optic cable.
•
The connectors are faulty.
– Reseat the connectors J002 on the DC controller and the J601
on the laser drive PCA.
•
The DC voltage is poor.
– Verify that the 12 VDC is present on the J601-2 of the laser drive
PCA.
•
EN
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
Error Codes – 45
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP
•
The toner cartridge is improperly seated.
•
The laser shutter operation is functioning improperly.
•
The fiber optic cable is damaged.
•
The laser PCA is bad.
IIID, III, IID, II
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
There is a bad cable in the laser scanner to the DC controller.
– Replace the cable in the laser scanner to the DC controller
(RG1-0908-000CN).
•
The fiber optic cable has cuts or kinks.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
2686D/A
•
The laser or laser power setting is defective.
•
The scanner is defective.
51.x Error
5Si
•
Laser subsystem problem.
If x=1: Beam detect malfunction.
If x=2: Laser malfunction.
– Press [Select] to resume operation. If error persists:
Check the cable from the DC controller to the laser scanner.
Replace the laser scanner assembly.
Replace the DC Controller PCA.
46 – Control panel messages
EN
52 Error (incorrect scanner speed)
6L, 5L, 6P, 5P
•
1
A temporary error has occurred.
– Power cycle the printer.
•
The scanning assembly is improperly fitted.
•
A problem has occurred with the scanner cable.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
LJ 5
•
The laser scanner cable is faulty.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
4V, 4Si, IIISi
•
The cable assembly is faulty.
•
There is a scanner motor problem.
– Listen for the scanner motor to start up, and watch for the LED
003 on the DC controller to illuminate (4Si, IIISi).
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
4P, 4L
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Power cycle the printer.
•
The scanner assembly is improperly fitted.
•
There is a scanner cable problem.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
EN
Error Codes – 47
4 Plus, 4
•
The laser scanner cable is faulty.
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP
•
The scanner motor is bad.
•
The DC controller is bad.
IIID, III, IID, II
•
The laser scanner cable to the DC controller is defective.
– Replace the cable assembly (part number RG1-0908-000CN).
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
2868A/D
•
The scanner assembly is defective.
52.x Error
5Si
•
Scanner subsystem problem.
If x=1: Scanner startup failure.
If x=2: Scanner rotation failure
– Switch the printer off and then back on.
If the error continues:
Check the cable from the DC controller to the laser scanner
assembly.
Replace the laser scanner assembly.
Replace the DC controller PCA.
48 – Control panel messages
EN
53 Error (accessory memory error)
4Si, IIISi
•
1
A temporary error has occurred.
– Power cycle the printer.
•
A laser malfunction has occurred.
– See 51 Error recommendations.
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP
•
53 Error Memory Unit 1 (on the top).
•
53 Error Memory Unit 1 (on the bottom).
IIID, III
•
There is a failure in the front memory slot. (53.1 Error)
•
There is a failure in the rear memory slot. (53.2 Error)
IID, II
•
An accessory memory failure has occurred.
2686D/A
•
EN
A laser temperature malfunction has occurred.
Error Codes – 49
53.XY.ZZ Error
6L/5L
•
An error has been found in the RAM or ROM.
– Power cycle the printer.
•
The memory card is defective or incompatible.
– Turn off the printer, remove any additional memory, then turn the
printer back on. If the message clears, replace the memory card.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
5Si, 6P, 5P, 5, 4V, 4P, 4Plus, 4, 4Si
•
A SIMM malfunction has occurred.
– Verify that the SIMM board is installed correctly. Replace the
SIMM that caused the error.
50 – Control panel messages
EN
Table 1-1
53.XY.ZZ Error for 5, 5Si, 4 P, 4 Plus, 4, 4Si
x (Hardware Type)
zz (Error Number)
x=0, ROM
0=Unsupported memory
1
1=Unrecognized memory
x=1, RAM
2=Unsupported memory size
3=Failed RAM test
x=2, Flash
4=Exceeded maximum RAM size
Y (Hardware Device)
5=Exceeded maximum ROM size
y=0 Internal mem.
6=Invalid SIMM speed
(Formatter PCA)
7=SIMM reporting information incorrectly
y=1 SIMM Slot 1
8=SIMM RAM parity error
y=2 SIMM Slot 2
9=SIMM ROM mapped to an unsupported
address
y=3 SIMM Slot 3
10=SIMM address conflict
y=4 SIMM Slot 4
11=ROM out of bounds
12=Could not make temporary mapping
Note
An Error 53.1y.08 generates if HP LJ 4P Plus memory is installed in
an HP LJ 4.
4L
•
An error has been found in the RAM (or ROM: 5L only).
– Power cycle the printer.
•
The memory card is defective or incompatible.
– Turn the printer off; remove any additional memory; then turn the
printer back on. If the message clears, replace the memory card.
•
EN
The formatter PCA is defective.
Error Codes – 51
54 Error
5Si
•
The duplexer is defective.
– Replace the duplexer.
IID, IIID: Duplex Feed Error
•
The duplex shift plate is improperly fitted.
– Check the duplex shift plate for correct position and operation.
•
The PS5 or SL4 is bad.
– Verify proper operation and replace as necessary.
•
There is a defect in the main motor.
– Replace the main motor or the power supply or main drive motor
PCA.
2686 D/A: Main Motor Stall
•
The input tray is too full.
– Remove some of the paper.
•
The fuser drive gears are bent or locked up.
– Adjust or replace the fuser drive gears.
•
The main motor has problems.
– Replace the main motor.
52 – Control panel messages
EN
55 Error (internal communication
problem)
All Printers
•
The cable is loose or bad.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
– Replace the DC controller PCA. Note: Error 55 on a LJ Series II
requires replacing both the DC controller and the Interface PCA
at the same time.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The paper input PCA is defective.
•
The main motor is defective.
•
There is inadequate site power (or the problem may be the result of
thunderstorms). Examine the surge protector.
– Replace the DC controller PCA and/or the formatter PCA if
necessary.
4V
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
4Si, IIISi
•
The connectors are improperly fitted.
– Check and reseat the connectors J4 and J5 on the low-voltage
power supply. Check J8, J9, J10, and J15 on the DC controller
PCA
•
Cable is loose or faulty.
– Check and reseat the cable between the DC controller and
formatter PCAs.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The DC power supply is defective.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The paper input PCA is defective.
•
The main motor is defective.
EN
Error Codes – 53
1
2686D/A
•
The interface or formatter PCA is defective.
56 Error
4Si, IIISi
•
An attempt is being made to print envelopes while the printer is in
duplex mode.
IID, IIID
•
The output selector knob is not in duplex position.
56.x Error
5Si
•
An invalid input source or output destination has been selected.
If x=1: invalid input source.
If x=2: invalid output destination.
– Check the input and output devices.
Reselect a valid device.
57 Error
6L, 5L
•
The memory card is incompatible.
– Remove the card and replace it with a 1, 2, 4, or 8 MB, 5V, 70
nanosecond (nsec.) or faster card.
6P, 5P, 5
•
The main motor is not functioning properly.
– Check for any binding in the motor or gear train. Check the
connection to the DC controller, and then replace the main motor
or the DC controller as necessary.
54 – Control panel messages
EN
4L, 4
•
The main motor is not functioning properly.
1
IIIP, IIP Plus, IIP (57 Error 1)
•
An incompatible memory card is in the top slot.
•
An incompatible memory card is in the bottom slot.
•
The motor cables or connectors are poorly seated.
•
The main motor is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
IIID, III (57-1 Error)
•
An incompatible memory card is in the front slot.
•
An incompatible memory card is in the rear slot.
57.x Service
5Si, 4 Plus, 4Si, IIISi, (x=2, 3, or 4)
•
The fan motor x is faulty.
– Check fan number x, main, or duplexer fan, and replace if
necessary.
LJ 5
•
The main motor has failed.
4 Plus (x = 1)
•
The gears are seized.
•
The DC controller or main motor is bad.
4Si, IIISi (x = 1)
•
The gears are seized.
– Check and replace the top cover or fuser gears.
•
EN
The top cover switch is faulty.
Error Codes – 55
•
The AC kill switch operation is faulty.
•
The connector J010 is improperly fitted.
•
There is a bad main motor PCA or main motor.
58 Service
6P, 5P, 5, 4V, 4P, 4L, 4
•
The fan cable is improperly fitted.
– Check the fan cable; reseat the fan cable if necessary.
•
The fan is defective.
4V
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
58.1 and 58.2
4Si, IIISi
•
The paper cassette is improperly inserted.
58.x Printer Error
5Si
•
Tray/lifter malfunction.
If x=1: Tray 2 lifter malfunction.
If x=2: Tray 3 lifter malfunction.
If x=3: Tray 1 lifter malfunction.
If x=4: Tray 4 lifter malfunction.
– Press [Select] to continue.
Repair or replace the tray lifter.
56 – Control panel messages
EN
59 Add Memory
4Si, IIISi
•
1
Not enough optional memory is installed to support the PostScript
option for the application being used.
– Verify that the SIMMs are seated properly; replace any defective
SIMMs, or install additional SIMMs.
59.x Printer Error
5Si
•
Main motor malfunction.
If x=1: main motor startup failure.
If x=2: main motor rotation failure.
– Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
– If the message persists:
Check the cabling between the main motor and the DC
controller.
Replace the main motor.
Replace the DC controller.
60 Service
4 P, 4 Plus, 4, 2686D/A
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
60 Memory
4V, 4Si, IIISi
•
EN
The SIMMs are defective.
Error Codes – 57
61 Service
4P, IIIP, IIID, III, IIP Plus, IIP, IID, II, 2686D/A
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
61 Memory
4V, 4 Si, IIISi
•
The SIMMs are defective.
61.x Service
All Printers
•
The SIMM in slot x is improperly fitted.
•
The SIMM in slot x is defective.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
Note: If x=0, the SIMM slot could not be determined.
62 Service
4P, IIIP, IIID, III, IIP Plus, IIP, IID, II, 2686D/A
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
62 Memory
4V, 4Si, IIISi
•
The SIMMs are defective.
58 – Control panel messages
EN
62.x Service/Printer Error, 62.0 Service,
62.1–4 Service, 62.5 Service, 62.6 Service
All Printers
•
The font cartridge or the SIMMs are improperly fitted.
– Reseat the SIMMs and/or the font cartridge; power cycle the
printer.
•
The internal memory is defective. (x=0)
– Replace the formatter PCA.
•
The SIMM in slot x is defective.
•
The font cartridge (x=5) is defective.
4V
•
Replace the cache.
63 Service
6L, 5L
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
– Power cycle the printer. Disconnect the parallel I/O cable and run
a self test. If the error persists, replace the formatter PCA.
6P, 5P, 5, 4P, 4 Plus, 4, IIIP, IIID, III, IIP Plus, IID, II,
2686A/D
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
– Replace the formatter PCA.
4V
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
– Power cycle the printer; replace the formatter PCA.
4V, 4Si, IIISi
•
EN
The SIMMs are defective.
Error Codes – 59
1
64 Service/Printer Error
All Printers
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
5Si
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
65 Memory
4V, 4Si, IIISi
•
The SIMMs are defective.
65 Service
All Printers (except 4Si, IIISi)
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
4V, 4Si
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Power cycle the printer.
65 Printer Error
5Si, 6P, 5P, 5
•
A dynamic RAM error is indicated.
– Turn the printer off, and then turn it back on.
If the message persists, replace the formatter PCA.
60 – Control panel messages
EN
66.x.yy Device Error
5Si
1
If the control panel displays a 66.x.yy device error message, the printer
will list additional error codes in the error log. These can be printed or
viewed. A device error message indicates a paper-handling error. The
printer is unable to communicate with the external paper handling PCA.
Verify that the C-link cables are installed correctly. Print the PCL
configuration page and note which installed devices are not present on
the configuration page.
x=paper-handling device
0=external paper handling (EPH) PCA
1=first device attached to EPH
2=second device attached to EPH
3=third device attached to EPH
4=fourth device attached to EPH
5=fifth device attached to EPH
– Switch the printer and paper-handling devices off and then on. If
the message persists:
yy=paper-handling device error code
If yy=1-22, 24:
– Check the cabling between the printer and the device.
Check the mechanical interface between the printer and the
device.
Replace the external paper-handling PCA.
If yy=23:
– Check the cabling and mechanical interface between the printer
and the device.
Replace the external paper-handling PCA.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to isolate the defective device.
Repair or replace the defective device.
EN
Error Codes – 61
If yy=31:
The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 1.
If yy=32:
The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 2.
If yy=33:
The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 3.
If yy=34:
The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 4.
If yy=35:
The printer is not supported by the paper-handling device 5.
For error codes 31-35: Verify that the device is supported.
– If the device is supported, follow the steps under yy=23.
If yy=41:
Device 1 reports an invalid configuration.
If yy=42:
Device 2 reports an invalid configuration.
If yy=43:
Device 3 reports an invalid configuration.
If yy=44:
Device 4 reports an invalid configuration.
If yy=45:
Device 5 reports an invalid configuration.
For error codes 41-45:
– Verify proper configuration for the device.
If the configuration is correct, follow the steps under yy=23.
62 – Control panel messages
EN
67 Service/Printer Error
5Si
•
1
The field replacement units (FRUs) are not installed properly.
– Reinstall the FRUs.
LJ 5
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
– Reseat any accessories. If the error persists, replace the
formatter PCA.
4V
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Power cycle the printer.
•
The paper guide and plate assembly are defective.
4P, 4Plus, 4, IIIP, IIID, III, IIP Plus, IIP, IID, II, 2686D/A
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
– Reseat any accessories. If the error persists, replace the
formatter PCA.
4Si
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Power cycle the printer.
•
The paper guide and plate assembly are defective.
67 Memory
4V, 4Si, IIISi
•
EN
The SIMMs are defective.
Error Codes – 63
68 Error/Service
All Printers
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Press ]Continue] and check the control menu settings. Then,
power cycle the printer.
6P, 5P
•
(68 SERVICE) -NVRAM full.
– Perform a nonvolatile random-access memory (NVRAM)
initialization by holding down [Reset] for more than 20 seconds
while turning on the printer.
5Si, 6P, 5P, 5
•
(68 Error) - error in NVRAM.
– Check the control panel settings. Replace the formatter PCA if
the problem persists.
5Si, 5
•
(68 SERVICE) -NVRAM full.
– Power cycle the printer. If the problem persists, perform a
NVRAM initialization by holding down [Item] or [Job Cancel] on
the LJ 5) while turning the printer on. All control panel settings
(including service mode settings) must be reset after this
procedure.
4P, 4 Plus, 4
•
(68 Error) There is an error in the NVRAM.
– Check the control panel settings. Replace the formatter PCA if
the problem persists.
64 – Control panel messages
EN
4P, 4 Plus, 4
•
(68 SERVICE) The NVRAM is full.
– Power cycle the printer. If the problem persists, perform a
NVRAM initialization by holding down [Item] while turning on the
printer. All control panel settings (including service mode
settings) will require resetting following this procedure.
68 Memory
4V, 4Si, IIISi
•
The SIMMs are defective.
69 Service
All Printers
•
The I/O PCA is defective.
– Remove the optional I/O PCA, and then re-test.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
– Replace the formatter PCA.
70–71 Error
All Printers
•
The personality cartridge or the SIMM installed in the font or SIMM
slot is incompatible with the printer.
– Replace with compatible cartridges or the SIMM.
5Si
•
EN
The MIO cards are faulty.
Error Codes – 65
1
72 Service
All Printers
•
The formatter PCA or the font cartridge is defective.
– Replace the formatter PCA.
•
The font cartridge was removed during formatter PCA access.
– Power cycle the printer and continue.
79 Service
All Printers
•
Check the software; drivers; memory PCAs; font, macro, or
personality; cartridges; and optional I/O cards. Check the toner
cartridge for defects.
•
Remove any accessories (such as font cartridges, memory PCAs,
and SIMMs) that are plugged into the formatter PCA; reprint the file.
If the problem persists, verify proper setup with the application
vendor.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
66 – Control panel messages
EN
5Si
•
An unrecoverable firmware error occurred.
1
1 Power cycle the printer.
2 Reseat or replace the interface cable; power cycle the printer.
3 Remove the SIMMs one at a time and power cycle the printer.
4 Remove the MIO card(s) one at a time and power cycle.
5 Try using the parallel interface, if possible.
6 With the MIO cards out of the printer, perform a cold reset.
7 If the error continues, replace the formatter PCA. Write down the
page count and serial number.
80 MIO Failure
All Printers
•
The MIO connection is improper.
– Inspect the pins on the formatter PCA MIO connection.
•
The MIO card is defective.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
81 Error
All Printers
•
EN
The formatter PCA is defective.
Error Codes – 67
89 PostScript ROM Failure
All Printers (except 6L and 5L)
•
The PostScript ROMs have bent or broken pins.
•
Inspect the PostScript ROMs/SIMM for bent or broken pins.
•
The ROMs/SIMM are improperly located.
– Check that the ROMs/SIMM are in the correct location and are
oriented properly.
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Power cycle the printer.
•
The PostScript ROMs/SIMM are defective.
Blank Display
All Printers
•
There is no power.
– Check the AC and DC voltages.
•
The display panel, related cabling, or drive circuitry is defective.
– Check the input voltages that illuminate the display panel.
•
The display, cable, formatter PCA, or DC controller is faulty.
4V
•
There is no power.
– Verify the input power, and then check CB101 and F101.
•
The control panel or formatter PCA is defective.
– Print an engine test print; if it is satisfactory, replace the control
panel and then replace the formatter PCA.
68 – Control panel messages
EN
All LEDs Off (blank display)
6L, 5L
•
1
The printer is in sleep mode.
– Press the front panel button or open the EP door.
•
No power is supplied to the printer.
– Check the power cord connections and the power source.
•
Determine if the print engine is functional.
– Print an engine test; if it is successful, replace the formatter PCA.
•
The control panel PCA cable is defective.
•
Check the fuses on the DC controller.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
4L
•
The printer is in Intelligent Off mode.
– Press the front panel button, or open the top door.
•
Power is not supplied to the printer.
– Check the power cord connections and the power source.
•
Print an engine test print to determine if the print engine is
functional.
– If the test is successful, replace the formatter PCA.
•
Check fuses FU101 and FU201 on the DC controller PCA.
– Replace if necessary.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The connector between the DC controller and the formatter PCA is
defective.
– Replace the connector.
EN
Error Codes – 69
All LEDs On (without pressing the
front panel button)
6L, 5L, 4L
•
This is a service error.
– Hold down the front panel button to display the error LED code.
This code will be shown only while the button is pressed.
•
All LEDs remain on while pressing the front panel button.
– Power cycle the printer. If the error persists, replace the formatter
PCA.
Data and Ready LEDs are Blinking
6L, 5L
•
This indicates a firmware error.
– Note the LED pattern, bitronics error code, printer condition, data
sent, and any other information that may help to isolate the error.
Contact HP technical support with this information.
Data LED is Blinking
6L, 5L
•
The printer is set to manual feed.
– Insert paper into the manual feed slot. Ensure that the correct
paper is loaded in the printer. Press and release the front panel
button. If manual feed is not desired, turn off the setting in the
software application.
•
The printer is stuck on manual feed.
– Press the front panel button to override the manual feed request
and to feed paper from the paper cassette.
•
The input paper sensor (PS1) or the front oblique roller assembly is
defective.
– Replace the PS1 or the front oblique roller assembly.
70 – Control panel messages
EN
Display Is All Block Characters
All Printers
•
1
The display cable is defective or disconnected.
– Reseat or replace the display panel cable.
•
The control panel is defective.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
– Check and replace as needed.
Error LED is On Continuously
6L, 5L
•
Power cycle the printer.
•
There is a bad connection between the formatter PCA and the
AC controller.
•
The formatter PCA is defective.
•
The AC controller is defective.
Tray 1 LED is Blinking
6P
•
The printer is set to manual feed. Insert paper into Tray 1 and press
[Go].
FS Disk Failure
4V
•
The printer detected a disk failure.
•
A temporary error has occurred.
– Press [Shift] + [Continue] to continue printing.
– Power cycle the printer.
EN
Error Codes – 71
•
The disk drive is improperly fitted.
– Reseat the disk drive; ensure that the connector pins are fully
seated.
•
The disk drive is not installed.
– Run a self-test to verify the presence of the disk drive (look under
Installed Options: Disk on the self-test page).
•
The disk drive is defective.
– Replace the disk drive.
PC Install
4V
•
The paper size is incorrect.
– Verify that the correct paper-size label (protruding tab) is
installed in the left side of the paper cassette.
•
The size-sensor arm is damaged.
– Check cassette-size sensor arms for bending or damage.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
– Replace the control panel. If the problem still exists, replace the
formatter PCA.
4V, 4 Plus, 4
•
The lower cassette (Tray 3) is selected and the printer has detected
that the paper cassette (Tray 2) is not installed.
– Install or reseat the paper cassette (Tray 2). Tray 2 is the paper
guide for the lower cassette (Tray 3).
•
The paper cassette is improperly fitted.
72 – Control panel messages
EN
2
Service mode
Overview
This chapter provides the procedures used to access service mode and
related functions.
EN
Overview – 73
Service Mode Tasks
You can perform the following tasks while in service mode.
•
Print a service mode self-test page.
•
Verify the page count. (The page count is also displayed on the
standard self-test page.)
•
Set the page count (not available on 4L and IIP).
•
See the maintenance count and serial number (4 Si and IIISi).
•
Set the cold reset default (LJ5, 4P, 4 Plus, LJ4). This sets the factory
default paper size.
•
Set the diagnostic function on and off (LJ5, 4P, 4 Plus, LJ4), (for
software developers use only).
•
Remove the demo page option from the self-test menu:
Demo Page = On/Off (LJ5, 4 P, 4 Plus, LJ4).
Note
The tasks listed above are not available on the 2686D/A.
74 – Service mode
EN
Accessing Service Mode
Use the following procedures to access service mode.
Note
There is no service mode or NVRAM on LaserJet 6L, 5L, 6P, 5P, or
4L printers. The page counts are retained only while the printer is
plugged in; the page count is lost when the printer is unplugged.
2
Note
Use PJL commands in the software to access service mode in LJ5P
and LJ 4 ML printers. See the service manual for more information.
LJ5Si Mopier, LJ5 Si
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Press [Items] and [+] simultaneously while turning the printer on.
3 Press [Select]. After a few seconds the printer should display
Service Mode.
LJ5
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Press [Menu +] and [Value+] simultaneously while turning the printer
on.
After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode.
LJ 4V, 4P, 4Plus, 4, 4Si
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Press [On Line], [Form Feed], and [Enter] simultaneously while
turning the printer on.
3 Press [Form Feed], and then press [Enter].
After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode.
EN
Accessing Service Mode – 75
LJ IIISi
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Press [On Line], [Continue], and [Enter] simultaneously while turning
the printer on.
3 Press [Continue], and then press [Enter].
After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode.
LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Press [On Line}, [Menu], and [Enter] simultaneously while turning the
printer on.
3 Press [Form Feed], and then press [Enter].
After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode.
LJ IIID, III, IID, II
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Press [On Line], [Continue/Reset], and [Enter/Reset Menu]
simultaneously while turning the printer on.
3 Press [Continue/Reset], and then press [Enter/Reset Menu]
After a few seconds the printer should display Service Mode.
76 – Service mode
EN
Setting the Page Count
(except on the LJ 6L, 6P, 5P, 4L, IIP)
The page count is stored in the printer in non-volatile memory. If it is
necessary to replace the formatter PCA, the page count should be reset
to the original page count to reflect the age of the print engine. Use the
following procedure to set the page count.
1 When 00 SMODE or SERVICE MODE is displayed, press [Menu] to
modify the page count.
4, 4+, and 4P only: Press [Menu] to access the service menu. Press
[Item] to proceed through the menu.
PAGES=XXXXXX is displayed. (XXXXXX represents the page count
currently stored in non-volatile memory in the printer. The
underlined character denotes the position of the cursor.)
2 Press [+] (or [ALT] and [-]) to scroll until the correct value is
displayed for the underlined digit.
3 Press [Enter] to select the correct value. The cursor automatically
moves one place to the right.
4 Set each digit in the same manner. When the last digit’s value has
been selected, the display returns to 00 SMODE or
SERVICE MODE.
5 Press [On Line] to exit service mode.
EN
Setting the Page Count – 77
2
Setting the Page Count and Serial Number
LJ 4V
1 Enter service mode. See page 74 for instructions.
2 When Service Mode is displayed, press [Menu] to access the
service menu.
3 Press [Item] to proceed through the menu. Pages=XXXXXX is
displayed. (XXXXXX represents the page count currently stored in
non-volatile memory in the printer. The underlined character
denotes the position of the cursor.)
4 Press [Enter] to scroll the cursor to underline the desired digit.
5 Press [+/]-] to select the correct value.
6 Press [Enter] to store the new value in NVRAM.
7 Set each digit in the same manner.
8 Press [On Line] to return the display to Service Mode.
9 Press [On Line] a second time to exit service mode.
Setting the Page Count
LJ 5Si, 4Si, IIISi
1 Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys.
2 Turn the printer on.
3 Wait until RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT displays and then release both
keys.
Note
MAINTENANCE COUNT in the Service Mode menu sets the page count
interval at which the next service is due for the printer. This is set
initially at the factory to 200,000 pages (350,000 for 5Si printers).
Editing this item is similar to editing the Pages item.
78 – Service mode
EN
Setting the Default Paper Size for a
Cold Reset
The initial default paper size for the formatter PCAs in Europe is A4.
When replacing formatters whose default is set for A4 (European
Formatters), set the customization variable to A4. When the
customization variable is set to A4, the cold reset procedure cannot
reset the paper size to Letter.
Use the following procedures to customize the cold reset paper size:
LJ 5Si
1 Enter service mode. See page 74 for instructions.
2 Press [Menu] to access the Service Menu.
3 Press [Items] to step through the menu until
COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER* is displayed.
4 Press [+] to toggle between Letter and A4 paper.
5 Press [Select] to activate your choice.
6 Press [On Line] to exit service mode.
7 Perform a cold reset to activate a new choice.
LJ 5
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Hold [Go] down while turning the printer on.
FACTORY DEFAULTS BEING RESTORED is displayed. The cold reset
does not take effect until READY is displayed.
When READY displays, the default settings have been returned to the
factory defaults and the printer is ready to accept new settings.
LJ 4V
1 Enter service mode. See page 74 for instructions.
2 Press [Menu] to access the service menu.
3 Press [Item] to step through the menu until CR PAPER=LETTER* is
displayed.
4 Press [+/]-] to toggle between Letter and A4 paper.
EN
Setting the Default Paper Size for a Cold Reset – 79
2
5 Press [Enter] to save your selection.
6 Press [On Line] to return the display to SERVICE MODE.
7 Press [On Line] a second time to exit service mode.
LJ 4, 4 Plus, and 4P Only
1 Enter service mode as described in this section.
2 Press [Menu] to display SERVICE MENU.
3 Press [Item] to display CR PAPER=LETTER*.
4 Press [+/]-] to toggle between Letter and A4 paper.
5 Press [Enter] to save your selection.
6 Press [On Line] to exit service mode.
Setting the PowerSave Interval
In service mode, you can add an additional 10-second time interval to
the PowerSave function.
LJ 4V
1 With Service Mode displayed, press [Menu] until JOB MENU is
displayed.
2 Press [Item] until PWRSAVE= is displayed.
3 Press [+/]-] until the desired time interval is displayed.
4 Press [Enter] to save your selection.
5 Press [On Line] once to return to service mode.
6 Press [On Line] again to place the printer back online.
80 – Service mode
EN
3
Power supply
Overview
The following schematics will assist in checking and verifying printer
systems and functions, including operating voltages, power supplies,
and circuitry.
EN
Overview – 81
LaserJet 6L, 5L
The DC controller PCA coordinates all print engine activities, drives the
laser, and coordinates print data from the formatter PCA with the image
formation process. The DC controller includes both an AC and DC
power supply and distribution circuitry.
The DC controller controls the following systems and functions:
Print Engine Control
• Laser and Scanner Drive
• Paper Motion Photosensors (Paper Out, Paper Registration, and
Paper Exit Sensors)
• Motor
Power System
• AC Power Distribution
• DC Power Distribution
• Overcurrent/Undervoltage Protection
• SleepMode
• High Voltage Power Distribution
82 – Power supply
EN
DC Controller
3
Figure 3-1
EN
DC Controller Loads
LaserJet 6L, 5L – 83
LaserJet 5Si
The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the Low Voltage
Power Supply (LVPS). The high voltages required for image formation
are generated by the High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). The Low
Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System are illustrated below.
Figure 3-2
Low Voltage Power Supply and Distribution System
84 – Power supply
EN
LaserJet 5P, 4P, and 4L
The DC power supply circuitry, located on the DC controller PCA,
generates +5 DC and +12 DC. Uses for each are summarized below.
+5 DC
• Formatter PCA
• Photosensors
• DC controller circuitry
• Laser scanner assembly
+12 V DC
• High voltage power supply
• Main motor
• Solenoids
• Fan (through the laser scanner assembly)
Figure 3-3
EN
Power System Block Diagram
LaserJet 5P, 4P, and 4L – 85
3
LaserJet 5, 4 Plus, 4
Pin 1
2
3
4
6
5
TB 201
Figure 3-4 DC Power Supply Checks (LJ5, LJ4 & LJ4+) TB201 on
DC controller
Use this procedure to verify the operating voltages of the LJ5, LJ4, and
LJ4+:
1 Listen for the exhaust fan. A rotating fan indicates that the +5V DC
and the +24 V DC are present. (The fan runs on +24V DC.)
2 Listen for the main motor. If the main motor runs, +24V DC is
enabled.
TB201 electrical connector
Voltage
Color
Pin Number
+5V DC
Brown
1, 2
+24V DC
Red
3
Ground
Blue
4, 5, 6
86 – Power supply
EN
LaserJet 4V
The DC power distribution circuitry, located on the DC controller PCA,
distributes +5 V DC, +12 V DC, and +24 V DC, as shown.
+5 V DC
• Control Panel
• Formatter PCA
• Photosensors (PS 401, PS 402)
• DC Controller Circuitry
• Laser Scanner Assembly
• Exhaust Fans, FM1 and FM2 (low speed)
• Intake Fan, FM3
+12 V DC
3
• Laser Scanner Assembly
+24 V DC
• Laser Scanner Assembly
• High Voltage Power Supply
• Clutches and Solenoids
• Exhaust Fans, FM1 and FM2 (high speed)
EN
LaserJet 4V – 87
Power Supply Unit
Circuit
Breaker
CB101
Noise
Filter
Power Switch
(SW101)
Filter
Fuse
(F101)
Front Door
Switch
(SW102)
Fusing Heater
Drive Circuit
Switching
Transistor
Transformer
Control
IC
Photocoupler
+24V
Rectifier
24V to 5V
Overcurrent
Protection
Front Door Switch
(SW102)
+5V
/RELE
/FUSE1ON
/FUSE2ON
+24V
Fuser Heater
+24V
+5V
+12V
+24V
/RELE
/FUSE1ON
/FUSE2ON
+24V
FM1
+24V (High Spd.)
+5V (Low Spd.)
FM2
+24V (High Spd.)
+5V (Low Spd.)
Intake Fan
FM3
Figure 3-5
+5V (Low Spd.)
High
Voltage
Power
Supply
Developing Bias
Transfer Charging Roller
Toner Sensor
DC
Controller
+24V
Exhaust Fans
Primary Charging Roller
+5V
+5V
+24V
Laser / Scanner Unit
+5V
+24V
+5V
Main
Motor (M1)
Front Door
Assembly
Interface
PCA
+5V
+24V
Sensors, Clutches, Solenoids
Control Panel
Formatter PCA
DC Controller Loads
88 – Power supply
EN
LaserJet 4Si, IIISi
Follow this procedure to verify the voltages on the LaserJet 4Si and IIISi
printers:
1 Listen for the fans. Running fans indicate that the +5 V DC and the
+24 V DC are present.
2 Make sure that the 24A V DC is available on pin 1 of J203 on the
sensor PCA.
3 Listen for the main motor to start. If the main motor runs, 24B V DC
is enabled. This means that the 24B V DC is also present.
LaserJet 4Si, IIISi Voltage Test Points
3
Voltage
Test Point
Notes
+5 V DC
CP031
On DC controller
+24 A
CP028
On DC controller
+24 B
CP023 and top
of R 006
On DC controller (off when the
top cover is open)
+12 V DC
J14, Pin 5
Present when top cover is
closed
EN
LaserJet 4Si, IIISi – 89
LaserJet IIIP, IIP+, IIP
Figure 3-6
DC Power Supply Checks (IIIP, IIP+, IIP)
1 DC power supply
2 J1 on formatter PCA
PIN
1
n/c
2
3
4
SIGNAL
+5
n/c
+5
Ground
Ground
COLOR
Brown
Brown
Blue
Blue
3 J212 on DC Controller
Pin Number
Color
1
BLUE
Supply
GROUND
2
3
BLUE
GROUND
RED
+24V *
4
5
RED
+24V *
BLUE
GROUND
6
7
ORANGE
+12V
BLUE
GROUND
8
9
BROWN
+5V
YELLOW
/FSRDRV
*Requires that the paper path door is closed or the power supply interlock disabled.
90 – Power supply
EN
LaserJet IIID, III, IID, II
3
Figure 3-7
DC Power Supply Checks (IIID, III, IID, II)
The LaserJet Service Diagnostic Tool can also be used to check
voltages.
Test tool III, II: Part number 33440-67905
• Checks DC voltages
• Checks high-voltage bias
• Runs test patterns
Test tool IIID, IID: Part number 33447-67906
• Checks DC voltages
• Checks high-voltage bias
• Monitors the status of the paper sensors
• Monitors the status of the solenoids
EN
LaserJet IIID, III, IID, II – 91
LaserJet 2868D/2686A
J502
+24V (UA)
GND
+30V (UB)
-5
GND
+5
GND
+24V (R)
J208
Figure 3-8
DC Power Voltage Supply Checks (2686D, 2686A)
92 – Power supply
EN
4
Input/Output (I/O)
Overview
This section provides information on cabling and the printer interface.
EN
Overview – 93
Bidirectional Parallel Interface
(LJ 6L, 5Si, 5L, 6P, 5P, 5, 4V, 4P, 4L,
4 Plus, 4, 4Si, and IIISi)
The bidirectional parallel interface (IEEE-1284 compliant) is compatible
with Centronics parallel interfaces. The following items are required to
take advantage of the enhanced capabilities provided by bidirectional
parallel interfaces, such as bidirectional communication:
•
Software application support for these features.
•
An IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable with the correct pin
configuration (see below).
Signal Name
Printer Pin #
Parallel Port
Pin #
1
nSTROBE
1
DATA 1
2
2
DATA 2
3
3
DATA 3
4
4
DATA 4
5
5
DATA 5
6
6
DATA 6
7
7
DATA 7
8
8
DATA 8
9
9
nACKNLG
10
10
BUSY
11
11
CALL (PE)
12
12
SELECT
13
13
nAUTOFd
14
14
On VDC (GND)
19 THRU 30
18 THRU 25
nFAULT
32
15
nSelIn
36
17
94 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
IEEE-1284 Compliant Parallel Cables
HP helped develop the IEEE-1284 standard and is one of the first
companies to introduce products that are compliant with it. HP offers
the following IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cables.
Part Number
Length
Connector Type
C2950A
2 meters
(7 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2951A
3 meters
(10 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2945A
2 meters
(7 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2946A
3 meters
(10 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2947A
10 meters
(33 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
4
EN
IEEE-1284 Compliant Parallel Cables – 95
RS-232-C/RS-422-A Serial Interface
Common Serial I/O Cables
The following serial cabling schematics are typical of IBM (AT/XT) and
compatible personal computers that use the standard (9/25) pin serial
RS-232C interface.
Male DB-25 cable to Female DB-25 (17255D)
Printer
(Male connector)
Chassis Ground
TD
RD
DSR
Sig Gnd
DTR
Computer
(Female connector)
1
2
3
6
7
20
1
3
2
20
7
5
6
Chassis Ground
RD
TD
DTR
Sig Gnd
DSR
Clear to Send
(Pins not shown are not used)
Male DB-25 cable to Female DB-9 (24542G)
Printer
(Male connector)
TD
RD
DSR
Sig Gnd
DTR
Computer
(Female connector)
2
3
6
7
20
96 – Input/Output (I/O)
2
3
4
5
6
8
RD
TD
DTR
Sig Gnd
DSR
Clear to Send
EN
Male DB-9 cable to Female DB-9 (C2932A)
Printer
(Male connector)
Computer
(Female connector)
2
3
4
5
6
8
TD
RD
DSR
Sig Gnd
DTR
DTR
HOOD
M DB-9
2
3
4
5
6
8
RD
TD
DTR
Sig Gnd
DSR
CTS
HOOD
F DB-9
SHIELD
Male DB-9 cable to Female DB-25 (C2933A)
Printer
(Male connector)
TD
RD
DSR
Sig Gnd
DTR
DTR
HOOD
M DB-9
EN
Computer
(Female connector)
2
3
4
5
6
8
3
2
20
7
6
5
1
RD
TD
DTR
Sig Gnd
DSR
CTS
Chassis
Ground
HOOD
F DB-9
RS-232-C/RS-422-A Serial Interface – 97
4
25- to 9-pin serial adaptor (P/N C2809A)
The pin-outs for the adaptor are shown below:
C2809A pin configuration
9-pin Male
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Shell
98 – Input/Output (I/O)
25-pin Female
4
2
3
6
7
20
not connected
not connected
not connected
Shell
EN
Serial I/O Specifications
Handshaking
Protocol
RS-232-C: Xon/Xoff (software) and Data
Terminal Ready (hardware)
RS-422-A: Xon/Xoff (software) only
The signal logic or “sense” of the data terminal
ready (DTR) line is switchable to either active
HIGH (the factory default) or active LOW from the
printer control panel.
Data Format
Asynchronous with 1 start bit, 8 data bits, and 1
stop bit
Parity
Not used
Supported
Baud Rates
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
57600*, 115200**
*LJ 4 and newer: Supports up to 57,600 Baud
**LJ 4000/LJ 5000: Supports up to 115,200 Baud
Maximum I/O Cable Lengths
4
Serial RS-232C
RS-22A
15 meters (50 feet)
1200 meters (4,000 feet)
Parallel (non-IEEE 1284)
3 meters (10 feet)
Parallel (IEEE 1284 with
“B” type connector)
3 meters (10 feet)
Parallel (IEEE 1284 with
“C” type connector)
10 meters (34 feet)
EN
Serial I/O Specifications – 99
Configuring the Computer Interface
The following information applies to IBM personal computers (PCs) and
compatible computer systems.
Use MS-DOS® EDIT or a similar program to enter the appropriate MSDOS MODE commands in the computer's AUTOEXEC.BAT file. See
the getting started guide or set-up manual for the printer for step-bystep instructions.
For parallel communication, enter:
MODE LPT1:,,B
(Note: Change “B” to “P” if <DOS 4.0.)
For serial communication, enter:
MODE COMn: 9600,N,8,1,B
(Note: Change “B” to “P” if <DOS 4.0.)
MODE LPT1:=COMn
where n=1, 2, or 3, depending on which COM port is used
(that is, COM1, COM2, or COM3)
100 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
Verifying Communication
MS-DOS
Use this procedure to verify communication between an MS-DOS
computer and an HP LaserJet printer:
1 Turn the computer on.
2 Turn the printer on.
3 Wait until the printer displays 00 READY.
4 At the DOS prompt, type DIR >PRN and press [Enter]. When you
do, the printer's Form Feed light should illuminate.
5 If necessary, take the printer off line and press [Form]Feed] to eject
the page.
4
EN
Verifying Communication – 101
Macintosh
Use this procedure to verify communication between a Macintosh
computer and an HP LaserJet III printer:
Note
The LaserJet printer must have PostScript and AppleTalk
installed and have at least 1 megabyte of additional memory.
1 Turn the computer on.
2 Make sure the PostScript cartridge is properly seated.
3 Turn the printer on and wait until the printer displays
POSTSCRIPT READY.
4 Verify that the front panel is set to I/O=APPLETK.
5 Pull down the Apple menu.
6 Select Chooser.
7 Select Printer Type.
8 Select Printer (AppleTalk must be active).
9 Close Chooser by selecting box in the upper-left corner.
10 Pull down the File menu.
11 Select Print Window or Print Desktop. The READY light should
start flashing before the page ejects.
102 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
Infrared Communications
(6P, 5P, 5 Only)
The 6P, 5P, and 5 printers feature an infrared (IR) port that is compliant
with the Infrared Data Association (IrDA) standard. (The LaserJet 5
requires an additional transceiver pod.) A status light indicates when
the port is active. The light is located just above the port, which is
located on the lower-left corner of the LJ 6P and the LJ 5P, and on the
pod on the LJ 5.
Note
The IrDA standard for infrared communications represents an
emerging technology. Older portable devices that are not IrDAcompliant may not be compatible with these printers.
Troubleshooting IR Printing Problems
IR printing problems can be caused by any of the several system
components or by a lack of proper configuration. The following checklist
will help determine the source of the problem.
1 Verify that the user is operating the printer and PC as described in
the user guide: less than 1 meter between devices, and not more
than +/-15 degrees from the direct center.
2 Verify that the host PC or laptop and the printer are IrDA-compliant
and have the necessary hardware components for IR
communication.
3 Verify that the IR software has been loaded on the primary device
(system software from the PC manufacturer).
4 Verify that the host PC or laptop is properly configured. Check the
port assignment, the interrupt request (IRQ) level, and the base
address value. Check both the DOS AUTOEXEC.BAT and
CONFIG.SYS files, and check the Windows system configuration.
EN
Infrared Communications (6P, 5P, 5 Only) – 103
4
IR Test Tool
If all these elements are properly installed and configured, use the IR
Tester to test the IrDA protocol transmission and device operation.
Designed for troubleshooting IR communication problems, this tool was
developed by Genoa Technology, Inc., in cooperation with HewlettPackard. The part number is 5062-4661. Order it through
HP Parts Direct Ordering (see inside back cover).
To test the peripheral device:
1 Put the LaserJet printer in READY mode.
2 Press the “Peripheral Test” button on the tester. The LEDs on the
tester will illuminate in sequence.
If the “PASS” LED lights, the test was successful, which indicates that
communication with the printer's IR port is functioning normally. A selftest page will print as a result of the test.
If the “TEST” LED goes out and the “PASS” LED fails to light, the
printer's IR port is not functioning correctly.
To test the host computer:
1 Place the tester on a table in front of the PC's IR port.
2 Press the “Computer Test” button. The tester will sequence the
LEDs.
If the “PASS” LED lights, the test was successful, which indicates that
communication with the computer's IR port is functioning normally.
If the “TEST” LED goes out and the “PASS” LED fails to light, the host's
IR port is not functioning correctly.
104 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
Selecting the I/O Type
Use the front panel menus to select the I/O type and to configure
the I/Os. When the formatter PCA is replaced, the I/O type will reset to
the default value.
In early LaserJet printers (2686D/A), use the formatter switches to
select the I/O configuration, as follows.
LaserJet 2686D, 2686A Only
Setting Switch 1 (SW1)
Switch Use
No.
ON
OFF
11
I/O Type
Parallel
Serial RS 232C/422
2-42
Baud Rate
See figure 4-1.
See figure 4-1.
51
Auto
Continue
Continues on print and
data errors after flashing
10 times.
Flash error occurs until
the operator presses
[Continue].
61
Robust X-ON X-ON is repeated every 1
second when the printer
is waiting for data.
Only 1 X-ON is sent
when the printer needs
more data.
73
Auto Select
Mode
Powers up in auto-select
mode.
Powers up with autoselect mode off.
82
DTR Polarity
DTR pin 20 high when
the printer is ready.
DTR pin 20 low when
the printer is ready.
1
Refers to HP 2686A+ and HP 2686D models
2
Refers to all models of HP 2686 printers
3
Refers to HP 2686D models only
EN
Selecting the I/O Type – 105
4
Baud Rate Switch (SW1)
Switch Number
Baud Rate
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
300
OFF
OFF
ON
600
OFF
ON
OFF
1200
OFF
ON
ON
2400
ON
OFF
OFF
4800
ON
OFF
ON
9600
ON
ON
OFF
19200
Figure 4-1
Baud Rate Switch
106 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
5
Media specifications
Overview
Select media that meets the specifications listed on the following pages.
By doing so, you will minimize the incidents of jams, prevent premature
wear to the printer, and reduce repair costs. Hewlett-Packard
recommends testing print media before buying it in large quantities.
Note
For complete paper specifications for all LaserJet printers, see the
HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide.
EN
Overview – 107
Paper Sizes
Metric System
Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
A0
841 x 1189 mm
33.1 x 46.8 in
A3
297 x 420 mm
11.7 x 16.5 in
A4
210 x 297 mm
8.3 x 11.7 in
A5
148 x 210 mm
5.8 x 8.3. in
B4 (ISO)
250 x 353 mm
9.8 x 13.9 in
B5 (ISO)
176 x 250 mm
6.9 x 9.8 in
Imperial (U.S.) System
Size
U.S. Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Ledger
11 x 17 in
279 x 432 mm
Legal
8.5 x 14 in
216 x 356 mm
Letter
8.5 x 11 in
216 x 279 mm
Executive
7.25 x 10.5 in
184 x 267 mm
JIS B4**
10.1 x 14.3 in
257 x 364 mm
JIS B5**
7.2 x 10.1 in
182 x 257 mm
J Postcard*
3.9 x 5.8 in
100 x 148 mm
J Double Postcard*
5.8 x 7.9 in
148 x 200 mm
* J - Japanese
** JIS Japanese Industry Standard
108 – Media specifications
EN
Paper Specifications
Category
Specifications
Acid Content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Basis Weight:
LJ 5, 6L front output slot
LJ 6P Tray 1
60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43 lb)
LJ 5P paper cassette
LJ 5L,6L paper output bin
LJ 5 Tray 2
LJ 5Si Tray 2, Tray 3,Tray 4*
*(Opt. 2000 sheet feeder)
LJ 6P Tray 2
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb)
LJ 5Si Tray 1
60 to 199 g/m2 (16 to 63 lb)
LJ 5 Tray 1
60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb)
(5P may use media up to 42 lb with Sheffield rating of
100 to 180 in the manual feed slot only)
LJ 5 Tray 3
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
4V, 4MV all paper sources
64 to 105 g/m2 (17 to 28 lb)
II, III
IID, IID upper Tray
LJ 4, 4+ MP Tray
LJ 4L, 4P manual feed slot
60 to 135 g/m2 (16 to 36 lb)
(4P and 5P may use media up to 42 lb with Sheffield
rating of 100 to 180 in the manual feed slot only)
IIP, IIIP, IIP+
IIISi, 4Si simplex
LJ 4, 4+ PC Tray
LJ 4L, 4P paper cassette
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lb)
IID, IID lower Tray
IID, IIID 4+ duplex
IIISi, 4Si duplex
LJ 4, 4+ LC Tray
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb)
Caliper
3.0 to 7.0 mils (0.094 to 0.18 mm)
Curl
In ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.2 in)
Cut edge conditions
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release hazardous
emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for 0.1
seconds
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Smoothness
100-250 Sheffield
EN
Paper Specifications – 109
5
Paper Weight Equivalences
(Approximate)
Metric Weight U.S. Weight (lb) or Thickness (mm)
(g/m2)
Europe Japan
Postcard* Bond Text
thickness Wt
Book
Wt
Cover Bristol Index Tag
Wt
Wt
Wt
Wt
1
60
60
16
41
22
27
33
2
64
64
17
43
24
29
35
39
3
75
75
20
50
28
34
42
46
4
80
80
21
54
30
36
44
49
5
80
80
22
56
31
38
44
49
6
90
90
24
60
33
41
50
55
7
100
100
27
68
37
45
55
61
37
8
105
105
28
70
39
49
58
65
9
120
120
32
80
44
55
67
74
10
120
120
34
80
44
55
67
74
11
135
135
36
90
50
62
75
83
12
148
148
39
100
55
67
82
91
13
157
157
.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
14
163
163
.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
15** 176
176
.23
47
119
65
80
97
108
.18
* U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
** This media weight (row 15) may perform to your satisfaction but it is beyond the
printer’s specifications. Printing with this media weight will not damage the printer.
110 – Media specifications
EN
Troubleshooting Paper Problems
Paper problems can be difficult to detect. The following series of steps
will help isolate paper-induced problems versus printer problems:
•
Isolate a paper path.
•
Isolate a brand of paper.
•
Isolate a type of paper.
•
Evaluate paper-use practices.
•
Evaluate environmental conditions.
Here are some simple tips:
•
Turn the paper over and print on the other side. Doing so often
corrects excess paper curl.
•
Rotate the paper 180° (end-for-end) to feed a different leading edge.
This can help correct multi-sheet feeding problems.
5
EN
Troubleshooting Paper Problems – 111
Papers to Avoid
•
NCR self-carbon (or “carbonless” paper)
•
Paper that has been preprinted (such as letterhead) with ink that will
not withstand fuser heat (205° C [400° F] for 0.1 second)
•
Plastic-fiber paper
•
Embossed paper
•
Paper with cutouts or perforations
•
Chemically treated paper
•
Coated paper
•
Synthetic paper
•
Multi-part forms
•
Odd-sized paper
If your printer is having trouble with paper jams, multi-feeds, or
misfeeds, use HP-brand paper: HP 20 lb Multi-Purpose Paper,
(part number 9300-2092); HP 24 lb LaserJet Paper, (part number
9300-2091).
112 – Media specifications
EN
General Tips
Paper Curl
Paper curl results both from the heating process used to bond the print
image (toner) to the paper and from the path the paper must negotiate
through the printer.
Take the following actions to help reduce paper curl:
1 Turn the paper over in the input tray. Some paper packages (reams)
have an arrow indicating the preferred printing side. Experiment to
determine which orientation yields the least curl.
2 Try a different output paper path (if available for your printer). Using
the face-up output path may yield more acceptable results than the
standard face-down output bin. Note that the LJ5N, 5M, and 5
printers have no alternative output paper path. Use the
LJ 6L/5L Front Output Slot and Paper Input Support if paper is
curled or wrinkled.
3 Protect the paper from adverse environmental conditions prior to
use. Paper designed for laser printing has an initial moisture content
of 4-6 percent, which is maintained as long as the paper is stored
properly. Once the paper has been removed from its packaging, it
will dry out or absorb additional moisture, depending on the
environment. Excess moisture in the paper will increase the amount
of curl.
4 Try a different type or brand of paper. Not all paper is designed for
laser printing.
Much of the paper curl that is induced by the laser printer fusing
process will tend to relax within the first 24 hours following printing.
However, the curl on the leading edge of the page may remain longer
because the leading edge tends to remain in contact with the fusing
roller for longer periods.
Consult the user guide for the printer and the HP LaserJet Printer
Family Paper Specification Guide, for more information.
EN
General Tips – 113
5
Envelope Specifications
Category
Specifications
Basis Weight
75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) single layer
Caliper
3.3 to 5.5. mils (0.084 to 0.14 mm) single layer
thickness
Curl
Less than 5 mm (0.2 in) curl across entire surface
Finishing
Accurate, sharply creased folds with no more
than two thicknesses of paper at the leading edge
Fusing
Compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release
hazardous emissions when heated to 200° C
(392° F) for 0.1 second
Moisture Content
4% to 6% by weight
Paper
Smoothness
Must meet all the normal paper specifications
100 to 250 Sheffield
Envelope Sizes
Metric System
Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
DL
110 x 220 mm
4.3 x 8.6 in
C5
162 x 229 mm
6.4 x 9.1 in
B5
176 x 250 mm
7.0 x 9.9 in
Imperial (U.S.) System
Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
Commercial #10
105 x 241 mm
4.1 x 9.5 in
Monarch #7 3/4
98 x 191 mm
39 x 7.5 in
114 – Media specifications
EN
Envelopes to Avoid
Do not use the following envelopes:
•
with clasps, snaps, or tie strings
•
with transparent windows, holes, perforations, or cutouts
•
having an open flap with adhesive exposed
•
having paper, inks, adhesives, or materials that discolor, melt, offset,
or release hazardous emissions when exposed to 205° C (400° F)
•
having extremely smooth, shiny, rough, textured, or deeply
embossed surfaces
•
damaged, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped
•
constructed with encapsulating adhesives that do not require
moistening, but rely instead on pressure to seal them
Preventing Printer Malfunctions Caused by
Envelopes
When you are printing on envelopes, use these preventive measures to
avoid printer malfunctions.
•
Carefully feed the envelopes into the printer.
•
Be aware of the envelope’s construction.
5
EN
Envelope Specifications – 115
Envelope Feeding
Following these preventive measures when feed envelopes
•
Envelopes can be manually fed through the printer or they can be
fed automatically through an envelope tray or feeder.
•
Closely inspect the leading edge of the envelopes before feeding
them into the printer. Ensure the leading edge is flat. Watch for
envelope curl. Flatten the leading edge of the envelope before
printing.
•
Be patient; in manual feed mode the printer displays a message
when it is ready to accept the next envelope. Wait for this message
to appear before inserting the next envelope.
•
Do not allow a large quantity of envelopes to accumulate in the
output bin.
•
On most printers, use the rear (or front) output bin (if available) when
printing envelopes. Do not use the top (face-down) output
bin.
Envelope Construction
•
The corner folds need to be well-creased, with no more than two
thicknesses of paper.
•
The envelopes must lay flat.
•
The paper grain should be diagonal to the direction of the feed.
•
Adhesives must meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Basis weight must not exceed 90 g/m2 (24 pounds).
•
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, tie strings, or windows.
•
Do not use envelopes made of synthetic materials.
116 – Media specifications
EN
Label Specifications
Category
Specifications
Adhesive
Must not be on any external surfaces of the label
before, during, or after printing. Label construction
and die-cutting must not allow labels to peel off
during transport, printing, or fusing
Caliper
Most not exceed 0.18 mm (0.007 inches)
Curl
In ream: flat within 13 mm (0.5 inches)
Finishing
Precision
Cut sheet within 0.79 mm (0.031 inches) of
nominal and 0.20° square
Fusing
Compatibility
All adhesions, carrier sheets, top sheets, and other
materials used in label construction must be
compatible with the heat and pressure of the fusing
process. Materials must not discolor, melt, offset,
or release hazardous emissions when heated to
200° C (392° F) for 0.1 second
Packaging
Use moisture-proof wrap to preserve properties
5
EN
Label Specifications – 117
Preventing Printer Malfunctions Caused by
Adhesive Labels
As with envelopes, prevention is the best way to avoid printer
malfunctions caused by adhesive labels. To prevent paper jams and
feed problems, labels must meet the following requirements:
•
Be cut long grain (as opposed to short grain)
•
Totally cover the carrier sheet (no spaces between labels, no
removed labels)
•
Contain no excessive glue. (The adhesive should be acrylic-based
emulsion and should not come into direct contact with the printer.)
•
Meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility
•
Meet HP specifications for caliper
•
Have a carrier sheet that is not too smooth
•
Use the flat paper path (manual feed slot and rear, or front, face-up
delivery door), which is the recommended printing method
118 – Media specifications
EN
Transparency Specifications
Category
Specifications
Caliper
3.9 to 4.3 mils (0.100 to 0.110 mm)
Cutting Angle
90° ± 0.2°
Finishing Precision
Cut sheet to within 0.8 mm (0.03 inches) of
nominal and ± 0.2° of square.
Fusing Compatibility Overhead transparency material must be
compatible with the heat and pressure of the
fusing process. Materials must not discolor,
melt, offset material, or release hazardous
emissions when heated to 200° C (392° F) for
0.1 second
Preventing Printer Malfunctions Caused by
Transparencies
To prevent printer malfunctions caused by transparencies:
•
Use the straightest paper path to avoid curling and other problems.
•
Use transparencies with the correct resistivity.
•
Use transparencies that meet HP specifications for fusing
compatibility.
•
Remove each printed sheet from the tray and place it on a flat
surface before printing the next sheet.
5
EN
Transparency Specifications – 119
HP Paper Training Video
HP has developed a training video focusing on how paper is
manufactured and how the manufacturing process relates to the use of
paper in HP LaserJet printers. Part numbers are shown below.
Part No.
Version
(VHS Format)
5961-0711
National Standard
Television Committee
(NTSC) Version (U.S.)
5961-0712
PAL Version
(Europe, Asia)
The Paper Video explains
the manufacturing process.
120 – Media specifications
EN
6
Toner cartridge
information
Overview
This chapter provides information on toner cartridges and their use.
HP recommends using HP toner cartridges, which are designed
specifically to enhance the output from the HP LaserJet family of
printers.
EN
Overview – 121
Cartridge Weights/Page Counts
Page
Count
at 5%
Coverage
HP
LaserJet
Product
Cartridge Full
Weight
Empty
Weight
6L, 5L
C3906A
EP-A
730 gm
(25.7 oz.)
630 gm
(22 oz)
2,500
5Si
C3909A
EP-W
3000 gm
(106.7 oz)
2200 gm
(80.5 oz)
15,000
6P, 5P
C3903A
EP-V
920 gm
(32.8 oz)
740 gm
(26 oz)
4,000
5
92298A
EP-E
1500 gm
(52.9 oz)
1220 gm
(43 oz)
6,800
4V
C3900A
EP-Bll
2060 gm
(72.5 oz)
1710 gm
(60.2 oz)
8,100
4P, 4L
92274A
EP-P
860 gm
(30.3 oz)
740 gm
(26 oz)
3,350
4Plus, 4
92298A
EP-E
1500 gm
(52.9 oz)
1220 gm
(43 oz)
6,800
4Si, IIISi
92291A
EP-N
2050 gm
(72.2 oz)
1710 gm
(60.2 oz)
10,250
IIIP, IIP+, IIP 92275A
EP-L
1050 gm
(37 oz)
820 gm
(28.9 oz)
3,500
IIID, III, IID, II 92295A
EP-S
1360 gm
(47.9 oz)
1130 gm
(39.8 oz)
4,000
2686D,
2686A
EP-C
1590 gm
(56 oz)
1320 gm
(46.5 oz)
3,000
92285A
122 – Toner cartridge information
EN
Potential Toner Cartridge Issues
Banding
When printing with a laser printer, the toner is applied across the page
in horizontal strips. The page is moved through the printer and toner is
continually applied. When printing text or black pages, a large amount
of toner is deposited on the page. As the amount of toner deposited on
the page decreases, slight speed variations become more apparent. As
the resolution (dots per inch) and the speed (pages per minute)
increase, a variation in pattern intensity may appear on the page as
lines or bands.
The bands are more visible in certain grayscale patterns. High speed
printers that are capable of printing high resolution grayscale patterns
are more likely to display the pattern variations. Changing the grayscale
pattern or reducing the resolution may significantly reduce the amount
of banding that occurs.
Character Voids
Small gaps or voids may appear in some of the characters when
printing on media other than standard photocopier paper. These
“character voids” occur because some print media does not accept the
transfer of toner as well as others.
To minimize the occurrence of character voids, avoid media with a
rough finish. Use media that is within the Hewlett-Packard paper
specifications listed in the user guide or the HP LaserJet Family Paper
Specification Guide. If the finish is too rough, the surface will consist of
large inconsistencies. If the finish is too smooth, toner will not adhere
well. Adjusting the print density may affect the severity of character
voids.
6
EN
Potential Toner Cartridge Issues – 123
Toner Cracking
When the paper is folded and the crease aligns with a line of text, it is
possible with certain types of paper for the text to break along the line,
giving the appearance of a white line through the text. Papers that do
not meet the smoothness (100-250 Sheffield, 100-500 Bendtsen)
and/or wax pick (>11 Dennison) are likely to exhibit this effect more than
others.
Toner in the HP LaserJet printers is composed of minute particles of
pigmented plastic material (styrene) and iron oxide. When the toner is
subjected to the fusing temperature, these individual iron-impregnated
plastic particles become part of a larger plastic image on the page.
When the printed page is subsequently folded, the plastic image must
also give, in some fashion, to accommodate the fold. If the print image
has been well-set into the paper, this resulting break in the plastic will
not be apparent. However, if the toner is unable to adequately penetrate
the paper fibers, or if, in the process of folding the paper, the paper
fibers behind the toner break away from the page itself, the result will be
a “white line” through the image. There are several ways to minimize
this effect:
•
Ensure that the paper being used meets ALL of the specifications
provided in the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper Specification
Guide, in particular the smoothness and wax pick.
•
A lighter density setting will ensure that the toner image will be
composed of less plastic material, thus minimizing the resulting
effect of trying to fold the toner image.
•
For the reasons listed earlier, a more narrow character-stroke width
might also help.
•
Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) paper may fix toner
cracking problems (see also the HP MICR User's Guide 5091-3857).
In xerographic (laser) printing, using paper that has a laid finish often
causes problems. The surface roughness of the paper is often
responsible for the problems.
Paper that is stiffer than xerographic paper also causes problems. Stiff
papers do not fold well. When stiff paper is folded and a toner image is
applied to the paper’s surface, the problems are even worse.
124 – Toner cartridge information
EN
Transfer of Toner Image
After printing a document on an HP LaserJet printer, folding it, and
sending it through the mail, you might observe that a portion of the print
image was transferred to opposing surfaces of the folded document.
The laser printing process uses a pigmented plastic powder (toner) to
form a print image that is first transferred to a sheet of paper (or other
print medium) and then melted (fused) onto the surface of the paper to
form a permanent image. Although paper is usually thought of as being
soft, it is actually quite abrasive. When the printed page is folded,
movement under pressure between a paper surface and the toner
image may cause the paper to abrade (scratch) the toner, causing a
transfer of the toner material onto the opposing surface of the paper.
This can be demonstrated by rubbing a print image against (or into) a
clean sheet of paper.
Some machinery, such as that used by the U.S. Postal Service to sort
mail, can apply the necessary pressure and agitation to cause this
phenomenon of toner image transfer.
To minimize this effect:
•
Reduce the amount (or height) of toner used to produce the print
image.
•
Use a paper that is less abrasive.
•
Ensure optimal fusing of the toner (print) image to the paper.
The amount of toner used to produce a print image is controlled by the
print density dial, slide, or control panel settings in the
HP LaserJet printers. The print density should be adjusted for a lighter
image to reduce the amount (height) of toner prone to abrasive transfer.
The HP LaserJet printers have been designed for optimum results with
xerographic (laser) bond papers, such as XEROX 4024 photocopy
paper. The properties of this type of paper (for example, surface
roughness, composition, moisture content) are such that the other
causes of potential toner transfer are minimized. Photocopy papers are
typically less abrasive than other types of paper (such as writing bond)
and are also formulated to ensure optimal fusing of the toner image.
Using other types of paper will generally yield less than optimal results
in laser printers. For help in selecting paper suitable for use in the
EN
Potential Toner Cartridge Issues – 125
6
HP LaserJet printers, refer to the HP LaserJet Printer Family Paper
Specification Guide. This guide can be ordered by calling HP Parts
Direct at 800-227-8164 in the U.S., or HP Distribution at 970-339-7009.
Because of the way that laser printing is accomplished, currently there
is no way to entirely eliminate the possibility of toner transfer. However,
using these techniques should yield more satisfactory results and will
often reduce the problem to imperceptible levels.
Gray Background on Envelopes
Poor print quality is normally the result of using envelopes that are of
the incorrect weight or finish. The paper used to construct the envelope
may be embossed; or may be too heavy, too rough, or too slick; or may
be made in such a way that it is incompatible with the high temperatures
encountered in toner fusing. The result is that the toner does not adhere
well to the surface. Also, on heavier envelopes, a gray background may
appear on the front (or print side) of the envelope. To reduce the gray
background, the print density may need to be set to a darker setting.
(On the LaserJet 5, “5” is the darkest setting and “1” is the lightest.)
126 – Toner cartridge information
EN
HP PLANET PARTNERS
The U. S., Canada, Europe, and Australia now have HP toner cartridge recycling
programs. The used toner cartridge should be placed in the wrapper and box that
held the new cartridge and sent back for recycling.
U.S.
A brochure explaining the recycling program in the U.S., part number
5091-1325EUS, can be ordered. The customer returns used toner cartridges
via UPS at no cost to the customer, using shipping labels included in the
brochure. The toner cartridges can be shipped one at a time or in volume
shipments. Some of the parts are recycled to make new cartridges. Other
parts are melted for re-use as raw materials. If the customer has any
questions, and to receive the free recycling brochure, refer them to the
Customer Information Center at (800) 752-0900.
AUSTRALIA Australian customers can send their toner cartridges to their local HP dealer.
If more than 30 cartridges a month are used, contact the local dealer for
instructions on how to have the cartridges picked up directly from the
customer's site. For further information, contact the dealer or local HP sales
office.
EUROPE
The recycling program in Europe currently includes these countries:
Germany, Switzerland, Austria, United Kingdom, the Netherlands, and
Sweden. If more than 30 cartridges a month are used, contact the local
dealer for instructions on how to have the cartridges picked up directly from
the customer's site. For further information, contact the dealer or local
HP sales office.
CANADA
Canada uses Federal Express for their recycling program. At least eight but
no more than 40 Toner Cartridges can be shipped at one time. Shipments of
fewer than eight cartridges are at the shipper's expense. Call Federal
Express at (800) GoFedEx; (800) 463-3339 to arrange for free pickup of the
bundled cartridges. Fill out a Federal Express Waybill or obtain a preprinted
one from your dealer.
In Alberta, B.C., Manitoba, NWT, Saskatchewan, and the Yukon,
send the bundles to:
Hewlett-Packard Toner Cartridge Recycling Program
6551 Westminister Hwy, Unit 160
Richmond, B.C. V7C 4V4
Acct. No.: 1246-1740-5
In the Atlantic provinces, Ontario, and Quebec
send the bundles to:
Hewlett-Packard Toner Cartridge Recycling Program
6600 Goreway Drive, Unit C
Mississauga, Ontario L4V 1S6
Acct. No.: 1246-1740-5
For more information, call: Canada wide: (800) 387-3867,
Dept. 129; Toronto: (800) 678-9430, Ext. 4981
EN
HP PLANET PARTNERS – 127
6
Note
Recycling information is now also included in the toner cartridge
package.
For additional information about HP corporate-wide, environmental
policies, practices, and awards, visit www.hp.com.
Refill Statement
Hewlett-Packard toner cartridges have been designed to maximize the
reliability of the HP LaserJet printer by including all of the components
that need frequent replacement or adjustment within the cartridge.
While we recognize that all parts of this critical printer mechanism will
not wear consistently, the HP toner cartridge has been designed to
optimize the exceptional print quality that is synonymous with the
HP LaserJet printer name. While Hewlett-Packard does not prohibit the
use of refilled toner cartridges during the warranty period or under a
maintenance contract, we also do not recommend their use for the
following reasons:
1 The HP LaserJet toner cartridge is not designed to be refilled or
remanufactured.
2 Hewlett-Packard has no control or process to ensure that a refilled
toner cartridge will function at the high level of reliability of a new
HP LaserJet toner cartridge. Hewlett-Packard also cannot predict
what the long-term effect on the printer's reliability could be from
using different toner formulations found in refilled cartridges.
Because the HP LaserJet printer has the highest reliability
reputation in the industry, we are concerned about any usage that
might affect this reputation.
3 Hewlett-Packard has no control over the actual print quality of a
refilled toner cartridge. The print quality of the HP LaserJet toner
cartridge directly influences the customer's perception of the
HP LaserJet printer itself. The high print quality of the HP LaserJet
printer is one of the primary reasons for the success of the product
and we are keenly interested in maintaining that image.
128 – Toner cartridge information
EN
The entire family of HP LaserJet printers is covered under a standard
one-year warranty from the date of purchase. Hewlett-Packard offers
optional maintenance contracts after the one-year warranty expires.
The use of refilled toner cartridges alone does not affect either the
warranty or any maintenance contract purchased from HP. However, if
an HP LaserJet printer failure or damage is found to be directly
attributed to the use of a refilled toner cartridge, the repair will not
be covered under the warranty or by the maintenance contract.
Rather, standard time and material charges will be applied to service
the printer for that particular failure or damage.
Hewlett-Packard is constantly striving to provide the highest quality
printer products possible. The HP LaserJet printer family was designed
for optimum output performance when the printing mechanism is
periodically replaced with a new HP toner cartridge. The HP toner
cartridge is designed specifically to enhance the output from the
HP LaserJet family of printers. We know that the highest quality print
results will be obtained when new HP toner cartridges are used with
HP LaserJet printers.
6
EN
Refill Statement – 129
130 – Toner cartridge information
EN
7
Printer options and
user replaceable parts
Overview
The following tables list the product, product number, product
description, and service part number for each printer. Parts can be
ordered through HP Parts Direct Ordering at (800) 227-8164 (U.S.
only). For additional product support, see the inside back cover.
EN
Overview – 131
Product
Memory
Language
Emulation
Boards
I/O
Envelope
Feeder
Duplex
Product
Number
Product Description
Service
Part Number
C2063A
C2963A
1 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2064A
2 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2064A
C2065A
4 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2065A
C2066A
8 MB SIMM 36 Bit (IIISi S/N 3200 & up)
C2066A
C3130A
1 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3130-60001
C3131A
2 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3131-69991
C3132A
4 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3132-60001
C3133A
8 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3133-60001
C3146A
16 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3146A
C3838A
1 MB JEIDA
C3838A
C3938A
2 MB JEIDA
C3938A
C3148A
4 MB JEIDA
C3148A
C3930A
2 MB FLASH SIMM
C39301A
C3931A
4 MB FLASH SIMM
C3931A
C3152A
PostScript Level 2 SIMM
C3152-69001*
C3169A
PostScript Level 2 SIMM
C3169A-69001*
C3918A
PostScript Level 2 SIMM
C3918-69001*
C3987A
PostScript Level 2 SIMM
C3987-96001*
J2550A
JetDirect Card for Ethernet/10Base-T
J2550-69001*
J2552A
JetDirect Card for 10Base-T/BNC/Ltalk
J2552-69001*
J2555
JetDirect Card for Token Ring
J2555-69002*
J2374C
JetDirect Network Software/HP-UX
N/A
J2375C
JetDirect Network Software/Sun Unix
N/A
J2382A/B
JetDirect EX for Ethernet/10Base-T/BNC J2382-69003*
J2591A
JetDirect EX for Ethernet/10Base-T/BNC J2591A
C3927A
Envelope Feeder
C3927-69001*
C3765A
Envelope Feeder
C3765-60501*
C3720A
Duplexer Upgrade
C3762A
Duplexer Upgrade
C3971A
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser C3971-69001*
Service
C3972A
Maintenance
and PM Kits
Cleaning
Tool
Disk Drive
C2965A
Sheet
C3763A
Feeder/
Stacker
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser C3972-69001*
C3762-60501
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser C3916-69001*
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V fuser C3916-69002*
5P Cleaning Brush
RF5-0593-000CN
Disk Drive
C2965-69001*
2000 Sheet Input (Tray 4)
C3763-69501*
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
132 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
6L
5Si
5L
6P
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
5P
•
•
•
•
•
5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 133
7
Product
Paper
Trays
Product or Part
Number
Product Description
R75-4000-000CN
Universal Paper Cassette
C3921A
Optional Lower Cassette w/Tray 3
C3924A
250 Sheet Universal Cassette
R77-0004-000CN
Tray 2
R77-0003-000CN
Tray 3
R98-4000-000CN
Universal Paper Cassette
C2950A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (2.0m)
C2951A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (3.0m)
I/O
C2946A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (3.0m)
Cables
C2947A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to C (10.0m)
Toner
C2933A
Serial 25-pin-F/9 pin-M
C2932A
Serial 9-pin-F/9 pin-M
92298A
HP Toner Cartridge
C3903A
HP Toner Cartridge
C3906A
HP Toner Cartridge
C3909A
HP Toner Cartridge
134 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
6L
5Si
5L
6P
5P
5
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 135
7
Product
Memory
Product
Number
33443A**
33443B**
33444A/B**
33445A/B**
33474A**
33475A**
33474B
33475B
C2024A
C2063A
C2064A
C2065A
C2066A
C3130A
C3131A
C3132A
C3133A
C3146A
33438P**
33439P**
33439Q**
33494B**
33484C**
33494D**
33494E**
Language C2013A
Emulation C2049A**
C2080A
C3159A
C3129A
33498A**
C2081A**
C2088A**
C2089A**
Product Description
Service
Part Number
1 MB Board (Revision A)
33443-69001*
1 MB Board (Revision B)
33443-69004*
2 MB Board
33444-69012*
4 MB Board
33445-69012*
1 MB Board (replaced by Revision B) 33474-69004*
2 MB Board (replaced by Revision B) 33475-69011*
1 MB Board
33474-69004*
2 MB Board
33475-69011*
1 MB Memory Upgrade
C2024-69001*
1 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2063A
2 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2064A
4 MB SIMM 36 Bit
C2065A
8 MB SIMM 36 Bit (IIISI S/N 3200 & C2066A
up)
1 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3130-60001
2 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3131-60001
4 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3132-60001
8 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3133-60001
16 MB SIMM 32 Bit
C3146A
PostScript cartridge
PostScript cartridge
33439-69001*
PostScript cartridge
33439-69001*
PS Level 1 ROM (IIISi S/N 3199 &
3349469002*
lower)
PS Level 1 SIMM (IIISi S/N 3200 &
33494-69004*
later)
PS Level 2 ROM (IIISi S/N 3199 &
33494-69007*
lower)
PS Level 2 SIMM (IIISi S/N 3200 &
33494-49008*
later)
PostScript Level 2 SIMM (4Si)
C2013-69001*
PostScript SIMM
C2049-67901
PostScript SIMM
C2080-69001*
PostScript SIMM
C3159-69001*
PostScript SIMM
C3129-69001*
Epson/IBM ProPrinter cartridge
33498-67901
Epson/IBM ProPrinter Emulated
n/a
SIMM
PCL 5 cartridge
C2088-60101
PostScript cartridge Plus
C2089-69001*
*Requires exchange. ** No longer available.
136 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
IIP IIID
IIP+
III
IID
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 137
7
Product Product
Number
33416B**
33417C*
26013A*
C2059A**
C2059B**
C2059C**
C2059D**
C2059E**
C2059F*
C2059H*
C2059T*
J2337A**
J2338A**
J2339A**
J23401**
J2341B**
92270N**
Boards C2071A
I/O
C2071B
C2071C
C2071D
C2071E
C2071F
C2071S
C2071T
J2371A**
J2372A**
Product Description
Service
Part Number
AppleTalk
33416-67901
AppleTalk
33417-67901
Status Readback card
26013-60001
Novell Ethernet MIO
28636-69001*
LAN Server/LAN Manager 802.3
28636-69101*
Novell Token Ring MIO
28637-69001*
LAN Server/LAN Manager Token Ring 28637-69201*
EtherTalk MIO
28636-69301*
LocalTalk MIO
J2341-69001*
MPE ESC? MIO card for the HP 3000 28644-60101
TCP/IP Ethernet
28636-69401*
Ethernet/802.3 (BNC/RJ-45) Novell
J2337-69001*
802.3 (BNC/RJ-45) LAN Srvr/LAN Mgr J2338-69001*
EtherTalk (BNC/RJ-45) Apple
J2339-69001*
TCP/IP Ethernet (BNC/RJ-45) Unix
J2340-69001*
LocalTalk (DIN-8)
J2341-69001*
RS-422-A Serial Adapter for LJ IIIP
N/A
Novell/Ethernet/802.3; BNC
27303-69001*
Novell/Ethernet/802.3; RJ45 port
27305-69001*
LAN Manager/Ethernet/802.3 BNC
27303-69101*
LAN Manager/Ethernet/802.3; RJ45
27305-69101*
Novell/Token Ring/802.5
27304-69001*
LAN Manager/Token Ring/ 802.5
27304-69201*
HP JetDirect Card for UNIX/10Base-T 27305-69401*
HP JetDirect Card for UNIX/ThinLan
27303-69401*
JetDirect Card for Ethernet/Base-T
J2371-69001*
JetDirect Card for Ethernet/10Base-T/ J2372-69001*
BNC
J2373A** JetDirect Card for Token Ring
J2373-69001*
J2550A
JetDirect Card for Ethernet/10Base-T
J2550-69001*
J2552A
JetDirect Card for 10Base-T/BNC/Ltalk J2552-69001*
J2555A
JetDirect Card for Token Ring
J2555-69002*
J2374C
JetDirect Network Software/HP-UX
N/A
J2375C
JetDirect Network Software/Sun Unix
N/A
J2382A/B JetDirect EX for Ethernet/10Base/T/
J2382-69003*
BNC
J2383B
JetDirect EX for Token Ring
J2383-69005*
.
*Requires exchange. **No longer available
138 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IIP+ IIID
IIP
•
•
•
III
IID
II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 139
Product
Envelope
Feeder
Product
Number
33457A**
33458A**
C2060A
C2082A**
C2082B
Duplex
C2061A
C3157A
Service
Maintenance
PM Kits
C2062A
C2087A
Power
Cord
Cleaning
Tool
Disk Drive
Sheet
Feeder/
Stacker
C3295A
C2921A
C2920A
C2810A
Product Description
Service
Part Number
50 envelope power feeder
33457-69001*
50 envelope power feeder
33458-69001*
100 envelope power feeder
C2060-69001*
75 envelope power feeder
C2082-69001*
75 envelope power feeder
C2082-69001*
Separation Pad for IID Env. Feeder RF1-2660-000CN
Paper Tray Lid for Envelope Feeder RG1-2802-000CN
Duplexer Upgrade
C2061-69001*
Duplexer Upgrade
Service Maintenance Kit with 115V 33449-69007*
fuser
Service Maintenance Kit with 240V 33449-69008*
fuser
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V C2001-69012*
fuser
Service Maintenance Kit with 240V C-2001-69013*
fuser
110V User Maintenance Kit
C2062-69001*
220V PM Kit
C2087-69001*
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V C2037-69010*
fuser
Service Maintenance Kit with 240V C2037-69011*
fuser
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V 33481-69007*
fuser
Service Maintenance Kit with 110V C1341-69010*
fuser
Service Maintenance Kit with 220V C1341-69011*
fuser
Right Angle 110V power cord
8120-6177
Velcro adhesive cleaning brush
holder
Cleaning brush
Cleaning brush
Disk Drive
1500 Sheet Feeder (Letter)
1500 Sheet Feeder (A4)
2000 Sheet Output Stacker
RB1-3389-000CN
RF5-0690-000CN
FB1-0733-000CN
C3295-69101
C2921-63001
C2920-63001
*Requires exchange. **No longer available.
140 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
IIP IIID
IIP+
III
IID
II
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 141
Product
Product or
Part #
33472A**
33472A/B**
92275B
92275C
92275D
92275E
92275F
92295B**
92295C**
92295D**
92295E**
92295F**
92297B
92297C
92297D
92297E
Paper
92297F
Trays
92291B
92291C
92291D
92291E
C2083A**
C2083B**
C2083D
C3160A
C3161A
C3760A
C2084A
C2084B**
C2085A
C2085B
C2085C
C2085D
R75-0010-000CN
R752010-000CN
Paper
92295R
Tray
92295S
Replace- 92295U
ment
92297R
Top Cover 92297S
Product Description
Optional Lower Cassette with letter tray 92275B
Optional Lower Cassette with A4 tray 92275D
Letter-size tray (8.5 x 11 in)
Legal-size tray (8.5 x 14 in)
A4-size tray (210 x 297 mm)
Executive-size tray (7.25 x 10.5 in)
Envelope tray (Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5)
Letter-size tray (8.5 x 11 in)
Legal-size tray (8.5 x 14 in)
A-4 size tray (210 x 297 mm)
Executive-size tray (7.25 x 10.5 in)
Envelope tray (Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5)
Letter-size tray (8.5 x 11 in)
Legal-size tray (8.5 x 14 in)
A-4 size tray (210 x 297 mm)
Executive-size tray (7.25 x 10.5 in)
Envelope tray (Com-10, Monarch, DL, C5)
Letter-size tray (8.5 x 11 in)
Legal-size tray (8.5 x 14 in)
A-4 size tray (210 x 297 mm)
Executive-size tray (7.25 x 10.5 in)
Optional Lower Cassette with C2084A tray
Optional Lower Cassette with C2084B tray
Optional Universal Lower Cassette
250 Sheet Cassette (Letter/A4)
250 Sheet Cassette (11x17/A3)
Optional Lower Cassette and Base (500 sheet)
Universal LC tray--all paper except Legal (500 sheet)
Universal LC tray—all paper except Legal (250-sht)
Universal PC tray—all paper except Legal (250-sht)
PC tray—letter only (250 sheet)
PC tray—A4 only (250 sheet)
250 Sheet Universal Cassette
Universal Paper Cassette
Universal Paper Cassette
For 92295 B/D/E
For 92295C
For use with 33457A envelope feeder
For 92297 B/D/E
For 92297C
*Requires Exchange. **No longer available.
142 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IIP+ IIID
IIP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IID
III
II
7
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EN
•
•
•
•
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 143
Product
Product or Product Description
Part
Number
I/O
92284A**
Parallel 25 pin-M/36 pin-M 2.13 m (7.0 ft)--most PCs
Cables
24542D**
C2950A
Parallel 25 pin-M/36 pin-M 3.0 m (9.9 ft)
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (2.0 m)
C2951A
Parallel IEEE-1284 compliant A to B (3.0 m)
C2913A
92219J**
Serial 25 pin-F/25 pin-M 1.2 m (3.9 ft)
Serial 9 pin-F/25 pin-M 5.0 m (16.7 ft)
24542G
92215S
Serial 9 pin-F/25 pin-M 3.0 m (9.9 ft) (for most PCs)
Serial, DIN8 2.0 m (6.6 ft) for Apple Macintosh
92215N
Phone NET or LocalTalk, Macintosh Network
Cable Kit
C2933A
C2932A
Serial 25 pin-F/9 pin-M
Serial 9 pin-F/9 pin-M
92275A
92285A
HP Toner Cartridge
HP Toner Cartridge (2686A, 2686D)
92295A
92291A
HP Toner Cartridge
HP Toner Cartridge
92298A
HP Toner Cartridge
92274A
C3900A
HP Toner Cartridge
HP Toner Cartridge
*Requires exchange. **No longer available.
144 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
4V
4P
4L
4+
4
4Si
IIISi IIIP
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IID
III
II
•
•
•
•
•
IIP+ IIID
IIP
•
•
•
•
•
EN
Printer options and user replaceable parts – 145
7
146 – Printer options and user replaceable parts
EN
8
Service parts
Overview
This chapter provides a list of the hardware found in HP LaserJet
printers. In the following tables, the shaded areas refer to the location of
the part in the printer, as shown in the corresponding illustration. The
tables also provide the part or product number and a description.
EN
Overview – 147
6 mm
8 mm 10 mm 12 mm
14 mm
Figure 8-1
16 mm
M3 M4
25 mm
Common Hardware
148 – Service parts
EN
Common Hardware
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
EN
XB1-2300-606CN
XB1-2300-507CN
XB1-2300-607CN
0515-1895
XB1-2301-407CN
XB1-2400-606CN
XB1-2400-809CN
0515-1912
XB1-1300-807CN
XA9-0434-000CN
XA9-0267-000CN
XA9-0253-000CN
XA9-0542-000CN
XA9-0540-000CN
XA9-0653-000CN
XA9-0389-000CN
XA9-0654-000CN
XA9-0192-000CN
XA9-0828-000CN
RBI-5552-000CN
RAI-7636-000CN
RBI-5489-000CN
XA9-0342-000CN
XB4-7300-609CN
XB4-7400-809CN
XB4-7401-009CN
XB4-7401-007CN
XB4-7401-209CN
XB6-7300-607CN
M3 x 5mm
M3 x 5mm
BH3 x 6mm
M3 x 8mm
M4 x 14mm
M4 x 6mm
M4 x 8mm
M4 x 8mm
M3 x 8 mm
M3 x 4mm
M3 x 6mm
M3 x 8mm
M3 x 10mm
M4 x 8mm
M3 x 6mm
M3 x 8mm
M3 x 10mm
M4 x 6mm
M3 x 6mm
M3
M3
M3 x 4mm
M3 x 8mm
M3 x 6mm
M4 x 8mm
M4 x 10mm
M4 x 10mm
M4 x 12mm
M3 x 6mm
Pan-head Phillips
Pan-head Phillips
Pan-head Phillips
Pan-head Phillips
Pan-head Phillips
Pan-head Phillips
Pan-head Phillips
Pan-head Phillips
Pan-head Phillips
Washer-head Phillips
Washer-head Phillips
Washer-head Phillips
Washer-head Phillips
Washer-head Phillips
Star-washer Phillips
Star-washer Phillips
Star-washer Phillips
Star-washer Phillips
Star-washer Phillips
Shoulder Screw Phillips
Shoulder Screw Phillips
Shoulder Screw Phillips
Shoulder Screw Phillips
Self-tapping Phillips
Self-tapping Phillips
Self-tapping Phillips
Self-tapping Phillips
Self-tapping Phillips
Self-tapping Phillips
Common Hardware – 149
8
Common Hardware continued
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
10
10
10
10
XA9-0253-000CN
XA9-0584-000CN
FA9-1449-000CN
XB1-2302-507CN
XB6-7300-809CN
XA9-0326-000CN
XB6-7300-807CN
XD2-1100-242CN
XD2-1100-322CN
XD2-1100-402CN
XD2-1100-502CN
XD2-1100-642CN
XG9-0260-000CN
XD2-2300-507CN
XA9-0375-000CN
XA9-0686-000CN
XA9-0724-000CN
XA9-0824-000CN
XA9-0813-000CN
150 – Service parts
M3 x 8mm
M3 x 12mm
M3 x 25mm
M3 x 8mm
M3 x 4mm
M3 x 8mm
2.4mm
3.2mm
4.0mm
5.0mm
6.4mm
5.0mm
3m x 25 mm
M3 x 6mm
M3 x 8 mm
M3 x 10mm
M3 x 8mm
Loose Flat/Lock Washer Phillips
Loose Flat/Lock Washer Phillips
Star-washer trus-head Phillips
Trus-head Phillips
Trus-head Phillips
Trus-head Phillips
Trus-head Phillips
Retaining Ring (e-type)
Retaining Ring (e-type)
Retaining Ring (e-type)
Retaining Ring (e-type)
Retaining Ring (e-type)
Retaining Ring (e-type)
Grip Ring (c-type)
Loose Flat/Star Washer Phillips
Hexhead Screw
Hexhead Screw
Hexhead Screw
Hexhead Screw with washer
EN
J 6L, 5L Parts
8
Figure 8-2
EN
LJ 6L, 5L Parts
Common Hardware – 151
LJ 6L, 5L Parts (See figure 8-2)
1
RB1-7177-000CN
Paper Feed Frame
2
RG5-1940-000CN 5L
RG5-3486-000CN 6L
Pick-up Roller Assembly
3
C3941-69001 5L
RG5-3506-000CN 6L
DC Controller PCA, exchange (110V)
3
C3941-69002 5L
RG5-3509-000CN 6L
DC Controller PCA, exchange (220V)
4
RF5-1534-000CN
Transfer Roller
4
RF5-1530-000CN 5L
RF5-2358-000CN 6L
Transfer Roller Guide
5
RG5-1942-000CN 5L
RG5-3485-000CN 6L
Feed Assembly
6
RG5-2012-000CN 5L
RG5-3474-000CN 6L
Delivery Assembly
7
RG5-2028-000CN
Control Panel PCA
8
RG5-2013-000CN 5L
RG5-3475-000CN 6L
Separation Guide Assembly
C3942-67902 5L
C3991-60001 6L
Formatter (new)
C3942-69002 5L
Formatter (exchange)
RG5-1964-000CN 5L
RG5-3459-000CN 6L
Heating Element (110V)
RG5-1965-000CN 5L
RG5-3463-000CN 6L
Heating Element (220V)
RH7-1282-000CN 5L
RH7-1320-000CN 6L
Main Motor
152 – Service parts
EN
LJ 6L, 5L Parts (continued) (See figure 8-2)
EN
RF5-1516-000CN 5L
RF5-2362-000CN 6L
Pressure Roller
RG5-2000-000CN 5L
RG5-3494-000CN 6L
Laser Scanner (new)
C3941-69003 5L
Laser Scanner (exchange)
RY7-5005-000CN
Gear Kit #1
RY7-5006-000CN 5L
RY7-5036-000CN 6L
Gear Kit #2
RY7-5007-000CN
Fuser Release Kit
RY7-5008-000CN
Separation Pad Kit
RY7-5009-000CN
Input Sensor Arm Kit
RG5-2029-000CN
Paper Pickup Cable
RG5-2031-000CN 5L
RG5-3662-000CN 6L
Door Sensor Cable
RG5-2032-000CN
Thermistor Cable
RG5-2033-000CN
Motor Cable
Rg5-2034-000CN 5L
RG5-3661-000CN 6L
Scanner Cable
RG5-2035-000CN 5L
Laser Cable
RG5-2036-000CN 5L
RG5-3499-000CN 6L
Control Panel Cable
RG5-2037-000CN 5L
Door Switch Cable
Common Hardware – 153
8
LJ 5Si Mopier Paper Handling
7
8
9
6
5
4
3
1
2
Figure 8-3
LJ 5Si Mopier Paper Handling Components
154 – Service parts
EN
LJ 5Si Mopier Paper Handling Components
1
C3763A
C3763-69501
2
RG5-2155-000CN
Tray 4 Assembly
3
C3764-69100
Multi-Bin Mailbox (exchange)
3
C3766-69515
Mailbox with Stapler (exchange)
4
RB1-6822-000CN
Duplex Unit Roller 1
5
C3762-60501
Duplex Unit
6
C3766-69500
Stapling Unit (exchange)
7
RB1-6491-000CN
Face Up Bin
8
C3764-60504
External Paper Handling PCA
(Multi-Bin Mailbox)
8
C40776-60500
External Paper Handling PCA
(Mailbox with Stapler)
9
EN
2000 Sheet Input Unit Assembly (exchange)
C3765-60501
Envelope Feeder
C3764-7000
C-Link Cable (178 cm)
C3763-7000
C-Link Cable (61 cm)
C3766-60512
C-Link Cable (97 cm)
C4077-60102
3-Way Power Adaptor
LJ 5Si Mopier Paper Handling – 155
8
LJ 5Si Parts
Figure 8-4
LJ 5Si Parts
156 – Service parts
EN
LJ 5Si Parts
1
RF5-1412-000CN
Transfer Roller
2
RH7-1260-000CN
Main Motor
3
RG5-1874-000CN
Face-Down Delivery Assembly
4
C3166-69012
Fusing Assembly 100-120V, exchange
4
C3166-69013
Fusing Assembly 220-240V, exchange
5
RG5-1834-000CN
Feeder Assembly
6
RG5-1833-000CN
Registration Assembly
7
RG5-1880-100CN
Tray 1 Pick Up Assembly
8
RB1-6730-000CN
Tray 1 Feed Roller
8
9
RF5-1455-000CN
Tray 1 Separation Pad
10
C3166-69011
Paper Input Unit (PIU), exchange
11
RG5-1847-000CN
Main Gear Assembly
12
RG5-1887-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
13
RG5-1884-000CN
Tray 1 PCA
EN
LJ 5Si Parts – 157
LJ 5Si Parts
Figure 8-5
LJ 5 Si Parts
158 – Service parts
EN
LJ5 Si Parts
1
C3166-69006
2
RH7-1266-000CN
Laser Scanner Assembly, exchange
Fan 1
3
RG5-1846-000CN
Switch/Sensor PCA
4
C3166-69005
High Voltage Power Supply, exchange
5
C3166-69010
DC Controller PCA, exchange
RG5-2433-000CN
Front Panel (Control Panel Display) not shown
8
EN
LJ 5Si Parts – 159
LJ 5Si Parts
Figure 8-6
LJ 5Si Parts
160 – Service parts
EN
LJ 5Si Parts
1
C3166-69007
Low Voltage Power Supply, 110-120, exchange
1
C3166-69008
Low Voltage Power Supply, Universal, exchange
2
C3168-69005
Formatter, exchange
3
RH7-1271-000CN
Fan 3
4
RH7-1266-000CN
Fan 2
5 & 6 RG5-1845-000CN
Paper-Size Sensing PCA, Trays 2 and 3
8
EN
LJ 5Si Parts – 161
LJ 6P, 5P Parts
1
2
3
Figure 8-7
4
5
6
LJ 6P, 5P Parts
162 – Service parts
EN
7
8
9
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Figure 8-8
EN
18
LJ 6P, 5P Parts (continued)
LJ 6P, 5P Parts – 163
LJ 6P, 5P Parts (See figures 8-7 and 8-8)
1
RG5-1799-000CN 5P
RG5-2786-000CN 6P
Motor Assembly
Motor Assembly
2
RF5-1290-000CN 5P
RF5-0596-000CN 6P
Transfer Roller Assembly
Transfer Roller Assembly
3
RG5-1786-000CN
Mirror Assembly
4
C3150-69005* 5P C398069005* 6P
Laser Scanner Assembly (exchange)
Laser Scanner Assembly (exchange)
5
R75-4000-000CN 5P R981001-000CN 6P
Complete Tray 2 Assembly
Complete Tray 2 Assembly
6
C3903A
Toner Cartridge
7
C3150-69003*
C3150-69004*
C3980-69003*
C3980-69004*
8
RG5-1801-000CN 5P
RG5-2776-000CN 6P
Fan Assembly
Fan Assembly
9
RG5-1698-000CN
RF5-1283-000CN
Top Oblique Roller Assembly
Static Charge Eliminator
10
RG5-1713-000CN 5P
RG5-2778-000CN 6P
Gear Train Assembly
Gear Train Assembly
11
RG5-1692-000CN
RG5-2796-000CN
RG5-1693-000CN
RG5-2790-000CN
Pickup Assembly (Tray 2)
Pickup Assembly (Tray 2)
Complete Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
Complete Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
12
RB1-6332-000CN
Complete Fuser Assembly (100-120V)(exchange)
Complete Fuser Assembly (220-240V)(exchange)
Complete Fuser Assembly (100-120V)(exchange)
Complete Fuser Assembly (220-240V)(exchange)
5P
5P
6P
6P
5P
6P
5P
6P
164 – Service parts
Pickup Roller (Tray 2)
EN
LJ 6P, 5P Parts (continued)
(See figures 8-7 and 8-8)
13
RB1-2205-000CN
Tray 1 Roller
14
C3151-69001* 5P
C3981-69001* 6P
Formatter PCA (exchange)
Formatter PCA (exchange)
15
1252-5460
Formatter to Controller PCA Connector
16
RG5-1719-000Cn
High-voltage Connector Assembly
17
RH7-1258-000CN 5P
RH7-5160-000C 6P
Tray 1 Solenoid (SL2)
Tray 1 Solenoid (SL2)
18
C3150-69001*
C3150-69002*
C3980-69001*
C3980-69002*
DC Controller PCA (110-120V) (exchange)
DC Controller PCA (220-240V) (exchange)
DC Controller PCA (110-120V) (exchange)
DC Controller PCA (220-240V) (exchange)
5P
5P
6P
6P
RG5-1702-000CN
RG5-1703-000CN
RG5-2802-000CN
RG5-2803-000CN
RG5-1801-000CN
RG5-2776-000CN
RG5-0593-000CN
RB1-5939-000CN
5062-4661
5P
5P
6P
6P
5P
6P
Hot Roller 120V
Hot Roller 220V
Hot Roller 120V
Hot Roller 220V
Fan
Fan
Brush, Mirror
Sensor Arm, Tray 1
Infrared Communication Test Tool
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
**Cover assembly does not include items 3, 5, and 6.
EN
LJ 6P, 5P Parts – 165
8
LJ 5 Parts
Figure 8-9
LJ5 Parts
166 – Service parts
EN
LJ 5 Parts
1
RG5-0475-060CN
2
RG5-2189-000CN
Paper Output Sensor Assembly
Paper Output Assembly
3
C2037-69004*
DC Controller PCA
4
C2037-69008*
Laser Scanner Assembly
5
C3919-69001*
Formatter PCA
RB1-2205-000CN
Tray 1 Pickup Roller
RB1-7911-000CN
Tray 2 Pickup Roller
RB1-7983-000CN
Tray 3 Pickup Roller
RB1-2133-000CN
RF5-0343-000CN
RF5-0349-000CN
Paper Out Sensor Flag
Tray 1 Separation Pad
Transfer Roller
8
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ 5 Parts – 167
LJ 5 Parts, continued
Figure 8-10 LJ5 Parts
168 – Service parts
EN
LJ5 Parts (See figure 8-10)
1
C2037-69001*
C2037-69002*
110V Fusing Assembly
240V Fusing Assembly
2
RH7-1301-000CN
Main Motor
3
C2037-69006*
C2037-69007*
110V Power Supply
240V Power Supply
4
C3916-69005*
Paper Feed Assembly
5
RG5-2238-000CN
Display Assembly (without overlay)
6
RG5-0469-020CN
Transfer Guide Assembly
7
RG5-0512-070CN
Paper Control PCA
8
RG5-0514-000CN
Sensor PCA
9
C2037-69009*
High Voltage PCA
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ 5 Parts, continued – 169
8
LJ 5 Duplexer Parts
Figure 8-11 LJ5 Duplexer (cross-section)
170 – Service parts
EN
LJ5 Duplexer Parts
1
RH7-1235-000CN
Switchback Fan
2
RF1-3813-000CN
Switchback Stepper Motor (M2)
3
RG1-3529-000CN
Switchback Sensor Cable
4
RF1-3808-000CN
Switchback Solenoid (SL1)
5
RF1-3814-000CN
Rear Holding Tray Motor (M3)
6
RG1-3503-000CN
Power Supply Assembly
7
RG1-3582-000CN
Duplex Control PCA
8
RA2-2072-000CN
Timing Belt
9
RA2-2076-000CN
Sensor Arm
10
WG8-5210-000CN
Photosensor (PS2)
11
RG1-3530-000CN
Paper Pickup Cable
12
RF1-3815-000CN
Front Holding Tray Motor (M1)
EN
8
LJ 5 Duplexer Parts – 171
LJ 4V, 4MV Parts
Figure 8-12 LJ 4V/4MV Major Assemblies
172 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4V/4MV Parts
1
C3143-69001*
Exchange Formatter PCA
2
RG5-0198-000CN
Face Down Delivery Assembly
3
RG5-1545-000CN
Guide, Delivery Unit
4
RG5-1398-000CN
Main Drive Assembly
5
C3141-69003*
DC Controller PCA Assembly
6
RG5-2044-000CN
HV Power Supply Assembly
7
RG5-1552-000CN
Fuser
8
C3141-69002*
Fusing Assembly 100/115V
9
C3141-69001*
Fusing Assembly 220/240V
EN
RG5-1391-000CN
Pickup Roller Assembly (not shown)
RF5-0302-000CN
Separation Pad
RG5-1566-000CN
Drum Drive Assembly
RS5-2123-000CN
Spring, Compression
RH7-1126-000CN
Fan (FM1)
RH7-5094-000CN
Registration Clutch
RG5-2041-000CN
Laser/Scanner Assembly
C3141-69005*
Power Supply Assembly 100/115V
C3141-69006*
Power Supply Assembly 220/240V
C3141-69007*
Paper Guide Plate Assembly
RH7-1199-000CN
Motor, dc 17.5W
WD1-0224-000CN
Fuse,125V, 6.3A
VD7-0643-151CN
Fuse, 250V, 3.15A
RH7-1214-000CN
Fan (FM2)
RH7-1317-000CN
Fan (FM3)
RG5-1539-000CN
Digital Display Panel 100/115V
RG5-1540-000CN
Digital Display Panel 220/240V
RB1-6389-000CN
Static Charge Eliminator
RG5-1410-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
RG5-1555-060CN
Guide
LJ 4V, 4MV Parts – 173
8
RG5-1442-000CN
Cable, Beam Detect
RG5-1446-000CN
Option Cable Assembly, 500 Sheet LC
RB5-1447-000CN
Clutch Cable
RH-6-0098-000CN
Plastic Bezel (does not include digital display)
RG-5-0239-000CN
DC Cable Assembly
RG5-1485-000CN
Display Panel Cable Assembly
LJ 4P, 4L Parts
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 8-13 LJ 4P, 4L Parts
174 – Service parts
EN
7
8
9
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Figure 8-14 LJ 4P, 4L Parts (continued)
EN
LJ 4P, 4L Parts – 175
LJ 4P, 4L Parts (See figures 8-13 and 8-14)
1
RG5-0765-000CN
Motor Main Assembly
2
RF5-0596-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
3
RG5-0667-000CN 4L
RG5-0802-000CN 4P
Beam-to-Drum Mirror
Beam-to-Drum Mirror
4
C2003-69005* 4L
C2005-69005* 4P
Laser/Scanner Assembly
Laser/Scanner Assembly
5
R75-0010-000CN 4L
R75-2010-000CN 4P
Universal Paper Cassette
Universal Paper Cassette
6
92274A
Toner Cartridge
7
C2003-69001*
C2003-69002*
Fuser Assembly 100-120V
Fuser Assembly 220-240V
8
RG5-0703-000CN 4L
RG5-0804-000CN 4P
Fan Assembly
Fan Assembly
9
RG5-0711-020CN
Top Oblique Roller Assembly
10
RG5-0684-000CN 4L
RG5-0791-000CN 4P
Drive Train Plate Assembly
Drive Train Plate Assembly
11
RG5-0668-000CN 4L
RG5-0796-000CN 4P
Pickup Assembly
Pickup Assembly
12
RB1-3029-000CN 4L
RB1-3368-000CN 4P
Pickup Feed D-Roller
Pickup Feed D-Roller
13
RG5-0669-000CN
Front Oblique Roller Assembly
14
C2004-69001* 4L
C2016-69001* 4ML
C2006-69001* 4P
C2041-69001* 4MP
Formatter C2003A
Formatter C2015
Formatter C2005A
Formatter C2040A
15
1252-5278 4L
1252-5460 4P
DC Controller Connector
DC Controller Connector
16
RG5-0701-000CN
High Voltage Connector Assembly
17
RH7-5092-000CN
Paper Feed Solenoid
18
C2003-69003*
C2003-69004*
C2005-69003*
C2005-69004*
100-120V DC Controller PCA
220-240V DC Controller PCA
120V DC Controller PCA
220V DC Controller PCA
4L
4L
4P
4P
RG5-0678-000CN
RG5-0679-000CN
RY5-0011-000CN
RF5-0690-000CN
RF5-0601-000CN
RB1-3389-000CN
RS5-8209-000CN
RF5-0601-000CN
Hot Roller 120V
Hot Roller 220V
Filter
Brush
Input Paper Sensor Arm
Velcro Strip
EP Label
Input Sensor Arm
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
**Cover assembly does not include items C, E, and F
176 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4 Plus, 4 Parts
8
Figure 8-15 LJ4+, 4 Parts
LJ 4+, 4 Parts
1
RG5-0475-060CN
Paper Output Sensor Assembly
2
RG5-0456-000CN 4
Paper Output Assembly
2
RG5-0886-070CN 4+
Paper Output Assembly
3
C2001-69002* 4
DC Controller PCA
3
C2037-69004* 4+
DC Controller PCA
4
C2001-69006* 4
Laser/Scanner Assembly
4
C2037-69008* 4+
Laser/Scanner Assembly
5
C2002-69001* 4
Formatter PCA
5
EN
C2038-69004* 4+
Formatter PCA
RBI-2127-000CN 4, 4+
MC Pickup Roller
LJ 4 Plus, 4 Parts – 177
RBI-2126-000CN 4
PC Pickup Roller
RBI-3477-000CN 4+
PC Pickup Roller
RBI-2632-000CN 4
RBI-2650-000CN 4+
LC Pickup Roller
LC Pickup Roller
RB1-2133-000CN
RF5-0343-000CN
RF5-0349-000CN
Paper Out Sensor Flag
MP Tray Separation Pad
Transfer Roller
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
178 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4 Plus, 4 Parts
8
Figure 8-16 LJ 4+, 4 Parts
EN
LJ 4 Plus, 4 Parts – 179
LJ 4+, 4 Parts (see Figure 8-16)
1
C2001-69003* 4
C2001-69004* 4
C2037-69001* 4+
C2037-69002* 4+
110V Fusing Assembly
240V Fusing Assembly
110V Fusing Assembly
240V Fusing Assembly
2
2
RH7-1151-000CN 4
RH7-1301-000CN 4+
Main Motor
Main Motor
3
C2001-69007*
C2001-69008*
C2037-69006*
C2037-69007*
110V Power Supply
240V Power Supply
110V Power Supply
240V Power Supply
1
3
4
4
4+
4+
4
4
C2001-69005*
C2037-69003* 4+
Paper Feed Assembly
Paper Feed Assembly
5
5
RG5-0478-000CN 4
C2001-69010* 4
C2037-69005* 4+
RG5-1077-000CN* 4+
Display Assembly (without overlay)
Display Assembly (English)
Display Assembly (without overlay)
Display Assembly (English)
6
RG5-0469-020CN
Transfer Guide Assembly
7
RG5-0512-070CN
Paper Control PCA
8
RG5-0514-000CN
Sensor PCA
9
9
C2001-69009* 4
C2037-69009* 4+
High Voltage PCA
High Voltage PCA
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
180 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4Plus Duplexer Parts
8
Figure 8-17 LJ 4Plus Duplexer (cross-section)
1
RH7-1235-000CN
Switchback Fan
2
RF1-3801-000CN
Switchback Stepper Motor (M2)
3
RG1-3529-000CN
Switchback Sensor Cable
4
RF1-3808-000CN
Switchback Solenoid (SL1)
5
RF1-3804-000CN
Rear Holding Tray Motor (M3)
6
RG1-3503-000CN
Power Supply Assembly
7
RG1-3501-000CN
Duplex Control PCA
8
RA2-2072-000CN
Timing Belt
9
RA2-2076-000CN
Sensor Arm
10
WG8-5210-000CN
Photosensor (PS2)
11
RG1-3530-000CN
Paper Pickup Cable
12
RF1-3807-000CN
Front Holding Tray Motor (M1)
EN
LJ 4Plus Duplexer Parts – 181
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts
Figure 8-18 LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts
182 – Service parts
EN
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts
1
1
RG5-0076-200CN IIISi
C2009-69004* 4Si
HV Power Supply
HV Power Supply
2
C2009-69008*
Job Offset Assembly
3
3
RG5-0088-000CN IIISi
RG5-0162-000CN 4Si
Control Panel Assembly
Control Panel Assembly
4
RG5-0067-180CN
Delivery Cover Assembly
5
RG5-0094-000CN
6
RG5-0095-120CN
RG5-0096-000CN
RG5-0166-060CN
RG5-0167-060CN
Sensor PCA
IIISi
IIISi
4Si
4Si
115V AC Power Supply
240V AC Power Supply
115V AC Power Supply
240V AC Power Supply
7
RG5-0102-000CN
Main Switch Assembly
8
RG5-0085-060CN IIISi
RG5-0086-060CN IIISi
C2009-69005** 4Si
C2009-69006** 4Si
115V DC Power Supply
240V DC Power Supply
115V DC Power Supply
240V DC Power Supply
9
28644-69002*
MIO Interface Card
10
10
10
33491-69143* IIISi
33491-69160* IIISi
C2009-69001* 4Si
Formatter PCA S/N < 3199
Formatter PCA S/N > 3200
Formatter PCA
11
33491-69011* IIISi
C2009-69002* 4Si
DC Controller PCA
DC Controller PCA
12
12
RG5-0021-000CN IIISi
C2009-69003*
Laser Scanner Assembly
Laser Scanner Assembly
6
8
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts – 183
8
Figure 8-19 LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts
1
RG5-0038-000CN
Left Main Block Assembly
2
2
33491-69012*
33491-69013*
115V Fusing Assembly
240V Fusing Assembly
3
RG5-0039-070CN
Right Main Block Assembly
4
RG5-0161-090CN
Registration Assembly
5
C2009-69007*
Paper Input Assembly
6
RG5-0056-000CN
Paper Refeed Assembly
7
RG5-0040-060CN
Main Motor Drive Assembly
8
RG5-0042-000CN
Main Motor PCA
RF5-0041-000CN
Pickup/Separation Roller
RG5-0034-100CN
Paper Input PCA
RH7-1104-000CN
Fan Motor 1 (Back)
RH7-1105-000CN
Fan Motor 2 (Right Front), 3Si
RH7-1106-000CN
Fan Motor 3 (Right Center), 3Si
RH7-1162-000CN
Fan Motor 2 (Right Front), 4Si
RH7-1163-000CN
Fan Motor 3 (Right Center), 4Si
RG5-0141-000CN
Transfer Roller Assembly
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
184 – Service parts
EN
8
Figure 8-20 LJ 4Si, IIISi Sensor Locations
LJ 4Si, IIISi Sensor Locations
1
PS7
Face-Down Output Sensor
2
PS151
Fusing Assembly Exit Sensor
3
PS3
Registration Assembly Sensor
4
PS2
Paper Refeed Sensor
5
PS5
Duplex Assembly Sensor
6
PS4
Switchback Assembly Sensor
EN
LJ 4Si, IIISi Parts – 185
LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts
Figure 8-21 LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts
LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts
1
1
1
33471-67905 IIP
33486-67901 IIIP
C2092-67901 IIP+
Interface Assembly Dual I/O
Interface Assembly Dual I/O
Interface Assembly Single I/O (Parallel only)
2
2
RG1-1771-000CN
RG1-1769-020CN
Scanner Motor Assembly
Laser PCA
3
RG9-0696-000CN
High Voltage Power Supply
4
RA1-7674-000CN
Lower Cassette Pickup Roller (3 required)
5
33472-69001*
Lower Cassette Assembly
6
RA1-7654-000CN
Lower Cassette Feed Roller
7
33471-69002*
DC Controller PCA
8
8
8
33471-69001* IIP
33481-69001* IIIP
C2008-69001* IIP+
Formatter PCA
Formatter PCA
Formatter PCA
33471-69017
120V DC Power Supply
RG1-1910-020CN
240V DC Power Supply
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
186 – Service parts
EN
Figure 8-22 LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts
8
LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts
1
RG1-1604-000CN
Density PCA
2
2
33471-69018*
33471-69019*
115V Fuser Assembly
240V Fuser Assembly
3
RA1-7627-000CN
Transfer Roller
4
RG1-1792-000CN
MP Pickup Roller Assembly
5
RG1-1912-080CN
Separation Pad
6
RF1-2394-000CN
Input Feed Roller
RH7-1121-000CN
RH6-0010-000CN
RG1-1777-000CN
RG1-1806-070CN
Fan Cooling
Control Panel Assembly
EP Drum Drive Gear Assembly
MP Tray Assembly
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ IIIP, IIP+, IIP Parts – 187
Figure 8-23 LJIIP, IIP+, IIP Sensor Locations
LJIIP, IIP+, IIIP Sensor Locations
1
WG8-0291-000CN
PS3 Photosensor
(Senses paper in fuser)
2
WG8-0323-000CN
PS4 Photosensor
(Senses door open)
3
WG8-0291-000CN
PS1 Photosensor
(Senses paper at input feed rollers)
4
WG8-0323-000CN
PS2 Photosensor
(Senses paper in MP tray)
5
WG8-0291-000CN
PS5 Photosensor
(Senses door open and toner cartridge
installed)
WG8-0291-000CN
PS6 Photosensor
(Senses paper in optional lower
cassette)
188 – Service parts
EN
LJ IIID, III, IID, II Parts
8
Figure 8-24 LJ IIID, III, IID, II Parts
LJ IIID, III, II Parts
1
1
1
1
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
RG9-0205-000CN II
RG9-0206-000CN II
33459-69001* IID, III, IIID
RG9-0750-000CN IID, III, IIID
RH7-1122-000CN
RF1-2130-000CN**
RG1-1753-000CN II
33449-69005* II III
33440-69010* II III
RG1-1310-000CN IID
RG1-1312-000CN IID
RG1-2007-000CN IIID
RG1-2009-000CN IIID
RG1-0718-000CN II, III, IID
RG1-2549-000CN IIID
RG1-0932-120CN II, III
RG1-1326-000CN IID, IIID
7 33449-69006*
8 RG1-0936-110CN
9 RG1-0933-060CN
10 33440-69003*
10 33440-69009*
115V AC Power Module
240V AC Power Module
115V AC Power Module
240V AC Power Module
Fan Upper Cooling
Ozone Filter (User replaceable)
Ozone Filter (Upgrades to user replaceable)
115V DC Power Supply
240V DC Power Supply
115V DC Power Supply
240V DC Power Supply
115V DC Power Supply
240V DC Power Supply
Paper Control PCA
Paper Control PCA
Registration Assembly (with separation pad)
Registration Assembly (with separation pad)
Laser Scanner Assembly
High-Voltage Power Supply Assembly
Transfer Corona Assembly
115V Fuser Assembly
240V Fuser Assembly
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange **Order 92295Q for package of 2 each.
EN
LJ IIID, III, IID, II Parts – 189
Figure 8-25 LJ IIID, III, II Parts
190 – Service parts
EN
LJ IIID, III, II Parts
1
SW205 Switch Activation Lever
2
RH7-1056-000CN
Fan, Lower Cooling
3
Information Only
3
3
3
3
33440-69002* II
33449-69004* III
RG1-1278-000CN IID
RG1-1970-070CN IIID
Many failures attributed to DC Controller PCAs
are actually cable/connector problems. Always
reseat cables before replacing PCA. Replace
cable(s) to solve intermittent problems.
DC Controller PCA
DC Controller PCA (see “1” above)
DC Controller PCA
DC Controller PCA (see “1” above)
4
4
4
33440-69001* II
33497-69001* III, IIID
33446-69001* IID
Formatter PCA
Formatter PCA
Formatter PCA
5
RH7-1048-000CN
Motor, Main Drive
RG1-0931-060CN II, III
RG1-0945-000CN
RG1-0959-000CN II
RG1-1974-000CN III
RF1-1145-020CN II, III
RA1-8278-030CN III
RG1-0966-030CN
RG1-0967-000CN
33449-69007*
33449-69008*
33440-67905 II, III
33447-67906 IID, IIID
Feed Roller Assembly (Paper pickup)
Delivery Assembly (with Output rollers)
Control Panel
Control Panel
Separation Pad
Top Cover Release Button
Fuser Cleaning Pad
Delivery Coupler Assembly
Engine Rebuild Kit (115V)
Engine Rebuild Kit (240V)
Test Tool (see chapter 4)
Test Tool (see chapter 4)
RG1-0905-000CN
RG1-0906-000CN
RG1-0907-000CN
RG1-0908-000CN
RG1-0912-000CN
RH2-5108-000CN
RG1-2307-000CN III
SG4-6271-000CN II
AC Power Module/DC Power Supply Cable
High-Voltage Supply/DC Control Cable
Fusing/DC Control Cable
Laser Scanning/DC Control Cable
AC Power Module/DC Control Cable
Fiber Optic Cable
Control Panel Cable Assembly
Control Panel Cable Assembly
This switch lever may need to be removed when
the DC Controller PCA is replaced.
*Rebuilt part, requires exchange
EN
LJ IIID, III, IID, II Parts – 191
8
LJ IIID, IID Parts
Figure 8-26 LJ IIID, IID Parts
192 – Service parts
EN
LJ IIID, IID Parts
1
1
RG1-1350-000CN IID
RG1-1992-000CN IIID
Switchback Assembly
Switchback Assembly
2
RG1-1349-000CN
Switchback Drive Control Assembly
3
RG1-1347-000CN
Lower Feed Drive Motor Assembly
4
4
RG1-1370-000CN IID
RG1-2067-000CN IIID
Laser Scanner Cable
Laser Scanner Cable
5
RG1-2500-000CN
Lower Pickup Roller Assembly
6
RG1-1345-060CN
Duplex Drive Roller Assembly
7
RG1-2498-000CN
Lower Duplex Guide Assembly
8
RG1-1344-000CN
RG1-0931-060CN
RG1-2499-000CN
RH6-0009-000CN
RG1-1989-000CN
SG5-4022-000CN
RF1-2548-000CN
RF1-1145-020CN
RG1-2498-000CN
RG1-1344-000CN
RG1-1356-000CN
EN
Upper Duplex Guide Assembly
IID
IIID
IID
IIID
Upper Pickup Roller
Upper Pickup Roller
Control Panel
Control Panel
Control Panel Cable Assembly
Lower Separation Pad
Upper Separation Pad
Lower Duplex Guide Assembly
Upper Duplex Guide Assembly
Duplex Align/Drive Roller
LJ IIID, IID Parts – 193
8
LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts
Figure 8-27 LJ 2686D, 2868A Parts
LJ 2686D, 2868A Parts
1
1
02686-69011*
02686-69111*
115V Fusing Assembly
220V Fusing Assembly
2
2
02686-69008*
2686A
RG1-0560-000CN 2686D
DC Controller PCA
DC Controller PCA
3
3
RG1-0468-060CN
RG1-0624-000CN
115V DC Power Supply
240V DC Power Supply
4
02686-69010*
Scanning Unit
5
RG0-0009-000CN
Laser Unit
02686-69001* 2686A 115V
02686-69004* 2686A 240V
02686-69005* 2686D
Formatter PCA (Replaces SG4-6014-000CN)
Formatter PCA (Replaces SG4-6019-000CN)
Formatter PCA (Replaces SG4-6022-000CN in
2686A, Opt. 200, 210, 300, and 2686D)
Formatter PCA (Replaces SG4-6025-000CN in
2686A and D with 2 MB option)
02686-69006
2686D
194 – Service parts
EN
8
Figure 8-28 LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts
LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts
1
RG9-0102-000CN
2
RG1-0649-000CN
High Voltage Power Supply
3
3
3
RG1-0209-030CN
RG1-0210-040CN
RG1-0204-080CN
AC Controller PCA (115V)
AC Controller PCA (240V)
AC Driver Assembly (115V)
4
RG1-0208-030CN
Fuser Safety PCA
5
FG1-2354-000CN
Manual Feed Assembly
EN
Main Motor Assembly
LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts – 195
Figure 8-29 LJ 2686D, 2686A Parts
LJ2686D, 2686A Parts
1
RG1-1039-000CN
2
RG1-0191-020CN
Transfer Corona Assembly
3
RG1-0195-000CN
Transfer Guide Assembly
4
Feed Guide Assembly
RG1-0215-000CN
Registration Shutter Assembly
RG1-0328-020CN
FF1-3872-000CN
RA1-0666-000CN 2686A
RA1-2621-000CN 2686D
RA1-2622-000CN 2686D
FS1-2651-000CN
6040-0018
FA2-5664-020CN
RH7-1006-000CN
RH7-1007-000CN
RH7-4007-000CN
RH7-4009-000CN
FG1-2377-020CN
Separation Belt
Fuse, Resistor 47Ω 1/4 Watt
Pick-Up Roller (3 required)
Pick-Up Roller (6 required)
Pick-Up Roller small (2 required)
Pick-Up Clutch Spring
Clutch Grease (3/8-oz Tube)
Ozone Filter
Fan (115V)
Fan (240V)
Fuser Bulb (110V)
Fuser Bulb (220V)
Fuser Cleaning Pad
196 – Service parts
EN
9
Summary of
service notes and
technical tips
Overview
This chapter addresses some of the more common service issues.
The Troubleshooting Process
The troubleshooting process, illustrated in figures 9-1 and 9-2, is a
systematic approach to resolving printer problems. In searching for the
causes for printer malfunctions and errors, the troubleshooting process
addresses major problems first and then identifies secondary problems.
In figures 9-1 and 9-2, each heading depicts a major troubleshooting
step. A YES answer to the questions allows you to proceed to the next
major step. A NO answer indicates that additional testing is needed.
Proceed to the referenced location and follow the instructions for that
area. After completing the additional testing, proceed to the next major
step.
EN
Overview – 197
1
3
2
Power On
Is the printer
on and
displaying a
readable
message?
NO
Display
Configuration
Does the display
Will it print
YES indicate any of YES
configuration
the following?
pages?
YES
READY
OFFLINE
POWER SAVE
NO
NO
A.
A.
Perform Power
On checks.
Show Error Log
to display
information on
Current Error
and correct it.
A.
Show Error
log to display
information on
Current Error
and correct it.
B.
After control
panel display
becomes
functional, go
to Step 2.
B.
After correcting
all messages
and errors,
go to Step 3.
B.
Verify information on PCL
Configuration
page.
C.
After verifying
configuration
pages, go to
Step 4.
Figure 9-1
Troubleshooting process for HP LaserJet printers
198 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
4 Aa
Image Quality
Does the print
quality meet
the customer’s
requirements?
A.
Compare the
configuration
pages to
samples.
5
6
Error Log
Have you
evaluated the
error log?
A.
Print and
evaluate the
error log.
7
Communication
Can the customer print
successfully
from their
system?
Verification
Does the
printer pass
the verification
tests?
A.
A.
Run a print job
from the
customer host
system.
Run a paper
path test to
verify operation.
B.
B.
After successful
completion of
the print job,
go to Step 7.
Run a print job
from the
customer host
system.
9
B.
After meeting
print quality
requirements,
go to Step 5.
B.
After evaluating
the error log,
go to Step 6.
END
Figure 9-2
EN
Troubleshooting process for HP LaserJet printers
Overview – 199
Service Topic Index
Obtain service notes from HPNN or HP FIRST. See the chapter on
services and support for additional information.
The tables that follow provide illustrations of printer models, a
description of common problems, and pertinent reference information.
Printer Model
Problem Description
Service Note Technical Tip
(number)
(page number)
LaserJet 6L/5L
Replacement formatter and
date code
N/A
Accordion jams in fuser
Countermeasure for
clearing fuser jams
C3941A-01
207
C3941A-02A 208
Print quality defect:
smeared print
C3166A-01
C3167A-01
213
Noisy fan
C3166A-02
C3167A-02
214
2000-sheet input unit jams
C3166A-03
C3167A-03
215
13.x paper jams are due to
bad clutch connector
Firmware revision corrects
79 Errors
Revised DC controller
improves fusing
MIO and NVRAM reset
problems
C3166A-04
C3167A-04
C3166A-05
C3167A-05
C3166A-06A
C3167A-06A
C3166A-07
C3167A-07
216
LaserJet 5Si
and 5Si MX
200 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
206
217
220
221
EN
Printer Model
Problem Description
Service Note Technical Tip
(number)
(page number)
LaserJet 5Si
and 5Si MX
(continued)
Toner dumping and/or 79
service (04CC)
C3166A-08A 223
Improved MP tray
C3166A-09
C3167A-09
C3166A-10
C3167A-10
C3166A-11
C3167A-11
C3166A-12
C3167A-12
C3166A-13
C3167A-13
224
C3166A-14
C3167A-14
232
Improved 220V fuser
C3166A-15
reduces toner contamination C3167A-15
234
Improved MP tray
C3166A-16
C3167A-16
235
Vendor revision “B” causes
79 service errors
C3166A-17
C3167A-17
237
C3166A-18
Entire Image Manager
software
C3167A-18
LJ 5 Introduction: service
C3916A-01
note is available through HP
FIRST and other sources
238
Printer firmware rolls to
version 9.1
Set default printer font from
front panel
High-capacity input (2,000sheet input tray)
Microswitch assembly in the
2,000-sheet input tray
Executive-size paper tray
LaserJet 5
EN
226
228
229
231
N/A
Service Topic Index – 201
9
Printer Model
Problem Description
LaserJet 4V,
4MV
Paper jams with three-hole
punched paper
Printer hangs and displays
“79 (0523) Service Error”
Printer will not access
service model
PostScript SIMM
replacement part
Repeating 94MM print defect
57 Service Error (not caused
by main motor)
Thumb screw and back plate
(part numbers)
55 Service Error
troubleshooting hints
MP tray jams
Preventing damage to toner
cartridge shutter arm
Multipurpose tray pickup
roller does not stop
Leading edge smudge
Formatter fan noise
Paper jams occur in output
area when large media is
used
Input jamming when feeding
from the 500-sheet feeder
Service Note Technical Tip
(number)
(page number)
C3141A-01
241
C3141A-02
242
C3141A-03
243
C3141A-04
N/A
C3141A-05
C3141A-06
243
244
C3141A-07
244
C3141A-08
245
C3141A-10
N/A
245
246
C3141A-12 &
C3142A-12
C3142A-13
C3141-14
C3142A-15
246
247
248
250
C3760A-02C 250
202 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Printer Model Problem Description
LaserJet 4P/
4MP and
4L/4ML
EN
Service Note
(number)
Technical Tip
(page number)
Clearing paper jams in LJ 4L C2003A-01
and 4P
252
Fusing assembly gear
lubricant
C2003A-02
N/A
LaserJet 4P product
introduction
C2005A-01
N/A
LaserJet 4P “50 Service
Error” (220 volt units only)
C2005A-02
N/A
LaserJet 4P Service
Manual part corrections
LaserJet 4L, 4P part number
and diagram corrections
Media jams caused by input
paper sensor arm that is
broken or binding
C2005A-03
N/A
C2005A-04
N/A
C2003A-03
C2015A-03
C2005A-07
C2040A-07
C3134A-01
Broken printer frame - paper C2003A-04
cassette support guides
C2015A-04
C2005A-08
C2040A-08
C3150A-02
C3155A-02
C3134A-02
C3932A-02
C3935A-02
253
254
Service Topic Index – 203
9
Printer Model Problem Description
Service Note
(number)
Technical Tip
(page number)
LaserJet
Paper jams in optional 500
4 Plus/4M Plus lower cassette
and 4/4M
Paper jam errors 13 and
41.3 (multi-feed jams)
C2001A-01
255
C2001A-02
256
Accordion jams in output
assembly
C2001A-03
257
500-sheet lower cassette
(Tray 3) shim improves
paper handling
C2001A-04
C2021A-04
C2037A-02
C2039A-02
C3916A-03
C3171A-03
C395AA-03
258
LJ 4 Plus ONLY: product
introduction
C2037A-01
N/A
LJ 4 Plus ONLY: duplex
product introduction
C3157A-01
N/A
LaserJet
4Si
False paper jams (last page N/A
only)
259
Image skew (missing paper
weight)
Error 52 laser scanner
failures
Missing scan lines 70110mm from top of page
Preventing jams: face up or
output stacker
Paper jamming and feed
problems
N/A
260
C2010A-01
N/A
C2010A-02
261
C2010A-03
262
N/A
263
204 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Printer Model Problem Description
Service Note
(number)
Technical Tip
(page number)
LaserJet
IIIP, IIP Plus,
IIP
Moaning sound in
separation pad
N/A
264
Compressed print
Continuous “PS Busy”
N/A
N/A
265
267
Incompatibility: new fusing
assembly component
33471A/AB-04
33481A/AB-04
C2007A-02
268
Potential safety issue
following fuser repair
33440A/AB/AU12 269
33447A/AB/AU09
33449A/AB-05
33459A/AB-03
Internal cabling problems
N/A
Light-brown stain on front
side of duplexed page
33447A/AB/AU10 271
33459A/AB-04
LaserJet
Series III, II
LaserJet
IIID, IID
EN
270
Misaligned duplexed image N/A
Duplex jamming: duplex
N/A
drive roller assembly
Duplex jamming:
N/A
misaligned switchback
assembly
272
273
Duplex jamming: worn
lower duplex guide
assembly
N/A
274
Power envelope feeder jams N/A
275
274
Service Topic Index – 205
9
Technical Tips
LaserJet
6L, 5L
Replacement Formatter and Date Code
Service Note Number: N/A
Situation: The HP LaserJet 5L printer contains three formatter
PCAs and three firmware versions.
Solution: The replacement formatter for all versions of the formatter
and firmware is the C3942-69002 formatter with a firmware date code
19950623.
Formatter
FW Date
Code
C3942-60001
19950227
C3942-60001
19950522
C3942-60001
19950623
C3942-60002
19950623
C3942-60003
19950522
C3942-60003
19950623
Replacement
Formatter (all)
Replacement
Date Code (all)
C3942-69002
19950623
206 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Accordion Jams in the Printer Fuser
Service Note Number: C3941A-01
Serial Numbers Affected: <JPBB022333, <JPTB000101,
<JPBJ051310, <JPBK006151, <JPBL033831, <JPTJ000101,
<JPTK000101, <JPTL000101, <USBB158323, <JPTM080500,
<JPBM007279, <JPBM007279, <JPBT000101, <JPBV000101,
<JPTT090666, <JPTV122612, <JPTX029034
Description: Under some conditions, paper can be pushed back
down into the fuser. This results in a jam in the fuser area. The jam can
be so severe that customers cannot remove the paper and the printer
requires servicing.
To remove the jam, the fuser area of the printer must be disassembled.
Check the fusers and pressure rollers for damage from the jam or from
the attempts to remove the paper.
Install the output bin in any LaserJet 5L printer that has the affected
serial number and that is returned for any service, paper jam, or other
problem.
Solution: Place the output bin (RB1-7332-000CN) in the output tray
of the printer. Doing so decreases the number of paper jams in the fuser
area. The bin should be installed in all printers that do not already
have it.
EN
Technical Tips – 207
9
Countermeasure for Clearing Jams in the Printer
Fuser
Service Note Number: C3941A-02
Serial Numbers Affected: JPBK000000 - JPBK016388
JPBL000000 - JPBL055374, JPCW000000 - JPCW043448
JPVW000000 - JPVW081157, USCB000000 - USCB302011
JPBV000000 - JPBV010501, JPVV000000 - JPVV216255
CNVM000000 - CNVM175233, CNVN000000 - CNVN0189964
Description: When a paper jam occurs in the LaserJet 5L, it
commonly occurs in the fuser area, with the paper folding accordionstyle between the fuser and delivery assembly. When paper jams occur
in the fuser, customers often cannot remove the paper, and their
attempts to do so damage the printer. As a result, the printer requires
servicing. This countermeasure will not prevent paper jams, but will
allow users to clear the paper jams without damaging the printer.
To remove this type of paper jam, the fuser area of the printer must be
disassembled. Check the fuser and pressure roller for damage from the
paper jam or from the attempts to remove the paper jam. See chapter 6
in the service manual for disassembly instructions.
This JP protector and the output bin (from service note C3941A-01)
should be installed in all LaserJet 5L printers that are within the affected
serial number range that are being serviced.
Solution: Add the JP Protector (RB1-7334-000CN) to the delivery
assembly (RG5-2012-000CN) of every printer in the affected serial
number range that is being serviced. To install this part, remove the
delivery assembly according to the instructions provided in the service
manual. The delivery assembly is shown in figure 8-10 of the service
manual. Install the JP protector into the delivery assembly. Order the
Service Note if graphics are needed.
208 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LJ5Si
Print Quality Defect: Smeared Print
Service Note Number: C3166A-01 & C3167A-01
Associated Part Numbers: RG5-1887-000CN, C3166-69003
Serial Number Range:
• 115V
USCB000703-USCB001710, NLCB000703-NLCB001710,
SGCB000703-SGCB001710, USCC000703-USCC001710,
NLCC000703-NLCC001710, SGCC000703-SGCC001710.
• 220V
USRB000045-USRB00083, NLRB000045-NLRB000883,
SGRB000045-SGRB000883, USRC000045-USRC000883,
NLRC000045-NLRC000883, SGRC000045-SGRC000883.
Description: Printers in the serial number range given above have a
potential for smeared print. Smeared print is typically noticed first in
heavy black or graphic areas, usually at the right-hand side of the
media. More specifically, without magnification, blotchy areas of toner or
fuzziness are visible around characters. A coating on the transfer roller
and a specific current value applied to the roller induce this print
anomaly.
Solution: HP has implemented an uncoated transfer roller and
increased the current to the transfer roller via the DC controller printed
circuit board (PCB). These solutions appear to have resolved this printsmear defect. After verifying the serial number range and the print
defect, replace the transfer roller and the DC controller PCB.
EN
Technical Tips – 209
9
Noisy Fan 3 (FM3)
Service Note Number: C3166A-02 & C3167A-02
Associated Part Numbers: 5182-5899/Noise Kit
Serial Number Range:
• 115v
USCB000001-USCB099999, USCC000001-USCC011766,
SGCB000001-SGCB099999, USBC000001-USBC015282,
USBC000001-USBC015282, SGBB000001-SGBB099999,
SGBC000001-SGBC015282, NLBB000001-NLBB099999,
NLBC000001-NLBC015282
• 220v
USRB000001-USRB0999999, USRC000001-USRC006687,
SGRB000001-SGRB099999, SGRC000001-SGRC006687,
NLRB000001-NLRB099999, NLRC000001-NLRC006687,
USQB000001-USQB099999, USQC000001-USQC011106,
USQC000001-USQC011106, SGQB000001-SGQB-099999,
SGQC000001-SGQC011106, NLQB000001-NLQB099999-,
NLQC000001-NLQC011106
Description: Printers with the serial numbers in the range listed
above have a potential for excessive fan noise.
The noise is a result of fan vibration. More specifically, this vibration
causes an increase of resonance between the fan duct and the
formatter shield cover. This intensification of sound may be annoying.
Solution: HP has set up a noise kit (5182-5899). It includes a piece
of foam tape and detailed instructions with drawings for correct
placement of the foam tape to eliminate noise between the fan and the
formatter shield.
Verify that the printer is in the serial number range listed. Attach the
foam tape between the fan duct and the formatter shield cover
according to the instructions included with the noise kit.
210 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Paper Jams When Feeding from the 2,000-Sheet
Input Unit
Service Note Number: C3166A-03 & C3167A-03
Associated Part Numbers: RG5-1915-040CN
Serial Number Range:
• 115V
USBC000941-USBC002659, USCC000047-USCC000482
USCC001711-USCC002017
• 220v
USQC001445-USQC001748, USRC001226-USRC003279
NLQC001445-NLQC001748, NLRC001226-NLRC003279
SGQC001445-SGQC001748, SGRC001226-SGRC003279
• 110V
SGBC000941-SGBC002659, SGCC000047-SGCC000482
SGCC001711-SGCC002017
Description: After approximately 50,000 sheets have been printed
from the 2,000-sheet input unit, there is a possibility of increased paper
jams in the area of the right cover assembly. This increased potential for
jams is caused by the texture of the cover guide being abraded, thus
causing paper to stick to the paper guide.
Solution: To prevent this problem,16 ribs were added to the textured
face of the cover guide. These ribs provide a better path for the paper
because they will not prematurely wear out, as the textured surface
does. The solution was implemented at the factory on printers that are
not included in range given above.
First, confirm that the printer is within the range above. If not, this
service note does not apply and other troubleshooting needs to
conducted. Confirm that the jam condition occurs only when feeding
from the 2,000-sheet input accessory. Keep in mind that the page count
is approximate and could vary slightly for rougher media. Replace the
right cover assembly (RG5-1519-040CN).
EN
Technical Tips – 211
9
13.X Paper Jam Errors May Be Caused by Bad Clutch
Connector
Service Note Number: C3166A-04 & C3167A-04
Associated Part Numbers: RH7-5120-000CN; PIU Clutch,
RH7-5119-000CN; Registration Clutch, Tray 1 Pickup Assembly;
RG5-1880-090CN
Serial Number Range:
• 115V
USBC000000-USBC008623,USCC000000-USCC007432
SGBC000000-SGBC008623,SGCC000000-SGCC007432
• 220V
USQC000000-USQC008887,USRC000000-USRC003729
NLQC000000-NLQC008887,NLRC000000-NLRC003729
SGQC000000-SGQC008887,SGRC000000-SGRC003729
Description: We have found reliability problems with feed clutches
in the paper-feed assemblies used in LaserJet 5Si and 5Si Mx printers.
The same clutch is used in the paper input unit, registration assembly,
and Tray 1 pickup assembly. What makes each clutch unique is the gear
attached for each particular assembly and the position of the connector
relative to the stop. The analysis of the clutches shows that the contact
pin cracks as it is pressed into the connector housing. We believe this is
caused by metal fatigue, which may cause reliability problems with the
clutch. These problems result in open circuit clutches. If the clutch
problem is the Tray 1 pickup assembly, the pickup roller will not turn,
resulting in 13.2 paper jams or 41.3 wrong-size paper errors. If it is the
registration clutch, the registration assembly will not turn, resulting in
13.3 paper jams and paper jammed under the registration assembly. If it
is the PIU clutch, the printer will feed the paper to PS #1 and then stop,
resulting in a 13.2 paper jam.
212 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Solution: HP has worked with the engine vendor to quickly sort out
suspect clutches and ensure that only good parts are available as
replacements. However, some printers in the serial number ranges
listed earlier may have clutches that fail. Identify the jam condition as it
relates to one of the assemblies above, and then replace the
appropriate clutch or assembly.
New Firmware Revision Corrects 79 Error
Service Note Number: C3166A-05 & C3167A-05
Serial Number Range:
• 110V
XXYC0000 - XXYC9999
XXYD0000 - XXYD9999
• 220V
XXYC00000 - XXYC99999
XXYD00000 - XXYD99999
9
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R, or S for 220V
Affected Part Numbers: C3168-69001
Part Required: Formatter PCB
Situation: The LaserJet 5Si/5Si MX was introduced with firmware
revision 7.9. To verify a firmware revision, review the configuration page
in the TEST MENU. The most common error seen with this version
firmware is a 79 Service Error with an associated sub-code. The subcodes for which this service note is associated are 81ee, 8101, 0101,
0142, and 8108.
EN
Technical Tips – 213
Solution: HP has completed testing and recently made available a
revised formatter assembly. This new 8.5 version firmware will restore
the above 79 Service Error and the sub-codes listed. This new firmware
will not correct any MIO resets or NVRAM resets that cause the page
count, serial number, firmware number, or default paper size to reset.
We are aware of this issue and expect to have a solution in the very
near future. In addition to the 79 Service Error, the following issues have
been corrected:
1 The printer hangs if printing while the printer is in PowerSave mode
after a power cycle reset.
2 The printer hangs in “Processing Job” when printing a PostScript
duplex job and the source paper tray runs out of paper before the job
is finished.
3 The PostScript configuration page hangs the printer if an error TRAY
2 EMPTY is displayed on the front panel.
4 79 Service (81ee) when printing a Harvard graphics file.
5 79 Service (8101). Send down a PCL macro and print any other
page.
6 Internal test hangs when turning printer on.
7 Bug would not allow selection of the pitch size for a permanent soft
font.
8 79 Service (8108) when de-allocating a Hewlett-Packard graphics
language (HPGL) global symbol set.
9 20 Memory Overflow problem.
214 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
10 Crash with Cyrillic font SIMM.
11 Bug where PJL default job identification (JOBID) only works if
diagnostics is on.
12 OS/2 Job-Cancel bug.
13 Bug that hangs the printer when the menu item MIO CFG is set to
YES (Configure) and then a PCL configuration page is selected to
print.
14 The string ISO A3 paper size was changed to A3.
15 A floating point problem where HP was not properly initializing the
floating point registers.
16 79 SERVICE (40e0) that occurred after a 20 MEMORY
OVERFLOW.
17 Hang while canceling a PostScript job. (This was a problem when
keying <ctrl>C in the middle of sending a PostScript job in a UNIX
environment and then selecting Cancel Job from the front panel.)
Action: Verify the error, sub-code, and serial number range. If the
serial number has a “C” or “D” in the fourth character location, the
printer was built with the 7_9 version firmware, which may experience
the 79 errors. The new version firmware is an 8_5. Always confirm the
firmware revision by reviewing the configuration page. All printers in
which the fourth character is an “F” are of the new revision. Use the
configuration page to get the serial number, page count, default paper
size, and maintenance count information needed for the new formatter
PCB. See pages 3-18 in the service manual for accessing service
mode. Replace the formatter if a 79 error and one of the above subcodes are associated.
EN
Technical Tips – 215
9
Revised DC Controller Improves Fusing from Trays 2
and 3
Service Note Number: C3166A-06A & C3167A-06A
Serial Number Range:
• 110V
XXCB00000 - XXCB019885 XXCB019886 - XXCG999999
XXCC00000 - XXCC019885 XXCC019886 - XXCG999999
XXCD00000 - XXCD019885 XXCD019886 - XXCG999999
XXBB00000 - XXBB013886 XXBB013887 - XXBG999999
XXBC00000 - XXBC013886 XXBC013887 - XXBG999999
XXBD00000 - XXBD013886 XXBD013887 - XXBG999999
• 220V
XXQB00000 - XXQB015530
XXQC00000 - XXQC015530
XXQD00000 - XXQD015530
XXRB00000 - XXRB008920
XXRC00000 - XXRC008920
XXRD00000 - XXRD008920
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Part Required: Revised DC Controller
Situation: This service note is to communicate the availability of a
new DC controller which has an increased temperature for all supported
paper sizes. The service note it supersedes affected only letter-sized
and ledger-sized media. Printers in the serial number range listed
above have an older version firmware which can be updated if fusing is
found to be a problem with any of the supported paper sizes. If a printer
was updated by the first revision (C3166-06 or C3167-06) of this service
note, there is no need to update to the 2.60—unless a paper size other
than letter or ledger is experiencing a problem with toner adhesion.
Printers manufactured with an “H” in the fourth character position of the
serial number have this new 2.60 version DC controller firmware.
216 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Solution: To improve fusing ability on all supported paper sizes, the
fusing temperature has been increased from 180 degrees Celsius to
190 degrees Celsius for trays 2 and 3. The solution is provided through
updated firmware on the DC Controller PCB.
Action: Confirm the printer is within the serial number range listed,
and then replace the DC controller PCB. It is also important to be
cautious of the media being used. If you need to verify the firmware
revision, refer to IC201 on the DC controller board. The first revision
1.11 is identified by a “02.” The current 2.22 revision is identified by a
“05” on IC201. The 2.6 revision is identified with a “060"on IC201.
New Firmware Revision Fixes MIO and NVRAM Reset
Problems
Service Note Number: C3166A-07 & C3167A-07
9
Serial Number Range:
• 110V
XXYC00000 - XXYC99999
XXYF00000 - XXYF99999
• 220V
XXYC00000 - XXYC99999
XXYF00000 - XXYF99999
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R, or S for 220V
Affected Part Numbers: C3168-69002
Part Required: Formatter PCB
EN
Technical Tips – 217
Situation: When the printer is turned off and then back on again,
there is a potential that the MIO or NVRAM configuration will be lost. As
a result, the user could no longer successfully print a job, and they must
reconfigure the Network card before successful printing is resumed. If
the NVRAM is reset, the printer has no serial number, accurate page
count, or default paper size. When the formatter has been reset, it
forces the MIO card to reset itself. (This function is part of the MIO card
specification.) The reset of the MIO card will occur even if the MIO card
was not installed at the time the formatter reset itself. If plugged in later,
the MIO card will detect the bits in NVRAM, which will tell it to perform a
RESET of the MIO Card. This condition may have been misdiagnosed
in the past as a defective MIO card. It is easy to assume the MIO card is
the problem when in fact it is not.
Solution: HP has completed testing and (as of July 1, 1996) made
available a revised formatter assembly to the service channel. This new
8.6 version firmware resolves the problem of MIO and NVRAM resets.
Action: Replace the formatter if MIO and NVRAM resets are
experienced. All printers in which the fourth character of the printer
serial number is a “G” are of the new revision. Any serial number lower
than “G” in the fourth character position has a potential to fail. Use the
configuration page to get the serial number, page count, default paper
size, and maintenance count information needed for the new formatter
PCB. If the NVRAM has reset the serial number, locate it on the back
panel of the printer. See page 3-18 in the service manual for information
on accessing service mode to re-enter this information for the new
formatter.
Note
At installation, the formatter will force a reset of itself and the MIO
card; therefore, an MIO configuration will be required at the time of
installation.
218 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Toner Dumping and/or 79 Service with (04CC)
Subcode
Service Note Number: C3166A-08A
Serial Number Range:
• 110V: XXXH00000 - XXXX99999
• 220V: XXXH00000 - XXXX99999
Parts Required: C3166-69010 (Exchange), RG5-1844-050CN
(New)
Situation: HP has been investigating an increase in calls regarding
toner dumping inside of the printer. The investigation revealed three
potential scenarios in which toner dumps. It is imperative that the
support partners thoroughly troubleshoot this condition in order to
successfully complete the repair.
Scenario Number 1: (Most likely scenario)
Toner cartridge usage may have exceeded the life of the cartridge.
A toner cartridge for the 5Si family of printers has a life expectancy
of 15,000 images. A toner cartridge that is used longer than
15,000 images can experience a failure due to wear on the
photoconductive drum and on some mechanical components such
as gears and seals. This failure can cause some toner to leak into
the printer. In this scenario, no printer parts are needed. Refer the
customer to proper usage.
Scenario Number 2: If the printer has a formatter revision that is
earlier than 9.1, the engine may continue to run, which causes
dumping of the toner cartridge. Verify that the version of the DC
controller is a 1.11 version. To do so, refer to IC 201 on the DC
controller; the identifier is “02.” Replace the DC controller if it is a
1.11 version. Do not replace the formatter for this condition.
EN
Technical Tips – 219
9
Scenario Number 3: (Least likely scenario) The printer may be
exhibiting a 79 Service (04CC) error. The 79 Service (04CC) was
added to the firmware code of formatters (9.1 version or greater) to
capture the signal combination that resulted in toner dumping.
Verify that the DC controller is not a 1.11 version, as in scenario
number 2. If the error condition continues, power cycle the printer;
do not replace the formatter. Escalate through the normal
escalation channel if the error persists.
Action: Replace the DC controller only if it is a 1.11 version.
Improved MP Tray
Service Note Number: C3166A-09 & C3167A-09
Serial Number Range:
• 110V: XXYC00000 - XXYC99999
XXYD00000 - XXYD99999
• 220V: XXYC00000 - XXYC99999
XXYD00000 - XXYD99999
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R, or S for 220V
220 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Affected Part Number: RG5-1880-090
Part Required: MP tray
Situation: The current MP tray experienced a higher than acceptable
level of failures from the tray failing to lift. This can be an intermittent
failure. The failure occurs when the actuating solenoid fails to engage
the tray-lifting mechanism. The feed roller engages to drive the paper,
but the paper tray is never lifted. The printer will attempt to raise the tray
twice before posting an error. The majority of the time the printer will
post a 13.2 paper jam error, which can be cleared by opening and
closing the printer door. Sometimes the printer will report a 58.3 error,
which requires that the printer be power-cycled. However, if the printer
has a formatter with version 8.6 or older firmware, the 58.3 error
message will disappear within 5 seconds, leaving the previous
message that occurred in the display. The printer is now in a state
requiring that it be power cycled, but nothing is indicated on the control
panel. With version 9.1 firmware, the 58.3 error message will remain on
the display, stating that the printer be power cycled. In all cases, the
error will be logged and can be viewed by printing the error logs.
Although there may be many causes for a 13.2 paper jam error, only an
MP tray failure will cause a 58.3 error.
Solution: The MP tray has been modified with a more powerful
solenoid and a metal sleeve designed to reduce friction.
Action: Replace a failing MP tray with a new one. The failure can be
confirmed by observing the tray not lifting when the feed roller is in
operation or by 58.3 Errors in the error logs.
EN
Technical Tips – 221
9
LaserJet 5Si Printer Firmware Rolls to Version 9.1
Service Note Number: C3166A-10 & C3167A-10
Serial Number Range:
• 110V: XXYC00000 - XXYG99999
• 220V: XXYC00000 - XXYG99999
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Y = B, C, D for 110V, or Q, R, or S for 220V
Affected Part Number: C3168-69003
Part Required: Formatter PCB
Situation: The firmware for the LaserJet 5Si has rolled to a new
revision that includes corrections to some specific error conditions that
were found after the product's introduction. HP recommends upgrading
to the new version if any of the problems listed below occur.
Solution: HP has completed testing and, as of November 1, 1996,
has made available a 9.1 version of the formatter assembly. The
following fixes are included in the new version of the firmware:
• HUNG IN PROCESSING JOB. The printer has the potential to hang
up and not respond to any key presses to the front panel. The front
panel will display PROCESSING JOBS. Getting out of this locked-up
mode requires power-cycling the printer. This is corrected in the
9.1 firmware.
• 20 MEMORY OVERFLOW PROBLEM. A problem with memory
allocation existed in the 73 firmware, which allocated the
maximum amount available. This resulted in numerous memory
overflow problems. The problem was fixed to allocate just the
required amount of memory.
222 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
• FORM LENGTH SELECTION FROM THE FRONT PANEL. This
function can be found in the PCL MENU structure of the control
panel.
• SLOW PRINTING OF FORMS. Versions 7.9, 8.5, and 8.6 firmware
had a problem handling raster graphics in 300 dot-per-inch (dpi)
mode. Often, the size of the raster strip used was too small and
inefficient. The implemented fix allows the formatter to run close to
engine speed.
• INTERNAL TRAYS NOT LIFTING WHILE IN POWERSAVE
MODE. If the user opened one of the internal trays while the
printer was in PowerSave mode, the tray would not lift it after it was
closed. This would result in an “Out of Paper” message for that
tray.
• IMPROPER SELECTION OF TRANSPARENCIES AND
CARDSTOCK ALLOWED FROM INTERNAL TRAYS. Customers
were able to select transparencies and card stock as a paper type
from the front panel even though these paper types were not
supported from internal trays 2 and 3. These selections no longer
appear on the front panel.
Action: Replace the formatter assembly if the problem is listed in this
service note or depicted in the troubleshooting section of the LaserJet
5Si Service Manual.
Note
For information on a complete Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 5Si Printer
Mopy Upgrade, call (800) 563-2983.
EN
Technical Tips – 223
9
Default Printer Font Can Now Be Set from the Front
Panel
Service Note Number: C3166A-11 & C3167A-11
Serial Number Range:
• 110V: XXY C00000 - XXY G99999
• 220V: XXY C00000 - XXY G99999
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Y = B, C, D for 110V, or Q, R, S for 220V
Part Required: Formatter PCB
Situation: The LaserJet 5Si printer was introduced without the
capacity of being able to set a default front panel font. HP soon realized
the importance of this capability to many customers, particularly those
in a UNIX environment who rely on setting a default font at the front
panel of the printer.
Solution: HP has added this functionality back into the current 9.1
version of firmware. Any customer needing the front panel font
capability can get it by contacting the Customer Support Center (U.S.)
at (208) 323-2551 or by contacting the nearest HP Authorized Dealer
Service Center.
Outside of the U.S., customers should contact the European Customer
Support Center or the nearest HP Authorized Service Center.
There are also PJL commands that allow for permanent changing of the
default printer font. For example: For font number 2, Ec%-12345X@PJL
DEFAULT LPARM :PCL FONTNUMBER = 2<CR> <LF> Ec%-12345X
224 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Action: Replace the formatter assembly according the instructions
provided in the removal and replacement section of the service manual,
part number C4077-99014. BE SURE TO RE-ENTER THE SERIAL
NUMBER, PAGE COUNT, AND MAINTENANCE COUNT VIA THE
SERVICE MODE. This information is required so the printer will report
the “PERFORM USER MAINTENANCE” message at the 350,000 page
interval.
High-Capacity Input (2,000-Sheet Input Tray)
Service Note Number: C3166A-12 & C3167A-12
Serial Number Range: LCF00000 to LCF99999
Part Required: None
Situation: In some cases, the registration from Tray 4/HCI causes
print to start too close to the edge of the paper. Although this may or
may not be within specifications, some users do not want printing to be
so close to the edge. To them, the situation is unacceptable.
Solution: This issue is not affecting all of the installed base, since in
many cases the Tray 4 alignment is fine. In other cases, customers do
not care about the Tray 4 offset. However, for those customers
experiencing the problem, perform the adjustment procedure given
below.
Action: Adjustment procedure from the Tray 4/HCI left margin:
1 With the HCI stand-alone, remove the left, right, and rear covers
from the HCI.
2 Remove the vertical transfer unit.
EN
Technical Tips – 225
9
3 Open the HCI paper tray.
4 Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on
the right side of the HCI.
5 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (right side).
6 Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the
bracket hole.
7 Tighten both screws.
8 Loosen both screws that support the paper tray locking bracket on
the left side of the HCI.
9 Locate the bracket hole and pin at the middle (left side).
10 Slide the bracket so the locating pin is positioned at the middle of the
bracket hole.
11 Tighten both screws.
12 Reassemble the vertical transfer unit.
13 Make sure that all cables (vertical transfer unit and paper deck drive
assembly) are re-connected.
14 Reinstall the left, right, and rear covers to the HCI.
Note
Positioning the locating pin at the middle could still be unacceptable
for some customer’s applications. If so, repeat the procedure by
moving the locating pin further back and testing the margin.
226 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Microswitch Assembly in the 2,000-Sheet Input Tray
Service Note Number: C3166A-13, C3167A-13
Serial Number Range: LCF00000 to LCF99999
Affected Part Number: C3168-69003
Part Required: RG5-2546-000CN
Situation: A microswitch, located at the center top of the HCI tray,
has been implemented to protect the tray’s functionality. When
depressed, this microswitch displays “TRAY 4 EMPTY”, causing the tray
to not lift at all. For unknown reasons, this microswitch has been failing
or breaking. When this happens, replacement of the whole unit is
required because the microswitch was not set up as a spare part and is
not documented in either the service or operator manuals.
The purpose of this switch is to avoid serious damage to Tray 4 if a
customer loads Letter or A4 paper sizes (portrait orientation) in the right
side of Tray 4, and stocks paper or any other media in the empty left
side at the same time. If this happens, the tray will be unable to lift all
the way up because the microswitch is depressed. The depressed
microswitch disables the current of the lifting motor, thus avoiding
serious damage to Tray 4.
Solution: Work is currently underway to obtain samples from the
field in order to perform a failure analysis and to design a
countermeasure.
It is strongly recommended that customers do not stock paper in the
empty space of the HCI. Results of usability tests indicate that users do
not pay attention to the warning label attached on the bottom-left side
of Tray 4.
EN
Technical Tips – 227
9
Action: If the microswitch is damaged, regardless of the cause,
replace it by ordering part number RG5-2546-000CN. This number is
already set up at SMO/SME.
The microswitch assembly includes the microswitch itself, the mounting
metallic bar, and the necessary cables.
Removal and Replacement: Lift the printer clear of the HCI
and place it on a smooth, sturdy surface. WIth the HCI standalone:
1 Remove the top cover.
2 Remove the back cover.
3 Disconnect the outside cables (connector with two cables) to
release the microswitch assembly from the back top of the frame.
4 Release the screw that holds the microswitch mounting metallic bar.
5 Take out the microswitch assembly (switch and metallic bar) by
pushing forward the back edge of the mounting metallic bar.
6 Install the replacement microswitch assembly.
LaserJet 5Si Now Available with an Executive-Size
Paper Tray
Service Note Number: C3166A-14 & C3167A-14
Situation: HP recently made available the LaserJet 5Si with an
executive-size paper tray. The 5Si Executive printer is product number
C3166A, option #ABAUEA. The product option is specifically for the
Marriott Corporation.
This tray provides users with the capability to print from a 500-sheet
tray, which is exclusive to executive-size media (10.5 x 7.3 in).
228 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Prior to the new executive tray, Tray 1 was the only source for printing
this size of media. The executive tray replaces the standard Tray 2. All
other sizes must feed from either Tray 1 or Tray 3.
Support Information: The Executive printer is identified with an
“X” in the fourth position of the serial number. Response Center
systems have been updated to recognize the Executive printer for repair
purposes because the Executive printer has three unique parts:
• DC controller, part number C3166-60153
• Executive-size tray, part number R77-0008-000CN
• Printer label, C3166-00032
Become familiar with these two specific conditions:
1 If you receive the message “MANUALLY FEED TRAY 1 PLAIN
EXECUTIVE”, when Tray 2 is empty, load executive-size paper into
Tray 2 and press [Select] on the printer control panel.
2 If Tray 1 and Tray 2 are loaded with different types of executive-size
paper, such as plain executive paper in Tray 1 and yellow executive
paper in Tray 2, you must select your input tray by media type, rather
than by the input tray. See the user guide for information on
configuring the media types at the control panel for each tray. Make
the type selection in the printer driver on the PAPER tab, which is
under the OPTIONS button for the printer, or from the Page Setup
dialog of the word processing application.
EN
Technical Tips – 229
9
Improved 220V Fuser Reduces Toner
Contamination
Service Note Number: C3166A-15 & C3167A-15
Serial Number Range:
• 220V: NLYC000000 - SGYK999999
Where XX = NL or SG
Affected Part Number: C3166A
Part Required:
New: RG5-1871-190
Exchange: C3166-69013
Situation: This service note is to communicate the availability of a
new revision of the C3166A fuser unit in Europe. This new fuser
reduces the likelihood of build-up from calcium carbonate on fuser
rollers, which can degrade print quality. Calcium carbonate is used as a
filler and brightener by European paper manufacturers. This build-up
has only been seen on papers using calcium carbonate. The problem is
often described as “blobs on the output” or “printouts getting dirty after a
few days.”
Solution: Replace the failing user assembly with this new version to
reduce problems of print quality caused by European paper containing
calcium carbonate.
Action: Confirm that the print quality problems are caused by the
fusing unit and are not attributable to other components such as the
toner cartridge or the use of media that does not meet HP
specifications. The build-up on the fuser can be visually inspected by
examining the surface of the rollers. If the rollers are contaminated,
replace the fuser unit and record the page count in the CSO (in the “Usg
Qty” field on the U2 screen).
230 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Improved Multipurpose Tray
Service Note Number: C3166A-16A & C3167A-15A
Serial Number Range:
• 110V
XXBY000000 - XXBY142588
XXJY000000 - XXJY 142588
XXDY000000 - XXDY097990
XXLY000000 - XXLY097990
XXCY000000 - XXCY099999
• 220V
XXZY000000 - XXQY028190
XXSY000000 - XXSY070281
XXRY000000 - XXRY099999
9
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Y = B, C, D, F, G, H, J, K, X
Affected Part Numbers: RG5-1880-100CN, MP serial numbers
JAA0326819 to JAA0420130; RG5-1880-110CN, MP serial numbers
JAA0420131 and higher
Part Required: MP Tray
Situation: The current MP tray has been experiencing a higher than
acceptable level of failures in which the tray fails to lift. This can be an
intermittent failure. The failure occurs when the actuating solenoid fails
to engage the tray-lifting mechanism. The feed roller engages to drive
the paper, but the paper tray is never lifted. The printer attempts to raise
the tray twice before posting an error.
EN
Technical Tips – 231
The majority of the time, the printer posts a 13.2 paper jam error, which
can be cleared by opening and closing the printer door. Sometimes the
printer reports a 58.3 error message, which requires the printer to be
power-cycled. However, if the printer has a formatter with version 8.6 or
older firmware, the 58.3 error message disappears within 5 seconds. In
this case, the message for the previous error remains on the display.
The printer is now in a state requiring that it be power- cycled, with no
indication on the control panel.
With version 9.1 firmware, the 58.3 error message remains on the
display, stating that the printer needs to be power-cycled. In all cases,
the error is logged and can be viewed by printing the error logs.
Although there may be many causes for a 13.2 paper jam error, only an
MP tray failure will cause a 58.3 error.
Solution: The MP tray has been modified with a more powerful
solenoid and a metal tab designed to reduce friction.
Action: Replace a failing MP tray with a new one: RG5-1880-100CN,
MP serial numbers JAA0326819 to JAA0420130 or RG5-1880-110CN,
MP serial numbers JAA0420131 and higher. The failure can be
confirmed by observing the tray not lifting when the feed roller is in
operation or by 58.3 errors in the error logs.
232 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
16-Megabyte SIMM Manufactured by HP:
Vendor Revision “B” Causes 79 Service Errors
Service Note Number: C3166A-17 & C3167A-17
Serial Number Range:
• 110V: XXYC00000 - XXYJ99999
• 220V: XXYC00000 - XXYJ99999
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R, or S for 220V
Affected Part Number: C3146
Part Required: C3146A
Situation: LaserJet 5Si family printers having 16-Megabyte (MB)
(revision “B”) SIMMs installed can fail with various 79 service errors.
Removing or replacing these SIMMs with non-revision “B” SIMMs or
two 8 MB SIMMs resolves this issue. To identify the failing SIMMs, look
for the identification number “HM5117400BS6” on the components.
Older 16 MB SIMMs (Revision “A”, identification number ends with
AS6), as well as SIMMs made with other components (not marked with
this specific identification number) do not exhibit this problem.
Solution: Replace the failing SIMM with a non-revision “B” SIMM.
EN
Technical Tips – 233
9
Action:
• Verify that the printer has a 16 MB SIMM marked with
HM5117400BS6.
• Do not replace the formatter.
• Remove the 16 MB SIMM and verify that the printer no longer fails.
• Replace the failing SIMM with a non-revision “B” SIMM and return
the failing SIMM.
• CSO entries: Move the product number and the serial number to
the system entry fields. Change the product number field from the
printer model number to C3146A (SIMM) and the serial number to
0000A00000.
LaserJet 5Si and Entire Image Manager
Software
Service Note Number: C3166A-18
Serial Number Range:
• 110V: XXYC00000 - XXYJ99999
• 220V: XXYC00000 - XXYJ99999
Where XX = US, NL, or SG
Y=B,C,D for 110V, or Q,R,S for 220V
Part Required: C3168-69005
234 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Situation: HP has entered an agreement with Entire, Incorporated.
Entire has developed a software solution called the Entire Image
Manager. Essentially, the solution takes up to four LJ 5Si printers and
enables them to work as one logical printer. With print speeds up to 96
pages per minute, it is ideal for printing books and manuals as well as
other high-volume print jobs.
The software comes with a full standard set of tools to raster image
process (RIP), manage, merge, retrieve, impose, queue, and store in an
electronic library, and to output files to an LJ 5Si.
Image Manager can accept PostScript Level 2, PCL 5e, TIFF, and
CCITT G3/G4 files from modems, floppy disks, tapes, or other media.
Customers can connect their printer cluster to almost any Ethernet,
Token Ring, LocalTalk, and FDDI networks. It supports TCP/IP, Novell,
DECnet, AppleTalk, LAN Manager, LAN server, SNA, and Banyan
protocols. Any engine sold after September 1, 1997 that does not have
the 9.7 firmware or later will require a formatter replacement.
Solution: Clarity of support and firmware compatibility for this
solution is important. If the customer is having problems with the
solution, please instruct them to call the HP reseller that sold them their
solution. If the reseller is distributing the Image Manager software, they
also have the responsibility for first-level support for the software.
Second-level support is provided by the master distributor: Ahearne &
Soper support (800) 879-3224 (extension 120).
EN
Technical Tips – 235
9
The master distributor will determine whether the equipment is
defective and, if so, direct the customer to the manufacturer.
Entire, Inc. is responsible for third-level support on the software bundle:
Entire’s support group can be reached at (716) 742-2200 (extension
251).
HP’s traditional LJ 5Si support infrastructure will be responsible for
supporting the LJ 5Si engine. The Image Manager Software only works
with firmware version 9.7 or later. This service note covers any 5Si
printers sold after September 1, 1997 that do not have the required
firmware to be compatible with the Entire Image Manager software.
In Europe, the solution will be rolled out as a co-labeled HP and Entire
product. In North America, the solution will be a third-party program.
The rest of the world will not be addressed until we have the other two
major regions running. Both regions are expected to see installations
around September 1, 1997.
Action: Confirm the firmware version by printing a configuration
page. Replace the formatter assembly (part number C3168-69005) as
noted above.
236 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LJ 4V/4MV
Paper Jams When Using Three-Hole
Punched Paper
Service Note Number: C3141A-01 & C3142A-01
Serial Numbers Affected:
• 110V: JPBF000000-JPBF002856, JPBC000000-JPBC003385,
JPBH000000-JPBH001216
• 220-240V: JPBQ000000-JPBQ014821, JPBR000000JPBR008695, JPBS000000-JPBS003616
Associated Part Numbers: DC controller PCB (P/N RG5-1932000CN)
Situation: Printers in the serial number ranges listed above have a
DC controller that may not allow enough time for three-hole paper to
pass by the first paper sensor (PS501).
Solution: To increase paper feed performance with three-hole
punched paper, an end of the front registration sensor lever has been
widened. To accommodate the widened lever, the guide assembly was
notched as necessary, and the main frame structure was enlarged.
Sensor levers for the serial number range above are unique. If they are
worn or broken, the only replacement part is RF5-0397-000CN.
Action: If a three-hole jam problem occurs in printers that are within
the serial number range, replace the DC controller PCB.
EN
Technical Tips – 237
9
Printer Hangs or Displays 79 (0523) Service Error
Service Note Number: C3141A-02
Situation: When using a PostScript level 1 driver, the printer will
either hang or exhibit a 79 SERVICE (0523) error when the following
condition is present:
Page size A has been selected, with the printer containing Page size B,
according to the following table:
B (Tray)
A (Driver)
Legal
Legal
A4
JB5
X
X
JB4
11 x 17
X
X
X
X
A3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
JB4
Custom
X
X
The hang occurs if the job consists of only one page. If the job consists
of multiple pages, the error 79 occurs.
Solution:
• Ask the customer to use PostScript level 2 drivers exclusively.
•
If #1 is not feasible, replace the formatter PCA.
238 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Printer Will Not Access Service Mode
Service Note Number: C3141A-03A
Serial Numbers Affected: JPB0000000 - JPB9999999
Associated Part Numbers: C3141-60003 - patch SIMM
Description: Printers manufactured in the range shown above may
have firmware that will not recognize depressed control panel keys
upon power-up. Therefore, there is no access to Service Mode,
Language Localization, or Cold Reset. This affects 110V and 220V
units with the #ABA English option.
Solution: To order a patch SIMM, call HP Distribution at
(970) 339-7009 (U.S.) or (+31) 20 682-8291 (Europe).
Repeating 94mm Print Defect
9
Service Note Number: C3141A-05
Associated Part Numbers: Toner cartridge: C3900A
Situation: Toner cartridges for the LaserJet 4V and 4MV products
could have a damaged print drum. Due to the design of the product, this
defect can be induced if the cartridge body is squeezed hard in the
middle. The defect can also occur if the cartridge is dropped (even if the
cartridge is still in the box).
The symptom will be one or two black or white dots that repeat every
94mm in the direction of the paper path. The dots will be located near
the center of a letter-sized page when viewed in a landscape
orientation.
Solution/Action: Any toner cartridge that exhibits this defect
should be returned to HP or an HP Authorized Service Center for
replacement. Cartridges beginning with lot code 4I28S* will not have
the potential to become damaged.
EN
Technical Tips – 239
57 Service Error (not caused by the main motor)
Service Note Number: C3141A-06
Associated Part Numbers: RS5-2125-000CN - Spring
Description: A 57.1 SERVICE error, which normally indicates a
main motor failure, may also be caused by a broken spring in the sensor
flag associated with the Front Door Open Sensor (PS402). Failure of
the Door Sensor prohibits power to the main motor, causing the error.
Solution: Before replacing the main motor assembly, check the
spring and sensor flag. Replace the spring, if broken.
Parts for Thumb Screws and Back Plate of
Formatter Card Cage Can Be Ordered
Service Note Number: C3141A-07 & C3142A-07
Associated Part Number: Thumb screws (RB1-5788-000CN)
and the Cardcage Back Plate (RB1-5556-000CN)
Situation: Some cases have been reported of the formatter thumb
screws breaking; in some cases, the threads in the card cage back
plate have been stripped. The design and material used for the screw is
being addressed. However, in the event that this becomes a problem, it
is important that the individual pieces are available through our normal
parts-ordering channels.
Therefore, the thumb screws (RB1-5788-000CN) and the card cage
backplate (RB1-5556-000CN) are now available.
Replace broken screws or stripped back plate on failure only. Refer to
Internal Components in chapter 8 of the LaserJet 4V service manual.
The back plate is part of the formatter card cage, as shown in
figure 8-10, item 11. Make the appropriate mark-ups in your service
manuals.
240 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
55 Service Error Troubleshooting Hint
Service Note Number: C3141A-08 & C3142A-08
Situation: A “55 Service Error” is usually caused by a
communication error between the DC controller and the formatter PCA.
If the formatter PCA is not seated properly to the interface PCA, this
error will occur. This is an important troubleshooting tip because the
service manual directs you to replace the laser/scanner as the second
most-likely solution. Mark your service manuals with the second mostlikely fix to be: “2. Reseat the formatter PCA” prior to unnecessarily
replacing the laser/scanner assembly. The next revision to the service
manual will reflect this change.
MP Tray Paper Jams
Service Note Number: C3141A-10
Associated Part Numbers: RB1-6389-000CN - static charge
eliminator, RG5-1555-050CN - guide
Serial Numbers Affected:
• 110V: JPCF011302, JPCG007020, JPCH005190
• 220V: JPCQ002711, JPCR000101, JPVQ003523, JPVR008774,
JPVS000101
Description: Early units have an increased possibility of paper
jams. The parts listed above have been upgraded to fix the problem.
Solution: Refer to chapter 6 in the service manual to remove the
registration roller guide plate and anti-static brush. Replace with the
redesigned parts.
EN
Technical Tips – 241
9
Preventing Damage to Toner Cartridge Shutter Arm
Service Note Number: NONE
Associated Part Numbers: NONE
Description: If the front door of the printer is not fully opened when
a toner cartridge is being removed, it is very likely that the shutter that
covers the cartridge drum will be broken, destroying the cartridge and
resulting in blank pages being printed.
Solution: Advise the customer to always open the front door
completely before removing the toner cartridge.
Pickup Roller on the Multipurpose Tray Does Not
Stop
Service Note Number: C3141A-12 & C3142A-12
Serial Numbers Affected:
• 115V: JPBXXXXXXX - ALL, JPCXXXXXXX - ALL, JPDFXXXXXX ALL, JPDGXXXXXX - ALL, JPDH000000 - JPDH030601
• 220V: JPBXXXXXXX - ALL, JPCXXXXXXX - ALL, JPDXXXXXXX
- ALL, JPXS000000 - JPDH007198
Associated Part Number: RG5-1584-000CN (paper guide plate
assembly), C3141-69007 (exchange part number)
Situation: Occasionally the pickup clutch on the paper guide plate
assembly will not disengage. If this occurs, paper is continually picked
from the (MP) multipurpose tray, and as many as three or more sheets
jam in the printer.
242 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Solution: A new clutch is now being used on the paper guide plate
assembly (RG5-1584-000CN). The old clutch used an oil-impregnated
metal bushing as a lubricant. On some clutches, this oil would leak from
the bushing, causing the armature to stick. Then, the clutch would not
disengage. The new clutch uses a mold bushing that does not require
oil, thus solving the problem. The part number for the paper guide plate
assembly containing this new clutch is the exchange part number
C3141-69007. After confirming the error condition described above,
replace the paper guide plate assembly.
Leading Edge Smudge
Service Note Number: C3142A-13
Associated Serial Numbers:
• 115V: JPFH000000-JPFH001548, JPBXXXXXXX-ALL,
JPCXXXXXXX-ALL, JPDXXXXXXX-ALL
• 220V: JPFQ000000-JPFQ000389, JPXS000000-JPXS022660,
JPVXXXXXXX-ALL, JPWXXXXXXX-ALL
Associated Part Number: Old part number: RF5-1380-000CN;
New part number: RF5-1380-030CN
Situation: The fuser entrance guide has a ridge of material along its
length. Toner can build up along the edge of this ridge. This
accumulated toner can cause the page to catch at the inlet to the fuser;
when caught, the unfused toner scatters, creating a print defect called
“leading edge smudge.” This defect appears as smudged print or a
toner halo around the characters. This print defect can occur as early as
a 10K page count. The smudges can occur anywhere along the leading
edge of the document (landscape paper path).
EN
Technical Tips – 243
9
Solution: Material has been removed along the length of the fuser
entrance guide, and the ribs were extended. This change prevents the
toner accumulation on the entrance guide from hitting the paper. Refer
to the LaserJet 4V and 4MV Service Manual, Second Edition (C314190929), section 8, figure 8-4, item 28 for the part. Replace the part with
the new part number: RF5-1380-030CN.
Action: For the replacement procedure, see the LaserJet 4V and
4MV Service Manual: Second Edition (C3141-90929).
Note
Be sure to observe all warnings, notes, and cautions provided in this
procedure.
Formatter Fan Noise
Service Note Number: C3141-14
Serial Numbers Affected:
• 100V/120V
JPBF000000 to JPBF999999, JPDF000000 to JPDF999999,
JPBG000000 to JPBG999999, JPDG000000 to JPDG999999,
JPBH000000 to JPBH999999, JPDH000000 to JPDH999999,
JPCF000000 to JPCF999999, JPFF000000 to JPFF018699,
JPCG000000 to JPCG999999, JPFH000000 to JPFH005145,
JPCH000000 to JPCH999999
• 220V/240V
JPBQ000000 to JPBQ999999, JPVQ000000 to JPVQ999999,
JPBR000000 to JPBR999999, JPVR000000 to JPVR999999,
JPBS000000 to JPBS999999, JPVS000000 to JPVS999999,
JPCQ000000 to JPCQ999999, JPWQ000000 to JPWQ999999,
JPCR000000 to JPCR999999, JPWR000000 to JPWR999999,
JPCS000000 to JPCS999999, JPWS000000 to JPWS999999,
JPDQ000000 to JPDQ999999, JPXQ000000 to JPXQ012118,
JPDR000000 to JPDR999999, JPXS000000 to JPXS033088,
JPDS000000 to JPDS999999, JPFQ000000 to JPFQ006200,
JPFS000000 to JPFS010991
244 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Associated Part Number: Fan: RH7-1317-000CN or video
controller assembly: RG5-1560-060CN
Situation: The majority of formatter fan replacements have been for
noise. These replacements have been categorized into two failure
modes:
•
The fan/card cage assembly produces a strong pitch or tone due to
the fan rotational speed that causes the formatter cage to resonate.
Customers may be more sensitive to this noise because this fan is
the only fan on at all times.
•
Some fans may have a defective bearing which causes noise.
Solution: The operating speed of the fan has been re-engineered.
The fan speed has been reduced from 7,000 revolutions per minute
(rpm) to 5,000 rpm with no detrimental effect upon the printer operation.
Also, an inspection process was created to check for bearing defects.
The formatter fan has received a new part number RH7-1317-000CN
and is available now through regular parts distribution.
Action: For the replacement procedure, refer to the LaserJet 4V and
4MV Service Manual, Second Edition (C3141-90929), section 6, pages
6-16; “Card Cage.” The fan then can be removed from the card cage
assembly and the countermeasure fan installed.
Note
Be sure to observe all warnings, notes, and cautions provided in this
procedure.
EN
Technical Tips – 245
9
Paper Jams In Output Area When Using Large Media
Service Note Number: C3142A-15
Affected Serial Numbers: All Units
Associated Part Number: RG5-0198-000CN
Situation: After 400k images are printed, toner can build up on the
face-down delivery assembly rollers. This can cause paper jams in the
fuser or output area and/or leave claw marks on large-sized media (B
size or 11X17 media).
Solution: Clean or replace the face-down delivery assembly rollers.
Action: For the replacement procedure, refer to the LaserJet 4V and
4MV Service Manual, Second Edition (C3141-90929).
Note
Be sure to observe all warnings, notes, and cautions provided in this
procedure.
Input Jamming When Feeding from the
500-Sheet Feeder
Service Note Number: C3760A-02C
Associated Part Numbers: C3760-67900/Roller and Clip Kit
Situation: The volume of calls has increased for LaserJet 4V/4MV
printers with the 500-sheet optional cassette. The jam occurs at the
registration area (PS1) and/or there are mis-picks from the optional tray.
After extensive investigation and testing, we determined that installing
the Roller and Clip kit should resolve the input jamming condition.
246 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Solution:
1 The tooling mold for the J11 clip was modified to ensure that the
manufactured part is free of burrs.
2 The manufacturing process of the rollers has been modified with a
new ultrasonic cleaning procedure to eliminate any blooming effects.
The new preconditioned rollers have been tested extensively, with
good results and performance.
3 A new Roller and Clip kit (C3760-67900) has been set up at SMO/
SME. The kit contains a J11 deflector clip, a new preconditioned
roller assembly, and installation guidelines.
Action:
1 If the failure occurs, install the new Roller and Clip kit C3760-67900,
using the instructions sheet included in the kit.
2 If you continue to experience a jamming problem from the lower
cassette after performing the service note, consider the following
recommendations:
• Be sure not to install the roller assembly backwards.
• Be sure that paper-size slider is seated properly into the four black
pulleys (bushings). Ensure the pulleys are fully seated in their
channels.
• Be sure that the position lock on the paper-size slider is engaged
in the correct hole. (The position lock has a green lever.)
• Be sure that the magnetic sensors that detect paper size are
properly placed.
• Try different media or have the media evaluated. We have seen
numerous issues relating to the customer's media.
• The lower cassette units with serial number DE03695118 and
greater are shipped with the new preconditioned roller assembly.
EN
Technical Tips – 247
9
LJ 4P/4MP
and
LJ 4L/4ML
Paper Jams
Service Note Number: C2003A-01 (Information only)
Description: A majority of the problems on the LaserJet 4L and 4P
center around paper jams and removal of paper jams. In their haste to
remove paper jams, people often damage the paper-input sensor flag
(RF5-0601-000CN). The printer is inoperable with a broken sensor flag.
Solution: Replace the broken flag, and INSTRUCT THE
CUSTOMER on proper removal of jams.
If a jam occurs at the printer's input:
1 Slide the paper to the right, freeing it from the front and top oblique
rollers of the printer.
2 Carefully pull the paper out from the front of the printer.
If a jam occurs at the rear of the printer:
1 Open the fuser door and lift up on the release lever of the printer's
rear fusing assembly.
2 Carefully pull the paper out from the rear of the printer.
248 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Media Jams Caused by Broken or Binding
Input Paper Sensor Arm
Service Note Number: C2003A-03, C2015A-03, C2005A-07,
C2040A-07, C3134A-01
Serial Numbers Affected: AAAA000000 - ZZZZ999999
Description: Improperly removing jammed media can damage or
break the Input Paper Sensor Arm (RF5-0601-000CN). As a result,
media will jam frequently or constantly, regardless of whether media is
fed from the lower cassette or from the manual feed slot.
Solution: Replace the Input Paper Sensor Arm. This sensor arm has
been re-designed to prevent it from breaking even if a media jam is
removed improperly.
Note
When replacing the Input Paper Sensor Arm, the replacement sensor
arm may bind with the High Voltage Shield (RB1-2987-000CN). If this
occurs, also replace the High Voltage Shield. Due to the increased
size of the redesigned Input Paper Sensor Arm, it may come into
contact with the flange on the original version of the High Voltage
Shield. To prevent this from happening, a flange on the original version
of the High Voltage Shield has been removed.
EN
Technical Tips – 249
9
Broken Printer Frame - Paper Cassette Support
Guides
Service Note Number: C2003A-04, C2015A-04, C2005A-08,
C2040A-08, C3150A-02, C3155A-02, C3134A-02, C3932A-02,
C3935A-02
Serial Numbers Affected: AAAA000000 - ZZZZ999999
Description: A customer can damage a printer by improperly
removing the paper cassette. Improper removal usually consists of
pulling up or pushing down excessively on the paper cassette before it
is fully removed from the printer. Improper removal can break off the
support guide(s) the frame of the printer, which may cause an increase
in media jams and image skew, or may crease printed output.
Solution: Install the paper cassette support guide repair kit (50624662). First, be sure that the printer is placed on a firm, flat surface.
Apply the kit (a three-piece appliance) directly to the paper cassette.
The kit includes two bottom supports, a left-side support, and
instructions.
Procedure: To ensure correct installation, before starting the
procedure go through the steps below carefully without removing the
adhesive backing from the supports:
1 Remove the paper cassette and place it on a flat surface.
2 Remove the adhesive backing from one of the bottom supports.
Carefully place the support in one of the two positions.
3 Remove the adhesive backing from the other bottom support and
place it in the remaining position.
4 Remove the adhesive backing from the left-side support. Carefully
place the support in position.
5 Replace the paper cassette in the printer; check for proper
operation.
250 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LJ 4 Plus/4M
Plus and
LJ 4/4M
Paper Jams in Optional 500-Sheet Lower Cassette
Service Note Number: C2001A-01
Description: Misadjustment of the counter-balance adjustment on
the 500-sheet optional lower cassette is a leading cause of paper jams.
Either no-picks or multi-picks will occur, resulting in 13 and/or 41 errors.
Solution: Follow these instructions to adjust the cassette:
1 Fill the cassette completely full of paper of all the same weight (do
not overfill). Make sure the paper is flush against the rear paper
guide and that it rests under the front left corner tab.
2 Push down and release the front edge of the paper in the cassette
until it bounces. If the cassette is adjusted correctly, the purplecolored indicator will stop in the very center of the indicator window.
If you need to adjust it, rotate the knob and try “bouncing” the paper
once again. Repeat these steps until the purple indicator stops in
the center of the window.
Figure 9-3
EN
Adjustment of the optional 500-sheet lower cassette
Technical Tips – 251
9
Repeat this process any time you change the paper basis weigh. Note
that if the indicator behaves erratically, the paper may not be flush
against the rear paper guide.
Paper Jam Errors 13 and 41.3 (multi-feed jams)
Service Note Number: C2001A-02
Associated Part Numbers: RA2-1999-000CN - corner tab
Description: LaserJet 4/4M only: Multi-feed paper jams (where
more than one sheet of paper is picked from the paper tray) may
become a recurring problem if customers use marginal paper (paper
that does not meet HP specifications or that is damaged).
Solution: A modified corner tab was designed to correct this
problem. Service Note C2001A-02 provides instructions for obtaining
and installing free replacement corner tabs (in quantities from one to
ten). The redesigned corner tab is installed in the 250-sheet paper tray,
and is specifically designed to increase the paper-feeding performance
of lighter weight (60-75 g/m2 [16-20 lb]) papers. The original tab should
be retained if the customer intends to use heavier weight papers in the
future.
Figure 9-4
Installing the corner tab
To obtain free tabs, phone HP Distribution:
United States: (970) 339-7009 Europe: (+31) 20 682-8291
252 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Accordion Jams in Output Assembly
Service Note Number: C2001A-03A
Associated Part Numbers: RF5-0425-000CN, quantity of 4
Description: Accordion jams occur on the LaserJet 4 as the paper
leaves the fusing assembly and enters the output stacker. The leading
edge of the paper may catch in the output stacker and fold up like a fan
or an accordion. A defective output roller holder that was used in the
manufacture of a number of printer caused this problem. Only U.S.-built
printers had this flawed roller holder. European and Asian- built printers
did not. The following ranges of serial number may contain the defective
roller holder:
• USBB074298 through USBB081811
• USBB099540 through USBB190983
• USBC085451 through USBC093129
9
• USBC112090 through USBC234957
• USTB000101 through USTB007397
• USTC000101 through USTC010123
Solution: Replace the defective output rollers with the redesigned
rollers.
Note
Your customer may have a printer with serial numbers within this
range and never experience the “accordion jam” problems. Note that
the likelihood of these jams increases with the use of somewhat
marginal papers (papers with a poor leading-edge cut). The roller
holders do not need to be replaced if accordion jams are not occurring.
EN
Technical Tips – 253
500-Sheet Lower Cassette (Tray 3) Shim Improves
Paper Handling with Letter and Legal Size Paper
Service Note Numbers: C2001A-04, C2021A-04, C2037A-02,
C2039A-02, C3916A-03, C3917A-03, C3952A-03
Associated Part Numbers: C3916-67906/Lower Cassette
(Tray 3) Shim Kit
Situation: The lower cassette (Tray 3) accessory of the LJ4, LJ4+,
and LJ5 series printers requires some user setup and adjustment to
operate properly.
If the lower cassette tray is not set up properly and monitored for proper
adjustment, the performance of the tray can suffer. The performance
degradation typically exhibits itself as 13 PAPER JAMS and/or 41.3
ERRORS from the lower cassette tray. The 500-Sheet Feeder Paper
(Tray 3) Installation Guide provides instructions on properly adjusting
the tray. The bottom plate of the lower cassette also contains illustrated
installation instructions. For a variety of reasons, the tension adjustment
and/or the right-side guide adjustment are often not correct. Testing
indicates that improper adjustment of the right-side guide is the major
cause of performance problems with the lower cassette tray. This
problem has been found to predominantly affect letter/legal size paper.
Solution: HP has developed a right-side shim that enhances the
performance of the lower cassette (Tray 3). The shim is designed to be
used with letter/legal size paper. The shim installs in the lower cassette
(Tray 3) between the side-guide adjustment and the side rail of the tray.
The shim stiffens the side guide and positions the guide properly for
letter/legal size paper. Installing the shim improves the performance of
the lower cassette (Tray 3).
254 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Note
This shim kit will not solve all paper feed problems from the lower
cassette. All the standard media checks should be performed to
assure media meets HP specifications, is not damaged, and so forth.
The adjustment for paper tension should also be set properly for the
weight of the paper that is installed in the tray.
Action: A Lower Cassette Shim Kit has been designed that includes
the shim and an instruction sheet for proper installation. The shim kit is
user-installable and available to service providers or end users. The
shim kit can be ordered free of charge by calling HP Distribution at
(970) 339-7009. Callers should request the HP Shim Upgrade Kit, part
number C3916-67906. The shim kit will work only for customers using
letter or legal-size paper.
False Paper Jams (last page only)
Associated Part Numbers: RB1-2133-000CN
Description: If the printer is giving a false paper jam message on
only the last page, and a piece of paper cannot be found in the printer,
verify that the paper-out sensor flag is still attached. To locate the flag,
remove the 250-sheet paper cassette and look for a small, black piece
of plastic hanging down in the center of the slot.
Solution: If this flag is missing, the printer will give a false paper jam
message. If this occurs, replace the sensor flag.
EN
Technical Tips – 255
9
Image Skew or Paper Damage (feeding from the 250sheet tray)
Service Note Number: NONE
Associated Part Numbers: RF5-0369-000CN - hinge (front),
RB1-2259-000CN - hinge (back)
Description: Skewed print images, and/or damage to the left edge
of the paper can result when a paper weight is missing from the cavity
of the 250-sheet paper tray. To check for this problem, remove the 250sheet cassette and look inside the cavity. You should see a “V”- shaped,
hinged plastic weight hanging down from under the high voltage power
supply area. This weight puts a slight amount of pressure in the paper
and prevents the paper from skewing as it is fed into the paper path.
Solution: Replace the weight.
256 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LaserJet 4Si
Missing Scan Lines, 70-110 mm from Top of Page
Service Note Number: C2010A-02
Associated Part Numbers: RG5-0381-180CN (Job Offset
Assembly)
Description: An intermittent print-quality defect may occur when the
job-offset feature is used to print multiple-page jobs. Missing scan lines,
approximately 70 to 110 mm from the top of the page, are caused when
the bumper that is mounted on the Job Offset Assembly becomes
deformed. This causes the assembly to “bang” to the left. As a result,
the beam-to-drum mirror mounted on the printer's top cover vibrates,
resulting in what appears to be missing scan lines. This defect appears
only if more than three pages are being printed and the job-offset
feature is being used. The first and second page do not exhibit the
defect.
Solution: Replace the Job Offset Assembly.
EN
Technical Tips – 257
9
Preventing Jams: Face Up or Output Stacker
Service Note Number: C2010A-03
Associated Part Numbers: RB1-0557-040CN (Paper Guide)
Description: When printing jobs to the face-up tray with an output
stacker (C2801A), the potential exists for an increase in the number of
paper jams. The jams are a result of paper being deflected incorrectly
by the paper guide of the delivery cover assembly.
The adhesive used to secure the gray pad on the paper guide causes
this problem. Over time, the adhesive causes incorrect paper deflection
and jamming. Typically the left leading edge of the paper may catch on
the upper edge of the rear exit slot of the delivery cover assembly and
cause the media to skew and jam.
The error also can occur when the upper tray has been selected and
the output is delivered to the lower tray.
Solution: The rear delivery cover assembly has been redesigned so
that the pad is no longer needed. Either of the two fail conditions cited
above can be corrected by replacing the paper guide on the delivery
cover assembly.
When printing to the face-up tray or output stacker, the paper-handling
performance will be improved because the paper is routed more
precisely through the paper slot in the delivery cover assembly.
Perform the modification only when the specified failure occurs. Use the
procedures shown in the source note.
258 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Paper Jamming and Feed Problems
Associated Part Numbers: RF5-0041-000CN (Paper Feed
Rollers)
Description: Since introduction, the paper feed rollers have been
replaced more frequently than any other part. These rollers have been
life-tested at nearly 300K pages without any problem. Theoretically,
these parts should not need replacement until regularly scheduled
(200,000 page) user maintenance. Premature wear is likely to be
caused by media that does not meet specifications.
Solution: Replace the paper feed rollers and consult with the
customer to ensure that the media used meets specifications and is not
causing undue printer wear.
9
EN
Technical Tips – 259
LJ IIIP, IIP
Plus, IIP
Moaning Sound in Separation Pad
Associated Part Numbers: RG1-1912-080CN - separation pad
Description: After a certain amount of printer usage, the
combination of separation pad wear and the use of smoother papers
can cause a vibration in the separation pad assembly. The vibration
occurs at a resonant frequency while paper is being fed into the printer.
This resonance is amplified by the lower frame pan, and results in an
audible moaning sound that continues the entire time the page is being
fed into the printer. An important diagnostic clue is the length of time
that the noise is audible. Note that some noise during the first second of
paper pickup from the MP tray is considered normal.
Solution: A production change was made to the separation pad to
minimize the occurrence of the moaning sound in the separation pad.
The improved pad is indistinguishable from the previous pad to the
naked eye. The former part number, RG1-1912-000CN, can no longer
be ordered. The new part number is RG1-1912-080CN.
Note
This problem may still be exhibited when the customer uses
excessively smooth paper or the separation pad is worn.
260 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Compressed Print
Associated Part Numbers: RG1-1777-000CN - drum drive
gear assembly
Description: On rare occasions, you may see compressed print on
a LaserJet IIP. The print may be compressed anywhere on the page. It
may look like text compressed into a thin line or appear as a gap
between lines. Troubleshooting can be difficult because the problem is
usually intermittent.
9
Figure 9-5
page
EN
Gap between lines and compressed line on the same
Technical Tips – 261
Why does this happen? When something causes the toner cartridge to
freeze up, the shaft on the drum drive gear continues to turn for a short
period of time but the gear does not. This can later cause the toner
cartridge drum to stop turning momentarily due to slippage between the
deformed gear and the shaft (even though the rest of the printer is
functioning normally). This results in compressed print or in gaps in the
print. Once the shaft has turned, the problem may recur intermittently
even after the toner cartridge is replaced.
Solution: Replace the drum drive gear assembly, part number
RG1-1777-000CN.
Drum Drive
Gear Assembly
(Item #10 on
figure 8-5, LaserJet
IIP/IIIP Service Manual)
Figure 9-6
Drum drive gear assembly
Normal Shaft
Turned Shaft
Figure 9-7
Good versus bad drum drive assembly
262 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Continuous “PS Busy”
Description: On rare occasion, when using the HP PostScript
Cartridge (HP 33439P/Q) with a LaserJet IIP, a continuous PS BUSY
condition can occur if auto continue is ON and the document being
printed is longer than 1 or 2 pages. If the page is printed, this condition
may result in missing lines, shifted text, and some malformed letters. If
the faulty pages are ejected, the printer flashes PS BUSY on the display
indefinitely and no more text is printed.
This error condition can result from a fuser discharge phenomena that
causes a 41 ERROR in the LaserJet IIP. Since the PostScript mode of
operation does not report errors in the same manner as PCL, the 41
ERROR is not displayed and the printer displays a continuous PS BUSY
status.
Note
Many other conditions can cause a similar PS BUSY symptom.
However, if a LaserJet IIP printer exhibits this problem, a bad fusing
assembly is the likely culprit.
EN
Technical Tips – 263
9
Incompatibility of New Fusing Assembly
Component
Service Note Number: 33471A/AB-04, 33481A/AB-04,
C2007A-02
Associated Part Numbers: RF1-3305-000CN
Description: Some changes have occurred to the fusing
assemblies used in the HP LaserJet IIP, IIP+ and IIIP printers. All
assemblies are fully compatible with all LaserJet IIP/IIP+/IIIP printers,
with the exception of the original fusing assembly used in the LaserJet
IIP printer (see Service Notes 33471A-02B and 33471AB-01B for
details). Changes made in the later assemblies have made some
component-level repairs unfeasible.
Solution: Newer fusing assemblies are identified by a missing blue
wire from the center conductor of the thermistor assembly connector. If
the thermistor or its cable assembly (including the connector) requires
replacement in a newer fusing assembly, the correct replacement part
number is RF1-3305-000CN. Replacements are not available for the
right connector holder (item 14 in the LJIIP/IIP+/IIIP Service Manual),
and they are not available for the plates to which the diode leads that
are soldered on the right end of the assembly. If these components are
damaged, replace the entire fusing assembly. Use all other assembly
components documented in Table 8-8 of the LaserJet IIP/IIP+/IIIP
service manual to perform component repair of any fusing assembly.
264 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
LJ II, III
Potential Safety Issue Following Fuser Repair
Service Note Numbers: 33440A/AB/AU-12, 33447A/AB/AU-09,
33449A/AB-05, 33459A/AB-03
Associated Part Numbers: RA1-3959-000CN, RA1-3960000CN
Description: There have been reports of damage incurred to the
left and/or right fusing assembly covers of the LaserJet II, IID, III, and
IIID printers as a result of repair or replacement of the fusing assembly.
A primary function of these covers is to protect the user from hazardous
line voltages (100-240 VAC).
These voltages are routed to the fusing lamp via wires fastened to
metallic strips just beneath these covers. The wires, strips, and screws
used to fasten these wires are all exposed if the covers are missing or
damaged. The line voltage used to power the fusing lamp is present at
these exposed surfaces as long as the printer is turned on, even when
the top cover is open.
EN
Technical Tips – 265
9
Solution: When servicing these printers, ensure that the left and
right fusing assembly covers are undamaged and properly fastened in
place upon completion of the repair. The cover can be damaged if all
the wires routed beneath the covers are not positioned properly prior to
tightening the cover screws. Damage can occur during shipment or
through other mishandling of the fusing assembly. The replacement
part numbers are as follows:
Cover, Left, Fuser
RA1-3959-000CN
Cover, Right, Fuser
RA1-3960-000CN
Internal Cabling Problems
Description: Four cable harnesses located in the LaserJet series II
and LaserJet III printers may be the cause of certain printer failures.
Solution: Replace these cables before attempting to replace
expensive assemblies. Part numbers for the cable assemblies appear in
the following table.
Part Number
Description
Error Conditions
RG1-0908-000CN
Laser scanner cable assembly
41 51 52 scanner motor whining,
distorted print, lines across page.
RG1-0907-000CN
Fusing assembly cable
(long, 7-wire)
13, 50, ghosting, open
thermoprotector.
RG1-0906-000CN
High-voltage power supply
cable (8-wire)
Constant ozone production,
repetitive print defects, improper
toner-low sensing.
RG1-0912-000CN
AC power module cable
(short, 4-wire)
50, with a cold fuser.
The LaserJet IID/IIID scanning cable assembly may also cause errors 41, 51, or
52. Cable assembly part numbers are: LaserJet IID: RG1-1370-000CN
LaserJet IIID: RG1-2067-000CN.
The printer test tool (see chapter 4) is useful in detecting problems in
high voltage power supply.
266 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Light-Brown Stain on Front Side of Duplexed Page
Service Note Number: 33447A/AB/AU-10,33459A/AB-04
Associated Part Numbers: RG1-1356-000CN,
RG1-2498-000CN
Description: A light-brown streak can appear on the front side of a
duplexed page when the duplex feature is not used for several weeks.
The stain is approximately 10 mm (3/8" wide) and can be seen along
the entire length of the page, approximately 38 mm (1.5") from the right
edge of the paper. Some have described the stain as being some sort
of oil contamination, such as excess lubricant on the fuser cleaning
pad.
The oblique duplex registration roller in the LaserJet IID and IIID printer
requires a preservative to help protect it from the long-term effects of
normal usage and ozone exposure within the printer. Without this
preservative, the roller would fail prematurely and, as a result, would not
continue to feed paper properly through the duplexing portion of the
printer. This preservative can accumulate on the surface of the roller if
the duplexer is not used for extended periods of time. The accumulation
may result in the light-brown stain on the “front” side of a duplexed
page.
EN
Technical Tips – 267
9
Solution: The problem will typically resolve itself after 10-50 pages
have been run through the duplex portion of the printer. This process
cleans the surface of the oblique roller. If you must replace the roller,
prior to installing the new roller in the printer, be sure to rub the surface
of the new roller with some clean paper to remove any excessive buildup of the preservative. Do not clean the roller with alcohol or other
cleaning solutions. Doing so would remove the preservative altogether,
leading to premature failure of the new roller.
If the oblique roller (RG1-1356-000CN) requires replacement, be sure
to also check the inside portion of the white plastic alignment guide.
Paper being run through the duplexer and forced into the side of the
alignment guide can eventually wear a groove into the plastic. If a
groove has developed, replace the entire lower duplex guide assembly
(RG1-2498-000CN). If it is not replaced, subsequent duplex paper jams
can result when paper gets caught in the groove. (Contrary to the
implication in the service manual, note that the lower duplex guide
assembly does not include the oblique paper alignment roller.)
Misalignment of Duplexed Images
Description: Sometimes, a customer may notice that the images on
the front and back of a duplexed page may not exactly align when held
up to the light. This is most noticeable when printing on pre-printed
forms or when the document has a border. The most prevalent reason
for this misalignment is the process of fusing the toner into the page.
The first time paper passes through the fusing assembly, it is heated
and almost all the moisture is removed. This causes the paper to shrink.
Therefore, the physical size of the paper and the printed image are no
longer the same when the second image is placed on the page. This
results in the second image being slightly larger than the first.
The manufacturing tolerances for the registration of the paper also
cause misalignment between the front and back images. The current
registration specification for these printers is 4.2 mm (+/- 2.5 mm) from
the leading edge of the paper to the first printed dot. Reducing this
tolerance would increase the cost of the printer exponentially.
268 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Duplex Jamming: Duplex Drive Roller
Assembly
Associated Part Numbers: RG1-1345-060CN
Description: The lower and upper duplex guide assemblies (figures
8-24 and 8-25 in the IID/IIID service manual) are used to properly
position the paper left-to-right prior to its passing a second time through
the printer. When this is performed, the leading edge of legal-sized
paper may buckle slightly, causing it to dive between the lower duplex
guide and the duplex drive roller assemblies
(figures 8-24 and 8-26 in the IID/IIID service manual).
A clear plastic strip was attached to the drive assembly to prevent paper
from diving into the gap between these assemblies. With use, a slight
nick may develop in this plastic strip, leading to paper jams. If such a
nick is the cause of a jamming problem, it can be felt with your
fingernail.
Solution: This problem was fixed by extending the metal base of the
duplex drive roller assembly, thus alleviating the need for the plastic
strip. The part number of this new assembly is RG1-1345-060CN. If
paper is jamming in the duplexer just prior to the duplex drive roller
assembly, install a new assembly.
EN
Technical Tips – 269
9
Duplex Jamming: Misaligned Switchback Assembly
Associated Part Numbers: RA1-8420-000CN
Description: Another possible cause of paper jams in the duplexer
is a misaligned switchback assembly (figure 8-16A/B in the IID/IIID
Service Manual). This is often the result of using the switchback
assembly as a handle while lifting the printer, or shipping the printer
without the packing rods installed in the switchback assembly. The
switchback assembly should never be used as a handle when the
printer is being moved. If the printer needs to be transported, install the
packing rods to properly support the switchback assembly. If the rods
have been disposed of or misplaced, they can be ordered from HP
Parts Direct (800) 227-8164, part number RA1-8420-000CN.
Solution: To properly realign the switchback assembly, loosen the
mounting screws and re-position the assembly until the switchback
frame is parallel with the output slot at the rear of the printer.
Duplex Jamming: Worn Lower Duplex Guide Assembly
Associated Part Numbers: RG1-2498-000CN
Description: Some time after 60,000 pages have been printed (and
depending upon the paper being used), a groove may develop in the
white plastic guide in the lower duplex guide assembly (figure 8-24 in
the IID/IIID service manual). The assembly is used to perform the leftto-right alignment of the paper during its pass through the duplexer.
This guide can be best observed by removing the printer's cover panel
just below the switchback assembly. If a groove has been cut into the
plastic, paper will tend to hang up as it is dragged through the cut. If this
failure occurs, replace the lower duplex guide assembly (RG1-2498000CN).
270 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
Jams in the Power Envelope Feeder
Associated Part Numbers: 33457A/33458A
Description: Proper envelope feeding is a difficult task for most
printers. Jams and multiple feeds are the most common complaints. HP
has done extensive testing with a wide variety of envelopes and has
concluded that while many envelopes are suitable for use with these
feeders, many others are not. Some envelopes will cause jams on the
order of one in six, while others may not experience a single jam in a
thousand!
Can HP recommend a specific envelope to use for diagnostic
purposes? Unfortunately, it is not that simple. Envelopes within a
particular region are manufactured by local converters. Though a
specific envelope may perform well in one region, there is typically
enough variance in the manufacturing process that the same brand of
envelope may not be at all suitable for use in another region! If you
encounter regular complaints from customers that their envelopes will
not work properly with the HP envelope feeders, it might be well worth
your time to test a variety of envelopes in your area so that you can
make some worthwhile recommendations. This will also help you
identify an envelope to use for diagnostic purposes when
troubleshooting potential envelope feeder problems.
EN
Technical Tips – 271
9
Jams in the Power Envelope Feeder: 13 PAPER JAM
Error Indication
Associated Part Numbers: RG1-0718-000CN (IID Paper
Control PCA), RG1-2549-000CN (IIID Paper Control PCA)
The power envelope feeders use the Manual Feed Sensor (PS302) in
the printer to determine whether an envelope has been fed correctly
into the printer. If this sensor is faulty, a 13 PAPER JAM message will be
displayed after the feeder has been installed and the printer is turned
on. This is because the printer determines that an envelope is “jammed”
in its input area.
To resolve this problem, replace the paper control PCA (figure 8-33 in
the LaserJet IID/IIID Service Manual).
272 – Summary of service notes and technical tips
EN
10
Image defects
Overview
This chapter provides illustrations of image defects, lists suspected
causes, and offers suggested remedies
Using a Cleaning Page
For any print-quality defects, try using HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility to
generate a cleaning page. The HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility is designed
to remove excess paper and toner particles that can accumulate on the
fusing assembly rollers. The buildup of toner/paper dust results in
random spots on the front and back of the printout. Running the HP
LaserJet Cleaning Utility at regular intervals can extend the useful life of
the fuser and reduce service procedures. The HP LaserJet Cleaning
Utility works on all HP monochrome printers, regardless of driver type.
To download the HP LaserJet Cleaning Utility file and obtain
instructions on using it, access the HP website at
www.hp.com/cposupport/printers/software/lj123en.exe.html.
EN
Overview – 273
Image Defect Table
For more information, see the page numbers below each image.
Blank Page
(see page 276)
Black Page
(see page 278)
Thin Dark Vertical
Black Lines
(see page 279)
Image Skew
(see page 280)
Faulty
Registration
(see page 282)
Light Print/ Faded
Print
(see page 284)
Horizontal Lines/
Repetitive Defect
(see page 286)
Poor Fusing/
Character Voids
(see page 287)
Background
Scatter
(see page 288)
Back of Page Dirty
(see page 290)
Thin Vertical
White Lines/
Stripes
(see page 291)
Improperly Sized
Image
(see page 292)
274 – Image defects
EN
Smudged Band
with Overprint
(see page 293)
Toner Smear on
Right/Left Side
(see page 293)
Vertical Fogged
Stripes
(see page 294)
Right/Left Text
Missing/Distorted
(see page 295)
Bubble Print
(see page 296)
Leading Edge
Scatter
(see page 297)
Dropout
(see page 298)
LP
Distortion
(see page 296)
10
Compressed Print
(see page 299)
Portion of Page
Blank
(see page 299)
White Horizontal
Line
(see page 300)
Horizontal Fogged
Stripes
(see page 300)
Wavy Print
(see page 301)
EN
Image Defect Table – 275
Blank Pages
All Printers
•
The toner cartridge is empty or defective.
•
The sealing tape has been left in the toner cartridge.
•
The high-voltage power supply (HVPS), contacts, or cable is bad.
LJ 4L and 4P: The HVPS, AC power module, and the DC controller
are all on the same board.
•
The laser shutter arm or beam-to-drum mirror is broken.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The direct-current (DC) controller is defective.
•
Occasional blank pages are being printed.
– Check the software, sharing device, or network settings. If the
printer is feeding multiple pages, the paper may not meet
HP specifications.
•
There are multiple paper feeds.
2686A, 2686D
•
The transfer corona wire is broken.
276 – Image defects
EN
II, IID, III, IIID
•
The transfer corona wire or assembly is bad.
•
The toner cartridge or HVPS connections are bad.
•
The HV power supply cable is defective.
•
The toner cartridge drum is not rotating.
– Replace the toner cartridge and inspect the gears.
•
The laser/scanner assembly or cable is bad.
•
The hinge brackets of the top cover are bent.
IIP, IIP+, IIIP
•
The laser interlock tab of the toner cartridge is broken.
– Replace the laser cover assembly (RG1-1773-000CN).
•
The transfer roller assembly is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact cable is defective.
IIP Only
•
There is an error 41 and the serial number is between 2925J0000
and 3047J9999.
– Replace the fusing assembly.
10
IIISi/4Si, 4, 4 Plus, 4L, 4P
•
The transfer roller assembly is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact cable is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective
EN
Image Defect Table – 277
Black Pages
All Printers
•
The toner cartridge is improperly installed or is defective.
•
The HV contacts are dirty or the HV PCA is defective
– Clean the HV contacts or replace the HV PCA.
LJ 4L and 4P: The HVPS, AC power module, and DC controller
are all on the same board.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The laser/scanner cable or assembly is defective.
5L, 5P, 6P, 6L
•
Light is leaking into the printer
IIP, IIP+, IIIP
•
The fiber optics cable is defective.
4L, 4P, 4V
•
Light is leaking into the printer.
278 – Image defects
EN
Thin, Dark, Vertical Black Lines
All Printers
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
– Check for a thin scratch around the print drum. If present,
replace the toner cartridge.
•
The primary charging roller is dirty because of a defective cartridge.
– Replace the cartridge.
•
Paper does not meet HP specifications.
•
The static eliminator teeth are contaminated or defective.
– Clean the printer.
•
The fuser cleaning pad or fusing assembly is defective.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 279
Image Skew
All Printers
•
The paper is loaded incorrectly.
•
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The rollers or separation pads are worn.
5Si
•
The pickup and separation rollers are worn.
•
The registration assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The drive gears in the drive train assembly are defective.
5L
•
The LC, PC, or MP pickup rollers are worn.
•
The separation pad is worn.
•
The LC or input feed roller is worn.
•
The pickup, oblique, or registration roller is worn.
•
The pickup or registration roller is worn.
5L, 5P, 6P, 6L
•
The paper guides need to be adjusted.
•
The separation pad and/or pickup roller are worn or dirty.
280 – Image defects
EN
2686A, 2686D
•
The leading edge of the paper is curled.
– Replace with another ream of paper.
•
The paper tray is defective.
•
The laser/scanner unit is misaligned.
•
The paper input door is misaligned
•
The registration assembly is defective.
II, IID, III, IIID
•
The paper and paper tray are not installed correctly.
•
The feed roller assembly is worn.
•
The registration assembly is defective.
IIISi, 4Si
•
The registration assembly is dirty or defective.
– Replace the separation pad.
•
The drive gears in the drive train assembly are defective.
– Replace the LC or the input feed roller.
4, 4 Plus
•
The beam-to-drum mirror requires an adjustment.
4L, 4P
•
The paper guides need to be adjusted.
•
The fuser cleaning pad or fusing assembly is defective.
EN
Image Defect Table – 281
10
Faulty Registration
All Printers
•
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The paper is loaded incorrectly or the paper guides are not adjusted
correctly.
•
The leading edge of the paper is curled.
– Replace with another ream of paper.
•
The paper is overloaded.
•
The feed rollers are worn.
•
The registration assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The drive gears are worn or broken.
•
The input paper sensor is defective.
5L
•
The first dot row of the page is not 2 mm (+/- 1 mm) from the leading
edge of the page on engine test print.
– A registration adjustment is required (VR202 on DC Controller).
5P, 6P
•
The first dot row of the page is not 2 mm (+/- 0.5 mm) from the
leading edge of the page.
– A registration adjustment is required (VR301 on DC Controller).
282 – Image defects
EN
2686A, 2686D
•
The registration shutter assembly is sticking or defective. (The white
nylon rollers should turn freely.)
– Remove the rubber bumper on the shutter. If the problem
persists, replace the registration shutter assembly.
•
The paper tray is defective.
•
The laser/scanner unit is misaligned.
II, IID, III, IIID, IIISi, IVSi, 4V
•
The feed roller assembly is worn.
– The registration solenoid is stuck
•
Replace the paper control PCA.
•
The registration assembly is defective.
•
The paper tray is defective.
•
The input sensor is defective.
IIP, IIP+, IIIP
•
The first dot row of the page is not 3 mm (+/- 1 mm) from the leading
edge of the page.
– A registration adjustment is required (VR201 on DC Controller).
•
The drive gears are worn or broken.
•
The input paper sensor is defective (PS1).
4, 4 Plus
•
The first dot row of the page is not 2 mm (+/- 1 mm) from the leading
edge of the page on engine test print.
– A registration adjustment is required (VR202 on DC Controller).
•
The drive gears are worn or broken.
•
The input paper sensor is defective (PS1).
EN
Image Defect Table – 283
10
4L, 4P
•
The first dot row of the page is not 2 mm (+/- 0.5 mm) from the
leading edge of the page.
– A registration adjustment is required (VR301 on DC Controller).
•
Drive gears are worn or broken.
•
Pickup, oblique, or registration rollers are worn.
Light Print/Faded Print
All Printers
•
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The toner cartridge is low on toner or empty.
•
The print density is improperly set.
•
EconoMode is turned on.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
2686A, 2686D
•
The transfer corona assembly is defective.
•
The laser power is low.
– Adjust the laser power; replace if necessary.
•
The HV power supply is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The drum sensitivity microswitch (MS3, MS4) is faulty.
– Replace MS3, MS.
284 – Image defects
EN
II, IID, III, IIID
•
The transfer corona assembly is defective.
•
The HV power supply or cable is defective.
IIP, IIP, IIIP, IIISi, 4Si
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
4, 4 Plus, 4L, 4P, 4V
•
EconoMode is on.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The HV PCA or HV contact assembly is defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 285
Horizontal Lines/Repetitive Defect
All Printers
•
The toner cartridge is not seated properly or is defective.
•
The laser/scanner assembly is defective.
•
The gear train is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
A repetitive defect has occurred if the lines are repeated at
consistent intervals.
– Use the Repetitive Image Ruler to check the drum.
•
The static teeth are dirty.
– Clean the printer.
2686A, 2686D
•
The laser unit is defective or is adjusted improperly.
•
The DC power supply/main motor drive PCA is defective.
II, IID, III, IIID
•
The laser/scanner cable to the DC controller is bad.
– Readjust or replace the fiber optic cable.
•
The fiber optics cable is bad or improperly seated.
IIP, IIP, IIIP, IIISi/4Si
•
The fiber optics cable is defective or improperly seated (may be 41
or 51 ERROR).
286 – Image defects
EN
Poor Fusing/Character Voids
All Printers
•
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The transparencies are defective.
•
Printing is on the wrong side of the paper.
•
The fuser is defective.
– Replace the fuser.
•
The transfer roller is defective.
•
The HVPS or DC controller is defective.
2686A, 2686D
•
The fuser cleaning pad is improperly installed.
10
II, IID, III, IIID
•
The print density is set improperly.
Set to “9" to minimize voids.
•
Cover the interlock switch on the DC controller.
– The switch is not present on all DC controllers (see Service Note
33449A-04, 33459A-02).
•
The fuser cleaning pad is dry (non-HP).
– Replace the cleaning pad.
EN
Image Defect Table – 287
Background Scatter
All Printers
•
The print density is set improperly.
– Adjust the print density to a darker setting.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
Media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The paper may be wet or too dry.
– Optimum humidity should be between 40 and 60 percent.
•
The inside of the printer is dirty.
•
The transfer roller or corona is dirty or defective.
5Si
•
Toner buildup has occurred in the fuser inlet guide.
– Clean the fuser inlet guide.
288 – Image defects
EN
5L/6L
•
Printing is on the envelope seams.
– Switch envelopes or move text to an area with no seams.
•
Printing is on the wrong side of paper.
– Turn the paper over. In the future, check to see if the ream label
indicates the proper print side.
•
The density or grayscale settings need to be adjusted.
– Change the software density or grayscale settings to minimize
the scatter effect.
•
The entire background of the page is dark.
– Clean the high-voltage contact points on the toner cartridge and
transfer roller. If the error persists, first replace the laser/scanner
unit, and then replace the DC controller.
2686A, 2686D
•
The grounding spring is set improperly.
– Adjust to the center of the drum drive gear.
•
The laser power is out of adjustment.
•
The HV power supply is defective.
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
•
The DCPS/main motor driver PCA is defective.
II, IID, III, IIID
•
The primary corona wire is dirty.
– Replace the toner cartridge.
•
EN
The transfer corona is dirty or worn.
Image Defect Table – 289
10
Back of Page Dirty
All Printers
•
Toner has leaked from the toner cartridge.
– Replace the toner cartridge.
•
The inside of the printer is dirty.
•
The transfer roller is dirty.
•
The feed rollers are dirty.
•
The fuser is contaminated.
2686A, 2686D, II, IID, III, IIID
•
The fuser cleaning pad is dirty.
II, III Only
•
The corona wire is stuck “on.”
– Use the test tool to verify (see chapter 4). Replace the cable HV
power supply to the DC controller (P/N RG1-0906-000CN).
IIP, IIP, IIIP, IIISi, 4Si, 4, 4 Plus, 4L, 4P
•
The input feed roller is dirty.
•
There is toner build-up in the fuser assembly.
– Use cleaning paper to clean the rollers. If needed, clean the
thermoswitches (TS1 & TS2). Note: To create cleaning paper,
print a self-test page.
290 – Image defects
EN
Thin Vertical White Lines/Stripes
All Printers
•
The toner cartridge is defective or nearly empty.
– Gently shake the toner cartridge and reseat. If the error persists,
replace the toner cartridge.
•
Foreign obstacles are in the path of the laser beam.
– Check the laser beam shutter.
•
The printer needs to be cleaned.
5Si/5
•
The focusing lenses in the scanner assembly may be dirty.
•
The beam-to-drum mirror is contaminated.
10
2686A, 2686D
•
The fuser cleaning pad is dirty.
•
The transfer corona wire is dirty.
•
The laser/scanner assembly is defective.
II, IID, III, IIID
•
The transfer corona is dirty or worn.
•
The beam-to-drum mirror is dirty.
•
The laser/scanner assembly is defective.
EN
Image Defect Table – 291
IIISi, 4Si
•
The focusing lenses in the scanner assembly may be dirty.
4, 4 Plus, 4L, 4P
•
The beam-to-drum mirror is contaminated.
Improperly Sized Image
All Printers
•
Check the microswitches in the paper tray.
•
The paper size specified in the software does not match the actual
paper size.
292 – Image defects
EN
Smudged Band with Overprint
All Printers
•
The gear train assembly in the main motor is not engaging with the
toner cartridge drum gears.
– Replace the gear train and/or main motor assembly.
•
The fusing assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The static teeth are dirty.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
Toner Smear on Right or Left Side of Page
10
2686A, 2686D
•
The separation belt, separation roller or pinch roller is dirty.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
II, IID, IIID
•
The primary corona wire in the toner cartridge is dirty.
.
EN
Image Defect Table – 293
Vertical Fogged Stripes
2686A, 2686D
•
The conductive surface of the guide is worn, causing static charge.
– The feed guide assembly (P/N RG1-1039-000CN) is defective.
•
The primary corona wire is dirty.
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The inside of the printer is dirty.
IIP, IIP, IIIP
•
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The fusing assembly is dirty or defective.
– Use a self-test cleaning page to clean the fusing assembly, or
replace the fusing assembly.
4, 4 Plus, 4V
•
The media does not meet HP specifications.
•
The fusing assembly is dirty or defective.
•
The DC controller is defective.
•
The static teeth are bent.
294 – Image defects
EN
Right or Left Hand Text Missing/Distorted
All Printers
•
A foreign object is in the path of the laser beam.
II, IID, III, IIID
•
The toner cartridge is empty.
•
The instruction label on the beam mirror shutter has come loose.
•
The beam-to-drum mirror is bent or misaligned.
•
The hinge brackets of the top cover assembly are bent.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 295
Distortion
LP
All Printers
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The gear train is damaged.
2686A, 2686D
•
There is a problem with the paper drive.
– Check all parts of the drive mechanism, gear train, and motor.
•
The main motor is defective.
•
The DC power supply/main motor driver PCA is defective.
Bubble Print
All Printers
•
The print density dial is not aligned properly with the HVPS.
– Reseat the HV power supply PCA.
296 – Image defects
EN
• The photosensitive drum inside the toner cartridge is not grounded.
–
Reseat the toner cartridge. Replace the toner cartridge. Reseat
the HVPS. Replace the HVPS.
•
The fuser is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is leaking.
•
Paper does not meet HP specifications.
•
The HVPS is defective.
Leading Edge Scatter
All Printers
•
The media does not meet HP specifications; a single sheet of paper
may be defective.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 297
Dropout
All Printers
•
The fuser inlet guide is set improperly.
– Replace the fuser inlet guide (see chapter 6 in the service
manual).
•
Paper is defective, improperly loaded, or does not meet
HP specifications.
•
The HVPS or transfer roller/wire is defective.
5L/6L
•
The print density requires adjustment.
– Adjust the print density through the software.
•
The rollers and high-voltage contact points require cleaning.
•
Blank spots appear on the page.
– Replace the toner cartridge. If the spots persist, first replace the
transfer roller, and then replace the DC controller.
298 – Image defects
EN
Compressed Print
All Printers
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The drive gear in the drum is broken or worn.
IIP, IIP+, IIIP
•
The gear assembly of the drum drive is defective.
Portion of Page Blank
10
All Printers
•
The page is too complex.
– Reduce the complexity of the page or set Page Protect to On or
Auto.
•
There is not enough memory.
•
The printer is printing is on legal paper, but the setting in the
software is letter-size paper.
EN
Image Defect Table – 299
White Horizontal Line
5L/6L
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
Horizontal Fogged Stripes
III, II
•
The laser scanner cable is defective.
•
The toner cartridge is damaged.
– Replace the toner cartridge and HV cable.
2686A, 2686D
•
The toner cartridge is defective.
•
The HV PCA is defective.
•
The ground contact to the toner cartridge is defective.
300 – Image defects
EN
Wavy Print
All Printers
•
The scanner unit is defective.
IIID, III, IID, II
•
The laser scanner assembly is defective.
•
The laser scanner cable is defective.
2686D, 2686A
•
The DC controller PCA is defective.
10
EN
Image Defect Table – 301
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 6L/5L
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
302 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 5Si
First occurrence of print defect
Registration Roller 44 mm (1.73 in)
Toner Cartridge Primary Charging Roller 44.4 mm (1.75 in)
Face-Up Delivery Roller 47 mm (1.86 in)
Toner Cartridge Developing Roller 53.5 mm (2.11 in)
Transfer Roller 58.4 mm (2.3 in)
10
Fuser Lower Roller 94 mm (3.71 in)
Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.71 in)
Fuser Upper Roller 125 mm (4.92 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 303
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 6P/5P
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Developing Cylinder 25 mm (1.0 in)
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Face Down Delivery (Upper) Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Transfer Roller 44 mm (1.75 in)
Fusing Pressure Roller 47 mm (1.88 in)
Upper Fusing Assembly Film 75 mm (2.94 in)
Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 75 mm (2.94 in)
Registration Roller 119 mm (4.69 in)
304 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 5
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
10
Developing Roller 51 mm (2.0 in)
Transfer Roller 54 mm (2.13 in)
Upper and Lower Fusing Roller (LJ4 ONLY) 63 mm (2.5 in)
Upper and Lower Fusing Roller (LJ4 Plus ONLY) 79 mm (3.13 in)
EP-E Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.69 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 305
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 4V
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 43 mm (1.69 in)
Face Down Delivery (Upper) Roller 50 mm (2.0 in)
Registration Roller 50 mm (2.0 in)
Transfer Roller 61 mm (2.38 in)
Developing Cylinder 63 mm (2.5 in)
Fusing Pressure Roller 86 mm (3.38 in)
Upper Fusing Roller 88 mm (3.44 in)
Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.75 in)
306 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 4P, 4L
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Developing Cylinder 25 mm (1.0 in)
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Face Down Delivery (Upper) Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Transfer Roller 44 mm (1.75 in)
Fusing Pressure Roller 47 mm (1.88 in)
10
Upper Fusing Assembly Film 75 mm (2.94 in)
Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 75 mm (2.94 in)
Registration Roller 119 mm (4.69 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 307
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 4+, 4
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Developing Roller 51 mm (2.0 in)
Transfer Roller 54 mm (2.13 in)
Upper and Lower Fusing Roller (LJ4 ONLY) 63 mm (2.5 in)
Upper and Lower Fusing Roller (LJ4 Plus ONLY) 79 mm (3.13 in)
EP-E Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.69 in)
308 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler LJ 4Si, IISi
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Upper Registration Roller 44 mm (1.75 in)
10
Developer Roller 50 mm (2.0 in)
Transfer Roller 63 mm (2.5 in)
Fuser Roller or Toner Cartridge Drum 94 mm (3.69 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 309
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler IIP, IIP+, IIP
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Primary Charging Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Input Feed Roller 49 mm (1.94 in)
Developing Roller 51 mm (2.0 in)
Transfer Roller 52 mm (2.06 in)
Lower Fusing Roller 54 mm (2.13 in)
Upper Fusing Roller 63 mm (2.5 in)
Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 94 mm (3.69 in)
310 – Image defects
EN
Repetitive Image Defect Ruler IID, III, IID, II
Use the ruler shown below to measure the approximate distances
between repetitive image defects.
First occurrence of print defect
Registration Assembly Transfer Roller 13 mm (0.5 in)
Upper Registration Roller 38 mm (1.5 in)
Lower Registration Roller 44 mm (1.75 in)
10
Toner Cartridge Developer Roller 51 mm (2.0 in)
Lower Fusing Assembly Roller 65 mm (2.56 in)
Upper Fusing Assembly Roller 80 mm (3.13 in)
Toner Cartridge Photosensitive Drum 95 mm (3.75 in)
EN
Image Defect Table – 311
312 – Image defects
EN
11
Wiring diagrams
Overview
The chapter provides wiring diagrams for printers supported in this
guide.
EN
Overview – 313
Figure 11-1 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 6L and 5L
314 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-2
Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (1 of 5)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 315
Figure 11-3 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (2 of 5)
316 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-4 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (3 of 5)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 317
Figure 11-5 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (4 of 5)
318 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-6 Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5Si (5 of 5)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 319
Figure 11-7 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5P
Main Wiring Diagram
EP DRUM
PRIMARY
ROLLER
DEV
ROLLER
Tray 1
Inter-connect
PCA
54321 54 321
TRANSFER
ROLLER
AA
J101
Toner Cartridge
1
3
J402
J403
High Voltage
Power Supply
Circuitry
J404
J401
AC Power
Supply Circuitry
TO FRONT OF PRINTER
Tray 1 Pickup Assembly
Tray 1 Empty
Sensor PS5
VR301
Registration
Adjust
Input Paper
Sensor PS1
AA
Solenoid
SL3
J301
J302
Winding Paper
Sensor PS4
DC Power
Supply Circuitry
Exit Paper
Sensor PS3
J201
Pickup Solenoid
SL1
1 2
J601
J202
Paper Out J207
Sensor PS2
SW201
J204
1
18
4
1
MOTOR
M1
MAIN DRIVE
SW301
Engine Test
1
FU201
FU101
J103
54321
1 3
Infer Red
Sensor
EN
320 – Wiring diagrams
MEMORY
J801
FORMATTER PCA
LASER
DRIVER
BD
UNIT
SCANNER
MOTOR
J804
FAN
THERMOPROTECT
FUSER
HEATING
ELEMENT
TH1
FUSING ASSEMBLY
I/O
Figure 11-8 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 5
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 321
Figure 11-9 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4V (1 of 2)
322 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-10 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4V (2 of 2)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 323
Figure 11-11 Main Wiring DIagram: HP LaserJet 4 Plus
324 – Wiring diagrams
EN
EN
J101
J403
FU201
FU101
AC P ower
Supply Cir cuitry
J401
J404
J402
High V oltage
Power Supply
Circuitry
J206
DC P ower
Supply Cir cuitry
J103
SL002
J301
J204
SW201
SW301
Engine T est
J601
J202
J201
Pickup Solenoid
SL2
Paper Out J207
Sensor P S2
Exit P aper
Sensor P S3
Winding P aper
Sensor P S4
VR301
Registration
Adjust
Input P aper
Sensor P S1
TO F RONT OF P RINTER
PRINTER WIRING DIAGRAM, 4L/4ML, 4P/4MP
Figure 11-12 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4P/4MP, 4L/4ML
11
Wiring diagrams – 325
Figure 11-13 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4
326 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-14
Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4Si, IIISi (1 of 3)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 327
Figure 11-15 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4Si, IIISi (2 of 3)
328 – Wiring diagrams
EN
Figure 11-16 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet 4Si, IIISi (3 of 3)
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 329
Figure 11-17 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet IIIP, IIP, IIP Plus
330 – Wiring diagrams
EN
PRIMARY
CORONA
GRID
Figure 11-18 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet IIID, IID
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 331
Figure 11-19 Main Wiring Diagram: HP LaserJet III, II
332 – Wiring diagrams
EN
PT2
NF2
TB101
TB102
NF1
FORMATTER
PWR SUPP
PW1
PRIMARY
CORONA
GRID
Figure 11-20 Main Wiring Diagram: HP 2686D, 2686A
11
EN
Wiring diagrams – 333
334 – Wiring diagrams
EN
12
Services, support,
and training
Overview
This chapter provides information on obtaining training, support, and
materials.
EN
Overview – 335
How to Get Training
Lecture/Lab Training (U.S. Only)
Service technicians who want individual, hands-on training can attend
regularly scheduled lecture/lab training classes. These classes are
offered throughout the country. To receive the latest schedule, call
HP FIRST at (800) 333-1917, or see the HP website (www.hp.com/go/
resellertraining) and request document ID number 9104. The latest
schedule will immediately be sent to the fax number of your choice.
Class schedule and registration information can also be obtained by
calling the centralized registration center at (512) 434-1520.
Self-Paced Training Kits
Product
All LaserJet Printers
LJ 5
LJ 5P/6P
Description
Part Number
5961-0880
Basic Hardware Training
Course (prerequisite for all
LaserJet service training)
Paper Specifications for
LaserJet Printers
5961-0711 (NTSC)
5961-0712 (PAL)
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C3916A+49A-61
C3916A+49A-62
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C3980A+49A-60001
C3980A+49A-60002
336 – Services, support, and training
EN
Self-Paced Training Kits (continued)
Product
LJ 5L/6L
Description
Part Number
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C3990+49A-60001
C3990+49A-60002
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C4076-61101
C4076-61102
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C3980-61101
C3980-61102
LJII and III
Self-paced Training Kit
33449A + 49A-0
LJ IID and IIID
Self-paced Training Kit
33459A + 49A-0
LJ IIP, IIIP, and IIIP Plus
Self-paced Training Kit
33481A + 49A-00
LJ 4 and 4 Plus
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C3916-67903
C3916-67904
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C3980-61101
C3980-61102
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C2009A + 49A-61
C2900A + 49A-62
Self-paced Training Kit
NTSC Format
PAL Format
C314XA + 49A-61
C3141-67903
C3141-67901
LJ 5Si/5Si Mopier
5P/6P
LJ 4L/4P
LJ IIISi and 4Si
LJ 4V
12
EN
How to Get Training – 337
Support Resources
North American Response Center (NARC)
The North American Response Center (NARC) provides technical
support to service technicians. Reach the NARC at (800) 544-9976.
Other Areas
Outside of North America and Europe, contact your local HP sales
office for assistance in obtaining technical support.
HP FIRST Fax System
HP FIRST (Fax Information Retrieval Support Technology) is a phone-in
fax service that provides technical information to HP LaserJet users as
well as to service personnel. Receiving a fax requires a group-3
facsimile machine or fax card. Service-related information includes the
following:
•
Service notes (HP Authorized dealers)
•
Application notes
•
Product Data Sheets
•
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
•
Typeface and accessory information
•
Printer support software information
•
Toner information
•
Forms for requesting drivers and the Software Matrix
338 – Services, support, and training
EN
To retrieve Service Notes
(Authorized dealers, HP CEs ONLY):
1 Dial (1) (800) 333-1917 from any touch-tone phone.
2 Select (1) for HP FIRST.
3 Select (3) for a password customer.
4 Enter the password: 737842.
5 Follow the voice prompts to enter a document ID number or to select
the index.
6 Follow the voice prompts to enter your fax number or the fax number
of your customer.
Note
Delivery time depends on the length and complexity of the document.
HP FIRST, U.S.
Call the HP ASAP system at (800) 333-1917 and follow the voice
prompts to enter HP FIRST.
HP FIRST, Europe
Call HP FIRST at one of the following numbers:
United Kingdom
(44) (134) 0800-960271
Netherlands
(31) (20) 0800-222420
Belgium (Dutch)
(32) (2) 0800-11906
Germany
(49) (13) 081-0061
Switzerland (German)
(41) (1) 0800-551527
Austria
(43) (1) 0660-8128
For English service outside the countries listed above, call
(31) 20-681-5792.
EN
Support Resources – 339
12
HP End-User Support Options
Local Support Assistance
The user's first source of assistance should be the local dealer or
service center. HP continuously provides local computer dealers and
service centers with the latest information regarding products and
services. To locate the nearest authorized dealer or service center,
phone (800) 243-9816 (U.S.) or (800) 387-3867 (Canada).
24-Hour Support Information
Phone (800) 333-1917 to access the HP ASAP system for 24- hour
automated support services. User support information includes notes
for common software applications and troubleshooting tips. Users may
request up to three documents per call.
Electronic Information Services
For 24-hour access to information via modem, we suggest:
•
CompuServe- The CompuServe HP Peripherals forum (GO
HPPER) provides printer drivers and interactive sharing of technical
communication. To subscribe, call CompuServe, Inc. at (800) 5243388. Note: CompuServe is not an official HP support channel, but
the forum is maintained and supported by users.
•
Internet - Printer drivers and product and support information can
be obtained from the HP anonymous file transfer protocol (FTP) site
192.6.71.2 or ftp-boi.external.hp.com. The site is available to anyone
with FTP access to the Internet. Access through the World Wide
Web is available at URL http://www.hp.com/.
340 – Services, support, and training
EN
Printer Drivers by Mail
To obtain printer drivers, contact the software application manufacturer.
HP distributes printer drivers for a few of the most popular applications.
Call (970) 339-7009, 6 days a week, 24 hours a day (closed Sundays).
Shipping and handling charges may apply on some printer drivers.
Telephone Assistance - In Warranty
Call (1) (208) 323-2551 Monday through Friday from 6 am to 10 pm,
Saturday 9 am to 4 pm (Mountain Time) free of charge during the
warranty period. However, your standard long-distance phone charges
still apply. Have your system nearby and your serial number ready when
calling.
Telephone Assistance - Post-Warranty
Post-warranty telephone assistance is available to answer your product
usage questions. Call (1) (900) 555-1500 ($2.50 per minute, U.S. only)
or call 1-800-999-1148 ($25 per call, Visa or MasterCard, U.S. and
Canada) Monday through Friday from 7 am to 6 pm and Saturday from
9 am to 3 pm (Mountain Time). Charges begin only when you connect
with a support technician. *Prices subject to change.
Hardware Repair Services
To find a local authorized repair center for hardware repair needs, call
(800) 243-9816. HP also offers a variety of service contract options to
complement the standard warranty. Call (800) 743-8308 (U.S.) or (800)
268-1221 (Canada).
12
EN
HP End-User Support Options – 341
342 – Services, support, and training
EN
13
Hewlett-Packard
LaserJet Companion
Overview
This section provides information on the LaserJet 300 DPI page
scanner, which is available in three models.
EN
Overview – 343
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
The HP LaserJet Companion includes the following models:
•
C3989A Companion
•
C3079A Companion SE
•
C4106A Companion XI
(Except for minor differences in software, these are the same product.)
Description
The HP LaserJet Companion is a 300-DPI page scanner, parallel port
pass-through accessory designed for Hewlett-Packard LaserJet 4, 5,
and 6 series printers.
Warranty
The HP LaserJet Companion comes with a 1-year warranty, offering
Central Repair only (no dealer repairs); Express Exchange (U.S. and
Canada); and Repair and Return (Worldwide).
344 – Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
EN
Supported Media
•
The following media sizes are supported:
Maximum: 216 mm x 762 mm (8.5 by 30 inches)
Minimum: 51 mm x 89 mm (2 by 3.5 inches)
•
The following media weights are supported:
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 lb to 28 lb)
Skew Specifications
Some skew is normal. The maximum amount of skew that is considered
normal is 3.35 millimeters (0.13 inches) over 279 millimeters (11
inches). Skew exceeding the normal amount may be caused by media
that is damaged, media that does not meet the specifications, or media
that is loaded incorrectly.
If media meets specifications, is not damaged, and is correctly loaded,
but skew remains excessive, clean the separation pad, pickup roller,
and scan roller.
Cleaning
Clean these parts with isopropyl alcohol:
•
separation pad
•
pickup roller
•
the white scan roller
Clean the image sensor with glass cleaner.
EN
Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion – 345
13
Cables
HP Part Number
Part Description
8120-6963
Cable shipped with the HP LaserJet
Companion
C2950A
Printer parallel cable
C2951A
Printer parallel cable
Power Supply Modules
Output = 22 V DC, + or - 25%
HP Part Number
Part Description
9100-5534
120 Vac 60 Hz (U.S./CN/MX)
9100-5535
230 Vac 50 Hz (EUROPE)
9100-5536
240 Vac 50 Hz (U.K.)
9100-5537
220 Vac 50 Hz (ARG)
9100-5539
240 Vac 50 Hz (AUSTRL)
9100-5541
220 Vac 50 Hz (TI/INDO)
9100-5542
220 Vac 50 Hz (HNG KNG)
346 – Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion
EN
Appendix
Acronyms and Abbreviations
AC
Alternating current
AUTOCONT
Automatic continue
BNC
A 10-Base 2 connector used with coaxial
cables
CFG
Configuration on control panel
DC
Direct current
DCPS
Direct current power supply
MS-DOS
Disk operating system
DPI
Dots per inch
DTR
Data terminal ready
DTR LINE
Data terminal ready line
EP
Electro-photographic
EPH
External paper handling
FRU
Field replacement unit
FTP
File transfer protocol
HP FIRST
Hewlett-Packard Fax information retrieval
support technology
HP-GL/2
Hewlett-Packard graphics language
HTML
Hypertext markup language
HV
High voltage
EN
Acronyms and Abbreviations – 347
HVPS
High-voltage power supply
I/O
Input/output
IR
Infrared
IrDA
Infrared Data Association
IRQ
Interrupt request
JEIDA
A type of memory module
JOBID
Print job identification
JP
Jobpack
LAN
Local area network
LED
Light-emitting diode
LVPS
Low-voltage power supply
LC PICKUP ROLLER
Lower-cassette pickup roller
MB
Megabyte
MEM
Memory
MIO
Modular input/output
MP PICKUP ROLLER
Multipurpose tray pickup roller
MP Tray
Multipurpose tray
MSDS
Material safety data sheets
NARC
North American Response Center
NTSC
National Television Standard Committee
NVRAM
Nonvolatile random-access memory
Ohm
A unit of measure of electrical resistance
PAL
Phase alternation line format
PCA
Printed-circuit assembly
PCB
Printed circuit board
PCL
Printer command language
PC PICKUP ROLLER
Paper-cassette pickup roller
PIU
Paper input unit
348 – Appendix
EN
PJL
Printer job language
RAM
Random-access memory
RIP
Raster image process
ROM
Read-only memory
Single inline memory module
SMO
Support materials organization
SMODE
Service mode
SPEC
Specifications
SRVR
Server
TCP/IP
Transmission control protocol/Internet
protocol
TS l/T52
Thermoswitch
UNIX
Network operating system using TCP/IP
protocol
URL
Universal resource locator
VDC
Volts direct current
EN
Acronyms and Abbreviations – 349
Appendix
SIMM
350 – Appendix
EN
Index
A
H
accessing service mode 75
hardware repair services 341
Hardware Technical Support
Center 338
hardware, part numbers 149
HP FIRST 338
HP LaserJet Companion
cables 345
cleaning 345
description 344
power supply modules 346
supported media 345
warranty 344
HP paper training video 120
HP Planet Partners program 127
B
banding, reducing 123
baud rate switch 106
bidirectional parallel interface 94
C
character voids 123
cleaning page 273
D
default paper size, setting 79
defect rulers
repetitive image 302, 303, 304,
305, 306, 307, 308, 309
display lights 8
E
envelopes
construction 116
feeding 116
reducing gray background 126
sizes 114
specifications 114
error messages 9
I
I/O type, selecting 105
image defects 274
infrared communications 103
infrared printing problems 103
IR test tool 104
L
labels
specifications 117
types to avoid 118
light emitting diode displays 8
G
M
gray background, reducing 126
Macintosh, verifying
communication 102
EN
Index – 351
media
envelope sizes 114
envelope specifications 114
label specifications 117
label types to avoid 118
paper curl 113
paper problems 111
paper sizes 108
paper specifications 109
paper types to avoid 112
paper weights 110
sizes 108
transparency specifications 119
O
operating voltages 86
ordering
manuals iv
parts 131
ordering, printer drivers 340
P
page count, setting 77, 78, 79
paper
curl 113
sizes 108
specifications 109
troubleshooting problems 111
types to avoid 112
weights 110
paper out 21
paper size, setting 79
parallel cables 95
part numbers 152
parts, ordering 131
PC interface, configuring 100
post image transfer 125
power save interval, setting 80
power supply checks 81
352 – Index
printer
baud rate switch 106
bidirectional parallel interface 94
cleaning page 273
configuring PC interface 100
display lights 8
error messages 9
hardware part numbers 149
I/O cables, specifications 99
infrared printing problems 103
light emitting diode displays 8
operating voltages 86
parallel cables 95
parts 152
product part numbers 132
schematics 81, 82
serial cabling schematics 96
service messages 9
setting page count 77, 78, 79
setting paper size 79
status messages 9
technical tips 206
troubleshooting printing system
197
troubleshooting problems 200
verifying communication 101
wiring diagrams 313
printer drivers, ordering 341
product
description 132
ordering parts 131
part numbers 132
R
recycling, toner cartridges 127
refill statement 128
repetitive image defect ruler 302,
303, 304, 305, 306, 307, 308,
309, 310, 311
EN
S
toner cracking 124
training class schedules 336
training kits, self-paced 336, 337
transparencies
specifications 119
types to use 119
troubleshooting
banding 123
character voids 123
envelope problems 115
image defects 274
infrared printing problems 103
paper problems 111
post image transfer 125
printer problems 200
printing system 197
technical tips 206
toner cracking 124
W
T
wiring diagrams 313
technical support, contacting 338
test tool 91
toner cartridges
banding 123
character voids 123
minimizing post image transfer
125
page count 122
product numbers 122
toner cracking 124
weights 122
EN
Index – 353
Index
self-paced training kits 336, 337
serial cabling schematics 96
serial I/O specifications 99
serial number, setting 78, 79
service manuals, ordering iv
service messages 9
service mode, accessing 75
service notes 206
index 200
retrieving 339
service part numbers 132
setting
page count 77
power save interval 80
sizes
envelopes 114
paper 108
status messages 9
Service Websites
Electronic Support Center
Software, drivers, support documentation, frequently asked questions
http://www.hp.com/go/support
HP Technical Training (North America)
Classes and schedules
http://www.hp.com/go/resellertraining
Parts
Parts information
http://outfield.external.hp.com/spi/welcome.htm
Service Phone Numbers
All numbers listed are for North America only.
Dealer Response Line
Dealer pre/post sales and service support
(800) 544-9976 U.S. Only (800) 363-6594 Canada
Customer Care Center
User questions, applications, LaserJet Fax
(208) 323-2551
HP First Fax – Information Retrieval System
Service notes, sales information, user help, software information
(208) 344-4809 (800) 333-1917 U.S. Only
Customer Information Center
Sales dealer locations, literature, and specifications
(800) 752-0900 U.S. Only
HP Driver Distribution Center
Printer drivers and software application notes orders
(970) 339-7009 U.S. Only
Customer Support Sales Center
Authorized repair locations
(800) 243-9816 U.S. Only
Parts Direct Ordering / SMO
Service parts, supplies, and accessories orders
(800) 227-8164 U.S. Only
Parts Identification
Service part number identification
(916) 783-0804
North American Response Center
Online technical assistance
(800) 477-5526 HP Only
Corvallis Customer Service Center
Express exchange/customer return services
(916) 785-1200
May 1998 Edition
HP LaserJet Family
Quick Reference
Service Guide
Volume II
HP LaserJet Family
Quick Reference
Service Guide
Volume II
© Copyright Hewlett-Packard
Company, 1998
All Rights Reserved.
Reproduction, adaptation, or
translation without prior written
permission is prohibited, except
as allowed under the copyright
laws.
Publication number
5021-8942
First edition, May 1998
Warranty
The information contained in this
document is subject to change
without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no
warranty of any kind with respect
to this information. HEWLETTPACKARD SPECIFICALLY
DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
WARRANTY OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
Hewlett-Packard shall not be
liable for any direct, indirect,
incidental, consequential, or other
damage alleged in connection
with the furnishing or use of this
information.
Hewlett-Packard Company
11311 Chinden Boulevard
Boise, Idaho 83714 U.S.A.
Trademark credits
MS-DOS® is a U.S. registered
trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the
United States and other countries,
licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company Limited.
Contents
1
Control panel messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Error listings, descriptions, and recommended actions
2
Service mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
How to access Service mode and related functions
3
Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
DC voltages, test points, and tools
4
Input/Output (I/O) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Printer interface and cabling information
5
Media specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Supported sizes and specifications for paper and special media
6
Toner cartridge information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Cartridge weights, capacities, and potential service issues
7
Printer options and replaceable parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Support matrix and part numbers for accessories
8
Printer parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Selected high-usage replacement parts
9
Image quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Image defect samples, suspect causes, and remedies
10 Wiring diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Main wiring schematics
11 Services and support/resources and training . . . . . . . . . . . 173
How and where to get training, support, and materials
12 Hewlett-Packard LaserJet Companion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
HP LaserJet information and specifications
A
Acronyms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
EN
iii
Ordering other manuals
The HP LaserJet Quick Reference Service Guide, Volume II, provides
support for newer monochrome printers (see the following page for a
complete list of supported printers). It has been created to help the
HP LaserJet service engineer quickly troubleshoot common printer
problems.
For older monochrome printers, see the HP LaserJet Quick Reference
Service Guide, Volume I. It provides support for the following printers:
LJ 6L, LJ 5Si Mopier, LJ 5Si, LJ 5Si MX, LJ 5L, LJ 6P, LJ 6MP, LJ 5P,
LJ 5MP, LJ 5, LJ 5M, LJ 5N, LJ 4V, LJ 4MV, LJ 4P, LJ 4MP, LJ 4L,
LJ 4ML, LJ 4+, LJ 4M+, LJ4, LJ 4M, LJ 4Si, LJ 4Si MX, LJ IIISi, LJ IIIP,
LJ IIP+, LJ IIP, LJ IIID, LJ III, LJ IID, LJ II, LJ 2686D, LJ 2686A.
While the quick reference guides are intended to provide all the
information the service engineer will need for on-site repair of HP
products, they are not intended to replace the service manual for any
HP LaserJet product. For detailed information about the HP LaserJet
products described in this guide, see the user guide or service manual
for that product.
Service manuals for HP LaserJet products are available from
Hewlett-Packard. The phone number for the Service Parts Order
Desk is:
(800) 227-8164 (U.S. only)
If you are located outside of the U.S., contact your local HP Sales and
Service office.
iv
EN
Supported products
Reference name
used in this
guide
Model number
Maximum
pages per
month
Service
Manual part
number
LJ 4000/4000T
4000N/4000TN
C4118A/C4119A/
C4120A/C4121A
65K
C4118-99024
LJ Companion
LJ C3989A/
C3979A/C4106A
N/A
HP Central
Repair Only
LJ 5000/5000N/
5000GN
C4110A/C4111A/
C4112A
65K
C4110-91033
LJ 3100
C3948A
6K
C3948-90958
LJ8000/8000N/
8000DN
C4085A/C4086A/
C4087A
130K
C4085-91017
LJ Mopier 240
C4228A
130K
C4085-91017
Note
This guide will be updated on a regular basis as the service needs
change, as new products are introduced, and as information becomes
available.
EN
v
1
Control panel
messages
Overview
This chapter provides a list of printer control panel messages.
Alphabetical messages are listed first, followed by numerical messages.
Control panel messages that are self-explanatory are not included. If
you need more detailed information, see the service manual for the
printer.
EN
Chapter 1 – 7
Alphabetical messages
(number) is a group, group not allowed
•
Enter a different one-touch key or an unassigned speed-dial code.
Access denied, menus locked
•
Ask the network administrator to unlock the function.
Already in group
•
While programming a group-dial code, a fax number has been
added that is already in the group.
– Add the next fax number to the group.
Bad duplexer connection
•
Re-install the duplexer.
•
If the message persists, make sure that the duplexer is connected
and that the connector is not damaged.
•
Replace the duplexer.
Bad opt tray connection
•
Re-install the optional tray.
•
Make sure that the optional tray is connected and that the connector
is not damaged.
•
Replace the optional tray.
8 – Control panel messages
EN
Blacklisted (France only)
•
The attempted fax number has received a voice answer or no
answer, was busy on the first dial and redials, or was busy with
redials pending.
– Unplug the power cord for the fax machine from the power strip
or outlet, and then plug it back in.
Busy
•
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message
appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
Cancel group edit, ENTER to confirm
•
Back space was pressed while in a group-dial code in the Group
Dial Setup level of the menu.
1 Press [Start] to return to the group-dial code and continue editing.
2 Press [Enter/Menu] to go to the Group Dial Setup level of the menu.
(Press [Enter/Menu] again to choose a different group-dial code.)
3 Press [Stop/Clear] to exit the Menu settings.
Check finisher device alternates with Clear jam
•
Check to see if paper is jammed in the external paper-handling
finishing device.
Check finisher device alternates with Finisher align
error
•
EN
Check to see if an alignment error has occurred in the external
paper-handling finishing device.
Chapter 1 – 9
1
Check input device alternates with Paper path open,
please close it
•
Check the doors and trays.
•
Check the tabs and sensor levers in the tray for proper operation.
– Replace any defective tabs or sensors.
•
Replace the printed-circuit assembly (PCA) controller in the feeder.
Check output device alternates with Close output
delivery path
•
Make sure the paper path is closed between the printer and the
external paper-handling output device.
Chosen language not available
1 Print the job using a driver for a different printer language, or add the
requested language to the printer (if available).
2 Press [Go] to continue.
Clear document from scanner
•
Check to see if the document is jammed or if multiple sheets of the
document were loaded.
•
Check the special media lever. It should be to the left for regularweight items or to the right for thick items. Thick items must be fed
one at a time.
•
Check the control panel configuration for outgoing faxes, including
the “send long pages” setting.
10 – Control panel messages
EN
Close top cover
•
Check SW101 for proper operation. Verify that the wires are
connected.
•
If necessary, replace SW101.
– If the new switch does not solve the error, the wiring or the
engine controller board may be defective.
Communication error
1 Try resending the fax.
2 If the call fails again, check that the telephone cord is securely
connected. Then check for a dial tone on the phone line by pressing
[Manual Dial].
3 Wait; try resending the fax later.
Note
For additional details, see the HP LaserJet 3100 Product Service
Manual.
Configuration err # (number 1-4)
•
An error was detected in the static random-access memory (SRAM).
– Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds,
and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Config. stuck addr
•
In Service mode only, SRAM stuck address test.
– Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds,
and replug the power cord.
•
EN
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Chapter 1 – 11
1
Config. tied addr.
•
In Service mode only, SRAM tied address test.
– Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds,
and replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
[Date] [Time]
•
The battery has failed. You can continue to use the HP LaserJet
3100 product without replacing the battery, but if you re-enter the
Menu settings and then turn off the power, the settings are erased
again.
Decoding error # (number 1-3)
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and
replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Disk device failure
•
Reseat the enhanced input/output (EIO) disk or replace the old disk
device with a new disk.
Disk file operation failed
•
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
Disk file system is full
•
Delete the files from the EIO disk and then try again, or add a Flash
dual inline memory module (DIMM).
•
Download or delete files from the HP JetAdmin software, and
download or delete fonts from the HP FontSmart software.
12 – Control panel messages
EN
Disk is write protected
•
Use the HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Documents were lost, START to continue
1 Press [Start]. A report is printed.
2 Check the fax log status column for the “Fax Document was Lost”
message.
3 Resend the associated outgoing faxes. Ask the sender to resend
incoming faxes.
Duplex error, check duplexer
•
Check the duplexer for a paper jam.
•
Reseat the duplex assembly, and check the connection.
•
Replace the Duplex unit.
EIO x disk initializing
•
Stand by until the EIO disk is done initializing.
EIO x disk spinning up
•
Stand by until the disk accessory card is done initializing.
EIO disk x non-functional
•
Replace the EIO disk.
Encoding error
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and
replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 13
1
Envelope feeder load
1 Load the requested envelope type and size into the envelope feeder.
2 Make sure that the envelope size and type are set correctly on the
Paper-Handling menu in the printer control panel.
3 Press [Go] if the envelope is already loaded in the feeder.
4 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes.
Errors likely in pages: (page range)
•
Resend the fax or ask the sender to resend the fax to you.
Fax document was lost
•
If you set up faxes to be sent at a future time or to be polled, print a
fax log to identify which faxes were lost. Then re-enter the faxes.
•
Faxes that were received to memory (instead of printing) have been
lost. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Fax memory error # (number 1-5)
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and
replug the power cord.
•
If you set up faxes to be sent at a future time or to be polled, print a
fax log to identify which faxes may have been lost. Then, re-enter the
faxes.
•
Faxes that were received to memory (instead of printing) have been
lost. Ask the sender to resend the fax.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Flash device failure
•
Remove the Flash DIMM and replace it with a new one.
14 – Control panel messages
EN
Flash file operation failed
•
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
1
Flash file system is full
•
Delete files from the Flash DIMM or add another DIMM.
•
Download or delete files from the HP JetAdmin software, and
download or delete fonts from the HP FontSmart software.
Flash is write protected
•
Use the HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Group is empty, use ONE-TOUCH/SPEED DIAL
1 Begin adding fax numbers to the group-dial code by pressing the
one-touch key for each number or by pressing [Speed Dial].
2 Enter the speed-dial code for the fax number.
3 Press [Enter/Menu].
Initializing
•
EN
Reseat the DIMM(s).
Chapter 1 – 15
Input device condition xx.yy
1st x = Device number in chain.
2nd x = Device type (3 types):
1 = Input
2 = Output
3 = Stapler/stacker unit
yy = Device specific error.
•
See the documentation that came with the paper-handling device.
Input limit reached
•
The maximum number of fax numbers that can be added to an
ad-hoc group is 100. Resend the fax, but only to 100 or fewer fax
numbers.
Install front duplex cover
•
Re-insert the duplexer’s front cover.
Install tray x
•
Re-insert the specified tray.
•
Check for damaged tabs in the tray.
•
Check for damaged switches in the printer.
•
Replace the PCA controller in the feeder.
Invalid date or time
•
Re-enter the date and time.
16 – Control panel messages
EN
Keypad test failed
•
Run the keypad test again.
•
If the error persists, try each of the following in the order given:
– Check the cabling.
– Replace the control panel.
– Replace the formatter.
Loading program <number> alternates with Do not
power off
•
Wait for the program to load.
Long page? START to continue
•
Press [Start] to continue scanning. If [Start] is not pressed within 3
seconds, the message disappears and the document scanner stops
scanning because it thinks the page has jammed.
•
If sending a fax or copying a document longer than 991 mm (39 in),
the control panel configuration can also be set to “Send long pages.”
This ensures that long pages feed without having to monitor the
task. Press [Start] before the document scanner shuts off.
Manually feed [type] [size]
1 Load the requested paper into Tray 1.
2 Press [Go] if the appropriate paper is already loaded in Tray 1.
3 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes.
4 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
Memory full - send unscanned pages
•
Reload the unscanned pages and re-send them to finish the fax job.
•
Scan the unscanned pages to the computer and fax them from the
computer.
EN
Chapter 1 – 17
1
Memory full - stored data lost
•
Add more memory to the printer or simplify the print job.
Memory is full
•
This message should clear automatically when the next task starts
(for example, when you start a copy or receive a fax).
Memory settings changed
•
Try changing the memory settings for I/O Buffering and Resource
Saving (although default settings are usually best).
•
Install additional memory in the printer.
Memory shortage job cleared
•
Press [Go] to continue.
•
On the printer control panel, change the setting for resource saving,
or add more memory to the printer.
Memory shortage page simplified
•
Press [Go] to continue.
•
Add more memory to the printer.
Modem error # (number 1-3)
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and
replug the power cord.
•
If the error persists, try each of the following in the order given:
– Check the cabling.
– Replace the LIU.
– Replace the formatter.
18 – Control panel messages
EN
No answer
•
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message
appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
No dial tone
•
Check that the telephone cord is securely connected.
•
Check for a dial tone on the phone line by pressing [Manual Dial].
•
If necessary, check the wall outlet by plugging in a phone and
attempting to place a call.
No fax in (number) tries
•
Check the fax number and try resending the fax. If the message
appears again, try sending to another fax machine or try again later.
No fax pages in memory to reprint
•
Wait for a fax. As soon as a fax is in the memory, the fax will reprint.
No memory for report, erase/print document
•
Print all faxes that have been received in memory.
•
If you have several faxes set up to be sent at a future time or to be
polled, use job status to clear them.
No modem installed
•
There is a problem with the line interface unit (LIU).
– Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds,
and replug in the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the LIU.
•
If the problem persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 19
1
No room in fax log
•
The fax log was unable to print because of an error, such as out-ofpaper.
– Load paper in the paper input bin so the HP LaserJet 3100
product can print the log.
Not enough memory
•
Try resending the job. If the error persists, try reducing the amount of
activity on the HP LaserJet product. Cancel jobs in memory before
resending the job.
Out of memory -- switching to ONE COPY
•
The HP LaserJet product continues to copy, but only one copy is
output.
– Divide the copy job into smaller sections and then try copying
again.
– If you are collating the job, turn the collation feature off, make
only one copy of the document at a time, or see the user guide
for instructions about using the Document Assistant.
Output bin full alternates with Clear paper from [bin
name]
1 Remove the media from the face-down tray.
2 Check PS1401 on the sensor PCA.
3 Make sure the sensor flag moves freely.
20 – Control panel messages
EN
Paper bin is empty, please add paper
1 Load paper.
1
2 If paper is already loaded, remove it.
3 Check for, remove, and discard any jammed sheets.
4 Reload the paper.
Password must be 4 digits
•
Re-enter a four-digit password.
Paused (memory full)
•
Reduce activity on the HP LaserJet product, or wait for other jobs to
finish so memory will be freed.
•
If faxes are set up to be polled or sent at a future time, you may want
to cancel these jobs to free memory.
Perform printer maintenance
Reset the maintenance page count only after a maintenance kit has
been installed. Resetting the maintenance page count causes PERFORM
PRINTER MAINTENANCE to appear after another 150,000 (LJ 5000
series), 200,000 (LJ 4000 series), or 350,000 (LJ 8000) pages have
printed.
1 Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys.
2 Turn the printer on.
3 Wait until RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT appears, and then release
both keys.
EN
Chapter 1 – 21
PC print timed out
•
Let the “print jobs retry” continue for 5 minutes. If the HP LaserJet
3100 product still does not print, resend the print job.
Phone number error
•
The maximum number of characters that can be entered is 40. If you
have a number longer than 40 characters, break the number into
smaller chunks.
1 Enter the first part of the number, and press [Redial/Pause] as the
last character in the first number.
2 Enter the second part of the number as if it were a second number
going to a group. When the product dials, it will treat both numbers
as if they are one.
Polling-in error
•
Make sure that the sender’s fax machine is ready to be polled, and
check the fax number. Then set up to poll again.
Printer comm error^1
•
Check that the parallel cable is securely connected between the
HP LaserJet 3100 product and the computer.
•
If the problem persists, unplug the power cord from the power
source for 5 seconds, and then replug it.
•
If the problems persists, replace the formatter.
Printer cover open or no cartridge
•
Verify that the printer door is closed.
•
Check the toner cartridge for proper installation.
22 – Control panel messages
EN
Printer fixing error, replace fixing unit
•
There is an error with the print engine.
•
Check the cabling to the heating element.
•
If the problem persists, replace the heating element.
•
If the problem persists, replace the ECU.
1
Printer is busy
•
No action is needed. If you already started another job, the job will
be completed when the HP LaserJet product becomes available.
Printer laser error, call for service
•
Open and reclose the printer door.
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and
replug the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the laser scanner assembly.
Printer motor error, call for service
•
A problem has occurred with the print engine.
– Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds,
and replug the power cord.
– If the problem persists, replace the motor.
– If the problem persists, replace the ECU.
Printer paper jam, check paper path
•
EN
Check the input areas, the output areas, and the interior for the jam,
and then clear the jam. The job should continue to print. If it does
not, try reprinting the job.
Chapter 1 – 23
Printer signal error
•
Open and reclose the printer door.
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and
replug the power cord.
•
If the problem persists, replace the laser scanner assembly.
Processing job from Tray x
•
Check the tray selected and the type settings. If the printer does not
respond after you press the control panel keys, turn the printer off,
and then turn the printer on to clear the message.
•
If paper is loaded when the printer is in Power Save mode, it might
not be recognized. Open and close the affected source when the
printer is in Ready mode.
RAM disk device failure
•
Turn the printer off and on to clear the message.
•
If the message persists, install a new RAM disk.
RAM disk file operation failed
•
Check the filename and directory name.
•
Reattempt the operation.
24 – Control panel messages
EN
RAM disk file system is full
•
Delete files and then try again, or turn the printer off and then turn
the printer on to delete all files on the device. (Use HP JetAdmin
software, HP FontSmart software, or another software utility to
delete files.)
•
If the message persists, increase the size of the RAM disk.
– Change the RAM disk size from the Configuration menu in the
printer control panel.
RAM disk is write protected
•
Use HP JetAdmin software to disable the write protection.
Received error
•
Ask the sender to resend the fax.
Redial failed
•
Try resending the fax. If the fax still fails to transmit, call the recipient
to check that the fax machine is on and working and to verify the fax
number.
Remote fax was busy
•
Try resending the fax. If the fax still fails to transmit, call the recipient
to check that the fax machine is on is on and working and to verify
the fax number.
Scan reference error
•
Recalibrate the document scanner.
•
If the problem persists, replace the CIS.
EN
Chapter 1 – 25
1
Scanner error #1
•
An error has occurred within the SRAM.
•
Press and hold down the [Stop/Clear] key for 7 seconds to reset the
product.
•
If the error persists, unplug the power cord from its power source for
10 seconds, and then replug it.
•
If the error persists, replace the CIS.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
Scanner isn’t available
•
The document scanner mechanism is in use.
– Wait until the document scanner has finished the current job
before sending the next job.
Scanner jam - reload
•
Pull open the document release door and then remove the jammed
document.
Speed dial (number) is not assigned
•
Choose a speed-dial code that has already been assigned a fax
number.
System error
•
Unplug the power cord from the power source, wait 10 seconds, and
replug the power cord.
•
If the message is still displayed, replace the formatter.
26 – Control panel messages
EN
There are no documents in memory
•
No action is required. There are no faxes to retrieve.
Tray x empty
•
Load the empty tray (x) to clear the message.
•
Inspect the tray for damaged tabs.
•
Check the sensor-arm flags for damage. Be sure the flags can move
freely.
•
Replace any defective sensors.
Tray x lifting
•
Verify that the media can be pulled from another tray.
•
Replace the paper input unit.
Tray x load
1 Load the requested paper into the specified tray (x). Ensure that the
trays are correctly adjusted for size.
2 Press [Go] to print from the next available tray.
3 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes.
4 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
5 Inspect the switches in the tray.
6 Remove the tray, and then turn the printer on. Push the switches by
hand to see if the switches register.
EN
Chapter 1 – 27
1
Unrecognized format
•
When printing, the incorrect printer driver was selected or an error
occurred on the parallel interface.
1 After selecting the Print command in the software application you
are using, select the HP LaserJet 3100 as the printer.
2 Reprint the job.
Unsuccessful call
•
Check the fax number and try resending the fax.
•
If the message appears again, try sending to another fax machine or
try again later.
Unsupported size in tray [yy]
•
Load a supported paper size in the tray.
Use [type] [size] instead?
1 Press [-Value+] to scroll through the available types and sizes.
2 Press [Select] to accept the alternate type or size.
28 – Control panel messages
EN
Numerical messages
XX.YY printer error, press GO to continue
Press [Go] on the printer control panel to clear the error message.
13 Paper jam
•
Remove the jammed paper from the specified location. Check the
entire paper path for other pieces of paper.
•
Open and close the top cover to clear the message.
•
Check sensors and flags in the paper path for proper operation.
13.1 Paper delay jam at paper feed area
13.2 Paper stopped jam at paper feed area
•
Ensure that the paper trays are loaded properly so that paper can
feed from the trays.
•
Check the input area for obstructions such as paper in the paper
path or damage to the registration assembly.
•
Verify that the transfer roller is positioned correctly.
•
Check PS 102 and PS 103 (4000 series) and PS 402 and PS 403
(5000 series) for proper operation.
– Replace any defective sensors or flags.
EN
Chapter 1 – 29
1
13.5 Paper delay jam at fuser
13.6 Paper stopped jam at fuser
•
Check the transfer roller and small media belt to ensure that the
roller and belt are operating and can feed the paper.
•
Check the paper path for obstructions at the transfer roller, toner
cartridge, paper feed guide, and fuser.
•
Check PS 501 and PS 106 (4000 series), PS 1307 (5000 series), or
PS 1403 (8000 series) for proper operation. Replace any defective
sensors or flags.
13.9 Check left door
•
Inspect the path between the fuser and delivery assemblies.
•
Check the diverter assembly.
13.10 Paper delay jam at paper reversing area/
duplexer
•
Check the duplexer and the rear area of the printer for obstructions
or damage.
•
In the duplexer, check PS 701 and PS 703 for proper operation.
•
Replace the duplexer if a sensor is defective.
13.11 Paper jam
•
Check the entire paper path.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
•
Try the Paper Path Test.
•
Replace the duplexer.
30 – Control panel messages
EN
13.11 Paper jam in input device
1 Open the vertical transfer unit (VTU) and remove the media.
2 Verify that the entry or exit sensor can move freely.
3 If the problem persists, open the VTU and override its Open Door
sensor, perform a Paper Path test from the 2,000-sheet Input Tray
(or 2x500-sheet Input Tray), and make sure the feed rollers are
advancing the paper.
– If the rollers do not rotate, verify the connections at the main
drive assembly, pickup assembly, controller PCA, and power
supply. If the rollers still do not rotate or do not drop down,
replace the pickup assembly.
– If the rollers rotate and drop down without advancing the paper,
replace the feed rollers using the maintenance kit.
– If the problem persists, replace the VTU.
13.12 Paper jam
•
Check the paper path between the fuser and duplex assembly.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
•
Replace the duplexer.
13.13 Paper jam
•
Check the entire paper path.
•
Remove the duplex assembly and look for paper in the side of the
assembly.
– Retest.
•
EN
Replace the duplexer.
Chapter 1 – 31
1
13.20 Paper jam
•
Check the paper path for obstructions.
•
Check that all assemblies are seated and all doors are closed.
•
Check all sensors and flags in the paper path.
13.21 Door open jam
•
Check that all assemblies are seated and all doors are closed.
•
Check all sensors and flags in the paper path.
13.22 Paper jam in output device
•
Open the flipper jam access door and remove the media.
•
Make sure the sensor flag moves freely.
•
Make sure that the flipper shaft is in place.
•
If the problem persists, replace the flipper assembly.
•
If the problem persists, replace the mailbox controller PCA.
20 Insufficient memory alternates with Press GO to
continue
•
Press [Go] to print the transferred data (some data might be lost);
then simplify the print job or install additional memory.
32 – Control panel messages
EN
21 Page too complex
•
Press [Go] to print the transferred data. (Some data could be lost).
•
To print the job without losing data, select Page Protect=on from the
Configuration menu in the printer control panel and then print the
job. Afterward, return to Page Protect=auto. Do not leave Page
Protect=on; doing so could degrade performance.
•
If this message appears often, simplify the print job or install
additional memory.
22 EIO x buffer overflow alternates with Press GO to
continue (too much data sent to EIO card)
Press [Go] to clear the message. (Data will be lost.)
•
22 Parallel I/O buffer overflow
(too much data sent to parallel port)
•
Check for a loose cable connection. Use a high-quality IEEE-1284
cable.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
22 Serial I/O buffer overflow alternates with Press GO
to continue (too much data sent to the serial port)
•
Verify that the correct option for serial pacing is selected on the I/O
menu.
•
Print a Menu Map and verify that the serial pacing item (from the
I/O Menu on the printer control panel) matches the setting on the
computer.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message. (Data will be lost.)
EN
Chapter 1 – 33
1
40 Bad serial transmission (data transfer error)
•
Verify cable connections.
•
Verify that the printer serial configuration is set the same as the
computer.
– Access the serial baud rate setting from the I/O Menu on the
printer control panel.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
40 EIO x bad transmission (connection between
printer and EIO card broken)
x = Description
1 = EIO slot 1
2 = EIO slot 2
•
Turn the printer off and reseat the card.
•
Press [Go] to clear the error message and continue printing.
41.3 Unexpected paper size
•
Verify that all trays are adjusted correctly for size. (The printer
attempts to print the job until size settings are correct.)
•
If you are trying to print from Tray 1, make sure that the paper-size
setting in the printer control panel is configured correctly.
•
If you are trying to print from the optional 500-sheet tray, be sure to
set the paper-size dial to match the paper size loaded in the tray.
•
Press [Go]. The page containing the error is automatically reprinted.
(Or, press [Cancel Job] to clear the job from the printer’s memory.)
34 – Control panel messages
EN
41.x Printer error alternates with Press GO to
continue
•
1
A temporary printing error occurred.
x = Description
1 = Unknown misprint error
2 = Beam detect error
4 = No VSYNC error
5 = Media feed error
9 = Noise VSREQ error
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically. If
the error persists, try the following procedures:
•
– Reseat the connections to the laser scanner and the engine
controller board.
– Replace the laser scanner.
– Replace the engine controller board.
50.x Fuser error
x = Description
1 = Low fuser temperature
2 = Fuser warm-up service
3 = High fuser temperature
4 = Faulty fuser
5 = Inconsistent fuser
1 Turn the printer off, wait 20 minutes, and then turn the printer on.
2 If the message persists, reseat the fuser.
3 If the message persists, replace the fuser.
EN
Chapter 1 – 35
51.x Printer error (loss of beam detect)
x = Description
1 = Beam detect error
2 = Laser error
•
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat the cables.
•
Replace the laser scanner.
52.x Printer error (the laser scanner speed is
incorrect)
x = Description
1 = Scanner startup error
2 = Scanner rotation error
•
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat the cables.
•
Replace the laser scanner.
53.xy.zz Printer memory error with an accessory
The DIMM that caused the error will not be used.
x = DIMM type
0 = read only memory (ROM)
1 = random access memory (RAM)
y = Device location
0 = Internal memory (ROM or RAM)
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
zz = Error number
36 – Control panel messages
EN
0 = Unsupported memory
1 = Unrecognized memory
1
2 = Unsupported memory size
3 = Failed RAM test
4 = Exceeded maximum RAM size
5 = Exceeded maximum ROM size
6 = Invalid DIMM speed
7 = DIMM reporting information incorrectly
8 = DIMM RAM parity error
9 = ROM needs to be mapped to an unsupported address
10 = DIMM address conflict
11 = PDC XROM out of bounds
12 = Unable to make a temporary mapping
•
Turn the printer off, and reseat or replace the specified DIMM.
•
Try the DIMM in another slot.
•
Replace the DIMM that caused the error.
55 Printer error alternates with Press GO to continue
(internal communications problem)
•
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Check the power at the site.
•
Replace the formatter PCA.
•
Replace the DC controller.
•
Replace the engine controller board.
EN
Chapter 1 – 37
56.x Printer error alternates with Cycle Power to
continue
x = Description
1 = Illegal input
2 = Illegal output
•
Press [Go]. The page containing the error reprints automatically.
•
Turn the printer off and on.
•
Check the printer’s configuration.
57.x Printer Error
x = Description
4 = Printer fan
7 = Duplex fan
•
Check the fan’s connector and verify that the fan is not blocked.
•
Replace the fan.
59.x Printer error
x = Description
0 = Motor error
1 = Motor startup error
2 = Motor rotation error
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Make sure that the fuser or toner cartridge is not hindering gear
movement in the drive train.
•
Verify that the cable in the main motor is seated properly.
•
If the error persists, replace the motor.
38 – Control panel messages
EN
62.x Printer error (printer memory)
x = Location of problem
1
0 = Internal memory
1 to 3 = DIMM slots 1, 2, or 3
•
Reseat or replace the specified DIMM.
64.x Printer error (scan buffer)
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
If the message persists, replace the formatter.
66 Error (external paper-handling device)
First x = Device number in chain
Second x = Device type (3 types):
1 = Input
2 = Output
3 = Stapler/stacker unit
yy = Device-specific error
•
Press [Go] to clear the message.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Check all of the cables.
•
Reseat the external paper-handling device.
EN
Chapter 1 – 39
66.11 Input device failure
•
Verify that the lifting plate lifts up freely by hand.
•
Verify that the paper size plates are installed correctly and are not
bent.
•
Check the pickup roller for proper installation.
•
Check the pickup assembly and replace if necessary.
•
Replace Tray 4.
66.xx.yy Input device failure alternates with Check
cables and cycle power
•
Check for an error in an external paper-handling device.
1st x = Device number in chain
2nd x = Device type (3 types):
1 = Input
2 = Output
3 = Stapler/stacker unit
yy = Device specific error
•
Press [Go] to clear the message.
•
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat the external paper-handling device.
68 NVRAM full check settings
•
Print a configuration page and check the printer settings to
determine which values have changed.
•
Hold down [Cancel Job] while turning the printer on.
40 – Control panel messages
EN
69.x Printer error
x = Description
1
0 = The duplex mechanism has failed.
1 = The duplex side adjust has failed.
•
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat the duplexer.
79.xxxx Error (printing)
The printer detected an error. The numbers (xxxx) indicate the specific
type of error.
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Try printing a job from a different software application. If the job
prints, go back to the first application and try printing a different file.
(If the message appears only with a certain software application or
print job, the customer should contact the software vendor for
assistance.)
If the message persists, try the following procedures:
•
Turn the printer off and then on.
•
Reseat or replace the interface cable and power cycle the printer.
•
Remove the DIMMs one at a time and power cycle the printer.
•
If possible, use the parallel interface.
•
With the EIO cards removed from the printer, perform a cold reset.
•
If the error persists, replace the formatter.
EN
Chapter 1 – 41
8x.yyyy critical error (EIO accessory)
•
The EIO accessory in slot x has encountered a critical error as
specified by yyyy.
x = Description
1 = EIO slot 1 -The printer detected an error with the EIO card.
2 = EIO slot 2 -The printer detected an error with the EIO card.
6 = EIO slot 1 -The EIO card detected an error.
The EIO card may be defective.
7 = EIO slot 2 -The EIO card detected an error.
The EIO card may be defective.
•
Turn the printer off, and then turn the printer on.
•
Reseat or replace the EIO board.
42 – Control panel messages
EN
2
Service mode
Overview
Service mode allows service personnel to verify and manipulate
internal printer settings and to access the diagnostic feature. Service
mode should be used only by authorized service personnel.
EN
Chapter 2 – 43
Service mode tasks
You can perform the following tasks while in Service mode.
•
Verify the page count.
•
Set the page count.
•
Set the maintenance count.
•
Verify and set the serial number.
•
Set the cold reset default. This sets the factory default paper size to
either Letter or A4.
•
Turn the diagnostic function on or off (for software developer’s use
only).
•
Clear the event log.
•
Use the extended Service mode.
•
Reset softswitches.
•
Perform a firmware download.
•
Recalibrate the document scanner.
•
Set the interval at which the PERFORM PRINTER MAINTENANCE
message appears on the control panel.
44 – Service mode
EN
Accessing Service mode
4000, 5000, and 8000 series only
Use the following procedure to access Service mode.
1 Turn the printer off.
2 Press [Select] and [Cancel Job] simultaneously while turning the
printer on. Hold the keys down until all lights are illuminated. (If the
control panel reads INITIALIZING, the keys were released too
soon.)
3 Press the right side of the [Menu] key, and then press [Select].
SERVICE MODE appears.
4 To exit Service mode, press [Go].
Accessing Service mode
3100 only
Use the following procedure to access Service mode.
1 Press [Backspace#**] to access the extended service menu.
2 Use the [<] and [>] keys to select the choices given in the extended
service menu (see the Extended service menu tree, page 52) and
press [Enter/Menu].
See the display for further instructions. Notes about some of the menu
choices are provided in the Extended service menu tree on page 52.
EN
Chapter 2 – 45
2
Setting the page count
4000, 5000, and 8000 series only
The page count is stored in the printer’s non-volatile memory. If it is
necessary to replace the formatter PCA, the page count should be set
to the current value to reflect the age of the print engine. Use the
following procedure to set the page count.
1 Before replacing the formatter PCA, print a Configuration Page to
verify the current page count and serial number of the printer, if
possible. Use the information on the Configuration Page to reset the
page count and serial number for the new formatter PCA.
Note
Press the right side of the [Menu] and [Item] buttons to increase the
value (+). Press the left side of the [Menu] and [Item] buttons to
decrease the value (-).
2 Press [Menu+] to display SERVICE MENU.
3 Press [Item+] to advance to the PAGES=XXXXXX display. XXXXXX
represents the page count currently stored in the non-volatile
memory. The underlined character denotes the position of the
cursor.
4 Press [Select] to advance the cursor one digit to the right. If the last
digit is currently selected, the cursor will move to the first digit when
you press the [Select] key.
5 Press [Value+/-] to scroll the digit until the correct value is displayed
for the underlined digit. (Pressing [Value+] when 9 is the value of the
currently selected digit changes the value of the digit to 0).
6 Press [Select] to enter numeric changes to the current digit and to
advance the cursor one digit to the right.
7 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
46 – Service mode
EN
Setting the maintenance count
4000 and 5000 series only
The maintenance count should be reset only after a maintenance kit
has been installed. Resetting the maintenance count resets the
maintenance counter so that the message PERFORM PRINTER
MAINTENANCE displays after another 150,000 (5000 series), 200,000
(4000 series), or 350,000 (8000 series) pages are printed.
2
Note
MAINTENANCE COUNT in the Service mode Menu sets the page count
interval for when the next printer service is due for the printer. The
maintenance count is set initially at the factory. Editing this number is
similar to editing the PAGES item.
1 Hold down the [Item-] and [Value-] keys.
2 Turn the printer on.
3 Wait until RESET MAINTENANCE COUNT displays and then release both
keys.
EN
Chapter 2 – 47
Setting the serial number
4000 and 5000 series only
Re-enter the serial number whenever you replace a formatter.
1 Press [Menu] to display the SERVICE MENU.
2 Press [Item+] three times. SERIAL NUMBER=XXXXXX displays. XXXXXX
represents the page count currently stored in the printer’s nonvolatile memory. The underlined character denotes the position of
the cursor.
3 Press [Select] to advance the cursor one digit to the right. If the last
digit is currently selected, the cursor wraps around the first digit
when you press the [Select] key.
4 Press [Value+/-] to scroll the digit until the correct value is displayed
for the underlined digit. (Pressing [Value+] when 9 is the value of the
currently selected digit will change the value of the digit to 0).
5 Press [Select] to enter numeric changes to the current digit and to
advance the cursor one digit to the right.
6 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
48 – Service mode
EN
Setting the page count, maintenance
count, and serial number
8000 series only
The page count, maintenance count, and printer serial numbers are
stored in non-volatile memory. PAGECOUNT is the total number of images
printed by the printer; MAINTCOUNT is the page count when the next
preventive maintenance should be performed (every 350,000 images);
and S.N. is the printer serial number (also located on the printer back
cover).
If it is necessary to replace the formatter PCA, these numbers should
be set to the current values to accurately reflect the age of the print
engine. The printer service manual provides the procedure for setting
these values.
Before removing the old formatter PCA, print a configuration page to
verify the current values, if possible.
Note
If it is not possible to print a configuration page, try to verify the values
before replacing the formatter PCA by following steps 1 through 5,
below.
After verifying the page count, maintenance count, and printer serial
number from the old formatter PCA, replace it with the new PCA.
1 Enter Service mode. See “Service mode” in the printer service
manual for instructions.
2 When SERVICE MODE is displayed, press [Menu] to access the
Service Menu.
3 Press [Items] to display Pages = Maintenance count =
Maintenance Interval = Serial Number =.
4 Enter the appropriate values for each item.
5 Press [Go] to exit Service mode.
EN
Chapter 2 – 49
2
Setting the default paper size used in
a cold reset
4000, 5000, and 8000 series only
Cold reset clears all data from the printer memory and sets all defaults
back to the factory setting.
The default paper size is stored in NVRAM. Whenever the printer is cold
reset, the default paper size is restored. The default paper size is set to
the factory setting. Possible values are COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER and
COLD RESET PAPER=A4. When replacing the formatter in countries that
use the A4 paper size (in place of the letter- size paper), set the cold
reset paper size to A4.
To customize the cold reset paper size:
1 Enter the Service mode. See “Service Mode in the printer service
manual for instructions.
2 Press [Menu] to display SERVICE MENU.
3 Press [Item+] until COLD RESET PAPER=LETTER* or A4 displays.
4 Press [Item+] to toggle between LETTER and A4.
5 Press [Select] to activate your choice.
6 Press [Go] to exit the Service Menu.
50 – Service mode
EN
Diagnostics
4000, 5000, and 8000 series only
The diagnostics menu item enables or disables the use of the firmware
diagnostic features. These features are accessible when
DIAGNOSTICS=ON displays. To access the diagnostic features, verify that
the printer is in the READY state and press [Select].
Note
2
This procedure is for software developers only.
Clear event log
Select this item to clear the internal event log.
Extended service menu
3100 only
Use the extended service menu to run various self-tests and to change
softswitch settings, such as the country code softswitch setting.
The following page shows the layout of the extended service menu
settings in a hierarchical diagram.
EN
Chapter 2 – 51
Extended service menu tree
Reports
Help
T.30 protocol trace
SRAM dump
Scanner plots
Log debug report
Task stacks
Translations
Printer fonts
Help prints a menu
report for the product.
Softswitches
Clear memory
Check documents
Edit SRAM
SRAM dump
Firmware version
See “To change the
country code
softswitch” on the
following pages.
Memory/softswitch
Control panel
Keypad test
LCD test
Control panel test
Sensor states
Speaker test
All LCD characters
Various tests under
Control panel can
assist in
troubleshooting the
product.
Scanner
Scanner plots
Scanner LED
ADF feed test
ADF motor test
Do TWAIN scan
White ref summary
Scanner LED is the
contact image sensor
light bar test.
ADF feed test runs the
document feeder pickup
rollers once.
ADF motor test runs
the document scanner
motor.
Self test
Modem/PTT
52 – Service mode
Burn-in prints a report
Burn-in
Individual diagnostics after running the
following tests:
System reset
Program test,
Configuration test #1,
Modem tone
Fax memory test #2,
Modem modulation
Modem test #2, Scanner
Modem type
test #1, Scanner LED.
EN
Self-test in extended service mode
3100 only
If you perform a self-test from the extended Service Menu, the printed
report will also show the firmware revision number and details.
Note
Print the internal reports before performing extended service mode
tests. The reports contain a record of all settings and can assist you
in restoring the product to its settings.
The table below lists the tests that are performed during a self-test and
the actions to take when tests fail.
Extended service mode self-test failures
Test
If the test fails, take these actions:
Configuration test #1 Replace the formatter.
Fax memory test #1
Program test #1
1 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord
Configuration test #2
from the power source, waiting 10 seconds,
and replugging the power cord.
Configuration test #3
2 If the test fails again, clear all memory (see
Configuration test #4
3 If the test fails again, replace the formatter.
the extended service menu tree, page 52).
Fax memory test #2
Fax memory test #3
Fax memory test #4
Fax memory test #5
Modem 1 test #1
Modem 1 test #2
Modem 1 test #3
EN
Chapter 2 – 53
2
Extended service mode self-test failures
Test
Modem 1 dial tone
detect
If the test fails, take these actions:
1 Make sure that the telephone cable is
plugged into the correct connector on the
product and that the telephone line is
operational (use a telephone to test the line).
2 If the test fails again, check the configuration
settings in the control panel.
3 If the test fails again, replace the LIU.
Scanner test #1
This test fails under normal conditions if the
document scanner is busy. If the document scanner
is not busy:
1 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord
from the power source, waiting 10 seconds,
and replugging in the power cord.
2 If the test fails again, clear all memory (see
the extended service menu tree).
3 If the test fails again, replace the formatter.
54 – Service mode
EN
Other tests in extended service mode
3100 only
The following charts shows tests that can be performed in extended
service mode and provides a brief explanation of each test:
Extended service mode tests
Test
Explanation
Keypad test
Tests that all keys are functioning (by pressing the
keys in sequence)
LCD test
Tests the control panel display
Control panel test
Tests the control panel lights
Sensor states
Shows current detector activation levels. Detector 1
and detector 2 are paper-size detectors. The control
panel display shows the percentage of time each
detector is activated
All LCD characters
Scrolls through the full list of control panel display
characters
Scanner plots
Tests and recalibrates the document scanner
Scanner LED
After selecting this menu item, lift the document
release door and verify that all of the LEDs in the
contact image sensor are lit.
ADF feed test
Runs the document scanner pickup rollers once
ADF motor test
Runs the document scanner motor
Individual
diagnostics
Run individual tests from the self-test sequence (see
the extended service mode self-test failures table).
Modem tone
Generates tones with various frequencies from
300 Hz to 2425 Hz
Modem modulation
Generates various fax identification signals
EN
Chapter 2 – 55
2
Reports in extended service mode
3100 only
The following chart shows reports that can be printed from extended
service mode and provides a brief explanation of each report.
Extended service mode reports
Report
Explanation
T.30 protocol trace
Prints a report of the G3 protocol transmissions and
receptions
SRAM dump
Prints SRAM address values in an address range
you select
Scanner plots
Prints the calibration page
Log debug report
Prints detailed fax and memory address information.
Fax information includes job number, start time used,
fax ID, transmission type, pages, communication
mode, and status.
Task stacks
Prints address locations of various tasks
Translations
Prints text strings used in the display, beginning with
the number you select. These text strings are printed
in the language currently in use by the product.
Compare the numbers in this report to the numbers
in an English report to translate non-English
messages on the display.
Printer fonts
Prints all characters of fonts available in memory
Firmware version
(under “memory/
softswitch”)
Shows firmware revision information on the control
panel display
White reference
summary (under
“scanner”)
Displays average, minimum, and maximum white
reference values
56 – Service mode
EN
Clear memory in extended service mode
3100 only
CAUTION
Clearing memory clears all parameters, which can render the product
illegal or inoperable. Print the internal reports before clearing memory
in extended service mode. The reports contain a record of all settings
and can assist you in restoring the product to its settings.
To perform a system reset, use extended service mode to choose
Memory/softswitch, and then choose Clear memory. Use the [<]
and [>] keys to select the memory you want to clear:
•
Documents (and log) deletes all documents stored in memory and
all log information.
•
Phonebook deletes all numbers stored in the phonebook.
•
Configuration resets all menu settings printed in the configuration
report to their defaults.
•
Softswitches resets all softswitches to their defaults.
•
Counters resets all page counts except the total number of pages
printed. These page counts are printed at the end of the
configuration report.
•
Everything deletes and resets all of the above. Information retained
includes white reference curve, total page count, and serial number.
EN
Chapter 2 – 57
2
Softswitches
3100 only
Note
Reset the country code softswitch whenever the formatter board is
replaced or otherwise removed from the product, or when
softswitches are reset to defaults.
Extended service mode allows you to change softswitches on the 3100
product. A softswitch is a set of eight bits. See the software service
manual for a complete list of softswitches.
To change the country code softswitch
1 Press [Backspace], [#], [*], and [*], in sequence, to access the
extended service menu.
2 Press [<]or [>] until Memory/Softswitches appears below Service
on the control panel.
3 Press [Enter/Menu].
4 If Softswitches does not appear below Memory/Softswitches on
the control panel, press [<] or [>] until it appears.
5 Press [Enter/Menu].
6 Use the keypad to enter 101 (the “country code” softswitch).
7 Press [Enter/Menu].
8 Use the keypad to enter the sequence that corresponds to the
country in which the product is used. (See the list on the following
page.)
58 – Service mode
EN
Country code softswitch sequences
Australia
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Ireland
Netherlands
Norway
Sweden
United Kingdom
United States
Canada
00001011 (0B hex)
00001100 (0C hex)
00001000 (08 hex)
00000111 (07 hex)
00000110 (06 hex)
00000010 (02 hex)
00001101 (0D hex)
00000101 (05 hex)
00000100 (04 hex)
00000001 (01 hex)
00000000 (00 hex)
00101001 (29 hex)
2
9 Press [Enter/Menu] to complete the softswitch change.
10 Press [Stop/Clear].
The product will exit extended service mode within a few minutes.
Firmware download
3100 only
Newer versions of the firmware for the HP LaserJet 3100 product can
be downloaded to the product.
To perform a firmware download
1 Restart the computer in MS-DOS® mode (do not use an MS-DOS
window).
2 Press down and hold [Stop/Clear] while performing step 3.
3 Cycle power by unplugging the power cord from the power source,
and then replugging in the power cord.
4 Type the following, substituting the current version of the firmware
for XXX:
Copy /b leonXXX.rom lpt1:
EN
Chapter 2 – 59
Recalibrating the document scanner
3100 only
Recalibrate the document scanner if you notice that copies, items
scanned to the computer, or faxes you send have black or white lines
running through them.
To recalibrate the document scanner
1 Clean the HP LaserJet 3100 product before recalibrating it. (See
“Cleaning the HP LaserJet 3100 product” in the product service
manual.)
2 On the control panel, press [Enter/Menu].
3 Press [<] once to display Service and press [Enter/Menu].
4 Use the [<] and [>] keys to select Scan Correction and press
[Enter/Menu].
5 Insert a blank, bright white piece of letter-sized paper into the
document feeder tray.
The HP LaserJet 3100 product pulls the piece of paper through and
then prints a recalibration test page. Discard this page. The
recalibration procedure is complete.
60 – Service mode
EN
3
Power supply
Overview
This chapter details the distribution of AC and DC power.
EN
Chapter 3 – 61
Distribution of AC and DC power for the
LaserJet 4000 series
AC power is supplied to the low-voltage power supply circuit in the
engine controller board when the power switch (SW 101) is turned on.
The low-voltage power supply circuit supplies +24 V DC and +3.3 V DC
to the printer. DC power drives the following items:
+24 VDC
•
main motor
•
scanner motor
•
fan
•
high-voltage power supply
+3.3 VDC
•
sensors
•
ICs on the engine controller board
•
EIO accessories
62 – Power supply
EN
3
Low-voltage power supply circuit (4000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 63
Distribution of AC and DC power for the
LaserJet 5000 series
The AC line voltage for the LaserJet 5000 printer is applied through the
main switch (SW 101) and supplied to the low-voltage power supply
circuit through the fuse (FU1). The low-voltage power supply divides the
AC voltage to +24 VDC, +5 VDC and +3.4 VDC and supplies them to
the DC controller PCA. This circuit generates a zero-cross signal
(ZEROX) and supplies it to the DC controller PCA.
DC power is supplied as follows:
+3.4 VDC
•
ICs on the DC controller PCA and the BD PCA
+5 VDC
•
laser driver PCA
•
sensors
+24 VDC
•
high-voltage power supply PCA to drive the main motor
•
exhaust fan
•
scanner motor
•
clutches
•
solenoids
64 – Power supply
EN
3
Low-voltage power supply circuit (5000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 65
Distribution of AC and DC power for the
HP LaserJet 3100
The AC, DC, and high-voltage power supply circuits are all contained
within the ECU.
The AC power circuitry supplies AC voltage whenever the power cord is
connected to the AC power source. AC voltage is distributed to the DC
power supply circuitry and to the AC driver circuitry. The AC driver
circuitry controls AC voltage to the heating element in the fusing
assembly.
The DC power distribution circuitry distributes +5 V DC and +12 V DC
as follows:
+5 V DC
•
formatter
•
photosensors
•
DC controller circuitry
•
laser/beam detect circuitry
+12 V DC
•
motor
•
scanner motor
•
solenoid
+12VA DC
•
high-voltage power supply
66 – Power supply
EN
Distribution of AC and DC power for the HP
LaserJet 8000 series
The AC and DC power supply circuits are contained in the low-voltage
power supply (LVPS). The high voltages required for image formation
are generated by the high-voltage power supply (HVPS). The lowvoltage power supply and distribution system are illustrated below.
3
Low-voltage power supply circuit (8000 series)
EN
Chapter 3 – 67
Protection Systems
Problems on the load side, such as short-circuits, can cause an
excessive flow of current from the DC power supplies or can generate
abnormal voltage. When this happens, the excess-current and excessvoltage protection systems automatically shut off output voltage to
protect the power supplies.
If the protection systems are activated and the power supply circuit
does not output DC voltage, turn the printer off, correct the problem in
the faulty load, and then turn the printer on again.
68 – Power supply
EN
4
Input/Output (I/O)
Overview
This chapter provides information on cabling and the printer interface.
EN
Chapter 4 – 69
Bidirectional parallel interface
The formatter PCA receives incoming data through its bidirectional
interface (IEEE 1284).
The bidirectional parallel interface (IEEE-1284 compliant) is compatible
with Centronics parallel interfaces. To take advantage of its enhanced
capabilities, such as bidirectional communication, the following must be
provided:
•
Software application support for these features.
•
An IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cable with the correct pin
configuration (see Table 4-1).
4000, 5000, and 8000 only
The user may configure the HIGH SPEED item in the Control Panel menu.
The default setting, YES, allows the I/O to run at the higher speeds
supported by most newer computers. When set to NO, the parallel
interface runs at the slower mode that is compatible for older
computers. The user may also configure the ADVANCED FUNCTIONS item.
The default setting, ON, allows for two-way parallel communications. The
OFF mode disables this advanced functionality.
70 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
Pin configurations
Signal Name
Printer Pin #
nSTROBE
DATA 1
1
2
Parallel Port
Pin #
1
2
DATA 2
3
3
DATA 3
4
4
DATA 4
DATA 5
5
6
5
6
DATA 6
DATA 7
7
8
7
8
DATA 8
nACKNLG
9
10
9
10
BUSY
CALL (PE)
11
12
11
12
SELECT
nAUTOFd
13
14
13
14
On VDC (GND)
19 THRU 30
18 THRU 25
nFAULT
32
15
nSelIn
36
17
EN
4
Chapter 4 – 71
IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cables
HP helped develop the IEEE-1284 standard and is one of the first
companies to introduce products that are compliant with it. HP offers
four IEEE-1284 compliant parallel cables. Each is described below.
Part number
Length
Connector type
C2950A
2 meters
(7 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2951A
3 meters
(10 feet)
Host A to printer B (large) connector
C2945A
2 meters
(7 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2946A
3 meters
(10 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
C2947A
10 meters
(33 feet)
Host A to printer C (small) connector
Maximum I/O Cable Lengths
Serial RS-232C
RS-422A
Parallel (non-IEEE-1284)
15 meters (50 feet)
610 meters (2000 feet)
Parallel (IEEE-1284) with “B”
type connector
Parallel (IEEE-1284) with “C”
type connector
3 meters (10 feet)
72 – Input/Output (I/O)
3 meters (10 feet)
10 meters (33 feet)
EN
Attaching the printer cables
The printer’s parallel port can have one or both of the following
connectors:
B-type parallel (large)
C-type parallel (small)
B-type
C-type
Printer interface connections
RS-232-C/RS-422-A serial interface
For this information, see the wiring diagram for common serial
input/output cables in the printer service manual.
EN
Chapter 4 – 73
4
Configuring the computer interface
To configure the computer interface, see the HP LaserJet Family Quick
Reference Service Guide, Volume I.
74 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
LocalTalk I/O*
The printer implements AppleTalk networking protocol through
LocalTalk hardware. The LocalTalk network cable (HP part
number 92215N) is connected through the EIO card.
Expanded I/O*
The optional expanded I/O card can be installed in the slots provided on
the Formatter PCA. The expanded I/O card provides automatic
I/O switching between multiple computers or networks connected to
the printer. The network version printers include the HP JetDirect
Multi-protocol Network Card with Ethernet/10Base-T and 10Base-2,
and LocalTalk.
Flash*
Flash is provided in optional 2 and 4 megabyte (MB) flash memory
DIMMs for storage of forms, fonts, and signatures.
4
Disk*
The optional EIO-based hard disk is used for creating multiple original
prints (mopies) and for storing forms, fonts, and signatures.
*This feature does not apply to the HP LaserJet 3100.
EN
Chapter 4 – 75
76 – Input/Output (I/O)
EN
5
Media specifications
Overview
Use media that meet the specifications listed on the following pages. By
doing so, you will minimize the incidents of paper jams, prevent
premature wear to the printer, and reduce repair costs. Hewlett-Packard
recommends testing print media before buying it in large quantities.
Note
For complete paper specifications for all HP LaserJet printers, see the
HP LaserJet Family Paper Specification Guide.
EN
Chapter 5 – 77
Paper sizes
Metric System
Size
Metric Dimensions
U.S. Dimensions
A0
841 x 1189 mm
33.1 x 46.8 in
A3
297 x 420 mm
11.7 x 16.5 in
A4
210 x 297 mm
8.3 x 11.7 in
A5
148 x 210 mm
5.8 x 8.3. in
B4 (ISO)
250 x 353 mm
9.8 x 13.9 in
B5 (ISO)
176 x 250 mm
6.9 x 9.8 in
Imperial (U.S.) System
Size
U.S. Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Ledger
11 x 17 in
279 x 432 mm
Legal
8.5 x 14 in
216 x 356 mm
Letter
8.5 x 11 in
216 x 279 mm
Executive
7.3 x 10.5 in
191 x 267 mm
Custom
5.8 x 8.2 in to
8.5 x 14 in
149 x 210 mm to
216 x 356 mm
JIS B4**
10.1 x 14.3 in
257 x 364 mm
JIS B5**
7.2 x 10 in
182 x 257 mm
J Postcard*
3.9 x 5.8 in
100 x 148 mm
J Double Postcard*
5.8 x 7.9 in
148 x 200 mm
* J - Japanese
** JIS Japanese Industry Standard
78 – Media specifications
EN
Paper specifications
Category
Specifications
Acid content
5.5 pH to 8.0 pH
Basis weight:
4000 series Tray 1
4000/4000 N Tray 2
4000 T/4000 TN Tray 2
and Tray 3
4000 series optional
500-sheet tray
4000 series Duplexer
5000 series:
Tray 1
Tray 2 or optional
250-sheet Tray
Optional 500-sheet Tray
Duplexer
3100:
Paper input bin
Single-sheet input slot
Document feeder tray
8000 series:
Standard output bin
Left output bin
Optional 2000-sheet
input tray
Duplexer
60 to 199 g/m2 (16 to 53 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) (up to 42 lbs using
the front output slot)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs) (up to 42 lbs using
the front output slot)
44 to 105 g/m2 (12 to 28 lbs) (up to 67 lbs using
the special media lever)
60 to 105 g/m2 (16 to 28 lbs)
Optional envelope feeder:
4000 series
8000 series
75 to 105 g/m2 (20 to 28 lbs)
60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lbs)
Caliper
3.0 to 7.0 mils (0.094-0.18 mm)
5
Curl in ream
Flat within 5 mm (0.2 in)
Condition of cut edge
Cut with sharp blades with no visible fray
Fusing compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release
hazardous emissions when heated to 205°C
(400°F) for 0.1 second
Grain
Long grain
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Smoothness
100-250 Sheffield
EN
Chapter 5 – 79
Paper weight equivalences
Use this table to determine approximate equivalent points in weight
specifications other than U.S. bond weight. For example, to determine
the equivalent of 20 lb U.S. bond weight paper in U.S. cover weight,
locate the bond weight (in row 3, fourth column) and scan across the
row to the cover weight (in the sixth column). The equivalent is 28 lb.
Note
Shaded areas indicate a standard weight for that grade.
Metric wt (g/m2) U.S. weights (lb) or thickness (mm)
Europe
Japan
Postcard* Bond
thickness Wt
Text
book
Wt
Cover Bristol Index
Wt
Wt
Wt
Tag
Wt
37
60
60
16
41
22
27
33
64
64
17
43
24
29
35
39
75
75
20
50
28
34
42
46
80
80
21
54
30
36
44
49
80
81
22
56
31
38
46
51
90
90
24
60
33
41
50
55
100
100
27
68
37
45
55
61
105
105
28
70
39
49
58
65
120
120
32
80
44
55
67
74
120
128
34
86
47
58
71
79
135
135
36
90
50
62
75
83
148
148
0.18
39
100
55
67
82
91
157
157
0.19
42
107
58
72
87
97
163
163
0.20
43
110
60
74
90
100
176
176
0.23
199
199
47
119
65
80
97
108
53
134
74
90
110
122
* U.S. postcard measurements are approximate. Use for reference only.
80 – Media specifications
EN
Troubleshooting paper problems
Paper problems can be difficult to detect. The following series of steps
will help isolate paper-induced problems versus printer problems:
•
Isolate a paper path.
•
Isolate a brand of paper.
•
Isolate a type of paper.
•
Evaluate paper-use practices.
•
Evaluate environmental conditions.
Here are some paper usage tips:
•
Turn the paper over and print on the other side. Doing so often
corrects excess paper curl.
•
Rotate the paper 180° (end-for-end) to feed a different leading edge.
This can help correct multi-sheet feeding problems.
Papers to avoid
•
NCR self-carbon (or “carbonless” paper)
•
paper that has been preprinted (such as letterhead) with ink that will
not withstand fuser heat (205° C [400° F] for 0.1 second)
•
plastic-fiber paper
•
embossed paper
•
paper with cutouts or perforations
•
chemically treated paper
•
coated paper
•
synthetic paper
•
multi-part forms
•
odd-sized paper
5
If your printer is having trouble with paper jams, multi-feeds, or
misfeeds, use HP-brand paper: HP 20 lb Multi-Purpose Paper, part
number 9300-2092; HP 24 lb LaserJet Paper, part number
9300-2091.
EN
Chapter 5 – 81
General tips
Paper curl
Paper curl results from both the heating process used to bond the print
image (toner) to the paper and from the path that the paper must
negotiate through the printer.
Take the following actions to help reduce paper curl:
1 Turn the paper over in the input tray. Some paper packages (reams)
have an arrow indicating the preferred printing side. Experiment to
determine which orientation yields the least curl.
2 Try a different output paper path (if available for your printer). Using
the “face-up” output path may yield more acceptable results than the
standard “face-down” output bin.
3 Protect the paper from adverse environmental conditions prior to
use. Paper designed for laser printing has an initial moisture content
of 4-6 percent which is maintained as long as it is stored properly.
Once the paper has been removed from its packaging it will dry out
or absorb additional moisture, depending on the environment.
Excess moisture in the paper will increase the amount of curl.
4 Try a different type or brand of paper. Not all paper is designed for
laser printing.
Much of the paper curl that is induced by the laser printer fusing
process will tend to relax within the first 24 hours following printing.
However, the curl on the leading edge of the page may remain longer
because the leading edge tends to remain in contact with the fusing
roller for longer periods.
82 – Media specifications
EN
Envelope specifications
Category
Specifications
Basis weight
Should not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 lb)
Caliper
3.3 to 5.5 mils (0.084 to 0.14 mm) single layer
thickness
Curl
Less than 6 mm (0.25 in) curl across entire
surface
Finishing
Accurate, sharply creased folds with no more
than two thicknesses of paper at the leading
edge
Fusing
compatibility
Must not scorch, melt, offset, or release
hazardous emissions when heated to 205° C
(400° F) for 0.1 second
Moisture content
4% to 6% by weight
Paper
Must meet all the normal paper specifications
Smoothness
100 to 250 Sheffield
Envelope sizes
Imperial (U.S.) system
Size
U.S. Dimensions
Metric Dimensions
Tray 1:
Minimum
Maximum
3 x 5 in
8.5 x 14 in
76 x 127 mm
216 x 356 mm
Optional envelope
feeder:
Minimum
3.5 x 6.3 in
Maximum
7 x 10 in
90 x 160 mm
178 x 254 mm
EN
Chapter 5 – 83
5
Envelopes to avoid
Do not use the following envelopes:
•
with clasps, snaps, or tie strings
•
with transparent windows, holes, perforations, or cutouts
•
having an open flap with adhesive exposed
•
having paper, inks, adhesives, or materials that discolor, melt, offset,
or release hazardous emissions when exposed to 205° C (400° F)
•
having extremely smooth, shiny, rough, textured, or deeply
embossed surfaces
•
damaged, wrinkled, or irregularly shaped
•
constructed with encapsulating adhesives that do not require
moistening, but rely instead on pressure to seal them
Preventing printer malfunctions caused by
envelopes
When you are printing on envelopes, use these preventive measures to
avoid printer malfunctions.
•
Carefully feed the envelopes into the printer.
•
Be aware of the envelope’s construction.
84 – Media specifications
EN
Envelope feeding
Follow these preventive measures when feeding envelopes:
•
Envelopes can be manually fed through the printer or they can be
fed automatically through an envelope tray or feeder.
•
Closely inspect the leading edge of the envelopes before feeding
them into the printer. Ensure that the leading edge is flat. Watch for
envelope curl. Flatten the leading edge of the envelope before
printing.
•
Be patient; in manual feed mode the printer displays a message
when it is ready to accept the next envelope. Wait for this message
to appear before inserting the next envelope.
•
Do not allow a large quantity of envelopes to accumulate in the
output bin.
•
On most printers, use the rear (or front) output bin (if available) when
printing envelopes. Do not use the top (face-down) output bin.
Envelope construction
•
The corner folds need to be well-creased, with no more than two
thicknesses of paper.
•
The envelopes must lay flat.
•
The paper grain should be diagonal to the direction of the feed.
•
Adhesives must meet HP specifications for fusing compatibility.
•
Basis weight must not exceed 105 g/m2 (28 pounds).
•
Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, tie strings, or windows.
•
Do not use envelopes made of synthetic materials.
EN
Chapter 5 – 85
5
Label specifications
Category
Specifications
Adhesive
Must not be on any external surfaces of the label
before, during, or after printing. Label
construction and die-cutting must not allow
labels to peel off during transport, printing, or
fusing.
Caliper
Must not exceed 0.18 mm (0.007 i